1s4t2en - 30 9 16 - TPD32 Ev

Industrial Application
DC drives
TPD32-EV
.... Instruction manual
Thank you for choosing this Gefran product.

We will be glad to receive any possible information which could help us improve this manual. The email address is the following: [email protected].
Before using the product, read the safety instruction section carefully.
Keep the manual in a safe place and available to engineering and installation personnel during the
product functioning period.
The manufacturer has the right to modify products, data and dimensions without notice.
The data can only be used for the product description and they can not be understood as legally stated
properties.
All rights reserved
This manual is updated according the software version:
TPD32-EV Standard: V. 11.00 (*)
TPD32-EV-CU: V. 11.00 (*)
TPD32-EV FC: V. 11.24A / 11.25A
(*)

Starting from firmware version V. 10.08 it is possible the use of the SOFTSCOPE Tool (Gefran Digital Scope).
Refer to 1S9SFTEN Softscope manual for detailed informations.
Variation of the number replacing X have no influence on the functionality of the device.
The identification number of the software version can be read on the converter nameplate or on the label on
the EPROM memories mounted on the regulation card.
Table of Contents
SAFETY SYMBOL LEGEND................................................................................................................................................................. 14
BLOCK DIAGRAM LEGEND................................................................................................................................................................ 14
1 - SAFETY PRECAUTIONS - PRECAUTIONS DE SECURIT........................................... 15

1.1 INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE UL MARK (UL REQUIREMENTS), ELECTRICAL
STANDARDS IN THE USA AND CANADA................................................................................................... 19
2 - DESCRIPTION, COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION ANDSPECIFICATIONS.................. 20

2.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................................................... 20
Figure 2.1: Base diagram of a converter.............................................................................................................................................................. 20
Table 2.1.1: Converter size.................................................................................................................................................................................. 22
Functions and features (Overview) ...................................................................................................................................................... 23
2.2 UPON DELIVERY INSPECTION PROCEDURES.................................................................................. 24

Storage, Transport................................................................................................................................................................................ 24
2.2.1 Device setting..................................................................................................................................................................24
2.3 SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................................................... 26
2.3.1 Standards........................................................................................................................................................................26
2.3.2 AC Input...........................................................................................................................................................................26
Table 2.3.2.1: AC input voltages........................................................................................................................................................................... 26
Table 2.3.2.2: AC input curents ........................................................................................................................................................................... 28
2.3.3 Output . ...........................................................................................................................................................29

Output current....................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
Table 2.3.3.1: TPD32-EV Output currents............................................................................................................................................................. 29

Table 2.3.3.2: TPD32-EV-FC Output currents........................................................................................................................................................ 30
Table 2.3.3.3: TPD32-EV-CU Output currents....................................................................................................................................................... 30
Table 2.3.3.4-A: Field current resistors (20A ...1050A / 17A ... 850A, types A/B/C)............................................................................................ 31
Table 2.3.3.4-B: Field current resistors (>1050A ... 2000A / 850A ... 1500A, type D)........................................................................................ 31
Table 2.3.3.4-C: Field current resistors (>2000...2400A / 1500...1850A, type D)............................................................................................... 32
Table 2.3.3.4-D: Field current resistors (>1200...2000A / 1000...1500A, type E)............................................................................................... 32
Table 2.3.3.4-E: Field current resistors (>2000A / 1500A, type E)...................................................................................................................... 32
Table 2.3.3.4-F: Field current resistors Sizes TPD32-EV-CU-..................................................................................................................................... 32
Output voltage....................................................................................................................................................................................... 33
Table 2.3.3.5: Armature circuit output voltages................................................................................................................................................... 33
Field circuit............................................................................................................................................................................................ 33
Table 2.3.3.6: Field circuit output voltages.......................................................................................................................................................... 33
Field circuit TPD32-EV-FC version........................................................................................................................................................ 33
Table 2.3.3.7: Field circuit output voltages TPD32-EV-FC.................................................................................................................................... 33
2.3.4 Control section................................................................................................................................................................34

2.3.5 Accuracy..........................................................................................................................................................................35
2.4 DIMENSION AND WEIGHTS.................................................................................................................. 36

Figure 2.4.1: Type A1 dimensions....................................................................................................................................................................... 36
Figure 2.4.4: Type B1 dimensions........................................................................................................................................................................ 39
Figure 2.4.5: Type B2 dimensions........................................................................................................................................................................ 40
Figure 2.4.6: Type C dimensions.......................................................................................................................................................................... 41
Figure 2.4.7-A: Type D dimensions....................................................................................................................................................................... 42
Figure 2.4.7-B: Centre-to-centre distance for mounting, type D.......................................................................................................................... 43
Figure 2.4.8: TPD32-EV-CU-... dimensions, External bridge control unit............................................................................................................... 44
Figure 2.4.9: TPD32-EV-500/600-1200-2B-E dimensions.................................................................................................................................... 45
Figure 2.4.10: TPD32-EV-500/600-1500...2000-2B-E and TPD32-EV-690/810-1010...1400-2B-E dimensions..................................................... 46
Figure 2.4.12: TPD32-EV-500/600-2700-2B-E dimensions.................................................................................................................................. 48
Figure 2.4.13: TPD32-EV-500/600-2900-2B-E and TPD32-EV-690/810-2400...2700-2B-E dimensions................................................................ 49
Figure 2.4.14: TPD32-EV-500/600-3300-2B-E and TPD32-EV-690/810-3300-2B-E dimensions........................................................................... 50
Figure 2.4.15: TPD32-EV-500/520-1500...2000-4B-E and TPD32-EV-690/720-1010...1400-4B-E dimensions..................................................... 51
Figure 2.4.16: TPD32-EV-500/520-2400-4B-E and TPD32-EV-690/720-1700...2000-4B-E dimensions................................................................ 52
Instruction manual
Figure 2.4.17: TPD32-EV-500/520-2700-4B-E dimensions.................................................................................................................................. 53

Figure 2.4.18: TPD32-EV-500/520-3300-4B-E and TPD32-EV-690/720-3300-4B-E dimensions........................................................................... 54
Figure 2.4.19: TPD32-EV-690/720-2400...2700-4B-E dimensions....................................................................................................................... 55
2.5 WATT LOSS............................................................................................................................................ 56

Table 2.5.1: Dissipated power TPD32-EV and TPD32-EV-FC series...................................................................................................................... 56
Table 2.5.2: Dissipated power TPD32-EV-CU series............................................................................................................................................. 57
2.6 MOTORS, ENCODER, TACHOMETER.................................................................................................. 58

2.6.1 Motors.............................................................................................................................................................................58
2.6.2 Encoder / Tachometer.....................................................................................................................................................59
3 - INSTALLATION GUIDELINES...................................................................................... 60
3.1 PERMISSIBLE AMBIENT CONDITION.................................................................................................. 60
3.2 DISPOSAL OF THE DEVICE.................................................................................................................. 61
3.3 MOUNTING THE DEVICE...................................................................................................................... 61
Figure 3.3.1: max Angle of Inclination.................................................................................................................................................................. 61
Figure 3.3.2: Mounting Clearance........................................................................................................................................................................ 62
4. WIRING PROCEDURE.................................................................................................. 63
4.1 REMOVING THE FRONT COVER......................................................................................................... 63
Figure 4.1.1: Removing the Front Panel............................................................................................................................................................... 63
Terminal Assignments/Cable Sections.................................................................................................................................................. 63
4.2 WIRING THE DRIVE............................................................................................................................... 64

4.3 POWER SECTION.................................................................................................................................. 64
Table 4.3.1: Terminals description........................................................................................................................................................................ 64
Table 4.3.2: Cable size for power terminals U, V, W, C, D, PE............................................................................................................................... 64
Table 4.3.3: Cable section for UL approval.......................................................................................................................................................... 65
Table 4.3.4: Wire adapter Kit and lugs suggested for UL approval....................................................................................................................... 66
Table 4.3.5: Wire adapter Kit and lugs suggested for UL approval....................................................................................................................... 67
Table 4.3.6: Cable size for power field terminals U1, V1, C1, D1......................................................................................................................... 68
Table 4.3.7: Cable size for fans, signals, thermistors and regulation supply......................................................................................................... 68
4.4 REGULATION SECTION ....................................................................................................................... 69

4.4.1 R-TPD32-EV Regulation Card........................................................................................................................................69
Figure 4.4.1: R-TPD32-EV regulation card........................................................................................................................................................... 69
Table 4.4.1: LEDs on the R-TPD32-EV card.......................................................................................................................................................... 69
Table 4.4.2-A: Dip-switch S15 adaptation of the regulation card to the device type............................................................................................ 70
Table 4.4.2-B: Dip-switch S15 Adjustment of the TPD32-EV-CU-... series mains voltage regulation card............................................................. 71
Table 4.4.3: Dip-switch S4 adaptation of the tachometer feedback to the input voltage .................................................................................... 72
Table 4.4.4: Jumpers on the Regulator card......................................................................................................................................................... 72
Table 4.4.5: Test points on Regulator card............................................................................................................................................................ 72
Figure 4.4.2: Disposition of terminals from 1 to 42............................................................................................................................................... 72
Table 4.4.6 - A: Terminal Assignment (terminals from 1 to 20)............................................................................................................................. 73
Table 4.4.6 - B: Terminal Assignment (terminals from 21 to 42).......................................................................................................................... 73
Table 4.4.7: Cable size for fans, signals, and thermistors.................................................................................................................................... 74
Table 4.4.8: Terminal strip for the connection of an analog tachometer............................................................................................................... 75
Table 4.4.9: Assignment of an XE1 connector for a sinusoidal encoder............................................................................................................... 75
Table 4.4.10: Assignment of the XE2 connector for a digital encoder.................................................................................................................. 75
4.5 RS485 SERIAL INTERFACE.................................................................................................................. 76

4.5.1 Description......................................................................................................................................................................76
Figure 4.5.1.1: RS485 serial interface.................................................................................................................................................................. 76
4.5.2 RS485 serial interface connector description.................................................................................................................77

Table 4.5.2.1: Description of the XS connector for the RS485 serial interface..................................................................................................... 77
4.6 INPUT/OUTPUT EXPANSION CARD TBO............................................................................................. 77

4.6.1 Assignment of the plug-in terminal strip (terminals 1...15) forOptionCard TBO......................................................................... 78
Table 4.6.1.1: Terminal strip connections............................................................................................................................................................. 78
Table 4.6.1.2: Cable size for terminals of the option card TBO............................................................................................................................. 78
TPD32-EV
4.6.2 Fitting the option card......................................................................................................................................................79

Figure 4.6.2.1: Installing the option card.............................................................................................................................................................. 79
4.7 DIGITAL ENCODER INTERFACE DEII................................................................................................... 80

4.7.1 Description......................................................................................................................................................................80
Figure 4.7.1.1: DEII card..................................................................................................................................................................................... 80
4.7.2 DEII Terminal Assignment...............................................................................................................................................81

Table 4.7.2.1: Terminal assignment (Terminals 0Venc and +Venc)...................................................................................................................... 81
Table 4.7.2.2: Permissible cable cross section on the terminals of option card DEII............................................................................................. 81
Table 4.7.2.3: XS1 9-pole connector.................................................................................................................................................................... 81
4.8 STANDARD CONNECTION DIAGRAMS............................................................................................... 82

Figure 4.8.1: Control sequencing.......................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Figure 4.8.2: Typical connections......................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Figure 4.8.3: TPD32 EV-FC-... typical connection diagram................................................................................................................................... 83
Figure 4.8.4: TPD32 EV-CU-... typical connection diagram.................................................................................................................................. 83
Figure 4.8.5: Encoder and Tachometer Connections............................................................................................................................................ 84
Figure 4.8.6: Programmable Inputs/outputs with relay and contacts................................................................................................................... 84
Figure 4.8.7: Programmable Inputs/outputs with PLC........................................................................................................................................... 85
Figure 4.8.8: DEII connection............................................................................................................................................................................... 85
4.9 CIRCUIT PROTECTION......................................................................................................................... 86

4.9.1 Fuses...............................................................................................................................................................................86
Figure 4.9.1.1: Position of the super fast fuses.................................................................................................................................................... 86
Table 4.9.1.1: Fa, External input side fuses........................................................................................................................................................... 87
Table 4.9.1.2: Fb, External fuses for the armature circuit...................................................................................................................................... 87
Table 4.9.1.3: Fc, Internal input side fuses........................................................................................................................................................... 88
Table 4.9.1.4: Fd, Internal fuses for the field circuit.............................................................................................................................................. 90
Table 4.9.1.5: FU1, FV1, External field circuit fuses for TPD32-EV-CU.................................................................................................................. 91
Table 4.9.1.5: Other internal fuses....................................................................................................................................................................... 91
4.9.2 Fuses selection when the Overload function is activated................................................................................................92

Table 4.9.2.1: Fa, Overload fuses......................................................................................................................................................................... 92
4.9.3 AC input contactors.........................................................................................................................................................93

4.9.4 Control power protection.................................................................................................................................................93
Table 4.9.5: Control power protection.................................................................................................................................................................. 93
4.10 REACTORS / FILTERS......................................................................................................................... 94

4.10.1 AC input choke..............................................................................................................................................................94
Table 4.10.1: Mains chokes for 400 Vac input supply.......................................................................................................................................... 94
Table 4.10.5 Internal code for mains chokes........................................................................................................................................................ 98
4.10.2 Interference suppression filters.....................................................................................................................................99

Table 4.10.2: EMI filters...................................................................................................................................................................................... 99
4.10.3 Mains harmonic currents generated by converters.....................................................................................................104
4.11 ENGINEERING NOTES...................................................................................................................... 104

Figure 4.11.1: Potentials of the regulator section.............................................................................................................................................. 104
Potentials of the regulator section....................................................................................................................................................... 104

External devices.................................................................................................................................................................................. 105
Connection cables............................................................................................................................................................................... 105
5 - CONVERTER OPERATION......................................................................................... 106

5.1 KEYPAD................................................................................................................................................ 106
5.1.1 LEDs.............................................................................................................................................................................107
Table 5.1.1.1: Diagnostic LEDs........................................................................................................................................................................... 107
5.1.2 Moving inside a menu...................................................................................................................................................107

Figure 5.1.2.1: Moving inside a menu............................................................................................................................................................... 107
Instruction manual
5.1.3 Displaying parameters...................................................................................................................................................108

5.1.4 Changing / Saving parameters / Password...................................................................................................................108
Changing numerical values and text................................................................................................................................................... 108
Selection from predefined values........................................................................................................................................................ 109
Autotuning of Analog input.................................................................................................................................................................. 109
Parameters Saving...............................................................................................................................................................................110
Entering a password............................................................................................................................................................................110
General unlocking of the password......................................................................................................................................................111
5.1.5 Operating the drive via the Keypad............................................................................................................................... 111

5.1.5.1 Starting and stopping the drive................................................................................................................................................112
Enabling the converter.........................................................................................................................................................................112
Disabling the converter........................................................................................................................................................................112
Start / Stop...........................................................................................................................................................................................112
5.1.5.2 Failure register / Acknowledging alarms..................................................................................................................................113
Clearing the failure register..................................................................................................................................................................113
Acknowledging a failure alarm.............................................................................................................................................................114
Acknowledging when several failure alarms occur at the same time...................................................................................................114
5.1.5.3 Motor potentiometer function...................................................................................................................................................114
Acceleration, Deceleration...................................................................................................................................................................114
Changing rotation direction..................................................................................................................................................................115
Resetting the speed reference value...................................................................................................................................................115
5.1.5.4 Jog function..............................................................................................................................................................................115
5.2 MENU STRUCTURE............................................................................................................................ 116

5.3 COMMISSIONING................................................................................................................................ 117
5.3.1 Setting jumpers and switch...........................................................................................................................................117
5.3.2 Checking the wiring and the auxiliary voltages.............................................................................................................118
5.3.3 Basic settings of the converter......................................................................................................................................118
5.3.4 START UP procedures..................................................................................................................................................120
Motor data ........................................................................................................................................................120
Limits .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 120
Speed feedback setting....................................................................................................................................................................... 121
Alarms................................................................................................................................................................................................. 121
Overload control ................................................................................................................................................................................. 121
Analog inputs 1, 2 and 3.................................................................................................................................................................... 121
5.3.5 Drive tuning...................................................................................................................................................................122
5.3.5.1 Self tuning of the current regulator ......................................................................................................................................... 122

5.3.5.1.1 Checking current regulator performance using parameter Eint............................................................................................ 122
5.3.5.2 Self tuning of the speed regulator .......................................................................................................................................... 123
5.3.5.3 Field converter........................................................................................................................................................................ 125
Selection of the functioning system..................................................................................................................................................... 125
Setting the rated field current.............................................................................................................................................................. 125
Flux current min/max........................................................................................................................................................................... 125
5.3.6 Manual tuning of the regulators.....................................................................................................................................126
Using the Test generator..................................................................................................................................................................... 126

Manual tuning of speed regulator........................................................................................................................................................ 126
Figure 5.3.6.1: Above: Actual spd; Below: Motor current. Speed P too low. .................................................................................................... 127
Figure 5.3.6.2: Above: Actual spd; Below: Motor current. Speed P too high..................................................................................................... 127
Figure 5.3.6.3: Above: Actual spd; Below: Motor current. Speed I too high...................................................................................................... 127
Figure 5.3.6.4: Above: Actual spd; Below: Motor current. Speed P and Speed I set correctly.......................................................................... 127
Manual tuning of field current regulator............................................................................................................................................... 128
Figure 5.3.6.5: Above: Flux reference; Below: Flux current. The regulator behavior is not good. Jumps are due to field changing.................... 128
Figure 5.3.6.6: Above: Flux reference; Below: Flux current. The reduction of the field current depends on the field time constant. The reg has no
influence..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Figure 5.3.6.7: Above: Flux reference; Below: Flux current. The increment in the field current has no jump. Variation compared to Fig.5.3.6.5:
Increase of Flux P from 2 to 10%. Flux I = 5%........................................................................................................................................... 129
Voltage regulator in the field converter................................................................................................................................................ 130

Figure 5.3.6.8: Above: Flux; Below: Output voltage. After a speed change the field current (Flux) has some jumps. Voltage P = 10%, Voltage I
TPD32-EV
= 80%........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 130
Figure 5.3.6.9: Above: Flux; Below: Output voltage. The gain is too low. The armature voltage increases. Voltage P = 3%, Voltage I = 5%... 130
Figure 5.3.6.10: Above: Flux; Below: Output voltage. Optimal Field regulator. After a short transient, the field current and armature voltage are
constant. Voltage P = 40%, Voltage I = 50%............................................................................................................................................ 131
5.3.7 Others tuning ................................................................................................................................................................132

Flux / if curve tuning (Flux / if curve)................................................................................................................................................... 132
Figure 5.3.7.1: Curve convertion flux/current................................................................................................................................................... 132

Figure 5.3.7.2: Blocks diagrams of field current regulator................................................................................................................................. 133
Speed-up function............................................................................................................................................................................... 134
Figure 5.3.7.3: Above: Actual spd; Below: Motor current jumps with the speed changes due to a high moment of inertia. The function Speed-up is not
active............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 134
Figure 5.3.7.4: Above: Actual spd; Below: Motor current. The same drive with Speed -up function active........................................................ 134
Setting of the speed zero logic............................................................................................................................................................ 134

Adaptive of the speed regulator.......................................................................................................................................................... 135
6 - FUNCTION DESCRIPTION........................................................................................ 136

Functions and parameters.................................................................................................................................................................. 136
Explanation of parameter tables......................................................................................................................................................... 137
6.1 ENABLES.............................................................................................................................................. 138

Figure 6.1.1 Enables via potential free contacts and PLC.................................................................................................................................. 138
6.1.1 Enable drive..................................................................................................................................................................139

6.1.2 Start / Stop....................................................................................................................................................................140
6.1.3 Fast stop........................................................................................................................................................................141
6.1.4 Quick Stop.....................................................................................................................................................................142
6.1.5 External fault.................................................................................................................................................................142
6.2 BASIC START UP MENUS................................................................................................................... 143

DRIVE STATUS................................................................................................................................................................................... 143
START UP........................................................................................................................................................................................... 143
First basic setting................................................................................................................................................................................ 143
Motor data........................................................................................................................................................................................... 143
Limits................................................................................................................................................................................................... 144
Speed feedback.................................................................................................................................................................................. 144
Alarms................................................................................................................................................................................................. 144
Overload control.................................................................................................................................................................................. 144
Analog inputs...................................................................................................................................................................................... 145
Self tuning of current regulator............................................................................................................................................................ 145
Self tuning of speed regulator............................................................................................................................................................. 145
Final operation.................................................................................................................................................................................... 146
TUNING.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 146
Current self tuning............................................................................................................................................................................... 146
Speed self tune................................................................................................................................................................................... 146
Manual tuning of speed regulator, field regulator and voltage regulator............................................................................................. 146
6.3 MONITOR............................................................................................................................................. 147

6.4 INPUT VARIABLES............................................................................................................................... 151
6.4.1 Ramp ref........................................................................................................................................................................151
Figure 6.4.1.1: Ramp references........................................................................................................................................................................ 152
6.4.2 Speed ref.......................................................................................................................................................................153

Figure 6.4.2.1: Speed reference......................................................................................................................................................................... 153
6.4.3 Torque current reference (T current ref)........................................................................................................................154

Figure 6.4.3.1: Torque current reference............................................................................................................................................................ 154
6.5 LIMITS................................................................................................................................................... 156

6.5.1 Speed Limits..................................................................................................................................................................156
6.5.2 Armature current limits (Current limits)..........................................................................................................................157
6.5.3 Flux limits......................................................................................................................................................................159
6.6 RAMP.................................................................................................................................................... 160

Instruction manual
Figure 6.6.1 : Ramp circuit................................................................................................................................................................................. 160
6.6.1 Acceleration, Deceleration, Quick Stop.........................................................................................................................161

Figure 6.6.1.1: Accel, decel and Quick stop....................................................................................................................................................... 161
6.6.2 Ramp shape and control commands.............................................................................................................................162

Figure 6.6.2.1: Ramp shape............................................................................................................................................................................... 163
Figure 6.6.2.2: Ramp delay................................................................................................................................................................................ 163
Figure 6.6.2.3: Ramp control.............................................................................................................................................................................. 164
6.7 SPEED REGULATION (SPEED REGULAT)......................................................................................... 165

Figure 6.7.1: Speed regulation........................................................................................................................................................................... 165
6.7.1 Speed regulator.............................................................................................................................................................166

6.7.1.1 Self tuning of Speed regulator................................................................................................................................................ 167
6.7.2 Spd zero logic................................................................................................................................................................168
Figure 6.7.2.1: Speed zero logic......................................................................................................................................................................... 168
6.7.3 Speed up.......................................................................................................................................................................169

6.7.4 Droop function...............................................................................................................................................................170
Figure 6.7.4.1: Droop compensation.................................................................................................................................................................. 170
Figure 6.7.4.2: Droop function example.............................................................................................................................................................. 171
6.7.5 Inertia/Loss compensation............................................................................................................................................172

Figure 6.7.5.1: Inertia/Loss compensation......................................................................................................................................................... 172
6.8 CURRENT REGULATION (CURRENT REGULAT).............................................................................. 173

Figure 6.8.1: Torque current regulaton............................................................................................................................................................... 173
6.9 FLUX REGULATION............................................................................................................................. 175

Figure 6.9.1: Motor control................................................................................................................................................................................ 175
6.10 REG PARAMETERS........................................................................................................................... 179

6.11 CONFIGURATION............................................................................................................................... 181
6.11.1 Operating mode selection............................................................................................................................................181
6.11.2 Speed base value, Full load current............................................................................................................................183
6.11.3 Configuration of the OK relay (Terminals 35,36).........................................................................................................183
6.11.4 To increase the resolution of current limits and references.........................................................................................184
6.11.5 Configuration of the speed feedback circuit................................................................................................................185
Figure 6.11.5.1: Speed feedback....................................................................................................................................................................... 186
Figure 6.11.5.2: Allowed area for Encoder 2 pulses and Motor max speed....................................................................................................... 187
Ind store ctrl parameter [92]................................................................................................................................................................ 188

Index storing parameter [13]............................................................................................................................................................... 189
6.11.6 Standard / American selection, Software Version.....................................................................................................190

6.11.7 Dimension factor, Face value fator..............................................................................................................................191
Figure 6.11.7.1: Calculation using dimension and face value factors................................................................................................................. 191
6.11.8 Programmable alarms.................................................................................................................................................193

Figure 2: Example. Open SCR (white) displayed with GF_eXpress Tool.............................................................................................................. 199
Figure 3: Example. SCR shorted (red) displayed with GF_eXpress Tool.............................................................................................................. 199
Figure 6.11.8.1 Drive enabling sequence: Main command = Terminals......................................................................................................... 200
Figure 6.11.8.2 Drive enable sequence: Main command = Digital................................................................................................................ 201
6.11.9 Address for bus operation............................................................................................................................................202

6.11.10 Password...................................................................................................................................................................203
6.12 I/O CONFIG........................................................................................................................................ 204

Figure 6.12.1: Arrangement of the programmable I/O....................................................................................................................................... 204
6.12.1 Analog Ouputs.............................................................................................................................................................205

Figure 6.12.1.1: Option card, analog output blocks............................................................................................................................................ 206
6.12.2 Analog Inputs...............................................................................................................................................................207

Figure 6.12.2.1: Analog input............................................................................................................................................................................. 211
Figure 6.12.2.2: Analog Input 1 window comparator........................................................................................................................................ 211
6.12.3 Digital Outputs.............................................................................................................................................................213
TPD32-EV
Figure 6.12.3.1: Digital outputs.......................................................................................................................................................................... 214
6.12.4 Digital Inputs................................................................................................................................................................216

Figure 6.12.4.1: Digital inputs............................................................................................................................................................................ 216
6.12.5 Speed reference from encoder input (Tach follower function).....................................................................................218

Figure 6.12.5.1: Tach follower............................................................................................................................................................................ 218
Figure 6.12.5.2: Example of application of the encoder reference..................................................................................................................... 219
6.13 ADDITIONAL SPEED FUNCTIONS (ADD SPEED FUNCT).............................................................. 220

6.13.1 Auto capture................................................................................................................................................................220
6.13.2 Adptive spd reg............................................................................................................................................................220
Figure 6.13.2.1: Adaptive of the speed regulator............................................................................................................................................... 222
6.13.3 Speed control..............................................................................................................................................................223

Figure 6.13.3.1: Speed threshold (up) and Set speed (down) messages.................................................................................................... 224
6.13.4 Speed zero..................................................................................................................................................................225

Figure 6.13.4.1: Speed zero............................................................................................................................................................................... 225
6.14 FUNCTIONS....................................................................................................................................... 226

6.14.1 Motorpotentiometer.....................................................................................................................................................226
Figure 6.14.1.1: CONFIG 1................................................................................................................................................................................. 228
Figure 6.14.1.2: CONFIG 2................................................................................................................................................................................. 228
6.14.2 Jog function.................................................................................................................................................................233

Figure 6.14.2.1: Example of external activation in Jog mode............................................................................................................................. 234
6.14.3 Multi speed function....................................................................................................................................................235

Figure 6.14.3.1: Selection of different references via terminals.......................................................................................................................... 235
Table 6.14.2.1: Multi speed function.................................................................................................................................................................. 237
Figure 6.14.3.2: Multi speed function................................................................................................................................................................. 237
6.14.4 Multi ramp function......................................................................................................................................................238

Table 6.14.4.1: Ramp selection.......................................................................................................................................................................... 240
Figure 6.14.4.1: Multi ramp selection via terminals............................................................................................................................................ 241
Figure 6.14.4.2: Multi ramp selection via signals............................................................................................................................................... 241
6.14.5 Speed Draw function...................................................................................................................................................242

Figure 6.14.5.1: Speed draw block diagram...................................................................................................................................................... 242
Figure 6.14.5.2: Rubber calender example......................................................................................................................................................... 243
6.14.6 Overload control..........................................................................................................................................................244

Table 6.14.6.1: I2t derating................................................................................................................................................................................ 246
Figure 6.14.6.1: Overload control (Overload mode = curr limited)..................................................................................................................... 247
Figure 6.14.6.2: Overload control (Overload mode= curr not limited)............................................................................................................... 248
Figure 6.14.6.3: Example- Operating point of drive............................................................................................................................................. 265
6.14.7 Stop control.................................................................................................................................................................266

Figure 6.14.7.1: Start and stop management..................................................................................................................................................... 266
6.14.8 Brake control...............................................................................................................................................................268

Figure 6.14.8.1: Diagram of control.................................................................................................................................................................... 269
Figure 6.14.8.2: Brake control diagram.............................................................................................................................................................. 270
6.14.9 Current limitation according to the speed (I/n curve)...................................................................................................271

Figure 6.14.9.1 Current limitation according to the speed.................................................................................................................................. 271
6.15 SPEC FUNCTIONS............................................................................................................................ 272

6.15.1 Test generator.............................................................................................................................................................272
Figure 6.15.1.1: Test generator output............................................................................................................................................................... 272
6.15.2 Saving parameters, loading default factory settings, life time.....................................................................................273

6.15.3 Failure Register...........................................................................................................................................................273
6.15.4 Signal adaptation.........................................................................................................................................................274
Figure 6.15.4.1: Structure of the signal adaptation............................................................................................................................................. 275
6.15.5 Pads............................................................................................................................................................................276
Figure 6.15.5.1: Bus pads.................................................................................................................................................................................. 277
6.16 OPTIONS............................................................................................................................................ 278

Instruction manual
6.16.1 Option 1.......................................................................................................................................................................278

6.16.2 Option 2.......................................................................................................................................................................278
6.16.3 PID Function................................................................................................................................................................280
6.16.3.1 General................................................................................................................................................................................. 281
6.16.3.2 Inputs / Outputs..................................................................................................................................................................... 281
6.16.3.3 Feed - Forward...................................................................................................................................................................... 282
Figure 6.16.3.1: Feed-forward block description................................................................................................................................................ 282
6.16.3.4 PID function.......................................................................................................................................................................... 284
Figure 6.16.3.2: PID blocks description.............................................................................................................................................................. 284
6.16.3.5 Proportional - integral block.................................................................................................................................................. 286
Figure 6.16.3.3: PI block description.................................................................................................................................................................. 286
6.16.3.6 Proportional - Derivative control block.................................................................................................................................. 290
Figure 6.16.3.4: PD block description................................................................................................................................................................ 290
6.16.3.7 Output reference................................................................................................................................................................... 292
Figure 6.16.3.5: Output reference block description........................................................................................................................................... 292
6.16.3.8 Function of calculation for Initial diameter ............................................................................................................................ 294
Figure 6.16.3.6: Diameter calculation block description .................................................................................................................................... 294

Figure 6.16.3.7: Diameter calculation................................................................................................................................................................. 295
6.16.3.9 Procedure of calculation for initial diameter.......................................................................................................................... 296

6.16.3.10 Examples of application...................................................................................................................................................... 297
Figure 6.16.3.8: Nip-roll control with dancer...................................................................................................................................................... 297

Figure 6.16.3.9: Nip-rolls control with load cell.................................................................................................................................................. 300
Figure 6.16.3.10: Winder/Unwinder control with dancer.................................................................................................................................... 303
Figure 6.16.3.11: Diameter calculation............................................................................................................................................................... 307
Figure 6.16.3.12: Winder/unwinder control with sensor diameter...................................................................................................................... 308
Figure 6.16.3.13: Relation between transducer signal and coil signal................................................................................................................ 308
Figure 6.16.3.14: Pressure control for pumps and extruder ............................................................................................................................... 310
6.16.3.11 Generic PID......................................................................................................................................................................... 313

6.16.3.12 Application note.................................................................................................................................................................. 315
Figure 6.16.3.15: Example with small and large diameter.................................................................................................................................. 315

Figure 6.16.3.16: Relation between PI I gain PID and PI I output PID................................................................................................................ 316
Figure 6.16.3.17: General description of the PID blocks..................................................................................................................................... 317
6.17 TORQUE WINDER FUNCTION.......................................................................................................... 318

6.17.1 Diameter calculation....................................................................................................................................................319
6.17.2 Torque calculation.......................................................................................................................................................323
6.17.2.1 Compensations and closing of the tension loop.................................................................................................................... 324
Figure 6.17.1: Acceleration and deceleration indication.................................................................................................................................... 325
6.17.2.2 Taper function........................................................................................................................................................................ 327
Figure 6.17.2: Relation among the Taper function parameters.......................................................................................................................... 327
6.17.3 Calculation of the speed reference..............................................................................................................................328

Figure 6.17.3: Operative sequence of the functioning status.............................................................................................................................. 330
Figure 6.17.4: Functioning with Jog TW enable................................................................................................................................................. 332
6.17.4 Typical connection diagrams.......................................................................................................................................333

Figure 6.17.5: Winder with an automatic switch and a closed loop tension regulation...................................................................................... 333
6.17.5 Control logic................................................................................................................................................................337

Diameter initialization.......................................................................................................................................................................... 337
Initial phase......................................................................................................................................................................................... 337
Figure 6.17.9: Initial phase with a stopped line.................................................................................................................................................. 337
Automatic switching............................................................................................................................................................................ 338
Figure 6.17.10: Automatic switching between two coils during a winding/unwinding period............................................................................ 338
Reel stop............................................................................................................................................................................................. 338
Figure 6.17.11: Coil stop after the automatic switching..................................................................................................................................... 339
Jog function......................................................................................................................................................................................... 339
Figure 6.17.12: Jog function to prepare the machine......................................................................................................................................... 339
6.17.6 Application example....................................................................................................................................................340
10
TPD32-EV
Provisions............................................................................................................................................................................................ 350
1. Drive used as a winder winding side = up.................................................................................................................................... 350
Figure 6.17.13: Drive used as a winder winding side = up............................................................................................................................ 350
2. Drive used as a winder winding side = down............................................................................................................................... 351
Figure 6.17.14: Drive used as a winder winding side = down....................................................................................................................... 351
3. Drive used as an unwinder unwinding side = up.......................................................................................................................... 351
Figure 6.17.15: Drive used as an unwinder unwinding side = up................................................................................................................... 351
4. Drive used as an unwinder unwinding side = down..................................................................................................................... 352
Figure 6.17.16: Drive used as an unwinder unwinding side = down.............................................................................................................. 352
6.17.7 Block diagram..............................................................................................................................................................353
6.18 DRIVECOM......................................................................................................................................... 357

6.18.1 Control word, status word, malfunction code..............................................................................................................357
6.18.2 Speed..........................................................................................................................................................................358
6.18.3 Speed limitation...........................................................................................................................................................359
6.18.4 Acceleration / Deceleration..........................................................................................................................................361
Figure 6.17.4.1: Acceleration and deceleration.................................................................................................................................................. 361
6.18.5 Factor function.............................................................................................................................................................363
6.19 SERVICE............................................................................................................................................. 363
7- MAINTENANCE......................................................................................................... 364
7.1 CARE.................................................................................................................................................... 364
7.2 SERVICE............................................................................................................................................... 364
7.3 REPAIRS............................................................................................................................................... 364
7.4 CUSTOMER SERVICE......................................................................................................................... 364
8 - TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................................................ 365
Failure alarms in the keypad display .................................................................................................................................................. 365
Other faults.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 367
9 - BLOCK DIAGRAM..................................................................................................... 369

9.1 CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAMS........................................................................................................... 369
TPD32-EV Converter Index................................................................................................................................................................ 369
TPD32-EV Converter Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 370
Digital Inputs /Outputs & Mapping Standard and TBO cards.............................................................................................................. 371
Analog Inputs/Outputs & Mapping...................................................................................................................................................... 372
Speed Reference Generation............................................................................................................................................................. 373
Ramp reference Block......................................................................................................................................................................... 374
Speed / Current Regulator Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 375
Speed Reference Generation............................................................................................................................................................. 376
Speed Feedback setting..................................................................................................................................................................... 377
Speed regulator................................................................................................................................................................................... 378
Speed regulator PI part....................................................................................................................................................................... 379
Speed adaptive and Speed zero logic................................................................................................................................................ 380
Current regulator................................................................................................................................................................................. 381
Field current regulator......................................................................................................................................................................... 382
Motor parameters................................................................................................................................................................................ 383
Start and Stop management............................................................................................................................................................... 384
Droop compensation........................................................................................................................................................................... 385
Inertia / Loss compensation................................................................................................................................................................ 386
Speed Threshold / Speed control........................................................................................................................................................ 387
PID function......................................................................................................................................................................................... 388
Functions............................................................................................................................................................................................. 389
LINKS Function................................................................................................................................................................................... 390
PAD parameters.................................................................................................................................................................................. 391
Taper Current Limits............................................................................................................................................................................ 392
Instruction manual
11
Dimension factor - Face value factor.................................................................................................................................................. 393

Test Generator.................................................................................................................................................................................... 394
JOG function....................................................................................................................................................................................... 395
Multispeed........................................................................................................................................................................................... 396
Motor potentiometer............................................................................................................................................................................ 397
SCR test.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 398
Alarm mapping.................................................................................................................................................................................... 399
9.2 POWER CIRCUIT BLOCK DIAGRAMS................................................................................................ 400

Figure 9.2.1: ESE5911 TPD32-EV-500 ...-20 ...185-4B....................................................................................................................................... 400
Figure 9.2.2: ESE5911 TPD32-EV-500 ...-20 ...185-2B....................................................................................................................................... 401
Figure 9.2.3: ESE5912 TPD32-EV-500 ...-280 ...650-4B..................................................................................................................................... 402
Figure 9.2.4: ESE5912 TPD32-EV-500 ...-280 ...650-2B..................................................................................................................................... 403
Figure 9.2.5: ESE5913 TPD32-EV-500 ...-770 ...1050-4B................................................................................................................................... 404
Figure 9.2.7: ESE5858 TPD32-EV-500_520-1500 ...3300-4B............................................................................................................................. 406
Figure 9.2.8: ESE5856 TPD32-EV-500_600-1200 ...3300-2B............................................................................................................................. 407
Figure 9.2.9: ESE5770 TPD32-EV-500 ...690 ...-1300 ...2400-4B....................................................................................................................... 408
Figure 9.2.10: ESE5770 TPD32-EV-500 ...690 ...-1300 ...2400-2B..................................................................................................................... 409
Figure 9.2.13:ESE5803 TPD32-EV-575_690 ...-560 ...1000-4B.......................................................................................................................... 412
Figure 9.2.14: ESE5803 TPD32-EV-575_690 ...-560 ...1000-2B......................................................................................................................... 413
Figure 9.2.15: ESE5859 TPD32-EV-690_720-1010 ...3300-4B........................................................................................................................... 414
Figure 9.2.16: ESE5857 TPD32-EV-690_810-1010 ...3300-2B........................................................................................................................... 415
9.3 REGULATION CARD............................................................................................................................ 416

9.4 CONNECTION OF EXTERNAL POWER BRIDGES............................................................................ 417
Figure 9.4.1: ESE5855 TPD32-EV-....-1010....3300-4B-E................................................................................................................................... 417
Figure 9.4.2: ESE5854 TPD32-EV-....-1010....3300-2B-E.................................................................................................................................... 418
Figure 9.4.3-A: ESE5799 (1/3) - TPD32-EV-CU-.................................................................................................................................................. 419
Figure 9.4.3-B: ESE5799 (2/3) - TPD32-EV-CU-.................................................................................................................................................. 420
Figure 9.4.3-C: ESE5799 (3/3) - TPD32-EV-CU-.................................................................................................................................................. 421
Figure 9.4.4: ESE5771 TPD32-EV-CU-230...690-THY1-XX_1............................................................................................................................... 422
Figure 9.4.5: ESE5771 TPD32-EV-CU-230...690-THY1-XX_2............................................................................................................................... 423
10 - PARAMETER LISTS................................................................................................ 424

10.1 COMPLETE MAIN MENU LIST.......................................................................................................... 424
10.2 LIST OF HIGH PRIORITY PARAMETERS......................................................................................... 466
11 - REPLACEMENT PARTS.......................................................................................... 468

11.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................... 468
Figure 11.3.1: FIR1-... power/driver cards......................................................................................................................................................... 469
Table 11.3.1-A: Selection of dip-switches S3-XX and S4-XX for FIR1-cards............................................................................................. 469
Table 11.3.1-B: Selection of dip-switches S3-XX and S4-XX for FIR1--FC cards............................................................................................. 469
Figure 11.3.2: FIR2-... power/driver card.......................................................................................................................................................... 469
Table 11.3.2-A: Selection of dip-switches S3-XX and S4-XX for FIR2-X-cards......................................................................................... 469
Table 11.3.2-B: Selection of TPD32-EV-FC for FIR2-X--FC cards..................................................................................................................... 469
Figure 11.3.3: FIR3-32 power/driver card......................................................................................................................................................... 470
Table 11.3.3: Selection of dip-switches S3-XX and S4-XX for FIR3-32- cards.............................................................................................. 470
Figure 11.3.4: FIR3-D power/driver card........................................................................................................................................................... 470
Table 11.3.4: Selection of dip-switches S3-XX and S4-XX for FIR3-D- cards................................................................................................ 470
Figure 11.3.5: FIR4/5P-XX power/driver card..................................................................................................................................................... 470
Table 11.3.5: Selection of Dip-switch S2 (FIR4/5P-XX)................................................................................................................................... 470
Table 11.3.6: Selection of dip-switches S3-XX and S4-XX for FIR4/5P-XX cards.............................................................................................. 471
APPENDIX 1 - TPD32-EV-CU: CONTROL UNIT.............................................................. 472

Figure A1.1: Typical single-wire connection diagram......................................................................................................................................... 472
A1.1 Models available and main technical data.....................................................................................................................473
12
TPD32-EV
A1.2 Connection cables supplied...........................................................................................................................................473

Table A.1.2.1: Connection cables for TPD32-EV-CU-...................................................................................................................................... 473
A1.3 Choosing the right model for your application................................................................................................................474

A1.4 Pulse transformers.........................................................................................................................................................476
Figure A1.4.1: Typical connection for PTDX-X transformers................................................................................................................................ 476
A1.5 Current transducers (CT or TA)......................................................................................................................................476

A1.6 Installation, connection and configuration .....................................................................................................................477
A1.6.1 Assembly................................................................................................................................................................................. 477
A1.6.2 Electrical connections.............................................................................................................................................................. 477
Figure A1.6.1: Position of terminals.................................................................................................................................................................... 478
A1.6.3 Configuration of the armature current feedback circuit............................................................................................................ 480
Figure A1.6.3.1: Detail of circuit......................................................................................................................................................................... 481

Table A.1.6.3.1: Calculation of the configuration of dip-switches SW3-1 to SW4-8 for standard TPD32-EV-.. drives with external bridge......... 482
A1.6.4 Using the control unit as a replacement part........................................................................................................................... 483
A1.7 DC Converter size management....................................................................................................................................483

A1.8 External Three-phase Field Exciter Control by TPD32-EV-FC......................................................................................484
Figura A1.8.1: Block diagram of Field exciter control......................................................................................................................................... 484
APPENDIX 2 - TPD32-EV-FC: FIELD CONTROL UNIT.................................................... 485

A2.1 Current regulation (CURRENT REGULAT)....................................................................................................................485
A2.2 Regulator parameters (REG PARAMETERS)...............................................................................................................486
A2.3 Autotune function of PI current regulator.......................................................................................................................487
A2.4 Digital Outputs...............................................................................................................................................................489
A2.5 External Three-phase Field Exciter Control...................................................................................................................490
A2.5.1 Fiber optics connection of master board (in TPD32-EV-CU unit) to Slave board (in TPD32-EV-FC unit)............................... 491
Figure A2.5.1: Block diagram of Field exciter control, fiber optics connection ................................................................................................... 491
A2.5.2 Connection between TPD32-EV-CU and TPD32-EV-FC units via external I/O....................................................................... 492
Figure A2.5.2: Block diagram of Field exciter control, connection via external I/Os........................................................................................... 492
A2.5.3 12-pulse configuration of TPD32-EV with connection via external I/Os between TPD32-EV-CU and TPD32-EV-FC units.... 493
Figure A2.5.3: Block diagram of Field exciter control, connection via external I/Os........................................................................................... 493
A2.6 Programmable alarms....................................................................................................................................................494

A2.7 Parameter changes........................................................................................................................................................495
APPENDIX 3 - ACCESSORIES....................................................................................... 498

A3.1 EAM Adapter Kit.............................................................................................................................................................498
EAM1579........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 498
EAM1580........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 498
EAM1581........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 499
EAM2617_1 (cod. S726171)............................................................................................................................................................................. 499
EAM2617_2 (cod. S726174)............................................................................................................................................................................. 499
EAM2617_3 (cod. S726173)............................................................................................................................................................................. 499
Instruction manual
13
SAFETY SYMBOL LEGEND
Warning:
Commands attention to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement which, if

not strictly observed, could result in personai injury or death.
Caution:
Commands attention to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement which, if

not strictly observed, could result in damage or destruction of equipment.
Note:
Commands attention to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must

be highlighted.
BLOCK DIAGRAM LEGEND
14
TPD32-EV
1 - SAFETY PRECAUTIONS - PRECAUTIONS DE SECURIT

ATTENTION!
According to the EEC standards the TPD32-EV and accessories must be used only after checking that the machine has been produced using those safety devices required by the 2006/421/CEE set of rules, as far as the machine industry is concerned.
Drive systems cause mechanical motion. It is the responsibility of the user to insure that any such motion does not result in an
unsafe condition. Factory provided interlocks and operating limits should not be bypassed or modified.
Selon les normes EEC, les drives TPD32 et leurs accessoires doivent tre employs seulement aprs avoir verifi que la machine ait
t produit avec les mme dispositifs de scurit demands par la rglementation 2006/421/EEC concernant le secteur de lindustrie.
Les systmes provoquent des mouvements mcaniques. Lutilisateur est responsable de la scurit concernant les mouvements
mcaniques. Les dispositifs de scurit prvues par lusine et les limitations operationelles ne doivent tre dpasss ou modifis.
WARNING - ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND BURN HAZARD / ATTENTION DCHARGE LECTRIQUE ET RISQUE DE BRLURE :
When using instruments such as oscilloscopes to work on live equipment, the oscilloscopes chassis should be grounded and a
differential amplifier input should be used. Care should be used in the selection of probes and leads and in the adjustment of the
oscilloscope so that accurate readings may be made. See instrument manufacturers instruction book for proper operation and
adjustments to the instrument.
Lors de lutilisation dinstruments (par example oscilloscope) sur des systmes en marche, le chassis de loscilloscope doit tre
reli la terre et un amplificateur diffrentiel devrait tre utilis en entre.
Les sondes et conducteurs doivent tre choissis avec soin pour effectuer les meilleures mesures laide dun oscilloscope.
Voir le manuel dinstruction pour une utilisation correcte des instruments.
WARNING - FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD / ATTENTION RISQUE DINCENDIES ET DEXPLOSIONS:
Fires or explosions might result from mounting Drives in hazardous areas such as locations where flammable or combustible
vapors or dusts are present. Drives should be installed away from hazardous areas, even if used with motors suitable for use in
these locations.
Lutilisation des drives dans des znes risques (prsence de vapeurs ou de poussires inflammables), peut provoquer des incendies
ou des explosions. Les drives doivent tre installs loin des znes dangeureuses, et quips de moteurs appropris.
WARNING - STRAIN HAZARD / ATTENTION LLVATION:
Improper lifting practices can cause serious or fatal injury. Lift only with adequate equipment and trained personnel.
Une lvation inapproprie peut causer des dommages srieux ou fatals. Il doit tre lev seulement avec des moyens appropris
et par du personnel qualifi.
WARNING - DANGER OF ELECTIC SHOCK / ATTENTION CAS DE DECHARGE ELECTRIQUE:
Drives and motors must be ground connected according to the NEC (national electirc rules).
Tous les moteurs et les drives doivent tre mis la terre selon le Code Electrique National ou quivalent.
WARNING / ATTENTION:
Replace all covers before applying power to the Drive. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Remettre tous les capots avant de mettre sous tension le drive. Des erreurs peuvent provoquer de srieux accidents ou mme la mort.
Converters are electrical appliances for use in heavy current installations. Parts of the converter are energized during operation.
The electrical installation and the opening of the device should therefore only be carried out by qualified personnel. Improper
installation of motors or converters may therefore cause the failure of the device as well as serious injury to people or material
damage. Follow the instructions given in this manual and observe the local and national safety regulations applicable.
Les convertisseur sont des dispositifs lectriques utiliss dans des installations industriels. Une partie des drive sont sous tension
pendant loperation. Linstallation lectrique et louverture des drive devrait tre execut uniquement par du personel qualifi.
De mauvaises installations de moteurs ou de drive peuvent provoquer des dommages materiels ou blesser des personnes On doit
suivir les instructions donnes dans ce manuel et observer les rgles nationales de scurit.
Instruction manual
15
WARNING! - POWER SUPPLY AND GROUNDING / ATTENTION ! ALIMENTATION PUISSANCE ET MISE LA TERRE
Power supply networks
Based on the grounding method, the IEC 60634-1 describes three main types of grounding for power supply networks: TN, TT
and IT systems. In particular, the IT system has all the active parts insulated from earth or a point connected to ground through
an impedance. The earths of the system are connected separately or collectively to the system ground.
The following figures show these different systems.
Rseaux dalimentation
En fonction de la modalit de mise la terre, la norme IEC 60364-1 dcrit trois types principaux de mise la terre des rseaux
dalimentation : systme TN, systme TT et systme IT.
En particulier, dans le systme IT, toutes les parties actives sont isoles de laterre ou un point est reli la terre au travers dune
impdance. Les masses de linstallation sont raccordes sparment ou collectivement au systme de mise la terre.
Les figures suivantes illustrent les diffrents systmes mentionns.
TN-S supply lines / Lignes dalimentation TN-S
TN-C supply lines / Lignes dalimentation TN-C
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
PEN
PE
TT supply lines / Lignes dalimentation TT
Linee di alimentazione IT / Lignes dalimentation IT
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
PE
PE
In case of a three phase supply not symmetrical to ground, an insulation loss of one of the devices connected to the same network
can cause functional problem to the drive, if the use of a wye/delta transformer is avoided.
1-
The drives are designed to be powered from standard three phase lines that are electrically symmetrical with respect to ground
(TN or TT network).
2-
In case of supply with IT network, the use of delta/star transformer is mandatory, with a secondary three phase wiring referred
to ground or, it is mandatory to request a series of drives specifically for IT networks.
Please refer to the following connection sample.

Si le rseau nest pas quilibr par rapport la terre et quil ny a pas de transformateur raingle/toile, une mauvaise isolation
dun appareil lectrique connect au mme rseau que le variateur peut lui causer des troubles de fonctionnement.
1-
Les variateurs sont prvus pour tre aliments par un rseau triphas quilibr avec un rgime de neutre standard (TN ou TT).
2-
Si le rgime de neutre est IT, nous vous recommendons dutiliser un tranformateur triangle/toile avec point milieu ramen
la terre ; le cas chant, il sera ncessaire de commander une srie dentranements spcifiques pour lutilisation avec un
rseau IT.
L2
PE /
PE1/
W
AC INPUT
CHOKE
AC Main Supply
L1
Vous pouvez trouver ci-aprs des exemples de cblage.
L3
Safety
ground
Earth
All wires (including motor ground) must
be connected inside the motor terminal box
16
TPD32-EV
CAUTION / PRECAUTION:
DO NOT install an EMI filter external to the TPD32-EV drive when it is used on IT networks. The capacitors in the standard
EMI filter could become damaged and/or cause safety problems.
The required supply voltage to the control circuits themselves, and connected to the terminals U2 - V2 is excluded from the
above considerations and must come from a separate source (secondary of a transformer 115VAC/230VAC) having normally one
extreme, or the central point, connected to earth (PE).
Ne pas installer un filtre EMI extrieur lentranement TPD32-EV, si utilis sur les rseaux IT. Les condensateurs lintrieur
du filtre standard EMI pourraient se dtriorer et/ou entraner des problmes de scurit
La tension dalimentation ncessaire aux circuits de commande, branche sur les bornes U2 V2, nest pas concerne par
les considrations relatives aux rseaux IT. Elle devra provenir dune source autonome (secondaire dun transformateur de
115Vca/230Vca) ayant normalement une extrmit ou un point milieu raccords la terre (PE).
Do not connect power supply voltage that exceeds the standard specification voltage fluctuation permissible. If excessive voltage
is applied to the Drive, damage to the internal components will result.
Ne pas raccorder de tension dalimentation dpassant la fluctuation de tension permise par les normes. Dans le cas d une alimentation en tension excessive, des composants internes peuvent tre endommags.
Do not operate the Drive without the ground wire connected. The motor chassis should be grounded to earth through a ground
lead separate from all other equipment ground leads to prevent noise coupling.
The grounding cable shall be sized in accordance with the national electric rules and it is to be fixed using the crimp tool specified
by the cable manufacturer.
Ne pas faire fonctionner le drive sans prise de terre. Le chassis du moteur doit tre mis la terre laide dun connecteur de
terre separ des autres pour viter le couplage des perturbations.
Le cable de terre devrait tre dimensionn selon la norme electique national et doit tre fix a laide dun instrument de serrage
specifi par le producteur du cable.
Do not perform a megger test between the Drive terminals or on the control circuit terminals.
Ne pas excuter un test megger entre les bornes du drive ou entre les bornes du circuit de contrle.
Because the ambient temperature greatly affects Drive life and reliability, do not install the Drive in any location that exceeds the
allowable temperature. Leave the ventilation cover attached for temperatures of 104 F (40 C) or below.
tant donn que la temprature ambiante influe sur la vie et la fiabilit du drive, on ne devrait pas installer le drive dans des places
ou la temperature permise est dpasse. Laisser le capot de ventilation en place pour tempratures de 104F (40C) ou infrieures.
If the Drives Fault Alarm is activated, consult the TROUBLESHOOTING section of this instruction book, and after correcting
the problem, resume operation. Do not reset the alarm automatically by external sequence, etc.
Si la Fault Alarm du drive est active, consulter la section du manuel concernant les dfauts et aprs avoir corrig lerreur,
reprendre lopration. Ne pas riniliatiser lalarme automatiquement par une squence externe, etc.
Be sure to remove the desicant dryer packet(s) when unpacking the Drive. (If not removed these packets may become lodged in
the fan or air passages and cause the Drive to overheat).
Lors du dballage du drive, retirer le sachet dshydrat. (Si celui-ci nest pas retir, il empche la ventilation et provoque une
surchauffe du drive).
The Drive must be mounted on a wall that is constructed of heat resistant material. While the Drive is operating, the temperature
of the Drives cooling fins can rise to a temperature of 194 F (90C).
Le drive doit tre mont sur un mur construit avec des matriaux rsistants la chaleur. Pendant le fonctionnement du drive, la
temprature des ailettes du dissipateur thermique peut arriver 194F (90).
Instruction manual
17
Note:
The terms Converters, Controller and Drive are sometimes used interchangably throughout the
industry. We will use the term Drive in this document
Les mots Convertisseur, Controller et Drive sont interchangeables dans le domaine industriel.
Nous utiliserons dans ce manuel seulement le mot Drive.
18
1.
Never open the device or covers while the AC Input power supply is switched on. Wait for at least
one minute befor working on the terminals or inside the device.
Ne jamais ouvrir lappareil lorsquil est suns tension. Le temps minimum dattente avant de pouvoir
travailler sur les bornes ou bien lintrieur de ldrive est de 1 minute.
2.
Do not touch or damage any components when handling the device. The changing of the isolation
gaps or the removing of the isolation and covers is not permissible. If the front plate has to be removed
because of a room temperature higher than 40 degrees, the user has to ensure that no occasional
contact with live parts may occur.
Manipuler lappareil de faon ne pas toucher ou endommager des parties. Il nest pas permis
de changer les distances disolement ou bien denlever des matriaux isolants ou des capots. Si la
plaque frontale doit tre enleve pour un fonctionnement avec la temprature de lenvironnement
plus haute que 40C, lutilisateur doit sassurer, par des moyens opportuns, quaucun contact
occasionnel ne puisse arriver avec les parties sous tension.
3.
Protect the device from impermissible environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, shock etc.)
Protger lappareil contre des effets extrieurs non permis (temprature, humidit, chocs etc.).
4.
No voltage should be connected to the output of the converter (terminals C and D). The parallel
connection of several motors on a converter output is not permissible.
Aucune tension la sortie du convertisseur ne peut tre applique (bornes C et D). Il nest pas
permis dinsrer plus de convertisseurs en parallle la sortie ni deffectuer une connexion directe
de lentre avec une sortie du convertisseur.
5.
When engaging a running motor, the Auto capture function (Auto capture in the ADD SPEED
FUNCT menu) must be activated.
Pour reprendre des moteurs en rotation, la fonction suivante doit tre active : Auto capture dans
le menu ADD SPEED FUNCT.
6.
A capacitative load (e.g. phase compensation capacitors) should not be connected to the output of
the frequency inverter (terminals C and D).
Aucune charge capacitive ne doit tre connecte la sortie du convertisseur (bornes C et D) (par
exemple des condensateurs de mise en phase).
7.
Always connect the converter to the protective ground (PE) via the marked connection terminals
and the housing. The discharge current to earth ground is greater then 3.5 mA. EN 50178 specifies
that with discharge currents greater than 3.5 mA the protective conductor ground connection must
be fixed type and doubled for redundancy.
Effectuer toujours des connexions de terre (PE) par le biais des bornes et du chassis. Le courant
de dispersion vers la terre est suprieur 3,5 mA. Selon EN 50178 il faut prvoir dans ces cas une
double connexion terre.
8.
The electrical commissioning should only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are also responsible for the provision of a suitable ground connection and a protected power supply feeder in
accordance with the local and national regulations. The motor must be protected against overloads.
La mise en service lectrique doit tre effectue par un personnel qualifi. Ce dernier est responsable
de lexistence dune connexion de terre adquate et dune protection des cbles dalimentation selon
les prescriptions locales et nationales. Le moteur doit tre protg contre la surcharge
9.
No dielectric tests should be carried out on parts of the frequency inverter. A suitable measuring
instrument (internal resistance of at least 10 kW/V) should be used for measuring the signal voltages.
Il ne faut pas xcuter de tests de rigidit dilectrique sur des parties du convertisseurs. Pour mesurer
les tensions, des signaux, il faut utiliser des instruments de mesure appropris (rsistance interne
minimale 10 k/V).
10.
When the drive is stopped, but it has not been disconnected from the main via the main contactor,
it is not possible to exclude the accidental movement of the motor shaft when a failure occurs.
Quand lactionnement est arrt, mais non dbranch du rseau par le contacteur de rseau, il nest
pas possible dexclure le mouvement accidentel de larbre moteur en cas de panne.
11.
The user must provide overload protection for the motor, as indicated in chapter 2.7.1 and Fig. 4.8.2.
Lutilisateur dout effectuer la protection de sour-charge du moteur, comme indiqu dans le chapitre
2.7.1 et figure 4.8.2.
TPD32-EV
The UL listed equipments is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than the rms symmetrical amperes, 500
volts maximum, shown in the table below, when protected by special purpose fuses JFHR2, Gould or Bussman, Model n. as in
table 4.9.1.1 and 4.9.2.1. Fuses are internally mounted on sizes 770...1050A.
Cet appareil est apte pour lutilisation sur un cicuit mme de dlivrer un courant rms symmetrique de court-circuit, un max.
de 500 volt, pas suprieur aux valeurs ci-dessus.
.
Converter size
Short circuit current
17 2350 A (American sizes)
100 kA
20 ... 3300 A (Standard sizes)
100 kA
1.1 INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE UL MARK (UL REQUIREMENTS),

ELECTRICAL STANDARDS IN THE USA AND CANADA
Short-circuit ratings
TPD32-EV converters must be connected to a grid capable of supplying a symmetrical short-circuit current of less than or equal
to 100 kArms.
Note:
The converter will be protected by semi-conductor fuses, as specified in the instruction manual.
Branch circuit protection

Use the fuses specified in paragraph "4.9 Circuit Protection" on page 86 to protect the drive against overcurrent.
Environmental conditions
The drive is supplied as open type equipment. Maximum ambient temperature: 40C. Pollution degree: 2.
Wiring of input and output terminals
Use UL-listed cables rated at 75C and crimp-type terminals. Use the tool recommended by the terminal manufacturer to crimp
the terminals.
Tighten the terminals to the torque specified in paragraph "4.3 Power Section" on page 64 .
Overspeed; current limit/overload; motor overload
The drive incorporates overspeed, current limit/overload and motor overload protection. The degree of protection and details about
installation are specified in the instruction manual.
Overload protection for solid state motor.
The drive is provided with motor overload protection. This protection is implemented as a software function. The degree of protection and details about installation are specified in the instruction manual..
Instruction manual
19
2 - DESCRIPTION, COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION

ANDSPECIFICATIONS
2.1 GENERAL
A converter transforms the constant voltage of an existing three-phase power supply into a direct voltage, in
order to regulate the speed and/or the torque of a direct current motor with a separate excitation.
3
(*)
1
2
(**)
4
(*) not included in the TPD32-EV-FC-...
(**) not included in the TPD32-EV-CU-...
Figure 2.1: Base diagram of a converter
AC input supply voltage (ULN):

3 x 230 V, 50/60 Hz,

3 x 460 V, 50/60 Hz,
3 x 575 V, 50/60 Hz,
Armature converter:
Totally controlled three-phase bridge. Double bridge for TPD32-EV...-4B..)

Semi-controlled single-phase bridge
Control and regulation cards of the power section. Commands, references and feedbacks are connected to them.
Direct voltage changing from 0... UdN
20.... 3300 A [for a max. ambient temperature of 104F (40C)]
Field converter:
Programmable control section:
Output voltage (UdN):
Output rated current (IdN):
3 x 400 V, 50/60 Hz
3 x 500 V, 50/60 Hz
3 x 690 V, 50/60 Hz
The default version of a converter includes the presence of a power supply circuit for the adjustable field; in this
way the motors can operate with a mixed armature or field regulation, without adding other devices.
The basic technical data of a converter are stated in the type code and on the identification nameplate.
20
TPD32-EV
TPD32-EV
The available TPD32-EV converters are of two types:
TPD32-EV-...-2B...

for a two quadrant functioning
TPD32-EV-...-4B...

for a four quadrant functioning
Each type includes three series of devices, which differ the one from the other because of the max. power supply voltage:
TPD32-EV-500/...

AC input supply voltage up to 3 x 500 V
TPD32-EV-575/...

TPD32-EV-690/...

Type E TPD32-EV converters are not compact units but consist of a power section and a regulation section joined
by a specific cable with connectors..
TPD32-EV -XXX / XXX -XX -XB -X -NA
UL standard compliant
Construction type: A, B, C, D, E
Operating quadrants: 2B = two quadrants; 4B = four quadrants
Output rated current [A]
Rated DC voltage output [VDC]
Rated AC voltage input [VAC]
Type of converter
TPD32-EV-FC-...
Series of converters designed to supply highly inductive loads such as electromagnets, chokes, synchronous
motor excitation circuits, galvanic applications, etc.
Maximum supply voltage available:
TPD32-EV-500/...

TPD32-EV-200/...

TPD32-EV -FC -XXX / XXX -XX -XB -X
Construction type: A, B
Operating quadrants: 2B = two quadrants; 4B = four quadrants
Output rated current [A]
Special converter for inductive loads
TPD32-EV-CU-...
External bridge control unit.
Two series are available. These differ according to the maximum supply voltage:
TPD32-EV-230/500
Mains supply voltage up to 3 x 500 V
TPD32-EV-575/690
Mains supply voltage up to 3 x 690 V
TPD32-EV-CU -XXX / XXX -THYX -XX
Output field current: 40A, 70A
External bridge control: THY1 = single SCR per branch, THY2 = 2 SCRs in parallel
External bridge control unit
Instruction manual
21
The available size are listed in the following table:
35
A1
40
35
1500 1300
70
56
A2
70
56
1700 1350
110
88
A3
110
88
1800 1400
140
112
A3
140
112
2000 1500
185
148
A3
185
148
2400 1800
280
224
B1
280
224
2700 2000
350
280
B1
350
280
2900 2200
420
336
B1
420
336
3300 2350
500
400
B1
500
400
1010
900
560
360
560
360
1400 1150
650
450
B2
650
450
1700 1350
700
490
700
490
770
560
770
560
TPD32 EV-575
TPD32 EV-690
230 ... 575Vac

10%, 3ph
230 ... 690Vac

10%, 3ph
900
650
1000
750
1050
750
1000
800
1050
850
1300
920
1300
980
1300
980
1400
1000
1600
1200
1900
1450
2000
1500
2100
1650
2300
1800
2400
1850
[A]
1200 1000
1500 1300
1700 1350
1800 1400
2000 1500
2400 1800
2700 2000
1400 1150
1700 1350
2000 1500
2000 1500
2400 1800
2400 1800
2900 2200
3300 2350
1010
900
900
650
2700 2000
2700 2000
1000
750
3300 2350
3300 2350
1050
750
1000
800
1050
850
1300
920
1300
980
1300
980
1400 1000
1600 1200
1900 1450
2000 1500
50/60 Hz 5%
[A]
50/60 Hz 5%
TPD32 EV-500
230 ... 500Vac
10%, 3ph
[Hz]
Idn, Rated output current (American) (1)
40
[Vac] [Vac]
Grid frequency
TPD32 EV-690
1200 1000
230 ... 690Vac

10%, 3ph
Idn, Rated output current (American) (1)

17
TPD32 EV-500
Idn, Rated output current (Standard)

20
230 ... 500Vac

10%, 3ph
Grid frequency
Construction type
Construction type
A1
Four-quadrant: 4B
Four-quadrant: 4B
[A]
Two-quadrant: 2B
Two-quadrant: 2B
[A]
TPD32 EV-...-NA
American sizes
TPD32 EV-...-NA
American sizes
[Vac] [Vac] [Vac] [Hz]

17
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
Uln AC
Mains voltage
20
Uln AC
Mains voltage
Idn, Rated output current (Standard)
Table 2.1.1: Converter size
2100 1650
2300 1800
2400 1850
(1) Factory setting overload 150%.
The converter choice is made on the basis of the motor rated current and of the available AC input voltage. The
output rated current must be higher or equal to the one required by the used motor.
22
TPD32-EV
Functions and features (Overview)

The devices of the TPD32-EV series are developed as converters with excellent regulation features and a wide
function range.
Integrated field converter.
- Galvanic separation and high impedance between the power and the regulation section.
- Galvanic separation between the regulation section and the digital I/O terminals.
- Differential analog inputs.
- Diagnostic LED module (KC-TPD32-EV) supplied as a standard and mounted on the drive front cover
- Removable optional Keypad (KB-TPD32-EV)
- START UP menu which makes set-up easier.
Simple operation of the device
- via terminal strip
- via keypad with a back-lit keypad
- via a default set PC program and RS485 serial interface
- via a connection with a Field Bus (option), PROFIBUS DP CANopen and DeviceNet.
Stored messages concerning the last 10 faults and indication of the operation time.
Separate configuration of the drive behaviour for each message in an alarm situation.
Automatic change into an armature feedback because of the interruption of the speed feedback signal (only in
constant torque mode).
Overload control
Three freely configurable analog inputs on the standard device.
Widening of digital inputs and of digital, analog outputs via a option card.
Reference assignation and display of the feedback values as a percentage or in a dimension which can be defined
by the user.
Possibility of a speed and torque regulation
Adaptive of the speed regulator
Current predictive regulator with an automatic adaptation.
Motor potentiometer function (increase / decrease speed command).
Jog function.
8 internal speed references.
5 internal linear or S-shaped ramps.
Internal signal conditioning (gains, min/max limits, offset....).
Function widening available for specific applications (option).
Instruction manual
23
2.2 UPON DELIVERY INSPECTION PROCEDURES

Storage, Transport
A high degree of care is taken in packing the converters of the TPD32-EV series and preparing them for delivery.
They should only be transported with suitable transport equipment (see weight data). Observe the instructions
printed on the packaging. This also applies when the device is unpacked up to when it is installed in the control
cabinet.
On delivery check the following:
- the packaging for any external damage
- whether the delivery note matches your order.
Open the packaging with suitable tools. Check whether
- any parts were damaged during transport
- the device type corresponds to your order
In the event of any damage or of an incomplete or incorrect delivery please notify the sales offices responsible
immediately.
The devices should only be stored in dry rooms within the temperature ranges specified.
Note!
A certain degree of moisture condensation is permissible if this arises from changes in temperature (see section 3.1, Permissible Ambient Conditions) This does not, however, apply
when the devices are in operation. Ensure always that there is no moisture condensation in
devices that are connected to the power supply!
2.2.1 Device setting

The converters of the TPD32-EV series can operate connected to an AC input three-phase voltage from 230V to
690V. Inside this voltage range the device setting is carried out on the basis of the motor rated current. Therefore
the converter rated current must be higher or the same as the motor rated one.
If an overload is necessary, the setting is carried out according to the example mentioned in section 6.14.6,
Overload control, so that the overcurrent must not be supplied in a continuative way from the type of the
chosen converter.
Note!
24
A reduction factor should be considered if the converter is installed at altitudes of over 3,300
feet (1000 m) above sea level and at higher temperatures (see section 3.1, Permissible ambient conditions).
TPD32-EV
Example for a 15kW motor

AC input voltage:
400 V, 3Ph
1. Two quadrant functioning

Nameplate data:

Power
Armature Voltage
Armature Current
Field Voltage
Field Current
15 kW
470 VDC
37,6 Amps
310 VDC
0.8 Amps
Choice criteria:

400 V, 3Ph
37.6A < 40 A
0.8 A < 10 A
see section AC Input

see section AC Ouput
see section AC Ouput
Chosen converter:
TPD32-EV-500/600-40-2B
The converter can supply 1,06 of motor rated current continously. If higher overload values are required, see
section 6.14.6, Overload control.
2. Four quadrant functioning

Nameplate data:

Power
Armature Voltage
Armature Current
Field Voltage
Field Current
15 kW
420 VDC
42 Amps
310 VDC
0,8 Amps
Choice criteria:

400 V, 3Ph
42 A < 70 A
0,8 A < 10 A
see section AC Input

see section AC Output
see section AC Output
Chosen converter:
TPD32-EV-500/520-70-4B
The converter can supply 1,66 of motor rated current continously. If higher overload values are required, see
section 6.14.6, Overload control.
Instruction manual
25
2.3 SPECIFICATIONS
2.3.1 Standards
General:
EN 61800-1, EN 60146-1-1.
Safety:
EN 61800-5-1, EN 50178
Clearances and creepage distances:

Overvoltage category for circuits connected directly to the mains: III; pollution degree:
2. Double or reinforced insulation/safe separation from live parts of decisive voltage
class C; see EN 61800-5 4.2.3.
Oscillation test:
EN 60721-3-3 class 3M1, EN 60068-2-6, test Fc.
Climatic conditions: EN 60721-3-3, class 3K3. EN 60068-2-2, test Bd.
EMC:
EN 61800-3. See Guide to the electromagnetic compatibility.
Rated mains voltage: IEC 60038.
Protection degree:
According to EN 60529,

IP20 for types A, B, C; IP00 for types D and E.
UL/cUL approval:
For TPD32-EV--NA models (sizes TPD32-EV--E-NA not included).
Attention!
The DC drive is suitable for use under the environmental service conditions (climate, mechanical, pollution, etc.) defined as usual service conditions according to EN61800-1.
2.3.2 AC Input
Table 2.3.2.1: AC input voltages
DC Drive series
Power section
(U/V/W terminals)
Field circuit
(U1/V1 terminals)
TPD32-EV-500/...
TPD32-EV-575/...
TPD32-EV-690/...
3 x 230 V 10 %*
3 x 400 V 10 %*
3 x 440 V 10 %*
3 x 460 V 10 %*
3 x 480 V 10 %*
3 x 500 V 10 %*
3 x 230 V 10 %*
3 x 400 V 10 %*
3 x 440 V 10 %*
3 x 460 V 10 %*
3 x 480 V 10 %*
3 x 500 V 10 %*
3 x 575 V 10 %*
3 x 230 V 10 %*
3 x 400 V 10 %*
3 x 440 V 10 %*
3 x 460 V 10 %*
3 x 480 V 10 %*
3 x 500 V 10 %*
3 x 575 V 10 %*
3 x 690 V 10 %*
Power supply regulation

section
(U2/V2 terminals)
50/60 Hz 5 %
50/60 Hz 5 %
1 x 230 V 10 %*
1 x 400 V 10 %*
1 x 460 V 10 %*
50/60 Hz 5 %
50/60 Hz 5 %
1 x 115 V 15 % **
or
1 x 230 V 15 % **
50 / 60 Hz 5 %
TPD32-EV-CU-230/500-THY.-..
3 x 230...500V 10 %
50/60 Hz 5 %
TPD32-EV-CU-575/690-THY.-..
3 x 575...690V 10 %
50/60 Hz 5 %
TPD32-EV-FC-200/...
TPD32-EV-FC-500/...
3 x 60...200V 10 %
3 x 230...500V 10 %
50/60 Hz 5 %
50/60 Hz 5 %
*

**
With the indicated tolerance values the output voltage complies the DIN 40030 standard.
With wider tolerances the max output voltage chenges accordingly.
For operation at 115 V, from sizes 280 A to 1050 A, insert a jumper between terminals SA SB located at the top of the converters.
26
TPD32-EV
During start-up the threshold for the undervoltage message has to be set via the Undervolt thr parameter
(standard: 230 V).
Note!

Note!

Caution!
According the input voltage the switch S15.7/8 on the regulation board must be set as follows:
TPD32-EV-500/...

S15.7 = ON
S15.8 = OFF
TPD32-EV-575/...

S15.7 = OFF
S15.8 = ON
TPD32-EV-690/...

S15.7 = OFF
S15.8 = ON
TPD32-EV-FC-200/... (from fw 10.21)
S15.7 = ON
S15.8 = OFF
TPD32-EV-FC-500/... (from fw 10.20)
S15.7 = ON
S15.8 = OFF
As for the operation of the TPD32-EV converters AC input reactors and interference suppression filters are required. See section 4.10, Reactors/Filters.
The converters above 770 A and the AC input reactors have a discharge currents to ground
higher than 3.5 mA. EN 50178 states that beside the ground conductor another ground connection should be laid.
Due to the increased discharge current involved, a fixed ground connection (without connectors) for the filters of the TPD32-EV converter is required.
Instruction manual
27
Current /Power on AC input

The values showed on table below are refered to a converter functioning at nominal current
IdN (armature) and IPN (field).
Note!
Table 2.3.2.2: AC input curents

American
Current on the
AC Input
Standard
Current on the
AC Input
Current on the field

AC Input
TPD32-EV-.../...-17-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-35-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-56-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-88-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-112-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-148-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-224-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-336-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-400-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-360-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-450-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-490-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-560-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-650-..-C
TPD32-EV-./...-750-2B-C
TPD32-EV-575...-750-4B-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-800-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-850-4B-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-920-2B-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-980-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1000-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1200-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1450-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1500-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1650-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1800-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1850-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-900-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1000-2B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1150-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1300-2B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1350-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1400-2B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1500-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1800-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2200-2B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2350-..-E
14.6 A
30.1 A
48.1 A
75.6 A
96.3 A
127.2 A
192.6 A
240.8 A
289 A
344 A
310 A
387 A
421,4 A
481.2 A
559 A
645 A
645 A
688 A
731 A
791,2 A
843 A
860 A
1032 A
1247 A
1290 A
1419 A
1548 A
1591 A
774 A
860 A
989 A
1118 A
1161 A
1204 A
1290 A
1548 A
1720 A
1892 A
2021 A
TPD32-EV-.../...-20-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-40-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-70-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-110-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-140-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-185-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-350-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-420-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-500-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-560-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-650-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-700-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-770-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-900-..-C
TPD32-EV-575/...-1000-2B-C
TPD32-EV-575/...-1050-4B-C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1000-..-C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1050-4B-C
TPD32-EV-690/...-1300-2B-D
TPD32-EV-575/...-1300-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1400-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1600-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1900-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2100-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2300-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2400-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1010-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1200-2B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1400-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1500-2B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1700-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1800-2B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2400-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2700-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2900-2B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-3300-..-E
17.2 A
34.4 A
60.2 A
94.6 A
120.4 A
159.1 A
240.8 A
301 A
361.2 A
430 A
482,2 A
559 A
602,7 A
662.2 A
774,9 A
903 A
904 A
860 A
904 A
1119 A
1119 A
1205 A
1378 A
1636 A
1722 A
1808 A
1980 A
2066 A
860 A
1032 A
1205 A
1290 A
1464 A
1542 A
1720 A
2064
2313 A
2485 A
2827 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
14 A
14 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
25 A
20 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
70 A
70 A
70 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
70 A
70 A
70 A
70 A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-20-..-A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-40-..-A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-70-..-A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-110-..-A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-140-..-A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-185-..-A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-350-..-B
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-420-..-B
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-500-..-B
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-650-..-B
17.2 A
34.4 A
60.2 A
94.6 A
120.4 A
159.1 A
240.8 A
301 A
361.2 A
430 A
559 A
28
TPD32-EV
2.3.3 Output
Note!
It is not possible to connect an external voltage to the converter output terminals! It is not
even possible to disconnect the motor from the device output while the drive is active.
In normal cases no leveling choke is necessary. It must be taken into account, anyway, that some motor producers
prescribe such a choke according to the type of the motor used. In this case it must inserted on the motor cable.
The stated currents refer to the continuous operation with an ambient temperature of 104F (40C).
Output current
Armature circuit
Table 2.3.3.1: TPD32-EV Output currents
American
Type
Standard
Armature current
(Terminals C/D)
TPD32-EV-.../...-148-..-A
Continuous
curr. IdN with
Ta = 104F
*
17 A
35 A
56 A
88 A
112 A
148 A
Max. current
(with overload)
**
34 A
70 A
112 A
172 A
224 A
296 A
TPD32-EV-.../...-224-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-336-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-400-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-360-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-450-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-490-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-560-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-650-..-C
TPD32-EV-./...-750-2B-C
TPD32-EV-575...-750-4B-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-800-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-850-4B-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-920-2B-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-980-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1000-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1200-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1450-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1500-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1650-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1800-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1850-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-900-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1000-2B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1150-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1300-2B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1350-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1400-2B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1500-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1800-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-..-E
224 A
280 A
336 A
400 A
360 A
450 A
490 A
560 A
650 A
750 A
750 A
800 A
850 A
920 A
980 A
1000 A
1200 A
1450 A
1500 A
1650 A
1800 A
1850 A
900 A
1000 A
1150 A
1300 A
1350 A
1400 A
1500 A
1800 A
2000 A
448 A
560 A
672 A
800 A
720 A
900 A
980 A
1120 A
1300 A
1500 A
1500 A
1600 A
1700A
1840 A
1960 A
2000 A
2400 A
2900 A
3000 A
3300 A
3600 A
3700 A
1800 A
2000 A
2300 A
2600 A
2700 A
2800 A
3000 A
3600 A
4000 A
TPD32-EV-.../...-17-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-35-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-56-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-88-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-112-..-A
Type
Armature current
(Terminals C/D)
TPD32-EV-.../...-185-..-A
Continuous
curr. IdN with
Ta = 104F
*
20 A
40 A
70 A
110 A
140 A
185 A
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-350-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-420-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-500-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-560-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-650-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-700-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-770-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-900-..-C
TPD32-EV-575/...-1000-2B-C
TPD32-EV-575/...-1050-4B-C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1000-..-C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1050-4B-C
TPD32-EV-690/...-1300-2B-D
TPD32-EV-575/...-1300-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1400-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1600-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1900-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2100-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2300-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2400-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1010-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1200-2B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1400-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1500-2B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1700-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1800-2B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2400-..-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2700-..-E
280 A
350 A
420 A
500 A
560 A
650 A
700 A
770 A
900 A
1000 A
1050 A
1000 A
1050 A
1300 A
1300 A
1400 A
1600 A
1900 A
2000 A
2100 A
2300 A
2400 A
1010 A
1200 A
1400 A
1500 A
1700 A
1800 A
2000 A
2400 A
2700 A
TPD32-EV-.../...-20-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-40-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-70-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-110-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-140-..-A
Instruction manual
Field converter
(Term. C1 / D1)
Max. current Continuous curr.

(with over- IFN with Ta = 40C
load)
*
**
40 A
10 A
80 A
10 A
140 A
10 A
220 A
14 A
280 A
14 A
370 A
14 A
560 A
700 A
840 A
1000 A
1120 A
1300 A
1400 A
1540 A
1800 A
2000 A
2100 A
2000 A
2100 A
2600 A
2600 A
2800 A
3200 A
3800 A
4000 A
4200 A
4600 A
4800 A
2020 A
2400 A
2800 A
3000 A
3400 A
3600 A
4000 A
4800 A
5400 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
25 A
20 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
25 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
70 A
70 A
70 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
70 A
70 A
29
TPD32-EV-.../...-2200-2B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2350-..-E
*
**
2200 A
2350 A
4400 A
4700 A
TPD32-EV-.../...-2900-2B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-3300-..-E
2900 A
3300 A
Current reduction for higher temperatures, see section 3.1, Permissible ambient conditions.
The overload size and duration depend on the overload cycle, see section 6.14.6, Overload control.
Note!
5800 A
6600 A

70 A
70 A
The field motor current can sometimes be very small compared with rated field current of
the converter. In order to provide regulation during Voltage control of the motor, follow the
described instructions to change the Flux current max of the converter. In this case the Nom
field scale parameter must be set with the new rated field current value.
Table 2.3.3.2: TPD32-EV-FC Output currents
Type
Field converter
(Terminals C/D)
Continuous curr. IdN
with Ta = 40C (104F)
Max. current
(with overload)
(*)
(**)
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-185-..-A
20 A
40 A
70 A
110 A
140 A
185 A
40 A
80 A
140 A
220 A
280 A
370 A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-350-..-B
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-420-..-B
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-500-..-B
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-650-..-B
280 A
350 A
420 A
500 A
650 A
560 A
700 A
840 A
1000 A
1300 A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-20-..-A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-40-..-A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-70-..-A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-110-..-A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-140-..-A
Table 2.3.3.3: TPD32-EV-CU Output currents

Type
TPD32-EV-CU-.../....-THY1-40
TPD32-EV-CU-.../....-THY2-40
TPD32-EV-CU-.../...-THY1-70
TPD32-EV-CU-.../...-THY2-70
*
**
***
30
Armature current (***)

(Terminals C/D)
Continuous current (***) (settable)
IdN with Ta = 40C (104F)
Field converter
(Terminals C1 / D1)
Max. current
(with overload)
(*)
(**)
4 .... 20000 A
(currents range managed by CU)
up to 200%
Current reduction for higher temperatures, see section 3.1, Permissible ambient conditions.
The overload size and duration depend on the overload cycle, see section 6.14.6, Overload control.
External power bridge.
TPD32-EV
Continuous curr. IFN with Ta =

40C
*
40 A
40 A
70 A
70 A

Field circuit
The TPD32-EV regulation card is shipped with the field current feedback resistor dipswitches S14 calibrated
for the maximum rating of the field package capacity for each size TPD32-EV .
Compare the actual motor field data to the maximum rating of the field package of the TPD32-EV model supplied (see table 2.3.3.1), and to the field calibration dipswitch S14, as noted below.
-
-
For fixed field current operation, if the actual motor (base) field current 10% of the maximum rating of
the field package it is required to calibrate the field current feedback scaling using dipswitch S14.
For weak field operation, also referred as CEMF field control or crossover field control, if the top base
speed Motor nom flux 10% of the maximum rating of the field package it is required to calibrate the
field current feedback scaling using dipswitch S14.
Calibration to the exact field current setting is not required, as long as the above conditions are met.
Calibration is not required if the field control is provided by a separate field converter.
In order to obtain a current setting value different from those stated in the table, use the following formulas to
calculate the resistance to be used between the terminals LA and LB on the regulation card. In this case all the
switches have to be set to zero (OFF).
1) For sizes TPD32-EV-.../...-20-..-A (17-NA-..-A) ... up to TPD32-EV-.../...-1050-..-C (850-NA-..-C) :
Resistance = 1667 / field current (A).
Table 2.3.3.4-A: Field current resistors (20A ...1050A / 17A ... 850A, types A/B/C)
Switch ohms
168,5 Ohm
333 Ohm
182 Ohm
36,4 Ohm
845 Ohm
1668 Ohm
Nom flux curr

1,0 A
2,0 A
3,0 A
5,0 A
9,9 A
12,9 A
14,2 A
17,1 A
20,0 A
24,1 A
25,1 A
S14-1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
S14-2
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
S14-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S14-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
S14-5
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
S14-6
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
S14-7
S14-8
Not used
Equivalent
resistance
1668 Ohm
845 Ohm
560,9 Ohm
333,3 Ohm
168,5 Ohm
129,6 Ohm
117,7 Ohm
97,3 Ohm
83,1 Ohm
69,3 Ohm
66,5 Ohm
2) For sizes bigger than TPD32-EV-.../...-1050-..-C (850-NA-..-C) ... up to TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-..-D

(1500-NA-..-D):
Resistance = 3332/field current (A).
Table 2.3.3.4-B: Field current resistors (>1050A ... 2000A / 850A ... 1500A, type D)
Switch ohms
168,5 Ohm
333 Ohm
182 Ohm
36,4 Ohm
845 Ohm
1668 Ohm
Nom flux curr

10,0 A
20,0 A
30,0 A
40,0 A
S14-1
OFF
ON
ON
ON
S14-2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
S14-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
S14-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
S14-5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
S14-6
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Instruction manual
S14-7
S14-8
Not used
Equivalent
resistance
333,3 Ohm
168,5 Ohm
111,9 Ohm
83,1 Ohm
31
3) For sizes bigger than TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-..-D (1500-NA-..-D) ... up to TPD32-EV-.../...-2400-..-D

(1850-NA-..-D) :
Table 2.3.3.4-C: Field current resistors (>2000...2400A / 1500...1850A, type D)
Switch ohms
168,5 Ohm
333 Ohm
182 Ohm
36,4 Ohm
845 Ohm
1668 Ohm
Nom flux curr

10,0 A
20,0 A
50,0 A
70,0 A
S14-1
ON
ON
OFF
ON
S14-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
S14-3
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
S14-4
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
S14-5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
S14-6
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
S14-7
S14-8
Equivalent
resistance
168,5 Ohm
83,1 Ohm
32,8 Ohm
23,9 Ohm
Not used
4) For sizes bigger than TPD32-EV-.../...-1200-..-E (1000-NA-..-E) ... up to TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-..-E

(1500-NA-..-E):
Table 2.3.3.4-D: Field current resistors (>1200...2000A / 1000...1500A, type E)
Switch ohms
168,5 Ohm
333 Ohm
182 Ohm
36,4 Ohm
845 Ohm
1668 Ohm
Nom flux curr

10,0 A
20,0 A
40,0 A
S14-1
OFF
ON
ON
S14-2
ON
OFF
OFF
S14-3
OFF
OFF
ON
S14-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
S14-5
OFF
OFF
OFF
S14-6
OFF
OFF
OFF
S14-7
S14-8
Equivalent
resistance
332 Ohm
168 Ohm
83 Ohm
Not used
5) For sizes bigger than TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-..-E (1500-NA-..-E) ... up to TPD32-EV-.../...-3300-..-E

(2350-NA-..-E):
Table 2.3.3.4-E: Field current resistors (>2000A / 1500A, type E)
Switch ohms
168,5 Ohm
333 Ohm
182 Ohm
36,4 Ohm
845 Ohm
1668 Ohm
Nom flux curr

14 A
24 A
46 A
70 A
S14-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
S14-2
ON
ON
OFF
ON
S14-3
ON
ON
OFF
ON
S14-4
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
S14-5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
S14-6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
S14-7
S14-8
Not used
Equivalent
resistance
117,6 Ohm
69,2 Ohm
36,4 Ohm
23,8 Ohm
6) For sizes TPD32-EV-CU-...

Table 2.3.3.4-F: Field current resistors Sizes TPD32-EV-CU-...
Type of field circuit
40A
(TPD32-EV-CU-XXX/
XXX-THYX-40)
70A
(TPD32-EV-CU-XXX/
XXX-THYX-70)
32
Full scale value

1A
2A
4A
6A
10A
20A
30A
40A
1A
5A
10A
20A
50A
70A
168,5 Ohm
S14-1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
333 Ohm
S14-2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
182 Ohm
S14-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
36,4 Ohm
S14-4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
845 Ohm
S14-5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
TPD32-EV
1668 Ohm
S14-6
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
3333,3 Ohm
S14-7
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
S14-8
Not used
Field current full scale values other than those shown in the table can be obtained by connecting a resistor of a
suitable value between terminals LA and LB on the regulation card. This value is calculated as follows:
Type of field circuit
Resistance Rla-lb [Ohm]
40A
Rla-lb = 3333,3 / field current f.s.v. [A]
70A
Rla-lb = 1666,6 / field current f.s.v. [A]
Dip-switch S14
All OFF
Output voltage
The below mentioned output voltages take into account an AC input undervoltage within the stated tolerance
limits and a voltage drop of 4% due to the inserted AC input reactors. It is the same as the rated armature voltage
suggested for the connected motor.
Armature circuit
Table 2.3.3.5: Armature circuit output voltages
Max output voltage UdN (terminals C/D)
AC input voltage
(terminals U / V / W)
Two quadrant converter
Four quadrant converter
3 x 230 V 10 %
260 V
240 V
3 x 400 V 10 %
470 V *
420 V *
3 x 440 V 10 %
530 V
460 V
3 x 460 V 10 %
560 V
480 V
3 x 480 V 10 %
580 V
500 V
3 x 500 V 10 %
600 V
520 V *
3 x 575 V 10%
680 V
600 V
3 x 690 V 10%
810 V
720 V
Voltage measured as DIN 40 030 (09/93)
Field circuit
Table 2.3.3.6: Field circuit output voltages
AC input voltage
(terminals U1 / V1 )
*
**
Output field voltage UFN ** (terminals C1 / D1)

Fixed field
Adjustable field
1 x 230 V 15 %
200 V *
200 V *
1 x 400 V 15 %
310 V *
310 V *
1 x 460 V 10%
360 V
360 V
Voltage measured as DIN 40 030 (09/93)

The max field voltage is equal to 0.85 x ULN
Field circuit TPD32-EV-FC version

Table 2.3.3.7: Field circuit output voltages TPD32-EV-FC
AC input voltage
(terminals U / V /N )
Max Output field voltage UdN ** (terminals C / D)

2B
4B
115 V
3 x 200 V
210 V
3 x 230 V
260 V
240 V
3 x 400 V
470 V
420 V
3 x 500 V
600 V
520 V
3 x 110 V
Instruction manual
33
2.3.4 Control section

Enables
0 / 15...30 V
3.2...6.4 mA (approx. 5 mA at 24 V)
Analog inputs
option
0... 10 V
0.25mAmax
0...20 mA
10 V max
4...20 mA
10 V max
Analog outputs
0... 10 V
5 mA max each output
Digital inputs
0 / 15...30 V
3.2...6.4 mA (approx. 5 mA at 24 V)
Digital outputs
supply
+ 15...35 V
signal
+ 15...35 V
20 mA max each output
Encoder inputs

Sinusoidal
voltage
1 V pp
current
8.3 mA pp each channel (input resistance = 124 ohm)
pulses per rev
min 600
max frequency
150 kHz
max cable length
screened, 150m (0.75 mm2) / 125m (0.5 mm2) / 55m (0.22 mm2)
Digital
voltage
5V TTL / 15...24V HTL (H logic)
current

pulses per rev
max frequency
max cable length
max 9999
4.5 mA / 6.8 ... 10.9 mA each channel with H logic

min 600
max 9999
150 kHz
screened, 150m (0.75 mm2) / 125m (0.5 mm2) / 55m (0.22 mm2)
Analog tachogenerator input

voltage

22.7 / 45.4 / 90.7 / 181.6 / 302.9 V max,

depending on the switch S4 setting
current
8 mA full scale
max cable length
screened, the max length depends on the installation, typical 150m
Internal supply voltage

max load

+ 5 V

160 mA

encoder connector, PIN 7/9

(only for sinusoidal encoder)
+ 10 V
10 mA
terminal 7
- 10 V
10 mA
terminal 8
+ 24 V
200 mA
terminal 19
encoder connector, PIN 2/9

(only for digital encoder)
tolerance
+ 10 V
3 % 1)
- 10 V
3 % 1)
+ 24 V
+ 20 ... 30 V, not stabilized
1)
The values of the voltages + 10V and -10V are the same. The stated tolerance refers to the voltage width.
34
TPD32-EV
2.3.5 Accuracy
Internal reference voltage ( 10V, terminals 7 or 8):

temperature dependent stability error
100 ppm/C
References

via keypad/serial line/Bus

resolution:

16 Bit or 15 Bit + sign
via terminals (1/2, 3/4, 5/6)

resolution:

linearity

11 Bit + sign
0.1% of the full range value
Analog outputs (TBO only)

resolution:

linearity:

11 Bit + sign
0.5% of the full range value
Speed regulation

for all the operation mode

max speed

digital reference resolution:

analog reference resolution:
8000 rpm
0.25 rpm
0.25 rpm
with sinusoidal encoder

speed feedback resolution:

accuracy

control range

0.25 rpm
typical 0.01%
better than 1:10000
with digital encoder

speed feedback resolution

accuracy

control range

0.5 rpm
typical 0.02%
better than 1:1000
with tachogenerator

speed feedback resolution

accuracy

control range

better than 1:2000

typical 0.1%
better than 1:1000
better than 1:2000

typical 0.2%
better than 1:500
Torque regulation

resolution

accuracy

control range
Instruction manual
35
2.4 DIMENSION AND WEIGHTS

Note!
TPD32-EV-FC-... : reference should be made to the corresponding TPD32-EV Standard sizes.
279.9mm [10,02]
Figure 2.4.1: Type A1 dimensions
266.8mm [10.5]
23.3mm
250mm [9.84]
349.3mm [13.75]
42.8mm
275mm [10.82]
7mm
36
American
Standard
Weight
kg [lbs]
TPD32-EV-.../...-17-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-35-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-20-..
TPD32-EV-.../...-40-..
8.4 [18.5]
8.4 [18.5]
TPD32-EV
349.1mm [11.74]
263.2mm [2.3]
275mm [10.8]
23.25mm
266.8mm [10.5]
7mm
42.75mm
279.9mm [11.02]
237.2mm [9.34]
250mm [9.84]
American
Standard
Weight
kg [lbs]
TPD32-EV-.../...-56-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-70-..-A
8.8[19.4]
Instruction manual
37
349.2mm [13.75]
280mm [11.02]
263.2mm [9.3]
237.2mm [9.34]
266.8mm [10.5]
275mm [10.8]
23.25mm
342mm [13.5]
42.75mm
7mm
250mm [9.84]
38
American
Standard
Weight
kg [lbs]
TPD32-EV-.../...-88-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-110-..-A
10.8 [23.8]
TPD32-EV-.../...-112-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-140-..-A
10.8 [23.8]
TPD32-EV-.../...-148-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-185-..-A
10.8 [23.8]
TPD32-EV
Figure 2.4.4: Type B1 dimensions
325mm [12.8]
343.6mm [13.53]
311mm [12.24]
355mm [14]
388mm [15.27]
6.5mm
375mm [14.76]
357mm [14.05]
275mm [10.82]
American
Standard
Weight
kg [lbs]
TPD32-EV-.../...-224-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B
25.5 [56.2]
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-350-..-B
25.5 [56.2]
TPD32-EV-.../...-336-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-420-..-B
25.5 [56.2]
TPD32-EV-.../...-400-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-500-..-B
25.5 [56.2]
Instruction manual
39
Figure 2.4.5: Type B2 dimensions
355mm [13.97]
373.6mm [14.7]
355mm [13.98]
388mm [12.27]
311mm [12.24]
6.5mm
388mm [15.27]
375mm [14.76]
275mm [10.82]
40
American
Standard
Weight
kg [lbs]
TPD32-EV-.../...-450-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-650-..-B
32 [70.5]
TPD32-EV
Figure 2.4.6: Type C dimensions
512mm [20.16]
42mm
470mm [18.5]
391mm [15.4]
128mm
211mm
30
155mm
155mm
200mm [7.87]
200mm [7.87]
55mm
105.5mm
55mm
M10
241mm
410mm [16.14]
121mm
499mm [19.65]
521mm [20.5]
American
Standard
Weight
kg [lbs]
TPD32-EV-.../...-360-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-560-..-C
61 [134.5]
TPD32-EV-.../...-490-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-700-..-C
61 [134.5]
TPD32-EV-.../...-560-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-770-..-C
61 [134.5]
TPD32-EV-.../...-650-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-900-..-C
65 [143.3]
TPD32-EV-.../...-750-..-C
TPD32-EV-575/...-1000-..-C
72 [158.7]
TPD32-EV-.../...-750-..-C
TPD32-EV-575/...-1050-..-C
72 [158.7]
TPD32-EV-.../...-800-..-C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1000-..-C
72 [158.7]
TPD32-EV-.../...-850-..-C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1050-..-C
72 [158.7]
Instruction manual
41
Figure 2.4.7-A: Type D dimensions
704 mm [27.72]
103.25mm [4.06]
157.5mm
129mm
32mm
215.2mm [8.47]
531mm [20.9]
536mm [21.1]
42
American
Standard
Weight
kg [lbs]
2B
4B
TPD32-EV-.../...-920-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1300-..-D
152 [335.1]
203 [447.5]
TPD32-EV-.../...-980-..-D
TPD32-EV-575/...-1300-..-D
152 [335.1]
203 [447.5]
TPD32-EV-.../...-1000-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1400-..-D
165 [363.8]
215 [474.0]
TPD32-EV-.../...-1200-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1600-..-D
165 [363.8]
215 [474.0]
TPD32-EV-.../...-1450-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1900-..-D
165 [363.8]
215 [474.0]
TPD32-EV-.../...-1500-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-..-D
165 [363.8]
215 [474.0]
TPD32-EV-.../...-1650-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2100-..-D
191 [421.1]
241 [531.3]
TPD32-EV-.../...-1800-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2300-..-D
191 [421.1]
241 [531.3]
TPD32-EV-.../...-1850-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2400-..-D
191 [421.1]
241 [531.3]
TPD32-EV
MAX 1435 mm [56.5]
792mm
83mm
208mm
133mm
1250 mm [49.21]
227.5mm [89.57]
42
80.5mm
129mm [5.08]
436.5mm
696mm [27.4]
Figure 2.4.7-B: Centre-to-centre distance for mounting, type D

544mm [21.42]
359mm
60mm [2.36]
60mm
60mm
15
44.5 25
30
15mm
94mm [3.7]
30mm
127mm
10.5mm
127mm
127mm [5]
127mm
127mm
127mm
15
146
30
27.8
44.5
27.8
44.5
10.5mm
94mm
60
269.5
10mm
25 44.5
25 44.5
25 44.5
10.5
10
1230mm [48.42]
42
127mm
23
16mm
30
44.5 25
15
44.5 25
174mm
127mm
100mm
454.5
100
OPTIONAL U/V/W BARS
Quote in mm
OPTIONAL C/D BARS
Instruction manual
43
Figure 2.4.8: TPD32-EV-CU-... dimensions, External bridge control unit
250mm [9.8]
390.5mm
23.25mm
275mm
294.5mm
19.5mm
397.9mm [15.7]
42.75mm
280mm [11]
19.5mm
7mm
120.4mm
267mm [10.5]
2.5mm
263mm
31mm
44
Model
Type
Weight
kg [lbs]
TPD32-EV-CU-.../...-THY1-40
TPD32-EV-CU-.../...-THY2-40
TPD32-EV-CU-.../...-THY1-70
TPD32-EV-CU-.../...-THY2-70
A1
A1
A1
A1
8.4 [18.5]
8.4 [18.5]
8.4 [18.5]
8.4 [18.5]
TPD32-EV
Figure 2.4.9: TPD32-EV-500/600-1200-2B-E dimensions

500
125
250
125
240
275
240
240
150
21
28
28
40
=
50
25
50
30
152
24 20
45
152
70
Morsettiera
ventilatore
PV 93
54
100
24
79
ARIA
34
80
200
42
130
150
665
T3
107
120
50
260
360
DETT. "B"
T2
107
n 4 fori 11
50
70
T1
107
T5
T4
T6
108
D
50
32
n4 fori 11
69
170
M12
D
20
22
95
22
U
58
V
152
DETT. "A"
152
10
480
30
10
50
85
153
57
50
265
500
50x8
DETT. "A"
Scala 1:2.5
DETT. "B"
Scala 1:2.5
12.5
n4 fori 9
8
M4
12.5
25
12.5
25
12.5
35
12.5
n2 fori 9
12.5
25
50x8
Values in mm.
Characteristics
WEIGHT
FAN UNIT
65 kg
Tot. capacity 900 m3/h
Single-phase motor 230 V 50/60 Hz, 0.4A 6265 dBA
Instruction manual
45
Figure 2.4.10: TPD32-EV-500/600-1500...2000-2B-E and TPD32-EV-690/810-1010...1400-2B-E dimensions

500
125
250
Morsettiera
ventilatore
50
=
50
70
55
80
=
36
40 5
152
24 28
152
ARIA
28
28
PV 93
21
130
79
24
54
150
34
80
200
42
100
240
240
150
70
275
125
240
107
107
107
T1
T4
T2
T3
57
50
260
225
n 6 fori 11
55
220
550
855
225
DETT. "B"
T6
T5
30
75
110
n 4 fori 11
50
154
M12
45
22
95
22
U
30
58
152
85
DETT. "A"
152
80
153
10
480
10
265
500
12.5
25
12.5
12.5
25
60
n4 fori 9
Values in mm.
Characteristics
WEIGHT
FAN UNIT
46
75 kg
Single-phase motor 230 V 50/60 Hz, 0.4A 6265 dBA
TPD32-EV
n4 fori 9
12.5
M4
DETT. "B"
Scala 1:2.5
25
50x8 (1400/1500A)
50x10 (1800/2000A)
12.5
DETT. "A"
Scala 1:2.5
12.5
25
50x10
Figure 2.4.11: TPD32-EV-500/600-2400-2B-E and TPD32-EV-690/810-1700...2000-2B-E dimensions

570
143
284
143
14
290
35
79
21
Morsettiera
ventilatore
200
192
=
40 5
24
60
70
50
45
70
18
28
=
192
ARIA
200
28
54
PV 93
214
24
47
150
325
280
280
60
40
T3
859
T2
225
T1
DETT. "B"
140
140
n 6 fori 11
225
260
60
170
140
550
D
T5
T6
50
95
22
62.5
60
n6 fori 11
30
22
62
M12
40
121
197
T4
40
192
192
10
600
30
DETT. "A"
80
80
8
80
233
10
360
620
DETT. "A"
Scala 1:2.5
DETT. "B"
Scala 1:2.5
60x8 (1700A)
60x10 (2000/2400A)
n4 fori 11
15
M4
15
30
15
15
15
30
65
30
n4 fori 11
15
30
60x10 (1700/2000A)
60x12 (2300/2400A)
Values in mm.
Characteristics
WEIGHT
FAN UNIT
115 kg
Single-phase motor 230 V 50/60 Hz, 0.5/0.6 A 6569 dBA
Instruction manual
47
666
165
336
365
165
320
330
15
320
21
200
=
200
24
75
60
23
222
=
40
80
40 10
50
40
=
222
DETT."B"
Aria
MORSETTIERA
VENTILATORE
215
24
79
E
28
54
150
47 35
PV 93
100
C
69
113
69
113
69
110
660
113
975
T3
T2
160
270
T1
280
n 6 fori 11
T6
280
T5
259
T4
160
40
70
190
M12
n 6 fori 11
23
23
100
50
40
32.5
V
70
222
222
10
90
10
90
692
255
DETT."A"
90
10
395
712
60x12
M4
4 FORI 18
8
40
15
40
30
65
20
20
30
15
20
15
2(80x8)
4 FORI 13
DETT."A"
Sc. 1:2.5
Values in mm.
Characteristics
WEIGHT
FAN UNIT
48
155 kg
Single-phase motor 230 V 50/60 Hz; 1/1.3A 7274dBA
TPD32-EV
DETT."B"
Sc. 1:2.5

666
336
165
365
165
320
330
15
320
21
200
60
23
=
222
DETT."B"
Aria
28
200
MORSETTIERA
VENTILATORE
215
79
24
35
PV 93
40 54
150
47
222
80
40 10
D
24
50
40
75
100
C
220
69
113
69
113
69
60
560
113
875
T3
T2
(935x2900A)
T1
230
160
160
n 6 fori 11
T4
T6
265
230
T5
70
190
M12
35
50
40
n 6 fori 11
23
40
100
(160)
23
32.5
V
70
222
222
10
90
10
90
692
255
DETT."A"
90
10
395
712
60x12 (2400/2700A)
(80x10 2900A)
M4
4 FORI 18
8
40
40
15
(20)
30
(40)
65
(90)
20
20
30
(40)
15
(20)
20
15
(20)
2(80x8)
4 FORI 13 (18)
DETT."A"
Sc. 1:2.5
DETT."B"
Sc. 1:2.5
Values in mm.
Characteristics
WEIGHT
FAN UNIT
140 kg
Single-phase motor 230 V 50/60 Hz; 1/1.3A 7274dBA
Instruction manual
49
Figure 2.4.14: TPD32-EV-500/600-3300-2B-E and TPD32-EV-690/810-3300-2B-E dimensions
Morsettiera
ventilatore
50
PV 93
250
Air
30
330
T3
270
T2
960
T1
290
120
680
58
T6
T5
299.5
290
T4
n 6 fori 11
M12
50
n 6 fori 11
32.5
80
80
150
237
71
98
415
U
V
W
242
242
10
10
764
50
partic. A
Values in mm.
Characteristics
50
197 kg
Single-phase motor 230 V 50/60 Hz 1 A 7274 dBA
TPD32-EV
30
35
17.5
2x70x10
25
WEIGHT
FAN UNIT
8
1
60
17.5
3
1
30
784
120x12
30
partic. B
60
Figure 2.4.15: TPD32-EV-500/520-1500...2000-4B-E and TPD32-EV-690/720-1010...1400-4B-E dimensions

500
125
250
Pos. 1 con fusib. 660 V = 337

Pos. 2 con fusib. 1250 V = 375
125
275
240
240
240
=
80
200
42 34
ARIA
40 5
28
152
=
50
G1
24
30
T2
n6 fori 11
T3
T1
550
274
181
225
35
181
80
Morsettiera
ventilatore
130
24
152
=
21
50
28
54
100
79
PV 93
92
107
T1
T2
T3
225
107
107
50
65
230
550
1405
110
72
274
=
225
n6 fori 11
120
50
75
50
G2
140
50
T5
T6
550
T4
DETT."B"
T4
T5
225
343
92
T6
75
30
110
M12
50
n4 fori 11
22
22
95
45
30
58
152
80
152
10
480
10
153
DETT."A"
80
500
50x8 (1000/1500A)
50x10 (1800/2000A)
M4
12.5
n4 fori 9
n4 fori 9
25
25
60
25
12.5
DETT. "B"
Scala 1:2.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
DETT. "A"
Scala 1:3
12.5
25
50x10
Values in mm.
Characteristics
WEIGHT
FAN UNIT
130 kg
Single-phase motor 230 V 50/60 Hz, 0.4A 6265dBA
Instruction manual
51
570
284
325
28
40
192
=
60
45
40
=
40 5
G1
n12 fori 11
24
DETT. "B"
18
200
=
192
=
21
Morsettiera
ventilatore
ARIA
79
200
35
PV 93
215
54
154
47
24
280
290
15
143
280
50
143
176
225
=
176
=
=
550
280
T3
T2
T1
C
92
280
=
340
T5
T4
121
1410
150
550
T6
T5
225
T4
129
G2
60
72
50 50
150
250
550
T3
225
T2
T1
225
140
140
140
T6
M12
40
120
40
n6 fori 11
50
30
U
62.5
22
192
W
192
10
95
22
32.5
DETT."A"
600
80
80
10
233
80
620
Pos.1 con fus. 660V=420
Pos.2 con fus. 1250V=443
DETT. "A"
Scala 1:5
DETT. "B"
60x8 (1700A)
(1740/2000A)
Scala 1:5
60x10 (2000A/2400A)
DETT. "B"
(2300/2400A)
Scala 1:5
n4 fori 18
n4 fori 13
15
30
8
M4
15
30
15
15
30
15
30
30
65
60
n4 fori 11
30
60
120x6
Values in mm.
Characteristics
WEIGHT
FAN UNIT
52
220 kg
Single-phase motor 230 V 50/60 Hz 0.5/06 A tot. 6569dBA
TPD32-EV
15
30
60x12
666
365
165
21
Morsettiera
ventilatore
28
40
PV 93
79
75
=
40 10
23
200
=
80
= =
G1
100
24
40
=
222
=
50
24
35
200
320
47
54
35
DETT. "B"
T1
206
280
206
660
=
148
148
148
T1
90
280
T3
140
280
24
G2
70
10
176
70
50 50
40
23
80
= =
140
280
660
1635
T2
70
350
T3
T2
n 12 fori 11
150
320
330
15
336
215
165
T6
416
T4
T6
T5
660
280
T5
T4
M12
35
190
50
40
70
100
40
n6 fori 11
222
222
10
692
DETT. "A"
32.5
90
10
90
10
255
712
90
495
DETT. "B"
DETT. "A"
Scala 1:5
60x12
Scala 1:5
n4 fori 18
15
30
15
30
60
15
30
30
65
60
n4 fori 13
30
M4
120x8
Values in mm.
Characteristics
WEIGHT
FAN UNIT
280 kg
Single-phase motor 230 V 50/60 Hz 1/1.3 A tot. 7174dBA
Instruction manual
53
Figure 2.4.18: TPD32-EV-500/520-3300-4B-E and TPD32-EV-690/720-3300-4B-E dimensions
Values in mm.
Characteristics
WEIGHT
FAN UNIT
54
322 kg
Single-phase motor 230 V 50/60 Hz 1 A tot. 7174dBA
TPD32-EV
Figure 2.4.19: TPD32-EV-690/720-2400...2700-4B-E dimensions
365
666
165
320
320
79
21
Morsettiera
ventilatore
23
40 10
G1
100
75
200
222
=
80
= =
24
40
200
28
=
222
40
DETT. "B"
215
24
35
PV 93
54
150
47
330
15
336
50
165
148
148
148
T1
T2
T3
300
156
156
T3
230
T2
C
T1
560
C
90
n 12 fori 11
70
1435
230
70
140
50 50
G2
230
280
140
560
80
= =
176
70
T6
560
T5
T4
T6
T5
230
T4
340
40
M12
190
35
23
70
100
23
50
40
n6 fori 11
222
DETT. "A"
222
10
692
32.5
10
90
90
10
255
90
712
475
DETT. "B"
DETT. "A"
Scala 1:5
60x12
Scala 1:5
15
65
15
30
30
n4 fori 18
60
30
n4 fori 13
30
M4
30
15
60
120x8
Values in mm.
Characteristics
WEIGHT
FAN UNIT
280 kg
Single-phase motor 230 V 50/60 Hz 1/1.3 A tot. 7274dBA
Instruction manual
55
2.5 WATT LOSS

The power dissipation on the converter side depends on the AC input voltage. The values of the dissipated powers stated in the following table refer to the functioning with rated current.
Note!
The mounting should take into consideration a free space above and below the device of at
least 6 inches (150 mm). (Air circulation).
Externally-powered fan units must be connected to a 230 V 50/60 Hz single-phase voltage supply (terminals U3
and V3) and 400 V / 460 V 50/60 Hz three-phase voltage supply (terminals U3, V3 and W3).
Standard
TPD32-EV-.../...-20-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-40-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-70-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-110-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-140-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-185-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-350-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-420-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-500-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-650-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-560-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-700-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-770-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-900-..-C
TPD32-EV-575/...-1000-2B-C
TPD32-EV-575/...-1050-4B-C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1000-..-C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1050-4B-C
TPD32-EV-690/...-1300-2B-D
TPD32-EV-575/...-1300-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1400-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1600-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1900-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2100-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2300-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2400-..-D
TPD32 EV-.../...-1010-..-E
TPD32 EV-.../...-1050-..-E
TPD32 EV-.../...-1000-..-E
TPD32 EV-.../...-1200-..-E
TPD32 EV-.../...-1400-..-E
TPD32 EV-.../...-1500-..-E
TPD32 EV-500/520-1700-..-E
TPD32 EV-690/810-1700-..-E
TPD32 EV-.../...-1800-..-E
TPD32 EV-500/520-2000-..-E
TPD32 EV-690/810-2000-..-E
TPD32 EV-500/220-2400-..-E
TPD32 EV-690/810-2400-..-E
TPD32 EV-.../...-2700-..-E
TPD32 EV-.../...-2900-..-E
TPD32 EV-.../...-3300-..-E
American
TPD32-EV-.../...-17-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-35-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-56-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-88-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-112-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-148-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-224-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-336-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-400-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-450-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-360-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-490-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-560-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-650-..-C
TPD32-EV-./...-750-2B-C
TPD32-EV-575...-750-4B-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-800-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-850-4B-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-920-2B-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-980-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1000-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1200-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1450-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1500-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1650-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1800-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1850-..-D
TPD32 EV-.../...-800-..-NA
TPD32 EV-.../...-850-..-NA
Power loss PV
[W]
131
186
254
408
476
553
781
939
1038
1248
1693
2372
3085
2143
3384
2986
3103
2590
2590
6175
4863
5142
6225
7598
7238
8032
7480
7343
3500
2590
2590
3500
4900
4900
5200
6700
5200
5400
6800
6800
8000
8700
8700
9500
Voltage
[V]
Internal power supply
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
3 ph 400/460
3 ph 400/460
3 ph 400/460
3 ph 400/460
3 ph 400/460
3 ph 400/460
3 ph 400/460
3 ph 400/460
3 ph 400/460
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
1ph 230
Fans
Rated
current
[A]
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1,25 (50Hz) / 1,55 (60Hz)
1,25 (50Hz) / 1,55 (60Hz)
1,25 (50Hz) / 1,55 (60Hz)
1,25 (50Hz) / 1,55 (60Hz)
1,25 (50Hz) / 1,55 (60Hz)
1,25 (50Hz) / 1,55 (60Hz)
1,25 (50Hz) / 1,55 (60Hz)
1,25 (50Hz) / 1,55 (60Hz)
1,25 (50Hz) / 1,55 (60Hz)
0.4
0.75
0.75
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.6
0.4
0.4
0.6
0.6
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
Table 2.5.1: Dissipated power TPD32-EV and TPD32-EV-FC series
56
TPD32-EV
Air capacity
[m3/h]
80
160
160
160
320
320
320
320
680
1050
1050
1050
1050
1050
1050
1050
1050
2900 (400V/50Hz)
3400 (460V/60Hz)
900
1050
1050
900
900
900
900
1450
900
900
1450
1450
2600
2600
2600
2000
Dissipated power
Moidel
TPD32-EV-CU-230/500-THY1-40
TPD32-EV-CU-230/500-THY2-40
TPD32-EV-CU-230/500-THY1-70
TPD32-EV-CU-230/500-THY2-70
TPD32-EV-CU-575/690-THY1-40
TPD32-EV-CU-575/690-THY2-40
TPD32-EV-CU-575/690-THY1-70
TPD32-EV-CU-575/690-THY2-70
Total for control unit

[W]
External field fuses

[W]
303
2 x 11
357
2 x 14
374
2 x 11
428
2 x 14
Table 2.5.2: Dissipated power TPD32-EV-CU series
Information on the power dissipated by recommended external field fuses is also provided.
Instruction manual
57
2.6 MOTORS, ENCODER, TACHOMETER

The converters of the TPD32-EV series are provided for the regulation of DC motors with an independent excitation. As for speed feedback there is the use of a sinusoidal incremental encoder, a digital encoder or an analog
tachometer generator. In case of limited precision needs it is possible to use as feedback the armature voltage
without defluxing.
2.6.1 Motors
The electrical and mechanical data of the dc motors with an independent excitation refer to a particular functioning field. The following points have to be taken into consideration in order to operate these motors:
Motor data necessary to connect it to a converter

The data on the motor nameplate:
- Armature rated voltage
- Armature rated current
- Field rated current
- Motor rated speed
Motor protection
Thermo relay of the motor
- Placed above the converter: dimensioning IdN 0.82 1.05
- The relay contact can stop the drive through a control circuit or it can signal to the converter as an external
failure (terminal 15).
Note!
Remember that with a thermo relay it is possible only to control the heating of the motor due
to an overload, but not the one due to an insufficient ventilation. For this purpose some PTC
thermistors or thermal switches should be inserted in the motor windings.
Thermistors and thermal switches

On terminals 78 and 79 it is possible to connect a thermistor or thermal switch in order to detect motor overheating. When no temperature sensors are present an external resistor (R = 1 kohm) has to be connected to these
terminals. The connection of the sensor has to be done according the following instructions.
Thermistors (PTC)
PTC thermistors according to DIN 44081 or 44082 fitted in the motor can be connected directly to the converter vie
terminals 78 and 79. In this case the resistor (1 kohm) mounted between the terminals 78, 79 has to be removed.
Thermal switches (klixons) in the motor windings
Temperature-dependent contacts klixon type can disconnect the drive via the external control or can be reported
as an external error on the converter (terminal 15). They can also be connected to the terminals 78 and 79 in
order to have a specific error signal. In this case remove the 1 kohm resistor from these terminals and connect
it in series to the wiring.
Limitation of the converter current
The current limitation can protect the motor from unwanted overloads. To this purpose it is necessary to set
the current limitation and the control function of the converter overload (overload function), so that the current
remains within the values allowed for the motor.
Note!
58
Remember that with a current limitation it is possible to control only the motor heating due
to an overload, but not the one due to an insufficient ventilation. For this purpose some PTC
thermistors or thermal switches should be inserted in the motor windings.
TPD32-EV
2.6.2 Encoder / Tachometer

The encoders and the tachometers give the speed feedback to the regulation. They have to be mounted on the
motor shaft with joints without gaps. The best regulation results are possible by using incremental sinusoidal
encoders; it is also possible to use digital incremental encoders or tachogenerators, see section, Accuracy.
Features:
Sinusoidal encoder

max frequency

number of pulses per revolution

channel

supply

load capacity

150 kHz
min
600
max
9999
two-channel
+ 5V (internal supply)
> 8.3 mA pp each channel
Digital encoder

max frequency

number of pulses per revolution

channels

supply

load capacity

150 kHz
min
600
max
9999
two-channel, with complementary outputs
+ 5V / 15 ... 24V (external supply)

+ 24V (internal supply)
> 4.5 mA / 6.8 ... 10.9 mA each channel
Analog tachometer

for TPD32-EV-...-2B

for TPD32-EV-...-4B

max voltage at max speed
current
dynamo
dynamo (for the rotation direction inversion, the supplied voltage polarity shall invert)
22.7 / 45.4 / 90.7 / 181.6 / 302.9 V, depending on the
dip switch S4 setting
8 mA, full scale
Tacho voltage
input (V)
S4-1
S4-8
S4-2
S4-7
S4-3
S4-6
S4-4
S4-5
22.7
ON
ON
ON
ON
45.4
90.7
181.6
302.9
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Instruction manual
59
3 - INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
3.1 PERMISSIBLE AMBIENT CONDITION
Protection degree:

IP 20 (Type A-B-C-D) at operating temperatures of 32-131 F (0 ... 55 C; IP00

(Type E).
UL enclosure type 1.
(American size) The converter must be installed in a pollution degree 2 environment.
Installation location
Pollution degree 2 or lower (free from direct sunligth, vibration, dust, corrosive
or inflammable gases, fog, vapour oil and dripped water, avoid saline environment)
Altitude:
Up to 3300 feet (1000 m) above sea level; higher altitudes a current reduction
of 1.2 % for every 330 feet (100 m) of additional altitude. Max 2000m (6562
feet) above sea level.
TPD32-EV-....: Ta = 32-131 F (0 ... 55 C), over 104 F (40 C): current reduction of 1.25 % for every 1.8 F over 104 F (1 C over 40 C) better than the
3K3 class per EN 50178)
TPD32-EV-CU-....: Ta = 0... 55 C above 122 F (50 C) reduce the current of
1.25 % for every K above 104 F (40 C) (best in class 3K3 according to EN
50178).

Storage
Ta = -13 F ... 131 F (-25 ... +55 C) (1K4 class as per EN 50178)

Ta = -4 F ... 131 F (-20 ... +55 C) (for devices with LCD)

Transport
Ta = -13 F ... 131 F (-25 ... +55 C) (2K3 class as per EN 50178)

Ta = -4 F ... 140 F (-20 ... +60 C) (for devices with LCD)
Temperature : Operation
Air humidity:

Operation

Storage
Transport

Air pressure: Operation

Storage

Transport
5% up to 85%, 1 g/m3 up to 25 g/m3 without moisture condensation or icing

(3K3 class as per EN 50178)
5% up to 95%, 1 g/m3 up to 29 g/m3 (1K3 class as per EN 50178)
95% 1) , 60 g/m 2)
A light condensation of moisture may occur for a short time occasionally when
the device is not in operation (2K3 class as per EN 50178).
From 86 kPa up to 106 kPa (3K3 class per EN 50178)
Greatest relative air humidity occurs with the temperature 104 F (40 C) or if the temperature of the device
is brought immediately from -13 F ... 86 F (-25 C to +30 C).
2)
Greatest absolute air humidity if the device is brought immediately from 158 F ... 59 F (70 C to +15 C).
1)
60
TPD32-EV
3.2 DISPOSAL OF THE DEVICE

The converters of the TPD32-EV series can be disposed as electronic scraps in accordance with the currently
valid national regulations for the disposal of electronic parts.
The plastic covering of the converters up to type 185 A are recyclable: the material used is >ABS+PC< -FR
3.3 MOUNTING THE DEVICE

Note!
The dimensions and weights specifed in this manual should be taken into consideration when
the device is mounted. The technical equipment required (carriage or crane for large weights)
should be used. Improper handling and the use of unsuitable tools may cause damage.
max. 30
Figure 3.3.1: max Angle of Inclination
This equipment is designed for use in a clean, dry environment (see "3.1 Permissible Ambient Condition" on
page 60). It must not be possible for air-borne contaminants such as oils, corrosive fumes or abrasive materials
to penetrate installation cabinets.
The IP20 or IP00 protection rating does not protect the equipment against air-borne contaminants.
The maximum angle of inclination is 30.
The converters must be mounted in such a way that the free flow of air is ensured.
The clearance to the device must be at least 6 inches (150mm).
A space of at least 2 inches (50 mm) must be ensured at the front.
Devices that generate a large amount of heat must not be mounted in the direct vicinity of the frequency inverter.
Note!
Mounting screws should be re-tightened after a few days of operation.
Instruction manual
61
150 mm [6"]
150 mm [6"]
150 mm [6"]
10 mm [0.4"]
10 mm [0.4"]
10 mm [0.4"]
50 mm [2"]
Figure 3.3.2: Mounting Clearance
62
TPD32-EV
4. WIRING PROCEDURE
4.1 REMOVING THE FRONT COVER
The front cover of the device must be removed to make the electrical connections and to mount the option card.
Warning!
Observe the safety instructions and warnings given in this manual. The devices can be opened
without the use of force. Only use the tools specified.
3
1
1.5 Nm
mounting form B, C, D
mounting form A
1.5 Nm
Figure 4.1.1: Removing the Front Panel
To remove the lower cover of devices, use a phillips screwdriver. Remove the screws (1) (2), lift cover (3), and
open out to the front.
Tools required:

7x2 mm slotted-head screwdriver

Torx screwdriver: T10, T20, T25.
Cross-head screwdriver #1, 2, 3.
Registered trademark of Camcar LLC of Acument Global Technologies.
Terminal Assignments/Cable Sections

The terminals of the devices are made accessible by removing the front cover.
Instruction manual
63
4.2 WIRING THE DRIVE

Wire the drive in accordance with the standard connection diagrams, see chapter "4.8 Standard Connection
Diagrams" on page 82
4.3 POWER SECTION

Note!

Use copper conductors only.

For UL listed equipments use 75C stranded copper conductors only.
Table 4.3.1: Terminals description
Designation
Function
I/O
max voltage
max current
U, V, W
Connection to the AC mains of the armature circuit
3 x 690V AC 10%
see 2.3.2
C, D
Armature connection
see tab. 2.4.3.3
see 2.3.3
U1, V1 *
Connection to the AC mains of the field circuit
1 x 460V AC 10%
see 2.3.2
C1, D1 *
Field connection
0,87 ULN
see 2.3.3
U2, V2
AC power supply regulation
1 x 115V 15%
1 x 230V 15%
see 2.3.2
U3, V3
AC mains power supply for internal fan

(Type C-D-E converters only,
see table 2.1.1)
1 x 230V AC
see 2.5
31 / 32
Fan unit power supply relay potential-free NC contact

(Type D-E converters only)
250 VAC
1 A AC11
35 / 36
Contact without potential of OK relay (closed = OK), function as per the

OK relay func parameter in the CONFIGURATION / digital output menu
250 VAC
1 A AC11
75 / 76
Contact without potential of relay 2, function as per Relay 2 parameter in

the I/O CONFIGURATION / digital outputs menu
250 VAC
1 A AC11
78 / 79
Thermistor connection
81 / 82
Internal fuses intervention signalling

(For types C and D, see table 2.1.1)
250 VAC
1 A AC11
* not included in TPD32-EV-FC-... models
Table 4.3.2: Cable size for power terminals U, V, W, C, D, PE
64
Standard
max cable section [mm2]
AWG
Tightening torque [Nm]
TPD32-EV-.../...-20-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-40-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-70-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-110-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-140-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-185-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-350-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-420-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-500-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-650-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-560-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-700-..-C ...
TPD32-EV-500/...-1050-4B-C
TPD 32-EV-690/...-1300-2B-D ...
TPD32-EV-.../...-1900--D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-..-D ...
TPD32-EV-.../...-2400-..-D
4
10
16
6...50
12
8
6
10...1
2...3
16...95
6...000
Cu-Band 10 x 16 x 0,8
Cu-Band 11 x 21 x 1
Cu-Band 50 x 8
or
Cu-Band 2 x 10 x 16 x 0,8
300
45
300
45
TPD32-EV
2.5...3
12
25
(PE: 12)
Table 4.3.3: Cable section for UL approval

Device type
Terminals
Wire
AWG / kcmils
TPD32-EV-.../...-20-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-40-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-70-..-A
U, V, W, C, D PE
U, V, W, C, D PE
U, V, W, C, D PE
U, V, W C, D
PE
U, V, W C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W C, D
PE
U, V, W C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
10
8
4
1/0
2
2/0
2
3/0
4/0; kit required
2
2 x 2/0
2/0
2 x 4/0
2/0
2 x 4/0
2 x 300
2/0
2 x 300; kit required
2/0
4 x 4/0
4 x 250
2/0
2/0
4 x 1/0
4 x 2/0
1
1
2/0
4 x 4/0; kit required
2/0
2/0
4 x 4/0; kit required
2/0
2/0
4 x 350
4 x 500
5 x 60
5 x 60
8 x 60
Busbar or Flexibar
8 x 60
Busbar or Flexibar
8 x 60
TPD32-EV-.../...-110-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-140-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-185-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-350-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-420-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-500-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-560-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-700-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-650-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-770-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-900-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-1050-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-1000-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-1050-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-1000-..-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-1300-4B-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1300-2B-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1400-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1600-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1900-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2100-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2300-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2400-..-D
Terminal bolt
metric size [mm]
5
5
5
terminal block
terminal block
terminal block
terminal block
terminal block
terminal block
terminal block
10
8
10
8
10
10
8
10
10
8
10
10
8
10
10
8
10
10
8
10
10
8
10
10
8
10
10
8
10
10
8
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Instruction manual
Tightening torque
[Nm]
6
6
6
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
50
25
50
25
50
50
25
50
50
25
50
50
25
50
50
25
50
50
25
50
50
25
50
50
25
50
50
25
50
50
25
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
65
Table 4.3.4: Wire adapter Kit and lugs suggested for UL approval
The following sizes are not provided with pressure connectors. Recommended compression lugs are in the following table. For sizes up to 56A any UL listed lug, sized for the indicated bolt and AWG or MCM cable, is
suitable for this use, otherwise a compression lug type from ILSCO or BURNDY (YA...) or Grainger (3L...)
manufacturer is specified.
Device type
Terminals
AWG o MCM
Lug type
Bolt diameter [mm]
TPD32-EV-.../...-17-....-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-35-....-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-56-....-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-88-....-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-112-....-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-148-....-A-NA
U-V-W-C-D-PE
U-V-W-C-D-PE
U-V-W-C-D-PE
U-V-W-C-D-PE
U-V-W-C-D-PE
U-V-W-C-D-PE
U-V-W
C-D
PE
U-V-W
C-D
PE
U-V-W
C-D
PE
U-V-W
C-D
PE
U-V-W
C-D
PE
U-V-W
C-D
PE
U-V-W
C-D
PE
U-V-W
C-D
PE
U-V-W-C-D
PE
U-V-W-C-D
PE
U-V-W
C-D
PE
U-V-W
C-D
PE
12
8
4
any
any
any
5
5
5
Tightening torque
[Nm]
2-3
2,5-3
2,5-3
25
25
15
25
25
15
25
25
15
25
25
15
25
25
15
25
25
15
25
25
15
25
25
15
25
15
25
15
45
45
45
45
45
45
TPD32-EV-.../...-224-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-336-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-400-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-450-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-490-..-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-560-..-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-750-..-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-800-..-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-850-..-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-980-..-D-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1000-..-D-NA
U-V-W
TPD32-EV-.../...-1200-..-D-NA
C-D
PE
U-V-W
TPD32-EV-.../...-1500-..-D-NA
C-D
PE
U-V-W
TPD32-EV-.../...-1800-..-D-NA
C-D
PE
U-V-W
TPD32-EV-.../...-1850-..-D-NA
2x
4x

66
C-D
PE
See table below

2x1
2 x 2/0
YA1CL6-BOX
YA26L6-BOX
2 x 2/0
2 x 3/0
YA26L6-BOX
YA27L-BOX
2 x 250
2 x 3/0
YA27L-BOX
YA29L-BOX
2 x 250
2 x 300; serve kit
YA29L-BOX,
YA30L
2 x 300; serve kit

2 x 400; serve kit
YA30L7
YA32L
3 x 3/0
4 x 2/0
1/0
3 x 3/0
4 x 2/0
YA27L-BOX
YA26L6-BOX
YA25L6-BOX
YA27L-BOX
YA26L6-BOX
4 x 4/0
4 x 300, serve kit
2/0
4 x 250
YA28L-BOX
YA30L
YA26L6-BOX
CRA-250 o CRA-250L
4 x 300, serve kit
CRA-300 o CRA-300L
4 x 300
4 x 500
2 x 300
4 x 350
4 x 500
4 x 350
4 x 500
with EAM 2617_1 adapter
5 x 500
2 x 500
5 x 500
6 x 500
3 x 350
6 x 500
Use Cu-bar or Eriflex "Flexibar"
3 x 500
6 x 500
Use Cu-bar or Eriflex "Flexibar"
3 x 500
3LM58
3LM61
3LM58
3LM59
3LM61
3LM59
M10
M10
M8
M10
M10
M8
M10
M10
M8
M10
M10
M8
M10
M10
M8
M10
M10
M8
M10
M10
M8
2 x M10
2 x M10
M8
M10
M8
M10
M8
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
3LM61
4 x M12
45
3LM61
4 x M12
45
3LM61
4 x M12
45
3LM61
4 x M12
45
3LM61
4 x M12
45
3LM59
4 x M12
45
3LM61
4 x M12
45
3LM61
4 x M12
4 x M12
45
45
3LM61
4 x M12
45
3LM61
4 x M12
4 x M12
45
45
means that two compression lugs of the specified type have to be used on the opposite side of the busbar.
means that four compression lugs of the specified type have to be used on the same busbar, two for each side and one for each bolt hole.
Bolt, nuts and washers are factory mounted on output busbars. The required ILSCO compression tool is marked on each terminal plug.
TPD32-EV
For sizes above 112A the front terminal cover has to be removed when using the above listed lugs.
The following sizes are provided with terminal blocks:
U/V/W/C/D: AWG 5-3/0(16-95mm2), stranded Cu
PE:
AWG 5-1(16-50mm2), stranded Cu
The following AWG and torque are required for field wiring:
Device type
AWG
TPD32-EV-.../...-88-..
12
TPD32-EV-.../...-112-..
1/0
12
TPD32-EV-.../...-148-..
3/0
12
Grounding
12
Note!
When connecting the converter, a 9.5 mm (3/8 in.) spacing between uninsulated live parts of
opposite polarity should be mantained.
Note!
The TPD32-EV converters are UL listed only when used with the above mentioned terminal
kits.
Table 4.3.5: Wire adapter Kit and lugs suggested for UL approval
Device type
TPD32-EV-.../...-148-....-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-224-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-336-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-400-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-450-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-490-..-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-560-..-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-750-..-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-800-..-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-850-..-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-980-..-D-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1000-..-D-NA
Terminals
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
type
Wire adapter kit

Kit bolt size
EAM 1578
2 x 250
EAM1579
EAM1580
EAM1580
4 x 4/0
EAM1581
2/0
EAM 1581
EAM2617_2
EAM2617_2
-
M8
M10
M10
M14
M14
2 x M10
2 x M10
2 x M10
M10
M10
M10
CCL-4/0-516
CCL-2/0-12
CCL-2/0-12
CRA-2/0, CCL-2/0-38
CCL-4/0-12
CCL-4/0-12
CRA-2/0, CCL-2/0-38
CCL-4/0-12
CRA-300, CRA-300L
CRA-2/0, CCL-2/0-38
CRA-2/0, CCL-2/0-38
CRA-2/0, CCL-2/0-38
CCL-4/0-12
CRA-250, CRA-250L
CRA-2/0, CCL-2/0-38
CRA-2/0, CCL-2/0-38
CRA-250 o CRA-250L
CRA-250 o CRA-250L
YA28-L3
YA1CL6-BOX
YA26L6-BOX
YA26-LBOX
YA26L6-BOX
YA27L-BOX
YA26-LBOX
YA27L-BOX
YA29L-BOX
YA26-LBOX
YA29L-BOX,
YA30L
YA26-LBOX
YA30L7
YA32L
YA26-LBOX
YA27L-BOX
YA26L6-BOX
YA27L-BOX
YA26L6-BOX
YA26-LBOX
YA28L-BOX
YA30L
YA26L6-BOX
-
M10
M10
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
25
25
45
45
45
45
45
45
CRA-2/0, CCL-2/0-38
-
YA30-L
YA32-L1
YA26-LBOX
-
[mm]
ILSCO type
Recommended lugs
Burndy type
Tightening
torque [Nm]
15
25
25
45
45
25
25
25
25
25
25
Instruction manual
Grainger type
3LM57
3LM61
3LM57
3LM61
67
Device type
Terminals
Wire adapter kit

Kit bolt size
type
TPD32-EV-.../...-1200-..-D-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1500-..-D-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1800-..-D-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1850-..-D-NA
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
U, V, W
C, D
PE
[mm]
EAM2617_1
EAM2617_3
EAM2617_1
EAM2617_3
EAM2617_1
Use busbar
EAM2617_1
Use busbar
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
4 x M12
Tightening
torque [Nm]
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
Recommended lugs
Burndy type
ILSCO type
-
Grainger type
3LM57
3LM61
3LM57
3LM61
3LM57
3LM61
3LM57
3LM61
The cable cross section to be connected must be dimensioned and determined by the designer
that has to take into account the current, the temperature and the cable position. The values
indicated on the table are referred to the maximum cross section accepted by its terminals;
they are not the indication about the cable dimension to be connected!
The current in the protective conductor of the motor cable can be up to twice the value of the
rated current IdN if there is an earth fault at the output of the TPD32 converter.
Note!
Caution!
For further details about Kits see "A3.1 EAM Adapter Kit" on page 498, on these drawings
it is possible to indicate alternative wire terminals to those in the table.
Note!
Table 4.3.6: Cable size for power field terminals U1, V1, C1, D1
American
Standard
TPD32-EV-.../...-17-..-A
...
TPD32-EV-.../...-850-4B-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-920-2B-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-980-..-D
...
TPD32-EV-.../...-1850-..-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-20-..-A
...
TPD32-EV-500/...-1050-4B-C
TPD32-EV-690/...-1300-2B-D
TPD32-EV-575/...-1300-..-D
...
TPD32-EV-.../...-2400-..-D
max cable section [mm2]
AWG
0,2...4
24...10
0,5...0,8
10... 16
6 ... 3
Table 4.3.7: Cable size for fans, signals, thermistors and regulation supply
Terminals
Max connection cable section
flexible [mm ]
multi-core [mm ]
AWG
PE
2,5...10
2,5...10
12...8
U2, U3, V2, V3, 31, 32, 35, 36, 75, 76, 78, 79
0,14...1,5
0,14...2,5
26...14
0,5
68
TPD32-EV
4.4 REGULATION SECTION

Regulation card is factory set according to the device type.
When the regulation card is supplied as a spare part, dispose the S15 switches for the corresponding size and S4
to adapt the tachogenerator feedback voltage!
4.4.1 R-TPD32-EV Regulation Card
RS485
ENC 1
21
30
31
42
10
11
20
ENC 2
Figure 4.4.1: R-TPD32-EV regulation card
Table 4.4.1: LEDs on the R-TPD32-EV card

Designation
PWR
RST
RS485
ACT
RUN
69
Function
ON when the +5 V voltage is present at the right value
ON when the signal RST is active
ON when the RS485 interface is supplied
It is lit when the SCR driving system is active
The LED blinks during the regulation phase
TPD32-EV
Table 4.4.2-A: Dip-switch S15 adaptation of the regulation card to the device type
Standard
TPD32-EV-500/600-20-..-A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-20-..-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-40-..-A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-40-..-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-70-..-A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-70-..-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-110-..-A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-110-..-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-140-..-A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-140-..-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-185-..-A
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-185-..-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-350-..-B
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-350-..-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-420-..-B
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-420-..-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-500-..-B
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-500-..-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-650-..-B
TPD32-EV-FC-.../...-650-..-B
Note!
American
S15-8
S15-7
S15-6
S15-5
S15-4
S15-3
S15-2
S15-1
TPD32-EV-500/600-17-..-A-NA
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
TPD32-EV-500/600-35-..-A-NA
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
TPD32-EV-500/600-56-..-A-NA
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
TPD32-EV-500/600-88-..-A-NA
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
TPD32-EV-500/600-112-..-A-NA
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
TPD32-EV-500/600-148-..-A-NA
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
TPD32-EV-500/600-224-..-B-NA
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
TPD32-EV-500/600-280-..-B-NA
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
TPD32-EV-500/600-336-..-B-NA
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
TPD32-EV-500/600-400-..-B-NA
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
TPD32-EV-500/600-450-..-B-NA
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
For sizes TPD32-EV-.../...-...-..-E, dip-switch S15 shown in the table (which is factory-set)
is on the regulation card of the TPD32-EV-CU-... associated with the external bridge.
Standard
TPD32-EV-500/600-770-2B-C
TPD32-EV-500/600-1000-2B-C
TPD32-EV-500/600-1400-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/600-1600-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/600-2400-2B-D
American
TPD32-EV-500/600-560-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-800-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1000-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1200-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1500-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1850-2B-D-NA
S15-8
S15-7
S15-6
S15-5
S15-4
S15-3
S15-2
S15-1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
TPD32-EV-500/600-1200-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-1500-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-1000-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1300-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1800-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2400-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2700-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2900-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-3300-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-1400-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1500-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1800-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2200-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2350-2B-E-NA
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
TPD32-EV-575/680-280-2B-B
TPD32-EV-575/680-350-2B-B
TPD32-EV-575/680-420-2B-B
TPD32-EV-575/680-500-2B-B
TPD32-EV-575/680-650-2B-B
TPD32-EV-575/680-700-2B-C
TPD32-EV-575/680-1000-2B-C
TPD32-EV-575/680-1300-2B-D
TPD32-EV-575/680-1600-2B-D
TPD32-EV-575/680-2000-2B-D
TPD32-EV-575/680-2300-2B-D
TPD32-EV-575/680-224-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-280-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-336-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-400-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-450-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-490-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-750-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-980-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-1200-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-1500-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-1800-2B-D-NA
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
TPD32-EV-690/810-560-2B-C
TPD32-EV-690/810-700-2B-C
TPD32-EV-690/810-360-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-490-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-900-2B-C
TPD32-EV-690/810-1300-2B-D
TPD32-EV-690/810-1600-2B-D
TPD32-EV-690/810-1900-2B-D
TPD32-EV-690/810-2100-2B-D
TPD32-EV-690/810-650-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-920-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1200-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1450-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1650-2B-D-NA
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
TPD32-EV-690/810-1010-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-1400-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-900-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1150-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1700-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-1350-2B-E-NA
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
70
TPD32-EV
TPD32-EV-690/810-2000-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-2400-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-2700-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-3300-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-1500-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1800-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-2000-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-2350-2B-E-NA
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Standard
TPD32-EV-500/520-770-4B-C
TPD32-EV-500/520-1050-4B-C
TPD32-EV-500/520-1400-4B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-1600-4B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-2400-4B-D
American
TPD32-EV-500/520-560-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-850-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1000-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1200-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1500-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1850-4B-D-NA
S15-8
S15-7
S15-6
S15-5
S15-4
S15-3
S15-2
S15-1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
TPD32-EV-500/520-1500-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-1300-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1700-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-2400-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-2700-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-3300-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-1350-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1500-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1800-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-2350-4B-E-NA
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
TPD32-EV-575/600-280-4B-B
TPD32-EV-575/600-350-4B-B
TPD32-EV-575/600-420-4B-B
TPD32-EV-575/600-500-4B-B
TPD32-EV-575/600-650-4B-B
TPD32-EV-575/600-700-4B-C
TPD32-EV-575/600-1050-4B-C
TPD32-EV-575/600-1300-4B-D
TPD32-EV-575/600-1600-4B-D
TPD32-EV-575/600-2000-4B-D
TPD32-EV-575/600-2300-4B-D
TPD32-EV-575/600-224-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-280-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-336-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-400-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-450-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-490-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-750-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-980-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-1200-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-1500-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-1800-4B-D-NA
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
TPD32-EV-690/720-560-4B-C
TPD32-EV-690/720-700-4B-C
TPD32-EV-690/720-360-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-490-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-900-4B-C
TPD32-EV-690/720-1300-4B-D
TPD32-EV-690/720-1600-4B-D
TPD32-EV-690/720-1900-4B-D
TPD32-EV-690/720-2100-4B-D
TPD32-EV-690/720-650-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-980-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1200-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1450-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1650-4B-D-NA
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
TPD32-EV-690/720-1010-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-1400-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-900-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1150-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1700-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-2000-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-2400-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-2700-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-3300-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-1350-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1500-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1800-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-2000-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-2350-4B-E-NA
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
S15-3
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S15-2
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S15-1
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Table 4.4.2-B: Dip-switch S15 Adjustment of the TPD32-EV-CU-... series mains voltage regulation card
Standard
TPD32-EV-CU-230/500-THY1-FC40
Note!
American
S15-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
S15-7
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
S15-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S15-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S15-4
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
The drive rated current value must be set in parameter 465 "Drive Size". Switches SW3 and
SW4 on the FIR power card must also be configured. (see "11.1 Hardware configuration"
on page 468).
Instruction manual
71
Table 4.4.3: Dip-switch S4 adaptation of the tachometer feedback to the input voltage
Tacho voltage
full scale (V)
22.7
45.4
90.7
181.6
302.9
S4-1
S4-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
S4-2
S4-7
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
S4-3
S4-6
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
S4-4
S4-5
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Table 4.4.4: Jumpers on the Regulator card

Designation
S4
S5,S6
S9
S10
S11
S12 / S13
S14
S15
S18 / S19
S20
S21 / S22 / S23

Function
Factory
Matching of the input voltage of the tachogenerator reaction, see table 4.4.3
Adaptation of the speed feedback type:
Pos. A
Sinusoidal encoder
Pos. B
Tachogenerator
Any position: digital encoder, armature feedback
Adaptation to the signal of the analog input Input 1 (terminals 1 and 2)
ON
0 ... 20 mA / 4 ... 20 mA
OFF
0 ... 10V / -10 ... +10V
Adaptation to the signal of the analog input Input 2 (terminal 3 and 4)
ON
0 ... 20 mA / 4 ... 20 mA
OFF
0 ... 10V / -10 ... +10V
Adaptation to the signal of the analog Input 3 (terminals 5 and 6)
ON
0 ... 20 mA / 4 ... 20 mA
OFF
0 ... 10V / -10 ... +10V
Terminating resistor for the serial interface RS485
ON
Interface terminated with resistor
OFF
Interface not terminated
Field current resistors setting, see table 2.4.3.2
Adaptation of the regulation card to the device type, see table 4.4.2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Selection of the internal/external supply of the RS485 serial interface

OFF
Serial interface supplied from the outside (PIN 5 and 9) and galvanic divided form the regulation section.
ON
Serial interface supplied from the inside and connected to the potential reference point of the
regulation. PIN 5 and 9 are used to supply the adaptor of the serial interface.
Monitoring of the C channel of the digital encoder on connector XE2
ON
C-channel monitored
OFF
C-channel not monitored
Encoder supply voltage selection
ON
5 V encoder supply voltage
OFF
15...30 V encoder supply voltage
ON Mounted Jumpers
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF Non mounted Jumpers

Table 4.4.5: Test points on Regulator card
Test point
Function
Test point
Function
XY20
Monitoring ( 10VDC) of the Select output parameters setting. (Using this test point set all the Select output 1,2,3,4
to the variable that has to be measured).
XY17
Output current signal

(0.61 V =Nominal Drive output current)
XY10
Reference point
XY18
Reference point
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 37 38 39 40 41 42
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 4.4.2: Disposition of terminals from 1 to 42
72
TPD32-EV
Table 4.4.6 - A: Terminal Assignment (terminals from 1 to 20)

Terminal designation
1 +2
Analog input 1
3 +4
Analog input 2
5 +6
Analog input 3
7
+10V
8
-10V
9
0V 10
10
11
12
Enable drive
13
Start
14
Fast stop
15
External fault
16
COM ID
18
0V 24
19
+24 V
20
*
**
Function
I/O
Max voltage
10V
10V
10V
(20mA at current
ref. value)
+10V
10mA
-10V
10mA
Screen connection (PE) (connected with housing)
Internal 0V
Converter enable
0V
Disabled converter
+15...30V
Enabled converter
Start command
0V
No start command
+15...30V
Start
Fast stop
0V
Fast stop
+15...30V
No Fast stop
External fault
0V
External fault present
+15...30V
No external fault present
Reference point of the digital inputs,
terminals 12 to 15
Reference point of the 24V voltage
on terminal 19
Voltage +24V
Reference point Terminal 18
+30V
+30V
+30V
+30V
15V/3,2mA
24V/5mA
30V/6,4mA
15V/3,2mA
24V/5mA
30V/6,4mA
15V/3,2mA
24V/5mA
30V/6,4mA
15V/3,2mA
24V/5mA
30V/6,4mA
+20...30V
200 mA**
Screen connection (PE) (connected w/housing)
Configurable analog differntial input

Signal: Term. 1, Reference point Term. 2
Factory set for Ramp ref 1*
Not factory set
Max current
0.25mA
(20mA at current
ref. value)
0.25mA
(20mA at current
ref. value)
0.25mA

Not factory set
Reference voltage +10V
Reference point: Term. 9
Reference voltage -10V
Reference point: Term. 9
Reference point for the reference voltages on
terminal 7 and 8
The user can adapt the configuration to the requirements of the application concerned via the keypad, the serial interface or a bus connection.
Total value including Terminal 19, Pin 2 of connector XE2 and the digital outputs on the TBO option card.
The R-TPD32-EV regulation card includes a TBO card (terminals 21 to 42). The integrated card is considered
by the device as TBO A.
Table 4.4.6 - B: Terminal Assignment (terminals from 21 to 42)
Designation
21
Analog out 1
22
COM analog output 1
23
Analog out 2
Function
I/O
Max voltage
Max current
Analog output 1
Reference point: Terminal 22
Factory set for Actual speed
10V
5mA
Reference point of analog output 1
Analog output 2
Factory set for Motor current
10V
5mA
Instruction manual
73
24
COM analog output 2
25
COM digital outputs
26
Digital output 1
27
Digital output 2
28
Digital output 3
29
Digital output 4
30
Supply digital output
31
Digital input 1
32
Digital input 2
33
Digital input 3
34
Digital input 4
37
COM digital inputs
38 42
Reference of analog output 2
COM digital outputs (Terminals 2629)
+30V
50mA
+30V
50mA
+30V
50mA
+30V
50mA
+30V
+30V
+30V
+30V
+30V
Digital output 1
COM: Terminal 25
Factory set for Ramp +
Digital output 2
COM: Terminal 25
Factory set for Ramp Digital output 3
COM: Terminal 25
Factory set for Spd threshold
Digital output 4
COM: Terminal 25
Factory set for Overload available
Supply voltage for digital outputs
Digital input 1
COM: Terminal 37
Not Factory set
Digital input 2
COM: Terminal 37
Not Factory set
Digital input 3
COM: Terminal 37
Not Factory set
Digital input 4
COM: Terminal 37
Not Factory set
COM of the digital inputs (Terminals 3134)
depends on
the load
max 80mA
15V/3,2mA
24V/5mA
30V/6,4mA
15V/3,2mA
24V/5mA
30V/6,4mA
15V/3,2mA
24V/5mA
30V/6,4mA
15V/3,2mA
24V/5mA
30V/6,4mA
Not used
Table 4.4.7: Cable size for fans, signals, and thermistors

Terminals
1...20, +, -
flexible [mm2]
0,14...1,5
Max connection cable section

multi-core [mm2]
0,14...1,5
AWG
26...16
Tightening torque
[Nm]
0,4
The use of a 3 x 0.1 x 0.02 inches (75 x 2.5 x 0.4 mm) flat screwdriver is recommended. Remove 0.26 inches (6.5mm)
of the insulation at the cable ends. Only one unprepared wire (without ferrule) should be connected to each terminal.
74
TPD32-EV
Table 4.4.8: Terminal strip for the connection of an analog tachometer

Designation
Function
Negative tachometer input
I/O
I
Positive tachometer input

Clockwise rotation: positive /
counterclockwise: negative.
max volt.
22,7 / 45,4 /
90,7 / 181,6 /
302.9 V *
max curr.
8 mA
* It depends on the section set via the Dip switch S4 (see table 4.4.3).
Table 4.4.9: Assignment of an XE1 connector for a sinusoidal encoder
Designation*
PIN 1
PIN 2
PIN 3
PIN 4
PIN 5
PIN 6
PIN 7
PIN 8
PIN 9
*
Function
Channel BNot connected
Channel C+ (zero pulse)
Channel C- (zero pulse)
Channel A+
Channel AReference point for 5V
Channel B+
Supply voltage + 5V for the encoder
I/O
I
max volt.
1 V pp
max curr.
8,3mA pp
I
I
I
I
O
I
O
1 V pp
1 V pp
1 V pp
1 V pp
8,3mA pp
8,3mA pp
8,3mA pp
8,3mA pp
1 V pp
+5 V
8,3mA pp
160mA
9-pole socket connector, fitted on device. A plug connector according DIN 41 652 is required for the connection.
Table 4.4.10: Assignment of the XE2 connector for a digital encoder
Designation*
PIN 1
PIN 2
PIN 3
PIN 4
PIN 5
PIN 6
PIN 7
PIN 8
PIN 9
Function
Channel BSupply voltage +24V for the encoder
Channel A+
Channel AReference point for 24V
Channel B+
Not connected
I/O
I
O
I
I
I
I
O
I
max volt.
30 V pp**
24 V
30 V pp**
30 V pp**
30 V pp**
30 V pp**
30 V pp**
max curr.
17mA pp
200mA***
17mA pp
17mA pp
17mA pp
17mA pp
17mA pp
9-pole socket connector, fitted on device. A plug connector acc. DIN 41 652 is required for the connection.
**
The max voltage is 30V when the S21, S22, S23 jumpers are not mounted (Encoder 15...30 V).If these jumpers are mounted the max voltage at
these Pins is 5V!
***
Total value including Terminal 19, Pin 2 of connector XE2 and the digital outputs on the TBO option card.
Instruction manual
75
4.5 RS485 SERIAL INTERFACE

4.5.1 Description
The RS 485 serial interface enables data transfer via a loop made of two symmetrical, spiral conductors with a
common shield. The maximum transmission distance is 3936 feet (1200 m) with a transfer rate of 38,400 KBaud.
The transmission is carried out via a differential signal.
RS 485 interfaces are bus-compatible in half-duplex mode, i.e. sending and receiving take place in succession.
Up to 31 TPD32-EV devices (up to 128 address selectable) can be networked together via the RS 485 interface.
Address setting is carried out via the Device address parameter. Further information concerning the parameters to be
transfered, their type and value range is given in the table contained in section 10, Parameter List (RS485 column).
The RS 485 on the TPD32-EV series devices is located on the Regulation card in the form of a 9-pole SUB-D
socket connector (XS).The communication may be with or without galvanic isolation: by using galvanic isolation
an external power supply is necessary for +5V. The differential signal is transferred via PIN 3 (TxA/RxA) and
PIN 7 (TxB/RxB). Bus terminating resistors must be connected at the physical beginning and end of an RS 485
bus in order to prevent signal reflexion. The bus terminating resistors on TPD32 series devices are connected
via jumpers S12 and S13. This enables a direct point-to-point connection with a PLC or PC.
R-TPD32
XS
1
11 12 13
20 21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28 33
34
11 12 13
20 21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28 33
34
S19
470 R
100 R
470 R
0VS
+5 V S
150 R
S12
S13
TxA/RxA
TxB/RxB
+5 V
S18
PE
5
4
9
3
8
1
6
RS485
Figure 4.5.1.1: RS485 serial interface
Note!
76
Ensure that only the first and last drop of an RS 485 bus have a bus terminating resistor
(S12 and S13 mounted). In all other cases (within the line) jumpers S12 and S13 must not
be mounted. With S18 and S19 mounted the drive supply the serial line. This modality is
allowed on point-to-point connection without galvanic isolation only.
TPD32-EV
Note!
A connection point to point can be done using PCI-485 option interface (S18 and S19
mounted). For multidrop connection (two or more drive), an external power supply is necessary (pin 5 / 0V and pin 9 / +5V).
Pins 6 and 8 are reserved for use with the PCI-485 interface card.
When connecting the serial interface ensure that:
- only shielded cables are used
- power cables and control cables for contactors/relays are routed separately.
4.5.2 RS485 serial interface connector description

Table 4.5.2.1: Description of the XS connector for the RS485 serial interface
Designation*
Function
PIN 1
Internal use
PIN 2
Internal use
PIN 3
RxA/TxA
PIN 4
Internal use
PIN 5
0 V (reference point 5V)
PIN 6
Internal use
PIN 7
RxB/TxB
PIN 8
Internal use
PIN 9
+5V
I/O
Elec. Interface
I/O
RS485
Power supply
I/O
RS485
Power supply
9-pole socket connector, fitted on device. A plug connector acc. DIN 41 652 is required for the connection.
The pin 5 and 9 function depends on the position of the jumpers S18 and S19 which state if the serial line is
divided or not from the converter reference potential.
S18 and S19 in position OFF
The serial interface is galvanic separated from the regulator section.

The serial interface power supply is provided from the outside via the PIN
5 (0V) and PIN 9 (+5V) of the XS connector (default factory setting).
S18 and S19 in position ON
The serial interface has the same potential reference point as the regulator. The PIN 5 and 9 can be used to supply the adaptor of the RS 232 to
RS 485 serial interface that can be purchased from the General Electric
Company. They can not be used for any other purpose!
4.6 INPUT/OUTPUT EXPANSION CARD TBO

The input/output expansion card TBO can be fitted in a converter of the TPD32-EV Series. The card provides
analog outputs and digital inputs/outputs.
This option card, which is inserted on the XBB connector, is considered by the device as TBO B.
Instruction manual
77
4.6.1 Assignment of the plug-in terminal strip (terminals 1...15) forOptionCard TBO
Table 4.6.1.1: Terminal strip connections
Designation
1
Analog output 3
2
COM analog
output 3
3
Analog output 4
4
COM analog
output 4
5
COM digital
outputs
6
Digital output 5
7
Digital output 6
8
Digital output 7
9
Digital output 8
10
Supply digital
outputs
11
Digital input 5
12
Digital input 6
13
Digital input 7
14
Digital input 8
15
COM digital
inputs
Function
I/O
Max
voltage
Max
current
Analog output 3
Factory set for T current (motor current)
10V
5mA
Reference point of analog output 3 (Terminal 1)
Analog output 4
Factory set for motor speed ( Current U)
10V
5mA
Reference of analog output 4 (Terminal 3)
COM digital outputs (Terminals 6...9)
+30V
50mA
+30V
50mA
+30V
50mA
+30V
50mA
+30V
+30V
+30V
+30V
+30V
Digital output 5
COM: Terminal 5
Factory set for Ramp + (Curr limit state)
Digital output 6
COM: Terminal 5
Factory set for Ramp - (Overvoltage)
Digital output 7
COM: Terminal 5
Factory set for Spd threshold (Undervoltage)
Digital output 8
COM: Terminal 5
Factory set for Overload available (Overcurrent)
Supply voltage for digital outputs
Digital input 5
COM: Terminal 15
Not Factory set
Digital input 6
COM: Terminal 15
Not Factory set
Digital input 7
COM: Terminal 15
Not Factory set
Digital input 8
COM: Terminal 15
Not Factory set
COM of the digital inputs (Terminals 11...14)
depends on
the load
max 80mA
15V/3.2mA
24V/5mA
30V/6.4mA
15V/3.2mA
24V/5mA
30V/6.4mA
15V/3.2mA
24V/5mA
30V/6.4mA
15V/3.2mA
24V/5mA
30V/6.4mA
Table 4.6.1.2: Cable size for terminals of the option card TBO
Terminals
1...15
Max cable connection section

flexible (mm)
multi-core (mm)
AWG
0,14...1,5
0,14...1,5
28...16
Tightening torque
(Nm)
0,4
The use of a 3 x 0.1 x 0.02 inches (75 x 2.5 x 0.4 mm) flat screwdriver is recommended. Strip the ends of the
cables to a length of 0.26 inch (6.5 mm). Only one unprepared wire (without ferrule) should be connected to
each terminal.
78
TPD32-EV
4.6.2 Fitting the option card
Figure 4.6.2.1: Installing the option card
1 Unscrew the existing fixing screws and screw the spacers in the threaded holes
2 Fix the option card (connector XB of the option in the connector XBB of the device).
3 Fix the option cards on the spacers with the screws.
Instruction manual
79
4.7 DIGITAL ENCODER INTERFACE DEII

4.7.1 Description
The option card DEII has been projected to adapt, to separate galvanically and to connect a digital encoder to
the input XE1 of the converters TPD32-EV regulations boards. As standard, this input is arranged for the connection of an analog encoder.
The card DEII will be fixed externally to the drive by the mounting rail DIN EN 50 022-35. The input female
connector XS1 must be connected to the digital encoder using a 9-pole male connector, through a shielded cable,
Tasker c/186 (6 x 2 x 0.22) with a maximal length of 150 m.
Male output connector XS2 with 1.5 m shielded cable must be connected to the 9-pin connector fitted on the
TPD32-EV control card. The input voltage can be 15V...24V (HTL) or 5V (TTL), depending on whether the
encoder to be connected is type HTL or TTL. When the voltage connected to terminals +Venc and 0Venc is
switched on, the HTL or TTL LED will light up. If the encoder has HTL outputs, switch S1-S2-S3 must be
positioned on HTL side (default configuration); on the opposite side if the encoder has a TTL output. If switch
S1-S2-S3 is positioned on TTL side, voltage +Venc is also connected to pin 9 of XS1, in addition to pin 2.
S4 jumper is used to cut out the channel C (no impulse) from the test of encoder loss. S4 closed = canal C included, S4 open = canal C cut out. The EL LED lights up to signal the absence of at least one encoder signal.
The function that checks the absence of encoder signals works correctly only with encoders with complementary
outputs. It does NOT work with single-ended encoder drivers.
The jumper SH is mounted on condition of standard delivery; it must be cut only in case of the shield side encoder is connected to the chassis of the motor, to avoid the forming a ground ring.
For converter operation with the DEII card it is necessary to set the jumper S5, S6 on the regulation board in
position A.
Cable Length = 1.5m
XS2
+Venc
0Venc
9 7 5 3 1
SH 8 6 4 2
DEII
XS1
Figure 4.7.1.1: DEII card
80
TPD32-EV
4.7.2 DEII Terminal Assignment

Table 4.7.2.1: Terminal assignment (Terminals 0Venc and +Venc)
Designation
Function
I/O
max volt.
max curr.
0Venc
0 V supply to the encoder
+Venc
+15 ... 24 V supply to the encoder (S1, S2, S3 open) +5V supply to the encoder (S1, S2, S3 closed)
+24V
depending on encoder data
I = InputO = Output
Table 4.7.2.2: Permissible cable cross section on the terminals of option card DEII
Max cable connection section
Terminals
[mm2]
0 Venc and +Venc
flexible
multi-core
0.14 ... 1.5
0.14 ... 1.5
AWG
Tightening
torque
[Nm]
28 ... 14
0.5
The use of a 3 x 0.1 x 0.02 inches (75 x 2.5 x 0.4 mm) flat screwdriver is recommended. Strip the ends of the
cables to a length of 0.26 inch (6.5 mm). Only one unprepared wire (without ferrite) should be connected to
each terminal.
Table 4.7.2.3: XS1 9-pole connector
Designation
Function
I/O
max volt.
max curr.
PIN 1
Channel B-
+24V
10.9mA
PIN 2
Supply voltage for the encoder (the allowed level depends on the
jumper position, see chapter 4.7.1
+24V
depending on ext. power

supply unit
PIN 3
+24V
10.9mA
PIN 4
+24V
10.9mA
PIN 5
Channel A+
+24V
10.9mA
PIN 6
Channel A-
+24V
10.9mA
PIN 7
Reference point for supply voltage
PIN 8
Channel B+
+24V
10.9mA
PIN 9
+ 5V (only if S1-S2-S3 = TTL)
+5V
depending on ext. power

supply unit
I = InputO = Output
Instruction manual
81
4.8 STANDARD CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

L01
81
K0
82
K1M
G1
(a partire da 770 A)
Emergenza
Nota !
Q2 per ventilatore sulle
taglie a partire da 770 A
Q2
K2
K2
t > t br
G1
Stop control
[P629]
35
G1
ok
[P412]
F2
36
75
76
Termica motore
Q1
Alimentazione
regolazione
S11
Off / Stop
Cavallotto: frenatura d'emergenza,

disinserzione a motore fermo
K0
Senza cavallotto: disinserzione

diretta, il motore si ferma per inerzia
K0
S2
On / Start
K1M
K1M
K2
K1M
K2
K0
L00
Emergenza
Rete
On / Off
Start / Stop
Figure 4.8.1: Control sequencing

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Analog outputs
Digital outputs
26
27
28
29
Digital inputs
K1M
Supply
F11
1
31
32
33
34
M1-M2
21
F2
EMC FILTER
115 - 230 VAC
22
23
24
25
30
230 VAC
37
+ 24 V
0V
1 3 5
M-
F12
M+
AL
EN
n=0
Ilim
Keypad
81
+
ok [P412]
RS 485
Relay 2 [P629]
CANC
(5)
F3
1F1
2F2
1B1
PE
78
79
0 V 10
0V
- 10 V
+ 10 V
11
(2)
2B2
PE
TPD32...2B
Left
0
Rigth
D1
SMPS
C1
Analog input 2
Thermistor (3)
M1
TPD32...4B
(4)
W1
R1 (2 ... 5 kOhm)
Figure 4.8.2: Typical connections

Typical wiring diagram for the standard configuration of the converter.
It is necessary to follow the instructions for mounting and wiring given in the chapters
concerning engineering notes and EMC measures.
Option cards connection is not indicated here.
It is not considered the autorestart of the drive after an alarm condition.
82
19
18
16
15
14
Analog input 3
A+ A- B+ B- 0V 24V
82
G1
13
Analog input 1
XE2
F13
12
+ 24V
V3
0 V24
U3
COM ID
V2
K0
External
Fault
U2
76
Fast stop
75
36
35 (6)
K2
K1M
V1
2 4
U1
PE
(1)
Q2
6
2 4
Start
Q1
(1) Externally-powered fan units with types C and D only.

(2) Fuses for TPD32-EV...4B types A and B only.
(3) 1Kohm resistor connected when the thermistor is not present.
(4) The indicated connections are relative for a digital Encoder.
(5) Types C and D only.
(6) On the Power/Control card FIR ....
Connections for sinusoidal encoder and tachogenerator are serately indicated.
TPD32-EV
L1
L2
Enable
drive
1 3 5
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Analog outputs
Digital outputs
26
27
28
29
Digital inputs
F11
1
31
32
33
34
Supply
K1M
M1-M2
21
F2
EMC FILTER
22
23
24
25
30
115 - 230 VAC
37
+ 24 V
0V
1 3 5
Q1
M-
24Vdc internal
M+
AL
EN
n=0
Ilim
75
76
12
Keypad
ok [P412]
RS 485
Relay 2 [P629]
CANC
13
Analog input 3
Analog input 2
Analog input 1
XE2
19
18
16
15
14
+ 24V
36
35 (2)
V2
0 V24
U2
COM ID
PE
External
Fault
Fast stop
K0
Start
K2
K1M
2 4
Enable
drive
L1
0V
0 V 10
- 10 V
79
78
PE
11
(1)
2B2
PE
TPD32...2B
Left
0
Rigth
1B1
F3
SMPS
+ 10 V
A+ A- B+ B- 0V 24V
TPD32...4B
W1
R1 (2 ... 5 kOhm)
(1) Fuses for TPD32 EV-FC-...4B-C only. (2) On the FIR ... power/control card.
Figure 4.8.3: TPD32 EV-FC-... typical connection diagram.
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
F11
K1M
Analog outputs
Digital outputs
26
27
28
29
Digital inputs
EMC FILTER
Supply
F2
1
31
32
33
34
M1-M2
21
22
23
24
25
30
115 - 230 VAC
L1
37
+ 24 V
0V
L2
1 3 5
Q1
Keypad
ok [P412]
RS 485
Relay 2 [P629]
CANC
Analog input 2
Analog input 1
XE2
19
18
16
15
14
0 V24
Ilim
+ 24V
n=0
13
COM ID
EN
12
External
Fault
AL
76
Analog input 3
KP
KPT31
KPT11
KPT21
AC/DC
feedback
Thermostat and
CT feedback
Gate signal
(to Pulse
transformer)
Gate signal
(to Pulse
transformer)
0 V 10
1 ... 8
0V
- 10 V
11
Left
0
Rigth
D1
C1
+ 10 V
A+ A- B+ B- 0V 24V
SMPS
EXTERNAL BRIDGE
24Vdc internal
M+
75
36
35 (1)
V2
M-
D C WV U
C
K0
U2
Start
PE
V1
TPD32 EV-CU-...-
U1
PE
K2
K1M
2 4
Fast stop
FV1
Enable
drive
FU1
To TPD32 EV-...-E External Bridge
M
W1
(4)
(1) On the FIR ... power/control card.
R1 (2 ... 5 kOhm)
Figure 4.8.4: TPD32 EV-CU-... typical connection diagram
Instruction manual
83
XE1
A+ A- B+
5
A+ A- B+
B- 0V 5V
Voltage setting by
XE2
7
S4-1...8
B- 0V 24V
1
Digital encoder
Sinus encoder
Analog tacho
Figure 4.8.5: Encoder and Tachometer Connections
R-TPD32
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
4
19
30
37
31
32
33
0 V 24
+ 24 V
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
Supply
Analog outputs
18
34
+ 24 V
0V
Figure 4.8.6: Programmable Inputs/outputs with relay and contacts
Note!
84
To improve the noise immunity it is advisable to connect the common of the outputs (terminals
22/24, 25/37) with the ground (terminals 10 or 20 of the regulation board). It is not possible,
the above mentioned common have to be grouded by means of a 0,1 F/250V capacitor.
TPD32-EV
R-TPD32
Analog inputs
30
0V
37
31
32
33
34
QD 4
29
QD 3
28
QD 2
27
QD 1
26
Supply
0V
ID 4
25
24
ID 2
23
IA2
22
IA 1
Digital Outputs
Digital Inputs
SPS / PLC
Figure 4.8.7: Programmable Inputs/outputs with PLC
XE1
1
6
XE2
XS
5
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
XS2
1,5m
DEII
7 5 6
2
3 4
8 1
S4
C3
S1-S2-S3
S1-S2-S3
C+
B-
B+
8
Versorgung Encoder
Supply encoder
Alimentation encoder
Alimentazione encoder
+5V
oder / or / ou / o
+ 15 ... 24 V
+ Supp
XS1
0Venc
SH
+Venc
A-
A+
S1-S2-S3
S1-S2-S3
- Supp
21
ID 3
ID 1
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
+ 24 V
Analog outputs
Figure 4.8.8: DEII connection
Instruction manual
85
4.9 CIRCUIT PROTECTION

4.9.1 Fuses
Fuses of the power section
FA
U1
V1
FD
C
D1
V1
FD
FC
C1
U1
C1
D1
FB
Forma costruttiva A - B
Frame A - B
Forma costruttiva C - D - E
Frame C - D - E
Figure 4.9.1.1: Position of the super fast fuses
For protection of the bridge thristors use fast acting fuses.

The fuses FA and FB are externally mounted.
Sizes TPD32 EV-...-C, TPD32 EV-...-D and TPD32 EV-...-E are already fitted with fast-acting mains fuses (FC).
Note!
86
Technical characteristics of fuses, including size, weight, dissipation, heat, etc. are provided in
the relative fuse manufacturers catalogues (Z...= Jean Muller; FWP , 170M...= Bussmann;
A...= Gould Shawmut).
TPD32-EV
Table 4.9.1.1: Fa, External input side fuses

TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
Quantity
TPD32-EV-.../...-20-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-40-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-70-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-110-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-140-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-185-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-350-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-420-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-500-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-650-..-B
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
TPD32 EV
American sizes
Quantity
TPD32 EV-...-.../...-17-..-A-NA
TPD32 EV-...-.../...-35-..-A-NA
TPD32 EV-...-.../...-56-..-A-NA
TPD32 EV-...-.../...-88-..-A-NA
TPD32 EV-...-.../...-112-..-A-NA
TPD32 EV-...-.../...-148-..-A-NA
TPD32 EV-...-.../...-224-..-B-NA
TPD32 EV-...-.../...-280-..-B-NA
TPD32 EV-...-.../...-336-..-B-NA
TPD32 EV-...-.../...-400-..-B-NA
TPD32 EV-...-.../...-450-..-B-NA
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Standard
American
Type
Code
Type
Code
Z14gR20
Z22gR50
Z22gR63
S00C+/f1/80/100A/660V
S00C+/f1/80/125A/660V
S00F1/80/200A/660V
S1F1/110/250A/660V
S1F1/110/315A/660V
S1F1/110/400A/660V
S1F1/110/500A/660V
S1F1/110/630A/660V
F4M07
F4M15
F4M17
F4EAG
F4EAJ
F4G23
F4G28
F4G30
F4G34
F4E30
F4E31
A70P25
A70P40
A70P80
A70P100
A70P150
A70P175
A70P300
A70P350
A70P400
A70P500
A70P600
S7G51
S7G52
S7G54
S7G55
S7G56
S7G57
S7G60
S7G61
S7G62
S7G63
S7G65
American
Type
Code
A70P25
A70P40
A70P80
A70P100
A70P150
A70P175
A70P300
A70P350
A70P400
A70P500
A70P600
S7G51
S7G52
S7G54
S7G55
S7G56
S7G57
S7G60
S7G61
S7G62
S7G63
S7G65
Table 4.9.1.2: Fb, External fuses for the armature circuit

Standard
American
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
Quantity
Type
Code
Type
Code
TPD32-EV-500/...-20-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/...-40-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/...-70-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/...-110-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/...-140-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/...-185-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/...-280-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/...-350-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/...-420-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/...-500-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/...-650-4B-B
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Z14gR20
Z22gR63
S00C+/f1/80/100A/660V
S00C+/f1/80/125A/660V
S00C+/f1/80/160A/660V
S00F1/80/200A/660V
S1F1/110/315A/660V
S2F1/110/400A/660V
S2F1/110/500A/660V
S2F1/110/630A/660V
S2F1/110/710A/660V
F4M07
F4M17
F4EAG
F4EAJ
F4EAL
F4G23
F4G30
F4G34
F4E30
F4E31
F4G85
A70P25
A70P80
A70P100
A70P150
A70P175
A70P200
A70P350
A70P400
A70P500
A70P600
A70P700
S7G51
S7G54
S7G55
S7G56
S7G57
S7G58
S7G61
S7G62
S7G63
S7G65
S7G67
TPD32-EV-575/...-280-4B-B
TPD32-EV-575/...-350-4B-B
TPD32-EV-575/...-420-4B-B
TPD32-EV-575/...-500-4B-B
TPD32-EV-575/...-650-4B-B
2
2
2
2
2
S2f01/110/315A/1000V
S2f01/110/400A/1000V
S2f01/110/500A/1000V
S3f01/110/630A/1000V
S3f01/110/710A/1000V
A100P350-4
A100P400-4
A100P500-4
A100P600-4
A100P800-4
TPD32 EV
American sizes
Quantity
TPD32 EV-500/...-17-4B-A-NA
TPD32 EV-500/...-35-4B-A-NA
TPD32 EV-500/...-56-4B-A-NA
TPD32 EV-500/...-88-4B-A-NA
TPD32 EV-500/...-112-4B-A-NA
TPD32 EV-500/...-148-4B-A-NA
TPD32 EV-500/...-224-4B-B-NA
TPD32 EV-500/...-280-4B-B-NA
TPD32 EV-500/...-336-4B-B-NA
TPD32 EV-500/...-400-4B-B-NA
TPD32 EV-500/...-450-4B-B-NA
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
S85C4
S85C5
American
Type
Code
A70P25
A70P40
A70P80
A70P100
A70P150
A70P175
A70P300
A70P350
A70P400
A70P500
A70P600
S7G51
S7G52
S7G54
S7G55
S7G56
S7G57
S7G60
S7G61
S7G62
S7G63
S7G65
Instruction manual
87
TPD32 EV
American sizes
Quantity
TPD32 EV-575/...-224-4B-B-NA
TPD32 EV-575/...-280-4B-B-NA
TPD32 EV-575/...-336-4B-B-NA
TPD32 EV-575/...-400-4B-B-NA
TPD32 EV-575/...-450-4B-B-NA
2
2
2
2
2
American
Type
Code
A100P300-4
A100P350-4
A100P400-4
A100P500-4
A100P600-4
Note: Necessary only for the four quadrant functioning.
Table 4.9.1.3: Fc, Internal input side fuses

Standard
American
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
Quantity
Type
Code
Type
Code
TPD32 EV-500/600-770-2B-C
TPD32 EV-500/600-1000-2B-C
TPD32-EV-500/600-1400-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/600-1600-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/600-2400-2B-D
TPD32 EV-500/600-1200-2B-E
TPD32 EV-500/600-1500-2B-E
TPD32 EV-500/600-1800-2B-E
TPD32 EV-500/600-2000-2B-E
TPD32 EV-500/600-2400-2B-E
TPD32 EV-500/600-2700-2B-E
TPD32 EV-500/600-2900-2B-E
TPD32 EV-500/600-3300-2B-E
3
3
6
6
6
12
6
6
6
6
6
12
12
12
G2MUF02 800A 660V

170M 5466 1000A 660V
170M 6263 900A 690V
170M 6265 1100A 690V
170M 6267 1400A 690V
170M 6263 900A 690V
170M 5464 800A 660V
170M 6464 1000A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
170M 6467 1400A 660V
170M 6462 800A 660V
170M 6463 900A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
S826B
S827B
S86C1
S86C2
S85C2
S86C1
S7792
S7799
S7802
S7802
S7803
S7797
S7798
S7802
170M 5464 800A 660V

170M 5466 1000A 660V
170M 6263 900A 690V
170M 6265 1100A 690V
170M 6267 1400A 690V
170M 6263 900A 690V
170M 5464 800A 660V
170M 6464 1000A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
170M 6467 1400A 660V
170M 6462 800A 660V
170M 6463 900A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
S7792
S827B
S86C1
S86C2
S85C2
S86C1
S7792
S7799
S7802
S7802
S7803
S7797
S7798
S7802
TPD32-EV-575/680-700-2B-C
TPD32-EV-575/680-1000-2B-C
TPD32-EV-575/680-1300-2B-D
TPD32-EV-575/680-1600-2B-D
TPD32-EV-575/680-2000-2B-D
TPD32-EV-575/680-2300-2B-D
3
3
6
6
6
12
170M 5463 700A 690V

170M 5466 1000A 690V
170M 6263 900A 690V
170M 6265 1100A 690V
170M 6267 1400A 690V
170M 6263 900A 690V
S7791
S827B
S86C1
S86C2
S85C2
S86C1
170M 5463 700A 690V

170M 5466 1000A 690V
170M 6263 900A 690V
170M 6265 1100A 690V
170M 6267 1400A 690V
170M 6263 900A 690V
S7791
S827B
S86C1
S86C2
S85C2
S86C1
TPD32-EV-690/810-560-2B-C
TPD32-EV-690/810-700-2B-C
TPD32-EV-690/810-900-2B-C
TPD32-EV-690/810-1300-2B-D
TPD32-EV-690/810-1600-2B-D
TPD32-EV-690/810-1900-2B-D
TPD32-EV-690/810-2100-2B-D
3
3
3
6
6
6
12
170M 5461 550A 690V

170M 5463 700A 690V
170M 5465 900A 690V
170M 6263 900A 690V
170M 6265 1100A 690V
170M 6267 1400A 690V
170M 6262 800A 690V
S85C11
S7791
S7793
S86C1
S86C2
S85C2
S85C3
170M 5461 550A 690V

170M 5463 700A 690V
170M 5465 900A 690V
170M 6263 900A 690V
170M 6265 1100A 690V
170M 6267 1400A 690V
170M 6262 800A 690V
S85C11
S7791
S7793
S86C1
S86C2
S85C2
S85C3
TPD32 EV-690/810-1010-2B-E
TPD32 EV-690/810-1400-2B-E
TPD32 EV-690/810-1700-2B-E
TPD32 EV-690/810-2000-2B-E
TPD32 EV-690/810-2400-2B-E
TPD32 EV-690/810-2700-2B-E
TPD32 EV-690/810-3300-2B-E
6
6
6
6
12
12
12
170M 5463 700A 660V

170M 6463 900A 660V
170M 6465 1100A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
170M 6461 700A 660V
170M 6462 800A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
S7791
S7798
S7801
S7802
S7796
S7797
S7802
170M 5463 700A 660V

170M 6463 900A 660V
170M 6465 1100A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
170M 6461 700A 660V
170M 6462 800A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
S7791
S7798
S7801
S7802
S7796
S7797
S7802
TPD32 EV-500/520-770-4B-C
TPD32 EV-500/520-1050-4B-C
TPD32-EV-500/520-1400-4B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-1600-4B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-2400-4B-D
6
6
6
6
6
12
170M 5462 630A 660V

G2MUF02 800A 660V
170M 6263 900A 690V
170M 6265 1100A 690V
170M 6267 1400A 690V
170M 6263 900A 690V
S825B
S826B
S86C1
S86C2
S85C2
S86C1
170M 5462 630A 660V

170M 5464 800A 660V
170M 6263 900A 690V
170M 6265 1100A 690V
170M 6267 1400A 690V
170M 6263 900A 690V
S825B
S7792
S86C1
S86C2
S85C2
S86C1
TPD32 EV-500/520-1500-4B-E
TPD32 EV-500/520-1700-4B-E
TPD32 EV-500/520-2000-4B-E
6
6
6
170M 5465 900A 660V

170M 6466 1250A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
S7793
S7802
S7802
170M 5465 900A 660V

170M 6466 1250A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
S7793
S7802
S7802
88
TPD32-EV
Standard
American
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
Quantity
Type
Code
Type
Code
TPD32 EV-500/520-2400-4B-E
TPD32 EV-500/520-2700-4B-E
TPD32 EV-500/520-3300-4B-E
6
12
12
170M 6467 1400A 660V

170M 6462 800A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
S7803
S7797
S7802
170M 6467 1400A 660V

170M 6462 800A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
S7803
S7797
S7802
TPD32-EV-575/600-700-4B-C
TPD32-EV-575/600-1050-4B-C
TPD32-EV-575/600-1300-4B-D
TPD32-EV-575/600-1600-4B-D
TPD32-EV-575/600-2000-4B-D
TPD32-EV-575/600-2300-4B-D
6
6
6
6
12
12
170M 5394 500A 1250V

170M 5398 800A 1000V
170M 6247 900A 1250V
170M 6249 1100A 1250V
170M 6245 700A 1250V
170M 6247 900A 1250V
S85D3
S85D2
S85C7
S85C10
S85C5
S85C7
170M 5394 500A 1250V

170M 5398 800A 1000V
170M 6247 900A 1250V
170M 6249 1100A 1250V
170M 6245 700A 1250V
170M 6247 900A 1250V
S85D3
S85D2
S85C7
S85C10
S85C5
S85C7
TPD32-EV-690/720-560-4B-C
TPD32-EV-690/720-700-4B-C
TPD32-EV-690/720-900-4B-C
TPD32-EV-690/720-1300-4B-D
TPD32-EV-690/720-1600-4B-D
TPD32-EV-690/720-1900-4B-D
TPD32-EV-690/720-2100-4B-D
6
6
6
6
6
12
12
170M 5392 400A 1250V

170M 5394 500A 1250V
170M 5396 630A 1100V
170M 6247 900A 1250V
170M 6249 1100A 1250V
170M 6245 700A 1250V
170M 6246 800A 1250V
S85C12
S85D3
S85D1
S85C7
S85C10
S85C5
S85C6
170M 5392 400A 1250V

170M 5394 500A 1250V
170M 5396 630A 1100V
170M 6247 900A 1250V
170M 6249 1100A 1250V
170M 6245 700A 1250V
170M 6246 800A 1250V
S85C12
S85D3
S85D1
S85C7
S85C10
S85C5
S85C6
TPD32 EV-690/720-1010-4B-E
TPD32 EV-690/720-1400-4B-E
TPD32 EV-690/720-1700-4B-E
TPD32 EV-690/720-2000-4B-E
TPD32 EV-690/720-2400-4B-E
TPD32 EV-690/720-2700-4B-E
TPD32 EV-690/720-3300-4B-E
6
6
12
12
12
12
12
170M 6345 700A 1250V

170M 6497 900A 1250V
170M 5394 500A 1250V
170M 6344 630A 1250V
170M 6345 700A 1250V
170M 6346 800A 1250V
170M 6500 1250A 1100V
S7795
S7804
S85D3
S7794
S7795
S7805
S7806
170M 6345 700A 1250V

170M 6497 900A 1250V
170M 5394 500A 1250V
170M 6344 630A 1250V
170M 6345 700A 1250V
170M 6346 800A 1250V
170M 6500 1250A 1100V
S7795
S7804
S85D3
S7794
S7795
S7805
S7806
TPD32 EV
American sizes
Quantity
TPD32-EV-500/600-560-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-800-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1000-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1200-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1500-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1850-2B-D-NA
American
Type
Code
3
3
6
6
6
12
170M 5464 800A 660V

170M 5466 1000A 660V
170M 6263 900A 690V
170M 6265 1100A 690V
170M 6267 1400A 690V
170M 6263 900A 690V
S7792
S827B
S86C1
S86C2
S85C2
S86C1
TPD32-EV-500/600-1000-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1300-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1400-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1500-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1800-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2200-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2350-2B-E-NA
6
6
6
6
6
12
12
12
170M 5464 800A 660V

170M 6464 1000A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
170M 6467 1400A 660V
170M 6462 800A 660V
170M 6463 900A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
S7792
S7799
S7802
S7802
S7803
S7797
S7798
S7802
TPD32-EV-575/680-490-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-750-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-980-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-1200-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-1500-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-1800-2B-D-NA
3
3
6
6
6
12
170M 5463 700A 690V

170M 5466 1000A 690V
170M 6263 900A 690V
170M 6265 1100A 690V
170M 6267 1400A 690V
170M 6263 900A 690V
S7791
S827B
S86C1
S86C2
S85C2
S86C1
TPD32-EV-690/810-360-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-490-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-650-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-920-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1200-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1450-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1650-2B-D-NA
3
3
3
6
6
6
12
170M 5461 550A 690V

170M 5463 700A 690V
170M 5465 900A 690V
170M 6263 900A 690V
170M 6265 1100A 690V
170M 6267 1400A 690V
170M 6262 800A 690V
S85C11
S7791
S7793
S86C1
S86C2
S85C2
S85C3
Instruction manual
89
TPD32 EV
American sizes
Quantity
TPD32-EV-690/810-900-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1150-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1350-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1500-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1800-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-2000-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-2350-2B-E-NA
American
Type
Code
6
6
6
6
12
12
12
170M 5463 700A 660V

170M 6463 900A 660V
170M 6465 1100A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
170M 6461 700A 660V
170M 6462 800A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
S7791
S7798
S7801
S7802
S7796
S7797
S7802
TPD32-EV-500/520-560-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-850-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1000-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1200-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1500-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1850-4B-D-NA
6
6
6
6
6
12
170M 5462 630A 660V

170M 5464 800A 660V
170M 6263 900A 690V
170M 6265 1100A 690V
170M 6267 1400A 690V
170M 6263 900A 690V
S825B
S7792
S86C1
S86C2
S85C2
S86C1
TPD32-EV-500/520-1300-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1350-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1500-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1800-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-2350-4B-E-NA
6
6
6
6
12
12
170M 5465 900A 660V

170M 6466 1250A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
170M 6467 1400A 660V
170M 6462 800A 660V
170M 6466 1250A 660V
S7793
S7802
S7802
S7803
S7797
S7802
TPD32-EV-575/600-490-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-750-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-980-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-1200-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-1500-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-1800-4B-D-NA
6
6
6
6
12
12
170M 5394 500A 1250V

170M 5398 800A 1000V
170M 6247 900A 1250V
170M 6249 1100A 1250V
170M 6245 700A 1250V
170M 6247 900A 1250V
S85D3
S85D2
S85C7
S85C10
S85C5
S85C7
TPD32-EV-690/720-360-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-490-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-650-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-980-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1200-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1450-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1650-4B-D-NA
6
6
6
6
6
12
12
170M 5392 400A 1250V

170M 5394 500A 1250V
170M 5396 630A 1100V
170M 6247 900A 1250V
170M 6249 1100A 1250V
170M 6245 700A 1250V
170M 6246 800A 1250V
S85C12
S85D3
S85D1
S85C7
S85C10
S85C5
S85C6
TPD32-EV-690/720-900-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1150-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1350-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1500-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1800-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-2000-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-2350-4B-E-NA
6
6
12
12
12
12
12
170M 6345 700A 1250V

170M 6497 900A 1250V
170M 5394 500A 1250V
170M 6344 630A 1250V
170M 6345 700A 1250V
170M 6346 800A 1250V
170M 6500 1250A 1100V
S7795
S7804
S85D3
S7794
S7795
S7805
S7806
Note! These fuses are fitted inside the device and form an integral part of the equipment (TPD32 EV-...-C, TPD32 EV-...-D and TPD32 EV-...-E series).
Table 4.9.1.4: Fd, Internal fuses for the field circuit
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
Quantity
TPD32 EV-.../...-....-..-A
TPD32 EV-.../...-....-..-B
TPD32 EV-.../...-....-..-C
TPD32 EV-.../...-1300-..-D to TPD32 EV-.../...-2000-..-D
TPD32 EV-.../...-2100-..-D to TPD32 EV-.../...-2400-..-D
TPD32 EV-.../...-1010-..-E to TPD32 EV-.../...-2000-..-E
TPD32 EV-.../...-2400-..-E to TPD32 EV-.../...-3300-..-E
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
90
Standard
Type
500 V
600 V
600 V
600 V
600 V
600 V
600 V
16 A
25 A
25 A
50 A
100 A
50 A
100 A
Code
fast
fast
fast
fast
fast
fast
fast
TPD32-EV
S824B
S823B
S823B
F4M15
F4M21
F4M15
F4M21
TPD32 EV
American sizes
Quantity
TPD32 EV-.../...-....-..-A-NA
TPD32 EV-.../...-....-..-B-NA
TPD32 EV-.../...-....-..-C-NA
TPD32 EV-.../...-920-..-D to TPD32 EV-.../...-1500-..-D-NA
TPD32 EV-.../...-1650-..-D to TPD32 EV-.../...-1850-..-D-NA
TPD32 EV-.../...-1000-..-E to TPD32 EV-.../...-1500-..-E-NA
TPD32 EV-.../...-1800-..-E to TPD32 EV-.../...-2350-..-E-NA
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
American
Type
500 V
600 V
600 V
600 V
600 V
600 V
600 V
Code
16 A
25 A
25 A
50 A
100 A
50 A
100 A
fast
fast
fast
fast
fast
fast
fast
S824B
S823B
S823B
F4M15
F4M21
F4M15
F4M21
Note! These fuses are internally mounted and are provided on the delivery.

Table 4.9.1.5: FU1, FV1, External field circuit fuses for TPD32-EV-CU
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
Quantity
TPD32-EV-CU-.../...-....-40
TPD32-EV-CU-.../...-....-70
Note!
Standard
Type
FWP-50A22Fa
A70QS50-22F
5014006.50
FWP-100A22Fa
A70QS100-22F
5.014.006.100
Code
F4M15
F4M21
Technical characteristics of fuses, including size, weight, dissipation, heat, etc. are provided in the relative
fuse manufacturers catalogues (5014006...= SIBA; FWP = Bussmann; A70...=Ferraz-Shawmut).
Table 4.9.1.5: Other internal fuses
Construction type
Designation
Fuses for
Fuse
Code
Mounted on
F1
+ 24V
power supply out
IEC 250 V 2.50 A slo-blo

0.2 x 0.8 (5 x 20 mm)
S8B29
SW1-31
rev. K (*)
F1/F2
+ 24V
power supply out

0.2 x 0.8 (5 x 20 mm)
IEC 500 V 16 A fast acting
0.24 x 1.26 (6 x 32 mm)
0.4 x 1.5 (10 x 38 mm)
B
F1/F2/F3
Varistor fuse
F1/F2
+ 24V
power supply out

0.2 x 0.8 (5 x 20 mm)
Varistor fuse

0.24 x 1.26 (6 x 32 mm)
0.55 x 2 (14 x 51 mm)
0.55 x 2 (14 x 51 mm)
C
F1/F2/F3
S8B29
S824B
S823B
SW2-32
rev. J (**)
FIR-2-51 (TPD32 EV500/...-...)
FIR-2-61 (TPD32 EV575/...-...)
S8B29
SW3-32
S821B
FL-31
S85B6
FL-57 (TPD32 EV575/...-...)

FL-69 (TPD32 EV690/...-...)
S85B6
F1
+ 24V
power supply in

0.2 x 0.8 (5 x 20 mm)
S8B29
SW1-31
F11/F21/F31
Varistor fuse

0.55 x 2 (14 x 51 mm)
S7G49
CFSF-..
(*)
F1 (SW1-31 < rev. K) = IEC 250 V 1 A slo-blo, 0.2x 0.8 (5 x 20 mm)
(**)
F1 (SW2-32 < rev. J) = IEC 250 V 3.15 A fast acting, 0.2 x 0.8 (5 x 20 mm)
Instruction manual
91
4.9.2 Fuses selection when the Overload function is activated

> 100% for 60 seconds - Standard Setting
> 150% for 60 seconds - American Setting
Different fuses must be used when the current is higher than the rated one (overload current). Maximum values
allowed for each type are listed on the next table. Be carefull to coordinate the right dimension.
Example: the 1st fuse type on power section A have to be coordinated with the 1st fuse type on section B and so on.
For type C-D-E converters: see "Table 4.9.1.3: Fc, Internal input side fuses" on page 88.
Table 4.9.2.1: Fa, Overload fuses
Converter type
TPD32-EV-.../...-20-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-40-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-70-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-110-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-140-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-185-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-350-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-420-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-500-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-650-..-B
Converter type
TPD32-EV-.../...-17-..-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-35-..-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-56-..-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-88-..-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-112-..-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-148-..-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-224-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-336-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-400-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-450-..-B-NA
Code
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
Pieces
3
2
3
2
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
Code
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
Pieces
3
2
3
2
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
Fa
Fb *
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
400 VAC Input supply

Z14gR25 (GRD2/25)
Z14gR32 (F4M11)
Z22gR50 (F4M15)
Z22gR63 (F4M17)
S00C+/f1/80/100A/660V
(F4EAG)
S00C+/f1/80/100A/660V
(F4EAG)
S00C+/f1/80/100A/660V
(F4EAG)
S00C+/f1/80/125A/660V
(F4EAJ)
S00UF1/80/160A/660V (F4EAL)
S00UF1/80/200A/660V (F4G23)
S00UF1/80/200A/660V (F4G23)
S00UF1/80/200A/660V (F4G23)
S1F1/110/315A/660V (F4G30)
S2F1/110/400A/660V (F4G34)
S2F1/110/400A/660V (F4G34)
S2F1/110/500A/660V (F4E30)
S2F1/110/500A/660V (F4E30)
S2F1/110/630A/660V (F4E31)
S2F1/110/630A/660V (F4E31)
S2F1/110/710A/660V (F4G85)
S2F1/110/630A/660V (F4E31)
S2F1/110/710A/660V (F4G85)
500 VAC Input Supply

Z14gR25 (GRD2/25)
Z14gR32 (F4M11)
Z14gR40 (GRD3/35)
Z22gR50 (F4M15)
S00C+/f1/80/100A/660V
(F4EAG)
S00C+/f1/80/100A/660V
(F4EAG)
S00C+/f1/80/100A/660V
(F4EAG)
S00C+/f1/80/125A/660V
(F4EAJ)
S00UF1/80/160A/660V (F4EAL)
S00UF1/80/200A/660V (F4G23)
S00UF1/80/200A/660V (F4G23)
S00UF1/80/200A/660V (F4G23)
S1F1/110/315A/660V (F4G30)
S2F1/110/400A/660V (F4G34)
S2F1/110/400A/660V (F4G34)
S2F1/110/500A/660V (F4E30)
S2F1/110/500A/660V (F4E30)
S2F1/110/630A/660V (F4E31)
S2F1/110/630A/660V (F4E31)
S2F1/110/710A/660V (F4G85)
S2F1/110/630A/660V (F4E31)
S2F1/110/710A/660V (F4G85)
400 VAC Input supply

Z14gR25 (GRD2/25)
Z14gR32 (F4M11)
Z22gR50 (F4M15)
Z22gR63 (F4M17)
S00C+/f1/80/100A/660V
(F4EAG)
S00C+/f1/80/100A/660V
(F4EAG)
S00C+/f1/80/100A/660V
(F4EAG)
S00C+/f1/80/125A/660V
(F4EAJ)
S00UF1/80/160A/660V (F4EAL)
S00UF1/80/200A/660V (F4G23)
S00UF1/80/200A/660V (F4G23)
S00UF1/80/200A/660V (F4G23)
S1F1/110/315A/660V (F4G30)
S2F1/110/400A/660V (F4G34)
S2F1/110/400A/660V (F4G34)
S2F1/110/500A/660V (F4E30)
S2F1/110/500A/660V (F4E30)
S2F1/110/630A/660V (F4E31)
S2F1/110/630A/660V (F4E31)
S2F1/110/710A/660V (F4G85)
S2F1/110/630A/660V (F4E31)
S2F1/110/710A/660V (F4G85)

Z14gR25 (GRD2/25)
Z14gR32 (F4M11)
Z14gR40 (GRD3/35)
Z22gR50 (F4M15)
S00C+/f1/80/100A/660V
(F4EAG)
S00C+/f1/80/100A/660V
(F4EAG)
S00C+/f1/80/100A/660V
(F4EAG)
S00C+/f1/80/125A/660V
(F4EAJ)
S00UF1/80/160A/660V (F4EAL)
S00UF1/80/200A/660V (F4G23)
S00UF1/80/200A/660V (F4G23)
S00UF1/80/200A/660V (F4G23)
S1F1/110/315A/660V (F4G30)
S2F1/110/400A/660V (F4G34)
S2F1/110/400A/660V (F4G34)
S2F1/110/500A/660V (F4E30)
S2F1/110/500A/660V (F4E30)
S2F1/110/630A/660V (F4E31)
S2F1/110/630A/660V (F4E31)
S2F1/110/710A/660V (F4G85)
S2F1/110/630A/660V (F4E31)
S2F1/110/710A/660V (F4G85)
F a
External fuses for the armature circuit on the DC side
Fb
External fuses for the armature converter on the AC input side
*
Necessary only for the four quadrant functioning
Note for sizes 770 ... 1050 A: the armature fuses are internally mounted (see table 4.9.1.1)
92
TPD32-EV
S00C+/f01/315A/690V (...)
170M5242 (...)
S1f01/110/400A/690V (...)
170M5244 (...)
S1f01/110/500A/690V (...)
170M6244 (...)
170M4265 (...)
170M4265 (...)
S1f01/110/630A/690V (...)
170M6246 (...)
S00C+/f01/315A/690V (...)
170M5242 (...)
S1f01/110/400A/690V (...)
170M5244 (...)
S1f01/110/500A/690V (...)
170M6244 (...)
170M4265 (...)
170M4265 (...)
S1f01/110/630A/690V (...)
170M6246 (...)
4.9.3 AC input contactors

Note!
The contactor sizes must be selected based on the converter rated current. The sizing basis
is the thermo current AC1, which is absorbed by the input during the rated functioning.
Note!
The technical data of the contactors, as for example weights, dissipated powers, auxiliary
contacts etc. can be found in the appropriate data sheets.
4.9.4 Control power protection

The 115 VAC/230 VAC control power input, U2 & V2, for the TPD32-EV are required to be short circuit protected.
This protection can be provided by using standard time delay fuses, or circuit breaker.
The circuit breaker and/or time delay fuses must be selected to survive the short circuit available current of the
feeder source for this circuit, and the inrush current of the drive power supply.
The rating of the fuses or circuit breaker should be sized mainly to protect the wiring from the fuses/circuit
breaker connections to U2 & V2, and not nuisance trip or blow from the inrush current.
The table below, Table 4.9.5, lists the input current characteristics of the control power.
For version TPD32-EV-FC, refer to the values shown for the TPD32-EV standard model.
Table 4.9.5: Control power protection
Regulation Power Supply
Modelli
Card
Power
TPD32-EV-...-A
TPD32-EV-...-D
TPD32-EV-...-E
TPD32-EV-CU-...
SW1-31
TPD32-EV-...-B
TPD32-EV-...-C
Rated input current
Inrush input current
115 V
230 V
115 V
230 V
60 W
1A
0.5 A
20 A
10 A
SW2-32
110 W
1.2 A
0.7 A
15 A
7.5 A
SW3-32
110 W
1.2 A
0.7 A
15 A
7.5 A
The control power input is best served by a power source that is stabilized and buffered from the power system
transients.
The control power of many drives can be fed from a single source, as long as proper distribution protection is
provided.
Instruction manual
93
4.10 REACTORS / FILTERS

To improve safety during use of the TPD32-EV series of converters (mains noise, disturbance between drives)
and guarantee compliance with the conditions as required under EN 60146-1-1, IEC 146-1-2 and EN 61136-1,
a three-phase mains choke should be installed upstream of the equipment. In the majority of cases, given a relative short-circuit voltage of at least 100 kA and a simultaneity factor of 1 (EN 50178, A 6.3.6), the inclusion of
a switching choke (or transformer) with relative voltage drop of UK = 4% guarantees commutation notches at
the common coupling point (CCP) with an amplitude of less than 20%.
4.10.1 AC input choke

According to EN 61800-3 standard (Table B.1), the max. allowable depth of the commutation notches in the
PC is limited to 20%-40% depending on the installation environment. This may be obtained installing suitable
decoupling reactors or transformers.

On the other hand, for a proper operation, the drive shall be connected to an electrical supply line having a reactance with a relative voltage drop of between 2% (min) and 10% (max). The decoupling reactance requires a
specific calculation based on the relative short-circuit power RSC at the connection point and the actual type of
connection (single or multiple drives, separating transformers, etc.). But, as an indication, the following tables
list the decoupling reactance values Ld (mains spool) having a relative voltage drop of 2% or 4%. The value
refers to a drive rated output current, but can be calculated for the motor DC rated current. The line current value
is given by ILN = IdN x 0.82. (On shown calculations a safety margin of +5% has been added). It should also
be noted that drives having such a high relative voltage usually belong to the "second environment".
The calculation formula is:
Ld = (Ukd * Uln) / (Idn * 2 * 2 *fn) or Ld = (Ukd * Uln) / (Iln * 3 * 2 *fn) [H]
Table 4.10.1: Mains chokes for 400 Vac input supply
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
TPD32-EV-500/...-20--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-40--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-70--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-110--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-140--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-185--A
TPD32-500/-280--B
TPD32-500/-350--B
TPD32-500/-420--B
TPD32-500/-500--B
TPD32-500/-650--B
TPD32-EV-500/...-770--C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1000--C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1050--C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1400-...-D
TPD32-EV-500/...-1600-...-D
TPD32-EV-500/...-2000-...-D
TPD32-EV-500/...-2400-...-D
TPD32-EV-500/...-1200--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-1500--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-1700--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-1800--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-2000--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-2400--E
94
Converter rated current

[A]
20
40
70
110
140
185
280
350
420
500
650
770
1000
1050
1400
1600
2000
2400
1200
1500
1700
1800
2000
2400
Rated inductance with

Ukd = 2%
[H]
Mains voltage 400 V, 3 ph, 50 Hz

900.3
450.2
257.2
163.7
128.6
97.3
64.3
51.4
42.9
36.0
27.7
23.4
18.0
17.1
12.9
11.3
9.0
7.5
15.0
12.0
10.6
10.0
9.0
7.5

Ukd = 4%
[H]
See "Table 4.10.5 Internal

code for mains chokes" on
page 98
TPD32-EV
25.7
22.5
18.0
15.0
30.0
24.0
21.2
20.0
18.0
15.0
Rated current inductance

[A]
17
34
60
95
121
159
241
301
362
431
560
663
861
904
1205
1378
1722
2066
1033
1292
1464
1550
1722
2066
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
TPD32-EV-500/...-2700--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-2900--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-3300--E
2700
2900
3300
TPD32-EV-500/...-20--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-40--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-70--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-110--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-140--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-185--A
TPD32-500/-280--B
TPD32-500/-350--B
TPD32-500/-420--B
TPD32-500/-500--B
TPD32-500/-650--B
TPD32-EV-500/...-770--C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1000--C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1050--C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1400-...-D
TPD32-EV-500/...-1600-...-D
TPD32-EV-500/...-2000-...-D
TPD32-EV-500/...-2400-...-D
TPD32-EV-500/...-1200--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-1500--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-1700--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-1800--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-2000--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-2400--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-2700--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-2900--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-3300--E
20
40
70
110
140
185
280
350
420
500
650
770
1000
1050
1400
1600
2000
2400
1200
1500
1700
1800
2000
2400
2700
2900
3300
[A]

Ukd = 2%
[H]

Ukd = 4%
[H]
6.7
6.2
5.5
Mains voltage 400V, 3ph, 60 Hz
750.3
375.1
214.4
136.4
107.2
81.1
53.6
42.9
35.7
30.0
23.1
19.5
15.0
14.3
10.7
9.4
7.5
6.3
12.5
10.0
8.8
8.3
7.5
6.3
5.6
5.2
4.5

[A]
13.3
12.4
10.9
2325
2497
2841
1500.5
750.3
428.7
272.8
214.4
162.2
107.2
85.7
71.5
60.0
46.2
39.0
30.0
28.6
21.4
18.8
15.0
12.5
25.0
20.0
17.7
16.7
15.0
12.5
11.1
10.3
9.1
17
34
60
95
121
159
241
301
362
431
560
663
861
904
1205
1378
1722
2066
1033
1292
1464
1550
1722
2066
2325
2497
2841

TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
TPD32-EV-500/...-20--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-40--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-70--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-110--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-140--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-185--A
TPD32-500/-280--B
TPD32-500/-350--B
TPD32-500/-420--B
TPD32-500/-500--B
TPD32-500/-650--B
TPD32-EV-500/...-770--C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1000--C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1050--C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1400-...-D
TPD32-EV-500/...-1600-...-D
TPD32-EV-500/...-2000-...-D
TPD32-EV-500/...-2400-...-D
TPD32-EV-500/...-1200--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-1500--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-1700--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-1800--E
20
40
70
110
140
185
280
350
420
500
650
770
1000
1050
1400
1600
2000
2400
1200
1500
1700
1800
[A]

Ukd = 2%
[H]

1125.4
562.7
321.5
204.6
160.8
121.7
80.4
64.3
53.6
45.0
34.6
29.2
22.5
21.4
16.1
14.1
11.3
9.4
18.8
15.0
13.2
12.5

Ukd = 4%
[H]
2250.8
1125.4
643.1
409.2
321.5
243.3
160.8
128.6
107.2
90.0
69.3
58.5
45.0
42.9
32.2
28.1
22.5
18.8
37.5
30.0
26.5
25.0
Instruction manual

[A]
17
34
60
95
121
159
241
301
362
431
560
663
861
904
1205
1378
1722
2066
1033
1292
1464
1550
95
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
TPD32-EV-500/...-2000--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-2400--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-2700--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-2900--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-3300--E
2000
2400
2700
2900
3300
TPD32-EV-500/...-20--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-40--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-70--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-110--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-140--A
TPD32-EV-500/...-185--A
TPD32-500/-280--B
TPD32-500/-350--B
TPD32-500/-420--B
TPD32-500/-500--B
TPD32-500/-650--B
TPD32-EV-500/...-770--C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1000--C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1050--C
TPD32-EV-500/...-1400-...-D
TPD32-EV-500/...-1600-...-D
TPD32-EV-500/...-2000-...-D
TPD32-EV-500/...-2400-...-D
TPD32-EV-500/...-1200--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-1500--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-1700--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-1800--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-2000--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-2400--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-2700--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-2900--E
TPD32-EV-500/...-3300--E
20
40
70
110
140
185
280
350
420
500
650
770
1000
1050
1400
1600
2000
2400
1200
1500
1700
1800
2000
2400
2700
2900
3300
[A]

Ukd = 2%
[H]

Ukd = 4%
[H]
11.3
9.4
8.3
7.8
6.8
937.8
468.9
268.0
170.5
134.0
101.4
67.0
53.6
44.7
37.5
28.9
24.4
18.8
17.9
13.4
11.7
9.4
7.8
15.6
12.5
11.0
10.4
9.4
7.8
6.9
6.5
5.7

[A]
22.5
18.8
16.7
15.5
13.6
1722
2066
2325
2497
2841
1875.7
937.8
535.9
341.0
268.0
202.8
134.0
107.2
89.3
75.0
57.7
48.7
37.5
35.7
26.8
23.4
18.8
15.6
31.3
25.0
22.1
20.8
18.8
15.6
13.9
12.9
11.4
17
34
60
95
121
159
241
301
362
431
560
663
861
904
1205
1378
1722
2066
1033
1292
1464
1550
1722
2066
2325
2497
2841
For 575 V type B TPD32 converters and 575/690 V type C converters, which are usually installed in a
second-type environment: in this case UKD values of around 2% can be used, with the advantage that
smaller reactors are required. Otherwise, if UKD must be = 4%, always comply with the values shown in
the relative columns.
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
TPD32-EV-575/...-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-575/...-350-..-B
TPD32-EV-575/...-420-..-B
TPD32-EV-575/...-500-..-B
TPD32-EV-575/...-650-..-B
TPD32-EV-575/-700-...-C
TPD32-EV-575/-1000-...-C
TPD32-EV-575/...-1050--C
TPD32-EV-575/...-1300-...-D
TPD32-EV-575/...-1600-...-D
TPD32-EV-575/...-2000-...-D
TPD32-EV-575/...-2300-...-D
TPD32-EV-690/...-1010--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-1400--E
96

[A]
280
350
420
500
650
700
1000
1050
1300
1600
2000
2300
1010
1400

Ukd = 2%
[H]

Ukd = 4%
[H]

92.4 (*)
74.0 (*)
61.6 (*)
51.8 (*)
39.8 (*)
37.0
25.9
24.7
19.9
16.2
12.9
11.3
25.6
18.5
TPD32-EV
184.9
147.9
123.3
103.5
79.6
74.0
51.8
49.3
39.8
32.4
25.9
22.5
51.3
37.0

[A]
241
301
362
431
560
603
861
904
1119
1378
1722
1980
870
1205
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
TPD32-EV-690/...-1700--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-2000--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-2400--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-2700--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-3300--E
1700
2000
2400
2700
3300
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-350-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-420-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-500-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-560-..-B
TPD32-EV-575/-700-...-C
TPD32-EV-575/-1000-...-C
TPD32-EV-575/...-1050--C
TPD32-EV-575/...-1300-...-D
TPD32-EV-575/...-1600-...-D
TPD32-EV-575/...-2000-...-D
TPD32-EV-575/...-2300-...-D
TPD32-EV-690/...-1010--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-1400--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-1700--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-2000--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-2400--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-2700--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-3300--E
280
350
420
500
650
700
1000
1050
1300
1600
2000
2300
1010
1400
1700
2000
2400
2700
3300
[A]

Ukd = 2%
[H]

Ukd = 4%
[H]
15.2
12.9
10.8
9.6
7.8
77.0
61.6
51.4
43.1
33.2
30.8
21.6
20.5
16.6
13.5
10.8
9.4
21.4
15.4
12.7
10.8
9.0
8.0
6.5

[A]
30.5
25.9
21.6
19.2
15.7
1464
1722
2066
2325
2841
154.1
123.3
102.7
86.3
66.4
61.6 (**)
43.1 (**)
41.1
33.2
27.0
21.6
18.8
42.7
30.8
25.4
21.6
18.0
16.0
13.1
241
301
362
431
560
603
861
904
1119
1378
1722
1980
870
1205
1464
1722
2066
2325
2841

TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
TPD32-EV-690/-560-...-C
TPD32-EV-690/-700-...-C
TPD32-EV-690/-900-...-C
TPD32-EV-690/...-1300-...-D
TPD32-EV-690/...-1600-...-D
TPD32-EV-690/...-1900-...-D
TPD32-EV-690/...-2100-...-D
TPD32-EV-690/...-1010--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-1400--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-1700--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-2000--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-2400--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-2700--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-3300--E
560
700
900
1300
1600
1900
2100
1010
1400
1700
2000
2400
2700
3300
TPD32-EV-690/-560-...-C
TPD32-EV-690/-700-...-C
TPD32-EV-690/-900-...-C
TPD32-EV-690/...-1300-...-D
TPD32-EV-690/...-1600-...-D
TPD32-EV-690/...-1900-...-D
TPD32-EV-690/...-2100-...-D
TPD32-EV-690/...-1010--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-1400--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-1700--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-2000--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-2400--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-2700--E
TPD32-EV-690/...-3300--E
560
700
900
1300
1600
1900
2100
1010
1400
1700
2000
2400
2700
3300
[A]

Ukd = 2%
[H]

55.5
44.4
34.5
23.9
19.4
16.3
14.8
30.8
22.2
18.3
15.5
12.9
11.5
9.4
46.2
37.0
28.8
19.9
16.2
13.6
12.3
25.6
18.5
15.2
12.9
10.8
9.6
7.8

Ukd = 4%
[H]

[A]
110.9
88.7
69.0
47.8
38.8
32.7
29.6
61.5
44.4
36.5
31.1
25.9
23.0
18.8
482
603
775
1119
1378
1636
1808
870
1205
1464
1722
2066
2325
2841
92.4 (**)
74.0
57.5 (**)
39.8
32.4
27.2
24.7
51.3
37.0
30.5
25.9
21.6
19.2
15.7
482
603
775
1119
1378
1636
1808
870
1205
1464
1722
2066
2325
2841
Instruction manual
97
Note!
Tables 4.10.1-2-3-4 show the mains choke electrical ratings, but not the relative codes. Please
contact our sales network for further details.
Table 4.10.5 Internal code for mains chokes
Three-phase mains choke
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
Choke
rating
[mH]
Current
rating
[A]
Saturation
current
[A]
Frequency
Inductance type
Code
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
LR3-011
LR3-41-61-0,68
LR3-61-91-0,45
LR3-90-135-0,30
LR3-107-160-0,26
LR3-163-244-0,17
LR3-253-380-0,11
LR3-287-430-0,1
LR3-368-552-0,076
LR3-458-687-0,06
LR3-605-910-0,05
LR3-685-1027-0,04
LR3-869-1303-0,03
LR3-869-1303-0,03
S7FF6
S7D03
S7D04
S7D05
S7D06
S7D07
S7D09
S7D10
S7D11
S7D12
S7D27
S7D14
S7D15
S7D15
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
50 / 60
LR3-011
LR3-41-61-0,68
LR3-61-91-0,45
LR3-90-135-0,30
LR3-107-160-0,26
LR3-163-244-0,17
LR3-253-380-0,11
LR3-287-430-0,1
LR3-368-552-0,076
LR3-458-687-0,06
LR3-605-910-0,05
LR3-685-1027-0,04
LR3-869-1303-0,03
LR3-869-1303-0,03
S7FF6
S7D03
S7D04
S7D05
S7D06
S7D07
S7D09
S7D10
S7D11
S7D12
S7D27
S7D14
S7D15
S7D15
[Hz]
Mains voltage 400-460 V, 3Ph, 50 Hz

TPD32-EV-.../...-20-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-40-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-70-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-110-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-140-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-185-..-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-350-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-420-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-500-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-650-..-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-770-.. -C
TPD32-EV-.../...-1000-.. -C
TPD32-EV-.../...-1050-.. -C
1,71
0,855
0,488
0,311
0,244
0,185
0,122
0,098
0,081
0,068
0,053
0,044
0,034
0,033
TPD32-EV-.../...-17-..-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-35-..-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-56-..-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-88-..-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-112-..-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-148-..-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-224-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-336-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-400-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-450-..-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-560-..-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-800-..-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-850-..-C-NA
1,71
0,855
0,488
0,311
0,244
0,185
0,122
0,098
0,081
0,068
0,053
0,044
0,034
0,033
17,2
34,4
60,2
94,6
120,4
159
241
301
361
430
559
662
860
903
34,4
68,8
120,4
189,2
240,8
318
482
602
722
860
1118
1324
1720
1806
Mains voltage 400-500 V, 3Ph, 60 Hz

17.2
34.4
60.2
94.6
120.4
159
241
301
361
430
559
662
860
903
34.4
68.8
120.4
189.2
240.8
318
482
602
722
860
1118
1324
1720
1806
Note!
The line inductance (L2) for the field circuit is usually not used because the motor field load
already has a very high inductive value which limits the negative effects of transmissions. If
the inductance is required, contact Gefran for the necessary information.
Note!
TPD32-EV-FC-... : reference should be made to the corresponding voltage and current sizes
of TPD32 EV Standard sizes.
For choke dimensions please see the TPD32-EV catalogue.
98
TPD32-EV
4.10.2 Interference suppression filters

The converters of TPD32-EV series must be equipped with an external EMI filter in order to reduce the radiofrequency emissions on the mains line. The filter selection is depending on the drive size and the installation
environment.
Please refer to the EMC guide supplied with the equipment for details of how to install the electrical panel
(connection of filters and mains chokes, cable shielding, grounding, etc.) to ensure compliance with the EMC
Directive (2014/30/EC).
The document describes the present situation concerning the EMC standards and the compliance tests made on
the Gefran drives.
For filter dimensions please see the TPD32-EV catalogue.
Table 4.10.2: EMI filters
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
Filter type
Code
Category / Environment
/ Length of motor cable
(max)
Mains voltage 230-400 V 10%

TPD32-EV-500/600-20-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-40-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-70-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-110-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-140-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-185-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-20-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-40-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-70-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-110-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-140-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-185-4B-A
EMI-480-45
EMI-480-45
EMI-480-70
EMI-480-100
EMI-480-150
EMI-480-180
S7DFU
S7DFU
S7DFZ
S7DGA
S7DGB
S7DGC
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-280-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-350-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-420-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-500-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-650-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-280-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-350-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-420-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-500-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-650-4B-B
EMI-480-320
EMI-480-400
EMI-480-400
EMI-480-600
EMI-480-800
S7DGH
S7DGI
S7DGI
S7DGL
S7DGM
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-770-2B-C
TPD32-EV-500/600-1000-2B-C
TPD32-EV-500/520-770-4B-C
TPD32-EV-500/520-1050-4B-C
EMI-480-800
EMI-480-1000
S7DGM
S7DGN
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-1400-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/600-1600-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/600-2400-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-1400-4B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-1600-4B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-2400-4B-D
EMI-480-1600
EMI-480-1600
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
S7DGO
S7DGO
S7EMI5
S7EMI5
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-1200-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-1500-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-1800-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2400-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2700-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2900-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-3300-2B-E
----TPD32-EV-500/520-1500-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-1700-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-2400-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-2700-4B-E
----TPD32-EV-500/520-3300-4B-E
EMI-480-1600
EMI-480-1600
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
n.d.
n.d.
S7DGO
S7DGO
S7EMI5
S7EMI5
S7EMI5
S7EMI5
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
Mains voltage 480 V 10%

TPD32-EV-500/600-20-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-40-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-70-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-110-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-140-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-185-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-20-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-40-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-70-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-110-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-140-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-185-4B-A
EMI-480-45
EMI-480-45
EMI-480-70
EMI-480-100
EMI-480-150
EMI-480-180
S7DFU
S7DFU
S7DFZ
S7DGA
S7DGB
S7DGC
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-280-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-350-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-420-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-500-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-280-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-350-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-420-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-500-4B-B
EMI-480-320
EMI-480-400
EMI-480-400
EMI-480-600
S7DGH
S7DGI
S7DGI
S7DGL
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
Instruction manual
99
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
Filter type
Code
(max)
TPD32-EV-500/600-650-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-650-4B-B
EMI-480-800
S7DGM
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-770-2B-C
TPD32-EV-500/600-1000-2B-C
TPD32-EV-500/520-770-4B-C
TPD32-EV-500/520-1050-4B-C
EMI-480-800
EMI-480-1000
S7DGM
S7DGN
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-1400-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/600-1600-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/600-2400-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-1400-4B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-1600-4B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-2400-4B-D
EMI-480-1600
EMI-480-1600
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
S7DGO
S7DGO
S7EMI5
S7EMI5
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-1200-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-1500-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-1800-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2400-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2700-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2900-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-3300-2B-E
----TPD32-EV-500/520-1500-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-1700-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-2400-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-2700-4B-E
----TPD32-EV-500/520-3300-4B-E
EMI-480-1600
EMI-480-1600
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
n.d.
n.d.
S7DGO
S7DGO
S7EMI5
S7EMI5
S7EMI5
S7EMI5
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-20-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-40-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-70-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-110-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-140-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-185-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-20-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-40-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-70-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-110-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-140-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-185-4B-A
EMI-600-34
EMI-600-34
EMI-600-62
EMI-600-113
EMI-600-145
EMI-SCHF-600-205
S7DFM
S7DFM
S7DFO
S7DFQ
S7DFR
S7DGD
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-280-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-350-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-420-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-500-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-650-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-280-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-350-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-420-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-500-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-650-4B-B
EMI-690-320
EMI-690-400
EMI-690-400
EMI-690-600
EMI-690-600
S7DGR
S7EMI12
S7EMI12
S7DGS
S7DGS
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-770-2B-C
TPD32-EV-500/600-1000-2B-C
TPD32-EV-500/520-770-4B-C
TPD32-EV-500/520-1050-4B-C
EMI-690-1000
EMI-690-1000
S7DGT
S7DGT
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-1400-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/600-1600-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-1400-4B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-1600-4B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-D
S7DGK
S7DGK
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-2400-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-2400-4B-D
EMI-690-1600
EMI-690-1600
Schaffner FN 3359HV2500-99 or EPCOS
B84143B2500S024
TPD32-EV-500/600-1200-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-1500-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-1800-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2400-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2700-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2900-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-3300-2B-E
----TPD32-EV-500/520-1500-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-1700-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-2400-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-2700-4B-E
----TPD32-EV-500/520-3300-4B-E
EMI-690-1000
EMI-690-1600
S7DGT
S7DGK
C3 / 2 / 100 m

B84143B2500S024
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
n.d.
n.d.

TPD32-EV-500/600-20-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-40-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-70-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-110-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-140-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/600-185-2B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-20-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-40-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-70-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-110-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-140-4B-A
TPD32-EV-500/520-185-4B-A
EMI-600-34
EMI-600-34
EMI-600-62
EMI-600-113
EMI-600-145
EMI-SCHF-600-205
S7DFM
S7DFM
S7DFO
S7DFQ
S7DFR
S7DGD
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-280-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-280-4B-B
EMI-690-320
S7DGR
C3 / 2 / 100 m
100
TPD32-EV
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
TPD32 EV
Standard sizes
Filter type
Code
(max)
TPD32-EV-500/600-350-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-420-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-500-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/600-650-2B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-350-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-420-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-500-4B-B
TPD32-EV-500/520-650-4B-B
EMI-690-400
EMI-690-400
EMI-690-600
EMI-690-600
S7EMI12
S7EMI12
S7DGS
S7DGS
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-770-2B-C
TPD32-EV-500/600-1000-2B-C
TPD32-EV-500/520-770-4B-C
TPD32-EV-500/520-1050-4B-C
EMI-690-1000
EMI-690-1000
S7DGT
S7DGT
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-1400-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/600-1600-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-1400-4B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-1600-4B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-D
S7DGK
S7DGK
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-2400-2B-D
TPD32-EV-500/520-2400-4B-D
EMI-690-1600
EMI-690-1600
B84143B2500S024
TPD32-EV-500/600-1200-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-1500-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-1800-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2400-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2700-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2900-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-3300-2B-E
----TPD32-EV-500/520-1500-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-1700-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-2400-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-2700-4B-E
----TPD32-EV-500/520-3300-4B-E
EMI-690-1000
EMI-690-1600
S7DGT
S7DGK
TPD32-EV-690/810-560-2B-C
TPD32-EV-690/810-700-2B-C
TPD32-EV-690/810-900-2B-C
TPD32-EV-690/720-560-4B-C
TPD32-EV-690/720-700-4B-C
TPD32-EV-690/720-900-4B-C
EMI-690-600
EMI-690-1000
EMI-690-1000
S7DGS
S7DGT
S7DGT
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-690/810-1300-2B-D
TPD32-EV-690/810-1600-2B-D
TPD32-EV-690/810-1900-2B-D
TPD32-EV-690/810-2100-2B-D
TPD32-EV-690/720-1300-4B-D
TPD32-EV-690/720-1600-4B-D
TPD32-EV-690/720-1900-4B-D
TPD32-EV-690/720-2100-4B-D
EMI-690-1600
EMI-690-1600
S7DGK
S7DGK
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-690/810-1010-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-1400-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-1700-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-2000-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-2400-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-2700-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-3300-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-1010-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-1400-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-1700-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-2000-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-2400-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-2700-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-3300-4B-E
TPD32 EV
American sizes
TPD32 EV
American sizes
C3 / 2 / 100 m

B84143B2500S024
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
n.d.
n.d.
EPCOS
B84143B2500S021
EMI-690-1000
EMI-690-1600
C3 / 2 / 100 m
S7DGT
S7DGK
EPCOS
B84143B2500S021
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
n.d.
Filter type
Code
(max)
Mains voltage 230-400 V 10%

TPD32-EV-500/600-17-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-35-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-56-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-88-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-112-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-148-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-17-4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-35-4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-56-4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-88-4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-112-4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-148-4B-A-NA
EMI-480-45
EMI-480-45
EMI-480-70
EMI-480-150
EMI-480-150
EMI-480-180
S7DFU
S7DFU
S7DFZ
S7DGB
S7DGB
S7DGC
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-224-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-280-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-336-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-400-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-450-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-224-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-280-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-336-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-400-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-450-4B-B-NA
EMI-480-320
EMI-480-400
EMI-480-400
EMI-480-600
EMI-480-600
S7DGH
S7DGI
S7DGI
S7DGL
S7DGL
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
Instruction manual
101
TPD32 EV
American sizes
TPD32 EV
American sizes
Filter type
Code
(max)
TPD32-EV-500/600-560-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-800-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-560-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-850-4B-C-NA
EMI-480-800
EMI-480-1000
S7DGM
S7DGN
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-1000-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1200-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1500-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1850-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1000-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1200-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1500-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1850-4B-D-NA
EMI-480-1600
EMI-480-1600
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
S7DGO
S7DGO
S7EMI5
S7EMI5
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-1000-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1300-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1400-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1500-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1800-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2200-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2350-2B-E-NA
----TPD32-EV-500/520-1300-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1350-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1500-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1800-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-E-NA
----TPD32-EV-500/520-2350-4B-E-NA
EMI-480-1600
EMI-480-1600
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
n.d.
n.d.
S7DGO
S7DGO
S7EMI5
S7EMI5
S7EMI5
S7EMI5
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-17-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-35-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-56-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-88-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-112-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-148-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-17-4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-35-4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-56-4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-88-4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-112-4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-148-4B-A-NA
EMI-480-45
EMI-480-45
EMI-480-70
EMI-480-150
EMI-480-150
EMI-480-180
S7DFU
S7DFU
S7DFZ
S7DGB
S7DGB
S7DGC
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-224-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-280-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-336-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-400-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-450-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-224-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-280-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-336-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-400-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-450-4B-B-NA
EMI-480-320
EMI-480-400
EMI-480-400
EMI-480-600
EMI-480-600
S7DGH
S7DGI
S7DGI
S7DGL
S7DGL
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-560-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-800-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-560-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-850-4B-C-NA
EMI-480-800
EMI-480-1000
S7DGM
S7DGN
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-1000-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1200-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1500-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1850-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1000-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1200-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1500-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1850-4B-D-NA
EMI-480-1600
EMI-480-1600
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
S7DGO
S7DGO
S7EMI5
S7EMI5
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-1000-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1300-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1400-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1500-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1800-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2200-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2350-2B-E-NA
----TPD32-EV-500/520-1300-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1350-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1500-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1800-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-E-NA
----TPD32-EV-500/520-2350-4B-E-NA
EMI-480-1600
EMI-480-1600
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
EMI-FN-3359-480-2500
n.d.
n.d.
S7DGO
S7DGO
S7EMI5
S7EMI5
S7EMI5
S7EMI5
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m

TPD32-EV-500/600-17-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-35-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-56-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-88-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-112-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-148-2B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-17-4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-35-4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-56-4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-88-4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-112-4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-148-4B-A-NA
EMI-600-34
EMI-600-62
EMI-600-85
EMI-600-113
EMI-600-145
EMI-SCHF-600-205
S7DFM
S7DFO
S7DFP
S7DFQ
S7DFR
S7DGD
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
C3 / 2 / 30 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-224-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-280-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-336-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-224-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-280-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-336-4B-B-NA
EMI-690-320
EMI-690-400
EMI-690-400
S7DGR
S7EMI12
S7EMI12
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
102
TPD32-EV
TPD32 EV
American sizes
TPD32 EV
American sizes
Filter type
Code
(max)
TPD32-EV-500/600-400-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-450-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-400-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-450-4B-B-NA
EMI-690-600
EMI-690-600
S7DGS
S7DGS
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-560-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-800-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-560-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-850-4B-C-NA
EMI-690-1000
EMI-690-1000
S7DGT
S7DGT
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-1000-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1200-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1500-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1000-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1200-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1500-4B-D-NA
S7DGK
S7DGK
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
TPD32-EV-500/600-1850-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1850-4B-D-NA
EMI-690-1600
EMI-690-1600
B84143B2500S024
TPD32-EV-500/600-1000-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1300-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1400-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1500-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1800-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2200-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2350-2B-E-NA
----TPD32-EV-500/520-1300-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1350-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1500-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1800-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-E-NA
----TPD32-EV-500/520-2350-4B-E-NA
EMI-690-1600
EMI-690-1600
S7DGK
S7DGK
TPD32-EV-575/680-224-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-280-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-336-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-400-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-450-2B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-224-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-280-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-336-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-400-4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-450-4B-B-NA
EMI-690-320
EMI-690-400
EMI-690-600
EMI-690-600
EMI-690-600
S7DGR
S7EMI12
S7DGS
S7DGS
S7DGS
TPD32-EV-575/680-490-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-750-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-490-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-750-4B-C-NA
EMI-690-600
EMI-690-1000
S7DGS
S7DGT
TPD32-EV-575/680-980-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-1200-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/680-1500-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-980-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-1200-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-1500-4B-D-NA
S7DGK
S7DGK
TPD32-EV-575/680-1800-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-575/600-1800-4B-D-NA
EMI-690-1600
EMI-690-1600
B84143B2500S024
C3 / 2 / 100 m

B84143B2500S024
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
n.d.
n.d.

C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m

TPD32-EV-690/810-360-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-490-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-650-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-360-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-490-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-650-4B-C-NA
EMI-690-600
EMI-690-600
EMI-690-1000
S7DGS
S7DGS
S7DGT
TPD32-EV-690/810-920-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1200-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1450-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1650-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-980-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1200-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1450-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1650-4B-D-NA
EMI-690-1600
EMI-690-1600
S7DGK
S7DGK
TPD32-EV-690/810-900-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1150-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1350-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1500-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1800-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-2000-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-2350-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-900-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1150-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1350-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1500-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1800-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-2000-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-2350-4B-E-NA
Note!
EPCOS
B84143B2500S021
EMI-690-1600
EMI-690-1600
EPCOS
B84143B2500S021
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
S7DGK
S7DGK
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
C3 / 2 / 100 m
n.d.
TPD32-EV-FC-... : reference should be made to the corresponding voltage and current sizes
of TPD32 EV Standard sizes.
Instruction manual
103
4.10.3 Mains harmonic currents generated by converters

Information about mains harmonic currents generated by fully-controlled (six-pulse) three-phase SCR
bridge AC/DC converters.
Given their non-linear load, SC AC/DC converters draw non-sinusoidal current from the mains and thus create
harmonic current.
The exact calculation of the harmonic current in a system depends on a number of factors that are linked to the
actual system and the point at which the converter is installed. For more details reference should be made to EN
61800-3, IEC 146-1-2 or EN 61800-1 (annex B).
Purely by way of example, some typical harmonic current values measured in practice and referring to the
fundamental value (I1) are provided below..
Harmonic order
h
Ih / I1
[%]
24 ... 28
5 ... 10
11
8 ... 9
13
4 ... 6
17
4.5 ... 5
19
3 ... 3.5
4.11 ENGINEERING NOTES
Supply dig. I/O

19
18
7
2
15 V
R-TPD3
Analog outputs
XE 2
+ 15 V
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
0V
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
XE 1
TBO
Supply
+5V
1
Digitale encoder
11
16
Sinusencoder
Reference
15
0 V 24
14
+ 24 V
13
- 10 V
12
0 V 10
5 6
0V
3 4
+ 10 V
Enables
Analog inputs
1 2
15
Figure 4.11.1: Potentials of the regulator section
Potentials of the regulator section

The potentials of the regulator section are galvanic divided from the power section. Figure 4.11.1 shows their
connection.
- The analog inputs are designed as differential.
- The enables are isolated from the regulation via optoisolators. The terminals 12 to 15 have terminal 16 as a
common reference potential.
104
TPD32-EV
-
-

The internal potential 0V is connected to terminal 11. In the majority of the cases the interference suppression is decreased!
The regulation card puts at your disposal the following power supplies, which have a common reference
point:
+ 10V and - 10V for the reference
+ 24V for the power supply of the digital inputs and outputs
+ 5V for the encoder power supply
The analog outputs are divided from the internal potential through a differential amplifier. The two outputs
of the option card have the same potential (terminal 22 and 24 of TBO option card). When the TBO option
card is used, the potential of the analog outputs are divided. For a better interference suppression and for the
cleaning of the output signals, the terminals 2 and 4 of the TBO option card are directly ground connected
(terminal 10 and /or 20 of the R-TPD32-EV card) or via a 0.1F/250V capacitor.
The digital outputs have the same potential (terminal 37) but they are divided from the regulator internal
potential via optoisolators. In order to use the outputs, it is necessary to connect a power supply voltage to
the terminal 30.
The digital inputs are divided from the regulator through optoisolators. The terminals 31 to 34 have terminal
37 as a common potential.
External devices
As for the installation of contactors, protection devices, chokes, filters and other external devices it is necessary to follow the indication given in the previous chapters. The same theory is valid for motors, encoders and
tachometers.
Connection cables
The encoder shielded cable must be made of twisted pairs. The connection cables of the encoders and of the
motors, if possible, should be connected directly to the device, without going through support terminal strips.
The shieldings of the signal conductors have to be ground connected on both sides. Anyway, for all analog and
digital signals with very long connections (outside the electric board), it is suggested to have a ground connection only on the converter side, in order to avoid possible noises caused by the closing of the ground loops. In
particular cases it could be necessary to connect the shielding on both sides, thus granting the point equipotentiality via suitable connection cables.
The encoder cable has to be made up of twisted loops with the global shielding connected to the ground on the
converter side. Avoid to connect the shielding on the motor side connector. In particular cases (cable longer than
100 meters, strong electromagnetic noise), it could be necessary to use a cable with a shielding on every loop to
be connected to the power supply ground. The global shielding has always to be ground connected.
Instruction manual
105
5 - CONVERTER OPERATION
5.1 KEYPAD
M-
M+
AL
EN
n=0
Ilim
M-
M+
AL
EN
n=0
M-
The led is lit when the drive operates

with a negative torque.
M+
The led is lit when the drive operates

with a positive torque.
AL
The led signals the intervention and

the alarm condition.
EN
The led is lit when the converter is

enabled.
n=0
The led is lit when the motor speed is

lower than the threshold set by Zero
speed level.
Ilim
The led is lit when the converter

operates at a current limit.
Ilim
CANC

KB-TPD32-EV KC-TPD32-EV
KB-TPD32-EV programmable keypad (optional)

The keypad is made of a LCD display with two 16-digit lines and 10 function buttons. It is used
- to command the drive when this system has been selected
- to display the speed, the voltage and diagnostics during the operating time
- to set parameters
LED module KC-TPD32-EV
In the standard delivery the convert is supplied with the led module mounted on the front cover.
It contains six leds for an easy monitoring of the converter status.
The KC module can be manually removed and replaced with the Keypad , which is connected to the regulation board through the dedicated connector.
On the Keypad, which is supplied as optional, the same leds at the KC module are mounted..
106
TPD32-EV
5.1.1 LEDs
The leds present on the keypad are used to diagnose in a fast way the functioning situation of the converter.
Table 5.1.1.1: Diagnostic LEDs
Designation
Color
M-
yellow
M+
yellow
AL
red
Function
the LED is lit, when the drive operates with a negative torque
(anti-clockwise rotation or clockwise braking). Only for TPD32-EV-...-4B.
the LED is lit, when the drive operates with a positive torque
(clockwise rotation or anti-clockwise braking). Braking only for TPD32-EV-...-4B.
the LED is lit, it signals the intervention and the alarm condition
EN
green
the LED is lit, when the converter is enabled
n=0
yellow
the LED is lit, when the motor speed is lower than the threshold set by Speed zero level
I Lim
yellow
the LED is lit, when the converter operates at a current limit
5.1.2 Moving inside a menu

-
-
-
-
The DRIVE STATUS always appears when the converter is switched on.
Use the s and t keys to select the individual points within the same menu level.
Press the ENT key to enter the next menu level.
Use the CANC key to return to the next higher menu level, irrespective of which menu point was selected.
The appropriate menu of the next higher level will appear once the return has been made.
Main menu
2nd level
3rd level
E
TPD32
DRIVE STATUS
DRIVE STATUS
Ramp ref 1
CANC
CANC
DRIVE STATUS
Enable Drive
E
CANC
TPD32
START UP
CANC
Menu
Parameter
E
TPD32
TUNING
TUNING
Start/Stop
CANC
CANC
E
TPD32
MONITOR
Speed self tune

Fwd-Rev spd tune
TUNING
Speed self tune
CANC
CANC
CANC
Figure 5.1.2.1: Moving inside a menu
Instruction manual
107
5.1.3 Displaying parameters

E
Measurements
Mains voltage
Mains voltage
403 [V]
CANC
-
-
-
Select the parameters within the menu

Press E. The parameter with its relative value will appear.
Return to the menu using CANC.
5.1.4 Changing / Saving parameters / Password

The parameters with changeable values are divided into three groups:
- Parameters whose content is either selected as a number or as text within a defined range
e.g. ramp times and reference values
- Parameters whose contents are fixed values that can be selected.
e.g. Jog selection with the speed input and Ramp input alternatives.
- Parameters that are automatically scaled by the keypad
e.g. Auto tune inp XX
Note!
Only those parameters that are not assigned to a digital or analog input/output can be changed
with the keypad. The changed parameters must be saved otherwise the previous values will
be loaded the next time the device is switched on.
Changing numerical values and text
9 ... 0
Speed feedback
Encoder 2 pulses
START UP
Speed feedback
0 ... 9
ok
Encoder 2 pulses
1 0 2 4
CANC
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Return without changes

CANC
Select within the menu the parameters to be changed.

Press E. The value of the parameter will appear and the last digit will flash. The value of the flashing digit
is always the one that can be changed.
Increase the value with +
Reduce the value with Select the next digit left with
Select the next digit right with
Confirm the new value and return to the previous display by pressing E.
Press CANC to return without changes.
108
TPD32-EV
When setting the Dim factor text parameter, the following characters are also available in
addition to the numbers: / % & + , - . : < = > ? A...Z [ ] a...z
Note!
Selection from predefined values

E
FLUX REGULATION
Flux reg mode
-/+
ok
Flux reg mode -/+
Constant current
CANC
ok
Flux reg mode -/+
Field weakening
CANC
ok
Flux reg mode
OFF
-/+
CANC
-
-
-
-
The parameters that can be selected among the several possiblities are marked with -/+ on the keypad display.
To change a value press E. The current value is shown in the display. This can be changed with the + and
- keys.
Confirm the new value and return to the previous display by pressing E.
Return without changes via CANC
Autotuning of Analog input

E
Analog input 1
Auto tune inp 1
-
-
-
Auto tune inp 1

Tuning
Auto tune inp 1

Ready
Select the parameter Auto tune input XX.

Press E.
The tuning procedure will run automatically. The messages Tuning and Ready will appear in succession
before the original parameter is shown.
Note!
The maximum signal possible must be present on the analog input concerned during the
tuning procedure.
Instruction manual
109
Parameters Saving
The parameters must be saved, otherwise the previous values will be loaded the next time the device is switched on.
E
START UP
-
-
-
Write ok
Save parameters
Wait...
Save parameters
Select Save parameters in the START UP or in the SPEC FUNCTIONS menu.

Press E
The saving operation is automatic. The messages Wait ... and Write ok will appear in succession before
the original parameter is shown.
Entering a password
The operator can define a password consisting of a freely selectable five-digit number combination in order to
protect the keypad from unauthorized access. This is carried out via the Pword 1 parameter.
0 ... 9
9 ... 0
E
ok
CONFIGURATION
Pword 1: Disabled
Pword 1: Disabled
Password 0 0 0 0 0
Pword 1: Enabled
Password 0 0 0 0 0
CANC
CONFIGURATION
Pword 1: Enabled
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Select Pword1 (= Password 1) in the CONFIGURATION menu.

Press E. The value 00000 will appear with the last digit flashing. The value of the flashing digit is changed.
Increase the numerical value with +
Reduce the numerical value with Select the next digit left with
Confirm the password by pressing E. The message: Pword1: Enabled will then appear shortly with the currently valid password displayed.
The existing password is indicated in the CONFIGURATION menu via the Pword 1: Enabled message.
Press the CANC key in order to abort the entry of the password.
Note!
110
The password must be saved with Save parameters so that it is also active the next time the
device is switched on.
TPD32-EV
General unlocking of the password

Password ok
Pword 1: Disabled
Password 0 0 0 0 0
0 ... 9
9 ... 0
E
CONFIGURATION
Pword 1: Enabled
E
Pword 1: Enabled
Password 0 0 0 0 0
Password incorrect
Pword 1: Enabled
Password Wrong
CANC
CONFIGURATION
Pword 1: Disabled
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Select the parameter Pword1 (= Password 1) in the CONFIGURATION menu.

When the password is enabled, the message Pword 1: Enabled appears
Press E to call the value 00000 with the last digit flashing. The value changed is always the digit that is
flashing. The valid password must be re-entered in order to unlock it.
Increase the numerical value with +
Reduce the numerical value with Select the next digit left with
Confirm the password by pressing E. The message: Pword1: Enabled will then appear for a short time.
The existing password is indicated in the CONFIGURATION menu via the Pword 1: Enabled message.
Press the CANC key in order to abort the entry of the password if required.
If the incorrect password is entered and then the E key pressed, the message Password wrong will appear
and the keypad will return to the CONFIGURATION menu with the display Pword1: Enabled
Note!
The Save parameter function must be used to save the password if the password itself must
not only be disabled but completely unlocked.
5.1.5 Operating the drive via the Keypad

In order to operate the drive via the keypad, the following settings must be done :
START UP and CONFIGURATION menu

Set Main commands =
MENU CONFIGURATION

Set Control Mode
=
-
-
-
-
Digital
Local
The hardware enables on terminals 12...15 are also active when the drive is operated via the keypad. This
means, for example, that the signal at terminal 13 must also be present for starting the drive in adddition to
the command via the keypad.
If the drive is stopped via the keypad, it can be restarted simply by pressing the Start Key.
If the stop was caused by removing the voltage signal on terminal 13, both the signal at terminal 13 and
the command via the keypad are necessary to restart the drive. The signal at the terminals must be present
before giving the keypad command.
The same applies accordingly to the enabling of the drive via the Enable drive parameter.
Instruction manual
111
5.1.5.1 Starting and stopping the drive

Note:
The keypad must be enabled (see section 6.11.1) before performing these actions.
Enabling the converter

+
START UP
Enable drive
-
-
-
-
Enable drive
Disabled
-/+
-/+
E
Enable drive
Enabled
-/+
Select the parameter Enable drive in the DRIVE STATUS or START UP or MONITOR menu.
Press E
Use the key + to choose Disabled or Enabled.
Press E to confirm your entry.
Disabling the converter

E
START UP
Enable drive
-
-
-
-
-/+
Enable drive
Enabled
-/+
E
Enable drive
Disabled
-/+
Select the parameter Enable drive in the DRIVE STATUS or START UP or MONITOR menu.
Press E
Use the key - to change the display from Enabled into Disabled.
Press E to confirm your entry.
Start / Stop
Warning:
The keypad STOP can be used only when Main commands parameter is set to digital.
Start:
press the key
Stop:
press the key
112
TPD32-EV
5.1.5.2 Failure register / Acknowledging alarms

Display of the failure register
- Select the parameter Failure register in the SPEC FUNCTIONS menu.
- Press E. The last error that has occurred will be displayed.
- Using the key + it is possible to display the previous alarm.
- The failure register can take up to 10 values. If a new failure is reported, the oldest entry in the failure register
is overwritten.
- The entries in the failure register are retained until the register is cleared.
- Pressing E the time when the alarm occurred will be displayed. The time refers to the converter functioning
period (presence of the supply voltage).
- After displaying, the menu goes back automatically to the Failure register point.
- By pressing the key CANC during the alarm display, the intervention time is not shown but on the contrary
you go back to the Failure register menu.
E
SPEC FUNCTIONS
Failure register
E
Failure register
External fault
Failure register
237 hours 45 min
CANC
E
CANC
Failure register
Undervoltage
Failure register
76 hours 23 min
E
CANC
Failure register
Overtemp motor
Failure register
8 hours 06 min
+
max 10
Clearing the failure register

E
SPEC FUNCTIONS
Failure reg del
Failure reg del

Ready

- Select the parameter Failure reg del in the SPEC FUNCTIONS menu.
- Press E. The failure register is cleared.
Instruction manual
113
Acknowledging a failure alarm

External fault
XXXXXXXXXX
-
-
( MENU )
XXXXXXXXXX
CANC
If a failure occurs, the appropriate failure alarm will appear in the display and the message will flash.
Acknowledge or reset the failure by pressing the CANC key. The converter must be disabled for this and a
Start command must not be present.
Acknowledging when several failure alarms occur at the same time

External fault
Multi failures
-
-
-
SPEC FUNCTIONS
Failure reset
When several failure alarms occur at the same time, the blinking message Multi failures will appear in the
display.
Select the parameter Failure reset in the SPEC FUNCTIONS menu.
Press the E key to acknowledge or reset the failure alarm. The converter must be disabled for this and there
should be no Start command present.
5.1.5.3 Motor potentiometer function

Note!
To use the motor potentiometer function, this must be enabled with the Enable motor pot
parameter by selecting configuration "Config 1" or "Config 2". The following information
refers to configuration "Config 1".
Acceleration, Deceleration
+
Accelerate
Decelerate
E
Motor pot
Motor pot oper
-
-
-
-
-
114
Motor pot oper

985 [rpm]
CANC
Select the Motor pot oper parameter in the Motor pot submenu.
Pressing E the current reference value is displayed.
Press the + key to increase the reference value and accelerate the drive.
Press the - key to decrease the reference value and decelerate the drive. This applies to both rotation directions.
Press CANC to return to the Motor pot submenu.
TPD32-EV
Changing rotation direction

+
Clockwise
(positive)
Anti-clockwise
(negative)
E
Motor pot
Motor pot sign
-
-
-
-
-
Motor pot sign

positive
Select the Motor pot sign parameter in the Motor pot submenu.
Pressing E the current rotation direction is displayed.
Press the + key to select clockwise rotation and the - key for counterclockwise rotation.
Confirm by pressing E.
Changing the Motor pot sign parameter during operation causes the drive to reverse rotation according to
the ramp times set.
Resetting the speed reference value

E
Motor pot
Motor pot reset
-
-
Note!
Reference value = 0
Select the Motor pot reset parameter in the Motor pot submenu.
Press E. The reference speed is set to zero.
The speed reference value can only be reset when the drive is switched off.
5.1.5.4 Jog function

Note!
The Jog function must be enabled via the Enable jog parameter!
E
Jog function
Jog operation
Jog forward
(clockwise)
Jog backward
(anti-clockwise)
Jog operation
137 [rpm]
CANC
Select the Jog operation parameter in the Jog function submenu.

Press ENT. The selection Jog function is displayed.
Press the + key to select clockwise rotation and the - key for counterclockwise rotation (counterclockwise
rotation for TPD32-EV...4B only).
- Press CANC to return to the Jog function submenu.
-
-
-
Instruction manual
115
5.2 MENU STRUCTURE

The menu consists of a main menu with submenus and parameters. The structure can be compared to the organization of files and subdirections on a PC.
main menu

corresponds PC main menu (main menu = Root)
submenu

corresponds to PC submenu
parameter

corresponds to individual parameters
The menu structure is described in the function description given in section 6, Function description. The following conventions apply:
Main menu:
Black field, text in upper-case
letters
Submenu:
Parameter:
Black field
White field
INPUT VARIABLES
Ramp ref
Ramp ref 1
[44]
Ramp ref 1 [FF]
[47]
Ramp ref 1 (%)
[48]
Ramp ref 2 [FF]
[49]
Ramp ref 2 (%)
Ramp ref 2
116
TPD32-EV
5.3 COMMISSIONING
Warning!
The safety instructions, danger warnings and technical data in Section 1 and 2 of this manual
must be observed!
Definitions:

Positive speed is clockwise rotation seen from the motor shaft end side.
Negative Speed is counter-clockwise rotation seen from the motor shaft end side.
Positive torque is torque in clockwise directionseen from the motor shaft end side.
Negative torque is torque in counter-clockwise direction seen from the motor shaft end side.
5.3.1 Setting jumpers and switch

The hardware configuration set via the jumpers and switches on the R-TPD32 regulator card must be adapted
to the application at hand and checked before switching on the device.
-

Analog inputs 1/2/3

Voltage input 0... 10V

Current voltage 0...20 mA / 4...20 mA
Mixed possible configuration
Jumper S9/S10/S11 = OFF

Jumper S9/S10/S11 = ON
Adaptation for the speed feedback type

Sinusoidal Encoder

Digital Encoder

Analog tachometer generator

Armature reaction

Jumper S5/S6 in position A

Jumper S5/S6 any position
Jumper S5/S6 in position B
Jumper S5/S6 any position
Adaptation for the digital encoder voltage

Voltage = 5 V

Voltage = 15...30 V

Jumper S21/S22/S23 = ON
Jumper S21/S22/S23 = OFF
Control of a digital encoder connected to the connector XE2

Channel C controlled

Jumper S20 = ON
Channel C not controlled

Jumper S20 = OFF
Adaptation of the max voltage using a tachometer generator:

22.7 / 45.4 / 90.7 / 181.6 / 302.9 V,

depending on the dip switch S4 setting (see chapter 4.4.3)
Serial interface RS485

On the first and last drop of a line:
On the other converters

RS485 serial interface

- divided from the regulation

(An external 5 V power supply is needed
on the PINs 5 and 9) see section 4.5.2
- with a common potential 0 V of the regulation
(Internal power supply)
Jumper S12 / S13 = ON

Jumper S12 / S13 = OFF
Jumper S18 / S19 in position OFF

Jumper S18 / S19 in position ON
For further information see section 4.4, Regulation section.
Instruction manual
117
5.3.2 Checking the wiring and the auxiliary voltages

The following should be checked before switching on the device:
- Proper connection of cables (Section 4, Wiring procedures)
- Compliance with Section 4.11, Engineering notes
- When the device current limit is not set according to the rated current value of the connected motor, a protection thermal relay must be inserted in the upper part of the converter, which has to be scaled according
to the motor rated current times 0.86.
Warning!
It is not allowed to connect an external voltage on the converter output.
Drive disabled (disconnect the terminal 12)
The following voltages must be present:

- terminal 7
+ 10V

- terminal 8
- 10V

- terminal 19
+ 24 ... 30V

Select the Actual spd (rpm) parameter in the DRIVE STATUS menu.
- With a disabled regulator turn the motor in a clockwise direction (view facing the shaft).
The displayed value must be positive.
- If the value does not change or if wrong values are shown, check the power supply
and the cabling of the encoder/tachometer.
- If the displayed value is negative, the connections of the encoder or of the tachometer generator
must be changed: channel A+ with A- or B+ with B- of the encoder, change the connections
of the tachometer signal.
to terminal 9
to terminal 9
to terminal 18
5.3.3 Basic settings of the converter

Note!
It is assumed that the device has the default configuration and is connected and tested according
to the diagrams provided in section 4.8, Standard connection diagrams. The default setting
can be loaded via the Load default parameter in the SPEC FUNCTIONS menu. Laoding
this parameter will mean that all modifications carried out by the user will be overwritten. An
exception is represented by the Tacho scale and Speed parameters. These are not overwritten
when the factory set values are loaded and it is not necessary to scale again the input signal
of the tachometer section. The same is valid for the Size selection parameter.
The factory setting allows a speed regulation with the cascade current regulation for a DC
motor, with an independent excitation and provided with a digital encoder. The drive, in this
case, does not operate with a Voltage control. Independently of the desired configuration, it is
advised to carry out all the basic settings described in order to avoid possible mistakes. After
the commissioning all other available functions can be activated. Their setting is described
in the following pages.
The possible values set for each parameter can be found in section 10, Parameter lists.
The following settings must be carried out with the disabled converter.
Enable drive = disabled (no voltage on the terminal12).
See section 5.1, Keypad, for information about operating the keypad.
118
TPD32-EV
Selection of the drive command (via terminals or digital)

-
-
When the converter is controlled only via the terminal strip, set the Main commands parameter to Terminals. Before change this parameter set be sure that no voltage is supplied to terminal 12.
When the keypad is used, set Main commands = Digital
Saving Settings
-
-
-
Use Save parameters in START UP menu (or SPECIAL FUNCTION menu).

User parameters setting must be saved into memory, so that the stored values are read the next time the
device is switched on.
When using the keypad: press ENT.
On standard setting, to perform the self tuning of cuurent regulator during the commissioning, the Main commands parameter is set as Digital.
Instruction manual
119
5.3.4 START UP procedures

Following START UP menu allows a quick basic commissioning of the drive.
Speed base value
This value determines the max rpm corresponding to the max signal applied to an analog
input (e.g. 10V or 20mA).
Nom flux curr
Nominal field current of the drive. Set the range through the dip switches on the regulation board. See table 2.4.3.2.
Speed-0 f weak
Enables Speed-0 f weak at zero speed.
Speed-0 f weak delay Sets a time delay.
Acc delta
Acceleration ramp time setting on the speed reference.
Dec delta ...
Deceleration ramp time setting on the speed reference.
Motor data
In this menu all the motor plate data are placed.
In case the speed self-tuning has to be carried out, such values must correspond to the motor nameplate data, as
the motor torque constant derives right from them.
Note !
Performing the speed regulator self tuning the following parameters must be set correctly
according to the motor used.
Motor nom flux

Flux reg mode
Full load curr
Motor nom flux in Amps.

Flux regulator mode: constant current (fixed field) or Voltage control.
Nominal armature current in Amps. It corresponds to the 100% of the nominal drive output
current. The default value is the nominal drive current. The settings for the current limits (T
current limit parameters) and the Overload function are based on this value.
Maximum motor speed value. Set the motor plate data value.
Maximum armature voltage value. When Flux reg mode is set to fld weakening, it corresponds to the crossover point.
Motor max speed percentage where the flux weakening range starts. (Crossover point)
Motor max speed

Max out voltage
Flux weak speed
Note !
With speed regulator self tuning performed, the above parameters value can be changed.
Limits
This menu allows setting of speed limits value, current limits value and field current limits when different from
the default values in Motor data menu.
T current limit
Speed min amount
Armature current limit value as percentage of Full load curr. When overload function is used
this value must be equal or higher than Overload current parameter value (Overload function).
Maximum field current value as percentage of Motor nom flux.
Minimum field current value as percentage of Motor nom flux. It corresponds to the
Speed-0 f weak current value when Speed-0 f weak function is active and it will be the
lower field current limit value when the motor is running in Voltage control range.
Minimum speed reference limit.
Speed max amount
Maximum speed reference limit.
Flux current max

Flux current min
120
TPD32-EV
Speed feedback setting

Speed fbk sel
Tacho scale
Encoder 2 pulses
Enable fbk contr
Speed feedback selection: encoder 1, encoder 2, tach generator, armature (CEMF).

Tach generator feedback scaling (Speed fbk sel must be set to Tacho)
Number of pulses per revolution of the digital encoder to the XE2 connector.
Speed feedback loss control. The Motor max speed, Max out voltage, Flux weak
speed parameters must be set correctly according to the motor used.
Enable the monitoring of the encoder 2 (XE2 connector) connection status (A , B, Anot,
Bnot channels). Enable fbk contr must be enabled.
Refresh enc 2
Alarms
Warning Cfg
Configuration of the TPD32-EV drive behaviour during multi Warning situation and
start with warning active
1 Stop/No Start (default): Using this selection, the motor is stopped as a result of
multi-Warning and the drive cannot be enabled in presence of warning.
0 No Stop/No Start : Using this selection, the motor will be not stopped as a result of
multi-Warning and the drive can not be enabled in presence of warning.
4 No Stop/Start : Using this selection, the motor will be not stopped as a result of
multi-Warning and the drive can be enabled in presence of warning
Note!

The parameter Warning Cfg can be modified only if no warning are active.
To change the configuration please follow below step:
Step1 - set the new value of Warning Cfg parameter
Step2 - store via the Save parameters (BASIC MENU)
Step3 - switch-off and switch-on the drive
The behavior as a result of multi warning when APC300 option is installed does not consider
the setting of the Warning Cfg parameter for stopping the motor but it is considered for
enabling the drive.
Undervolt thr
Overcurrent thr
AC input alarm threshold value.

Overcurrrent alarm threshold value.
Overload control
The overload control function allows an overcurrent for a limited time that can exceed the rated current of the drive.
It is used in order to provide an increased acceleration torque.(See Overload control function for more details).
Analog inputs 1, 2 and 3

Three (3) differential analog inputs programmable are available (1-2, 3-4, 5-6 terminals) that allow a large
number of configurations.
With the standard setting, analog input 1 (1 - 2 terminals) is set to Ramp ref 1. The other analog inputs are set to OFF.
Instruction manual
121
5.3.5 Drive tuning

5.3.5.1 Self tuning of the current regulator
The following operation must be done before enabling the drive for the first time.
The autotuning of the current regulator is enabled via the R&L Search command. The values stated for the armature resistence and inductance are recorded as Arm resistance and Arm inductance (CURRENT REGULAT
menu). If necessary the user can change these parameters value.
- If the motor field is externally power supplied (not from the drive), disconnect the motor field supply terminals.
It is not necessary when the motor field power supply comes from the drive (C1 & D1 terminals)
- The user must be sure that during the current regulator self tuning the motor shaft does not turn (remanent
magnetization, field series motor, etc.). If necessary, lock the motor shaft during the procedure.
- AC input voltage to U2 and V2 terminals,
- Drive disabled ( no +24 voltage at terminal 12 )
- Set Main commands parameter (START UP or CONFIGURATION menu) to Digital (Enable & Start/
stop command from the keypad).
- Set the Armature current desired via T current lim + (positive torque) and T curent lim - (Negative torque).
- Set Overload control function to disable. (Enable overload = Disabled).
- Set R&L Search command to ON (START UP menu)
- Power up the drive
- Power up U, V, W terminals
- Enable the drive (+24V to terminal 12) and Start (+24V to terminal 13 and 14).
- Enable drive command = ENABLE (START UP menu).
Note!
If Stop mode parameter is not set to OFF (FUNCTIONS/Stop Control menu), press Start
button on the keypad.
-
-
-
-
-
-
The R&L Search takes a few minutes, and can be interrupted by powering off the drive or set Enable drive
to disable.
At the end of the current self tuning procedure the drive is automatically set to disabled and the R&L
Search command to OFF.
Set the Enable drive parameter to disabled (No voltage on terminal 12)
Set Main commands parameter to the desired setting (Terminals or Digital).
Set Overload control function to enable if used. (Enable overload = Enabled).
Save setting via Save parameters command (START UP menu)
Note!
The procedure can be interrupted by powering off the drive or set Enable drive to disable.
The previous parameters setting are stored in the drive. It is not possible to start the procedure
if the Enable drive is set to disable.
5.3.5.1.1 Checking current regulator performance using parameter Eint

While running the drive, monitor the parameter (Eint), located under menu heading Current Regulator. This
measure an average internal current error.
Its value should be close to zero, but values dynamically changing between -40 and 40 are acceptable. The drive
must have at least 30% load for this reading to be considered as a valid performance measurement. If
adjustments are needed, make small changes to the parameter (Current regulator\Arm inductance) to fine tune
(Eint) to an acceptable value.
- If Eint is positive value, increase Arm inductance value.
- If Eint is negative value, decrease Arm inductance value.
122
TPD32-EV
5.3.5.2 Self tuning of the speed regulator

Speed Self tuning identifies the total Inertia value at the motor shaft ( Kg*m2 ), the friction value (or Loss compensation) in N*m and computes the Proportional and Integral gains of the speed regulator.
WARNING !
This procedure requires free rotation of the motor shaft coupled to the load. Start/Stop command is disregarded, therefore it can not be used on drives with limited travel.
CAUTION !
The test is performed using the torque limit value set in Test T curr lim parameter. The torque
is applied stepwise, with no ramp (profile), therefore the mechanical transmission must not
have significant backlash, and it must be compatible with operation at the torque limit set
in Test T curr lim parameter. The user can reduce the torque limit to a suitable value via
theTest T curr lim parameter.
Note !
-

-
Application where the system inertia coupled to the motor shaft is much higher than
the motor inertia value , increase the Test T curr lim parameter to avoid Time out error.
This procedure is not suitable for use with hoist or elevator drives.
Preliminary operation before the correct execution of the Speed self tuning procedure is the appropriate calculation of the Torque const parameter.
Set the motor name plate data parametrs:
Motor max speed
Flux weak speed
T Current limit +/-
Motor nom flux
Max out voltage
Set the maximum motor speed value

Set the nominal motor current value
Set the Motor nom flux in Amps.
Set the maximum armature voltage value
With speed regulator self tunig performed, the above parameters value can be changed according to the application without Torque const parameter modification.
-
-
Set the motor shaft direction: Forward or Reverse via the Fwd-Rev spd tune parameter
Select the torque current value to be used during the test via the Test T curr lim parameter
TO EXECUTE SELF TUNING, enter START UP \ Self tuning menu.

- Start execution by entering Start.

The procedure performs an acceleration test at the torque limit value set in Test T curr lim parameter up to a
speed threshold, then a deceleration test with no torque applied (coasting) down to zero speed.
The speed threshold is 33% of the lowest in the following:
- Speed base value
- Speed max pos or Speed max neg according to direction of rotation.
The procedure may take a few minutes, depending on inertia and friction values.
Based on inertia and friction values, the drive will calculate the speed loop gains (Speed P and Speed I parameters).
If manual adjustment are required (in case of vibrations, etc.) these should be applied to the integral gain Speed I
[%]. In case self-tuning of speed regulator is not satisfactory, refer to manual tuning procedure in section 5.3.6 .
Instruction manual
123
After the completion of the Speed self tune by the Drive, the new identified parameter values (Nw suffix) can
be compared with values prior to the procedure, by browsing the subsequent menu entries. Parameters in this
menu are read only. Editing of individual parameters must be done in their specific menus.
New parameters can be accepted all togetheter by entering Take val after disabling the Drive. In this case,
prior values are overwritten. Self tuning can be repeated, whether values from the previous trial have been
accepted or not.
Note!
Take val does not store values in non-volatile memory, so values are lost if Drive power
is cycled off and on. You need to enter Save parameters in the START UP or SPEC FUNCTIONS menu to permanently store values in non-volatile memory.
In case of extreme parameter ranges, error messages can occurr. Repeat execution in this case. If the error message is persistent, keep default values and use manual tuning of speed regulator (section 5.3.6 Manual tuning
of the regulators).
List of self tune error messages

Generic messages
Description
Note
Drive disabled:
Not ready:
Provide enable input by setting terminal 12 high.

Take val can not be executed because the measurement has not been completed correctly. Repeat self tune command.
Time out:
Measurement has not been completed in the proper time
Start ?:
Press E to confirm start of measurement.
Tuning aborted:
Measurement aborted by user (CANC button has been pressed).
Set Main cmd=Dig: Go to CONFIGURATION menu and set Main commands = digital.
Set Ctrl=Local:
Go to CONFIGURATION menu and set Control mode = Local.
Measurement error messages
These messages may occour when extreme parameter values have to be identified. It can be useful to retry the
self tune command when any of the following messages occours. If messages persist, alternative manual tuning
procedures should be used.
Description
Over speed
Drive stalled:
Load applied:
T curr too high:
Friction null:
124
Note
Increase value of parameter Test T curr lim and repeat Self tuning
Nominal zero load torque at standstill was detected. Self tuning is impossible for this
type of load.
Reduce value of Test T curr lim parameter for Self tuning
Value of friction is zero or lower than the accuracy limit of the control system
TPD32-EV
5.3.5.3 Field converter

The default TPD32-EV converters are set to operate without Voltage control. The following settings must be taken
into consideration when a functioning in Voltage control is needed or when the field of the connected motor is
not power supplied via the converter.
All the settings described in this chapter must be carried out in disable condition (no voltage on terminal 12).
Selection of the functioning system

- With a constant field current:
Flux reg mode = Constant current

Enable flux reg = Enabled
- With Voltage control:
Flux reg mode = Voltage control.

In the CONFIGURATION menu set the max output

voltage via the Max out voltage parameter.
Enable flux reg = Enabled
- Field circuit not supplied by TPD32-EV Flux reg mode = External control

Enable flux reg = Disabled
Setting the rated field current

-
-
-
-
Set the rated field current of the motor via the Motor nom flux parameter.
When the field motor current is substantially lower than the rated current of the field converter, adapt trough
the S14 dip switches the field converter. It must be configured according to the table 5.3.5.3.1 Via the Nom
flux curr parameter it is possible to select the new field rated current.
For fixed field current operation, if the actual motor (base) field current 10% of the maximum rating of
the field package it is required to calibrate the field current feedback scaling using dipswitch S14.
For weak field operation, also referred as CEMF field control or crossover field control, if the top base
speed Motor nom flux 10% of the maximum rating of the field package it is required to calibrate the
field current feedback scaling using dipswitch S14.
Calibration to the exact field current setting is not required, as long as the above conditions are met.
Calibration is not required if the field control is provided by a separate field converter.
See the "Field current setting resistors" table in chapter "2.3.3 Output" on page 29.
Flux current min/max

-
Setting in LIMITS / Flux limits menu via the Flux current max and Flux current min parameters as a
percentage of Nom flux curr.
Instruction manual
125
5.3.6 Manual tuning of the regulators

The tuning of the TPD32-EV converters is factory set to a typical value for the motor size concerned. This normally ensures satisfactory regulator results. If this setting, however, meets the requirements of the application
concerned, the regulator need not be optimized.
The converter contains the following close-loop control circuits:
- Regulator of the armature current. The auto tuning has to be perform via the R&L Search parameter.
- Speed regulator
- Field current regulator
- Armature voltage regulator
Following is a description of the system suitable to obtain the optimization, if necessary. In order to have a step
function, the internal Test generator is used (SPEC FUNCTIONS menu). The aim is to obtain a very good
step response.
The analog output can be brought back to the terminal strip, with a sampling time of 2 ms.
Using the Test generator

This function generates and makes available some signals with a square wave, with a frequency and a width that
can be set and which can be added to an offset that can be set too. With the parameter Gen access it is possible
to state on which regulator input the signal must be active. Further information can be found in section 6.15.1,
Test generator.
Manual tuning of speed regulator

- No voltage on terminal 12 (Drive disabled)
- Choose the following settings for the Test generator :
- Gen access

=
Ramp ref
- Gen frequency

=
0.2 Hz
- Gen amplitude

=
10 %
- Gen offset

=
10 %
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Measuring the reaction on an analog output. To this purpose Actual Spd and Motor current variables
must be set on two different analog outputs (see Programming inputs/outputs).
In the START UP menu set the Acc delta speed parameter with the highest value and the Acc delta time
parameter at 1 second.
Set at 0.00 the Speed P and Speed I parameters in the REG PARAMETERS / ...menu.
Enable the drive (voltage on terminal 12) and Start (voltage on terminal 13).
Increase the Speed P till when the overshoot is lower by 4% when the reaction time is shorter.
Increase Speed I until the overshoot is higher by 4%. Decrease it, so that it is slightly lower than 4%.
Stop and disable the drive (remove the voltage on terminal 12 and 13).
Gen access = Not connected
Save the settings (SAVE PARAMETERS command in the SPECIAL FUNCTION menu).
Note!
126
With the feedback Bypass function enabled (Enable fbk bypas = Enabled) the converter
switch directly to the armature feedback (CEMF) when the speed feedback is no more present.
This is possible when the converter is working at constant field. In this case with a disconnected reaction signal, it is necessary to carry out again the above mentioned optimization
of the speed regulator. The P section of the speed regulator is set via the Speed P bypass
parameter and the I section with the Speed I bypass parameter.
TPD32-EV
In some cases it is necessary to have different gains for the speed regulator, above the speed range. To this purpose the converters of the TPD32-EV series are provided with an adaptive speed regulator.
For the tuning see the following pages.
20.00 ms/DIV
Figure 5.3.6.1: Above: Actual spd; Below: Motor current. Speed P too low.
20.00 ms/DIV
Figure 5.3.6.2: Above: Actual spd; Below: Motor current. Speed P too high.
20.00 ms/DIV
Figure 5.3.6.3: Above: Actual spd; Below: Motor current. Speed I too high..
20.00 ms/DIV
Figure 5.3.6.4: Above: Actual spd; Below: Motor current. Speed P and
Speed I set correctly.
Instruction manual
127
Manual tuning of field current regulator

Note!
In the majority of the cases the dc motors with an independent excitation operate with a
direct field (Flux reg mode = Constant current). In this case it is not necessary to optimize
the regulator of the field current and the regulator of the armature voltage.
The optimization showed below, refers to drives operating with constant power range (armature and field
mixed regulation). In these cases it is necessary to configurate the field converter for this particular use. See below.
Note!
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
During the optimization of the regulator of the field current, the converter must not receive
a Start command.
Converter disabled (no voltage on terminal 12)

Menu LIMITS / Flux limits: Flux current max = 100% equal to the rated field current of the motor.
Flux current min = 0
Set at 0.00 the Flux I and Flux P parameters in the REG PARAMETERS / ...menu .
Measure the field current via an analog output. To this purpose the variable Flux current has to be parameterized on one output and the variable Flux reference on another (see Input/Output programming).
Select the FLUX REGULATION menu.
Enable flux reg = Enabled (default)
Flux reg mode = Voltage control
Enable flux weak = Enabled
Set Gen access = Flux reference and Gen amplitude to 70% of the rated field motor current (this to allow
the overshoot of the system).
Increase the value of the Flux P parameter till the overshoot of the field current is lower than 4% (Field curr).
Increase the value of Flux I untill the overshoot is higher than 4%, then reduce it slightly lower than 4% .
Note!
Because of the high time constant, the rate of rise of the field current is limited . The increase
time with optimal scale conditions can be last several hundreds of milliseconds.
Gen access = Disconnected

Enable flux weak = Disabled
Set Flux current min at the desired value
Configure the analog outputs on the basis of your needs.
Save the settings.
-
-
-
-
-
Figures 5.3.6.5 ... 5.3.6.7 show some examples of tuning of the Flux regulator.
Figure 5.3.6.5: Above: Flux reference; Below: Flux current. The regulator
behavior is not good. Jumps are due to field changing.
128
Figure 5.3.6.6: Above: Flux reference; Below: Flux current. The reduction of
the field current depends on the field time constant. The reg has no influence.
TPD32-EV
Figure 5.3.6.7: Above: Flux reference; Below: Flux current. The increment in
the field current has no jump. Variation compared to Fig.5.3.6.5: Increase of
Flux P from 2 to 10%. Flux I = 5%.
Instruction manual
129
Voltage regulator in the field converter

Note!
In the most of the cases the DC motors with an independent excitation operate with a direct
field (Flux reg mode=Constant current). In this case it is not necessary to optimize the
regulator of the armature voltage.
When a Voltage control occurs, the voltage regulator keeps the armature voltage at a constant level. The most
difficult moment for this regulator is the beginning of the Voltage control, because due to the saturation of the
motor field, the flux variation requires quicker changes of the field current.
Tune the regulator in order to have small changes of the armature voltage.
Note!
-
All the other converter regulators must be set before the optimization of the voltage regulator.
Drive disabled = no voltage on terminal 12
- Choose the following settings for the Test generator :

- Gen access

=
Ramp ref
- Gen frequency
=
0.2 Hz
- Gen amplitude
=
10 %
- Gen offset

=
according to the changing point from the armature regulation

to the field one. Example: Motor max speed = 2000 rpm,

the Voltage control starts at 1500 rpm. Gen offset = 75 %
- Measure the field current and the armature voltage on an analog output. The Flux current and the Output
voltage variables must be set on two different analog outputs (see Programming Inputs/Outputs).
- Enable the drive and give the Start command (voltage on the terminals 12 and 13)
- Check the armature voltage. After a possible short jump, the voltage should remain constant. See figures
5.3.6.8 ... 5.3.6.10. In the REG PARAMETER /... menu, it is possible to change the P and I section with
the Voltage P and Voltage I parameters.
- Stop and disable the drive.
- Gen access = Not connected
- Save the settings.
Figure 5.3.6.8: Above: Flux; Below: Output voltage. After a speed change the
field current (Flux) has some jumps. Voltage P = 10%, Voltage I = 80%.
130
Figure 5.3.6.9: Above: Flux; Below: Output voltage. The gain is too low. The
armature voltage increases. Voltage P = 3%, Voltage I = 5%.
TPD32-EV
Figure 5.3.6.10: Above: Flux; Below: Output voltage. Optimal Field regulator. After
a short transient, the field current and armature voltage are constant. Voltage P =
40%, Voltage I = 50%.
Instruction manual
131
5.3.7 Others tuning

Flux / if curve tuning (Flux / if curve)
The function of this curve is to model the real flux of the motor. The flux model allows the control of torque
current to better relate to torque. The figure below describes the relation between flux and flux current in conditions of Flux /if curve defined and not defined.
Note!
The field current (previous section) and the output voltage tunings (next section) must be carried
out when a Voltage control is required, whether the relevant flux curve has been defined or not.
The tunings scale is the following:

- Field current regulator
- Flux/ if curve tuning (Flux / if curve)
- Voltage regulator in the field converter
Flux current
100%
I field cnst 90
Curve A
50% Motor nom flux
Curve B
I field cnst 70
I field cnst 40
40%
50%
70%
90%
100%
Flux reference
Figure 5.3.7.1: Curve convertion flux/current
Example:
A - With the default setting of the converter, there will be a linear characteristic (Curve A) of the flux current
(Flux current) when the parameter Flux reference changes.
Then:
Flux current max / Flux reference = 100% Flux current / Flux reference = Motor nom flux
Flux current max / Flux reference = 50% Flux current / Flux reference = 50% of Motor nom flux
B- Carrying out the tuning of the flux curve (see below tuning procedure ) the result will be emphasized by
curve B. The values of Flux current will follow a characteristic determined by the real flux percentage Flux
reference, necessary to determinate the circulation of that field current for the connected system.
132
TPD32-EV
Voltage reg P / I Base

Voltage P
30 %
Flux P base
3277
Field current Limits
Flux I Base
3277
Voltage I
40 %
Out vlt level
Energy saving
Flux current max

100 %
100 %
Flux
current
max
Voltage regulator
Max. out voltage

500 V
Output Voltage
Flux
current
min
Flux reg mode

Enable flux weak
Disabled
Output voltage
Flux current min
70 %
Speed-0 f weak
Enabled
Field economy
Flux current max
Field reg P / I Base

Fld reg P gain
2 %
Fld reg I gain
1 %
Voltage P base
1.8 A/V
Voltage I base
13.0909 A/V*ms
Flux current min

Spd=0 Thr
Motor field curr
Flux reference
Speed zero level

10 rpm
10 A
Field controller
I field curve
Field reg P / I
Enable flux reg
Nom flux curr

10 A
Set flux/if
Ifield cnst40
0
40 %
Flux current %
Reset flux / if
C1
Ifield cnst70
0
70 %
Ifield cnst90
D1
90 %
Motor field curr
10 A
Figure 5.3.7.2: Blocks diagrams of field current regulator
Tuning procedure:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-

-

-

-
Reset the curve flux/current via the Reset flux / if command (FLUX REGULATION \ Flux / if curve menu )
Set the Motor nom flux: Motor nom flux parameter (FLUX REGULATION menu)
Set the output voltage via the Max out voltage parameter (CONFIGURATION menu) and the correspondent
percentage (100%) in the Out vlt level parameter (FLUX REGULATION menu)
Set the Flux regulator Flux reg mode = Constant current (FLUX REGULATION menu)
Set the flux percentage at 100% via the Flux current max parameter (FLUX REGULATION menu)
Operate the Drive speed, so that the Armature voltage (MONITOR\Measurements menu) corresponds to
the value previously set in Max out voltage (CONFIGURATION menu).
Via the Flux current max parameter decrease the voltage displayed in Armature voltage, up to obtain an
output voltage equal to the 90% of Max out voltage.
Carry out the reading of the current in the Flux current parameter (FLUX REGULATION menu) and insert
it in the I field cnst 90 parameter (FLUX REGULATION\Flux if curve menu).
Via the Flux current max parameters decrease the voltage displayed in Armature voltage, to obtain an
Carry out the reading of the current circulating in the Flux current parameter (FLUX REGULATION menu)
and insert it in the I field cnst 70 parameter (FLUX REGULATION\Flux if curve menu).
Via the Flux current max parameters decrease the voltage displayed in Armature voltage, to obtain an
Carry out the reading of the current circulating in the Flux current parameter (FLUX REGULATION menu)
and insert it in the I field cnst 40 parameter (FLUX REGULATION\Flux if curve menu).
Disable the converter
Instruction manual
133
Via the Set flux / if parameter (FLUX REGULATION menu) the calculation of the curve parameters will
be carried out. Enter this parameter then press ENT to execute the calculation.
The procedure requires a few seconds.
Set the operating mode of the field control (Constant current / Voltage control), set the value of Flux
current max at 100% and save the parameters.
Changing of Max out voltage or Motor nom flux need a new curve tuning.
-

-
-
Speed-up function
With loads having a high moment of inertia it is possible to check the jumps during the speed changes. They can
be reduced using the function Speed-up. The figures 5.3.7.3 and 5.3.7.4 show the influence of this function.
Figure 5.3.7.3: Above: Actual spd; Below: Motor current jumps with the speed
changes due to a high moment of inertia. The function Speed-up is not active.
Figure 5.3.7.4: Above: Actual spd; Below: Motor current. The same drive with
Speed -up function active.
Parameters used in the example:

Speed up base
Speed up gain
Speed up filter
14 ms
50 %
20 ms
Setting of the speed zero logic

-
-
The speed zero logic is factory set as disabled. See section 6.7.2, Speed zero logic, for a description of
the drive behavior.
Disable of the I-section of the speed regulator with n=0:
I-section disabled:

Enable spd=0 I = Enabled
I-section enabled:

Enable spd=0 I = Disabled
Note!
-
-
-
Suppression of the P-gain set via Spd=0 P gain:

If the reference is above Ref 0 level:

If the ref.and/or the reaction are above Ref 0 level:
Note!
134
When the motor is at a stop, it is possible to avoid the creep of the drive disabling the I section. In this case when the motor is at a stop, it can not receive any load and therefore this
function is not suitable for all applications!
Enable spd=0 R = Enabled

Enable spd=0 R = Disabled
Enable spd=0 R is active only when Enable spd=0 P is enabled.
TPD32-EV
-
-
-
Choice of the proportional gain for zero speed:

The P-gain corresponds to Spd=0 P gain
Enable spd=0 P = Enabled
The P-gain corresponds to the normal P-gain

Enable spd=0 P = Disabled
The P-gain at a zero speed is set via Spd=0 P gain, when Enable spd=0 P is enabled.
The intervention threshold for the recognition of zero speed is determined with Ref 0 level. It is expressed
in the dimension set by the factor function.
Adaptive of the speed regulator

Note!
The adaptive of the speed regulator is factory set as disabled. It must be used only when the
gain of the speed regulator has to get higher than the speed range or it has to be replaced with
another unit. As for the interaction among the parameters see section 6.13.2, Adaptive spd
reg.
- Enable of the adaptive with a blocked drive. Enable spd adap = Enabled. In this way the settings of Speed
P and Speed I are disabled.
- Determine on the basis of which unit the gain of the speed regulator has to be changed. It normally depends
on the speed (Select adap type = Speed).
- If the gain has to be changed on the basis of another unit, set Select adap type = Adap reference. This unit is
connected to the device as an analog value via an analog input. For this reason the Adap reference variable
must be assigned to an analog input (see in the following pages the configuration of the analog inputs).
The other possibility is to insert Adap reference via the serial interface or a Bus. In this case the insertion
via the terminal strip is not necessary.
- Entering Adap speed 1 and Adap speed 2 three different speed ranges are available with several gains.
Value expressed as a percentage of Speed base value and respectively of the max value of Adap reference.
- With Select adap type = Speed: the optimization is carried out as described for the Speed regulator. To
this purpose the following points must be taken into consideration:
- Enter with Gen offset a value which is at the beginning of the range to be optimized but which at the
same time is outside the range set with Adap joint XX.
- Enter with Gen amplitude the step, so that the speed remains inside the range to be optimized.
- The optimization is carried out separately for each range and the paramters of the regulator are set for
each range with Adap P gain XX and Adap I gain XX.
- After the optimization of the different phases look over the whole speed range.
- By changing the value of Adap joint XX it is possible to reduce the instabilities present in the transients
during the changes from one range to the other. Increasing the values the transients are slighter.
- With Select adap type = Adap reference: the optimization depends on the system and it is impossible to
state here the general information needed.
- When the speed zero logic is disabled (factory setting) with a blocked drive the gains of the speed regulator
are active. These are set via Adap P gain 1 and Adap I gain 1 . When the speed zero logic is enabled, the
values set for a motor at a stop are valid.
Instruction manual
135
6 - FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Functions and parameters
The converters of the TPD32-EV series feature a number of functions that can be set and assigned parameters
in order to meet the requirements of the application at hand.
The device can be controlled in different ways:
- via the terminal strip
- via the keypad
- via the RS 485 serial interface
- via a bus connection (option)
The settings required are made via the Main commands and Control mode parameters in the CONFIGURATION menu.
The device is supplied with a WindowsTM-based user interface software for controlling the drive and setting
parameters via the RS 485 serial interface.
The device is factory set for speed regulation with a cascade current regulation and is connected according to the
connection diagram shown on in section 4.8, Standard connection diagrams. Only the entry of parameters in
the START UP of the software is required for the initial commissioning of the drive. The drive is thus controlled
via the terminal strip with all parameters set via the keypad.
If functions are required that are not in the standard configuration, these can be selected and their parameters set
accordingly via the appropriate menu.
The TBO option card is required for expanding the standard device with programmable inputs/outputs. Up to
no. 2 TBOs can be fitted, each providing 4 digital inputs, 4 digital outputs and 2 analog outputs. Three analog
inputs are provided on the standard device.
The converters of the TPD32-EV series enable reference values for the ramp and for the speed regulator to be
set in different units of measure:
- in percentages of the Speed base value
- in a unit of measure (dimension) that the user can define using the factor function, e.g. as speed in m/s.
According to which one is set as last the other will be updated. This means that the other reference value is
overwritten with the current value.
A freely selectable password 1 prevents the operation of the converter by unauthorized persons. It is entered in
the form of a five-digit number combination. Password 2 is also provided by the manufacturer. This password
enables the service personnel to access the Service menu which is not accessible for the user.
Note!
136
All parameter settings must be saved otherwise the last settings saved will be loaded the next
time the device is switched on (Save parameters command)
TPD32-EV
Explanation of parameter tables

In the following pages the parameters list of each menu is shown. For each table the following notes are valid:
No. column
Parameter number (decimal). In order to address parameters when a serial line/bus or
the APC300 card are used, the user must add 2000H (= decimal 8192) to the indicated
value.
Value field
S = value depending on the size of the device.
DRIVE STATUS
START UP
TUNING
MONITOR
INPUT VARIABLES
LIMITS
RAMP
SPEED REGULAT
Start up parameters status

Basic commissioning of the drive
Drive regulators tuning
Display of reference values, speeed, voltage, current, frequency...
Ramp reference, speed reference, current reference
Speed limits, current limits, field current limits
Acceleration, deceleration, quick stop, ramp shape
Configuration of the speed regulator, speed zero logic, speed up , droop function
CURRENT REGULAT
Configuration of the current regulator
FLUX REGULATION
Functioning of the field current regulator
REG PARAMETERS
Parameters for speed, current, field and voltage regulation
CONFIGURATION
Functioning, regulation, encoder type, function factor, programmable alarms, address,

password
I/O CONFIG
Configuration of programmable digital and analog input and output
ADD SPEED FUNCT
Motor capture, adaptive speed regulation, speed control, speed zero
FUNCTIONS
Motopotentiometer, jog function, multi-speed, multi-ramps, overload, stop control, Taper

current function
SPEC FUNCTIONS
Test generator, saving parameters, loading factory settings, signal adaptation, PAD parameters
OPTIONS
Access to the optional field bus card (Option1), and the APC300 (Option2), PID function
DRIVECOM
SERVICE
Parameter setting for the DRIVECOM profile

Menu, only accessible to service personnel of the manufacturer
Instruction manual
137
6.1 ENABLES
The following hardware enables are always required irrespective of whether the device is to be controlled via
the terminal strip, the keypad or the serial interface.

Figure 6.1.1 Enables via potential free contacts and PLC
-
-
-
-
-
Figure 6.1.1 show the connection principle

The enable signals are activated via a +15 ... 30 V voltage at the appropriate terminals.The inputs are protected against reverse polarity.
Negative voltage, 0 V and a missing signal are interpreted as disable signals.
The reference point for the enable signals is terminal 16.
When using an operator keypad/serial interface (Mains Command = Digital), both the signals on the appropriate terminals and the corresponding commands on the keypad/serial interface are necessary. If an enable is removed via a signal on the terminals, the appropriate command must be sent via the keypad/serial
interface in addition to the signal on the terminal in order to restart the drive.
There are four types of enable signals that have a different effect on the behavior of the TPD32-EV converter.
- Enable drive
enables the entire converter
- Start
enables the regulation
- Fast stop
sets the speed reference value immediately to zero so that the motor is stopped as quickly
as possible
- External fault
incorporates external fault condition into the enable.
138
TPD32-EV
6.1.1 Enable drive

DRIVE STATUS
START UP
TUNING
MONITOR
[314]
Enable drive
Parameter
Enable drive
No.
Enabled
Disabled
314
min
0
Value
Factory
Factory
max
American Standard
1
Disabled Disabled
Standard
Configuration
Terminal 12
+15 ... 30 V
0V
The Enable drive command activates the TPD32-EV Drive.

An auxiliary contact on the AC Input contactor may be wired in the Drive enable (terminal 12).
When the Enable drive=disable and terminal 12 = 0V, no other control commands (e.g. Jog +, Jog - or Start)
are accepted.
Removal of the Enable drive command (Enable drive=disable) while the drive is running causes the motor
coasting to stop. Neither electrical braking nor controlled stopping of the motor within a prescribed time during
the run down are possible. The actuation of the Drive is disabled.
When operated via the keypad the Enable drive command is provided in the DRIVE STATUS, START UP,
TUNING and MONITOR menu.
Using Enable drive command from keypad (mains command=Digital), active voltage level is also required
on terminal 12.
Using Enable drive command from terminal 12 set Main command=terminals.
Enable drive in the menu is read only parameter.
Instruction manual
139
6.1.2 Start / Stop

DRIVE STATUS
START UP
TUNING
MONITOR
[315]
Start/Stop
Parameter description
Start/Stop
Start
Stop
No.
315
min
0
Value
Factory
Factory
max
American Standard
1
Stop (0)
Stop (0)
Standard
Configuration
Terminal 13
+15 ... 30 V
0V
When Main commands is set to digital, Start/Stop parameter allows the motor running and the STOP button
on the keypad stop the motor.
When Main commands is set to terminals, Start/stop will be a read only parameter.
Note!

The following signals are required for operating the drive in addition to the Start command:
Enable drive
Fast stop
External fault
The behavior of the drive after the Start command is given or removed depends on the parameter setting at hand:
-
When using the ramp (Enable ramp = Enabled and Enable spd reg = Enabled) the drive accelerates to
the required speed according to the ramp specified. If the Start command is removed, the drive runs down
to zero according to the ramp defined. If the Start command is selected once more during the deceleration
time, the drive accelerates once more to the required speed.
If the Speed ref 1 value reaches the input of the speed regulator directly without a ramp (Enable ramp =
Disabled and Enable spd reg = Enabled), the drive accelerates to the required speed in the shortest possible
time once the Start command has been given. When the Start command is removed, the Speed ref 1 value
is set to zero immediately.
The command has not effect on Speed ref 2.
When using torque regulation (Enable spd reg = Disabled) the Start command enables the torque reference
value (T current ref 1) or disables it after the Start command is removed.
The Start command has no effect on the correction value Speed ref 2 (with speed regulation) or Torque ref 2
(with torque regulation).
The Start command is not required for Jog function mode.
If the Start command and Jog + or Jog - are given at the same time, the Start command is given priority.
If the Start command is given during Jog operation, the Jog operation is aborted.
The Start parameter status is shown in the DRIVE STATUS and MONITOR menu.
140
TPD32-EV
6.1.3 Fast stop

Fast/Stop
316
Fast Stop
No Fast Stop
Terminal 14:
Note!
No.
min
max
Value
Factory
American
No Fast Stop
+15 ... 30V = No Fast stop
Factory
Standard
No Fast Stop
Standard
Configuration
Terminal 14
+15 ... 30 V
0V
0V = Fast stop
The function cannot be actuated via the keypad!
Application: Fast stop is actuated in emergencies and hazardous situations, in order to stop the drive in the
shortest possible time. This method of stopping has the advantage over disconnection in that with a four quadrant drive (TPD32-EV... 4B) energy can be recovered in the AC input and the motor can be brought to a halt in
a shorter time than when it coasts down.
The Fast stop command is always required for operation of the converter. A removal of the command when the
drive is running initiates braking with the ramp specified by the parameters Qstp delta speed and Qstp delta time.
When the drive is brought to a halt, it is still enabled and has torque. The Start command or Enable drive command must be removed for it to be disconnected.
The drive behavior after the Fast stop command has been given depends on the type of operating mode selected:
-

Operation via the terminal strip (Main commands = Terminals):

The drive executes braking until there is no voltage on terminal 14. When voltage is restored, the drive
automatically accelerates to the required reference value (precondition: the other enable commands are still
active).
Operation via serial line with commands given via terminals too (Main commands = Digital):
The drive executes braking until it has come to a halt. When voltage is restored on terminal 14, there is no
automatic start. This requires the entry of the Start command.
If the Fast stop command is actuated via the serial interface while there is a voltage present on terminal 14,
the fast stop is executed until the drive is at a halt. The Start command must be entered for the drive to be
restarted.
Instruction manual
141
6.1.4 Quick Stop

Quick stop
No.
343
min
0
Quick stop
No Quick stop
Value
Factory
Factory
max
American Standard
1
No Quick No Quick
stop
stop
Standard
Configuration
Note!
This function cannot be executed via the terminal strip or the keypad but can only be actuated
via the serial interface or a bus connection!
Application:
Quick stop is actuated in emergencies or hazardous situations in order to bring the drive to
a halt in the shortest possible time. This method of stopping has the advantage over disconnection in that with a tetraquadrant drive (TPD32-EV... 4B) energy can be recovered in the
main and the motor can be brought to a halt in a shorter time than when it coastes down.
- If the Quick stop command is given when the drive is running, this initiates braking with
the ramp specified by the Qstp delta speed and Qstp delta time parameters.
- When the drive is at a halt, it is disabled and thus has no torque. The Start command must
be given again for the drive to be started.
6.1.5 External fault

External fault
No.
min
-
Value
Factory
Factory
max
American Standard
-
External fault
No External fault
Standard
Configuration
Terminal 15
+15 ... 30 V
0V
The External fault command enables an external signal to be incorporated in the failure alarms of the converter.
Application example The converter is being used for closed-loop control of a single drive without contactors. A
temperature-dependent contact, which opens under excessive temperature, is located within
the motor. Connect this contact between 24 V and terminal 15.

When the contact opens (= overtemperature) the converter will be disabled.

- During operation a signal is always required on terminal 15, irrespective of whether the
commands are transmitted via the terminal strip or not.
- In the event of an external fault, the drive will behave according to the configuration set
in the Programmable Alarms, 6.11.7..
142
TPD32-EV
6.2 BASIC START UP MENUS

The following DRIVE STATUS, START UP and TUNING allow a basic commissioning of the drive.
Note !

The parameters in these menus are available in other menus.

See Start up procedure on chapter 5.3 for commissioning information.
DRIVE STATUS
Menu displayed at power up.
Status parameters of the drive are available and Ramp ref 1 parameter for basic speed reference with ramp time.
START UP
In this menu the start up sequencing is available.
First basic setting

Speed base value
Nom flux curr

Speed-0 f weak
Acc / Dec ...
Speed base value is defined by the unit in the factor function specified. It is the reference
value for all the speed reference values (reference values, adaptive speed regulation)
given as a percentage, and corresponds to 100% of the speed. Changing this parameter
is only possible when the drive is disabled (Enable drive=Disable). The speed base
value does not define the maximum possible speed, which in some cases can be formed
from the addition of several reference values. This is defined with Speed max amount.
Drive field current value.
Enables the field economy at zero speed.
Acceleration and deceleration ramp time setting on the speed reference.(see chapter
6.6.1 for more details).
Motor data
Motor plate data:
Motor nom flux
Flux reg mode
Full load curr
Motor max speed
Max out voltage
Flux weak speed
Motor field current in Amps.

Field regulator mode.
Nominal motor current in Amps.
Maximum motor speed value
Maximum armature voltage value
Instruction manual
143
Limits
Speed limits and current limits drive setting:
T current lim
Flux current max
Flux current min
Speed min amount
Speed max amount
Current limit setting (see chapter 6.5.2 for more details).

Maximum field current value as percentage of Motor fld curr.
Minimum field current value as percentage of Motor fld curr. (See chapter 6.5.3 for
more details).
Minimum speed reference limit. (see chapter 6.5.1 for more details).
Maximum speed reference limit. (see chapter 6.5.1 for more details).
Speed feedback
Speed feedback setting (see chapter 6.11.5 for more details) :
Speed fbk sel
Tacho scale
Speed offset
Encoder 2 pulses
Enable fbk contr
Refresh enc 2
Speed feedback selection

Tach generator feedback scaling (Speed fbk sel must be set to Tacho).
Speed feedback offset
Number of pulses per revolution of the digital encoder to the XE2 connector.
Speed feedback loss control. The Motor max speed, Max out voltage, Flux weak
speed parameters must be set correctly according to the motor used.
Enable the monitoring of the encoder 2 (XE2 connector) connection status (A , B, Anot,
Bnot channels). Enable fbk contr must be enabled.
Alarms
Overvoltage and Overcurrent threshold setting (see chapter 6.11.7 for more details) :
Warning Cfg
Undervolt thr
Overcurrent thr
Configuration of the TPD32-EV drive behaviour during multi Warning situation and
start with warning active attivi (see chapter 5.3.4).
AC input alarm threshold value
Overcurrrent alarm threshold value.
Overload control
Current overload setting (see chapter 6.14.6 for more details) :
Enable overload
Overload mode
Overload current
Base current
Overload time
Pause time
144
Current overload control enabling.

Overload current mode selection (Curr limited, Curr not limited, I2t Motor, I2t Drive,
I2t motor & I2t drive).
Drive output current permissible during the overload time.
Drive output current permissible during the pause time.
Maximum time in which the Overload current is permissible.
Minimum time between overload cycles.
TPD32-EV
Analog inputs
For programmable analog inputs see chapter 6.12.2 for more details.
Self tuning of current regulator

See chapter 5.3.5.1.
R&L Search
Command for current regulator self tuning execution
- Enable the drive (Enable Drive parameter= Enabled)

- Start the drive (Start/Stop parameter = Start).
Self tuning of speed regulator

(see chapter 5.3.5.2 for more details):
Fwd-Rev spd tune
Test T curr lim
Start
Inertia
Inertia Nw
Friction
Friction Nw
Speed P
Speed P Nw
Speed I
Speed I Nw
Take val

Note !
Direction of motor shaft rotation for the speed self tune test (Forward or Reverse; Forward is clock-wise as seen from shaft drive end).
Torque current limit applied during Speed self tune test.
Speed regulator self tuning start command.
Total Inertia value at the motor shaft in Kg*m2 (1 Kg*m2 = 23.76 lb*ft2).
New total Inertia value at the motor shaft in Kg*m2 identified during the speed self tune
procedure. (1 Kg*m2 = 23.76 lb*ft2)
Friction value (or Loss compensation) in N*m (1 N*m = 0.738 lb*ft).
New Friction value (or Loss compensation) in N*m identified during the speed self tune
procedure. (1 N*m = 0.738 lb*ft)
Proportional coefficient of the speed regulator in percentage
New value of Proportional coefficient of the speed regulator in percentage computed
during the speed self tune procedure.
Integral coefficient of the speed regulator in percentage
New value of Integral coefficient of the speed regulator in percentage computed during
the speed self tune procedure.
Acquire the parameters after the self tune procedure (overwrite current values).
This is not a permanent save. Go to Save parameters command to save the data in memory.
Instruction manual
145
Final operation
(See chapter 6.11.1 for more parameters detail).
Main commands
Control mode
Save parameters
This command specifies from where the Enable drive and Start command has to be
actuated.
Defines whether the digital channel is the keypad/RS485 or Fieldbus card.
Saving of user parameters value setting
TUNING
This menu allows a fine manual tuning of the drive regulators.
Current self tuning

Current regulator self tuning procedure via R&L Search (as indicate in START UP menu).
Speed self tune

Speed regulator self tune procedure (as indicate in START UP\ Speed self tune menu).
Manual tuning of speed regulator, field regulator and voltage regulator

Manual tuning of the drive regulators (see chaper 5.3.6 for other details):
Speed P
Speed I
Prop filter
Flux P
Flux I
Voltage P
Voltage I
Save parameters
146
Proportional coefficient of the speed regulator in percentage

Integral coefficient of the speed regulator in percentage.
Time constant filter to the proportional coefficient of the speed regulator
Proportional coefficient of the field regulator in percentage.
Integral coefficient of the field regulator in percentage
Proportional coefficient of the voltage regulator in percentage.
Integral coefficient of the voltage regulator in percentage
Saving of user parameters value setting
TPD32-EV
6.3 MONITOR
MONITOR
[314]
[315]
Enable drive
Start/Stop
Measurements
Speed
Speed in DRC
[109]
[112]
[115]
[119]
[925]
[923]
Ramp ref (d) [FF]

Ramp output (d) [FF]
Speed ref (d) [FF]
Actual spd (d) [FF]
F act spd (d) [FF]
Act spd filter [s]
[110]
[113]
[118]
[122]
[427]
[420]
[924]
[923]
Ramp ref (rpm)

Ramp outp (rpm)
Speed ref (rpm)
Actual spd (rpm)
Enc 1 speed (rpm)
Enc 2 speed (rpm)
F act spd (rpm)
Act spd filter [s]
[111]
[114]
[117]
[121]
Ramp ref (%)

Ramp output (%)
Speed ref (%)
Actual spd (%)
Speed in rpm
Speed in %
[466]
[588]
[1052]
[233]
[199]
[928]
[926]
[41]
[500]
[234]
[351]
Mains voltage [V]

Mains frequency [Hz]
Output power [Kw]
Output voltage [V]
Motor current [%]
F T curr (%)
T curr filter [s]
T current ref [%]
Flux reference [%]
Flux current %
Flux current (A)
[582]
[583]
Digital I/Q
Virtual dig inp
Virtual dig out
I/O
The MONITOR menu shows all current references, actual reference values for torque and speed, and the situation of the digital inputs/outputs. The values related to the speed are given in rpm (revolutions per minute), as a
percentage (related to the Speed base value) and in the dimension specified by the factor function.
Instruction manual
147
Enable drive
Start/Stop
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
Start (1)
Stop (0)
Ramp ref (d) [FF]

Ramp ref (rpm)
Ramp ref (%)
Ramp outp (rpm)
Ramp output (%)
Speed ref (d) [FF]
Speed ref (rpm)
Speed ref (%)
Actual spd (d) [FF]
Actual spd (rpm)
Actual spd (%)
F act spd (rpm)
Act spd filter [s]
Enc 1 speed (rpm)
Enc 2 speed (rpm)
Mains voltage [V]
Output power [Kw]
Output voltage [V]
Motor current [%]
F T curr (%)
T curr filter [s]
T current ref [%]
Flux reference [%]
Flux current [%]
Flux current (A)
Digital I/Q
Dig input term 1
Dig input term 2
Dig input term 3
Dig input term 4
Dig input term 5
Dig input term 6
Dig input term 7
Dig input term 8
Dig input term 9
Dig input term 10
Dig input term 11
Dig input term 12
Dig input term 15
Dig input term 16
Dig output term
Virtual dig inp
Virtual dig out

148
No.
min
Value
Factory
Factory
max
American Standard
1
Disabled Disabled
314
315
Stop (0)
Stop (0)
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
118
117
119
122
121
924
923
427
420
466
588
1052
233
199
928
926
41
500
234
351
-32768
-32768
-200.0
-32768
-32768
-200.0
-32768
-32768
-200.0
-32768
-8192
-200.0
-32768
0.001
-8192
-8192
0
0.0
0.01
0
-250
-500
0.001
-200
0.0
0.0
0.1
+32767
+32767
+200.0
+32767
+32767
+200.0
+32767
+32767
+200.0
+32767
+8192
+200.0
+32767
1.000
+8192
+8192
999
70.0
9999.99
999
250
+500
0.250
+200
100.0
100.0
99.9
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
579
580
581
582
583
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
65535
65535
65535
0.100
0.100
S
-
0.100
0.100
S
-
* This function can be assigned to a programmable analog output.
TPD32-EV
Standard
Configuration
Terminal 12
+15 ... 30 V
0V
Terminal 13
+15 ... 30 V
0V
*
*
*
An Output 1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
-
Enable drive

Start/Stop
Ramp red (d)
Ramp ref (rpm)
Ramp ref (%)
Ramp output (d)
Ramp outp (rpm)
Ramp output (%)
Speed ref (d)
Speed ref (rpm)
Speed ref (%)
Actual spd (d)
Actual spd (rpm)
Actual spd (%)
F act spd (d)
F act spd (rpm)
Act spd filter
Enc 1 speed (rpm)

Enc. 2 speed (rpm)
Mains voltage
Mains frequency
Output power
Output voltage
Motor current
F T curr (%)
T curr filter
T current ref
Flux reference
Flux curr (%)
Flux curr (A)
Digital I/O

When the converter is controlled via the keypad, it is activated via the Enable drive parameter.
A voltage is also required on terminal 12. The Start command is required for starting
the drive.
Enabled

Enable drive
Disable

Drive disabled
Using the keypad as Start/Stop control, if E key is pushed, the motor run at the speed set.
Total reference value for the ramp in units specified by the factor function.
Total reference value for the ramp in rpm.
Total reference value for the ramp as a percentage of the Speed base value.
Ramp output in units specified by the factor function.
Ramp output in rpm.
Ramp output as a percentage of the Speed base value.
Total speed reference value in units specified by the factor function.
Total speed reference value in rpm.
Total speed reference value as a percentage of the Speed base value.
Actual speed in units specified by the factor function.
Actual speed in rpm (revolutions per minute).
Actual speed as a percentage of the Speed base value.
Filtered value of Actual speed in units specified by the factor function.
Filtered value of Actual speed in rpm.
1st order low pass filter time constant on Actual speed.
Actual speed measured by the encoder 1. The parameter is accessible only when
jumpers S5 and S6 are in position A.
If a digital encoder is used as encoder 1, it must be interfaced to the converter by
means of card DEII.
Actual speed measured by the encoder 2.
Mains voltage in V.
AC input frequency in Hz.
Output power value in Kw.
Armature Voltage UdA in VAV
Armature current in % of Full load curr.
Filtered value of Torque current in percentage.
1st order low pass filter time constant on Torque current.
Total current reference value as a percentage of the Full load current.
Field current (reference) as a percentage of Motor nom flux.
Actual field current value as percentage of Motor nom flux.
Actual field current value in amps.
Status of the digital input and output of the base converter and the card TBO.
Display:
I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 E S F

Q 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
An I/O is displayed only if a voltage is present on the corresponding terminal. E.g., if
the inputs 4 and 6 are displayed, that means that the digital inputs 4 and 6 on the TBO
card are to High level.
E= Enable drive (terminal 12)
S= Start (terminal 13)
F= Fast stop (terminal 14)
When a serial line or a Bus is used, the status of the digital I/O can be read by means
of the Dig input term and Dig output term parameters.
Instruction manual
149
Dig input term
Status of the digital inputs on the device and TBO option card to be read by serial line
or field bus. The information is contained in a word, where each bit is 1 if voltage is
present on the corresponding input terminal.
Bit n.
output
TBO A, Term. 31
(Digital input 1)
TBO A, Term. 32
(Digital input 2)
TBO A, Term. 33
(Digital input 3)
TBO A, Term. 34
(Digital input 4)
TBO B, Term. 11
(Digital input 5)
TBO B, Term. 12
(Digital input 6)
TBO B, Term. 13
(Digital input 7)
TBO B, Term. 14
(Digital input 8)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Dig input term 1*

Dig input term 2*
Dig input term 3*
Dig input term 4*
Dig input term 5*
Dig input term 6*
Dig input term 7*
Dig input term 8*
Dig input term 9*
Dig input term 10*
Dig input term 11*
Dig input term 12*
Dig input term 13*
Dig input term 14*
Dig input term 15*
Dig input term 16*
Dig output term
Bit n.
8
9
10
Input
TPD32-EV, Term. 12
(Enable drive)
TPD32-EV, Term. 13
(Start)
TPD32-EV, Term. 14
(Fast stop)
Status of the digital input 1 (terminal 21, integrated TBO A)

Status of the digital input 5 (terminal 11, option TBO, TBO B)
Status of the digital input on terminal 12 (Enable drive)
Status of the digital input on terminal 13 (Start)
Status of the digital input on terminal 14 (Fast stop)
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Status of the digital outputs on the device and TBO option card to be read by serial line
or field bus. The information is contained in a word, where each bit is 1 if voltage is
present on the corresponding terminal.
Bit n.
0
1
2
3
output
TBO A, Term. 26
(Digital output 1)
TBO A, Term. 27
(Digital output 2)
TBO A, Term. 28
(Digital output 3)
TBO A, Term. 29
(Digital output 4)
Bit n.
4
5
6
7
Input
TBO B, Term. 6
(Digital output 5)
TBO B, Term. 7
(Digital output 6)
TBO B, Term. 8
(Digital output 7)
TBO B, Term. 9
(Digital output 8)
Virtual dig inp

Virtual dig out
Status of the virtual digital inputs**

Status of the virtual digital outputs**
*
Available only via RS485 interface line or via a Field Bus.
**
The virtual inputs and outputs are used only in connection with a bus interface, in order to allow
a faster communication. For further details see the interface bus documentation.
150
TPD32-EV
6.4 INPUT VARIABLES

The converters of the TPD32-EV series enable reference values for the ramp and regulator to be specified in
different dimensions:
- as a percentage of the Speed base value
- in a dimension that the user can define himself with the factor-function, i.eg. as a speed m/s. The default
factory setting is rpm.
The value processes inside the device is the same irrespective of how it was defined. This means that the other
reference is overwritten with the new value.
Example:
A motor has a maximum speed of 1500 rpm. This corresponds to 100% and at the same time the user-defined
value of 10,000 bottles per hour (see 6.11.7).
Changing the reference value to 50% will automatically result in a change of the other value to 5,000 bottles per hour.
The table below shows the relationship of reference values. In the event of a change, the other parameters are
overwritten automatically.
Parameters with same value
N.
Dimensions
Ramp ref 1
Ramp ref 1 (%)
Speed input var*
Speed input perc*
44
47
44
46
according to the Factor function %
Ramp ref 2
Ramp ref 2 (%)
48
49
Speed ref 1
Speed ref 1 (%)
Speed ref var*
Percent ref var*
42
337
115
116
Speed ref 2
Speed ref 2 (%)
43
338
* Defined in the DRIVECOM menu
6.4.1 Ramp ref

INPUT VARIABLES
Ramp ref
Ramp ref 1
[44]
Ramp ref 1 [FF]
[47]
Ramp ref 1 (%)
[48]
Ramp ref 2 [FF]
[49]
Ramp ref 2 (%)
Ramp ref 2
The ramp reference value specifies the speed the drive should reach once the acceleration phase has been completed. Modifications to the ramp reference value are therefore transferred to the ramp accordingly. The height
of the ramp reference value determines the motor speed. As for the four quadrant drives (TPD32-EV...4B...) the
rotation direction is determined by the reference polarity.
Note!
Two quadrant TPD32-EV...2B... drives accept only positive references. Negative values are
not considered!
Instruction manual
151
Min Speed Limit

Speed limited
Speed
Speed
Speed min amount
0 rpm
Ramp ref 1
0 rpm
Speed min pos

0 rpm
Zero
In=0
Zero
Ramp Reference
Out=0
Ramp output (d)
Enab multi spd
Enab motor pot
Ramp in = 0
Ramp out = 0
Speed min neg

0 rpm
Ramp ref 2
0 rpm
Ramp ref 1
Dig input term 11

Speed
Ramp ref (d)

Quick stop
COMMAND
t
Ramp ref 2
JOG function
7
Motor potentiometer
function
Multi speed
function
Speed input
+
Jog +
Ramp input
Jog -
Jog
selection
Figure 6.4.1.1: Ramp references
Ramp ref 1 [FF]

Ramp ref 1 (%)
Ramp ref 2 [FF]
Ramp ref 2 (%)
Ramp ref (rpm)
Ramp ref (d) [FF]
Ramp ref (%)
No.
44
47
48
49
110
109
111
min
-2 P45
-200.0
-2 P45
-200.0
-32768
-32768
-32768
Value
Factory
Factory
max
American Standard
+2 P45
0
0
+200.0
0.0
0.0
+2 P45
0
0
+200.0
0.0
0.0
+32767
+32767
-200.0
+200.0
-
Standard
Configuration
An. Input 1
(Terminals 1 + 2)*
*
**
This function can be assigned to one of the programmable analog inputs. The converter is already fatory set for a
configuration using the terminals stated. The setting can also be modified to suit the application at hand.
** This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog output.

Ramp ref 1
Ramp ref 1 (%)
Ramp ref 2
Ramp ref 2 (%)
Ramp ref (rpm)
Ramp ref (d)
Ramp ref (%)
1st reference value for the ramp. The value to be entered depends on the factor function.
1st reference value as a percentage of the Speed base value
2nd reference value for the ramp. The value to be entered depends on the factor function.
2nd reference value as a percentage of the Speed base value
Total reference value for the ramp in rpm (revolutions per minute)
Total reference value for the ramp in the dimension specified by the factor function.
Total reference value of the ramp as a percentage of the Speed base value
The total Ramp reference value Ramp ref consists of the signed addition of Ramp ref 1 and Ramp ref 2 (see
Figure 6.4.1.1).
Note:
Speed base value cannot exceed 8192 rpm.
Example 1:
Example 2:
Ramp ref 1 = + 50 % Ramp ref 2 = + 30 %

Ramp ref = 50 % + 30 % = 80 %
Ramp ref 1 = + 40 % Ramp ref 2 = - 60 %
Ramp ref = 40 % - 60 %= - 20 %
0 ... 10 V, 0 ... 20 mA and 4... 20 mA signals can be used when setting the reference value via terminals.
The Ramp ref (rpm), Ramp ref (d) and Ramp ref (%) are influenced by the minimum speed limits. These are
directly applied on the Ramp ref 1, as well as the Motor potentiometer and Multispeed references.
152
TPD32-EV
6.4.2 Speed ref

INPUT VARIABLES
Speed ref
Speed ref 1
[42]
[378]
Speed ref 1 [FF]

Speed ref 1 (%)
[43]
[379]
Speed ref 2 [FF]

Speed Ref 2 (%)
Speed ref 2
The speed reference value specifies the required speed of the drive. The drive responds to the reference value
progression directly, except in cases where the torque available is insufficient for this purpose. In this case, the
drive operates at current limit until the selected speed has been reached. The speed reference value determines
the speed of the motor, while the polarity determines the directon of rotation.
Note!
Two quadrant TPD32-EV...2B drives accept only positive references. Negative values are
not considered!
MAX Speed Limits
Speed limited
Speed max amount

1750 rpm
Speed ref 2
T current ref
0 rpm
From Speed
Reference
generation
Speed max pos

1750 rpm
Speed ref (d)
DV_Ovr_RfSel
Speed Regulator
Spd draw out (d)
Current Regulator
Enable spd reg
Motor current
To Motor Control
DV_MotPar
DV_SReg
Speed max neg

1750 rpm
DV_Curr_reg
T current ref 1
0 %
T current ref 2
Actual spd (d)
Speed reg output
0 %
Speed Feedback
Encoder 1
Speed fbk sel
Enc 1 speed
Droop compensation
Encoder 1
Encoder 2
Speed fbk sel
Enc 2 speed
Actual speed
Actual spd (d)
Speed fbk sel
Droop gain
Tacho
Output voltage
Output voltage
Load comp
Encoder 2
0 %
T current ref
0 %
DV_Droop_cp
Speed fbk sel

Armature
DV_Spd_Fbk
Figure 6.4.2.1: Speed reference
Speed ref 1 [FF]

Speed ref 1 (%)
Speed ref 2 [FF]
Speed Ref 2 (%)
Speed ref (rpm)
Speed ref (d) [FF]
Speed ref (%)
No.
42
378
43
379
118
115
117
min
-2 P45
-200.0
-2 P45
-200.0
-32768
-32768
-32768
Value
Factory
Factory
max
American Standard
+2 P45
0
0
+200.0
0.0
0.0
+2 P45
0
0
+200.0
0.0
0.0
+32767
+32767
-200.0
+200.0
-
* This function can be assigned to one of the programmable analog inputs.

** This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog output.

Standard
Configuration
Ramp output *
*
**
Instruction manual
153
Speed ref 1
Speed ref 1 (%)
Speed ref 2
Speed ref 2 (%)
Speed ref (rpm)
Speed ref (d)
Speed ref (%)
1st reference value for the speed. The value to be entered depends on the factor function.
1st speed reference value as a percentage of the Speed base value
2nd reference value for the speed. The value to be entered depends on the factor function.
2nd speed reference value as a percentage of the Speed base value
Total speed reference value in rpm.
Total speed reference value in the dimension specified by the factor function.
Total speed reference value as a percentage of the Speed base value.
The total speed reference value consists of the signed addition of Speed ref1 and Speed ref 2.
Note:
Speed base value cannot exceed 8192 rpm.
Example 1:

Example 2:

Speed ref 1 = + 50 % Speed ref 2 = + 30 %

Speed ref = 50 % + 30 % = 80 %
Speed ref 1 = + 40 % Speed ref 2 = - 60 %
Speed ref = 40 % - 60 % = - 20 %
0 ... 10 V, 0 ... 20 mA and 4 ... 20 mA signals can be used when setting the reference value via terminals. The
speed reference value has an upper and a lower limit.
If the ramp is selected, (Enable ramp parameter= Enabled), the reference value input Speed ref 1 is automatically linked with the ramp output.
6.4.3 Torque current reference (T current ref)

INPUT VARIABLES
T current ref
[39]
T current ref 1 [%]
[40]
T current ref 2 [%]
The current reference value is proportional to the armature current of the motor and determines the torque, the
polarity determines the torque direction. For most applications T current Ref comes from the speed regulator
output. T current ref 2 can also be used as a correction value.
T current ref
Curr limit state
T current lim +
136 %
Torque current regulator
From Speed regulator
Enable spd reg
To Motor Control
T
+
T current lim 136 %
T current ref 1
0 %
T current ref 2
0 %
Figure 6.4.3.1: Torque current reference
154
TPD32-EV
No.
min
Value
Factory
Factory
max
American Standard
+200
0
0
see 6.4.3
Standard
Configuration
T current ref 1 [%]
39
-200
T current ref 2 [%]
40
-200
+200
0.00
0.00
T current ref [%]
41
-200
+200
**
* This function can be assigned to one of the freely programmable analog inputs.
** This parameter can be assigned to a freely programmable analog output.
T current ref 1

T current ref 2
Speed regulator
output *
1st current reference value as a percentage of the Full load curr. The maximum value
possible depends on the Enable overload parameter.
Enable overload
disabled
T current ref 1

100% max
Enable overload
enabled
T current ref 1

200% max
The value of T current ref 1 can always be set via parameter, bus or analog input regardless of the type of speed/torque control that is enabled.
2nd current reference value as a percentage of the Full load curr. The maximum value
possible depends on the Enable overload parameter.
Enable overload
disabled
T current ref 2

100% max
Enable overload
enabled
T current ref 2

200% max
T current Ref
Total current reference value as a percentage of the Full load curr value.
The total current reference value consists of the signed addition of T current ref 1 and T current Ref 2.
Example 1:

T current ref 1 = +50%

T current ref 2-= +30%
T current ref = 50% + 30% = 80%
Example 2:

T current ref 1 = +40%

T current ref 2 = -60%
T current ref = 40-60% = -20%
0 ... 10 V, 0 ... 20 mA and 4 ... 20 mA signals can be used when setting the reference value via terminals.
Reference set using input current, usually are with sign positive and they are used with biquadrant drives.
The current reference value has an upper limit.
Instruction manual
155
6.5 LIMITS
6.5.1 Speed Limits
LIMITS
Speed limits
Speed amount
[1]
[2]
Speed min amount [FF]

Speed max amount [FF]
[5]
[3]
[6]
[4]
Speed min pos [FF]

Speed max pos [FF]
Speed min neg [FF]
Speed max neg [FF]
Speed min/max
No.

Speed min pos [FF]
Speed max pos [FF]
Speed min neg [FF]
Speed max neg [FF]
Speed limited
Value
Factory
Factory
max
American Standard
232-1
0
0
2
5
3
6
4
372
0
0
0
0
0
0
232-1
232-1
232-1
232-1
232-1
1
Speed not limited (0)

Speed limited (1)
min
This function can be assigned to a programmable digital output.
5000
0
5000
0
5000
5000
0
5000
0
5000
Standard
Configuration
*
Speed min amount
It defines the minimum speed for both directions TPD32-EV...4B. A value below minimum is not accepted, regardless of the reference value selected. This parameter effects
the ramp input. If the Speed min amount parameter is changed, the Parameter Speed
min pos and Speed min neg parameters are set to the same value. If any of these parameters are subsequently changed, the last change is valid. The value to be entered is
based on the factor function.
Speed max amount
It defines the maximum speed for both directions TPD32-EV...4B... This parameter
affects the speed regulator input and therefore takes into account both the reference
values that come from the ramp as well as the direction of rotation (see Figure 6.4.2.1).
If the Speed max amount parameter is changed, the Speed max pos and Speed max
neg parameters are set to the same value. If any of these values is subsequently changed,
the last change is valid. The value to be entered is based on the factor function.
Speed min pos
It defines the minimum speed for the clockwise rotation of the motor. A value below
minimum is not accepted, regardless of the reference value selected. This function effects the ramp input (see Figure 6.4.1.1). The value of the parameter to be entered is
based on the factor function.
Speed max pos
It defines the maximum speed for the clockwise rotation of the motor. This function affects the input of the speed regulator and therefore takes into account both the reference
values that come from the ramp as well as the direction of rotation (see Figure 6.4.1.1).
The value of the parameter entered is based on the factor function.
Speed min neg
It defines the minimum speed for the counterclockwise rotation of the motor TPD32EV...4B... A value below minimum is not accepted, regardless of the reference value
selected. This parameter effects the ramp input (see Figure 6.4.1.1). The value of the
parameter entered is based on the factor function.
156
TPD32-EV
Speed max neg
It defines the maximum speed for the counterclockwise rotation of the motor TPD32EV...4B... This parameter effects the input of the speed regulator and therefore takes into
account both the reference values that come from the ramp as well as the direction of
rotation (see Figure 6.4.1.1).The value of the parameter entered is based on the factor
function.
Speed limited
Message that indicates that the reference value, is currently limited by the entered
minimum and maximum limit values.
High
Reference value currently limited since the value entered is out
of range of the limit values defined.
Low
Reference value within the defined limit values.
The Speed min amount, Speed min pos and Speed min neg parameters have an effect on
the Ramp ref 1 reference value, the motor potentiometer function and the multi-speed function. They do not, however, have an effect on the Ramp ref 2 parameter!
Note!
6.5.2 Armature current limits (Current limits)

LIMITS
Current limits
[715]
T current lim type
[7]
T current lim [%]
[8]
T current lim + [%]
[9]
T current lim - [%]
[10]
In use Tcur lim+ [%]
[11]
In use Tcur lim- [%]
[13]
Current lim red [%]
[342]
Torque reduct
The current effects the input of the current regulator and only take into account the armature current.
No.
min
max
T current lim type
715
T current lim [%]

T current lim + [%]
T current lim - [%]
Curr limit state
7
8
9
349
0
0
0
0
200
200
200
1

Current lim red [%]
Torque reduct
10
11
13
342
0
0
0
0
200
200
200
1
T lim +/- (0)

T lim mot gen (1)
Curr. limit not reached (0)

Curr. limit reached (1)
Not active (0)

Active (1)
Value
Factory
American
0
Factory
Standard
0
150
150
150
150
150
150
100
Not active (0)
100
Not active (0)
Standard
Configuration
**
**
**
Digital output 5 ***
*
* This function can be assigned to one of the programmable digital inputs.

**
This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog input.
*** This function can be assigned to one of the programmable digital outputs.
Instruction manual
157
T curr lim type

This parameters determines the behaviour of the drive in current limit condition.
T lim +/-
The active positive torque limit is T current lim and the active
negative torque limit is T current lim -.
T lim mot/gen
With this selection 3 conditions are possible:

1 - If the motor speed > +1% of Motor max speed the active
positive torque limit is T current lim+ and the active negative
torque limit is T current lim-.

2 - If the motor speed < -1% of Motor max speed the active
positive torque limit is T current lim- and the active negative
torque limit is T current lim+.

3 - If -1% of Motor max speed < motor speed < +1% of
Motor max speed the active positive torque limit is T current
lim+ and the active negative torque limit is T current lim+.
torque
torque
T current lim +
T current lim +
T current lim +
T current lim -
speed
speed
T current lim T current lim -
T current lim -
T current lim +
T current lim

T current lim +

T current lim -

Curr limit state

158
-1% of Motor max speed
+1% of Motor max speed
Symmetrical current limit for both current directions for TPD32-EV...4B converters.
Defined as a percentage of the Full load curr parameter. The maximum value depends
on the Enable overload parameter.
Enable overload
Disabled
T current limit
100 % max
Enable overload
Enabled
T current limit
200% max
If the T current limit parameter is changed, the Parameter T current lim + and T current
lim - parameters are set to the same value. If both these parameters are subsequently
changed, the last change is valid.
Setting of the drive current limit for the positive current direction (clockwise drive and
counter-clockwise brake). Entered as a percentage of the Full load curr value. The
maximum value depends on the value of the Enable overload parameter.
Enable overload
Disabled
T current lim+
100 % max
Enable overload
Enabled
T current lim+
200% max
Setting of the drive current limit for the negative current direction (counterclockwise
drive and clockwise brake). Entered as a percentage of the Full load curr parameter.
The maximum value depends on the value of the Enable overload parameter. This
parameter is not active for the TPD32-EV...4B converters.
Enable overload
Disabled
T current lim-
100 % max
Enable overload
Enabled
T current lim-
200% max
Status message, indicating whether the drive is working with the set current limit or not.
High Drive working at the current limit. ILimit LED lights up.
Low Drive not working at the current limit.
TPD32-EV
In use Tcur lim +
Status message, indicating the used value of the current limit for the positive torque
direction as a percentage of Full load curr.
In use Tcur lim -
Status message, indicating the used value of the current limit for the negative torque
direction as a percentage of Full load curr.
Current lim red
Setting of the armature current limit, as % of Full load curr, when the Torque reduct
function is active.
Torque reduct
Selection for torque reduction. This function can be assigned to a freely programmable
digital input. When the torque reduction function is active, the current limit changes
accordingly by the percentage defined with the Current lim red parameter.

High
Torque reduction not active

Low
Torque reduction active
Example of the function of the Current lim red and Torque reduct parameters.

T current limit (or T current lim +/-) = 80 %

Current lim red = 70 %

Torque reduct = High (not active)
Current limit = 80 %

Torque reduct = Low (active)
Current limit = 70 %
The value for T current limit can be set in the START UP\Limits menu.
6.5.3 Flux limits

LIMITS
Flux limits
[467]
Flux current max [%]
[468]
Flux current min [%]
No.

467
468
min
P468
0
Value
Factory
Factory
max
American Standard
100
100
100
P467
5
5
Standard
Configuration
*/**
-
* This parameter can be set on a programmable analogic outputs.

**
This parameter can be set on a programmable analogic input.
The limits regarding the field current are set in this submenu.
Flux current max

Flux current min

Percentage of maximum field current according to the Motor nom flux parameter.
The max. value (100%) corresponds to the circulation in the field circuit of the motor,
of a current equal to the value set in Motor nom flux.
If any curve has been set via I field cnst parameter, the variation of this parameter influences the field current in a linear way .
(see Flux /if curve section 5.4.5)
Percentage of minimum field current according to the Motor nom flux parameter .
Its value states the circulation in the field circuit of the motor, of a minimum current
compared to the value set in Motor nom flux.
The value set here affect the threshold of the Field loss alarm indication . The
threshold is the half of Flux current min.
Instruction manual
159
6.6 RAMP
Ramp +
Ramp -
Ramp +/- delay

100 ms
Ramp Reference
Freeze ramp
From
Ramp in = 0
To Speed Reference
generation
Ramp ref (d)

Freeze ramp
COMMAND
Acc. delta speed

100 rpm
Acc. delta time
1 s
Linear
Quick stop
Enab multi rmp

F
Dec. delta speed

100 rpm
Dec delta time
1 s
QStp delta speed

1000 rpm
QStp delta time
1 s
Ramp shape
Linear
F
Speed
S-shape
S shape t const
300 ms
S acc t const
300 ms
S dec t const
300 ms
Multi Ramp Function
Ramp shape
T
S-shape
Figure 6.6.1 : Ramp circuit
The ramp (reference value integrator) determines the acceleration and deceleration times of the drive. These
times can be set independently of each other.
An additional ramp is provided for a quick stop. This ramp can only be activated via the serial interface or a field bus.
The ramp can either be linear or S-shaped..
The reference values can be defined in different ways
- with the Ramp ref 1 and/or Ramp ref 2 reference values
- with the multi-speed function
- with the motor potentiometer function
- with the Jog function
The Ramp generator can be used in a stand alone configuration. When the Ramp generator is disabled (Enable
ramp = disabled), the Enable drive, Start/Stop and Fast stop commands have no more influence on Ramp
generator. In such a condition it is free to run and can be used separately.
160
TPD32-EV
6.6.1 Acceleration, Deceleration, Quick Stop

RAMP
Acceleration
[21]
Acc delta speed [FF]
[22]
Acc delta time [s]
[29]
Dec delta speed [FF]
[30]
Dec delta time [s]
[37]
QStp delta speed [FF]
[38]
QStp delta time [s]
Deceleration
Quick stop
No.

Acc delta time [s]
Dec delta time [s]
QStp delta time [s]
21
22
29
30
37
38
SPEED
min
max
0
0
0
0
0
0
232-1
65535
232-1
65535
232-1
65535
Value
Factory
Factory
American Standard
100
100
1
1
100
100
1
1
1000
1000
1
1
Standard
Configuration
-
Speed
Acc delta speed [21]

Acc delta time [22]
Dec delta speed [29]
Dec delta time [30]
Time [s]
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4

Acc delta time [22]
Dec delta time [30]
TPD32...2B
Time [s]
4
1
3
TPD32...4B
Figure 6.6.1.1: Accel, decel and Quick stop
Acc delta speed

Acc delta time
Dec delta speed
Dec delta time
Qstp delta speed
Qstp delta time
Quick stop
Has the same units as the ramp reference value and is based on the factor function.
Is defined in seconds. If 0 s is entered, the ramp output directly follows the reference
value.
Has the same units as the ramp reference value and is based on the factor function.
Is defined in seconds. If 0s is entered, the ramp output directly follows the reference
value.
Has the same dimension as the ramp reference value and is based on the factor function.
Is defined in seconds. If 0 s is entered, the ramp output follows the reference value.
Activates the Quick stop ramp
The acceleration of the drive is defined as a quotient of the Acc delta speed and Acc delta time parameters (see
Figure 6.6.1.1). As for the four quadrant converters (TPD32-EV...4B...) it is the same for both directions of rotation.
The deceleration of the drive is defined as a quotient of the parameters Dec delta speed and Dec delta time (see
Figure 6.6.1.1). As for the four quadrant converters (TPD32-EV...4B...) it is the same for both directions of rotation.
The Quick Stop function provides the possibility of a second deceleration ramp for the emergency braking of
Instruction manual
161
the drive. The ramp output in this case is not set to zero immediately but after a set time. The deceleration of
the drive via the Quick Stop function is defined as the quotient of the Qstp delta speed and Qstp delta time
parameters. As for the four quadrant converters (TPD32-EV...4B...) it is the same for both directions of rotation.
This ramp is activated by the functions Fast stop (via terminals) and Quick stop.
6.6.2 Ramp shape and control commands

RAMP
[18]
[19]
[663]
[664]
[20]
[673]
[245]
[344]
[345]
[373]
Ramp shape
S shape t const [ms]
S acc t const [ms]
S dec t const [ms]
Ramp +/- delay [ms]
Fwd-Rev
Enable ramp
Ramp out = 0
Ramp in = 0
Freeze ramp
min
max
18
Value
Factory
American
Linear (0)

S acc t const [ms]
S dec t const [ms]
Ramp +/- delay [ms]
Fwd-Rev
19
663
664
20
673
100
100
100
0
0
3000
3000
3000
65535
3
300
300
300
100
1
300
300
300
100
1
Forward sign
Reverse sign
Enable ramp
293
294
245
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
Enabled (1)
0
0
Enabled (1)
344
Not active (1)
Not active (1)
345
Not active (1)
Not active (1)
373
Not active (1)
Not active (1)
346
Digital output 1 *
347
Digital output 2 *
Ramp shape
Ramp out = 0
Ramp in = 0
Freeze ramp
Ramp +
No.
Linear (0)
S-Shaped (1)
No direction (0)
Fwd direction (1)
Rev direction (2)
No direction (3)
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
Active (0)
Not active (1)
Active (0)
Not active (1)
Active (0)
Not active (1)
Acc.CW + Dec. anti-CW (1)

Other states (0)
Ramp -
Acc.anti-CW + Dec. CW (1)

Other states (0)
Factory
Standard
Linear (0)
Standard
Configuration
-

**
This parameter can be assigned to a programmable digital output.
*** This function can be assigned to one of the programmable analog outputs.
The shape of the ramp is determined by the Ramp shape, S shape t constant, S dec t const parameters.
Ramp shape
S shape t const
162
Linear
Linear ramp
S shaped
S-shaped ramp
Determines the curve for S-shaped ramps (see Figure 6.6.2.1).
TPD32-EV
S shape t const
Figure 6.6.2.1: Ramp shape
The value of S shape t constant is added to the ramp time of linear ramps. The ramp time is thus lengthened
by the value degined by the S shape t const parameter. This is done regardless of the speed changed involved!
S acc t const
S dec to const
Determines the curve for S-shaped acceleration ramps.

Determines the curve for S-shaped deceleration ramps.
Using very different S acc t const and S dec t const values it is possible to have a discontinuous behaviour during the changing of the motor direction.
Speed changes (=Active ramp) are indicated by the Ramp + and Ramp - parameters.
Ramp +/- delay
Defines a delay time. It is only valid if the ramp is active.
Ramp
output
Ramp +
Ramp -
Ramp +/- delay

Figure 6.6.2.2: Ramp delay
Fwd-Rev
Changes the sign of the Ramp reference. When Fwd direction is selected the Ramp
reference is multiplied by +1. When Rev direction is selected the Ramp reference is
multiplied by-1.
Forward sign
Set the Fwd direction of the Ramp reference. It can be programmed on a digital input.
Reverse sign
Set the Rev direction of the Ramp reference. It can be programmed on a digital input.
When both Fwd and Rev sign are 0 or 1, or Fwd-Rev is 0 or 1, the multiplexer is 0.
Instruction manual
163
The behavior of the ramp circuit is defined by the Enable Ramp, Ramp In = 0, Ramp Out = 0 and Freeze
ramp parameters.
Enable Ramp

This parameter can be changed only with a disabled drive.

Enabled
The ramp is enabled.
Disabled
The ramp is disabled.
Ramp out = 0

Not active (H) Enabled ramp output.

Active (L)
The ramp ouput is immediately set to zero.
Ramp in = 0
Not active (H) Enabled ramp input. The Ramp Ref parameter corresponds to the

set reference.
Active (L)
Disabled ramp input. Ramp Ref = 0
Ramp
in = 0
Ramp
out = 0
Ramp
ref
Ramp
output
Figure 6.6.2.3: Ramp control
Freeze ramp

Not active (H)

Active (L)

The value at the ramp ouput is kept, irrespective of any possible

reference value changes at the ramp input.
The ramp output follows the reference value changes at the ramp
input according to the times set.
Ramp +
Active if the drive uses a positive torque (clockwise rotation and counter-clockwise braking).
Ramp -
Active if the drive uses a negative torque (counter-clockwise rotation and clockwise
braking). Only for TPD32-EV...4B...
Drive operation is only possible with the ramp functionenabled. Enable ramp=Enabled.
When the ramp input is enable via Ramp in = 0, the acceleration time of the drive starts. If the input is disabled,
the drive slows down according to the decelertion time set until zero speed is reached.
When the ramp output is set to zero via Ramp out = 0, the drive brakes through the maximum available torque.
With the TPD32-EV...2B converters no braking is possible. The function (also Quick Stop) causes the motor to coast.
164
TPD32-EV
6.7 SPEED REGULATION (SPEED REGULAT)
Speed P/I base

Speed P base
1.536 A/rpm
Load comp
Speed I base
0.048 A/rpm*ms
Speed droop comp
DV_Droop_cp
Inertia/Loss comp
Aux spd fun sel
DV_J_comp
Speed Limits
Speed max amount
1750 rpm
Speed max pos
1750 rpm
Speed max neg
1750 rpm
Speed reg output
Speed ref (d)
DV_Curr_reg
Speed Reg P / I
Speed ref 1
Speed ref 2
+
Speed min neg
Zero torque
To Current regulator
T current ref
Zero
DV_Srpi
0 rpm
T current ref 1
Speed min pos
0 rpm
Enable spd reg
0 rpm
Lock speed reg
0 rpm
Speed min amount
0 rpm
Zero torque
Command
0 %
T current ref 2
Speed P
Actual spd (rpm)
Speed I
5 %
0.5 %
Speed P in use
0 %
Speed I in use
Speed fbk
Prop. filter
+
DV_Spd_fbk
Speed up
Aux spd fun sel
0 ms
Lock speed I
Not Active
Speed P bypass
10 %
Speed I bypass
Speed Adaptive
and
Speed zero logic
1 %
P/I regulator includes

anti-windup logic
DV_Adp_spd
Speed up gain
Speed up filter
0 %
Speed up base
1000 ms
0 ms
Figure 6.7.1: Speed regulation
The converters of the TPD32-EV series are provided with a speed regulator circuit that can adapt flexibly to the
requirements of various applications. The device is factory set for PI regulation and regulator parameters that
stay the same throughout the entire speed range.
The following functions are also provided:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Speed-up function in order to avoid oscillations in presence of loads with a high moment of inertia.
Speed zero logic for regulator behavior when the motor is stopped.
Speed regulator adaption for optimizing the regulator according to the actual speed or to an external reference (Adap Reference)..
Auto capture function of a running motor
Speed signals
Droop function for current balancing
For the speed PI regulator diagram block, please refer to Speed regulator PI part block diagram on chapter 9.
Instruction manual
165
6.7.1 Speed regulator

SPEED REGULAT
[118]
[236]
[322]
[242]
[348]
[1016]
[444]
Speed ref [rpm]

Speed reg output [% ]
Lock speed reg
Enable spd reg
Lock speed I
Aux spd fun sel
Prop filter [ms]
Value
Factory
American
-
Factory
Standard
-
T current ref 1 **
OFF
OFF
Enabled
Enabled
Not active (1)
Not active (1)
1016
Speed up (0)
Speed up (0)
444
1000
No.
min
max
Speed ref [rpm]

118
-32768
+32767
236
-200
Lock speed reg
322
+200
see 6.7.1
1
242
348
Aux spd fun sel

Prop filter [ms]
Enable spd reg

Lock speed I
ON (1)
OFF (0)
Enable (1)
Disable (0)
Active (0)
Not active (1)
Speed up (0)
Inertia-loss cp (1)
Standard
Configuration
**

**
This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog output.
Speed ref
Speed reg output
Lock speed reg

Enable spd reg

Lock speed I
166
Total speed reference value in rpm

Output value of the speed regulator, used as the reference value for the current regulator
Note! The speed regulator is still active even if disabled (Enable spd reg = Disabled),
therefore the Speed reg output contains valid information also in this case. Such
a data can be transferred to the APC300 board to be used for other regulation.
If the speed regulator is enabled (Enable spd reg = Enabled) the Speed reg
output contains the sum of the actual speed regulator output and T current
ref 2.
This parameter is used in order to lock the speed regulator. When this happens, it stops
to work, the current reference value is set to zero and the drive comes to a stop. This
coasting time then depends on the rotating mass and the friction within the system
concerned. If the connection between the speed regulator and the current regulator is
restored, the drive will restart in the shortest possible time.
ON
Speed regulator locked (= 0 V when using a digital input).
OFF Speed regulator unlocked (= 15...30 V when using a digital input).
This enables dynamic switching, with the drive enabled or disabled, from speed control
to torque control by changing the parameter selection:
Enabled
The speed regulator is enabled. The speed regulator output
becomes the current regulator input. Speed reg output = T
current ref 1.
Disabled
The speed regulator is blocked, parameter T current ref 1 (IPA
39) becomes the current regulator reference.
Not active (H)
Active (L)

I component of the speed regulator is enabled

I component of the speed regulator is disabled
TPD32-EV
Aux spd fun sel

Prop filter
Selection of the Speed up or Inertia/loss cp (see chapter 6.7.3. Speed up function and
chapter 6.7.5. Inertia/loss cp for more details).
Time constant of the filter belonging to the circuit of the speed feedback. Filtering of
the high frequency components of speed feedback signal is useful in case of elastic
coupling between motor and load (joint or belts).
The speed regulator must be enabled with the Enable spd reg parameter in order for it to be used.
The reference value for the speed regulator consists of the signed addition of Speed ref 1 and Speed ref2.
The speed feedback is supplied by an encoder or a tachometer that are mounted to the motor shaft. The higher
the resolution of the encoder, the better the control accuracy of the regulator.
The regulator parameters can be set separately.
For the speed PI regulator diagram block, please refer to diagram on chapter 9.
6.7.1.1 Self tuning of Speed regulator

SPEED REGULAT
Self tuning
[1029]
[1048]
[1027]
[1014]
[1030]
[1015]
[1031]
[87]
[1032]
[88]
[1033]
[1028]
Fwd-Rev spd tune
No.
Fwd-Rev spd tune

Test T curr lim [%]
Start
Inertia [kg*m*m*]
Inertia Nw [kg*m*m*]
Friction [N*m]
Friction Nw [N*m]
Speed P [%]
Speed P Nw [%]
Speed I [%]
Speed I Nw [%]
Take val
min
max
1029
1048
1027
1014
1030
1015
1031
87
1032
88
1033
1028
0
0
0.001
0.001
0.000
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0
S
65535
999.999
999.999
99.999
99.99
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
65535
Fwd direction (1)

Rev direction (2)
Test T curr lim [%]

Start
Inertia [kg*m*m*]
Friction [N*m]
Friction Nw [N*m]
Speed P [%]
Speed P Nw [%]
Speed I [%]
Speed I Nw [%]
Take val
Fwd-Rev spd tune

Test T curr lim
Start
Inertia
Inertia Nw
Value
Factory
American
Fwd
Direction (1)
Factory
Standard
Fwd
Direction (1)
20
S
S
S
S
-
20
S
S
S
S
-
Standard
Configuration
Direction of motor shaft rotation for the speed self tune test (Forward or Reverse; Forward is clock-wise as seen from shaft drive end).
Torque current limit applied during Speed self tune test.
Start-up speed self tune.
Inertia value in Kg*m2 (1 Kg*m2 = 23.76 lb*ft2).
New Inertia value in Kg*m2 identified during the speed self tune procedure.
Instruction manual
167
Friction
Friction Nw
Speed P
Speed P Nw
Friction value (or Loss compensation) in N*m (1 N*m = 0.738 lb*ft).

New Friction value (or Loss compensation) in N*m identified during the speed self tune procedure.
Proportional coefficient of the speed regulator in percentage.
New value of Proportional coefficient of the speed regulator in percentage computed
during the speed self tune procedure.
Speed I
Integral coefficient of the speed regulator in percentage.
Speed I Nw
New value of Integral coefficient of the speed regulator in percentage computed during
the speed self tune procedure.
Take val
Acquire the parameters after the speed self tune procedure (overwrite current values).
Note!
This is not a permanent save. Go to Save parameters command.
6.7.2 Spd zero logic

Enable spd=0 P
Spd=0 P gain
10 %
Ref 0 level
>=
Lock speed I
10 rpm
Enable spd=0 R
&
Ramp ref / Speed ref
Ref 0 level
&
T
>=
Enable spd=0 I
Lock speed I
&
>
=
&
Speed zero
Speed
Speed zero delay

100 ms
Figure 6.7.2.1: Speed zero logic
SPEED REGULAT
Spd zero logic
[123]
[124]
[125]
[126]
[106]
Enable spd=0 I
Enable spd=0 R
Enable spd=0 P
Spd=0 P gain [%]
Ref 0 level [FF]
The speed zero logic determines the behavior of the drive when the motor shaft is at a stop.
Enable spd=0 I
123
Value
Factory
American
Disabled
Enable spd=0 R
124
Disabled
Disabled
Enable spd=0 P
125
Disabled
Disabled
Spd=0 P gain [%]

Ref 0 level [FF]
126
106
0.00
1
100.00
32767
10.00
10
10.00
10
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
168
No.
min
max
Factory
Standard
Disabled
TPD32-EV
Standard
Configuration
-
Enable spd=0 I

Enable spd=0 R

Enable spd=0 P

Spd=0 P gain
Ref 0 level
Enabled
The I component of the speed regulator is set to 0 when the

reference value and the actual value = 0. The drive control is
then only proportional. The I component is enabled when a
reference value is entered to restart acceleration.
Disabled
Disable the function.
Only effective if Enable spd=0 P is enabled.
Enabled
The proportional gain, equal to Spd=0 P gain at zero speed,
is equal to Speed P when the speed reference becomes higher
than the value defined by Ref 0 level.
Disabled
The proportional gain, equal to Spd=0 P gain at zero speed, is
equal to Speed P when the speed reference or the actual speed
become higher than the value defined by Ref 0 level.
Enabled
When both reference value and actual value = 0, the proportional Spd=0 P gain component is active after the delay time
defined by Speed zero delay.
Disabled
The speed regulator also keeps its proportional gain component
when the drive is at a stop.
Proportional gain of the speed regulator, that is only active when both reference value
and actual value = 0, and if the Enable spd=0 P function has been enabled.
Switch threshold for speed zero logic. Defined in the dimension specified in the factor
function. Speeds below this threshold are defined as zero.
6.7.3 Speed up
SPEED REGULAT
Speed up
[445]
[446]
[447]
Speed up gain [%]

Speed up base [ms]
Speed up filter [ms]
Speed up gain [%]

Speed up base [ms]
min
max
445
0.00
100.00
Value
Factory
American
0.00
446
447
0
0
16000
1000
1000
0
No.
Factory
Standard
0.00
1000
0
Standard
Configuration
-
The Speed-up function is used in order to avoid oscillations in presence of loads with a high moment of inertia.
It is made up of a derivative part in the speed feedback circuit, which allows to increase the integral gain of the
speed regulator. It is also useful in case of cyclical non constant loads on the motor (ex. cams). The feedback
applied to the speed regulator is made of two components:
- the motor speed

- the output signal from the Speed up function
This function is mutually exclusive to the Inertia/loss comp function, This selection must be done via the Aux
spd fun sel [1016] parameter. (SPEED REGULAT menu). See section 6.7.1 Speed regulator.
Speed up gain
Speed up base
Speed up filter
Speed up function gain as a percentage of Speed up base

Speed up function max. gain. The defined value corresponds to 100% of the Speed up
gain parameter.
Time constant of the filter belonging to the D part of the Speed up function.
See example figure 5.3.7.3. and 5.3.7.4.
Instruction manual
169
6.7.4 Droop function

From digital setting or
analog input
Load comp
Droop limit
To Speed
reference
Droop filter
1500 rpm
0 %
0 ms
Enable droop
T current ref
low pass filter
Droop gain
Zero
0 %
Figure 6.7.4.1: Droop compensation
SPEED REGULAT
Droop function
[696]
[697]
[698]
[700]
[699]
Droop gain [%]

Droop filter [ms]
Load comp [%]
Droop limit [FF]
Enable droop
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
No.
696
697
698
700
699
Droop gain [%]

Droop filter [ms]
Load comp [%]
Droop limit [FF]
Enable droop
min
max
0.00
0
-200
0
0
100.00
1000
+200
2*P45
1
Value
Factory
American
0.00
0
0
1500
Disabled (0)
Factory
Standard
0.00
0
0
1500
Disabled (0)
Standard
Configuration
*
**
* This parameter can be assigned to one of the programmable analog inputs.

**
This parameter can be assigned to one of the programmable digital inputs.
The Droop function is used when a current balancing between two drives is required. A typical situation is when
two motors are mechanically coupled and have to run at the same speed. If, because of a different characteristic
of the two speed regulators, one of the motors is driven to run at a higher speed, it will be overloaded and the
second motor will work as a brake. The Droop function permits to avoid this bad functioning by adding a component in the in the speed reference of the drive, which is proportional to the actual load difference of the drives.
The effect is the balancing of the two motor current.
Droop gain
Droop filter
Load comp
Enable droop
Droop limit
Droop function gain. It is defined as a percentage of the ratio between Speed base value
ant the difference Load comp - T current ref. This means that when the difference Load
comp - T current ref is 100% and Droop gain = 100%, the speed reference correction
signal is equal to Speed base value.
Filter time constant
Load compensation signal. It is typically equal to the master drive current, but it can
also be assigned to a programmable analog output. It is defined as a percentage of Idn.
Enabled
Droop function enabled.
Disabled
Droop function disabled.
It defines the speed reference correction range in which the droop function is active.
The value to be entered is based on the factor function.
(For more detail see Figure 6.7.1 Speed regulator).
170
TPD32-EV
EXAMPLE (PIPE MILL)
M1
M2
DRIVE
MASTER
Analog
input
DRIVE
SLAVE
Analog
output
LINE SPEED
Figure 6.7.4.2: Droop function example
Example setting:

----> Pourpose: Torque of motor 1 has to be equal to torque of motor 2
Drive Master Drive slave

Analog input 1= Speed ref 1

Analog input 1= Speed ref 1

Analog output 1= Tcurr ref

Analog input 2= Load comp

Enable droop= enables

Droop gain= 5%

Droop filter= 100ms

Droop limit=1000
Instruction manual
171
6.7.5 Inertia/Loss compensation

Ref 0 level
10 rpm
Speed
Inertia c filter
0 ms
Friction
0.001 N*m
Speed ref (d)
n
d
Aux spd fun sel
Torque const
low pass filter

Inertia
T To speed regulator
output
Field
0.005 Kg*m*m
Figure 6.7.5.1: Inertia/Loss compensation
SPEED REGULAT
Inertia/loss cp
[1014]
[1015]
[1013]
[1012]
Inertia [kg*m*m]
Friction [N*m]
Torque const [N*m/A]
Inertia c filter [ms]
min
max
1014
0.001
999.999
Value
Factory
American
S
1015
1013
1012
0.000
0.01
0
99.999
99.99
1000
S
S
0
No.
Inertia [kg*m*m]
Friction [N*m]
Factory
Standard
S
S
S
0
Standard
Configuration
Speed regulator feedforward term that allows to increase the dynamic response to a speed reference variation.
These parameters are identified from the Speed self tune function (START UP\Speed self tune and SPEED
REGULAT\Self tuning) but they can also be set from the user.
This function is mutually exclusive to the Speed up function, This selection must be done via the Aux spd fun
sel [1016] parameter. (SPEED REGULAT menu). See section 6.7.1, Speed regulator.
Inertia
Friction
Torque const
Inertia c filter
172
Total Inertia value at the motor shaft in Kg*m2 identified during the speed self tune
procedure. (1 Kg*m2 = 23.73 lb*ft2)
Friction value (or Loss compensation) in N*m identified during the speed self tune
procedure. (1 N*m = 0.738 lb*ft)
Total torque constant value internally computed that allows to obtain the N*m/A conversion when the motor operates within the specified speed range. This value is identified
during the speed self tune procedure (See Chapter "5.3.5.2 Self tuning of the speed
regulator" on page 123).
1st order low pass filter time constant. The filter reduces the noise value owed to the
operation of the speed differentiation in the Inertia compensation block.
TPD32-EV
6.8 CURRENT REGULATION (CURRENT REGULAT)
T current lim +
150 %
Current regulator
In use Tcur lim+
T current lim
Curr limit state
Arm resistence
2.55 Ohm
Arm inductance
34.33 mH
Current Limits
150 %
T current ref
In use Tcur lim-
Go to Motor
parameters
Modulator
DC
Motor
From Speed Regulator

T current lim -
To Droop Feedback
Current regulator includes

anti-windup logic
150 %
Feedback
(option)
Output voltage
Motor current
Current lim red
Torque
reduction
100 %
Torque reduct
Torque reduction
command
T
T curr lim type
torque
torque
T current lim +
T current lim +
T current lim +
T current lim -
speed
speed
T current lim T current lim -
T current lim -
T current lim +
-1% of Motor nom speed
+1% of Motor nom speed
Motoring & Generating Torque Limit
Torque Limit +/-
Figure 6.8.1: Torque current regulaton
CURRENT REGULAT
[41]
[199]
[1430]
[1431]
[1520]
[453]
[454]
[587]
[452]
[353]
T current ref [%]

Motor current [%]
Mot cur threshld [%]
Mot cur th delay [ms]
dI/dt delta time
Arm resistance [ohm]
Arm inductance [mH]
E int [V]
R&L Search
Zero torque
min
max
41
-200
+200
Value
Factory
American
-
199
1430
1431
453
454
587
452
-250
0
0
S
S
-80
0
250
200
65535
S
S
+80
1
100
1000
0.500
4.00
OFF
100
1000
0.500
4.00
OFF
**
-
Not active (1)
Not active (1)
No.
T current ref [%]

Motor current [%]
Arm inductance [mH]
E int [V]
R&L Search
Zero torque
353
OFF
ON
Active
Not active
Factory
Standard
-
Standard
Configuration
**
-

**
The user defines the full load current of the motor via the Full load curr (FLC) parameter in the CONFIGURATION menu. This is at the same time the output current of the inverter when T current ref = 10%.
Instruction manual
173
T current ref
Total current reference as a percentage of Full load curr. For this parameter the
TPD32-EV...4B... converters need a positive value. In this case the negative references
are processed and correspond to a zero reference.
Mot cur threshld
When the motor current exceeds the Full Load Current percentage threshold, this condition is signalled via a digital output.
Mot cur th delay
The Mot cur th delay parameter can be used to set the delay after which the current
within limit condition is signalled..
dI/dt delta time
This parameter is used to change the time (and thus the ramp gradient) within which
the value of T current ref (parameter 41) changes from 0 to 100%.
T current ref [%]
100
dI/dt delta time
t [ms]
Arm resistance
Motor armature resistance in . When self-tuning cycle is performed via R&L Search
this parameter is set to the obtained value. Therefore, if necessary, it can be changed.
Arm inductance
Motor armature inductance in mH. When self-tuning cycle is performed via R&L
Search this parameter is set to the obtained value. Therefore, if necessary, it can be changed.
Parameter
Arm inductance [mH]
E int

N.
454
Value max
sizes 185 ... 1050 A
50 mH
sizes > 1050 A

30 mH
Auxiliary signal used to determine whether the current regulator is correctly tuned. Its
value should be close to zero, but values dynamically changing between -40 and 40 are
accettable.
The drive must have at least 30% load for this reading to be considered as a valid performance measurement (see chapter 5.3.5.1.1 for more detail setting) .
R&L Search
Execution of self-tuning for the current regulator. The identified values for resistance and
inductance armature are set to the Arm resistance and Arm inductance parameters.
Zero torque
The parameter can be used to set the reference value for the armature current T current ref to zero so that the drive has no more torque.
Not active (H) T current ref not set to zero
Active (L)
T current ref set to zero. The drive has no torque.
174
TPD32-EV
6.9 FLUX REGULATION

Voltage reg P / I Base
Voltage P
30 %
Flux P base
3277
Flux I Base
40 %
Out vlt level
Flux Limits
3277
Voltage I
Energy saving
Flux current max

100 %
100 %
Flux
current
max
Voltage regulator
Max. out voltage
Output Voltage
Flux
current
min
500 V
Flux reg mode

Set field min
Output voltage
Disabled
Flux current min
Field econ delay

70 %
0
Speed-0 f weak
Enabled
Speed-0 f weak
Flux current max
Flux P / I base
Flux P
2 %
Flux I
1 %
Voltage P base
1.8 A/V
Voltage I base
13.0909 A/V*ms
Flux current min

Spd=0 Thr
Motor nom flux
Flux reference
Speed zero level

10 rpm
10 A
Flux controller
I field curve
Flux P / I
Enable flux reg
Nom flux curr
C1
10 A
Set flux/if
Ifield cnst40
0
40 %
D1
Flux current %
Reset flux / if
Ifield cnst70
0
70 %
Motor nom flux

10 A
Ifield cnst90
90 %
Figure 6.9.1: Motor control
FLUX REGULATION
[497]
[469]
[498]
[499]
[500]
[234]
[921]
[1522]
[374]
[280]
[411]
[888]
Enable flux reg

Flux reg mode
Enable flux weak
Speed-0 f weak
Flux reference [%]
Flux current %
Out vlt level
FC cur ref hyst
Nom flux curr [A]
Motor nom flux [A]
FC limit ramp
FC lmt ramp time [ms]
Flux \ if curve
[916]
[917]
[918]
[919]
[920]
Enable flux reg
ON / OFF
No.
497
I field cnst 40
I field cnst 70
I field cnst 90
Set flux / if
Reset flux / if
min
max
Value
Factory
American
Enabled
Factory
Standard
Enabled
Instruction manual
Standard
Configuration
*
175
Value
Factory
American
Const. current (0)
Factory
Standard
Const. current (0)
499
500
234
921
1522
916
917
918
919
920
374
280
411
0.0
0.0
0.00
1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0.5
0.00
-
100.0
100.0
100.0
100
100.0
100.0
100.0
1
1
80.0
P374
-
0.0
100.0
5
40.0
70.0
90.0
0
0
S
P374
Disabled
0.0
100.0
5
40.0
70.0
90.0
0
0
S
P374
Disabled
888
200
10000
800
800
No.
min
max
469
Enable flux weak
498
Speed-0 f weak
Flux reg mode
Constant current (0)

Voltage control (1)
External control (2)
Ext digital FC (3)
Ext wired FC (4)
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
Flux reference [%]

Flux current [%]
Out vlt level
FC cur ref hyst
I field cnst 40
I field cnst 70
I field cnst 90
Set flux / if
Reset flux / if
Nom flux curr [A]
Motor nom flux
FC limit ramp
Disabled (0)

Enabled (1)
Standard
Configuration
-
**
**
**/***
* This function can be set on a programmable digital input.

**
This parameter can be set on a programmable analog output.
*** This parameter can be set on a programmable analog input.
Enable flux reg

Enabling of the field converter

ON
Field converter Enabled
OFF Field converter Disabled. The field current is zero.
Flux reg mode

Operating mode of the field converter .

Constant current
The motor field works with a constant current. The current value
corresponds to the setting of the Motor nom flux parameter.

If any curve via the I field cnst parameters will be defined,
this value can be changed linearly, through Motor nom flux
(percentage of nominal flux Motor nom flux)

(see Flux /if curve paragraph 5.4.5)
Voltage control
The drive works with a regulation combined with torque and
constant power (armature and field regulation). Via the Max
out voltage parameter in the CONFIGURATION menu, is set
the max. armature voltage.

When Enable fbk bypass (PAR 458) is enabled (default) the
Voltage control selection is disabled.
External control
The field is supplied through an external excitation (rectifier/
field converter).
Ext digital FC
This function allows to use the drive in the FC configuration
to control the excitation circuit of large DC motors.
Ext wired FC
Setting required for field control by TPD32EV-FC with use of
standard digital and analog I/Os.
Note!

176
Ext wired FC work mode is the same as the one already available when using fiber optics.
Ext wired FC" control mode cannot be selected before you have correctly
TPD32-EV
configured the analog output and the digital inputs needed for its operation.
While the Ext wired FC" parameter in field control mode is selected, you
cannot change the analog output and the digital inputs needed for its operation.

Suggested I/O configuration

TPD32-EV
IPA 66
Select output 1
[95] Field cur ref
21
1
[6] T current ref 1
IPA 70
Select input 1
IPA 139
Digital Input 3
IPA 138
Digital Input 2
[90] Wired FC Act Brg [89] Wired FC Inv Seq

33
32
28
27

IPA 147
Digital Output 3
IPA 146
Digital Output 2
IPA 137
Digital Input 1
[88] Wired FC EN
31
26
[80] Wired FC EN
IPA 145
Digital Output 1
TPD32-EV-FC
Enable flux weak

Speed-0 f weak

Command for Voltage control.

ON
The field current corresponds to the value set via the Flux current min parameter.
OFF
The field current is regulated on the basis of the functioning
mode and on the drive working setpoint.
When this function is enabled, and the speed 0 threshold is reached, it will be produced
the minimum field current set via Flux current min.
Supposing that: Start = Low level and/or Fast stop = Low level
Set as field economy:
To avoid the overheating of motors which should not run or to avoid the presence of condensation in motor which work externally ( the field will be used as anti condensation heating).
ON
Enabled function
OFF
Disabled function
Flux reference

Flux/current reference : the 100% corresponds to the Motor nom flux parameter.
With the function Flux / if curve defined, this reference corresponds to the flux reference.
With the function Flux / if curve not defined (default conditions), this reference corresponds to the field current reference.
Flux curr (%)
Field current feedback, expressed as percentage of the Motor nom flux parameter.
Out vlt level

Percentage of the maximum output voltage according to the Max out voltage parameter.
This parameter allows the changing of the output voltage in Voltage control
(FLUX REGULATION\Flux reg mode).
Parameter of the Three-phase external exciter control function, see "A2.5 External
Three-phase Field Exciter Control" on page 490.
This parameter can be used to avoid continuous reversal of field current polarity when
the motor is running with no load or a limited load applied and thus with a Speed reg
output value that is almost null.
FC cur ref hyst

I field cnst 40
Current value at 40% of flux (see Flux /if curve, paragraph 5.3.7)
I field cnst 70
I field cnst 90
Set flux / if
Command for the setting of the flux curve according to the setting of I field cnst 40-7090 parameter. With the defined curve, the meaning of Flux current max/Flux reference indicates only the flux percentage according to the characteristic of this curve. As
a consequence, the value of the field current will be determined by this characteristic
Instruction manual
177
(see Flux /if curve paragraph 5.3.7).

Reset flux / if

Command for the reset of the flux curve set via command Set flux / if.
With this command the Motor nom flux parameter will be again linearly changed
through Flux current max/Flux reference. (see Flux /if curve paragraph 5.3.7)
Nom flux curr
Rated current IFN of the field regulator. In order to improve the behaviour of the regulation, the maximum field current can be reduced by setting the S14 dip-switches (on the
regulation board, see table 2.4.3.2).
Example
Armature:

Drive type:
Set the dip switches S14 to decrease the field current from the drive supplied, as below:
Switch ohms
500 VDC

Field:
230 VDC
102 ADC

0.8 ADC
TPD32-EV-500/...-140...
(Field current set to 14 Amps = default)
Nom flux curr
S14-1
S14-2
S14-3
S14-4
S14-5
S14-6
Equivalent
resistance
1.0 A
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
1668 Ohm
168.5 Ohm 333 Ohm 182 Ohm 36.4 Ohm 845 Ohm 1668 Ohm
GD6111g
Set Nom flux curr parameter to 0.8.
Motor nom flux
Rated field current IFN of the connected motor.
FC limit ramp
When using the TPD32EV-FC, you can add a ramp time at the current limits of the
armature to achieve best control of armature current during reversal of the bridge from
positive to negative (and vice versa).
If Enabled, after switching of the SCR bridge, the setting used for the armature current
limit is 1% of the current setting. This limit will gradually be set to 100% based on the
ramp time specified in the FC lmt ramp time parameter.
FC lmt ramp time
178
Ramp time value relative to change in armature current from 0 to 100%.
TPD32-EV
6.10 REG PARAMETERS

REG PARAMETERS
Percent values
Speed regulator
[87]
[88]
[459]
[460]
Speed P [%]
Speed I [%]
Speed P bypass [%]
Speed I bypass [%]
[91]
[92]
Flux P [%]
Flux I [%]
[493]
[494]
Voltage P [%]
Voltage I [%]
[93]
[94]
Speed P base [A/rpm]

Speed I base [A/rpmms]
[97]
[98]
Flux P base
Flux I base
[495]
[496]
Voltage P base [f%/V]

Voltage I base [f%/Vms]
Flux regulator
Voltage reg
Base values
Speed regulator
Flux regulator
Voltage reg
In use values
[99]
[100]
No.
Speed P in use [%]

Speed I in use [%]
min
max
Speed P [%]
Speed I [%]
Speed P bypass [%]
Speed I bypass [%]
Flux P [%]
Flux I [%]
Voltage P [%]
Voltage I [%]
87
0.00
100.00
88
459
460
91
92
493
494
93
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
000.1
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
S
94
0.001
Flux P base
Flux I base
Speed P in use [%]
Speed I in use [%]
97
98
495
496
99
100
1
1
0.0100
0.01
0.00
0.00
32767
32767
S
S
100.00
100.00
Speed P
Speed I
Value
Factory
American
10.00
Factory
Standard
10.00
1.00
10.00
1.00
2.00
1.00
30.00
40.00
0.3 x P93max
P93max
0.3
P94max
3277
3277
S
S
S
S
1.00
10.00
1.00
2.00
1.00
30.00
40.00
0.3 x P93max
P93max
0.3
P94max
3277
3277
S
S
S
S
Standard
Configuration
-
Proportional gain KP* of the speed regulator expressed as a percentage of Speed P base.
Integral gain KI* of the speed regulator expressed as a percentage of Speed I base.
Instruction manual
179
Speed P bypass
Speed I bypass
Fld reg P gain
Fld reg I gain
Voltage P
Voltage I
Speed P base
Speed I base
Flux P base
Flux I Base
Voltage P base
Voltage I base
Speed P in use
Speed I in use
Proportional gain KP* of the speed regulator expressed as a percentage of Speed P

base, when a feedback via encoder or tachometer is changed into a armature feedback
(Enable fbk bypas = Enabled).
Integral gain KI* of the speed regulator expressed as a percentage of Speed I base, when
a feedback via encoder or tachometer is changed into a armature feedback (Enable fbk
bypas = Enabled).
Proportional gain KP* of the field current regulator expressed as percentage of Flux P
base.
Integral gain KI* of the field current regulator expressed as a percentage of Flux I
Base.
Proportional gain KP* of the field voltage regulator expressed as a percentage of Voltage P base.
Integral gain KI* of the field voltage regulator expressed as a percentage of Voltage I
base.
Proportional gain KP0 of the speed regulator in A/rpm (base value)
Integral gain KI0 of the speed regulator in A/rpmms (base value)
Proportional gain KP0 of the field current regulator (base value)
Integral gain KI0 of the field current regulator in (base value)
Proportional gain KP0 of the field voltage regulator in A / Vs (base value)
Integral coefficient KI0 of the field voltage regulator in A / V ms (base value)
Display of the active proportional coefficient of the speed regulator as a percentage of
Speed P base
Display of the active derivative coefficient of the speed regulator as a percentage of
Speed I base
The maximum value for the regulator parameters is defined by the base values. The settings possible depend on
the size of the device.
The user can optimize the function of the regulator by changing the percentage values (values marked with *).
The resulting gains for the regulator are calculated as follows:

KP = KP0 KP* / 100 %
KI = KI0 KI* / 100 %
Example of the speed regulator:

Speed P base = 12 (= KP0)

Speed P = 70 % (= KP*)
Proportional gain KP = 12 70 % / 100 % = 8.4
The base values ... base are also the basis for setting the adaptive speed regulator.
When the adaptive speed regulator is enabled (Enable spd adap = Enabled), the Speed P and Speed I parameters
have no effect. They still retain their value and are effective again when the speed regulator adaption is disabled.
The Speed P in use and Speed I in use parameters indicate the current gains for the speed regulator. This also
applies when the speed regulator adaption is active.
180
TPD32-EV
6.11 CONFIGURATION
6.11.1 Operating mode selection
CONFIGURATION
[252]
Main commands
[253]
Control mode
Main commands
252
Value
Factory
American
Term.(0)
Control mode
253
Local (0)
No.
Terminals (0)
Digital (1)
Local (0)
Bus (1)
min
max
Factory
Standard
Term.(0)
Local (0)
Standard
Configuration
-
Main commands
These commands specify from where the Enable drive, Start and Fast stop commands
are to be actuated.
Terminals
The above commands are actuated exclusively via the

terminal strip.
Digital
Commands must be selected both via the terminal strip and

via the digital channel (keypad or RS485 or bus, depending
on the Control mode). If, for example, a stop of the drive is
initiated by removing the Start command on terminal 13, both
the voltage on terminal 13 and the command via the digital
channel are necessary to restart the drive. This also applies to a
removal of the Fast stop command. If the Stop is initiated via
the digital channel, the digital command is sufficient to restart
the drive.
The control method through terminal commands (Terminals) is selectable only when
terminals 12 (Enable) and 13 (Start) are not supplied.
Carrying out the passage of the commands from Digital to Terminals with those terminals
supplied, it will appear the message Change input, signalling the wrong action.
Control mode
Defines whether the digital channel is the keypad/RS485 or a bus system (Option).
Local
The digital channel is the keypad or the RS485 serial interface
Bus
The digital channel is a bus system (Option)
Instruction manual
181
The following tables show the operating modes possible.

Parameters
Main
commands
Control mode
Actuation of:
Enable drive
Start
Fast stop
Control mode
selection
Failure reset
Save parameters
Terminals
Local
Terminals
Keypad /RS485
Terminals of
Keypad
Keypad /RS485
Digital
Local
Terminals and
keypad/RS485
Keypad /RS485
Terminals of
Keypad
Keypad /RS485
Terminals
Bus
Terminals
Keypad* /
RS485*
or Bus
Terminals or
keypad*
or Bus
Keypad RS485
or Bus
Digital
Bus
Terminals and
Field Bus
Keypad* /
RS485*
or Bus
Terminals or
keypad*/
RS485*
or Bus
Keypad RS485
or Bus
GD6125g
Parameters
Write Access Restrictions
Main
commands
Control mode
Terminals
Keypad / RS485
Bus
Terminals
Local
Access to
everything assigned
to programmable
I/Os
Access to all
parameters not
assigned to
programmable I/Os
None
Digital
Local
Access to
everything assigned
to programmable
I/Os
Access to all
parameters not
assigned to
programmable I/Os
None
Terminals
Bus
Access to
everything assigned
to programmable
I/Os
- read all
- save parameters
-reset failures*
- select Control mode*
Access to all
parameters not
assigned to
programmable I/Os
Digital
Bus
Access to
everything assigned
to programmable
I/Os
- read all
- save parameters
-reset failures*
- select Control mode*
Access to all
parameters not
data channel is not
assigned to
programmable I/Os
GD6130g
* Access via the keypad or the RS485 serial interface is protected in thisconfiguration by Password level 1
Note!
182
Write access from Bus through data channel is not affected by Control Mode selection.
TPD32-EV
6.11.2 Speed base value, Full load current

CONFIGURATION
[45]
Speed base value [FF]
[179]
Full load curr [A]
[175]
Max out voltage [V]
min
max
45
16383
Value
Factory
American
1500
179
175
0.1
20
P465
999
P465
400
No.

Full load curr [A]
Max out voltage [V]
Factory
Standard
1500
P465
400
Standard
Configuration
-
Speed base value
The Speed base value is defined by the unit specified in the factor function. It is the
reference value for all speed values (reference values, adaptive speed regulation.) given
as a percentage, and corresponds to 100% of the speed. Changing this parameter is only
possible when the drive is disabled (Enable drive = Disabled). The Speed base value
does not define the maximum possible speed, which in some cases can be formed from
the addition of several reference values. This is defined with Speed max amount.
Full load curr
The Full load curr (FLC) parameter is defined in Amps. It corresponds to 100 % of
the current limit. The settings for the current limit and the overload function are based
on this active current value.
Max out voltage
Max armature voltage supplied from the drive. When it has been set as Flux reg mode
Voltage control, Max out voltage corresponds to the crossover point. This parameter
has an influence on the intervention threshold of the Overvoltage message.
6.11.3 Configuration of the OK relay (Terminals 35,36)

CONFIGURATION
[412]
Ok relay funct
Drive healthy (0)

Ready to Start (1)
Ok relay funct
No.
412
min
max
Value
Factory
American
0
Factory
Standard
0
Standard
Configuration
-
Ok relay func
This parameter defines the condition in which the relay contact will close.
Drive healthy
Note:
The contact will close when the drive is supplied with voltage
and when there are no failure alarms or warning set to stop
the motor. Standard warning will not open the relay.
The relay will open if multi-warning are active and IPA 9287 Warning Cfg parameter is set
to 1 Stop/No Start (In this case, the motor will be stopped too). In case of warning when
drive is disabled, OK Relay will be open only if IPA 9287 Warning Cfg parameter is set to
4 No Stop/Start or 1 Stop/No Start.
Ready to start
The contact closes when the following conditions are fulfilled:
Instruction manual
183
- The drive has a voltage supply

- There are no failure alarms present
- The drive is enabled with Enable drive.
6.11.4 To increase the resolution of current limits and references

CONFIGURATION
[1521]
En TCurr HiRes
En TCurr HiRes
Disable (0)
Enable (1)
No.
min
max
1521
Value
Factory
American
0
Factory
Standard
0
Standard
Configuration
-
When the En TCurr HiRes parameter is enabled the resolution of the parameters in the table can be increased:
Values with En TCurr HiRes disabled
Parameter
N.
UdM
Min
Max
Default US
Default EU
T current lim
[%]
200
150
100
R/W
T current lim +
[%]
200
150
100
R/W
T current lim -
[%]
200
150
100
R/W
In use Tcur lim+
10
[%]
200
---
---
In use Tcur lim-
11
[%]
200
---
---
T current ref 1
39
[%]
-200
200
R/W
T current ref 2
40
[%]
-200
200
R/W
Motor current
199
[%]
-200
200
---
---
F T curr
928
[%]
-200
200
---
---
Values with En TCurr HiRes enabled

Parameter
N.
UdM
Min
Max
Default US
Default EU
T current lim
[--]
2000
1500
1000
R/W
T current lim +
[--]
2000
1500
1000
R/W
T current lim -
[--]
2000
1500
1000
R/W
In use Tcur lim+
10
[--]
2000
---
---
In use Tcur lim-
11
[--]
2000
---
---
T current ref 1
39
[--]
-2000
2000
R/W
T current ref 2
40
[--]
-2000
2000
R/W
Motor current
199
[--]
-2000
2000
---
---
F T curr
928
[--]
-2000
2000
---
---
The maximum resolution for parameters relating to Full load current (IPA 179) is 1/1000.
If the function is disabled the maximum resolution remains at 1/100.
Important note:
184
Each time the En TCurr HiRes selection changes the parameters shown in the table are
automatically set to their default value.
TPD32-EV
6.11.5 Configuration of the speed feedback circuit

CONFIGURATION
Speed fbk
[162]
[414]
[457]
[458]
[456]
[455]
[562]
[563]
[416]
[169]
[649]
[652]
[911]
min
max
162
6553
Value
Factory
American
1500
414
Encoder 1 state
648
Enable fbk contr
457
Enabled
(1)
Enabled
(1)
Enable fbk bypas
458
Flux weak speed [%]

Speed fbk error [%]
Tacho scale
Speed offset
Encoder 1 pulses
Encoder 2 pulses
Refresh enc 1
456
455
562
563
416
169
649
0
0
0.90
-20.00
600
150
0
100
100
3.00
+20.00
9999
9999
1
100
22
1.00
0.00
1024
1000
Disabled (0)
100
22
1.00
0.00
1024
1000
Disabled (0)
Encoder 2 state
651
Refresh enc 2
652
Disabled (0)
Disabled (0)
Enable ind store
911
Disabled (0)
Disabled (0)
Ind store ctrl

Index storing
912
913
0
0
65535
+232-1
0
0
0
0
No.
Motor max speed [rpm]

Speed fbk sel
Encoder 1 (0)
Encoder 2 (1)
Tacho (2)
Armature (3)
Encoder Fault (0)

Encoder ok (1)
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
Encoder Fault (0)

Encoder ok (1)
Note!

Speed fbk sel
Enable fbk contr
Enable fbk bypas
Flux weak speed [%]
Speed fbk error [%]
Tacho scale
Speed offset
Encoder 1 pulses
Encoder 2 pulses
Refresh enc 1
Refresh enc 2
Enable ind store
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
Factory
Standard
1500
1
Standard
Configuration
-
The encoder or the tachometer are necessary for the regulation mode Flux reg mode Voltage
control and External control. The features of the electrical data of the encoder and the
tachometer are defined in sections 2.7.2, Encoder / Tachometer, and 2.4.5, Accuracy.
Instruction manual
185
CEMF
Motor
Output voltage
Speed fbk sel
Armature
Max. out voltage
500 V
Tach generator
Enable fbk bypass

Disabled
Armature
Fbk Bypass
Tacho scale
1
Tacho
Speed fbk sel

Tacho
Speed offset
0
XE1 connector
Encoder 1 Sinusoidal
A+
A-
Encoder 1 state
B+
Enc 1 speed
B-
C+
C-
7
9
0V
Speed
Actual spd (d)
Speed fbk sel

Encoder 1
Encoder 1 pulses
1024
Refresh enc 1
Disabled
5V
XE2 connector
A+
A-
B+
B-
C+
C-
0V
Encoder 2 state
PD output PID
Enable ind store

Disabled
Encoder 1 Digital
Index Storing
Speed fbk sel
Encoder 2
Encoder 2 pulses
1024
Refresh enc 2
Disabled
24
Figure 6.11.5.1: Speed feedback
Motor max speed
Max motor speed. It is used to convert tach and armature feedback values in rpm. In case
of speed feedback from tachogenerator it is used to convert the tach voltage in an rpm
value. In case of armature voltage feedback Max out voltage parameter is considered
equivalent to Motor max speed.
Speed fbk sel

Select which feedback has to be used.

Encoder 1
The sinusoidal encoder connected th the XE1 connector is used.
Encoder 2
The digital encoder connected to the XE2 connector is used
(standard).
Tacho
The analog tachogenerator connected to the terminals + and - is used.
Armature
The internal measurement of the armature voltage is used. No
external connection is required.

Enable fbk contr

Enable of the control for the speed feedback.

Enabled
Enabled control
Disabled
Disabled control
This function controls the speed feedback, where a comparison between the armature
voltage and the speed value read by the encoder or by the tachometer is made. When an
excursion higher of the value set via Speed fbk error is signaled, the failure message
Speed fbk loss appears. This function is automatically disabled when the armature
feedback has been selected. (Speed fbk sel = Armature).
Enable fbk bypas
Enable of the automatic change into an armature feedback when the failure message
Speed fbk loss is caused by a lack of the encoder or tachometer feedback.
Enabled
Enabled automatic change
Disabled
Disabled automatic change
After an automatic change into an armature feedback, the speed regulator works with the
Speed P bypass and Speed I bypass parameters of the REG PARAMETERS/Percent
values/Speed regulator menu. The failure message Speed fbk loss with an enable
must be configured so that it is set as Activity = Warning.

Possible working only with constant field current.
186
TPD32-EV
Flux weak speed
Speed value as a percentage of Motor max speed, when the Voltage control phase starts.
The Flux weak speed parameter, when the speed feedback control is enabled (Enable
fbk contr = Enabled), is used to underline the fact that during the Voltage control phase
the armature voltage and the feedback signal are not proportional. If the drive works
with a constant torque on the whole regulation range (Flux reg mode = Constant Current), it is necessary to insert the factory set 100% value.
Speed fbk error
Max. allowed error expressed as a percentage of the max. output voltage (Max out
voltage). By means of Max out Voltage, Flux weak speed and Motor nominal speed a
relation between motor speed and armature voltage is obtained. If a difference higher
than Speed fbk error occurs a Speed fbk loss failure occours.
Tacho scale
Fine scaling of the speed feedback using a tachometer analog generator (Speed fbk sel
= Tacho). It is a multiplier of the read tach voltage.
For example:
Analog tach = 60V/1000 rpm, motor top running speed 3000 rpm.
Maximum tach volts = (60V/1000 rpm*3000rpm)= 180 VDC.
- Set dip-switch S4 for 181.6V (see table 4.4.3)
- Set the tacho scale parameter = 181.6V / 180V = 1.01
- Fine adjust the value of Tacho scale if the 180 VDC tach voltage is not perfectly reached.
Speed offset
Offset scaling of the feedback circuit.
Encoder 1 pulses
Number of pulses per revolution of the sinusoidal encoder connected to the XE1 connector.
Encoder 2 pulses
Number of pulses per revolution of the digital encoder connected to the XE2 connector.
The Encoder 2 pulses and Motor max speed shall be inside the allowed area shown in
figure 6.11.5.2
6000
Par 162 = 6000 rpm (max.)
Par 169 = 100 ppr (min.)
Motor max speed [PAR 162]
5000
4000
Allowed Area
3000
2000
Par 162 = 1465 rpm

Par 169 = 100 ppr (min.)
1500
1000
Par 162 = 300 rpm

Par 169 = 500 ppr
500
When Par 175

= 700V or greater,
Par 162 min.
= 500 rpm
Par 162 = 300 rpm

Par 169 = 976 ppr
0
0
100
200
400
500
600
800
Encoder 2 pulses [PAR 169]
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
Par 162 = 8 rpm

Par 169 = 977 ppr
Figure 6.11.5.2: Allowed area for Encoder 2 pulses and Motor max speed
Refresh enc 1

Enable the monitoring of the encoder 1(connector XE1) connection status, in order to
detect a speed feedback loss alarm.
When an alarm is detect, the keypad will shown Speed fbk loss. Encoder 1 state
provides the indication of encoder 1 connection status. The parameter can be programmed
on a digital output. This function is activate setting Enable fbk contr = Enabled.
Instruction manual
187
Refresh enc 2

Enable the monitoring of the encoder 2 (connector XE2) connection status, in order to
detect a speed feedback loss alarm.
When an alarm is detect, the keypad will shown Speed fbk loss. Encoder 2 state
provides the indication of encoder 2 connection status. The parameter can be programmed
on a digital output. This function is activate setting Enable fbk contr = Enabled.
Encoder 1 state
Provides the indication of the encoder 1 (connector XE1) connection status. The parameter can be programmed on a digital output.
Encoder 2 state
Provides the indication of the encoder 2 (connector XE2) connection status. The parameter can be programmed on a digital output.
The Tacho scale and Speed offset parameters are used for a fine scaling of the speed feedback
circuit. When the factory set parameters are loaded (Load default) these two parameters do
not undergo any change, so that a new scaling is not necessary!
Following parameters allows to determine the machine absolute zero and perform a positioning control by using the APC300 option card:
Note!
Enable ind store

This parameter enables the reading of the encoder index and qualifying signal that could
be used in a system for implementation of position control.
Enabled

This setting enables the reading of the encoder index.
Disabled

This setting disables the reading of the encoder index
Ind store ctrl
Control register for the encoder index and qualifying signal (*).
Index storing
Status register and function data.
(*) Index qualifier signal is not supported by regulation card R-TPD3G revision f (product configuration D1)
and lower
Ind store ctrl parameter [92]

No. bit
Name
0-1
2
POLNLT
3
4-5
7
8-9
188
Description
Not used
It indicates the encoder index edge polarity:
0 = rising edge
1 = falling edgec
Not used
ENNQUAL It indicates the qualifier level that activates the encoder index reading:
0 = Switched off
1 = Switched off
2 = Through signal = 0
3 = Through signal = 1
Target Enc It points out for which encoder the values of this parameter are reported:
Num
0 = operations requested on the Encoder 1
1 = operations requested on the Encoder 2
Not used
ENNLT
Control function of the encoder index reading:
0 = Switched off, function disabled
1 = Once, enables the reading of the first index signal edge only
2 = Continuous, enables the reading of the index signal
TPD32-EV
Access
(Read/Write)
R/W
Default
R/W
R/W
Index storing parameter [13]

No. bit
0
2-3
16-31
Name
Description
Source Enc It indicates to which encoder the values in this register are referred to:
Num
0 = register data are referred to the Encoder 1
1 = register data are referred to the Encoder 2
MP_IN
Actual Qualifier level value:
0 = qualifier input level is low
1 = qualifier input level is high
STATNLT Status of the acquisition function:
0 = Switched off
1 = Once, storing is not executed yet
2 = Once, storing is already executed
3 = Continuous
CNTNLT Position counter value corresponding to the index. 0 = Switched off
Value is only valid when STANLT is equal to 2 or 3
Instruction manual
Access
(Read/Write)
R
Default
189
6.11.6 Standard / American selection, Software Version

CONFIGURATION
Drive type
[465]
[201]
[464]
[331]
Drive size [A]

2B + E
Size selection
Software version
Drive size [A]

2B + E
465
Value
Factory
American
S
201
Size selection
464
Software version
Drive type
331
300
10
11
ON (Off) (0)
OFF (On) (1)
Standard (0)
American (1)
TPD32-EV-...-2B
TPD32-EV-...-4B
No.
min
max
Factory
Standard
S
Standard
Configuration
-
Drive size
Display of the converter armature current in ampere (it is codified by the SW15 Switch
placed on the R-TPD32-EV regulation card). The stated value depends on the setting
of the Size selection parameter.
2B + E
Selection of the 2B + external excitation configuration. Only for 2B converters. The

function allows the drive to work with an external 4 quadrant field controller. When
the parameter is On the Ramp / Speed / T current references and Speed measurement
have the same behaviour of the 4B drive.
Size selection
With the Standard selection the converter produces rated current in a continuative
way in the preset ambient conditions without overload (for overload see 6.14.5). With
America selection the rated current is defined considering an overload of 1.5 times for
60 seconds. This causes a reduction of the converter rated current (continuative current)
for the same type of drive. See section 4.4, R-TPD32-EV Regulation card.

Standard
The converter produces rated current in a continuative way.
It is stated as Drive size. No overload functions are set.

American
The rated current (produced continuously) will be reduced to
the value stated in the mentioned table and indicated in Full
load current and Drive size parameters.

Automatically, the overload function (FUNCTION\Overload
control), is set to the following:
Enable overload = ON
Overload mode = I2t motor
Overload time = 60s
Full load current= American
Pause time = 540s

T current lim = 150%
Overload current = 150%
T current lim+ = 150%
Base current = 100%
T current lim - = 150%
If the size Americanis selected, the parameter Overcurrent thr [584] will be set at 160%
Note!
If the converter is reconfigured as Standard, these parameters and the continuous current
limit take the values corresponding to the previous configuration (overload disabled) and the
parameter Overcurrent thr [584] returns to 110%.
Software version
Display of the software version number active in the converter.
Drive type
Display of the drive type: 2B or 4B.
190
TPD32-EV
6.11.7 Dimension factor, Face value fator

CONFIGURATION
Dimension fact
[50]
Dim factor num
[51]
Dim factor den
[52]
Dim factor text
[54]
Face value num
[53]
Face value den
Face value fact
The factor function consists of two factors - the dimension factor and the face value factor. Both factors are defined as fractions. The dimension factor is used to specify the drive speed in a dimension related to the machine
concerned, e.g. kg/h or m/min. The face value factor is used to increase the resolution.
See the calculation examples given beow.
Dim factor num

Dim factor den
Dim factor text
Face value num
Face value den
No.
min
max
50
65535
51
52
54
53
+231 -1
1
1
+32767
+32767
Value
Factory
American
1
Factory
Standard
1
1
rpm
1
1
1
rpm
1
1
Standard
Configuration
-
Dim factor num
Numerator of the dimension factor
Dim factor den
Denominator of the dimension factor
Dim factor text
Unit of the dimension factor (5 characters). This text is shown in the keypad display
for reference value entry. Possible characters: /%&+,-.0...9:<=>?A...Z[]a...z
Face value num
Numerator of the face value factor
Face value den
Denominator of the face value factor
The reference value given multiplied with the dimension factor and the face value factor defines the motor speed in rpm
Dimension factor
User
defined variable
Face value factor
Dim factor num
Face value num

1
Control variable
X
Dim factor den
Face value den

1
Dim factor text

rpm
Figure 6.11.7.1: Calculation using dimension and face value factors
Instruction manual
191
Example 1 of the calculation of the dimension factor

The drive speed is given in m/s. The conversion ratio is 0.01 m per revolution of the motor (Note: face value
factor = 1).
The dimension factor is calculated from
Dimension factor =
output (rpm)
input (here: m/s)
for01
0.01 m corresponds to 1 revolution of the motor shaft

0.01 m/min corresponds to 1/min
0.01 m/60s corresponds to 1/min
Dimension factor =
60 s
min
0.01 m
6000
min
for02
When calculating the dimension factor, units should not be shortened (1 min is not shortened as 60 s)
Dim factor num
Dim factor den
Dim factor text
6000
1
m/s
Example 2 of the calculation of the dimension factor

The reference values for a bottling plant are given in bottles per minute. One revolution of the drive corresponds
to the filling of 0.75 bottles. This corresponds to a dimension factor of 4/3. The speed limitation and the ramp
function are also given in bottles per minute
output (rpm)
Dimension factor =
input (here: bottles / min)
for03
3/4 of a bottle corresponds to 1 revolution of the motor shaft
1
4 min
4
1
min
Dimension factor =
=
min 3 bottles
3
min
bottles
for04
Units should not be shortened when calculating the dimension factor.

Dim factor num 4
Dim factor den
3
Dim factor text
F/min (bottles per minute)
Example of the face value factor

Normally the reference value has a resolution of 1 rpm. In order to exploit the available resolution, the face
value factor is used.
The motor speed range required is, for example, 0...1500 rpm. A more accurate resolution (i.e. 1/4 revolution)
can be obtained by setting hte face value factor to 1/4.
The value 4 000 is entered, for example, in order to select 1000 rpm This is then multiplied with the face value
factor to give the value 1000 rpm.
Face value num
1
Face value den 4
192
TPD32-EV
6.11.8 Programmable alarms

CONFIGURATION
Prog alarms
Failure supply
[194]
[195]
FS Latch
FS Ok relay open
[481]
[357]
[358]
[470]
[359]
Undervolt thr [V]

UV Latch
UV Ok relay open
UV Hold off time [ms]
UV Restart time [ms]
[203]
[361]
[362]
[482]
[483]
OV Activity
OV Latch
OV Ok relay open
OV Hold off time [ms]
OV Restart time [ms]
[1426]
[1422]
[1421]
[1423]
[1424]
[1425]
Overspeed thr [rpm]

OS Activity
OS Latch
OS Ok relay open
OS Hold off time [ms]
OS Restart time [ms]
[368]
[370]
HS Activity
HS Ok relay open
[365]
[367]
OM Activity
OM Ok relay open
[354]
[355]
[356]
[502]
[501]
EF Activity
EF Latch
EF Ok relay open
EF Hold off time [ms]
EF Restart time [ms]
[1296]
[1297]
BF Activity
BF Ok relay open
[1419]
[1442]
[1420]
Motor I2t Activity

Motor I2t Latch
Motor I2t Ok relay open
[1441]
Drive I2t Ok relay open
[584]
[212]
[363]
[364]
Overcurrent thr [%]

OC Activity
OC Latch
OC Ok relay open
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Overspeed
Heatsink
Overtemp motor
External fault
Brake fault
Motor I2t ovrld
Drive I2t ovrld

Overcurrent
Instruction manual
193
[586]
[585]
OC Hold off time [ms]

OC Restart time [ms]
[473]
[471]
[472]
[475]
[474]
FL Activity
FL Latch
FL Ok relay open
FL Hold off time [ms]
FL Restart time [ms]
[1437]
[1432]
[1433]
[1434]
[1435]
[1436]
Delta freq thres [%]

DF Activity
DF Latch
DF Ok relay open
DF Hold off time [ms]
DF Restart time [ms]
[8601]
Threshold
[478]
[477]
[480]
SL Activity
SL Ok relay open
SL Hold off time [ms]
[639]
[640]
O2 Activity
O2 Ok relay open
[634]
[633]
[635]
[636]
[637]
BF Activity
BF Latch
BF Ok relay open
BF Hold off time [ms]
BF Restart time [ms]
[1527]
[1524]
[1525]
[1528]
Open test act

SCR test enable
SCR diag status
Open SCR thr [%]
[386]
[387]
HO Activity
HO Ok relay open
[728]
[729]
[730]
ES Activity
ES Latch
ES Ok relay open
Field loss
Delta frequency
SSC error
Speed fbk loss
Opt2 failure
Bus loss
SCR test
Hw opt1 failure
Enable seq err
The converters of the TPD32-EV series contain extensive monitoring functions. The effect of possible alarms
on the behaviour of the drive are defined in the PROG ALARMS submenu:
- Saving of alarm status
- How the drive is to react to the alarm
- Indication via the relay between terminal 35 and 36 (central alarm). The switch conditions for the relay can
be defined with the Ok relay func parameter in the CONFIGURATION menu.
- Automatic restart
- Failure reset
For some alarms, the behaviour of the drive can be configured separately. All alarms can also be assigned to a
freely programmable digital output.
194
TPD32-EV
Factory
Alarm
Failure Supply
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Overspeed
Heatsink
Overtemp motor
External fault
Brake fault
Motor I2t ovrld
Drive I2t ovrld
Overcurrent
Field loss
Delta frequency
SSC error
Speed fbk loss
Opt 2 failure
Bus loss
SCR test
Hw Opt 1 failure
Enable seq err
N.
Activity
Latch
Open
Hold off
Restart
Disable drive
Disable drive
Ignore
Ignore
Disable drive
Disable drive
Disable drive
Disable drive
Disable drive
Disable drive
Ignore
Disable drive
Ignore
Disable drive
Disable drive
Disable drive
Disable drive
Disable drive
Disable drive
Disable drive
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON **
ON **
ON
ON **
ON
ON **
ON
ON
ON
ON **
ON **
ON
ON
ON
ON **
ON
OK relay
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
time [ms]
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
0
-
time [ms]
1000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
Standard
Dig. Outp. 7*
Dig. Outp. 6*
*
*
*
Dig. Outp. 8*
*
*
*
*
*
GD6160g
* This function can be assigned to one of the programmable digital outputs. ** Setting can not be changed.
If the serial interface or a bus system is used, the alarms can be evaluated via the Malfunction Code parameter.
The parameters required to configure the alarm are shown in Table in Section 10 of the manual.
Activity

Alarm
Failure Supply
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Overspeed
Heatsink
Overtemp motor
External fault
Brake fault
Motor I2t ovrld
Drive I2t ovrld
Overcurrent
Field loss
Delta frequency
SSC error
Speed fbk loss
Warning
The alarm does not cause reaction of the drive. A warning

message can be output via a digital output. When the drive is
disabled, it will not restart until the failure has been canceled.
Disable drive
The alarm causes the immediate disabling of the converter. The
motor runs to an uncontrolled stop.
Quick stop
When the alarm occurs, the drive stops according to the ramp set in
the RAMP / QUICK STOP menu. The converter is then disabled.
Normal stop
When the alarm occurs, the drive stops according to the ramp
set. The converter is then disabled.
Curr lim stop
When the alarm occurs, the converter brakes with the maximum
possible current. The converter is then disabled when stopped.
Ignore
No reaction is present. A warning message can be output via a
digital output.
Not all alarms can initiate a controlled stop of the drive. The possibility of setting the
particular Activity for individual alarms is described in the table below.
Ignore
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
Warning
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Disable drive
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Quick stop
X
X
X
X
X
-
Instruction manual
Normal stop
X
X
X
X
X
-
Curr lim stop

X
X
X
X
X
-
195
Alarm
Opt 2 failure
Bus loss
SCR test
Hw Opt 1 failure
Enable seq err
Ignore
X
X
X
Warning
X
X
X
-
Disable drive
X
X
X
X
X
Quick stop
X
X
X
-
Normal stop
X
X
X
-
Curr lim stop

X
X
X
GD6165g
Latch
ON
OFF
Ok relay open
ON
OFF
Hold off time
Delay time between the alarm condition detection and the alarm activation. If an alarm
condition occurs the alarm stay OFF for the Hold off time. When this time is elapsed
and the alarm is still present, the alarm activates.
Restart time
Note!
The alarm is stored. The programmed actions (e.g. opening

the OK relay) are enabled. This status is kept latched even if
the fault condition is restored. A Reset command is required
before a restart.
In case of alarm, the drive is disabled and the programmed
functions are enabled. The alarm is not latched. When the
failure is removed, the alarm is automatically reset and the
device tries restarting.
An alarm causes the opening of the potential isolated contact
between terminals 35 and 36.
The alarm does not cause the opening of the potential free
contact of the OK relay.
If Latch=Off and the alarm condition persists even after the time defined via Restart
time, the alarm is stored and no restart is possible (Latch=OFF).
In Terminal mode to reset the fault the terminals enable and start must be at zero voltage. The
occurrence of a failure is indicated in the display of the keypad. If Latch=ON is selected,
a Reset command is necessary. This can be carried out, for example, by pressing the CANC
key on the keypad. If a second error occurs before the first one was reset, the text Multiple
failures will appear in the display. In this case, a reset is only possible via Failure reset
parameter in the SPEC FUNCTIONS menu. The reset can be obtained by pressing the E
key with a disabled inverter.
Failure supply

Failure on the supply voltage.

It indicates a failure on the internal voltage of the regulation circuit. The message Failure
supply occurs if an enabled converter has no voltage on the U2 and V2 terminals. If
it is of a short duration and restored, a possible digital output prepared for the message
is set to a Low condition. A normal reset can be carried out.
Undervoltage

AC Input undervoltage.
In case of an AC Input voltage when the regulation is enabled (Enable drive = Enabled)
the message Undervoltage appears. The converter is immediately disabled. To this
purpose an intervention threshold is preset via the Undervolt thr parameter.
If the alarm is not saved (Latch=OFF), the drive tries to start automatically after the
voltage has been restored. Using the ramp, when the voltage is restored, if the function
Auto capture is active, the ramp output is set to the value corresponding to the current
motor speed. This avoids speed jumps.
Overvoltage

Overspeed
196
Armature overvoltage. Ther message appears when the armature voltage exceeds the
value set via Max out voltage by 20%.
If the alarm is not saved (Latch = OFF), the drive will attempt to restart automatically
after the voltage has been restored.
Using the ramp, when the voltage is restored, if the function Auto capture is active, the
ramp output is set to the value corresponding to the current motor speed. This avoids
speed jumps.
This alarm condition is signalled if the speed limit set in the Overspeed thr parameter
is exceeded.
TPD32-EV
Heatsink

Heatsink temperature of the converter is too high

This alarm always initiates the disconnection of the device 10 seconds after the failure
has been detected (Latch=ON).
An external controller (PLC,etc.) can read the alarm via programmable output, RS485
or Bus and it can execute a controlled stop within a 10 second delay.
Overtemp motor
Motor temperature (connection for thermistor:terminals 78 and 79).
External Fault
External fault (no voltage on terminal 15)
Brake fault
(See chapter 6.14.8) The converter was unable to complete the transient phase between
the start command and the release mechanical brake command within the time limit set
in the Torque Delay parameter.
The mechanical brake feedback (Brake fbk) was not received within the time allowed.
The mechanical brake feedback (Brake fbk) remains for 1 second after the close brake
command has been sent.

Motor I2t ovrld
If the Motor I2t accumulator parameter reaches 100% the relative alarm is signalled.
Drive I2t ovrld
If the Drive I2t accumulator parameter reaches 100% the relative alarm is signalled.
Overcurrent
Overcurrent (short-circuit / earth fault). The intervention point is determined by the

Overcurrent thr parameter. This can also be used as indication of threshold overpass
for system applications.
Field loss
Too low field current. The intervention point corresponds to 50% of the min. field current set with the Flux current min parameter. This alarm message is active with the
enabled converter (Enable drive=Enabled).
Delta frequency
This alarm condition is active if the frequency of the three-phase power supply to the
drive exceeds the positive or negative percentage threshold set via the Delta freq thres
parameter. The power supply frequency (50 or 60 Hz) and thus the relative thresholds are
automatically calculated by the drive as soon as the three-phase power supply is available.
SSC error

Functionality available starting from Firmware Standard=10.08A (TPD32-EV).

Threshold parameter: thru this parameter is possible to set the number of consecutive
wrong data received through the fiber optical cable without generating an SSC Error.
The alarm cause reaction of the drive. A warning message can be output via a digital
output. When the drive is disabled, it will not restart until the failure has been cancelled.

Speed fbk loss

No speed feedback available.

When Activity=Warning in the CONFIGURATION /Speed fbk menu is chosen, the
Enable fbk bypass parameter has to be set as Enabled, otherwise the drive reaches
an uncontrolled speed which can not be stopped.
Opt2 failure
Failure on the card Option 2 (optional).
Bus loss
Failure in the connection on the field bus (only in connection with an option card of
bus interface).
Instruction manual
197
SCR test
Note!
SCR test. This function detects the status of the drives SCR modules, if working correctly, in short circuit and/or open.
The SCR test cannot be used for the TPD32-EV-FC and TPD32-EV series in 12-pulse configuration.
Open test act
Ignore (0)
Warning (1)
Disable drive (2)
SCR test enable
OFF (0)
Open SCR test (1)
Test SCR (2)
Open/Short test (3)
SCR diag status
No SCR Fault
Short <SCR>
Open W <SCR>
Open F <SCR>
Open SCRX thr [%]
Open test act
min
max
1527
Value
Factory
American
Disable drive
1524
Off
Off
No SCR Fault
No SCR Fault
50
50
No.
1525
1528
100
Factory
Standard
Disable drive
Standard
Configuration
-
Activity setting for Open SCR test (for Shorted SCR =

"Disable drive". Not configurable).

SCR test enable
Enable SCR test with selection of test type to be run.
OFF
Open SCR test
Once enabled, this selection (to detect open SCRs) always remains enabled if drive control is on
(Enabled + Start),
Short SCR Test
This selection (to detect SCRs in short
circuit) is on at the first enabling of the drive (Enabled + Start
with generation of pulses to SCR modules).

Note: If IPA 8818 = Stop mode = OFF, the SCR Short test is
run without the Start command on). When the SCR Short test
is run, 5s of delay is included between execution of the Start
command and enabling of the control.
Open/Short test
This selection simultaneously detects
SCRs in short circuit and/or open. When enabled (Enable +
Start), any SCRs in short are detected (requires 5s), after which
any open SCRs are detected.

SCR diag status
Displays status of modules after SCR test is run.
No SCR Fault: No SCR in fault status.
Short <SCR>: SCR in short circuit detected. The number of
the SCR module in short circuit is shown in <>. (For the
2B drive, the SCR in short circuit is shown. For the 4B drive,
the pair of modules making up part of the shorted SCR are
shown.) Note: Short <5/15>; SCR no.5 or no.15 in short circuit
in figure 3.
Open W <SCR>: Warning that an SCR is open.
Open F <SCR>: SCR open alarm. Note: Open F <4>: SCR
no. 4 open in figure 2.
198
TPD32-EV
Figure 1: SCR test
Figure 2: Example. Open SCR (white) displayed with GF_eXpress Tool
Figure 3: Example. SCR shorted (red) displayed with GF_eXpress Tool
Open SCR thr

Note!

Setting of current limit for detection of open SCR. .

If the current flowing through the SCR module is below 50% (factory setting) of the average
level measured in the period, the message SCR open: Open F <> is shown.
Higher settings increase the sensitivity of measurement. (Example: a setting of 90% is very
sensitive but could generate false detections of open SCRs.)
1527 Open test act Setting

Open test act = Disable Drive
Open test act = Ignore
Open test act = Warning
Drive Status
1525 SCR diag status

Open W <SCR> @ 50% of Internal Integer value
DISABLED
Open F <SCR> @ 100% of Internal Integer value
Open SCR
Open SCR
IGNORE
WARNING
Displayed on TPD32-EV Keypad
Note - Internal integrator

At each line frequency period, the software compares the current that flows when the SCRs are
active to the average current in the period, increasing or decreasing the value of the integrator
if the current flowing through the SCR is below or above, respectively, that of the period based
on the set limit.

Example:
- Limit at 50% (default) - IPA 1528 Open SCR thr
The current flowing through the SCR is 30% of the average in the period --> The integrator is
increased by 20 counts.
Instruction manual
199
The current flowing through the SCR is 60% of the average in the period --> The integrator is
decreased by 10 counts (if greater than 0).
Integrator default limit generating Warning signal = 1024 counts

Integrator default limit generating Fault signal = 2048 counts
Hw opt1 failure
Failure on the card Option 1 (optional).
Enable seq err
Wrong drive enabling sequence. The correct sequence is as follows:
Case a:

Main commands = Terminal

1 -
Regulation board power-up: Enable terminal (term.12) in any state.
2 -
Drive initialization. Max duration time: 5 s.
3 -
End of drive initialization. The Enable drive terminal (12) is L (0V).
4 -
Delay time during which the Enable drive terminal must be L (0V): 1s.
5 -
Drive enabling. Terminal 12 is H (+24V).
If at the end of the drive initialization (step 3) or during the 1s delay time the Enable
drive terminal (term. 12) is High (+24V) a fault is detected
Reg. board power up
Drive init.
H
Enable drive terminal (12)
L
min 1 s
t [s]
Figure 6.11.8.1 Drive enabling sequence: Main command = Terminals
Case b: Main command = Digital

1 - Regulation board power-up: Enable terminal (term.12) in any state.
2 - Drive initialization. Max duration time: 5 s.
3 - End of drive initialization.
4 - Delay time during which the Enable drive terminal must be L (0V) and Enable
drive [314] = Disable ( 0 ): 1s. During this time the Process data channels setup
initialization occurs.
5 - Drive enabling. Terminal 12 is H (+24V) and Enable drive [314] = Enable ( 1 ).
If at the end of the drive initialization (step 3) or during the 1s delay time the Enable
drive terminal (term. 12) is High (+24V) and Enable drive [314] = Disable ( 0 ) a fault
is detected.
200
TPD32-EV
Reg. board power up
Drive init.
Proc.data ch. init.
Enable drive
[314] AND
Enable drive terminal (12)
1
0
min 1 s
t [s]
Figure 6.11.8.2 Drive enable sequence: Main command = Digital
In case of fault the reset sequence is as follows:

Case a:

Latch = ON
1 - Set Enable drive terminal (term. 12) = L (0V)
2 - Set Enable drive [314] = Disable ( 0 )
3 - If Main commands = Terminals set Start/Stop terminal (term. 13) = L (0V)
4 - Failure reset command. The failure is reset and the drive can work normally.
Case b:

Latch = OFF
1 - Set Enable drive terminal (term. 12) = L (0V) and Enable drive [314] = Disable
(0) for at least 30 ms. The failure is automatically reset.
Note: In case of Enable seq err alarm, the behaviour of the Ok Relay function can be
affected only if OK relay funct = Drive Healty. If OK relay funct = Ready
to start, the contact will be open anyway.
Instruction manual
201
6.11.9 Address for bus operation

CONFIGURATION
Set serial comm
[319]
Device address
[408]
Ser answer delay
[323]
Ser protocol sel
[326]
Ser baudrate sel
The configuration modes relating to the serial communication are defined in the submenu Set serial comm.
Device address
Ser answer delay
Ser protocol sel
319
127
Value
Factory
American
0
408
900
323
SLINK3 (0)
SLINK3 (0)
Ser baudrate sel
326
9600 (1)
9600 (1)
SLINK3* (0)
MODBUS RTU (1)
JBUS (2)
19200 (0)
9600 (1)
4800 (2)
2400 (3)
1200 (4)
No.
min
max
Factory
Standard
0
Standard
Configuration
-
* For SLINK3 the baud rate is steady at 9600.
Note!
The setting of Ser protocol sel and Ser baudrate sel become active during the Drive start up:
they must therefore be stored and the drive has to be switched off. See the specific manual
for the numbering system of the registers and coils MODBUS RTU and JBUS.
Device address
Address with the drive can be accessed if it is networked via the RS485 interface.
(For connection see section 4.5. Serial interface).
Ser answer delay
Setting of the minimum delay between the receiving of the last byte from the converter
and the beginning of its answer. This delay avoids conflicts on the serial line, in case the
interface RS485 of the master is not arranged for an automatic communication Tx/Rx.
The parameter only concerns the working with standard serial line RS485.
Example:
Ser protocol sel
Ser baudrate sel
202
if the delay of the commutation Tx/Rx on the master is at its max. 20ms, the setting of the
parameter Ser answer delay should be at a higher numeber of 20ms: 22ms.
Serial protocol signaling procedure.
Baud rate selection (except for SLINK3)
TPD32-EV
6.11.10 Password
CONFIGURATION
SERVICE
[85]
Pword 1
Password 2
Passwords are used by the operator to protect the parameters from unauthorized accss.
Pword 1
Pword 1
No.
85
min
max
99999
Value
Factory
American
0
Factory
Standard
0
Standard
Configuration
-
Protects the parameters entered by the user from unauthorized changes. It allows the
reset of failure messages (Failure reset) and to change on the keypad the Control
mode even when the bus functioning system has been chosen (Control mode= Bus).
The password can be freely defined by the user in the form of a 5-digit combination.
Proceed as follows to activate Pword 1:

- Select Pword 1 in the CONFIGURATION menu
- This indicates whether the Password is active (Enabled) or not (Disabled)
- If not, press E and enter the password (see Commissioning).
- Press E once more. The keypad indicates that the Password is active (Enabled).
- The password must be saved so that it is valid when the power supply is switched off and then later switched
back on. > Saving parameters
Proceed as follows to unlock the Pword 1:
- Select Pword in the CONFIGURATION menu
- The display indicates whether the password is active (Enabled) or not (Disabled)
- If yes, press E and enter the password (see start-up)
- Press E again. The display now indicates that the password is not active (Disabled)
- This configuration must be saved in order to keep the password switched off even after the power supply is
turned off and switched back on again. -> Saving parameters
The message Wrong password appears if an incorrect password is entered.
If the drive shows the message EEPROM the password is deactivated. This takes place the first time the drive
is switched on and after a possible change of the operating system.
On delivery the Service menu of the drive is protected by Password 2. No Pword 1 has been entered. The user
has free access to all parameters.
Password 2 cannot be deactivated.
Note:

In case personal password has been forgotten, it is possible to deactivate it through the setting
of the universal password.
The code of this password is: 51034
The setting mode of this one remains unchanged compared to the personal password.
Instruction manual
203
6.12 I/O CONFIG
20
19
Analog output 3
Com analog output 3
Analog output 4
Com analog output 4
Com digital outputs B
Digital output 5
Digital output 6
Digital output 7
Digital output 8
Supply dig outputs B
Digital input 5
Digital input 6
Digital input 7
Digital input 8
Com digital inputs B
XB
TBO "A integrated

Analog output 1
Com analog output 1
Analog output 2
Com analog output 2
Com digital outputs A
Digital output 1
Digital output 2
Digital output 3
Digital output 4
Supply dig outputs A
Digital input 1
Digital input 2
Digital input 3
Digital input 4
Com digital inputs A
TBO
TBO "B"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 37 38 39 40 41 42
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Analog input 3
Analog input 2
ENC 2
Analog input 1
ENC 1
Figure 6.12.1: Arrangement of the programmable I/O
Apart from the terminals which have fixed functions (e.g. for Enables), the converters of the TPD32-EV series
provide the possibility of assigning freely programmable inputs/outputs to particular functions. This can either
be carried out via the keypad, the serial interface or any bus connection present.
The freely programmable inputs/outputs are factory set for assignment to the most frequently required functions.
However, these can be modified by the user accordingly to meet the requirements of the applicationn at hand.
The device inputs/outputs are subdivided as follows:

- converter with integrated TBO A:
3
2
4
4
Analog inputs (1...3), designed as differential inputs

Analog outputs (1 and 2) with common reference point
Digital outputs (1...4) with common reference point and common voltage supply
Digital inputs (1...4) with common reference point.
When other digital inputs/outputs and/or analog outputs are required, together with the already existing ones,
the TBO option card has to be used, which is inserted on the converter regulation card. A converter card can
also be mounted (see figure):

- with TBO B option card:
Option B:

Note!
204
2
4
4
Analog outputs (3 and 4) with common reference point

Digital outputs (5 ...8) with common reference point and common voltage supply
Digital inputs (5...8) with common reference point.
If parameters are assigned to particular terminals, the parameter value (e.g. speed reference
value) can only be entered via this terminal and not via the keypad or bus.
TPD32-EV
6.12.1 Analog Ouputs

I/O CONFIG
Analog outputs
Analog output 1
[66]
[62]
Select output 1
Scale output 1
[67]
[63]
Select output 2
Scale output 2
[68]
[64]
Select output 3
Scale output 3
[69]
[65]
Select output 4
Scale output 4
Factory
Standard
Actual speed (8)
0.000
Motor current (16)
0.000
Flux current (27)
0.000
Output voltage (20)
0.000
Analog output 2
Analog output 3
Analog output 4
Select output 1
Scale output 1
Select output 2
Scale output 2
Select output 3
Scale output 3
Select output 4
Scale output 4
*
66
94
Value
Factory
American
Actual speed (8)
62
67
63
68
64
69
65
Float
0
-10.000
0
-10.000
0
-10.000
-10.000
94
+10000
94
+10000
94
+10000
+10.000
Motor current (16)
0.000
Flux current (27)
0.000
Output voltage (20)
0.000
No.
min
max
Standard
Configuration
0.000
*
*
TBO option card (TBO B) has to be installed.
Select output XX
Selection of the parameter assigned as a variable to the corresponding analog output.

The following assignments are possible:
OFF
Speed ref 1 1)
Speed ref 2 1)
Ramp ref 1 1)
Ramp ref 2 1)
Ramp ref 1)
Speed ref 1)
Ramp out 1)
Actual speed 1)
T current ref 1 2)
T current ref 2 2)
T current ref 2)
Speed reg out 2)
Motor current 2)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
15
16
Output voltage 3)
Analog input 1 4)
Analog input 2 4)
Analog input 3 4)
Flux current 5)
Pad 0 6)
Pad 1 6)
Pad 4 6)
Pad 5 6)
Flux reference 7)
Pad 6 6)
PID output 8)
Out vlt level 3)
Flux current max 5)
11)
12)
Scale output XX
Scaling of the analog output concerned
1)
2)
3)
F act spd 1)
F T curr 2)
Speed draw out 9)
Output power 10)
Roll diameter
Act tension ref
Torque current
W reference
Actual comp
Brake current 11)
Field cur ref 12)
Motor Pot Out
81
82
84
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
Output that monitors the value of the Torque proving parameter.

It indicates the field current reference.
20
24
25
26
27
31
32
33
34
35
38
39
79
80
With a scaling factor of 1 the output supplies 10 V when the reference value or
speed corresponds to the value defined by Speed base value.
With a scaling factor of 1, the analog output = 10V when the reference or current
is 100%.
With a scaling factor of 1 the output supplies 10V when the voltage corresponds
Instruction manual
205
to the Volt value defined via Max out voltage.

With a scaling factor of 1 the output supplies 10V when the voltage reaches 10V on
the analog input (with scaling factor and Tune value of the input= 1). See figure
6.12.2.1.
5)
With a scaling factor of 1 the output supplies 10V when the field current corresponds
to Nom flux curr.
6)
With a scaling factor of 1 the output supplies 10V when a Pad value corresponds
to 2047.
7)
With a scaling factor of 1 the output supplies 10V when the field current reference corresponds to Nom flux curr.
8)
For the max. full-scale values, refer to paragraph 6.16.3 PID function
9)
With a scaling factor of 1 the output is 10V when the Speed ratio = 20000.
10)
With a scale factor equal to 1, the output supplies 5 volts to the rated power given
by: Full load current * Max out voltage
4)
TBO integrated (pos."A")
TBO card pos. B (option)
D
A AO1
C
1 ACOM
Select output 1
Actual spd (rpm)
Select output 3
Flux current
D
A AO3
C
1 ACOM
D
A AO4
C
2 ACOM
Scale output 3
1
Scale output 1
1
D
A AO2
C
2 ACOM
Select output 2
Motor current
3
4
Select output 4
Output voltage
Scale output 2
Scale output 4
Figure 6.12.1.1: Option card, analog output blocks
Example for calculating the scaling factor Scale output XX:

You have at your disposal an analog display device for indicating the speed of the drive. The instrument has
a measuring range of 0 ... 2 V.
This means that at maximum speed 2 V is required at the analog output of the converter. A scaling factor of
1 would supply 10 V. (Scaling factor = 2 V / 10 V = 0.200).
Note!
206
Using Regen Drive (4 quadrant) the analog output supplies bipolar 10V.
TPD32-EV
6.12.2 Analog Inputs

I/O CONFIG
Analog inputs
Analog input 1
[70]
Select input 1
[295]
An in 1 target
[71]
Input 1 type
[389]
Input 1 sign
[72]
Scale input 1
[73]
Tune value inp 1
[259]
Auto tune inp 1
[792]
Input 1 filter [ms]
[1042]
Input 1 compare
[1043]
Input 1 cp error
[1044]
Input 1 cp delay
[74]
Offset input 1
[75]
Select input 2
[296]
An in 2 target
[76]
Input 2 type
[390]
Input 2 sign
[77]
Scale input 2
[78]
Tune value inp 2
[260]
Auto tune inp 2
[801]
Input 2 filter [ms]
[79]
Offset input 2
[80]
Select input 3
[297]
An in 3 target
[81]
Input 3 type
[391]
Input 3 sign
[82]
Scale input 3
[83]
Tune value inp 3
[261]
Auto tune inp 3
[802]
Input 3filter [ms]
[84]
Offset input 3
Analog input 2
Analog input 3
Select input 1
70
32
Value
Factory
American
Ramp ref 1 (4)
An in 1 target
295
Input 1 type
71
10 V
10 V
Input 1 sign
389
Assigned (0) / Not assigned (1)

-10V ... + 10 V (0)
0...20 mA, 0...10 V (1)
4...20 mA (2)
Positive (1) / Negative (0)
Input 1 sign +
Input 1 sign Scale input 1
No.
min
max
Factory
Standard
Ramp ref 1 (4)
72
Standard
Configuration
Terminals 1/2
*
*
-10000
+10000
1.000
Instruction manual
1.000
207
Tune value inp 1

Auto tune inp 1
Input 1 filter [ms]
Input 1 compare
Input 1 cp error
Input 1 cp delay
Input 1 cp match
Auto tune
Input 1 not thr.val. (0)

Input 1=thr.val (1)
73
259
0.100
10.000
1.000
1.000
792
1042
1043
1044
1045
0
-10000
0
0
0
1000
+10000
10000
65000
1
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
0
0
-
Offset input 1
Select input 2
An in 2 target
74
75
-32768
0
+32767
32
0
OFF (0)
0
OFF (0)
296
Input 2 type
76
10 V
10 V
Input 2 sign
390

-10V ... + 10 V (0)
0...20 mA, 0...10 V (1)
4...20 mA (2)
Input 2 sign +
Tune value inp 2
Auto tune inp 2
77
78
*
*
-10.000
0.100
+10000
10.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
801
1000
79
80
-32768
0
+32767
32
0
OFF (0)
0
OFF (0)
297
Input 3 type
81
10 V
10 V
Input 3 sign
391
Input 2 filter [ms]

Offset input 2
Select input 3
An in 3 target
Auto tune

-10V ... + 10 V (0)
0...20 mA, 0...10 V (1)
4...20 mA (2)
Input 3 sign +
Tune value inp 3
Auto tune inp 3
Input 3 filter [ms]

Offset input 3
Auto tune
Terminals 3/4
260
82
83
261
Terminals 5/6
*
*
-10.000
0.100
+10000
10.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
802
1000
84
-32768
+32767

**
This parameter can be assigned to one of the programmable digital outputs.
Select input XX
Selection of the parameter to be assigned its value via an analog input. The following
assignments are possible:
OFF
Jog reference 1)
Speed ref 1 1)
Speed ref 2 1)
Ramp ref 1 1)
Ramp ref 2 1)
T current ref 1 2)
T current ref 2 2)
Adap reference 1)
T current limit 2)
An in xx target
208
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
T current lim + 2)
T current lim - 2)
Pad 0 3)
Pad 1 3)
Pad 2 3)
Pad 3 3)
Load comp
PID offset 0 4)
PI central v3 4)
PID feed-back 4)
10
11
12
13
14
15
19
21
22
23
Flux current max

Out vlt level
Speed ratio 5)
Tension red
Tension ref
Preset 3
Brake Ref *
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
* Reference for the Torque proving parameter setting (See "6.14.8 Brake control" on page 268).
Assign the analog input xx sampling. If assigned, the sampled value is copied into the
parameter programmed on the analog input. If not assigned, the programmed parameter
TPD32-EV
takes the value preset via keypad or RS485 or BUS, before to assign an analog input.
Exception are the PAD parameters, where the last value on the analog input is stored
when An in XX target = not assigned is executed.
Input XX type

Selection of input type (voltage or current input)

Jumpers on the regulator card of the TPD32-EV should be fitted or removed according
to the input signal used. The inputs of the device are factory set for voltage signls.
Analog Input
Input Signal
-10 V ... + 10 V
0 - 20 mA
0 - 10 V
4 - 20 mA
Analog input 1
S9 = OFF
S9 = ON
Analog input 2
S10 = OFF
S10 = ON
Analog input 3
S11 = OFF
S11 = ON
GD6185g
ON
OFF
10 V...+10 V
0-10V, 0-20mA
4-20 mA
Input XX sign
Selection of rotation direction when operated via the serial interface or bus for the tetraquadrant TPD32-EV...4B converters.
Input XX sign +
Selection of Clockwise rotation when operated via the terminal strip for the TPD32EV...4B converters, when the reference value is only given with one polarity.
High
Clockwise selected
Low
Clockwise not selected

Input XX sign -

Scale input XX

Jumper fitted
Jumper not fitted
A voltage of max 10 V is connected to the analog input concerned.
If the signal is used as a reference value, a polarity reversal can
be used to reverse the rotation direction of the drive (only with
TPD32-EV...4B converters). The TPD32-EV...2B converters
accept as speed reference only positive references. Negative references are not accepted and the drive does not start.
A voltage of max. 10 V or a current signal of 0...20 mA is
connected to the analog input concerned. The signal must be
positive. If the signal is used as a reference value for TPD32EV...4B converters, the rotation direction can be reversed via
the Input XX sign + and Input XX sign - parameters.
A current signal of 4...20 mA is connected to the analog input
concerned. The signal must be positive. If the signal is used
as a reference value for TPD32-EV...4B converters, the drive
rotation direction can be reversed via the Input XX sign +
and Input XX sign - parameters.
Selection of Counter-clockwise rotation when operated via the terminal strip for the
TPD32-EV...4B converters, when the reference value is only given with one polarity.
High
Counterclockwise selected
Low
Counterclockwise not selected
If both Input XX sign+ and Input XX sign- are 0 or 1 the reference value is zero.
Scaling of the corresponding analog input
1)
With a scaling factor of 1 and a Tune value inp XX = 1, 10 V or 20 mA on the
input correspond to the Speed base value.

2)
With a scaling factor of 1 and a Tune value inp XX = 1, 10 V or 20 mA on the
input correspond to max possible current.
3)
With a scaling factor of 1, 10V or 20 mA in the input correspond to the Pad value of 2047.
Instruction manual
209
For the max. full scale values, refer to paragraph 6.16.3 PID function
With a scaling factor of 1.0 and Tune value inp XX=1, 10V or 20mA correspond
to Speed ratio = 20000.
4)
5)
Tune value inp XX
Fine tuning of the input when the max. signal does not exactly correspond to the rated
value. Example see below.
Auto tune inp XX
Automatic fine tuning of the input. If this command is given, Tune value inp XX is automatically selected so that the input signal present corresponds to the max. variable value,
such as the Speed base value. Two conditions are necessary for automatic fine tuning:

Input voltage greater than 1 V or input current greater than 2mA

Positive polarity. The value found is automatically set for the other direction for
the TPD32-EV...4B converters.

Note: The automatically calculated value can, if necessary, be modified manually
via Tune value inp XX.
Input X filter
Filtering of analog input X measurement.
Offset inp XX
If the analog signal has an offset or if the variable assigned to the input already has a value
although there is no input signal present, this can be compensated via the Offset inp XX.
The converter is factory set so that analog values as +10V/-10V.

With field bus operation (Option), the Input XX sign parameter specifies the sign for the rotation direction.
If a parameter is already internally assigned (e.g. if Speed ref 1 is automatically connected with the ramp output
when the ramp is enabled), it will no longer appear in the list of parameters that can be assigned to an analog input.
The Input XX sign + and Input sign - parameters cannot be addressed via the serial interface.
Example 1:

Example 2:

210
The speed reference value of a drive is defined with an external voltage of 5V. With this
value the drive should reach the max. allowed speed (set via Sped base value).
As parameter Scale input XX the scaling factor 2 is entered (10V : 5V)
An external analog reference reaches only max. 9.8V instead of 10V.
As parameter Tune value inp XX 1.020 is entered (10V : 9.8V).
The same result would have been obtained via the Auto tune inp XX function. The appropriate parameters would have to be entered in the menu of the keypad. The maximum
possible analog value (in this case 9.8 V) would have to be present at the terminal with
a positive polarity. The keypad will adjust the Tune value automatically if the E key
is pressed.
TPD32-EV
From digital reference

setting
Select input 1
Ramp ref 1
Input 1 type
-10V ... +10V
Tune value inp 1
Auto tune inp 1

1
Ref_1+
HW
input
type
Volts
Select input 1
Ramp ref 1
An in 1 target
Input 1 cp error
Ref_1-
Scale input 1
Window comparator
Input 1 filter
1
0 ms
Input 1 compare
Offset input 1
Input 1 cp match
Select input 2
OFF
Input 1 cp delay
Input 2 type
-10V ... +10V
0 ms
Auto tune inp 2
Tune value inp 2
Ref_2+

setting
HW
input
type
Volts
Ref_2F
Select input 2
Scale input 2
OFF
1
An in 2 target
Offset input 2
0

setting
Select input 3
OFF
Input 3 type
-10V ... +10V
Select input 3
Auto tune inp 3
Tune value inp 3
OFF
Ref_3+
HW
input
type
Volts
An in 3 target
Ref_3Offset input 3
0
Scale input 3
1
Figure 6.12.2.1: Analog input
Analog Input 1 window comparator

This function allows to signal the match of a programmable value on analog input 1.
Input 1 compare
Sets the level for the comparator.
Input 1 cp error
Defines a tolerance window around Input 1 compare.
Input 1 cp delay
Millisecond delay during the switching from the low to the high level Input 1 cp match.
Input 1 cp match
Signalling output of the video comparator.

It can be read through a Field Bus LAN or digital output.

High
Analog input 1 value is within the comparation window.

Low
Analog input 1 value is out the comparation window.
Input 1 cp error
Window comparator
Input 1 compare
Input 1 cp match
Input 1 cp delay
0 ms
Figure 6.12.2.2: Analog Input 1 window comparator
Instruction manual
211
Note!

How to calculate Input 1 compare and Input 1 cp error parameters:

Input 1 compare = (Compare value ) * 10000 / (Full range value)
Input 1 error = (Tolerance half window) 10000 / (Full range value)
Example 1:
Select analog input 1 to Ramp ref 1
Speed base value equal to 1500 [RPM]
10Volt or 20 mA on analog input 1 (Ramp ref 1=Speed base value).
The application requires a signaling at 700 [RPM] via a digital output, with a tolerance window equal to 100 [RPM]
Input 1 cp match assigned to a programmable digital output.
Input 1 compare = 700 * 10000 / 1500 = 4667
Input 1 cp error = 100 * 10000 / 1500 = 666
Example 2:
Select analog input 1 to Ramp ref 1
Speed base value equal to 1500 [RPM]
10Volt or 20 mA on Analog input 1 (Ramp ref 1=Speed base value).
The application requires a signaling at 700 [RPM] via LAN, with a tolerance window equal to 100 [RPM]
Input 1 compare = -700 * 10000 / 1500 = -4667
Input 1 cp error = 100 * 10000 / 1500 = 666
Example 3:
Select analog input 1 to Pad 0
10Volt or 20 mA on Analog input 1 corresponds to Pad 0=2047.
The application requires a signaling at 700 [count] via a digital output, with a tolerance window equal to 50 [count]
Input 1 cp match assigned to a programmable digital output
Input 1 compare = 700 * 10000 / 2047 = 3420
Input 1 cp error = 50 * 10000 / 2047 = 244
Example 4:
Select analog input 1 to PID feedback
10Volt or 20 mA on Analog input 1 corresponds to PID feedback=10000.
The application requires a signaling at 4000 [count] via a digital output, with a tolerance band equal to 1000 [count]
Input 1 compare = 4000 * 10000 / 10000 = 4000
Input 1 cp error = 1000 * 10000 / 10000 = 1000
Example 5:
Select input 1 to T current lim
10Volt or 20 mA on Analog input 1 corresponds to T current lim = 100 [%]
The application requires a signaling at 50 [%] via a digital output, with a tolerance band equal to 2 [%]
Input 1 compare = 50 * 10000 / 100 = 5000
Input 1 cp error = 2 * 10000 / 100 = 200
212
TPD32-EV
6.12.3 Digital Outputs

I/O CONFIG
Digital outputs
[145]
[1267]
[146]
[1268]
[147]
[1269]
[148]
[1270]
[149]
[1271]
[150]
[1272]
[151]
[1273]
[152]
[1274]
[629]
[1275]
Digital output 1
Inversion out 1
Digital output 2
Inversion out 2
Digital output 3
Inversion out 3
Digital output 4
Inversion out 4
Digital output 5
Inversion out 5
Digital output 6
Inversion out 6
Digital output 7
Inversion out 7
Digital output 8
Inversion out 8
Relay 2
Inversion relay 2
Digital output 1
Inversion out 1
145
1267
0
0
77
1
Value
Factory
American
Ramp + (8)
Disabled (0)
Digital output 2
Inversion out 2
146
1268
0
0
77
1
Ramp - (9)
Disabled (0)
Ramp - (9)
Disabled (0)
Digital output 3
Inversion out 3
147
1269
0
0
77
1
Spd thr. (2)

Disabled (0)
Spd thr. (2)

Disabled (0)
Digital output 4
Inversion out 4
148
1270
0
0
77
1
Overld avail. (6)

Disabled (0)
Overld avail. (6)

Disabled (0)
Digital output 5
Inversion out 5
149
1271
0
0
77
1
Curr lim. state (4)

Disabled (0)
Curr lim. state (4)

Disabled (0)
Digital output 6
Inversion out 6
150
1272
0
0
77
1
Over-voltage (12)
Disabled (0)
Over-voltage (12)
Disabled (0)
Digital output 7
Inversion out 7
151
1273
0
0
77
1
Under-voltage (11)
Disabled (0)
Under-voltage (11)
Disabled (0)
Digital output 8
Inversion out 8
152
1274
0
0
77
1
Over-current (14)
Disabled (0)
Over-current (14)
Disabled (0)
Relay 2
Inversion relay 2
629
1275
0
0
77
1
Stop ctrl (23)

Disabled (0)
Stop ctrl (23)

Disabled (0)
Enabled (1) / Disabled (0)

No.
min
max
Instruction manual
Factory
Standard
Ramp + (8)
Disabled (0)
Standard
Configuration
213
TBO integrated (pos. A)

26
Ramp +
D01
Digital output 5
Curr limit state
Inversion out 1
Digital output 1
Inversion out 5
D05
25
COM_DO
27
Ramp -
D02
Digital output 6
Overvoltage
Inversion out 2
Digital output 2
Inversion out 6
D06
25
COM_DO
Digital output 3
Spd threshold
Digital output 7
Undervoltage
Inversion out 3
Inversion out 7
D07
25
COM_DO
9
Digital output 8
Overcurrent
Inversion out 4
D04
COM_DO
29
Digital output 4
Overld available
COM_DO
28
D03
COM_DO
Inversion out 8
D08
25
COM_DO
COM_DO
Drive Relay Output
75
Inversion relay 2
Relay 2
R2NO
Stop control
76
R2COM
35
Ok relay func.
Drive healthy
R1NO
36
R1COM
Figure 6.12.3.1: Digital outputs
Digital output XX
Selection of the parameter that is assigned to the digital output concerned. The following
OFF
Speed zero thr
Spd threshold
Set speed
Curr limit state
Drive ready
Mot ovrld avail 6)
Overload state
Ramp +
Ramp Speed limited
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Heatsink
Overcurrent
Overtemp motor
External fault
Failure supply
214
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Pad A bit
Pad B bit
Virt dig input
Torque sign
Stop control
Field loss
Speed fbk loss
Bus loss
Hw opt1 failure
Opt2 failure
Encoder 1 state
Encoder 2 state
Enable seq err
Diameter calc st 1)
Drive healthy 13)
Input 1 cp match
Diam reached
Spd match compl
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
35
38
42
49
58
59
Acc state
Dec state
Brake comand 2)
Brake failure 3)
Mot ovrld preal 4)
Dvr ovrld preal 5)
Dvr ovrld avail 7)
I2t mot ovrld fail 8)
I2t drv ovrld fail 9)
Mot cur threshld 10)
Overspeed 11)
Delta frequency 12)
Drv rdy to start 14)
BUS control mode 15)
SSC Error 16)
60
61
62
63
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
76
77
79
Refer to paragraph 6.16.3 PID function

Mechanical brake relay control; indicates the presence of adequate current to sustain
the load (Torque proving parameter).
3)
Mechanical brake alarm signal.
4)
this signal is enabled when the thermal image of the motor Motor I2t accum =
90 % and returns to 0 when Motor I2t accum = 0.
5)
this signal is enabled when the thermal image of the drive Drive I2t accum = 90
% and returns to 0 when Drive I2t accum = 0.
6)
The default condition of this signal is enabled. It is disabled when Motor I2t accum
= 100 % and is re-enabled when Motor I2t accum = 0.
7)
The default condition of this signal is enabled. It is disabled when Drive I2t accum
1)
2)
TPD32-EV

9)

8)
= 100 % and is re-enabled when Drive I2t accum = 0.

I2t motor overload alarm signal.
I2t drive overload alarm signal.
current threshold exceeded signal.
overspeed alarm signal.
frequency alarm signal.
The following drive condition is signalled, via a digital output:
- regulator power supply present
- no alarms present
The following drive condition is signalled, via a digital output:
- power supply present
- no alarms present
- Enable signal present
- three-phase network synchronisation achieved
- excitation current present (only necessary if Field Loss alarm Activity is other
than IGNORE)
A signal is sent via a digital output to indicate whether the drive is in a data transfer
via fieldbus condition (Control mode = BUS).
Indicates the absence of communication by the slave with three-phase external
exciter control.

12)

13)

14)

15)
16)
Inversion out XX
Reverse the digital outputs signal.
Relay 2
Selection of the parameters, that are assigned to the relay contact on terminals 75 and 76 has
to trip.
Note!

10)
11)
As for an alarm signal the following are valid:

Output = Low and open relay contact:Alarm
Output = High and closed relay contact:No alarm
See the chapters concerning the output behavior with other messages.
Instruction manual
215
6.12.4 Digital Inputs

TBO integrated pos. A

31
11
Inversion out 1
Digital input 1
DG1+
*
DG5+
OFF
37
Inversion out 5
Digital input 5
OFF
15
DG1-
DG5-
32
12
DG2+
Inversion out 2
Digital input 2
DG6+
Inversion out 6
Digital input 6
OFF
37
OFF
15
DG2-
DG6-
33
13
DG3+
Inversion out 3
Digital input 3
DG7+
Inversion out 7
Digital input 7
OFF
37
OFF
15
DG3-
DG7-
34
14
DG4+
Inversion out 4
Digital input 4
DG8+
Inversion out 8
Digital input 8
OFF
37
OFF
15
DG4-
DG8-
Figure 6.12.4.1: Digital inputs
I/O CONFIG
Digital inputs
Parameter
Digital input 1
Inversion in 1
Enabled (1) / Disabled (0))
Digital input 1
[1276]
Inversion in 1
[138]
Digital input 2
[1277]
Inversion in 2
[139]
Digital input 3
[1278]
Inversion in 3
[140]
Digital input 4
[1279]
Inversion in 4
[141]
Digital input 5
[1280]
Inversion in 5
[142]
Digital input 6
[1281]
Inversion in 6
[143]
Digital input 7
[1282]
Inversion in 7
[144]
Digital input 8
[1283]
Inversion in 8
min
max
137
87
Value
factory
America
OFF (0)
factory
Standard
OFF (0)
1267
Disabled (0)
Disabled (0)
N.
Digital input 2
Inversion in 2
146
87
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
1268
Disabled (0)
Disabled (0)
Digital input 3
147
87
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
216
137
TPD32-EV
Standard
configuration
Inversion in 3
1269
Value
factory
America
Disabled (0)
Inversion in 4
1270
Disabled (0)
Disabled (0)
Digital in 5
Inversion in 5
149
87
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
1271
Disabled (0)
Disabled (0)
Parameter
N.

min
max
Digital in 6
Inversion in 6
150
87
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
1272
Disabled (0)
Disabled (0)
Digital in 7
Inversion in 7
151
87
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
1273
Disabled (0)
Disabled (0)
Digital in 8
Inversion in 8
152
87
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
1274
Disabled (0)
Disabled (0)
Digital input XX
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Standard
configuration
Selection of the parameter that is addressed by the digital input concerned. The following assignments are possible:
OFF
Motor pot reset
Motor pot up
Motor pot down
Motor pot sign +
Motor pot sign Jog +
Jog Failure reset
Torque reduct
Ramp out = 0
Ramp in = 0
Freeze ramp
Lock speed reg
Lock speed I
Auto capture
Input 1 sign + 1)
Input 1 sign - 1)
Input 2 sign + 1)
Input 2 sign - 1)
Input 3 sign + 1)
Input 3 sign - 1)
Zero torque
Speed sel 0 2)
Speed sel 1 2)
factory
Standard
Disabled (0)

8)

9)

10)

7)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Speed sel 2 2)
Ramp sel 0 3)
Ramp sel 1 3)
Field loss
Enable flux reg
Enable flux weak
Pad A bit 0
Pad A bit 1
Pad A bit 2
Pad A bit 3
Pad A bit 4
Pad A bit 5
Pad A bit 6
Pad A bit 7
Forward sign
Reverse sign
An in 1 target
An in 2 target
An in 3 target
Enable droop
Enable PI PID 4)
Enable PD PID 4)
PI integral freeze 4)
PID offs. Sel 4)
PI central vs0 4)
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
44
45
46
47
48
49
52
53
54
55
56
PI central vs1 4)
Diameter calc 4)
Diam reset
Diam calc Dis
Torque winder EN
Line acc status
Line dec status
Line fstp status
Speed match
Diam inc/dec En
Wind/unwind
Diam preset SEL0
Diam preset SEL1
Taper enable
Speed demand En
Winder side
Enable PI-PD PID
Jog TW enable
Brake fbk 5)
Adapt Sel 1 6)
Adapt Sel 2 7)
Wired FC EN (8)
Wired FC Inv Seq (9)
Wired FC Act Brg (10)
57
58
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
86
87
88
89
90
The Input xx sign + and Input XX sign - parameters can only be used in conjunction
with the other parameter.
The Speed sel 0, Speed sel 1 and Speed sel 2 parameters can only be used together.
The Ramp sel 0 and Ramp sel 1 parameters can only be used together.
Refer to paragraph 6.16.3 PID function
External mechanical brake relay feedback; if set to digital input (selection: Brake
fbk), this command is necessary in order for the brake to be released or closed
without triggering the alarm. If not set to digital input, it is not considered in the
brake control sequence.
Gains value selection with the significance 21
Gains value selection with the significance 22
Enables field control by TPD32-EV-FC via standard I/O.
Indication if field control is during inversion sequence
Indication of the actual active bridge (positive or negative) of the FC unit
Instruction manual
217
6.12.5 Speed reference from encoder input (Tach follower function)

I/O CONFIG
Encoder inputs
[1020]
[1021]
[416]
[169]
[649]
Select enc 1
Select enc 2
Encoder 1 pulses
Encoder 2 pulses
Refresh enc 1
min
max
1020
Value
Factory
American
OFF (0)
Factory
Standard
OFF (0)
1021
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
Encoder 1 pulses
Encoder 2 pulses
Refresh enc 1
416
169
600
150
9999
9999
1024
1024
1024
1024
649
Disabled (0)
Disabled (0)
Refresh enc 2
652
Disabled (0)
Disabled (0)
Select enc 1
Select enc 2
No.
OFF (0)
Speed ref 1 (1)
Speed ref 2 (2)
Ramp ref 1 (3)
Ramp ref 2 (4)
OFF (0)
Speed ref 1 (1)
Speed ref 2 (2)
Ramp ref 1 (3)
Ramp ref 2 (4)
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
Encoder 2
XE2 connector
Encoder 1
XE1 connector
A+
A+
A-
A-
8
1
B+
8
Select enc 2
OFF
B-
Standard
Configuration
B+
Select enc 1
OFF
B-
0V
2
0V
9
24
5V
Figure 6.12.5.1: Tach follower
This configuration allows the use of the encoder inputs, as a speed reference. Compared to an analog input, these
inputs have higher resolution and higher noise immunity.
Using for this purpouse the encoder input (XE1 or XE2 connector), it is necessary to define the destination,
selecting properly the type of speed reference on which it has to interact (Ramp ref 1, Speed ref 1, etc.)
When the encoder input is used as a speed reference source, using the same encoder input as speed feedback
is disallowed. It is impossible to configure the same speed reference to the encoder input and an analog input.
The function Tach follower can be used in accordance with the tabe below:
Speed fbk sel [414]
Encoder 1
218
Encoder 1 as reference
Not available
TPD32-EV
Encoder 2 as reference
Not available
Encoder 2
Tacho
Armature
Available
Not available
Available
Not available
Available
Available
DV0727g
It is possible to set any configuration. Follow the configuration possible in the table above.
Note!
Select enc 1
Select enc 2
These parameters define which speed reference the encoder signal will reference to.
The OFF condition indicates that the encoder connector is not used as speed reference
and then it could be used as speed feedback. (CONFIGURATION/Speed fbk sel menu).
The speed reference destination choice must be done according to the speed regulator
configuration (e.g. can not use Speed ref 1 with the ramp active).
It defines the encoder type to the XE1 connector connected.
Sinusoidal
Sinusoidal encoder
Digital
Digital encoder (DEII option required)
Pulse number of the encoder to the XE1 connector connected.
Pulse number of the encoder to the XE2 connector connected.
Enables the monitoring of the encoder 1 connection status, in order to detect a speed
feedback loss alarm
Enables the monitoring of the digital encoder 2 connection status, in order to detect a
speed feedback loss alarm

Encoder 1 type

Encoder 1 pulses
Encoder 2 pulses
Refresh enc 1
Refresh enc 2
Drive A
(Master)
Drive B
(Follower)
Drive C
(Follower)
Spd fbk sel

Encoder 2
Spd fbk sel

Encoder 2
Spd fbk sel

Tacho
Analog
input 1
(1)
XE1
XE1
XE2
Enc 1 REF
Enc 2
Fbk
(3)
XE1
XE2
XE2
Enc 2 REF
Enc 2
Fbk
(5)
(4)
(2)
EXT REF
DEII
(option card)
E Digital encoder
(1) Analog inputs/ Select input 1 = Ramp ref 1

(2) Speed fbk sel = Encoder 2

(3) Select enc 1 = Ramp ref 1
E Digital encoder

(4) Speed fbk sel = Encoder 2
(5) Select enc 2 = Ramp ref 1
Figure 6.12.5.2: Example of application of the encoder reference
The Drive A speed reference is provided in this case by an external analog signal but it could be set from internal
digital sources (e.g. APC300 optional card or field bus).
A configuration using the encoder signal as the line speed reference, is only possible when the speed reference
source is provided by an additional encoder, independent from the motor shaft.
Instruction manual
219
6.13 ADDITIONAL SPEED FUNCTIONS (ADD SPEED FUNCT)

6.13.1 Auto capture
ADD SPEED FUNCT
[388]
Auto capture
The auto capture function enables the converter to engage a unning motor.
Auto capture
ON (1)
OFF (0)
No.
min
388
max
Value
Factory
American
OFF (0)
Factory
Standard
OFF (0)
Standard
Configuration
*
Auto capture
ON
OFF
When the converter is switched on, the speed of the motor is

measured and the ramp output is set accordingly. The drive
then runs to the set reference value.
When the converter is switched on, the ramp starts from zero.
Main uses:
Connection to a motor that is already running due to its load (e.g. in the case of
pumps, the flowing medium).
Reconnection after a fault alarm.
If the speed reference value is defined via the ramp, with Auto capture = ON, starting at a reference value corresponding to the motor speed.
Note!
If the function is switched off, ensure that the motor is not turning when the converter is switched
on. If this is not the case, this may cause a harsh motor deceleration in current limit.
6.13.2 Adptive spd reg

ADD SPEED FUNCT
Adaptive spd reg
[181]
[182]
[183]
[1464]
[184]
[185]
[186]
[187]
[188]
[189]
[190]
[191]
[192]
[193]
[1462]
[1463]
Enable spd adap

Select adap type
Adap reference [FF]
Adap selector
Adap speed 1 [%]
Adap speed 2 [%]
Adap joint 1 [%]
Adap joint 2 [%]
Adap P gain 1 [%]
Adap I gain 1 [%]
Adap P gain 2 [%]
Adap I gain 2 [%]
Adap P gain 3 [%]
Adap I gain 3 [%]
Adap P gain 4 [%]
Adap I gain 4 [%]
The adaptive speed regulator function enables different gains of the speed regulator depending on the speed or another
variable (Adaptive Reference). This allows optimum adaptation of the speed regulator to the applicaion at hand.
220
TPD32-EV
Enable spd adap
181
Value
Factory
American
Disabled
Select adap type
182
Speed
Speed
Adap reference [FF]

Adap selector
Adap speed 1 [%]
Adap speed 2 [%]
Adap joint 1 [%]
Adap joint 2 [%]
Adap P gain 1 [%]
Adap I gain 1 [%]
Adap P gain 2 [%]
Adap I gain 2 [%]
Adap P gain 3 [%]
Adap I gain 3 [%]
Adap P gain 4 [%]
Adap I gain 4 [%]
183
1464
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
1462
1463
-32768
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
+32767
3
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
1000
0
20.3
40.7
6.1
6.1
10.00
1.00
10.00
1.00
10.00
1.00
10.00
1.00
1000
0
20.3
40.7
6.1
6.1
10.00
1.00
10.00
1.00
10.00
1.00
10.00
1.00
*
-
No.
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
Speed (0)
Adap reference (1)
Parameter (2)
min
max
Factory
Standard
Disabled
Standard
Configuration
-
* This function can be assigned to one of the programmable analog inputs.
Enable spd adap

Select adap type

Adap reference
Adap selector
Adap speed 1
Adap speed 2
Adap joint 1
Adap joint 2
Adap P gain 1
Adap I gain 1
Enabled
Disabled
Adaptive speed regulation enabled.

Adaptive speed regulation is not enabled. The regulator operates
with the parameters set in the REG PARAMETERS menu.
Speed
The regulator parameters are modified according to the speed.
Adap reference
The regulator parameters are modified according to the Adap
reference parameter.
Parameter
It allows to change the gains via parameter or via dual digital input.
Only in these operating conditions are 4 sets of PI gains available.
The variable according to which the speed regulator parameters are to be modified (only
with Select adap type = Adap reference).
The Adap selector parameter selects a pair of parameters: Adap P gain and Adap I
gain from 1 to 4, if Sel adap type is set to Parameter. If the Adap selector parameter is
programmed on digital inputs Adapt Sel 1 or Adapt Sel 2, it only indicates which pair
of gains has been selected.
Parameter set 1 is valid below this point, and parameter set 2 above it. The transition
behaviour between the values is defined by the Adap joint 1 parameter. The definition
is a percentage of the Speed base value and the maximum value of Adap reference.
Parameter set 2 is valid below this point, and parameter set 3 above it. The transition
behaviour between the values is defined by Adap joint 2. The definition is a percentage
of the Speed base value and the maximum value of Adap reference.
Defines a range around Adap speed 1 in which there is a linear change in gain from
parameter set 1 to parameter set 2 in order to prevent jumps in the behavior of the regulator. It is defined as a percentage of Speed base value.
Defines a range around Adap Speed 2 in which there is a linear change in gain from
parameter set 2 to parameter set 3 in order to prevent jumps in the behavior of the regulator. It is defined as a percentage of Speed base value.
Proportional gain for the range from zero to Adap speed 1. Defined as a percentage of
Speed P base.
Integral gain for the range from zero to Adap speed 1. Defined as a percentage of Speed I base.
Instruction manual
221
Adap P gain 2
Proportional gain for the range from Adap speed 1 to Adap speed 2. Defined as a
percentage of Speed P base.
Integral gain for the range from Adap speed 1 to Adap speed 2. Defined as a percentage of Speed I base.
Proportional gain for the range above Adap speed 2. Defined as a percentage of Speed
P base.
Integral gain for the range above Adap speed 2. Defined as a percentage of Speed I base.
Proportional gain for the range above Adap speed 3. Defined as a percentage of Speed
P base.
Integral gain for the range above Adap speed 3. Defined as a percentage of Speed I base.
Adap I gain 2
Adap P gain 3
Adap I gain 3
Adap P gain 4
Adap I gain 4
In order to activate Adaptive speed regulation, the function must be enabled with the Enable spd adap parameter.
Normally the gain depends on the speed of the drive. It can, however, also vary according to another variable,
defined by the Adap reference parameter. This must be selected with the Select adap type parameter.
The Adap speed 1 and Adap speed 2 parameters are used to define the three ranges that may have different
gains. A parameter set can be defined for each of these ranges, with each set containing an individually definable
P and I component.
The Adap joint 1 and Adap joint 2 parameters ensure a smooth transition between the different parameter sets.
The fields must be defined so that Adap joint1 and Adap joint 2 do not overlap.
When the Adaptive speed regulation is enabled (Enable spd adap = Enabled) the Speed P and Speed I parameters
have no effect. They still retain their value and are effective after any disabling of the adaptive speed regulation.
When the drive is not enabled, the gain of the speed regulator is determined by the zero speed logic. See section
6.7.2, Zero speed logic.
Adap joint 1
Adap joint 2
6.1 %
6.1 %
Adap I gain 1
Adap P gain 1
1 %
10 %
Adap P gain 2
Adap I gain 2
10 %
Adap P gain 3
1 %
Adap I gain 3
10 %
1 %
Adap speed 1
Adap reference
1000 rpm
Adap speed 2
20.3 %
40.7 %
Figure 6.13.2.1: Adaptive of the speed regulator
222
TPD32-EV
6.13.3 Speed control

ADD SPEED FUNCT
Speed control
[101]
Spd threshold + [FF]
[102]
Spd threshold - [FF]
[103]
Threshold delay [ms]
[104]
Set error [FF]
[105]
Set delay [ms]
Two speed control messages are provided:

No.
-
-
when a particular, adjustable speed is not exceeded.

when the speed corresponds to the set rference value
min
max
Value
Factory
American
1000
Factory
Standard
1000
Standard
Configuration

Spd threshold
101
32767
102
103
393
1
0
0
32767
65535
1
1000
100
1000
100
Digital output 3 *
Set error [FF]

Set delay [ms]
Set speed
104
105
394
1
1
0
32767
65535
1
100
100
100
100
Speed exceeded (0)

Speed not exceeded (1)
Speed not ref. val. (0)

Speed = ref. val. (1)
* This function can be assigned to a programmable digital output.
Spd threshold +
Spd threshold -
Threshold delay
Spd threshold

Set error
Set delay
Set speed

Switch point for the Speed not exceeded for clockwise rotation of the drive in the
units defined by the Factor function.
Switch point for the Speed not exceeded for counter-clockwise rotation of the drive
in the units defined by the Factor function.
Setting of a delay time in milliseconds which is active when the speed is lowered within
the limits of the set threshold.
Message Set speed not exceeded (via a programmable digital input)
High Speed not exceeded
Low Speed exceeded
Defines a tolerance band around the speed reference in the units specified by the Factor function.
Setting of a delay time in milliseconds which is active when the speed is lowered within
the limits of the set threshold.
Message The speed corresponds to the reference value (via a programmable digital output)
High Speed corresponds to the reference value
Low Speed does not corresponds to the reference value
The message The speed corresponds to the reference value refers to the total reference value in front of the
Speed ref speed regulator and to the Ramp Ref ramp reference when the ramp is selected.
When the references are lower than 1 %, the signal is always low!
Instruction manual
223
Spd threshold +
1000 rpm
Actual spd (rpm)

Spd threshold
Spd threshold 1000 rpm
Threshold delay
100 ms
Speed ref
Set error
100 rpm
Set speed
Actual spd (rpm)
Set delay
100 ms
Figure 6.13.3.1: Speed threshold (up) and Set speed (down) messages
224
TPD32-EV
6.13.4 Speed zero

ADD SPEED FUNCT
Speed zero
No.
Speed zero level [FF]

Speed zero delay [ms]
Speed zero thr
Drive not rotating (0)

Drive rotating (1)
[107]
[108]
min
max
107
32767
108
395
0
0
65535
1
Value
Factory
American
10
Factory
Standard
10
100
100
Standard
Configuration
*
* This function can be assigned to a programmable digital output.
Speed zero level

Speed zero delay
Speed zero thr

Switch threshold for Speed zero level. The value applies to both rotation directions for
the TPD32-EV...4B converters. Defined by the units specified in the factor function.
Definition of a delay time in milliseconds, when the zero speed is reached.
Speed zero thr message Drive turning (via a programmable digital output).
High
Drive turning
Low
Drive not turning
The LED Zero Speed is lit when the drive is not turning.
Speed
Speed zero level [107]
Speed zero thr [395]
Speed zero delay [108]

Figure 6.13.4.1: Speed zero
Instruction manual
225
6.14 FUNCTIONS
6.14.1 Motorpotentiometer
FUNCTIONS
Motor pot
[246]
[247]
[248]
[249]
[1530]
[1531]
[1532]
[1533]
[1534]
[1535]
[1536]
[1537]
Enable motor pot

Motor pot oper
Motor pot sign
Motor pot reset
MPot Lower Limit [rpm]
MPot Upper Limit [rpm]
MPot Acc Time [s]
MPot Dec Time [s]
MPot Mode
PowerOn Cfg
Reset Cfg
Motor pot out [rpm]
The motor potentiometer function allows the speed of the drive to be adjusted by using the +/- keys on the
keypad or by digital inputs. The speed is then adjusted according to the defied ramp time.
No.
max
1
Value
Factory
American
Disabled
Factory
Standard
Disabled
Standard
Configuration
-
Positive
Positive
Enable motor pot
246
min
0
Motor pot oper

Motor pot sign
247
248
Motor pot sign +

Motor pot sign Motor pot reset
Motor pot up
249
396
**
**
*
*
Motor pot down
397
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
0
0
0
0
8000
8000
65535
65535
Disabled (0); Config1(1); Config2 (2)
No acceleration (0)
Acceleration (1)
No deceleration (0)
Deceleration (1)
MPot Lower Limit
MPot Upper Limit
MPot Acc Time
MPot Dec Time
MPot Mode

PowerOn Cfg

Reset Cfg
Motor pot out
Ramp & LastVal (0)

Ramp & Follow (1)
Fine & LastVal (2)
Fine & Follow (3)
Last Power Off (0)

Zero (1)
Lower Limit (2)
Upper Limit (3)
None (0)
Inp Zero (1)
Inp Low Limit (2)
Inp Ref Zero (3)
Inp Ref Low Lim (4)
Out Zero (5)
Out Low Limit (6)
Out Ref Zero (7)
Out Ref Low Lim (8)
Inp Up Limit (9)
Inp Ref Up Lim (10)
Inp Freeze (11)
1535
0
1000
10
10
0
0
1000
10
10
0
1536
1537

**
226
TPD32-EV
Motor potentiometer function can be activated (Enable motor pot) by selecting Config1 or Config2 . They
act as indicated in the figure 6.14.1.1 and 6.14.1.2 . The actual motorpot output value is shown in the Motor
pot submenu of the keypad. When controlled via the keypad, the drive can be accelerated by pressing the +
key and decelerated by pressing the - key. This corresponds to the commands Motor pot up and Motor pot
down. Select the menu point Motor pot oper for this purpose.
The motor potentiometer output can be adjusted between 0 to 100 % by setting the command Motor pot up.
The motor potentiometer output can be reduced between 100 and 0 % by setting the command Motor pot down.
If the command is given when the drive is already at a stop, it will not cause the reverse running of the drive.
If the Motor pot up and Motor pot down commands are given at the same time, they will not change the motor
pot output value. When Config2 is selected the last motor pot output value is saved when the drive is switched
off or if there is a fault. When the drive is restarted, it accelerates to this speed according to the ramp set. If the
command Motor pot reset is given with the drive switched off when Config1 is selected, the motor pot output
value is deleted and the drive starts at zero speed, when Config2 is selected the behaviour is configured through
parameter Reset cfg. If the status of the Motor pot sign command is changed while the drive is running, the
drive will reverse according to the specified ramp times. Using Config1, If both Motor pot sign+ and Motor pot
sign- commands are ON or OFF, the motor pot output will be set to zero. Using Config2, the motor pot output
will not be set to zero. Using Config2, the output of the motor potentiometer can be active also when the drive
is disabled or the ramp block is not enabled. In those case, it will not have any effect on the speed of the motor
until the drive and the ramp block is enabled.
When Config1 is selected the ramp must be enabled and the Start command must be present in order to use the
motor potentiometer function. When Config2 is selected the function can be used also when the ramp is not
enabled or the Start command is not present, but of course the motor potentiometer output will not affect the
drive behaviour in these cases, except for the fact that if an analog output is configured as Motor pot out it will
change according to the internal motor pot output.
Three different motorpot configuration mode can be selected.
Enable motor pot

Disabled
Config1
Config2
The reference value of potentiometer function is disabled.

The motor potentiometer Config1 function mode is enabled.
The ramp block receives its reference value directly from the
motor potentiometer function.
The motor potentiometer Config2 function mode is enabled.
The reference from the motor potentiometer function is added
to the Ramp ref1 + Ramp Ref2 block.
Default configuration = Disabled.

Motor pot oper

Motor pot sign

Motor pot sign +
By pressing the + and - keys of the keypad the drive can be accelerated or decelerated.
+ Accelerate - Decelerate
This parameter is only accessible via the keypad and via the serial interface or Bus.
When the drive is operated via the terminal strip, the parameters Motor pot sign +
and Motor pot sign - must be used. As for TPD32-EV...2B... converters the Positive
function must be selected.
Positive
Clockwise rotation selected.
Negative
Counterclockwise rotation selected.
Selection of the Clockwise rotation direction when the selection is carried out via
the terminal strip. The Motor pot sign + parameter is linked with the Motor pot sign
- parameter via an XOR function. This means that the command (+24V) must be given
only to one of the two terminals
High
Clockwise rotation direction selected.
Low
Clockwise rotation direction not selected.
Instruction manual
227
Min Speed Limit
Speed limited
Speed min amount

0 rpm
Speed min pos
0 rpm
Ramp Reference
Enab multi spd
Enab motor pot
Ramp output (d)

F
Motor potentiometer
function
Speed min neg

0 rpm
Multi speed
function
Ramp ref 2
0 rpm
Speed
Motor pot reset

Digital input 1
15
TBO
Reset
14
Digital input 4
Motor pot sign -
13
Motor pot sign +
12
Digital input 2
Digital input 3
Down
Sign+
15
11
COM D I/O
Digital input 1
Up
19
18
+24V
0V 24
TBO
Ramp ref (d)
Sign-
Motor pot up
No Increase
Motor pot down

No Decrease
11
Ramp ref 1
0 rpm
Figure 6.14.1.1: CONFIG 1

Min Speed Limit
Speed limited
Speed min amount

0 rpm
Ramp ref 1
0 rpm
Speed min pos

0 rpm
Ramp Reference
Enab multi spd
Enab motor pot
Ramp output (d)

F
+
Speed min neg
0 rpm
Ramp ref 2
0 rpm
Speed
Motor pot reset

15
TBO
11
14
Digital input 4
Motor pot sign -
13
Sign-
12
Digital input 2
Digital input 3
Down
Sign+
Motor pot sign +
Motor pot down

No Decrease
Motor pot up
No Increase
15
11
COM D I/O
Digital input 1
Up
19
18
+24V
0V 24
TBO
Ramp ref (d)
Digital input 1
Motor potentiometer
function
Reset
Multi speed
function
Figure 6.14.1.2: CONFIG 2
228
TPD32-EV
otor pot sign -

Motor pot reset.
Motor pot up
Motor pot down
MPot Lower Limit
MPot Upper Limit
Selection of the Counterclockwise rotation direction when the selection is carried

out via the terminal strip. The Motor pot sign - parameter is linked with the Motor
pot sign + parameter via an XOR function. This means that the command (+24V) must
be given only to one of the two terminals.
High Counter-clockwise rotation direction selected.
Low Counter-clockwise rotation direction not selected.
In Config1, when the Reset command is activated and the drive is switched off, the
restart begins at Zero speed. In this case the command is only possible with the drive
switched off! In Config2, the commad is possible also when the drive is switched on
and the behaviour follows the configuration of parameter Reset Cfg.
The drive is accelerated with the preselected ramp. The setting can be carried out via
keypad button, via the terminal or Bus.
The drive is decelerated with the preselected ramp. The setting can be carried out via
keypad button, via the terminal or Bus
Setting of the lower limit (RPM) of the motor pot value when Config2 is selected..
Setting of the Upper limit (RPM) of the motor pot value when Config2 is selected..
Mpot output mon
Mpot top lim
Mpot bottom lim
Up
Down
MPot Acc Time
Setting of acceleration time (s) between lower and upper limits set when Config2 is
selected.
MPot Dec Time
Setting of deceleration time (s) between upper and lower limits set when Config2 is
selected.
MPot Mode
Functioning mode when Config2 is selected.
Setting of the configuration of two possible options of the Motor potentiometer function.
There are two operating modes for each of the two options.

Ramp&Last val

Ramp&Follow

Fine&Last val

Fine&Follow
Option 1:
Behaviour of the Motor potentiometer function with the Stop or FastStop command present.
The two operating modes are: Last val or Follow.
In Last val mode with the Stop or FastStop command present, the output of the Motor potentiometer function
is not modified.
The motor speed moves to 0. When the Run command is sent, the motor speed moves to the speed reference set
by Ramp ref 1 + Ramp ref 2 + the motor potentiometer output
Instruction manual
229
Mpot output mon
Mode:Last val
Up
Down
Start
In Follow mode with the Stop or FastStop command present, the Down command is simulated, i.e. the output
of the Motor potentiometer function moves to lower limit with the set ramp time.
If the Run command is sent the motor potentiometer output decrease is stopped and the current value used in
addition to Ramp Ref 1 and Ramp Ref 2 to set the actual Ramp Ref.
Mpot output mon
Mode:Follow
Up
Down
Start
Option 2:
The two operating modes are: Ramp or Fine.
In Ramp mode, each time the Up or Down commands are enabled, the output of the Motor potentiometer function increases or decreases with the set ramp. When the Up or Down command is removed, the last value that
was reached is maintained.
Mpot output mon
Mode:Ramp
Up
Down
In Fine mode, each time the Up or Down commands are enabled, the output of the Motor potentiometer function increases or decreases by 1 rpm.
If the command persists for less than 1 second, no other changes are made on the output.
If the command persists for more than 1 second, the output increases or decreases with the set ramp. The variation with the set ramp is performed gradually (1 second). When the Up or Down command is removed the last
value that was reached is maintained.
230
TPD32-EV
Mpot output mon
Mode:Fine
1rpm
1rpm
Up
Down
1s
1s
Mpot mode
Ramp behaviour
Behaviour of the Motor potentiometer function with the

Stop or FastStop command present with the Control
mode = Ramp parameter.
Ramp
Last val
Ramp
Follow
Fine
Last val
Fine
Follow
For fine-tuning of the Motor potentiometer output value the recommended settings are Mpot Mode = Fine&Follow
or Fine&Last Val. Each time they are pressed for 1 second, the speed increases by 1 rpm. For an immediate
effect on motor speed, the Acceleration time and Deceleration time parameters should be set to short times.
PowerOn Cfg

Configuration of the motorpot at power on when Config2 is selected.

This parameter is needed to configure the output value of the Motor potentiometer at
drive start-up.
Last Power off
Zero
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
Reset Cfg

Configuration of the Motorpot reset when Config2 is selected.

This parameter can be used to configure the reset of the Motor potentiometer function,
i.e. to configure the value at which the Motor potentiometer input and output are set
when the reset command is enabled.
The reset command has priority over the Up command and the Down command.
The Up and Down commands are enabled again when the reset command is disabled.
None
Inp Zero
Inp Low Limit
When set to Last power off, the motor potentiometer output

starts from the last reference that was set before the drive was
switched off.
When set to Zero the motor potentiometer output starts from
a value of 0.
When set to Lower limit the output of the motor potentiometer
starts from the value of the lower limit set in the Mpot bottom
limit parameter.
When set to Upper limit the output of the motor potentiometer
starts from the value of the upper limit set in the Mpot top
limit parameter.
When set to None, no setting is executed

sets input = 0 i.e. a temporary reference setting is performed
and the previous reference value is maintained. The output
of the Motor potentiometer function varies with the set ramp
times. The previous reference value is restored when the reset
command is removed.
sets Inp = low lim i.e. a temporary reference setting is performed
Instruction manual
231
and the previous reference value is maintained. The output

times. The previous reference value is restored when the reset
command is removed.
sets Inp = 0 and Ref = 0 i.e. a definitive reference setting is
performed. The output of the Motor potentiometer function
varies with the set ramp times.
sets Inp = low lim and Ref = low lim i.e. a definitive reference
setting is performed. The output of the Motor potentiometer
function varies with the set ramp times.
sets Out = 0 i.e. a temporary output setting for the Motor potentiometer function is performed. The previous reference value is
maintained. If the reset command is enabled, the output of the
Motor potentiometer function continues to be = 0, if the reset
command is not enabled the output of the Motor potentiometer
function varies with the set ramp times.
sets Out = low lim i.e. a temporary setting for the output of
the Motor potentiometer function is performed.The previous
reference value is maintained. If the reset command is enabled,
the output of the Motor potentiometer function continues to
be = low limit, if the reset command is not enabled the output
times.
sets Out = 0 i.e. a definitive setting for the output of the Motor
potentiometer function is performed.
sets Out = low lim i.e. a definitive setting for the output of the
Motor potentiometer function is performed.
sets Inp = upper lim i.e. a temporary setting for the reference
is performed and the previous reference value is maintained.
The output of the Motor potentiometer function varies with the
set ramp times. The previous reference value is restored when
the reset command is removed.
sets Inp = upp lim and Ref = upp lim i.e. a definitive reference
setting is performed. The output of the Motor potentiometer
function varies with the set ramp times
When Inp Freeze input is set, the Up and Down commands are
temporarily disabled.
Inp Ref Zero
Inp Ref Low Limit
Out Zero
Out Low Limit
Out Ref Zero
Out Ref Low Limit
Inp Up Limit
Inp Ref Up Limit
Inp Freeze
Motor pot out
(Available thru GF_eXpress ). The value of the output of the motor potentiometer function when Config2 is used is displayed (RPM). This value can be sent on an analog
output.
232
TPD32-EV
6.14.2 Jog function

FUNCTIONS
Jog function
[244]
[265]
[375]
[266]
No.
Enable jog
Jog operation
Jog selection
Jog reference [FF]
min
max
Value
Factory
American
Disabled
Factory
Standard
Disabled
Standard
Configuration
Enable jog
244
Jog operation
Jog selection
265
375
Jog reference [FF]

Jog +
266
32767
**
398
Jog -
399
Speed input (0) / Ramp input (1)
No jog forwards (0)

Forwards jog (1)
No backwards jog (0)

Backwards jog (1)

**
This parameter can be assigned to a programmable analog input.
Enable jog
Enabled
Disabled
Jog operation

Pressing the + and - keys on the keypad enables the drive to be moved forward and
backward. In connection with the TPD32-EV...4B converters it is possible to operate
the Jog function in an anti-clockwise rotation by pressing the - key.
+
Jog clockwise rotation
-
Jog counter-clockwise rotation
Jog reference
Reference value for jog mode. Defined by the units, specified by the factor function.
Jog selection

This parameter determines if the Jog function reference must go through the ramp or
directly to the speed regulator.
Speed input
The Jog reference is directly defined. The ramp is not active.
Ramp input
The Jog reference is defined with a set ramp.
Jog +
High
Low
Jog -
High
Enabled Jog function (this selection is possible only when the

drive is switched off).
Disabled Jog function
Clockwise Jog function when the Jog function is enabled and

the Start command is not present.
Disabled
Counter-clockwise Jog function for the TPD32-EV...4B when the
Jog function is enabled and the Start command is not present.
Instruction manual
233
Speed ref 1
0 rpm
Start/Stop
Stop drive
Start/Stop
Stop drive
Speed ref 1 (%)
Enable jog
Enabled
Speed ref (d)
Jog selection
Speed Input
Percent ref var
Enable jog
Enabled
Jog selection
Speed Input
Speed limits
Ramp
Speed Regulator
Ramp ref (rpm)

F
Jog reference
100 rpm
Speed ref 2
0 rpm
Speed ref
Speed ref 2
%
Speed ref (d)
Speed ref (%)

Jog No Backward Jog
Jog +
No Forward Jog
+24V
0V 24
DRIVE
19
18
14
Digital input 4
Digital input 3
12 13
Jog -
Jog +
Digital input 1
15 11
Digital input 2
COM D I/O
Figure 6.14.2.1: Example of external activation in Jog mode
Note!

The following signals are required for Jog mode in addition to the commands Jog + and Jog - :
Enable drive
Fast Stop
External fault
Low Disabled
The jog speed corresponds to the value which is defined by the Jog reference parameter. In this case no ramp
is used.
The jog reference value can only be activated by the Jog + or Jog - command if there is no Start command active.
If the Start command is given in addition to the Jog + and Jog - command, Jog mode will be aborted and the
drive will react according to the Start command.
When controlled via the keypad the + and - keys can be used in the Jog function menu. (only for TPD32EV...4B...). For this select the Jog operation menu point.
The correction value Speed ref 2 for the speed regulator is also active in jog operation.
Note!
234
If the Stop control function is activated, to enable the Jog function the Jog Stop control
(FUNCTION/Stop control) must also be set to ON (1).
TPD32-EV
6.14.3 Multi speed function

FUNCTIONS
Multi speed fct
[153]
[154]
[155]
[156]
[157]
[158]
[159]
[160]
[208]
Enab multi spd

Multi speed 1 [FF]
Multi speed 2 [FF]
Multi speed 3 [FF]
Multi speed 4 [FF]
Multi speed 5 [FF]
Multi speed 6 [FF]
Multi speed 7 [FF]
Multispeed sel
The Multi speed function allows up to seven internally saved reference values to be called up via a digital signal.
Min Speed Limit
Speed limited
Speed min amount

0 rpm
Ramp ref 1
0 rpm
Speed min pos

0 rpm
Ramp Reference
Ramp output (d)
Enab multi spd
Ramp ref 2
Speed min neg

0 rpm
Multispeed
function
Ramp ref 1
Enab motor pot
Ramp ref 2
0 rpm
Speed sel 2
Bit 2 Not Selected
Speed sel 0
Bit 0 Not Selected
Speed sel 1
Bit 1 Not Selected
Ramp ref (d)

Motor potentiometer
function
13
14
Digital input 8
Digital input 7
12
COM D I/O
11
20
Digital input 6
15
0V 24
Digital input 5
19
18
+24V
TBO
21 22
Figure 6.14.3.1: Selection of different references via terminals
Instruction manual
235
min
max
153
Value
Factory
American
Disabled
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
400
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
0
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Digital inp 5 *
Speed sel 1
401
Digital inp 6 *
Speed sel 2
402
Digital inp 7 *
Multispeed sel
208
Enab multi spd

Multi speed 1 [FF]
Multi speed 2 [FF]
Multi speed 3 [FF]
Multi speed 4 [FF]
Multi speed 5 [FF]
Multi speed 6 [FF]
Multi speed 7 [FF]
Speed sel 0
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
Value 20 not selected (0)

Value 20 selected (1)
No.
Factory
Standard
Disabled
Standard
Configuration
Enab multi spd

Enabled
Disabled
Multi speed 1
Reference value 1 for enabled multi speed function. Defined by the units specified in
the factor function
Multi speed 2
the factor function
Multi speed 3
the factor function
Multi speed 4
the factor function
Multi speed 5
the factor function
Multi speed 6
the factor function
Multi speed 7
the factor function
Speed sel 0
Reference value selection with the significance 20 (=1) (Bit 0). Parameter can only be
used in conjunction with Speed sel 1 and Speed sel 2.
High
Significance 20 selected
Low
Significance 20 not selected

Speed sel 1

Speed sel 2

236
Enabled multi speed function

Disabled multi speed function
High
Low
High
Low
TPD32-EV
Multi speed sel
It is the word representation of the three parameters Speed sel 1 (bit0), Speed sel 2 (bit1)
and Speed sel 3 (bit2). Used to change the speed selection by changing only one parameter instead of three. This allows selecting different speeds via serial line or Bus
instantaneously.
The table and graph below show the interaction between the selection and the corresponding reference value.
Speed sel 0
Bit 0 Not Selected
Speed sel 1
Bit 1 Not Selected
Speed sel 2
Bit 2 Not Selected
REFERENCE
Multi speed 1
Multi speed 2
Multi speed 3
Multi speed 4
Multi speed 5
Multi speed 6
Ramp ref 1
0 rpm +
Ramp ref 2
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
0 rpm
Enable multi spd

Disabled
Multi speed sel.
0 rpm
0
Ramp ref (d)
Multi speed 7
0 rpm
Table 6.14.2.1: Multi speed function
Multi speed 7
2
1
Multi speed 6
Multi speed 0
Multi speed 5
Multi speed 4
Multi speed 3
Multi speed 1
Multi speed 2
7
6
0
Speed sel 0
Speed sel 1
Speed sel 2
Figure 6.14.3.2: Multi speed function
In order to operate the Multi speed function, it must be enabled with Enab multi spd parameter.
The required reference value is selected with the Speed sel 0, Speed sel1 and Speed sel 2 signals.
The selection of the reference values is carried out via the keypad or the serial interface.
The reference values are signed so that they can be defined for a particular rotation direction of the drive. As for
the TPD32-EV...2B... the reference must have a positive polarity.
When the Multi speed function is enabled, Multi speed 0 is defined by the addition of the reference values
Ramp ref 1 and Ramp ref 2.
Instruction manual
237
6.14.4 Multi ramp function

FUNCTIONS
Multi ramp fct
[243]
Enab multi rmp
[202]
Ramp selector
Multi ramp fct

Ramp 0
Acceleration 0
[659]
[660]
[665]
Acc delta speed0 [FF]

Acc delta time 0 [s]
S acc t const 0 [ms]
[661]
[662]
[666]
Dec delta speed0 [FF]

Dec delta time 0 [s]
S dec t const 0 [ms]
[23]
[24]
[667]

[31]
[32]
[668]

[25]
[26]
[669]

[33]
[34]
[670]

[27]
[28]
[671]

[35]
[36]
[672]

Deceleration 0
Ramp 1
Acceleration 1
Deceleration 1
Ramp 2
Acceleration 2
Deceleration 2
Ramp 3
Acceleration 3
Deceleration 3
The Multi ramp function enables up to four different ramps to be called up. The acceleration and deceleration
times can also be defined here separately. The ramps are called up via digital signals.
238
TPD32-EV
Enab multi rmp
243
Value
Factory
American
Disabled
Ramp selector
Ramp sel 0
202
659
660
665
661
662
666
23
24
667
31
32
668
25
26
669
33
34
670
27
28
671
35
36
672
403
0
0
0
100
0
0
100
0
0
100
0
0
100
0
0
100
0
0
100
0
0
100
0
0
100
0
3
232-1
65535
3000
232-1
65535
3000
232-1
65535
3000
232-1
65535
3000
232-1
65535
3000
232-1
65535
3000
232-1
65535
3000
232-1
65535
3000
1
0
100
1
300
100
1
300
100
1
300
100
1
300
100
1
300
100
1
300
100
1
300
100
1
300
0
0
100
1
300
100
1
300
100
1
300
100
1
300
100
1
300
100
1
300
100
1
300
100
1
300
0
Ramp sel 1
404

No.
min
max
Factory
Standard
Disabled
Standard
Configuration
-
Enab multi rmp

Ramp selector
Acc delta speed 0
Acc delta time 0
S acc t const 0
Dec delta speed0
Dec delta time 0
S dec t const 0
Acc delta speed1
Acc delta time 1
S acc t const 1
Dec delta speed1
Enabled
The Multi ramp function is enabled
Disabled
The Multi ramp function is disabled
It is the word representaton of the two parameters Ramp sel 0 (bit0) and Ramp sel 1
(bit1). Used to change the ramp selection by changing only one parameter instead of
two. This allows to select different ramps via serial line or Bus instantaneously.
It defines together with Acc delta time 0 the acceleration ramp 0. Defined by the units
specified in the factor function.
It defines together with Acc delta speed 0 the acceleration ramp 0. Defined in seconds.
Defines the acceleration curve for S-shape ramp 0. Defined in ms.
It defines together with Dec delta time 0 the deceleration ramp 0. Defined by the units
Defines the deceleration curve for S-shape ramp 0. Defined in ms.
Instruction manual
239
Dec delta time 1

S dec t const 1
Acc delta speed2
Acc delta time 2
S acc t const 2
Dec delta speed2
Dec delta time 2
S dec t const 2
Acc delta speed3
Acc delta time 3
S acc t const 3
Dec delta speed3
Dec delta time 3
S dec t const 3
Ramp sel 0

Ramp sel 1


It defines together with Dec delta speed 1 the deceleration ramp 1. Defined in seconds.
Ramp selection with the significance 20 (Bit 0). Parameter can only be used in conjunction with Ramp sel 1.
High
Low
Ramp selection with the significance 21 (Bit 1). Parameter can only be used in conjunction with Ramp sel 0.
High
Low
See in the following table and graph the interaction between the selection and the ramp
Ramp
Ramp
sel 0
sel 1
Ramp 0
Low
Low
Ramp 1
High
Low
Ramp 2
Low
High
Ramp 3
High
High
GD6242g
Table 6.14.4.1: Ramp selection
In order to activate the Multiramp function, it must be enabled with the Enab multi rmp parameter.
The ramp required is selected via the Ramp sel 0 and Ramp sel 1 signals. When the selection is made via the
terminal strip, it is possible to select only one digital input. This configuration enables only the ramp time selected. Another ramp can be selected at any time. If this happens during an acceleration or deceleration phase,
the reference value will then follow the new ramp. The ramp parameter are defined via the keypad or serial line.
240
TPD32-EV
Reference Ramp
Ramp inp
Ramp out
Enab multi rmp
Single ramp
Ramp sel 1
Bit 1 Not Selected
Multi Ramp Function
Ramp sel 0
Bit 0 Not Selected
Speed
12
13
14
Digital input 3
Digital input 4
Digital input 1 11
Digital input 2
15
COM D I/O
0V 24 18
+24V 19
TBO
Figure 6.14.4.1: Multi ramp selection via terminals
Reference Ramp
Enab multi rmp
Single ramp
Linear
Ramp
shape
selection
Ramp shape
Speed
S-shape
S acc t const 0
300 ms
S acc t const 1
300 ms
S acc t const 2
300 ms
S acc t const 3
300 ms
Multi Ramp Function
Acc delta speed 3

100 rpm
Acc delta speed 2
100 rpm
Acc delta speed 1
100 rpm
Acc delta speed0
100 rpm
Dec delta speed 3

100 rpm
Dec delta speed 2
100 rpm
Dec delta speed 1
100 rpm
Dec delta speed0
100 rpm
t
S dec t const 0
300 ms
S dec t const 1
300 ms
S dec t const 2
300 ms
S dec t const 3
300 ms
Acc delta time 0

1 s
Acc delta time 1
1 s
Acc delta time 2
1 s
Acc delta time 3
1 s
Dec delta time 0

1 s
Dec delta time 1
1 s
Dec delta time 2
1 s
Dec delta time 3
1 s
Figure 6.14.4.2: Multi ramp selection via signals
Instruction manual
241
6.14.5 Speed Draw function

FUNCTIONS
Speed draw
[1017]
[1018]
[1019]
Speed ratio
Speed draw out (d)
Speed draw out (%)
Speed ratio
Speed draw out (d)
Speed draw out (%)
min
max
1017
+32767
Value
Factory
American
+10000
1018
1019
-32768
-200.0
+32767
+200.0
No.
Factory
Standard
+10000
-
Standard
Configuration
Speed ratio
10000
From Ramp output
Enable ramp
To Max speed limits
Speed ratio
10000
Speed ref 2
0 rpm
Speed ref 1
0 rpm
Speed draw out
Figure 6.14.5.1: Speed draw block diagram
This function allows a configurable Speed ratio to be applied to the main reference Speed ref 1.
The Speed ratio range can be set between 0 and 32767 if written in digital form. It can be set from 0 to 20000
(0 to +10V) if assigned via an analog input.
This function is useful in a multidrive system where a speed ratio between the motors is required (see
example in figure 6.14.5.2).
The speed resulting value can be read through the Spd draw out parameter via an analog output.
Speed ratio
This parameter determines the speed ratio value.This setting can be done in digital form,
via LAN or through an analog input.
Spd draw out (d)
Speed value in the unit specified by the factor function.
Spd draw out (%)
Speed value as a percentage of Speed base value.
242
TPD32-EV
EXAMPLE (RUBBER CALENDER)

Example Setting:
MASTER = 1000 rpm
1050 rpm
1100 rpm
DRIVE A
DRIVE B
DRIVE C
AN. INPUT
1
AN. INPUT
1
2
AN. INPUT
1
2
Line speed
ratio 1 = +5%
Line speed
ratio 2 = +10%
+
Speed Ratio = 5.25V
(10500 count)
+
Speed Ratio = 5.5V
(11000 count)
+
LINE SPEED
Figure 6.14.5.2: Rubber calender example
DRIVE A (master)
Set Analog input 1 = Ramp ref 1
DRIVE B
Line speed ratio 1 = Line speed + 5%
Set Analog input 2 = Speed ratio
Set Speed ratio parameter = 10500
DRIVE C
Line speed ratio 2 = Line speed + 10%
Set Analog input 2 = Speed ratio
Set Speed ratio parameter = 11000
Instruction manual
243
6.14.6 Overload control

FUNCTIONS
Overload contr
[309]
[318]
[312]
[313]
[310]
[1289]
[655]
[1438]
[1439]
[311]
Enable overload
Overload mode
Overload current [%]
Base current [%]
Overload time [s]
Motor ovrld preal.
Motor I2t accum
Drive ovrld preal.
Drive I2t accum
Pause time [s]
Enable overload
309
Value
Factory
American
Enabled
Overload mode
318
I2t Motor
Curr limited
312
P313
200
150
100
313
P312 < 100
100
80
310
65535
60
30
100
50
50
Curr limited (0)
Curr not limited (1)
I2t Motor (2)
I2t Drive (3)
I2t Motor & Drv (4)

Base current [%]
Overload time [s]
Ventil. Type
Derating factor [%]
Motor ovrld preal.
Motor I2t accum
Drive ovrld preal.
Drive I2t accum
Pause time [s]
Overld available
SERVO (0)
AUTO (1)
Overload not possible (0)

Overload possible (1)
Overload state
Current limit value (0)

Current > limit value (1)
No.
min
max
Factory
Standard
Disabled
Standard
Configuration
-
914
915
1289
655
0.00
100.00
1438
1439
0.00
100.00
311
406
0
0
65535
1
540
-
300
-
Digital outp.4 *
407
This parameter can be assigned to a programmable digital output.
The Overload control function allows an overcurrent for a limited time that can also exceed the rated current of
the inverter. It is used in order to provide the drive with an increased acceleration torque or for example to allow
peak loads, such as with cyclical loads characteristis.
Enable overload

Enabled
Disabled
Overload control is enabled

Overload control is disabled
Overload mode
Curr limited
Curr not limited
The armature current is restricted to the limits set by the Overload control (size and duration of overcurrent).
The armature current is not limited by the Overload control. However, an alarm is possible via the Overload state
parameter. This alarm indicates whether the current is within
244
TPD32-EV
the set limits or not.

If Motor I2t ovrld is set to Activity = Ignore,

the current is reduced from Overload current parameter value
to Base current parameter value when Motor I2t accum =
100% (Overload current2 x Overload time)
If Motor I2t ovrld is set to Activity = Warning,

the current is maintained at Overload current parameter value
also when Motor I2t accum = 100% (Overload current2 x
Overload time)

I2t Motor
Motor I2t accum is equal to 100% if (Overload current2 x Overload time) is reached but
in any case the limit maximum is [(150% FLC)2 x 60 sec]
Note !
I2t Drive
I2t Motor & Drv
(*)
The current is limited to T current lim (+/-) value until

Drive I2t accum = 100% i.e. equal to [(150% Derated Drive
Current(*))2 x 60 sec]. When this value is reached, the drive is
disabled.
The current is limited to T current lim (+/-) value until reaching
Drive I2t accum = 100% [(150% Derated Drive Current(*))2 x
60 sec] if Motor I2t ovrld Activity is set to Warning & Ignore
or, If set to Disable drive until reaching Motor I2t accum =
100% (Overload current2 x Overload time).
Derated Drive Current:
If using the drive with Standard sizes (Size selection = Standard) the Derated Drive Current is
calculated as follows:
Derated Drive Current = Drive size x Derating_fact (see table "Table 6.14.6.1: I2t derating"
on page 246).
If using the drive with American sizes (Size selection = American) the Derated Drive Current is
calculated as follows:
Derated Drive Current = Drive size.
The motor overload function is designed to allow the current selected with Overload
Current for a time equal to Overload Time.
(I load - I ovld)*ts[sec] = ((Over Curr / 100) - 1)*I Flc * (Overload time)
I flc = full load current
The motor overload function gives the possibility to have 1.5 the Overload current for 60 sec.
If the threshold is higher than the value is limited to:
(I load - I Flc)*ts[sec] = (1.5 - 1)*I Flc * 60
The Motor ovrld preal. is available on digital output (code 65), it is 1 with Motor I2t
accum = 90 % and 0 when Motor I2t accum = 0.
The Overld available signal is available on digital output (code 6), it is 0 with Motor
I2t accum = 100 % and 1 with Motor I2t accum 0.
The Drive ovrld preal. is available on digital output (code 66), it is 1 with Drive I2t
accum = 90 % and 0 when Drive I2t accum = 0.
The Overld available signal is available on digital output (code 67), it is 0 with Drive
I2t accum = 100 % and 1 with Drive I2t accum 0.
Instruction manual
245
European
sizes
TPD32-EV-.../...-20-2B/4B-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-40-2B/4B-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-70-2B/4B-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-110-2B/4B-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-140-2B/4B-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-185-2B/4B-A
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-2B/4B-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-350-2B/4B-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-420-2B/4B-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-500-2B/4B-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-560-2B/4B-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-650-2B/4B-B
TPD32-EV-.../...-700-2B/4B-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-770-2B/4B-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-900-2B/4B-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-1000-2B-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-1050-4B-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-1000-2B-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-1050-4B-C
TPD32-EV-.../...-1300-4B-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1300-4B-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1300-2B-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1400-2B/4B-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1600-2B/4B-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-1900-2B/4B-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-2B/4B-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2100-2B/4B-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2300-2B/4B-D
TPD32-EV-.../...-2400-2B/4B-D
American
sizes
Derating
_fct
TPD32-EV-.../...-17-2B/4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-35-2B/4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-56-2B/4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-2B/4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-112-2B/4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-148-2B/4B-A-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-224-2B/4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-280-2B/4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-336-2B/4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-400-2B/4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-360-2B/4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-450-2B/4B-B-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-490-2B/4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-560-2B/4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-650-2B/4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-750-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-750-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-800-2B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-850-4B-C-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-920-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-980-4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-980-2B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1000-2B/4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1200-2B/4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1450-2B/4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1500-2B/4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1650-2B/4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1800-2B/4B-D-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1850-2B/4B-D-NA
0.85
0.88
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.64
0.69
0.70
0.73
0.72
0.75
0.71
0.80
0.81
0.71
0.75
0.75
0.71
0.75
0.76
0.75
0.79
0.78
0,77
European
sizes
TPD32-EV-.../...-1200-2B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1500-2B/4B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1700-4B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1800-2B/4B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-2B/4B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2400-2B/4B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2700-2B/4B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2900-2B/4B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-3300-2B/4B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1010-2B/4B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1400-2B/4B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-1700-2B/4B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-2B/4B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2400-2B/4B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-2700-2B/4B-E
TPD32-EV-.../...-3300-2B/4B-E
American
sizes
Derating
_fct
TPD32-EV-.../...-1000-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1300-2B/4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1350-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1400-2B/4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1500-2B/4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1800-2B/4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-2B/4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-2200-2B/4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-2350-2B/4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-900-2B/4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1150-2B/4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1350-2B/4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1500-2B/4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-1800-2B/4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-2000-2B/4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-.../...-2350-2B/4B-E-NA
0.83
0.87
0.79
0.78
0.75
0.75
0.74
0.76
0.71
0.89
0.82
0.79
0.75
0.75
0.74
0.71
Table 6.14.6.1: I2t derating
Overload current
Armature current that is permissible during the overload time (set with Overload time).
It is always 200% as a maximum of the active current at Full load curr and therefore
proportional to the torque.
Base current
Armature current that is permissible during the pause time (set with Pause time). The
percentage refers to the active current at Full load curr.
Overload time
Maximum time in which the Overload current is permissible.
Ventil. Type
AUTO

Note !
Auto fan indicates the presence of a fan unit mounted on the

motor shaft that therefore turns at a speed propor-tional to the
motor speed. Cooling is not very effective at low motor speeds.
SERVO
Servo fan indicates the presence of an independent fan unit that
therefore always runs at the rated speed. It en-sures optimum
cooling efficiency at all motor speeds.
The management of motor control overload with auto-ventilated motor has the aim of generating a motor Overload alarm before the threshold (configured by the parameters 310
Overload time and 312 Overload current is reached) when the motor speed is less than
half of the nominal .
It is also implemented to save the internal I2t accumulator of the drive and motorat the power
off. In this way, at the power on the parameter value 655 (Motor I2t accum) and 1439 (Drive
I2t accum) will be equal to the present value at the time of the previous power off.
Derating factor
This parameter is used to set the derating factor for Auto fan motor and represents the
continuous output current value at zero speed expressed as percentage of the full load
current. When motor speed is below 50% of nominal value the continuous output current is linearly decreased from 100% of full load current to this value.
Pause time
Minimum time between two Overload cycles. During this time the Base current is permissible.
Motor I2t accum
It gives a percentage definition of the integration of the rms current. 100% = trip level motor
I2t . Motor I2t accum is equal to 100% if (Overload current2 x Overload time) is reached
but in any case with a maximum limit of [(150% FLC) 2 x 60 sec].
246
TPD32-EV
Motor ovrld preal.
This signal can be set on a digital output (code 65). It goes to the high level (1) when
Motor I2t accum = 90 %. It goes to low level (0) when Motor I2t accum = 0.
Drive I2t accum
It gives a percentage definition of the integration of the rms current. 100% = trip level
drive I2t. Drive I2t accum is equal to 100% if [(150% Derated Drive Current(*))2 x 60
sec] is reached.
Drive ovrld preal.
This signal can be set on a digital output (code 66). It goes to the high level (1) when
Drive I2t accum = 90 %. It goes to low level (0) when Drive I2t accum = 0.
Overld available
Indicates whether an overload is possible this very instant or whether this is not yet the
case, due to the set cycle (Pause time not yet expired).
High Overload possible
Low Overload currently not possible

Overload state

Note!
If the Overload mode parameter is defined so that the current is not limited by the
Overload control, the Overload state can be used to determine whether the current is
within the set limits or not.
High Current exceeds the set limits
Low Current does not exceed the set limits.
Overload state is not a latched output. For I2t, it is can be considered as a one shot.
The Overload control is enabled with the Enable overload parameter. It can be used to protect the drive or motor
from thermal overloads with cyclical loads.
The max. possible values (as for the converter) are obtainable through the following curves. The operating point
must always be below the corresponding curve. At the verification it is to state, that the torque and the current
are proportional.
The Overld available parameter allows to understand if the drive is ready to supply an overload current. If the
current exceeds the value defined by the Base current parameter, the time set by the Overload time parameter
starts to run. Once this time has expired, the current is limited again to the Base current. This takes place irrespective of how high the overload was and how long it lasted. A subsequent overload is permissable immediately
after the time set by the Pause time parameter. If Overload mode is set to Curr not limited, The current is not
limited but the Overload state parameter indicates whether it is out of the defined range.
Caution!
A wrong input of the values may cause the destruction of the device!
Overload
time [310]
Pause
time [311]
Overload
time [310]
Pause
time [311]
Waiting
time
Overload
time [310]
Overload
current [312]
Limits
Base
current [313]
T current
Time
Overld
available [406]
Overload
state [407]
Figure 6.14.6.1: Overload control (Overload mode = curr limited)
Instruction manual
247
Overload
time [310]
Pause
time [311]
Overload
time [310]
Pause
time [311]
Waiting
time
Overload
time [310]
Overload
current [312]
Limits
Base
current [313]
T current
Time
Overld
available [406]
Overload
state [407]
Figure 6.14.6.2: Overload control (Overload mode= curr not limited)
248
TPD32-EV
Acceptable overload curves (American sizes)

Idan = 17A (-NA)
Idan = 35A (-NA)
Base current = 100 % I dAN
2,00
2,00
2,00
30 s
Overload time
1s
60 s
1s
1,75
Overload time
Overload time
1,75
1,75
1,50
1,50
1,50
1,25
1,25
1,25
30 s
60 s
1s
30 s
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
Overload time / (Pause time + Overload time)
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
Overload current / I dAN
0,2
1,00
0,1
1,00
0,1
60 s
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
0,9
1,0
Idan = 35A (-NA)

Base current = 50 % IdAN
2,00
2,00
30 s
2,00
1s
Overload time
Overload time
1s
30 s
1,75
Overload time
1,75
1,75
60 s
1,50
1s
30 s
60 s
1,50
1,50
60 s
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
Idan = 56A (-NA)
1,00
0,1
1,25
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
Idan = 88A (-NA)

2,00
2,00

2,00
1s
Overload time
Overload time
1s
1,75
1,75
Overload time
1,75
1s
30 s
60 s
1,50
1,50
1,50
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,00
0,1
Overload current / IdAN
1,25
1,25
1,00
0,1
30 s
30 s
60 s
60 s
1,25
0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0

1,00
0,1
0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0

Idan = 88A (-NA)

2,00
2,00
Overload time
Overload time
1,75
1,75
30 s
Overload time
1,75
1s
30 s
1,25
1,50
60 s
1,25
0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0

1,00
0,1
Overload current / I dan
60 s
1s
1s
1,50
1,50
1,00
0,1

2,00
30 s
60 s
1,25
0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0

1,00
0,1
Instruction manual
0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0

249
Idan = 112A (-NA)

2,00
2,00
2,00
Overload time
1s
Overload time
1,75
Overload time
1,75
1,75
1s
30 s
30 s
1,25
1,50
1,50
1,50
60 s
1,25
1,00
0,1
1s
30 s
60 s
1,00
0,1
0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0

60 s
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0

0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0

Idan = 112A (-NA)
Idan = 148A (-NA)
2,00
2,00
2,00
1s
Overload time
30 s
Overload time
Overload time
60 s
1,75
1,75
30 s
1,75
1s
1s
1,50
1,50
60 s
1,25
30 s
60 s
1,50
1,25
1,00
0,1
1,00
0,1
0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0

0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0

1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
0,9
1,0
0,9
1,0
Idan = 148A (-NA)


2,00
2,00
2,00
1s
Overload time
Overload time
Overload time
30 s
1,75
1,75
1,75
60 s
1s
1,50
1,50
60 s
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
30 s
1,25
1,50
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1s
1,25
30 s
60 s
1,00
0,1
Idan = 148A (-NA)
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
Idan = 224A (-NA)


2,00
2,00
2,00
1,75
1,75
1s
1s
Overload time
30 s
Overload time
Overload time
60 s
1,75
30 s
60 s
1,50
1,50
1,25
1,25
1s
30 s
60 s
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
250
0,9
1,0
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,25
1,50
TPD32-EV
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
Idan = 224A (-NA)

2,00
2,00
2,00
1s
Overload time
1,75
Overload time
30 s
Overload time
1s
1,75
1,75
30 s
60 s
60 s
1,50
1,25
1,25
1,50
1,50
1s
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,00
0,1
30 s
60 s
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
0,9
1,0
0,9
1,0
0,9
1,0
Idan = 280A (-NA)

Base current = 00 % I
dAN
2,00
dAN
2,00
1s
1s
30 s
30 s
Overload time
60 s
1s
Overload time
Overload time
30 s
1,75
1,75
1,75
60 s
1,50
60 s
1,50
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,50
1,25
1,00
0,1
dAN
2,00
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
Idan = 280A (-NA)

30 s
0,8
1s
60 s
Overload time
30 s
0,7
1s
Overload time
1,75
0,6
2,00
2,00
1s
0,5
Idan = 336A (-NA)

dAN
2,00
0,4
Overload time
1,75
1,75
30 s
60 s
1,50
1,50
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,50
1,25
60 s
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
Idan = 336A (-NA)

2,00
2,00
2,00
1s
1s
1s
Overload time
30 s
Overload time
60 s
Overload time
30 s
1,75
1,75
30 s
1,75
60 s
60 s
1,50
1,50
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,25
1,50
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,25
1,00
0,1
Instruction manual
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
251
Idan = 336A (-NA)
Idan = 400A (-NA)
2,00
2,00
2,00
1s
Overload time
Overload time
Overload time
60 s
1,75
1,75
1,75
60 s
30 s
1,50
1,50
60 s
1,50
1,25
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
1s
30 s
30 s
1s
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,25
1,00
0,1
1,0
1,00
0,1
0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0

0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0

Idan = 400A (-NA)

2,00
2,00
2,00
1s
1s
Overload time
30 s
1,75
Overload time
Overload time
1s
1,75
1,75
30 s
1,50
1,25
1,50
1,50
1,00
0,1
30 s
60 s
60 s
1,25
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0

60 s
1,00
0,1
0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0

0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0

Idan = 450A (-NA)

2,00
2,00
2,00
1s
Overload time
30 s
Overload time
1,75
1,75
30 s
60 s
Overload time
1,75
30 s
1s
1s
60 s
1,50
1,50
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,25
dAN
dAN
dAN
0,2
1,50
Overload current / I
1,25
1,00
0,1
60 s
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
0,9
1,0
Idan = 450A (-NA)
Idan = 560A (-NA)

2,00
2,00
1s
Overload time
Overload time
2,00
1,75
1,75
1s
30 s
30 s
1s
Overload time
30 s
60 s
1,75
1,50
1,50
60 s
60 s
dAN
1,25
1,50
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
dAN
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
252
TPD32-EV
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
Idan = 560A (-NA)

2,00
2,00
2,00
1s
1s
1s
Overload time
30 s
Overload time
1,75
Overload time
30 s
1,75
1,75
60 s
30 s
60 s
1,50
1,50
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,25
1,25
1,00
0,1
60 s
1,50
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,25
1,00
0,1
Idan = 560A (-NA)
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
0,9
1,0
0,9
1,0
Idan = 850A (-NA)

2,00
2,00
2,00
1s
Overload time
30 s
1s
Overload time
Overload time
1,75
1,75
1,75
30 s
60 s
60 s
1,50
1,50
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,50
1,25
1,00
0,1
1s
30 s
60 s
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
Idan = 850A (-NA)

2,00
2,00
2,00
Overload time
Overload time
1,75
Overload time
1,75
30 s
1,75
1s
30 s
1,50
1s
1s
1,50
1,50
30 s
60 s
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
60 s
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
60 s
1,25
1,00
0,1
Instruction manual
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
253
Acceptable overload curves (Standard sizes)

Idan = 20 ... 70A
2,00
2,00
Overload time
Overload time
Overload time
1,75
1s
1,50
30 s
60 s
1,25
1,75
1,75
2,00
1s
1,50
30 s
1,25
60 s
1,50
1s
30 s
1,25
60 s
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,00
0,1
1,0
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,00
0,1
1,0
Idan = 20 ... 70A
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
0,9
1,0
0,9
1,0
0,9
1,0
Idan = 110 ... 185A
2,00
2,00
2,00
Overload time
Overload time
Overload time
1s
1,75
1,75
1,75
1,50
1s
1,25
30 s
1s
1,50
30 s
60 s
1,25
1,50
30 s
1,25
60 s
60 s
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,00
0,1
1,0
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,00
0,1
1,0
0,2
0,3
Idan = 110 ... 185A
0,5
0,7
0,8

2,00
2,00
Overload time
Overload time
Overload time
1,75
0,6
Idan = 280 ... 650A

2,00
0,4
1,75
1,75
1s
1,50
30 s
1,25
1s
1,50
1s
1,25
1,50
30 s
1,25
30 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,00
0,1
1,0
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,00
0,1
1,0
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
Idan = 280 ... 650A

2,00
2,00
Overload time
Overload time
Overload time
1,75
1s
1,50
30 s
1,25
1,75
1,75
2,00
1s
1,50
1,25
1,50
1s
1,25
30 s
30 s
60 s
60 s
60 s
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
Idan = 770 ... 1050A
254
TPD32-EV
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
2,00
2,00
2,00
Overload time
Overload time
Overload time
1,75
1,75
1,75
1,50
30 s
1,25
1s
1,50
30 s
1,25
60 s
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
1s
1,50
1s
1,25
30 s
60 s
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
60 s
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
Idan = 770 ... 1050A

2,00
Overload time
1,75
1,50
1s
1,25
30 s
60 s
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
Instruction manual
255
Overload current Idan
TPD32-690/810-1010-2B-E
TPD32-500/600-1200-2B-E
TPD32-690/810-1010-2B-E
TPD32-690/810-1400-2B-E
TPD32-500/600-1200-2B-E
TPD32-690/810-1400-2B-E
= 10 s.
256
TPD32-EV
= 20 s.
= 30 s.
= 60 s.
TPD32-500/600-1500-2B-E
TPD32-690/810-1700-2B-E
TPD32-500/600-1500-2B-E
TPD32-500/600-1800-2B-E
TPD32-690/810-1700-2B-E
TPD32-500/600-1800-2B-E
= 10 s.
= 20 s.
Instruction manual
= 30 s.
= 60 s.
257
TPD32-500/600-2000-2B-E
TPD32-690/810-2000-2B-E
TPD32-500/600-2000-2B-E
TPD32-500/600-2400-2B-E
TPD32-690/810-2000-2B-E
TPD32-500/600-2400-2B-E
= 10 s.
258
TPD32-EV
= 20 s.
= 30 s.
= 60 s.
TPD32-690/810-2400-2B-E
TPD32-500/600-2700-2B-E
TPD32-690/810-2400-2B-E
TPD32-690/810-2700-2B-E
TPD32-500/600-2700-2B-E
TPD32-690/810-2700-2B-E
= 10 s.
= 20 s.
Instruction manual
= 30 s.
= 60 s.
259
TPD32-500/600-2900-2B-E
TPD32-500/600-3300-2B
TPD32-690/810-3300-2B
TPD32-500/600-2900-2B-E
TPD32-690/720-1010-4B-E
TPD32-500/600-3300-2B-E
TPD32-690/810-3300-2B-E
TPD32-690/720-1010-4B-E
= 10 s.
260
TPD32-EV
= 20 s.
= 30 s.
= 60 s.
TPD32-690/720-1400-4B-E
TPD32-500/520-1500-4B-E
TPD32-690/720-1400-4B-E
TPD32-500/520-1700-4B-E
TPD32-500/520-1500-4B-E
TPD32-500/520-1700-4B-E
= 10 s.
= 20 s.
Instruction manual
= 30 s.
= 60 s.
261
TPD32-690/720-1700-4B-E
TPD32-500/520-2000-4B-E
TPD32-690/720-1700-4B-E
TPD32-690/720-2000-4B-E
TPD32-500/520-2000-4B-E
TPD32-690/720-2000-4B-E
= 10 s.
262
TPD32-EV
= 20 s.
= 30 s.
= 60 s.
TPD32-500/520-2400-4B-E
TPD32-690/720-2400-4B-E
TPD32-500/520-2400-4B-E
TPD32-500/520-2700-4B-E
TPD32-690/720-2400-4B-E
TPD32-500/520-2700-4B-E
= 10 s.
= 20 s.
Instruction manual
= 30 s.
= 60 s.
263
TPD32-690/720-2700-4B-E
TPD32-690/720-2700-4B-E
= 10 s.
264
TPD32-EV
= 20 s.
= 30 s.
= 60 s.
Example
Motor
Loadcycle
P = 30 kW, Armature volts = 420 V, Armature current = 82 A

The motor is overloaded for 1 s at 180 % of the rated current, then it works at the rated
load for at least 5 s. Four quadrant converter.
At first select the dc current according to the motor rated current. Usually it is the motor
rated current. If the determined motor operating point is not below the Overload curve
of the converter, the calculation should be repeated with the next larger converter size.
TPD32-EV-500/520-110-4B-A
Procedure
Converter
Diagram
Base current
82 A
=
IdAN
= 0.75
110 A
for05
This means that the diagram for the converters 110 A ... 185 A with a Base current = 75
% has to be considered for the calculation.
Operating point
Basis: rated data of the converter

Overload current = 82A
. 1.8 = 147.6A
for06
Overload current
Overload factor
147.6 A
=
Id AN (of converter)

Overload time
= 1.34
110A
for07
1s
=
Pause time + Overload time
= 0.16
5s + 1s
for08
dAN
2,00
Overload time
1,75
1,50
1s
1,25
1,00
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
Figure 6.14.6.3: Example- Operating point of drive
The calculated operating point is below the corresponding curve for an overload time of 1 s. Therefore the converter is suitable for the application. The following two settings are possible:
Full load curr
Enable overload
Overload current
Base current
Overload time
Pause time
Note!
82 A
Enabled
180 %
100 %
1s
5 s
or
110 A
or
or
134 %
75 %
The percentages for Overload current and Base current are referred to Full load curr and
not to the converter rated current!
Instruction manual
265
6.14.7 Stop control

FUNCTIONS
Stop control
[626]
[627]
[628]
[630]
Stop mode
Spd 0 trip delay [ms]
Trip cont delay [ms]
Jog stop control
This function is intended to help the system engineer to coordinate the AC input contactor with the drive enabling.
According to the selected mode the terminals 75 and 76 drive the ON/OFF of the AC input contactor.
Basically, when the drive receives the Start command the Relay 2 closes the AC input contactor, the drive waits
for a certain time the AC input voltage, syncronizes itself and starts the motor. When the drive stops , the motor goes to zero speed. When the zero speed is reached, the drive is disabled only when a Spd 0 trip delay is
elapsed. Then after the Trip cont delay the Relay 2 opens to remove the supply from the drive.
Stop mode
626
Value
Factory
American
Stop & Speed 0

Jog stop control
627
628
630
0
0
0
40000
40000
1
0
0
OFF
OFF (0)
Stop & speed 0 (1)
Fast stp & spd 0 (2)
Fst / stp & spd 0 (3)
OFF (0)
ON (1)
No.
min
max
Factory
Standard
Stop & Speed 0
0
0
OFF
Standard
Configuration
*
Relay 75 / 76
Figure 6.14.7.1: Start and stop management
Stop mode

266
OFF
Stop & Speed 0
The function is disabled.

The Start command determines the behavior. If the Start command is not present (digital or via terminal strip) and the drive is
stopped, the converter is blocked and the contact is open. When
the Start command is given, the converter is enabled and the
contact is closed. Disabling the Start command and after reaching
TPD32-EV
zero speed, the converter is blocked after a timespan set by Spd

0 trip delay. The relay contact between the terminals 75/76
opens after a timespan set by Trip cont delay.
The Fast Stop command determines the behavior. If the Fast
Stop command is present (digital or via terminal strip; f.e. with
0 V on the terminal 14) and the drive is stopped, the converter is
blocked and the contact is open.When the Fast Stop command
is disabled (i.e. with 24 V on the terminal 14), The converter is
enabled and the contact is closed. Entering the Fast Stop command, when the zero speed has been reached, the converter is
blocked after a timespan set with Spd 0 trip delay.
The Fast Stop and Start commands determine the behavior. When
the Stop or Fast Stop commands are present and the drive is stopped,
the converter is blocked and the contact is open. When the Start
command is given or when the Fast Stop command is disabled, the
converter is blocked and the contact is closed. When the Start command is disabled or when a Fast Stop command is entered and after
reaching zero speed, the converter is stopped after a timespan set
by Spd 0 trip delay. The relay contact between the terminals
75/76 opens after a timespan set by Trip cont delay.
Fast stp & spd 0
Fst / stp & spd 0
Spd 0 trip delay
Delay time in ms between reaching zero speed and disenabling of the converter.
Trip cont delay
Delay time in ms between disenabling and opening of the contact between the terminals
75 and 76.
Jog stop control
OFF
ON
The behavior selected by Stop mode has no influence on the

Jog function.
The behavior selected by Stop mode is active also on the Jog
function.
The mentioned contact can be either the one between the terminals 75/76 or a digital output (option TBO).
In both cases during the display of the message the Stop control parameter must be selected. The function
is factory set on the relay contact. The open contact, mentioned in the description, corresponds to 0 V on the
digital output, while the closed contact corresponds to +24 V on the digital output.
Note!
At all the described possiblilities for Stop mode, the stop signal on the terminal 13 must be
present. With Main commands = Digital, it is necessary to select Enable drive parameter
= Enabled via keypad or Bus.
Instruction manual
267
6.14.8 Brake control

FUNCTIONS
Brake control
[1295]
[1262]
[1293]
[1294]
[1266]
Enable Torque pr
Closing speed [rpm]
Torque delay [ms]
Torque proving [%]
Actuator delay [ms]
Enable Torque pr
Closing speed [rpm]
Torque delay [ms]
Torque proving [%]
Actuator delay [ms]
min
max
1295
Value
Factory
American
Disabled
1262
1293
1294
1266
0
0
0
0
200
30000
200
30000
30
3000
75
1000
No.
Factory
Standard
Disabled
30
3000
75
1000
Standard
Configuration
-
The purpose of this function is to make sure the drive generates sufficient torque to support the load of cranes
or other hoisting equipment, during the brake release transient phase.
Enable Torque pr
Enables the mechanical brake control function. It is used to apply a torque capable of
sustaining a load during the transient phase of releasing/opening the brake.
Closing speed
After sending a stop command to the drive, this is the speed of the motor for which the
brake is closed.
Torque delay
The delay, after a start command, within which the brake opening transient phase must
be completed so that the Brake Fault alarm is not enabled.
Torque proving
The value of the current capable of sustaining the load before the brake is released
(percentage of FLC). This can be set via parameter or analog input set as Brake Ref
(32).
Actuator delay
The time from when an open brake command is sent until the reference is active.
268
TPD32-EV
RUN
START
Torque front monitoring time
T = 1 sec
Brake drop
out speed
detection
Induced
current
Brake
release
current
detection
Brake
switch
command
Brake
switch
feedback
Actual
opening
of brake
pads
Actuator delay
time
Ramp
validation
Brake drop out threshold

Speed
feedback
Switch
delayed
feedback
Inverter
locking
Mechanical
brake
fault
Engaging fault
Engaging fault
Figure 6.14.8.1: Diagram of control
Diagram of control
Functional diagram with minimal use of inputs and outputs. Specific assignments of this diagram:
DI1:
Fwd sign Ascending, conventionally Forward
DI2 :
Rev sign Descending, conventionally Reverse
DI3:
Brake fbk, mechanical brake feedback/relay status
Relay 2: Brake command KM10 contactor command
With reference to the previous graph, a brake alarm condition occurs if:
-
when the brake is released, following the Enable and Start commands, the value of the current supplied by
the drive is unable to sustain the load (indicated by the Torque proving parameter and signalled by the brake
command digital output) in a time that is less than the Torque delay time; or, if the current is adequate, the
signal confirming that the brake has been released (Brake fbk) has not been received, again within the time
set in Torque delay.
when the brake is closed, once the speed set in the Closing speed parameter has been reached (signalled
Instruction manual
269
Figure 6.14.8.2: Brake control diagram
TPD32-EV
M1
G1
F12
D1
2F2
1F1
V1
C1
U1
L1
F13
1B1
F3
Q1
PE
PE
82
81
PE
(5)
(2)
2B2
U2
Q2
79
(4)
Thermistor (3)
78
V2
4 6
SMPS
2
U3
4
V3
1 3 5
230 VAC
115 - 230 VAC
1 3
FAN PWR
CNTL PWR
A+
(1)
Y1
2
1
RS 485
TPD32..2B
B- 0V 24V
XE2
Keypad
Electromagnetic brakes:
Provide an RC filter downline of KM10
A- B+
KM10
Q10
TPD32...4B
+ 10 V
F2
Left
0
Rigth
K1M
36
22
23
76
K1M
24
11
Relay 2 [P629]
75
21
R1 (2 ... 5 kOhm)
ok [P412]
35 (6)
M1-M2
Analog outputs
25
12
13
27
28
30
15
0V
+ 24 V
37
Analog input 2
14
29
W1
K0
Analog input 1
K2
26
Digital outputs
Fast stop
Supply
External
Fault
16
COM ID
33
18
* Or brake
contact
open
32
19
34
Analog input 3
31
Digital inputs
KM10 *
+ 24V
- 10 V
Enable
drive
-
0 V 10
Start
+
F11
0V
0 V24
-
270
+
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
by the digital output of the brake command), the input signal (Brake fbk) has not been sent in less than 1
second.
If no brake feedback (Brake fbk) has been set the sequence continues without the test and no alarm is triggered.
6.14.9 Current limitation according to the speed (I/n curve)

FUNCTIONS
I/n curve
[750]
[751]
[752]
[753]
[754]
[755]
[756]
I/n curve
I/n lim 0 [%]
I/n lim 1 [%]
I/n lim 2 [%]
I/n lim 3 [%]
I/n lim 4 [%]
I/n speed [rpm]
This function allows the changing of the current limits In use Tcur lim + / - according to the motor speed,
through a curve composed by six setpoints. The I/n speed and I/n lim 0,1,2,3,4are the parameters that allow to define the curve.
I/n curve
min
max
750
Value
Factory
American
0
751
752
753
754
755
756
0
0
0
0
0
0
200
200
200
200
200
P162
0
0
0
0
0
0
No.
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
I/n lim 0 [%]

I/n lim 1 [%]
I/n lim 2 [%]
I/n lim 3 [%]
I/n lim 4 [%]
I/n speed [rpm]
Factory
Standard
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Standard
Configuration
-
I/n speed parameter defines the speed range in which the current
limits are kept at the value of I/n lim 0. The speed range included between I/n speed and the 100% of the
max. speed will be divided internally in four equal segments, at the ends of which the current limits I/n lim
0,1,2,3,4 are associated. The set values must decrease , starting from I/n lim 0 up to I/n lim 4.
I/n curve

Enabled
Disabled
I/n lim 0
Current limit of the I/n curve that operates constantly up to the speed set by the I/n
speed parameter.
I/n lim 1
First current limit which states the Taper current curve construction.
I/n lim 2
Second current limit which states the curve construction.
I/n lim 3
Third current limit which states the curve construction.
I/n lim 4
Fourth current limit which states the curve construction.
I/n speed
Threshold speed at which torque reduction starts.
Limits current /speed curve enabled

Limits current /speed curve disabled
In use Tcur lim
I/n lim 0
I/n lim 1
I/n lim 2
I/n lim 3
I/n lim 4
I/n speed
Motor max speed
Figure 6.14.9.1 Current limitation according to the speed
Instruction manual
271
6.15 SPEC FUNCTIONS

6.15.1 Test generator
SPEC FUNCTIONS
Test generator
[58]
[59]
[60]
[61]
Generator access
Gen frequency [Hz]
Gen amplitude [%]
Generator offset [%]
Generator access
58
Value
Factory
American
Not conn.
Gen frequency [Hz]

Gen amplitude [%]
59
60
61
0.1
0
-200.00
62.5
200.00
+200.00
0.1
0
0
Not connected (0)
T current ref (2)
Flux ref (3)
Ramp ref (4)
Speed ref (5)
No.
min
max
Factory
Standard
Not conn.
0.1
0
0
Standard
Configuration
The test generator of the TPD32-EV converter is used to manual tune the regulators. It consists of a square wave
generator whose frequency, offset and amplitude can be set. The output signal of the Test Generator can be
set on a programmable analog output.
Gen access
Not Connected
Generator
output
Gen amplitude
0 %
Gen offset
0 %
Time
Gen frequency
0.1 Hz
Figure 6.15.1.1: Test generator output
Gen access
Different parameters can be simulated by the test generator. The parameter concerned
then has the value of the generator output.
Gen frequency
Output frequency of the generator in Hz.
Gen amplitude
Amplitude of the square-wave signal produced by the generator in percent.
Generator offset
Offset of the generator in percent.
The generator output consists of the addition of Gen amplitude and Generator offset.
272
TPD32-EV
6.15.2 Saving parameters, loading default factory settings, life time

SPEC FUNCTIONS
[256]
[258]
[235]
Save parameters
Load default
Life time [h.min]
Save parameters
Load default
Life time [h.min]
No.
min
max
Value
Factory
American
Factory
Standard
256
258
235
Standard
Configuration
-
0.00
65535.00
Save parameters
Saving of parameters that are currently set by the user. This command can also be given
from keypad, when Bus through the Control mode parameter, has been selected.
Load default
Loading of the default settings (Factory column in the parameter table).
Life time
Shows the operating time of the converter. This parameter counts the time in which the
converter is powered on (even if disabled).
Default values for individual parameters are factory set in the device. These values are shown in the Factory
column of the individual parameter tables. In order to obtain the values specific to your application when the
device is switched on, they must be saved via the Save parameters command after being set.
The factory default values can be re-loaded by selecting Load default. If these are not saved, the application
specific drive settings will still be available the next time the drive is switched on.
When the device is switched on the saved parameter set is loaded.
The Tacho scale and Speed offset parameters are used for the fine scaling of the speed feedback circuit. When the factory set parameters are loaded (Load Default) these two parameters
do not change, so that a new scaling is not required!
Note!
6.15.3 Failure Register

SPEC FUNCTIONS
[330]
[262]
[263]
Failure register
Failure reset
Failure reg del
Failure register
Failure reset
Failure reg del
Failure register
Failure reset
Failure reg del
No.
330
min
max
10
Value
Factory
American
10
Factory
Standard
10
262
263
Standard
Configuration
-
The Failure register contains the last 10 failures that have occurred. It also contains
information about the time the failure occurred, based on the operating hours (Life
time), as well as information on the type of failure. This information can be accessed
by pressing the E key on the keypad when a failure is indicated. If several failures occur in sequence, all the failures are stored in the failure register until a failure occurs
that causes the disconnection of the drive (Latch = ON, see Programmable alarms).The
content of the failure register can also be read out via the bus or the serial interface.
Acknowledgement of a failure. The failure reset can be initiated by pressing the CANC
key when the failure is shown in the display of the keypad. If, however, several failures
occur in sequence, these can only be reset by selecting Failure reset command through
the E key.
Clearing the failure register.
The informations about the last 10 failures that have occurred are available thru serial line in the following way:
- Set the parameter FAILURE REGISTER [330], it indicates the position number of the failure occurred:
Example, if set to 10 it will be the last failure.
- Read: FAILURE TEXT [327], FAILURE HOUR [328], FAILURE MIN [329], they indicate the type and
when the alarm is occurred
Instruction manual
273
6.15.4 Signal adaptation

SPEC FUNCTIONS
Links
Link 1
[484]
[485]
[486]
[487]
[488]
[489]
[490]
[491]
[492]
Source
Destination
Mul gain
Div gain
Input max
Input min
Input offset
Output offset
Inp absolute
Link 2 ... 6
[553]
[554]
[555]
[556]
[557]
[558]
[559]
[560]
[561]
Source
Destination
Mul gain
Div gain
Input max
Input min
Input offset
Output offset
Inp absolute
OFF / ON
[1218]
[1219]
[1220]
[1221]
[1222]
[1223]
[1224]
[1225]
[1226]
[1227]
[1228]
[1229]
[1230]
[1231]
[1232]
[1233]
[1234]
[1235]
[1236]
[1237]
[1238]
[1239]
[1240]
[1241]
[1242]
[1243]
[1244]
[1245]
[1246]
[1247]
[1248]
[1249]
[1250]
[1251]
[1252]
[1253]
Source
Destination
Mul gain
Div gain
Input max
Input min
Input offset
Output offset
Inp absolute
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
min
484
553
1218
1227
1236
1245
Value
Standard
Factory
Factory
Configuration
max American Standard
65535
0
0
-
485
554
1219
1228
1237
1246
65535
486
555
1220
1229
1238
1247
-10000 +10000
487
556
1221
1230
1239
1248
-10000 +10000
488
557
1222
1231
1240
1249
-231
231-1
489
558
1223
1232
1241
1250
-231
231-1
490
559
1224
1233
1242
1251
-231
231-1
491
492
560
561
1225
1226
1234
1235
1243
1244
1252
1253
-231
0
231-1
1
0
OFF
0
OFF
Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4 Link 5 Link 6
The Link1 and Link 6 functions are two control section operating independently of each other for the signal
adaptation. With the Links, parameters can be: rectified, limited, multiplied by a factor, divided by a factor
and provided with an offset.
Source
Parameter number used as an input quantity. For example 8236 for the Ramp ref 1
parameter (44+8192 offset). Select the parameter number in the individual descriptions
or in the list of all parameters in section 10, Parameter list.
Destination
Parameter number, which determines the output quantity. Select the parameter number
(+8192 offset) in the individual description column or in the list of all parameters in
section 10, Parameter lists.
Mul gain
Multiplicative factor of the input quantity (after a possible limitation). Resolution: 5 digits.
Div gain
Divisor, through which it is possible to divide the input quantity already multiplied and
limited. Resolution: 5 digits.
Input max
Max. limit of the input quantity. Resolution: 5 digits.
Input min
Min. limit of the input quantity. Resolution: 5 digits.
Input offset
Offset to be added to the input quantity. Resolution: 5 digits.
Output offset
Offset to be added to the output quantity. Resolution: 5 digits.
274
TPD32-EV
Inp absolute

The input behavior can be determined with this parameter.

OFF
The input quantity is processed with its sign.
ON
The input quantity is processed with a positive sign (absolute
value). It is possible to have a polarity change with the signs
of Mul gain or Div gain.
In order to write SOURCE LINK (1/6) parameter or DESTINATION LINK (1/6) parameter it is necessary to add to the parameter number the offset 8192

Eg.

RAMP REF 1 44
SOURCE LINK (1/2) = 44+8192 = 8236
Note!
The Links are executed with an approximate cycle time of 20 ms. They are not mainly intended
to be used for regulation but to access or connect parameters otherwise not accessible. The
use of Links according to the parameter chosen as a destination involves a CPU overhead
that can slow down the keypad/display operation. Check that the functionality corresponds
to the needs before plant-wide implementation.
Note!

The following parameters cannot be used as a destination of a Link:

- All parameters with only R access code
- All parameters with Z access code
- All parameters with C access code
- All the following:
19
55
72
73
77
78
82
85
83
86
318
408
425
444
453
454
456
467
468
470
S shape t const
Control word
Scale input 1
Tune value inp 1
Scale input 2
Tune value inp 2
Scale input 3
Pword1
Tune value inp 3
Password2
Overload mode
Ser answer delay
Enable OPT2
Prop. Filter
Arm resistance
Arm inductance
Flux weak speed
Flux current max
Flux current min
Undervoltage - Hold off time
474
475
480
482
483
484
485
501
502
553
554
562
585
586
636
637
649
652
663
664
Field loss - Restart time

Field loss - Hold off time
Speed fbk loss - Hold off time
Overvoltage - Hold off time
Overvoltage - Restart time
Link1 - Source
Link1 - Destination
External fault - Restart time
External fault - Hold off time
Link2 - Source
Link2 - Destination
Tacho scale
Overcurrent - Restart time
Overcurrent - Hold off time
Bus loss - Hold off time
Bus loss - Restart time
Refresh enc 1
Refresh enc 2
S acc t const
S dec t const
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
776
785
786
792
1012
1013
1014
1015
1042
1043
1044
S acc t const 0
S dec t const 0
S acc t const 1
S dec t const 1
S acc t const 2
S dec t const 2
S acc t const 3
S dec t const 3
PI central V1
PI bottom lim
PID source
Input 1 filter
Inertia c filter
Torque const
Inertia
Friction
Input 1 compare
Input 1 cp error
Input 1 cp delay
Input max 1
LINK 1
Source 1
Destination 1
0
+
Output offset 1
Input min 1
0
Input absolute 1
Mul gain 1
Off
Div gain 1
1
Input offset 1
0
Input max 2
LINK 2
Source 2
0
0
Mul gain 2
Off
Destination 2
Output offset 2
Input min 2
Input absolute 2
Div gain 2
1
Input offset 2
Figure 6.15.4.1: Structure of the signal adaptation
Instruction manual
275
6.15.5 Pads
The pads are used for the data exchange among the several components of a Bus system. They can be compared
to the variables of a PLC. The figure 6.15.5.1 shows the overall structure of the system. With the help of pads it
is possible for example to send information from a field Bus to an option card. All the pads can be written and
read. See the several access possibilities in section 10, Parameter list.
SPEC FUNCTIONS
Pad Parameters
Pad 0
Pad 1
Pad 2
Pad 3
Pad 4
Pad 5
Pad 6
Pad 7
Pad 8
Pad 9
Pad 10
Pad 11
Pad 12
Pad 13
Pad 14
Pad 15
Bitword pad A
Pad A Bit 0
Pad A Bit 1
Pad A Bit 2
Pad A Bit 3
Pad A Bit 4
Pad A Bit 5
Pad A Bit 6
Pad A Bit 7
Pad A Bit 8
Pad A Bit 9
Pad A Bit 10
Pad A Bit 11
Pad A Bit 12
Pad A Bit 13
Pad A Bit 14
Pad A Bit 15
Bitword pad B
Pad B Bit 0
Pad B Bit 1
Pad B Bit 2
Pad B Bit 3
Pad B Bit 4
Pad B Bit 5
Pad B Bit 6
Pad B Bit 7
Pad B Bit 8
276
No.
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
[503]
[504]
[505]
[506]
[507]
[508]
[509]
[510]
[511]
[512]
[513]
[514]
[515]
[516]
[517]
[518]
[519]
[536]
min
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Pad 0
Pad 1
Pad 2
Pad 3
Pad 4
Pad 5
Pad 6
Pad 7
Pad 8
Pad 9
Pad 10
Pad 11
Pad 12
Pad 13
Pad 14
Pad 15
Bitword pad A
Bitword pad B
max
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
65535
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
65535
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Value
Factory
American
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Factory
Standard
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TPD32-EV
Standard
Configuration
*, **
*, **
*
*
**
**
***, ****
***, ****
***, ****
***, ****
***, ****
***, ****
***, ****
***, ****
***, ****
*****
****
****
****
****
****
****
****
****
****
Pad B Bit 9
Pad B Bit 10
Pad B Bit 11
Pad B Bit 12
Pad B Bit 13
Pad B Bit 14
Pad B Bit 15
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
* These parameters can be set on a programmable analog inputs.

**
These parameters can be set on a programmable analog output.
*** These parameters can be set on a programmable digital input.
**** These parameters can be set on a programmable digital output.
***** These parameters can be set on Relay 2.
Pad 0...15
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
*****
General variables, 16 Bit. The Pads 0...3 can be set via analog inputs. The values of the
Pads 0, 1, 4 , 5 and 6 can be set on analog outputs.
Bitmap of the parameters Pad A (B) bit 0 up to Pad A (B) bit 15. With a parameter it
is possible to read or write all the Bits inside a Word.
Example:
Pad A bit 0

0

Pad A bit 1

1
= 21

=
2

Pad A bit 2

0

Pad A bit 3

0

Pad A bit 4

0

Pad A bit 5

1
= 25

= 32

Pad A bit 6

1
= 26

= 64

Pad A bit 7

0

Pad A bit 8

0

Pad A bit 9

0

Pad A bit 10
1
= 210
= 1024

Pad A bit 11
0

Pad A bit 12
1
= 212
= 4096

Pad A bit 13
0

Pad A bit 14
0

Pad A bit 15
0
Bitword pad A = 2 + 32 + 64 + 1024 + 4096 = 5218
Bit variables. The single Bits can be read or written. With the Bitword pad A (B) it is
possible to process a Word. See the example. From the Pad A it is possible to read the
Bits 0.....7 of a digital input. On a digital output it is possible to write all the Bit.
Bitword pad A (B)

Pad A (B) bit 0...15
INTERBUS S, PROFIBUS DP, etc.

M-
M+
AL
EN
n=0
Ilim
CANC
RS 485
Pad 0
Pad 1
Keypad
Pad 2
Pad 3
Pad 4
Options (Bus Interface ....)
Pad 5
Pad 6
Bitword pad A
0000h
Bitword pad B
0000h
output
Digital
output
Digital
input
Digital
output
Analog
input
Analog
output
Analog
input
Analog
General PAD
Pad 7
Pad 8
0
Pad 9
0
Pad 10
0
Pad 11
0
Pad 12
0
Pad 13
0
Pad 14
0
Pad 15
0
Figure 6.15.5.1: Bus pads
Note

When setting the PADs bit to digital I/O the following rules have to be aplied:
1. Assigning PAD A/B bit to a Digital Output will cause the state of the digital output (n)
coming from PAD A/B bit (n-1)
2. Relay 2 can be driven by means of PAD A/B bit 14.
Instruction manual
277
6.16 OPTIONS
6.16.1 Option 1
OPTIONS
Option 1
Menu
Through this menu the assignement of Drive parameters to the virtual digital I/O (MONITOR\Virtual digital
Inp-Out menu) and to the process data channels (PDC) of the field bus can be carried out.
If the bus card is not present you will be prompted (inside the menu) by the message OPT1 not present.
If the used bus card is not up-to-date for this management, you will be prompted (inside the menu) by the message OPT1 old version.
For further and detailed information, refer to the bus interface instruction book.
Note!
Starting with FW version 10.08 (10.25/10.26 for TPD32-EV-FC), internal communication

between drive and installed field bus board (Profibus, CANopen, DeviceNet) is set at 2ms.
The scan time for data sent by an external master is 5 to 6ms.
For communication with Profibus board, the updated SBI-PDP32 board with firmware 2.400
is required.
6.16.2 Option 2
OPTIONS
Option 2
Menu
[425]
Menu
Enable OPT2
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
No.
425
Enable OPT2
min
max
Value
Factory
American
Disable
Factory
Standard
Disable
Standard
Configuration
This menu allows the user access to the parameter set of the APC300 option card.
Menu

The menu is active only if the OPT2 card is present (e.g. a APC300 card). If the user tries
to enter in the Option 2 menu and the card is not mounted on the device the message
Not present is displayed.
For further and detailed information see the instruction book of the optional board.
Enable OPT2
Enabled
When the converter is switched on, the presence of the APC300

card is checked. If the card is present, the Menu parameters
are started and the APC300 parameters can be reached.
Disabled
When the converter is switched on, the presence of the APC300

card is not checked. Therefore, the option parameters are not
taken into consideration even though the card is present.
Default configuration = Disabled.
To change the configuration:

1 - set the new value of Enable OPT2 parameter
278
TPD32-EV
2 - store via the Save parameters (BASIC MENU)

3 - switch-off and switch-on the drive
If Enabled and the APC300 card is not present, will be generated the error:
OPT2 failure code 100-98 or OPT2 failure code 100-96.
Note
When using the APC300 card (Option 2), all parameters listed in the Opt2-A/PDC column
of Parameter List (section 10.1 and 10.2) can be accessed through the automatic asynchronous
communication. Parameters listed in the High Priority Parameter List (section 10.2) can be
accessed by means of the automatic synchronous communication. (See APC300 manual for
more details.)
If the software has detected the presence of the APC300 the parameter set of the optional card
is accessible. In this case see the APC300 user manual for detailed information.
Instruction manual
279
6.16.3 PID Function

OPTIONS
PID
[769]
[770]
Enable PI PID
Enable PD PID
PID source
[786]
[787]
[758]
PID source
PID source gain
Feed-fwd PID
[759]
[763]
[762]
[760]
[761]
[1046]
[1047]
[757]
PID error
PID feed-back
PID offs. Sel
PID offset 0
PID offset 1
PID acc time
PID dec time
PID clamp
[765]
[764]
[695]
[731]
[793]
[734]
[779]
[776]
[777]
[778]
[784]
[785]
[783]
[771]
[418]
PI P gain PID
PI I gain PID
PI steady thr
PI steady delay
P init gain PID
I init gain PID
PI central v sel
PI central v1
PI central v2
PI central v3
PI top lim
PI bottom lim
PI integr freeze
PI output PID
Real FF PID
[768]
[766]
[788]
[789]
[790]
[791]
[767]
[421]
[772]
[774]
PD P gain 1 PID [%]

PD D gain 1 PID [%]
PD P gain 2 PID [%]
PD D gain 2 PID [%]
PD P gain 3 PID [%]
PD D gain 3 PID[%]
PD D filter PID [ms]
PD output PID
PID out sign PID
PID output
[782]
[773]
PID target
PID out scale
[794]
[795]
[796]
[797]
[798]
[799]
Diameter calc
Positioning spd [rpm]
Max deviation
Gear box ratio
Dancer constant [mm]
Minimum diameter [cm]
PID references
PI controls
PD control
PID target
Diameter calc
280
TPD32-EV
6.16.3.1 General
The PID function has been developed for general uses which can include nip-roll, winders, unwinders, pressure
control of pumps and extruders.
A dancer or a load cell can be used as position/tension transducer.
The inputs (with the exception of those concerning the transducers) and the outputs can be configured, they can
be associated to various converter parameters. E.g. the PID output can be sent to the speed or to current regulator.
The analog inputs/outputs will be sampled/updated to 2ms.
The digital inputs/outputs will be sampled/updated to 8ms.
Note!
PID function in the firmware can not be used when the APC300 card is present.
6.16.3.2 Inputs / Outputs

Regulation Inputs/outputs
PID source
Sample parameter of Feed-forward normally programmed on analog input.
PID feed-back

Analog input of position / tension transducer (dancer/load cell).

PID feed-back must be programmed on the analog input 1 (terminals 1-2) because of
the input filter provided.
PID offset 0
Offset analog input added to PID feed-back. Used for the adjustement of the dancer position.
PID target
Parameter associated with the regulator output. Normally, it will be programmed on

the speed reference of the drive.
PID output
Analog output of the regulator. Used to carry on a reference cascade in multidrives systems.
PI central v3 PID
Initial value setting of the integral component of the regulator (corresponds to initial
diameter). It can be programmed on an analog input. E.g. to an ultrasonic transducer
used for the diameter measure of a winder/unwinder.
Input Command (programmable on digital inputs)

Enable PI PID
Enable of the PI (proportional - integral) of the regulator.
Enable PD PID
Enable of the PD (proportional - derivative) of the regulator.
PI integral freeze:
Freezing of the actual value of the integral component of the regulator.
PID offset sel

PI central v S0
Offset select, in addition to PID feed-back: L = PID offset 0, H = PID offset 1.

Used with PI central v S1 to select one of four values for the initial integral level (corresponding to initial diameter). Through binary seletion.
PI central v S1
Used with PI central v S0 to select one of four values for the initial integral level (corresponding to initial diameter). Through binary seletion.
Diameter calc
Enable of the initial diameter calculation.
Diameter calc st
State of the initial diameter calculation (digital output).
Instruction manual
281
6.16.3.3 Feed - Forward

PID source
[786]
[787]
PID source
PID source gain
[758]
Feed-fwd PID
PID source
PID source gain
Feed-fwd PID
No.
786
787
758
min
max
65535
-100.000 +100.00
-10000 +10000
Value
Factory
American
0
Factory
Standard
0
1.000
0
1.000
0
Standard
Configuration
* This parameter can be set on an analog programmable input..
When used, the feed-forward signal represents the main reference of the regulator. Inside the regulator it will be
attenuated or amplified by the PID function and sent to the output as reference signal for the drive.
LEGEND:
PID source
Gain
I/O Parameter
Parameter
PID source gain
Feed-fwd PID
Internal variable
Figure 6.16.3.1: Feed-forward block description
PID source

Address of the parameter (Feed-forward value) containing the value which will be used
as PID source.
Number +2000H (8192 decimal) must be added to the parameter.
PID source gain
Multiplier of the input value to PID source.
Feed-fwd PID
Value of feed-forward
Through the parameter PID source, it is possible to select which point in the drive the feed-forward signal may
be sent. The selectable parameters are those indicated in the paragraph 10.2. List of the high-priority parameters. The measure units are those indicated in the notes at the end of this paragraph.
1. Programming example of the ramp output block (Parameter Ramp out) on PID source:

Menu OPTION

> PID

> PID source

> PID source = 8305
The PID source must be set to the parameter number to which it will be associated, choosing it from paragraph
10.2. List of high-priority parameters (Ramp out has the decimal number 113).
To obtain the value, it must be added to the decimal value 8192 (fixed offset):
8192 + 113 = 8305.
If you need to set the feed-forward on analog input, given that they are not directly inserted in the high-priority
parameters, it is necessary to pass through a PAD 0.....PAD 15 parameter.
282
TPD32-EV
2. Programming example of the analog input 2 on PID source:

a)

Input programming on a PAD parameter

Menu I/O CONFIG

> Analog input

> Analog input 2

> Select input 2 = PAD 0
b)

Setting of the PAD 0 as feed-forward input:

Menu OPTION

> PID

> PID source

> PID source = 8695
The PID source must be set to the parameter number to which it will be associated, choosing it from paragraph
10.2 List of high-priority parameters (PAD 0 has the decimal number 503).
To obtain the value must be added the decimal value 8192 (fixed offset):
8192 + 503 = 8695.
The full-scale of the feed-forward is limited to the value +/- 10000, which depends on the parameter set on PID
source. It will be necessary the calibration through PID gain source.
The measure units are those indicated in the notes at the end of the paragraph 10.2. List of the high-priority
parameters.
The feed-forward value can be read through the parameter Feed-fwd PID via keypad or serial line.
Referring to the above examples:
1. Programming example of the ramp output block (Parameter Ramp out) on PID source:
Speeds will be converted inside the drive into RPM x 4.
The ramp input references take as maximum set value what set in Speed base value.

Feed - fwd PID = Speed base value x 4 x PID source gain
If, with max. ramp reference and Speed base value = 3000rpm, to have
Feed - fwd PID = 10000, it is necessary to set:
PID source gain = 10000 / (3000 x 4) = 0.833
2.

Programming for example analog input 2 on PID source:

When an analog input will be set on a PAD parameter, this will have a max. value of + / - 2047.
With max. analog reference, for having Feed - fwd PID = 10000, it is necessary to set:
PID source gain = 10000 / 2047 = 4.885.
Note!

Using the regulator as generic PID without the feed -forward function, Feed - fwd PID
must be at its max. value.
To do this, it is necessary to set PID source on a PAD parameter and program it = 10000.
Instruction manual
283
6.16.3.4 PID function

The PID function is divided in three blocks:

-
Feed-back input PID reference

-
Proportional-integral control block PI controls

-
Proportional-derivative control block PD controls.
Figure 6.16.3.2: PID blocks description
PID references
[759]
[763]
[762]
[760]
[761]
[1046]
[1047]
[757]
PID error
PID feed-back
PID offs. Sel
PID offset 0
PID offset 1
PID acc time
PID dec time
PID clamp
Offset 0 (0)
Offset 1 (1)
PID error
PID feed-back
PID offs. Sel
PID offset 0
PID offset 1
PID acc time
PID dec time
PID clamp
min
max
759
-10000
+10000
Value
Factory
American
0
763
762
-10000
0
+10000
1
0
0
0
0
**
*
760
761
1046
1047
757
-10000
-10000
0.0
0.0
-10000
+10000
+10000
900.0
900.0
+10000
0
0
0.0
0.0
10000
0
0
0.0
0.0
10000
**
No.
Factory
Standard
0
* This function can be set on a digital programmable input.

**
This parameter can be set on an analog programmable input.
284
TPD32-EV
Standard
Configuration
PID error
Error reading in the input of the function PID (PID clamp block output).
PID feed-back
Reading of feed-back value from the transducer position (dancer) or tension (load cell).
PID offs. sel
Offset selector added to PID feed-back. This parameter can be set on a digital programmable input.
0 = PID offset 0 1 = PID offset 1

PID offset 0
Offset 0 added to PID feed-back. This parameter can be set on analog input , E.g. for
the tension setting when a load cell has to be used as feed-back.
PID offset 1
Offset 1 added to PID feed-back.
PID acc time
Acceleration ramp time value in seconds after the PID offset block.
PID dec time
Deceleration ramp time value in seconds after the PID offset block.
PID clamp
The clamp allows a smooth tension setting of a controlled system winder/unwinder,

when the calculation of the initial diameter function cannot be used.
When the drive is enabled, the dancer is at its lower full scale, with PID error at its
maximum value. The motor could accelerate to fast in taking the dancer in its central
position of work.
Setting PID clamp at a value sufficiently low e.g = 1000, at the drive enabling and at
the enabling of Enable PD PID, the value of PID error is limited to 1000 until the
signal coming from the dancer (PID feed-back) does not reach this value. Now PID
clamp is automatically take back at its maximum value corresponding to 10000. The
clamp is kept at 10000 till the next disabling of the drive or of Enable PD PID.
The feed - back input is provided for the analog transducers connection like dancer, with relative potentiometer
or load cell. Nevertheless, it is possible to use this input block as comparison point between two different analog
signals + / - 10V.
Connection to a dancer with potentiometer connected between - 10 and + 10V.
The wiper of the potentiometer can be connected to one of the analog inputs of the drive. Normally it should
be used the analog input 1 (terminals 1 and 2) because it is provided with filter.
The input choosen for that connection must be programmed in the menu I/O CONFIG as PID feed - back. Its
value can be read in the PID feed - back parameter in the PID REFERENCE submenu.
Through PID offset 1 (or PID offset 0), it is possible to carry on the adjustement of the dancer position.
Connection to a load cell with full range + 10V.
The output of the load cell can be connected to one of the drive analog inputs. Normally the analog input 1
(terminals 1 and 2) should be used because of the filter provided.
The input choosen for the connection must be programmed in the menu I/O CONFIG as PID feed - back. Its
value can be read in the PID feed - back parameter of the PID REFERENCE submenu.
The tension setting can be sent, with value 0...-10V, to one of the remaining programmable analog inputs in the
I/O CONFIG menu as PID offset 0.
Instruction manual
285
6.16.3.5 Proportional - integral block
Figure 6.16.3.3: PI block description
The PI block receives its input from the PID error parameter, which represents the error that must be corrected
by the regulator. The PI block carries on a proportional-integral regulation, its output PI output PID after having
been appropriately adapted, according to the system which it has to control, it will be used as multiplier factor of
the feed-forward (Feed-fwd PID) obtaining the correct value of the speed reference for the drive (Real FF PID).
The PI block will be enabled setting Enable PI PID = Enable. If Enable PI PID has been programmed on a
digital input, this must be set to a high logic level (+24V).
PID
[769]
Enable PI PID
Menu
Enable PI PID
No.
769
min
max
Value
Factory
American
Disable
Factory
Standard
Disable
This function can be set on a digital programmable input.
Enable PI PID

Enabled
Disabled
Enable of the proportional-integral block

Disabling of the proportional-integral blc.
PI controls
[765]
[764]
286
Standard
Configuration
PI P gain PID
PI I gain PID
TPD32-EV
[695]
[731]
[793]
[734]
[779]
[776]
[777]
[778]
[784]
[785]
[783]
[771]
[418]
PI steady thr
PI steady delay
P init gain PID
I init gain PID
PI central v sel
PI central v1
PI central v2
PI central v3
PI top lim
PI bottom lim
PI integr freeze
PI output PID
Real FF PID
No.
Value
PI P gain PID
PI I gain PID
PI steady thr
PI steady delay
P init gain PID
I init gain PID
PI central v sel
PI central v1
PI central v2
PI central v3
PI top lim
PI bottom lim
PI integr freeze
765
0.00
100.00
Factory
American
10.00
764
0.00
100.00
10.00
10.00
695
10000
PI output PID
Real FF PID
OFF (0) / ON (1)
min
max
Factory
Standard
10.00
731
60000
793
0.00
100.00
10.00
10.00
734
0.00
100.00
10.00
10.00
779
776
PI bottom lim
PI top lim
1.00
1.00
777
PI bottom lim
PI top Lim
1.00
1.00
778
PI bottom lim
PI top Lim
1.00
1.00
784
PI bottom lim
10.00
10.00
10.00
785
-10.00
PI top lim
0.0
0.0
783
771
1000 x PI top limit
1000
1000
418
-10000
+10000
Standard
Configuration
**
* This function can be set on a digital programmable input

**
This parameter can be set on an analog programmable input
PI P gain PID
Proportional gain of PI block
PI I gain PID
Integral gain of PI block
PI steady thr
Threshold feed-forward survey. If Feed-fwd PID is less than PI steady thr the integral
regulation will be frozen, the proportional gain assumes the value set in P init gain PID.
When Feed-fwd PID overcomes the threshold, the integral regulation with the gain
set in I init gain PID will be enabled. The PI block will mantain the gains P init gain
PID and I init gain PID for the time preset through PI steady delay. Once this delay
is over, they will be brought automatically to PI P gain PID and PI I gain PID.
PI steady delay

Time for which the gains P init gain PID and I init gain PID have been kept operative
after overcoming the feed-forward PI steady thr threshold.
The delay time PI steady delay and the resulting function of initial gains changing also,
operate on the transition L to H of the Enable PI PID parameter.
Instruction manual
287
P init gain PID
Initial proportional gain. P init gain PID operates when feed-forward is less than PI
steady thr and at its overcoming, for the time set in PI steady delay or on the transition
L to H of Enable PI PID for the same time.
I init gain PID
Initial integral gain. I init gain PID operates after the threshold PI steady thr has been
overcome or on the transition L to H of Enable PI PID for the time set in PI steady
delay.
PI central v sel
Output selector of the starting PI block. PI central v sel (0...3) selects between the 4 possible
settings of the initial value of the regulator integral component (corresponding to initial
diameter).
PI central v sel can be set directly from keypad, serial line or through two digital inputs set respectively as PI
central v S0 and PI central v S1.
Selecting PI central v sel = 0, when PI block is disabled (Enable PI PID = Disable), the last value of the integral
component calculated (corresponding to roll diameter) is stored. This value is displayed in PI output PID. When
enabled again, the regulation restarts again from that value. The same functionality is used when switching off
the drive . This kind of operation can be used when controlling a winder and it is necessary to stop the machine
and disable the drives or even remove AC incoming power from the electrical cabinet.
Selecting PI central v sel = 1-2-3, when PI block has been disabled, the value of PI output PID will be set at
what is programmed in the correspondent parameter (x1000). When the drive is restarted after a power off, the
precalculated value will be automatically set only if, when powering up the drive, the digital input programmed
as Enable PI PID is already set at a high level.
PI central v 1

PI central v 2

PI central v 3
Setting of the first initial value of the regulators integral component (corresponding
to initial diameter 1). The PI central v 1 value must be included in the limits set in
PI top lim PID and PI bottom lim PID.
PI central v 1 will be selected by setting PI central v sel = 1.
Setting of the second initial value of the regulators integral component (corresponding
to initial diameter 2). The PI central v 2 value must be included in the limits set in
Setting of the third initial value of the regulators integral component (correspondent
to initial diameter 3). The PI central v 3 value must be included in the limits given by
PI top lim
It defines the higher limit of the adapting block of the PI correction.
PI bottom lim
It defines the lower limit of the adapting block of the PI correction.
The output of the PI block represents the multiplier factor of feed-forward, whose value must be adapted from
the regulator in the max. limits included between +10000 and -10000 and defined by PI top lim and PI bottom
lim. The value of these parameters will be defined according to the system that has to be controlled. For a better
understanding please refer to the paragraph Examples of application.
PI integral freeze
Freezing of the present condition of regulator integral component.
PI output PID
Output of PI block, adapted to the values included between PI top limit and PI bottom
288
TPD32-EV
limit. At the power up of the drive, PI output PID acquires automatically the selected
value with PI central v sel multiplied by 1000.
Example: If PI central v 2 = 0.5 is selected, at the start PI output PID acquires value = 500.
When Enable PI PID has been enabled, the output PI output PID is, independently on the input error able to
integrate its value up to the limits set with PI top limit or PI bottom limit multiplied by 1000.
Example: PI top limit = 2, PI output PID max = 2000.
The PI block output will be further limited from the parameter saturation Real FF PID (see corresponding parameter).
As previously described, PI output PID is used as a multiplier factor of the feed-forward in order to obtain the
angular speed reference of the motor. If the PID function is used to control a winder/ unwinder system, its value is
inversely proportional to the roll diameter. When winding with a constant peripheral speed, the following is valid:

01=11
where:
0 = angular speed at minimum diameter
0 = minimum diameter
1 = angular speed at actual diameter
1 = actual diameter
1= 0 x (0/1)
If the drive is set correctly, and 0 is equivalent to the maximum value of the feed-forward, then PI output PID
depends on (0/1).
Taking into consideration the internal coefficients of the firmware, it can be written:
PI output PID = (0/1) x 1000
This formula can be used to verify the accuracy of the setting when the system is on working or during the
procedure for the calculation of the initial diameter.
Real FF PID

Represents the feed-forward value which has been recalculated according to the PI correction. It will be calculated with the following formula:
Real FF PID = (Feed-fwd PID / 1000 ) x PI output PID
The max. value of Real FF PID is +/- 10.000.If this limit had been reached during operation, in order to avoid
dangerous levels of regulator saturation, further increases of PI output PID will be blocked.
Example: Feed-fwd = + 8000, the positive limit of PI output PID will be automatically set at
10000 / ( 8000 / 1000 ) = 1250.
Instruction manual
289
6.16.3.6 Proportional - Derivative control block

PD P gain 1 PID
PD P gain 2 PID
PD P gain 3 PID
Real FF PID
Enable
PD PID
PD output PID
PID error
LEGEND:
I/O Parameter
PD D gain 1 PID
PD D gain 2 PID
PD D gain 3 PID
Parameter
PD D filter PID
Internal variable
Figure 6.16.3.4: PD block description
The PD block receives the values PID error at its input, which represents the error that must be corrected by
the regulator. The PD block carries out proportional-derivative regulation and its output PD output PID will
be added to Real FF PID.
The PD block is enabled by setting Enable PD PID = Enable. If Enable PD PID has been programmed on a
digital input, this must be set to a high logical level.
PID
[770]
Enable PD PID
Menu
Enable PD PID
770
min
max
Value
Factory
American
Disable
Factory
Standard
Disable
This function can be set on a digital programmable input.
Enable PD PID

290
No.
Enabled
Disabled
Enabling of the block proportional-derivative

Disabling of the block proportional-derivatve
TPD32-EV
Standard
Configuration
*
PD control
[768]
[766]
[788]
[789]
[790]
[791]
[767]
[421]
PD P gain 1 PID [%]

PD D gain 1 PID [%]
PD P gain 2 PID [%]
PD D gain 2 PID [%]
PD P gain 3 PID [%]
PD D gain 3 PID[%]
PD output PID
PD P gain 1 PID [%]

PD D gain 1 PID [%]
PD P gain 2 PID [%]
PD D gain 2 PID [%]
PD P gain 3 PID [%]
PD D gain 3 PID[%]
PD output PID
Value
No.
100.00
Factory
American
10.00
Factory
Standard
10.00
100.00
1.00
1.00
0.00
100.00
10.00
10.00
789
0.00
100.00
1.00
1.00
790
0.00
100.00
10.00
10.00
791
0.00
100.00
1.00
1.00
767
1000
421
-10000
+10000
min
max
768
0.00
766
0.00
788
Standard
Configuration
The gains of the block can remain fixed and programmed in this case through the parameters PD P gain 1 PID
and PD I gain 1 PID, or changed depending on machine parameters, through the function Adap spd reg. In this
case the gains come from PD P gain 1-2-3 PID and PD I gain 1-2-3 PID.
For example, it is possible to modify, dynamically, the gains of PD block according to the speed, to a regulation parameter internal to the drive, or to an analog input proportional to the unit related to the machine. The
behaviour of the regulator can be so configured to meet the needs of the machine.
Note:
When Adap Spd reg has been enabled (paragraph 6.13.2. of the manual), it operates both on
the PID function and on the gains of the speed regulator. So it is necessary to appropriately
program all relative parameters. If one wishes to modify only the gains of the speed regulator
and keep fixed the gains of the PID function, it is necessary set the three proportional gains
and integral gains of the PD block at the same value. The same is valid in case the PID gains
have to be modified and the speed regulator gains must remain fixed.
PD P gain 1
Proportional gain 1 of the block PD (its selection depends on the eventual enabling of
the function Adap Spd reg and its configuration).
PD D gain 1
Derivative gain 1 of block PD (its selection depends on the eventual enabling of the
function Adap Spd reg and its configuration).
PD P gain 2
PD D gain 2
PD P gain 3
PD D gain 3
PD D filter PID
Time constant of the filter from the derivative side.
PD output PID
PD block output.
Instruction manual
291
6.16.3.7 Output reference
Figure 6.16.3.5: Output reference block description
PD control
[772]
[774]
PID out sign PID

PID output
PID out sign PID
772
Value
Factory
American
1
PID output
774
-10000
+10000
Positive (0)
Bipolar (1)
No.
min
max
Factory
Standard
1
0
Standard
Configuration
* This parameter can be set on an analogue programmable output.
PID out. sign PID
Through this parameter it is possible to set the output of the regulator to be either bipolar
or simply positive (clamp of negative side).
PID output
Display of regulator output. It is possible to program this parameter to an analog output,

in order to perform a reference cascade in multidrive systems.
PID target
[782]
PID target
[773]
PID out scale
PID target
PID out scale
292
min
max
782
65535
Value
Factory
American
0
773
-100.000
-100.000
1.000
No.
Factory
Standard
0
1.000
TPD32-EV
Standard
Configuration
PID target
Address of the parameter which contains the value to be used as PID target. To obtain
the real settable value, it is necessary to add +2000H (8192 decimal) to the parameter
number.
PID out scale
Matching factor of PID output. Its value depends on the parameter to which the regulator output is addressed.
Through the parameter PID target it is possible to select which point of the drive will be addressed for output
signal of the regulation. The selectable parameters are those assigned as writing parameters (W or R/W) indicated in the paraghraph 10.2. List of high-priority parameters. The units are those indicated in the notes at
the end of the paragraph.
Programming example of the speed reference 1 (parameter Speed ref 1) on PID target:
Menu OPTION

> PID

> PID target

> PID target = 8234
PID target must be set according to the number of the parameter to which it will be associated, choosing it from
the paragraph 10.2. List of high-priority parameters (Speed ref 1 has the decimal number 42). To obtain the
value it must be added the decimal number 8192 (fixed offset):
8192 + 42 = 8234.
Note:
When the ramp function has been enabled, Speed ref 1 will be automatically programmed
on its output. To have it available it is necessary to set parameter Enable ramp = disable.
Speed ref 1 will be set in RPM x 4, considering that PID output assumes values included between 0....10000,
it is necessary to set appropriately the calibration through PID out scale.
Calculation of PID out scale:
If it is necessary that PID output, at its max. value = 10000, corresponds at speed reference = 2000rpm it is
necessary to set:
PID out scale = (2000 x 4) / 10000 = 0.8
It is possible to read the set value of Speed ref 1 in the appropriate parameter of the menu INPUT VARIABLES
/ Speed ref.
Note:
The value of PID out scale will be defined according to the system which is being controlled.
For a better understanding, please refer to the paragraph Application examples.
Instruction manual
293
6.16.3.8 Function of calculation for Initial diameter

This function performs a preliminary calculation of the diameter of an unwinder/winder before starting the line.
This allows better control of the system avoiding unwanted balancing of the dancer.
The calculation is based on the measure of the movement of the dancer from the position of lower fullrange to
its central position of work, and on the measure of angular movement of the roll during the initial phase.
The function of initial diameter calculation can be carried out only when the winder/unwinder
are controlled through dancer (no load cell) and the speed feed-back is carried out through
encoder.
Note:
The result of the calculation is assigned to the parameter PI output PID, and so it represents the multiplier factor
of the feed-forward, in order to obtain the angular speed reference of the motor.
Its value is universely proportional to the roll diameter.
LEGEND:
PID feed-back
after offset
I/O Parameter
Minimum diameter
Gear box ratio
Diameter
calc
Parameter
Diameter
calc st
Diameter
calculation
Internal variable
PI output PID
Speed fbk sel
Positioning spd
Dancer
constant
Encoder 1 position
Max deviation
Encoder 2 position
Figure 6.16.3.6: Diameter calculation block description
Diameter calc
[794]
Diameter calc
[795]
[796]
Max deviation
[797]
Gear box ratio
[798]
[799]
Diameter calc
Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)

Max deviation
Gear box ratio
min
max
794
Value
Factory
American
0
795
796
797
798
799
-100
0
0.001
1
1
+100
+10000
1.000
10000
2000
0
8000
1.000
1
1
No.
Factory
Standard
0
0
8000
1.000
1
1
* This function can be set on a digital programmable input.
294
TPD32-EV
Standard
Configuration
Diameter calc

Enabling of the initial function of diameter calculation.

The calculation will be enabled by setting Diameter calc = Enable.
If Diameter calc has been programmed on a digital input, this must be brought to a
high logic level.
Positioning spd
Motor speed at which the dancer is at its central working position, during the calculation
phase of the initial diameter.
Max deviation
Value expressed in count of D/A which corresponds to the maximum shift allowed by
the dancer. This value will be associated with the starting measurement of the dancer
movement during the calculation of the initial diameter.
During the preliminary phase of the commissioning, it is necessary to carry out the self-calibration of the analog
inputs, so at the fullrange position of the dancer they will correspond, whatever was the value of the analog input,
at 10000 counts. The parameter Max deviation, in order to guarantee a precise calculation of the movement,
must be set at a value slightly lower. (standard Max deviation = 8000).
Gear box ratio
Ratio reduction between the motor and the roll (< = 1).
Dancer constant
It expresses the measure in mm, the total bunching of material in the dancer.
Upper limit
switch = +10000 count
Dancer
Winder/Unwinder
Upper limit
Dancer
electrical 0
electrical 0
Central position
of working
Lower limit
switch = -10000 count
Gear box ratio
Lower limit
One pitch dancer

M
Central position
of working
Two pitches dancer
Dancer constant = ( L x x
Figure 6.16.3.7: Diameter calculation
Measurement of Dancer constant:

With dancer in lower fullrange position, perform the self-calibration of the analog input programmed as PID
feed-back.
Set the keypad of the drive on the parameter PID feed-back.
Measure and multiply by 2, the distance in mm between the lower mechanical fullrange and the position of the
dancer that, on the parameter PID feed-back, will display 0 (position of electrical 0).
Multiply the above calculated value by 2 if the dancer has only one pitch, by 4 if the dancer has two pitches and
so on, as per the figure above.
Minimum diameter
Min. value of core diameter expressed in cm.
Instruction manual
295
6.16.3.9 Procedure of calculation for initial diameter

The calculation is based on the measurement of the dancer movement from the lower fullrange position to its
central working position, and on the measurent of the angular movement of the coil during the drawing phase.
For that reason, during this period, make sure that the gear mantaining the material blocked. For this reason it
is necessary to enable the regulation of the nip-roll drive with speed reference = 0.
If line nip-rolls are controlled by dancers or load cells, it is necessary to carry out the diameter calculation of the
winders/unwinders first, then the gear.
The parameter PI central v sel must be set at 0 to avoid PI output PID being set automatically at a predefined value.
Bringing the digital input programmed as Diameter calc to a high logic level (+24V) , if the drive is enabled,
will start the procedures. During this phase, the parameters Enable PI PID and Enable PD PID are automatically disabled.
The regulation verifies the signal coming from the dancer potentiometer. If this is higher than what is already
set in Max deviation, the motor begins following the speed reference set in Positioning speed in order to wind
the material and bring the dancer to its central position of working.
The polarity of the reference assigned to Positioning speed will be winder / unwinder equal to the one working
as a winder.
If the initial regulation verifies that the signal coming from the potentiometer of the dancer is lower than what
already set in Max deviation, the motor starts running with speed reference set in Positioning speed in order to
unwind the material and bring the dancer on the point identified by Max deviation, at this point the reference
will be inverted to bring the dancer to its central position.
When the dancer has reached the central position, the parameter PI output PID will be set at a value inversely
proportional to the diameter and the digital output Diameter calc st, that indicates the end of diameter calculation, will be brought to high logical level .
At this point, if Enable PI PID and/or Enable PD PID are enabled, the system passes automatically in regulation.
For this reason generally the digital inputs programmed as Diameter calc and Enable PI PID and/or Enable
PD PID will be brought to high logic level at the same time.
The output signal Diameter calc st can be used to reset the command Diameter calc (this command will be
activated on the rising edge of the digital input). For that reason, it must be brought to high logical level after
the supply of the regulation part of the drive and reset once the initial calculation phase has finished.
The value of PI output PID will be calculated with the following formula:
PI output PID = (Min diameter x PI top lim) / Value of the calculated diameter
The parameters PI top limit and PI bottom limit in the menu PI controls have to be set according to the max.
and min. diameter of the roll. For better explanation, please refer to paragraph 6.16.3.10 Application examples.
296
TPD32-EV
6.16.3.10 Examples of application

Nip-roll control with dancer
Master
Nip-roll
Reverse
Dancer
Forward
+10V
5Kohm
-10V
DRIVE
DRIVE
Feed-back
Feed-forward
(Internal ramp
master drive)
Line speed
reference
+10V Forward
-10V Reverse
Figure 6.16.3.8: Nip-roll control with dancer
Machine data:
Rated speed of slave motor Vn = 3000rpm
Slave motors speed correspondent to the max. line speed = 85% Vn = 2550rpm
Max. correction of the dancer = +/- 15% of the line speed = +/- 382.5rpm
The slave drive must be sent the analog signals regarding line speed and the position of the dancer (whose potentiometer will be supplied between terminals -10V... +10V) and the digital commands regarding the enabling
of the PID control.
The regulator output will be sent to speed reference 1.
Drive setting: (below parameters regarding only the PID function)
Instruction manual
297
Input/output
Set Analog input 1 as input for the wiper of the dancer potentiometer.
Analog input 1 / Select input 1= PID Feed-back
Set Analog input 2 as line speed input (feed- forward).
To set the feed-forward on analog input, seeing that this one is not directly accessible in the list of high-priority
parameters, it is necessary to pass through a supporting parameter PAD 0.....PAD 15.
Analog input 2 / Select input 2 = PAD 0
Set Digital input 1 as enabling input of PI block of the PID
Digital input 1 = Enable PI PID
Set Digital input 2 as enabling input of PD block of the PID
Digital input 2 = Enable PD PID
Parameters
Set Speed base value equal to the rated speed of the motor.
Speed base value = 3000rpm
Set PID source as PAD 0.
(PAD 0 has been used as supporting parameter for the feed-forward reading on Analog input 2)
For PID source, set the parameter number to which it will be associated, choosing it from the list of paragraph
10.2. List of high-priority parameters (PAD 0 has the decimal number 503).
To obtain the correct value it must be added to the decimal number 8192 (fixed offset):
PID source = (8192 + 503) = 8695
Set PID source Gain so that Feed-fwd PID reaches, along with the max. analog value on Analog input 2, 85%
of its max. value = 10000 x 85%.
When an analog input is set on a PAD parameter, this will have a max. value +/- 2047.
So:
PID source Gain = (max Feed-fwd PID x 85%) / max PAD 0 = (10000 x 0.85) / 2047 = 4.153
Set PID target as Speed ref 1.
Note:
When the ramp function is enabled, Speed ref 1 is not available. In order to keep it available, it is necessary to set the parameter Enable ramp = Disable.
PID target must be set to the parameter number to which it will be associated, choosing it from the list of paragraph 10.2, List of high-priority parameters (Speed ref 1 has the decimal number 42).
To obtain the correct value it must be added the decimal number 8192 (fixed offset)
PID target = 8192 + 42 = 8234
Set PID out scale so that , the max. analog value on Analog input 2 (Feed-fwd PID = 8500) and Enable PI
PID and Enable PD PID = Disable, Speed ref 1 is the same at 2550rpm.
298
TPD32-EV
The parameter Speed ref 1 will set in RPM x 4, so:

PID out scale = (2550 x 4) / 8500 = 1.2
Set PI central v sel = 1.
Set PI central v 1 = 1
In absence of a correction performed by the PI block of the regulator, the line speed reference (Feed-forward)
must be multiplied by 1 and sent directly to the speed regulator of the drive.
In this application, the regulator carries out a mono type proportional control. The correction will be indicated
in percentage, according to the line speed, from 0 to the maximum.
Set PI top limit and PI bottom limit so that, with max. of the dancer (max.value of the analog input 1 = PID
Feed-back) and setting the proportional gain of the PI block at 15%, it will correspond to an equal proportional
correction of feed-forward. For this reason set:
PI top limit = 10
PI bottom limit = 0.1
Set PI P gain PID = 15%
Set PI I gain PID = 0%
With this configuration, having a correction proportional to the line speed, the PI block is not able to position the
dancer at speed = 0. In order to do the drawing in stop conditions, it is necessary to use the PD block.
Set PD P gain PID to a value that allows positioning of the dancer without large dynamic variations.
For example:
PD P gain PID = 1%
If necessary, use the derivative component as damping component of the system, setting for example:
PD D gain PID = 5%
PD D filter PID = 20ms
If not necessary, keep these parameters = 0.
If it is necessary to carry out a reference cascade for another drive, set PID output on an analog output, for
example:
Analog output 1 / Select output 1= PID output
(with Real FF PID = 10000 count, Analog output 1 = 10V).
Instruction manual
299
Nip-rolls control with load cell

Line speed
Master
Nip-roll
Reverse
Forward
Load cell
0....+10V
Tension set
-10V
DRIVE
Set
DRIVE
Feed-back
Feed-forward
(Internal ramp
master drive)
Line speed
reference
+10V Forward
-10V Reverse
Figure 6.16.3.9: Nip-rolls control with load cell
Machine data:
Rated speed of slave motor Vn = 3000rpm
Slave motors speed corresponding to the max. line speed = 85% Vn = 2550rpm
Max. correction of the dancer = +/- 20% of the line speed = +/-510rpm
To the slave drive must be sent the analog signals regarding the line speed and the position of the load cell signal
(0... +10V) and the tension set (0... +10V), and the digital commands regarding the enabling of the PID control.
The regulator output will be sent to the speed reference 1.
Drive setting: (below are parameters regarding only the PID function)
300
TPD32-EV
Input/output
Set Analog input 1 as input for the load cell signal.
Setting the feed-forward on analog input, seeing it is not directly inserted in the list of high-priority parameters,
it is necessary to pass through a supporting parameter PAD 0.....PAD 15.
Set Analog input 3 as input for the tension set (PID offset 0).
Analog input 3 / Select input 3 / PID offset 0
Set Digital input 1 as enabling input of the PI block of the PID
Set Digital input 2 as enabling input of the PD block of the PID
Parameters
Program Speed base value equal to the rated speed of the motor.
Program PID source as PAD 0.
(PAD 0 has been used as supporting parameter of the feed-forward reading on Analog input 2)
For PID source set the parameter number to which it will be associated, choosing it from the list of paragraph
10.2. List of high-priority parameters (PAD 0 has the decimal number 503).
To obtain the correct value it must be added the decimal number 8192 (fixed offset):
PID source = (8192 + 503) = 8695
Set PID source Gain so that Feed-fwd PID reaches, along with the max. analog value on Analog input 2, 85%
of its max. value = 10000 x 85%.
When an analog input is set on a PAD parameter , this will have a max. value +/- 2047.
So:
Note:
When the ramp function is enabled, Speed ref 1 is not available. In order to have it available,
it is necessary to set the parameter Enable ramp = Disable.
For PID target set the parameter number to which it will be associated, choosing it from the list of paragraph
10.2 List of high-priority parameters (Speed ref 1 has the decimal number 42).
To obtain the correct value it must be added the decimal number 8192 (fixed offset)
PID target = 8192 + 42 = 8234
Instruction manual
301
Set PID out scale so that, along with the max. analog value on Analog input 2 (Feed-fwd PID = 8500) and
with Enable PI PID e Enable PD PID = disable, Speed ref 1 is the same at 2550rpm.
Speed ref 1 will be set in RPM x 4, so:
PID out scale = (2550 x 4) / 8500 = 1.2
In the absence of a correction carried out from the PI block of the regulator, the line speed reference (Feedforward) must be multiplied by 1 and sent directly to the speed regulator of the drive.
This application operates by using proportional control. The correction will be indicated in percentage according
to the line speed, from 0 to the maximum.
Program PI top limit and PI bottom limit so that the max. correction of PI block corresponds at 20% of line
speed.
PI top limit and PI bottom limit parameters are the maximum and minimum multiplier factor of Feed forward
value.
At the max. line speed it will correspond 2550rpm of the motor (max. feed-forward).
Max. correction = 2550 x 20% = 510rpm
2550 + 510 = 3060rpm > PI top limit = 3060 / 2550 = 1.2
2550 - 510 = 2040rpm > PI bottom limit = 2040 / 2550 = 0.80
which will to multiply the setting of PI central v 1 (= 1) by + 20% (1.2) and - 20% (0.80).
With this configuration, having a correction proportional to the line speed, the PI block is not able to apply tension at speed = 0. In order to apply tension in stop conditions, it is necessary to use on the PD block.
The gains of the single components have to be set with loaded machine; it is possible to start tests with values
below indicated (default values):
Set PD P gain PID = 10%
In case use the derivative component for forcing the regulator output during velocity changes of the system,
programming for example:
PD D gain PID = 5%
In case it is necessary to carry out a references cascade for another drive, set PID output on an analog output,
for example:
Note:
302
If it is necessary, a system with the integral regulation enabled, with feed-forward = 0, and
the need to apply tension of the system with null error also when the machine is stopped,
please refer to the paragraph Generic PID.
TPD32-EV
Winder/Unwinder control with dancer

Nip-roll
Winder/unwinder
Reverse
Dancer
Forward
+10V
5Kohm
R
M
-10V
DRIVE
DRIVE
Feed-back
Feed-forward
(Internal ramp
master drive)
Line speed
reference
+10VForward
-10V Reverse
Figure 6.16.3.10: Winder/Unwinder control with dancer
Machine data:
Max. line speed =400m/min
Rated speed of the motor winder/unwinder Vn = 3000rpm
Max. diameter of the winder/unwinder = 700mm
Min. diameter of the winder/unwinder = 100mm
Reduction ratio motor-coil = 0.5
One pitch dancer
Dancer stroke from the lower limit switch to the position of electric 0 = 160mm
The drive of the winder/unwinder must be sent the analog signals regarding line speed and the position of the
dancer (whose potentiometer will be supplied between the terminals -10V... +10V) and the digital commands
regarding the enabling of the PID control.
The regulator output will be sent to the speed reference 1.
Drive setting: (below are only the parameters regarding the PID function)
Input/output
Set Analog input 1 as input for the wiper of the dancer.
To set the feed-forward on an analog input, seeing that this one is not directly accesible in the list of high-priority
parameters, it is necessary to pass through a supporting parameter PAD 0.....PAD 15.
Instruction manual
303

Set Digital input 3 as enabling input of the calculation function of initial diameter.
Digital input 3 = Diameter calc
Set Digital output 1 as signalling phase of calculation of starting diameter .
Digital output 1 = Diameter calc st
Parameters
Set Speed base value equal to the rated speed of the motor.
Set PID source as PAD 0.
(PAD 0 has been used as supporting parameter of the feed-forward reading on Analog input 2)
For PID source, set the parameter number to which it will be associated, choosing it from the list of the paragraph 10.2. List of high-priority parameters (PAD 0 had the decimal number 503). To obtain the correct value
it must be added the decimal number 8192 (fixed offset):
PID source = (8192 + 503) = 8695
Set Gain source and PID out scale so that, the max. analog value on Analog input 2 and without the PID correction (Enable PI PID e Enable PD PID = Disable), the peripheral speed of the roll in conditions of minimum
diameter (core) is the same of the max. line speed.
Calculation of the motor speed in the condition above mentionned:

Vp = x min x x R
where:
Vp = peripheral speed of the coil = line speed
min = min. diameter of the coil [m]
= angular speed of the motor [rpm]
R = reduction ratio motor-coil

= Vp / p x min x R = 400 / ( x 0.1 x 0.5) = 2546rpm = about 2550rpm
Mantaining a 15% margin as to the saturation limit of the regulator (10000 count), it is necessary to set PID
source Gain so that Feed-fwd PID reaches, along with the max. analog value on Analog input 2, 85% of its
max. value.
When an analog input is set on a PAD parameter , this will have a max. value +/- 2047.
304
TPD32-EV
So:
The speed reference of the motor is set in RPM x 4, so program as follows:
PID out scale = (2550 x 4) / (10000 x 0.85) = 1.2
Set PID target as 1 Speed ref 1.
Note:
When the ramp function has been enabled, Speed ref 1 is not available. To keep it available
it is necessary to set the parameter Enable ramp = Disable.
For PID target set the parameter number to which it will be associated, choosing it from the list of paragraph
10.2. List of high-priority parameters (Speed ref 1 has the decimal number 42).
To obtain the correct value it must be added the decimal number 8192 (fixed offset):
PID source = (8192 + 42) = 8234
With this configuration, having a correction proportional to the line speed, the PI block is not able to position the
dancer at speed = 0. In order to do the drawing in stop conditions, it is necessary to use the PD block.
As previously stated, the procedure determines the theorical multiplier factor (PI output PID) of feed-forward
as relation of the diameter calculated. In order to send to the drive the correct speed angular value.
Note:
When PI central v sel = 0 has been selected and the the PI block has been disabled, the system
keeps in memory, or reset automatically in case of switching off, the last value calculated
for PI output PID. If it would be necessary to set the value in order to have at the output an
incorrect reference and so equal to the feed-forward, it is possible to configure a digital input
as correction reset.
So configure:
Digital input 4 = PI central v S0
PI central v 1 = 1.00
Bringing the digital input to logical high level, the PI output PID will be reset.
Set PI top lim and PI bottom lim according to the ratio diameters coil.
Parameters PI top lim and PI bottom lim can be considered as multiplier factors, respectively max. and min.
of the feed-forward.
Considering that the angular speed of the motor and the corresponding reference, change inversely to the unwinder/winder diameter;
Set: PI top lim = 1
PI bottom lim = min / max = 100 / 700 = 0.14
Below is an explanation of above settings.
Calculation of the angular speed of the motor:
max. = Vl / ( x min x R)
and
min = Vl / ( x max. x R)
where:
max = angular speed of the motor in conditions of min. diameter [rpm]
min = angular speed of the motor in conditions of max. diameter [rpm]
Instruction manual
305
Vl = line speed
min = min. diameter of the core[m]
max = max. diameter of the core[m]
R = gear reduction ratio motor-winder/unwinder
So:

max / min = max / min

from which
min = (min / max) x max
Considering that the parameters PI top lim and PI bottom lim can be seen as multiplier factors of min. and
max. of the feed-forward.
Multiplying the feed-forward by PI top lim = 1, gives the max. speed reference concerning the minimum diameter.
Multiplying the feed-forward by PI bottom lim = 0.14, gives the min. speed reference concerning the max.
diameter.
This application operates by using the proportional-integral regulation.
The gains of a single component will be experimentally set with a loaded machine. It is possible to begin the
tests with the values below:
In this case, use the derivative component for forcing the regulator output during velocity changes of the system.
Programming for example:
PD D gain PID = 20%
In case it is necessaryto carry out a reference cascade for another drive, program PID output on an analog
output, for example:
Parameters regarding the calculation function of the initial diameter

This function is always necessary when one has to control an unwinder or when the starting diameter is unknown.
Set Positioning spd at the value in rpm with which the initial positionning of the dancer has to be done. For
example:
Positioning spd = 15rpm
The polarity of the reference assigned to Positioning speed will be anyway (winder/unwinder) equal to the one
functioning as a winder.
If for example one has to control an unwinder and the speed reference in standard functioning is positive, assign
to Positioning spd a negative value.
Set Max deviation at a value slightly lower than the one correspondent to the position of max. mechanical travel
allowed by the dancer.
During commissioning, it is always necessary to carry out the self calibration of the analog inputs of the drive.
In particular the one regarding analog input 1, with dancer in its position of lower fullrange, This position is
automatically assigned to the value 10000. So in order to guarantee a precise calculation it might be assigned:
Max deviation = 8000 (Default value)
306
TPD32-EV
Set Gear box ratio equal to the reduction ratio between the motor and the winder/unwinder:
Gear box ratio = 0.5
Set Dancer constant to the value in mm correspondent to the total accumulation of material in the dancer:
WInder/Unwinder
Dancer
Upper limit
Electrical 0
L
Central position
of working
Lower limit
Gear box ratio

One pitch dancer
L = 160mm
= (160 x 2) x 2 = 640mm
Figure 6.16.3.11: Diameter calculation
Measure of Dancer constant:

Set the keypad of the drive on the parameter PID feed-back.
Measure and multiply by 2, the distance between the lower mechanical fullrange and the position of the dancer
so that in the parameter PID feed-back will display 0 (position of 0 electric).
As the dancer has only one pitch, multiply the above calculated value by 2.
In this case set:
Dancer constant = 640mm
Programm Minimum diameter equal to the minimum value of the core diameter [cm]:
Minimum diameter = 10cm
Instruction manual
307
Use of the diameter sensor
Winder/unwinder
Nip-roll
Dancer
0-10V
+10V
5Kohm
R
-10V
DRIVE
DRIVE
Feed-back
Feed-forward
Figure 6.16.3.12: Winder/unwinder control with sensor diameter
The diameter sensor can be used in case of unwinder system with automatic gear.
In these cases, it is necessary to know the value of the starting diameter, in order to calculate the reference of
the angular speed of the motor, before the insertion of the new core.
The transducer must set in order to supply a voltage signal proportional to the roll diameter.
V
10V
5V
1V
90
min
450
900
max
Figure 6.16.3.13: Relation between transducer signal and coil signal
Example:

min

max

308
= 90 mm
= 900 mm
= 450 mm
transducer output = 1V
TPD32-EV
The analog input to which the sensor is connected, must be programmed as PI central V3.
The parameter PI central v sel, must be set = 3.
When Enable PI PID = disable, the value of PI central V3 is written in PI output PID and used as multiplier
factor of the feed-forward.
As previously described in the instruction book, the setting of PI output PID depends on the diameters ratio, so
the voltage signal proportional to the diameter will be automatically recalculated with the formula:
PI central V3 = (0 / 1)
Where: 0 = minimum winder diameter

1 = actual diameter
Setting resolution = 3 digits after the comma ( also if in PI central V3 are displayed only 2 digits after the comma).
Note !
During commissioning, it is necessary to verify that the signal coming from the sensor as
proportional to the diameter and that its maximum value is corresponding to 10V (carry out
the autotune of the analog input).
It is necessary to verify that PI top lim and PI bottom lim had been programmed
Instruction manual
309
Pressure control for pumps and extruders

Extruder
M
Pressure
transducer
Feed-back
-10V
Set
0... +10V
Pressure
setting
Feed-fwd
DRIVE
+10V
Speed reference
Figure 6.16.3.14: Pressure control for pumps and extruder
Machine Data:
Nominal speed of the extruder motor Vn = 3000rpm
Pressure transducer 0... +10V
The extruder slave drive must be sent analog signals concerning speed reference, the pressure transducer, the
setting of potentiometer for pressure (supplied between 0V... -10V) and the digital commands concerning the
enabling of the PID control.
The regulator output must be sent to the speed reference 1.
Setting of the drive: (below are only the parameters regarding the PID function)
Input/output
Set Analog input 1 as input for the pressure transducer.
Set Analog input 2 as input for the ramp block. The output of the ramp block must be used as speed reference.
(feed- forward).
Analog input 2 / Select input 2 = Ramp ref 1
Set Analog input 3 as input for the pressure setting (PID offset 0).
Set Digital input 1 as enabling input for the PI block of the PID
Set Digital input 2 as enabling input for the PD block of the PID
310
TPD32-EV
Parameters
Set Speed base value equal to the motor nominal speed .
Set PID source as Ramp output.
For PID source set the parameter number to which it will be associated, choosing it from the list of section 10.2.
List of high priority parameters (Ramp output has the decimal number113).
To obtain the correct value it must be added the decimal value 8192 (fixed offset):
PID source = (8192 + 113) = 8305
Set PID source Gain so that Feed-fwd PID, along with the maximum value of Ramp output (corresponding
to the maximum value of the analog input 2), reaches 100% of its value = 10000.
The ramp reference and its output automatically acquire their maximum value from the setting of Speed base
value. Therefore it must be taken into consideration that each writing or reading of any parameter concerning
the speed is defined as RPM x 4.
So: PID source Gain = max Feed-fwd PID / (Speed base value x 4) = 10000 / (3000 x 4) = 0.833
Note:
When the ramp function is enabled, Speed ref 1 is not available. In order to make it available
it is necessary to set the parameter Enable ramp = Disable. (This setting allows the working
of the ramp block, but disconnects its output from the speed reference 1).
For PID target, set the parameter number to which it will be associated, choosing it from the list of the section
10.2. List of high priority parameters (Speed ref 1 has the decimal number 42). To obtain the correct value it
must be added the decimal value 8192 (fixed offset):
PID target = 8192 + 42 = 8234
Set PID out scale so that the maximum analog value on Analog input 2 (Feed-fwd PID = 10000) and with
Enable PI PID and Enable PD PID = Disable, Speed ref 1 were equal to 3000rpm.
The Speed ref 1 must be set as RPM x 4, then:
PID out scale = (3000 x 4) / 10000 = 1.2
In absence of correction performed by the PI block of the regulator, the line reference speed (Feed-forward) must
be multiplied x 1 and sent directly to the speed regulator of the drive.
In this application, the regulator makes a proportional-integral control.
Set PI top limit and PI bottom limit in order to obtain maximum correction of the PI block equal to the 100%
of the speed reference.
The parameters, PI top limit and PI bottom limit could be considered as the multiplier factor respectively
maximum and minimum of the feed-forward.
PI top limit = 1
PI bottom limit = 0
Instruction manual
311
In this application the regulator uses a proportional-integral type of control.

The gains of the various components must be set with the load on the machine. A reference, it is possible to start
the test with the values below (default values):
If necessary, use the derivative component for forcing the regulator output during velocity changes of the system,
setting for example:
PD D gain PID = 5%
312
TPD32-EV
6.16.3.11 Generic PID

Drive settings: (here below are reported only the ones concering the PID function)
Input/output
Set Analog input 1 as input of the variable which has to be regulated (Feed-back).
Set Analog input 2 as input of the offset signal (PID offset 0).
Set Digital input 1 as input for the enabling of the PI block of the PID
Set Digital input 2 as input for the enabling of the PD block of the PID
Parameters
In case it necessary to use the regulator as Generic PID, independent from the feed-forward function, the
parameter Feed-fwd PID must be set at its maximum value. In order to do this it is necessary to go through a
PAD parameter.
Set PID source come PAD 0.
On PID source it must be set the parameter number which has to be associated, choosing it from the list of the
section 10.2. List of high priority parameters (PAD 0 has the decimal number 503).
To obtain the value, it must be added to the decimal value 8192 (fixed offset):
PID source = (8192 + 503) = 8695
Set PAD 0 = 10000
(The parameter PAD 0 is situated in the menu Special Function).
Note:
Setting PAD 0 = -10000, the output regulator polarity will be overturned.
Set PID source Gain = 1

Set PID target with the parameter number that has to be addressed to the output regulator.
To obtain the value it must be added the decimal value 8192.
The parameters that can be addressed are the ones described in the list of the section 10.2. List of high priority
parameters.
Set PID out scale according to the parameter to which the regulator output has been addressed.
From the section 10.2. List of high priority parameters comes out that:
The parameters concerning the speed are expressed as [SPD].
For all the drive sizes, the rated current will be 2000 [CURR], so:
PID out scale = 2000/ max. output PID = 2000/ 10000 = 0.2
Instruction manual
313
Note:

In case it would be necessary to use the drive with a provisory current higher than the rated
current of the drive, it is possible to increase the above described value of PID out scale.
For example, if one wants to obtain 1.5 times the size, one has to set:
PID out scale = 0.2 x 1.5 = 0.3
In this case it is necessary to enable the function of overload control Overload contr setting
correctly the values Overload current, Overload time, Base current and Pause Time.
The firmware of the drive does not perform a control on the polarity of the value sent, for
this reason, if it is not necessary to address the regulator output on parameters Unsigned,
then set the PID output so that it can be positive.
PID out. sign PID = Only positive
The parameters Unsigned, for example the current limits T current lim + and T current lim -, are indicated
in the List of high priority parameters with the symbol U16.
In this configuration, when executing the transition Off / On of the parameters for the enabling of the PID function, the regulator output starts from 0.
If it is necessary to retain the last value calculated also when the machine is disabled, it necessary to use a digital
input programmed as:
Digital input xx = PI central v S0
PI central v 1 = 0
When the digital input is at a low logic level (L), the last value calculated is stored. Applying a high logic level
(H) will reset the value.
Set PI top lim and PI bottom lim in order to obtain a correction of the PID block equal to 100% of its maximum value.
PI top lim = 1
PI bottom lim = -1
In this configuration the PID block output will be either positive and negative.
Setting PI top lim = 0, the positive part is blocked.
Setting PI bottom lim = 0, the negative part is blocked.
The gains of the various components must be set experimentally with the machine loaded.
It is possible to start the test with the following values:
Use the derivative component as damping component of the system, setting for example:
PD D gain PID = 5%
If not necessary maintain these parameters = 0.
314
TPD32-EV
6.16.3.12 Application note

Dynamic modification of the integral gain of the PI block
In standard dancer applications, where there is not a build up of material, the PI gains are set to a constant value.
Where dancers are used in conjuction with material winding, the gains are compromise between low gain setting at large diameter, and high gain settings at a small diameter. Using the drawing as an example, it can be
seen that with a large diameter roll, the amount of material to move the dancer requires only a fraction of a turn.
At a small diameter, or empty roll, the center of the roll must rotate a whole turn to move the same amount of
material. Since the PI regulator is used to provide the correction in rpm to maintain the dancer position, having
the gain set by a single value is inadequate when used with a winder.
Figure 6.16.3.15: Example with small and large diameter
Better dancer control is realized if the gain of the PI is modified dynamically based on diameter. This can be
accomplished using LINKS function.
In case of higher ratio diameters, PI I gain PID could be dynamically changed according to the actual diameter.
At the moment this functionality has not been implemented as specific function.
For example to control a winder having a diameters ratio of 1/10.
The function LINK 1 is used to get a connection between the diameter and the value of the integral component
of the PI block.
The integral component of the regulator must have a behaviour inversely proportional to the diameter.
The value of the parameter PI output PID already follows this behaviour. Infact, it changes according to the
relation F0 / Fact.
Where: F0 = minimum roll diameter

Fact = actual roll diameter
The operation to carry out through the LINK parameter is:
PI output PID x KI = PI I gain PID
Where KI corresponds to the value of the integral component on minimum diameter condition.
For example, if at min diameter, the maximum speed with steady dancer in electric zero position with PI I gain
PID = 40%.
Instruction manual
315
The LINK source must be associated to PI output PID [n0 771]:

Source link 1 = 8192 + 771 = 8963
The LINK destination must be associated to the value of the integral component= parameter PI I gain PID [n0 764]:

Destination link 1 = 8192 + 764 = 8956
The multiplier factor must be set to the value defined by the functioning tests above mentioned.

Mul gain link 1 = 40
It will be necessary to set:
Div gain link 1 = 1000 *
Input max link 1 = 1000 *
Input min link 1 = 100 **
Input offset link 1 = 0
Output offset link 1 = 0
Input absolute link 1 = OFF
The value 1000 is defined by PI top lim which will be in this case = 1 (correspondent to a maximum value
of PI output PID = 1000).
**
The value 100 is defined by PI bottom lim which will be in this case = 0.1 (correspondent to a minimum
value of PI output PID = 100).
*
With this configuration at minimum diameter it will correspond an integral gain = 40% and at maximum diameter
it will correspond to an integral gain = 4%, between the two setpoints the gain will change with an hyperbolic
characteristic.
20%
1000
PI output PID
PI I gain PID
40%
PI I gain PID = ( att) x KI
[KI = 40%]
500
8%
200
4%
100

100
200
500
o
1000
max
Figure 6.16.3.16: Relation between PI I gain PID and PI I output PID
The value of PI I gain PID will be displayed in the relative parameter of the submenu PI controls.
If necessary, using the LINK 2, it is possible to modify, dynamically, the proportional gain P gain PID.
316
TPD32-EV
Figure 6.16.3.17: General description of the PID blocks
Instruction manual
317
PID feed-back
PID offset 1
PID offset 0
PID source
PID source gain
Gain
PID dec time
PID acc time
PID clamp
10000
Enable drive
Disable drive
PID error
0 s
0 s
Offset 0
thr2
PID offs. sel.
PID feed-back
thr
Feed-fwd PID
0 ms
10 %
ON
PD D gain 3 PID
PD D gain 2 PID
PD D gain 1 PID
PD P gain 3 PID
PD P gain 2 PID
sign PID
P init gain PID
PI P gain PID
1 %
1 %
1 %
10 %
10 %
10 %
sign PID
Enable PI PID
10 %
PD P gain 1 PID
I init gain PID
PI I gain PID
Gain
Feed fwd sign:
pos gain = -1
neg gain = +1
Steady
state
PI steady delay
10 %
PD D filter PID
0 ms
PI integr freeze
Enable PD PID
10 %
ON
Off
PI top lim
PI central v3
Encoder 2 position
Speed fbk sel

Encoder 2
PI central v2
PI central v1
PI output PID
Encoder 1 position
PI central v sel
PI output PID
PI bottom lim
10
Diameter
calculator
Diameter calc st
PID out. sign PID

Bipolar
Gain
PID out scale

1
0 rpm
1 mm
8000
Dancer constant
Max deviation
Positioning spd
PI output PID
Gear box ratio
Minimum diameter
1 cm
Diameter calc
PID output
PID target
6.17 TORQUE WINDER FUNCTION

The center wind function inside the TPD32-EV converters is used to control winders and unwinders whose tension regulation is carried out via an open or closed loop control.
Apart from calculation functions for torque, diameter, compensation and Taper tension, the system foresees the
calculation of the motor speed reference. Such function allows to use the drive on the four regulation quadrants
controlling both winders and unwinders, and to control the motor with a peripheral speed proportional to the
diameter in case of a break of the wound material.
The torque is adjusted according to the motor flux, thus meaning that the system is suitable to control motors
with a constant torque-power ratio.
The closed loop regulation foresees an analog input for the loading cell 010V, 020mA, 420mA.
The output of the center wind function is sent directly to the current limits; the specific parameters T current lim
+/- and the limits set by the programmable overload function are anyway active in order to protect both the inverter and the motor; among the three possible settings the one with the lowest value is always the most important.
Input / Output
Line spd source
Ref spd source

Line speed sampling parameter. It is used exclusively for the diameter calculation. The
speed threshold, Ref speed thr, under which the calculation procedure is blocked, refers
to Ref line speed. It can be programmed as analog input or encoder input.
Line reference sampling parameter. It is used exclusively for the calculation of:
- the inertia compensations
- the line speed reference.
It can be programmed as analog input or encoder input.
Analog inputs
Tension ref
Tension red
Diam preset 3
Per cent tension reference; 10V (20mA) = 100%.

Per cent decrease in the Taper tension; 10V (20mA) = 100%.
Setting of the starting diameter; 10V (20mA) = max. diameter.
Analog outputs
Roll diameter
Act tension ref
Torque current
W reference
Actual comp
Digital inputs
Torque winder En
Diam calc Dis
Diam inc/dec En
Wind/unwind
Winder side
Diam preset sel 0
318
Present diameter; 10V = max. diameter.

Tension reference decreased by the Taper percentage; 10V = 100% Tension ref.
Request for torque current; 5V = drive size.
Reference for angular speed, 10V = 100% Base omega.
Active compensation monitor (it sums up static, dynamic and inertial frictions); 5V =
drive size.
Enabling of the center wind function.

Enabling of the diameter calculation.
If enabled and if winder, the calculated diameter can never decrease; if unwinder the
calculated diameter can never increase. It is used to improve the system stability.
Winder/unwinder selection: 0 = winder, 1 = unwinder.
Selection of the winding/unwinding side: 0 = up, 1 = down
LSD digital input; preselection of the starting diameter.
TPD32-EV
Diam preset sel 1

Diam reset
Taper Enable
Speed match
Line acc status
Line dec status
Line fstp status

Speed demand En
Closed loop En
MSD digital input; preselection of the starting diameter.

Reset of the calculated diameter.
Enabling of the Taper function.
Coil launching phase command for automatic switching.
Active acceleration.
Active deceleration.
Fast deceleration.
The last three parameters are inputs sending to the drive the status of the line speed: they
are used when the internal calculation procedure for the line acceleration is disabled.
Enabling of the speed reference calculation.
Enabling of the closed loop control.
Digital outputs
Diameter reached
Spd match compl
Indication: the diameter threshold has been overcome.

Indication: the launching speed has been reached.
6.17.1 Diameter calculation

OPTIONS
Torque winder
Diam Calculatio
[1154]
[1160]
[1286]
[1161]
[1205]
[1187]
[799]
[1153]
[1204]
[1284]
[1156]
[1285]
[1163]
[1155]
[1162]
[1206]
[1207]
[1157]
[1158]
[1159]
[1168]
[1164]
[1165]
[1166]
[1167]
Roll diameter [m]

Line speed [%]
Ref line speed [%]
Diam calc Dis
Diam inc/dec En
Wind/unwind
Minimum diameter [mm]
Maximum diameter [m]
Line spd source
Ref spd source
Line speed gain
Ref speed gain
Base omega [rpm]
Ref speed thr [%]
Diam filter [ms]
Diam init filter [ms]
Diam stdy delay [ms]
Diam reset
Diam thr [%]
Diam reached
Diam preset sel
Diam preset 0 [m]
Diam preset 1 [m]
Diam preset 2 [m]
Diam preset 3 [m]
Instruction manual
319
No.
min
max
Value
Factory
American
Factory
Standard
Standard
Configuration
Roll diameter [m]

Line speed [%]
Ref line speed [%]
Diam calc Dis
1154
0.000
32.000
1160
1286
1161
0.00
0.00
0
200.00
200.00
1
ON (1)
ON (1)
Diam inc/dec En
1205
Enabled (0)
Enabled (0)
Wind/unwind
1187
Winder (0)
Winder (0)

Line spd source
Ref spd source
Line speed gain
Ref speed gain
Base omega [rpm]
Ref speed thr [%]
Diam filter [ms]
Diam reset
Diam thr [%]
Diam reached
Diam preset sel
Diam preset 0 [m]
Diam preset 1 [m]
Diam preset 2 [m]
Diam preset 3 [m]
799
1153
1204
1284
1156
1285
1163
1155
1162
1206
1207
1157
1158
1159
1168
1164
1165
1166
1167
1
0.000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
2000
32.000
65535
65535
32767
32767
8191
150.00
5000
5000
60000
1
150.00
1
3
32.000
32.000
32.000
32.000
100
1.000
0
0
0
0
1500
5
100
100
0
0
10
100
1.000
0
0
0
0
1500
5
100
100
0
0
10
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ON (1) / OFF (0)
Unwinder (1) / Winder (0)
****
*
**
*
***
*
This parameter can be set on a programmable digital input.
** This parameter can be set on a programmable digital output.
*** This parameter can be set on a programmable analog input.
**** This parameter can be set on a programmable analog output.
The inputs received by the diameter calculator are the angular speed of the controlled motor and the line speed.
The latter can be measured through an analog input or an encoder.
The value of the calculated diameter can be sent to an analog output; via a digital output it is also possible to
state the overcoming of a programmable threshold.
It is possible to select four values of the starting diameters; one value can derive from an analog input.
Roll diameter
Monitor of the calculated diameter in [m].
Line speed
Monitor of the line speed in [%].
Ref line speed
Reference monitor for the line speed in [%].
Diam calc Dis
Disabling of the diameter calculation (see also par. Ref speed thr). In case such function is temporarily disabled during the functioning period, the system stores the last
calculated value.
Diam inc/dec En
If enabled and if winder, the calculated diameter can never decrease; if unwinder the
calculated diameter can never increase. It is used to improve the system stability.
Wind/unwind
Winder/unwinder selection. If the selection is carried out via a digital input: 0V = winder,
+24V = unwinder.
Minimum diameter
Value of the minimum diameter in [mm].
320
TPD32-EV
Maximum diameter
Value of the maximum diameter in [m].
Line spd source
Number of the sampling parameter for the line speed. In order to obtain the real number
to be set, it is necessary to add +2000H (8192 decimal) to the parameter number.
Programming example for the encoder 1 (connector XE1) on Line speed source:

OPTION Menu

> Torque winder

> Diam calculation

> Line speed source = 8619
Paragraph 10.2. List of the high priority parameters shows that Enc 1 speed has the
decimal number 427. In order to obtain the value to be entered it is necessary to add
8192 decimal (fixed offset): 8192 + 427 = 8619
Programming example for the analog input 2 on Line speed source:

a)
input programming on a PAD parameter

I/O CONFIG Menu

> Analog input

> Analog input 2

b)
setting of PAD 0 as a line speed input:

OPTION Menu

> Torque winder

> Diam calculation

Paragraph 10.2. List of the high priority parameters shows that PAD 0 has the decimal number 503. In order to obtain the value to be entered it is necessary to add 8192
decimal (fixed offset): 8192 + 503 = 8695
Line speed gain

Calibration value for the line speed.

Its setting depends on the sampling parameter of the line speed; it is used to obtain Line
speed = 100% at its maximum value
The calculation of Line speed gain must be carried out with the formula:
[32768 x 16384 / (maximum value of the sampling parameter x 8)] -1
Programming example for the encoder 1 (connector XE1) on Line speed source:
If the encoder has an unknown rotation speed, the input value of the encoder 1 can be
read in the
MONITOR Menu
> Measurements

> Speed

> Speed in rpm

> Enc 1 speed
Remember that the drive internally converts the speed in RPM x 4, therefore assuming
to have maximum Enc 1 speed = 1500rpm:
Line speed gain = [32768 x 16384 / (1500 x 4 x 8) 1] = 11184
Programming example for the analog input 2 on Line speed source:
Instruction manual
321
When an analog input is set on a PAD parameter, its maximum value is + / - 2048,
therefore in order to have Line speed = 100%:
Line speed gain = [32768 x 16384 / (2048 x 8) 1] = 32767
(In order to obtain a fine tuning it is necessary to carry out the self tuning procedure of
the analog input).
Ref spd source

Ref speed gain
Their functions are similar to Line speed source and Line speed gain. They can set the
signal used for the calculation of the inertia compensations and of the speed reference.
With the exception of particular conditions, for example a difference between the line
speed and the speed reference due to the presence of a loop on the material, such values
are set on the same source with the same gains.
Base omega
Value in [rpm] corresponding to the maximum angular speed of the winder/unwinder

(motor shaft side).
Line speed thr

Line speed detecting threshold in %.

When Ref line speed is lower than Ref speed thr the diameter calculation is stopped.
The diameter is kept at a constant value. When Ref line speed overcomes the threshold, the diameter calculation is enabled with an initial filter corresponding to Diam init
filter for the time set in Diam stdy delay. At the end of this time the filter will be set
to Diam filter.
Diam filter
Filter on the diameter calculation in [ms].
Diam init filter
Initial filter on the diameter calculation in [ms].
Diam stdy delay
Time in [ms] during which the value of Diam init filter is kept active after Line speed
thr has been overcome.
Diam reset
Diameter reset. When this parameter is enabled, the diameter gets a starting value selected with Diam preset sel.
Diam thr
Programmable diameter threshold as a percentage of Maximum diameter. The threshold

overcoming is detected by Diam reached and it can be sent to a digital output.
Diam reached
Indication for the overcoming of the diameter threshold.
Diam preset sel
Selector of the starting diameter [03]. Diam preset sel can be set directly via the
keypad or serial line or via two digital inputs programmed as Diam preset sel 0 and
Diam preset sel 1, the selection in this case is carried out with a binary logic.
Diam preset 0
0 starting diameter in [m]. The setting of this value must be included between Minimum
diameter and Maximum diameter.
Diam preset 1
Diam preset 2
Diam preset 3
It can be assigned to an analog input, in this case 10V correspond to Maximum diameter and the voltage referring to the minimum diameter is = 10 x (Minimum diameter
/ Maximum diameter).
322
TPD32-EV
6.17.2 Torque calculation

The torque calculator is made of three blocks:
1.
Torque calculation according to the winder/unwinder ray and to the set tension: C = T x r
2.
Calculation of the static, dynamic and inertial compensations
3.
If the Taper function is enabled, the calculation of the tension curve is made according to the ray.
The tension and Taper reduction references can be sent via an analog input, serial line or field bus. The calculation
of the angular acceleration, necessary to the inertial compensations, can be carried out through asuitable internal
function or by stating via three digital inputs the acceleration, deceleration and fast deceleration conditions.
The connection to the PID function belongs to the compensation block. Such connection is necessary when a
closed loop tension control with loading cell is carried out.
The calculation result is sent directly to the drive current limits and can be monitored in the parameters In use
Tcur lim + and In use Tcur lim of the LIMITS menu.
The standard parameters T current lim +/- and the limits set by the programmable overload function are anyway
active in order to protect both the inverter and the motor; the setting with the lowest value is always the most
important. It is also possible to set a specific current limit for the coil launching function during an automatic
switching. The outcoming tension value and that of the calculated torque current can be monitored on the analog
outputs.
OPTIONS
Torque winder
Torque calculat
[1180]
[1181]
[1194]
[1193]
Tension ref [%]

Tension scale [%]
Act tension ref [%]
Torque current [%]
No.
min
max
1180
0.00
199.99
1181
1194
1193
0
0.00
0.00
200
199.99
200.00
Tension ref [%]

Tension scale [%]
Act tension ref [%]
Torque current [%]
Value
Factory
American
0
Factory
Standard
0
100
100
Standard
Configuration
*
**
*
This parameter can be set on a programmable analog input.
** This parameter can be set on a programmable analog output.
Tension ref
Per cent tension reference.
Tension scale

Scale factor of the torque current in %.

This parameter is used when the value of the maximum winding torque has to be limited
or when a closed loop control is used in order to adjust the torque current value to the
real tension on the material measured by the loading cell.
As for tuning refer to paragraph Application example.

Act tension ref
Monitor of the % tension reference less the Taper percentage set via Tension red; if the
Taper function is not enabled, it corresponds to Tension ref.
Torque current
Monitor for the requirement of the torque current in %.
Instruction manual
323
6.17.2.1 Compensations and closing of the tension loop

OPTIONS
Torque winder
Torque calculat
Comp calculat
[1183]
[1182]
[1212]
[1184]
[1185]
[1186]
[1188]
[1189]
[1190]
[1171]
[1172]
[1192]
[1191]
[1173]
[1174]
[1175]
[1287]
[1213]
[1214]
[1208]
Int acc calc En
1183
Value
Factory
American
Enabled (1)
Time acc/dec min [s]

Acc/dec filter [ms]
Line acc [%]
Line dec [%]
Line fast stop [%]
Line acc status
Line dec status
Line fstp status
Variable J comp [%]
Constant J comp [%]
Act var J comp [%]
Act const J comp [%]
Mat width [%]
Static f [%]
Dinamic f [%]
Static f Zero
1182
1212
1184
1185
1186
1188
1189
1190
1171
1172
1192
1191
1173
1174
1175
1287
0.15
0
0.00
0.00
0.00
0
0
0
0.00
-100.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0
300.00
5000
100.00
100.00
100.00
1
1
1
199.99
+100.00
200.00
200.00
100.00
199.99
199.99
1
9.01
30
100
100
100
OFF
OFF
OFF
0
0
0
0
100
0
0
Disabled (0)
Actual comp [%]

Closed loop En
1213
1214
-200
0
+200
1
Close loop comp
1208
-32767
+32767
No.
min
max
Factory
Standard
Enabled (1)
9.01
30
100
100
100
OFF
OFF
OFF
0
0
0
0
100
0
0
Disabled (0)
Standard
Configuration
*
*
*
*
**
Disabled (0)
Disabled (0)
*
** This parameter can be set on a programmable digital output.
324
Int acc calc En

Acc/dec filter [ms]
Line acc [%]
Line dec [%]
Line fast stop [%]
Line acc status
Line dec status
Line fstp status
Variable J comp [%]
Constant J comp [%]
Act var J comp [%]
Mat width [%]
Static f [%]
Dinamic f [%]
Static f Zero
Actual comp [%]
Closed loop En
Close loop comp
TPD32-EV
Int acc calc En

Enabling of the calculation of the coil acceleration.

If enabled this function carries out the calculation of the angular acceleration inside the
drive. In this case it is necessary to set just the value of Time acc/dec min. If disabled,
it is necessary to set the parameters Line acc %, Line dec % , Fast stop % and Time
acc/dec min and to supply the corresponding status indication to the digital inputs.
Time acc/dec min
Time in [s] corresponding to the lower acceleration, deceleration and fast deceleration time.
Acc/dec filter
Filter in [ms] on the calculation of the acceleration inside the drive.
Line acc %

Acceleration time as a percentage of Time acc/dec min.

Ex:
Acceleration = line deceleration = 10s

Fast deceleration (fast stop) = 5s

Time acc/dec min = 5s

Line acc % = (5 / 10) x 100 = 50%
Line dec %

Deceleration time as a percentage of Time Acc/dec min.

Ex:



Line dec % = (5 / 10) x 100 = 50%
Line fast stop %

Fast deceleration time as a percentage of Time Acc/dec min.

Ex:



Line fast stop % = (5 / 5) x 100 = 100%
Line acc status
Acceleration stating input.
Line dec status

Deceleration stating input.

These two indications are combined with the drive digital outputs Acc state and Dec
state (see fig. 6.17.1).
Ramp output
Acc status
Dec status
Figure 6.17.1: Acceleration and deceleration indication
Line fstp status
Indication of a fast deceleration.
Variable J comp
Torque compensation due to the wound material as a percentage of the drive rated current. As for tuning see the paragraph Application example.
Instruction manual
325
Constant J comp
Compensation of the fixed section (motor, reducer,pin) as a percentage of the drive rated
current. As for tuning see the paragraph Application example.
Act var J comp
Monitor for the active compensation of the variable section as a percentage of the drive
rated current.
Act const J comp
Monitor for the active compensation of the fixed section as a percentage of the drive
rated current.
Mat width
Width of the wound material as a percentage of the maximum width.
Static f
Compensation of the static frictions as a percentage of the drive rated current. As for
tuning see the paragraph Application example.
Dinamic f
Compensation of the dynamic frictions as a percentage of the drive rated current. As

for tuning see the paragraph Application examples.
Static f Zero
By setting the parameter on Enabled, the friction compensation is completely inserted

for all speed values. When it set as Disabled, the static friction compensation is completely inserted with Ref line speed = 1.5%.
Act comp
Monitor for the active compensations (it sums up the static, dynamic and inertial frictions) as a percentage of the drive rated current.
Closed loop En
Enabling of the tension loop closing (to be used with a loading cell).
Closed loop comp
Monitor for the active compensation, output of the PID regulator used for the loop closing.
326
TPD32-EV
6.17.2.2 Taper function

OPTIONS
Torque winder
Torque calculat
Taper function
[1176]
[1177]
[1178]
[1180]
[1179]
[1194]
Taper enable
1176
Value
Factory
American
Disabled (0)
Init diameter [m]

Final diameter [m]
Tension ref [%]
Tension red [%]
Act tension ref [%]
1177
1178
1180
1179
1194
0.000
0.000
0.00
0.00
0.00
32.000
32.000
199.99
199.99
200.00
0.1
1
0
0
0
No.
min
max
Taper enable
Init diameter [m]
Final diameter [m]
Tension ref [%]
Tension red [%]
Act tension ref [%]
Factory
Standard
Disabled (0)
0.1
1
0
0
0
Standard
Configuration
*
**
**
***
*
**
This parameter can be set on a programmable analog input.
*** This parameter can be set on a programmable analog output.
Act tension ref
Tension ref
Tension ref x 1 -
Tension red
100
Roll diameter
Min
diameter
Init
diameter
Max
diameter
Final
diameter

Figure 6.17.2: Relation among the Taper function parameters
Taper enable
Enabling of Taper function.
Init diameter
Diameter for the starting of the taper tension reduction in meters.
Final diameter
Diameter for the ending of the taper tension reduction in meters.
Tension ref
Tension reference in %.
Tension red
Taper tension reduction as a percentage of Tension ref.
Act tension ref
Monitor for the active tension reference as a percentage of Tension ref.
Instruction manual
327
6.17.3 Calculation of the speed reference

OPTIONS
Torque winder
Speed demand
[1215]
[1201]
[1202]
[1195]
[1200]
[1196]
[1197]
[1203]
[1216]
[1199]
[1198]
[1210]
[1217]
[1256]
[1255]
Speed demand En
Winder side
W gain [%]
Speed match
Spd match gain [%]
Spd match acc [s]
Spd match dec [s]
Spd match compl
Spd match torque [%]
W offset [rpm]
Offset acc time [s]
W target
W reference [rpm]
Jog TW enable
Jog TW speed [%]
The calculation and control of the reference for the motor angular speed allow to use the drive on the four
regulation quadrants both with a winder and unwinder control and to control the motor with a peripheral speed
proportional to the diameter in case the wound material breaks down.
Such program block contains also the control of the coil launching reference during the initial and automatic
switching phases with a stopped line.
The calculator output can be addressed to one of the four possible speed references of the drive or on an analog output.
Speed demand En
1215
Value
Factory
American
Disabled (0)
Winder side
1201
Up (0)
Up (0)
W gain [%]
Speed match
1202
1195
0
0
100
1
0
OFF (0)
0
OFF (0)
Spd match gain [%]

Spd match acc [s]
Spd match dec [s]
Spd match compl
W offset [rpm]
Offset acc time [s]
W target
W reference [rpm]
Jog TW enable
1200
1196
1197
1203
1216
1199
1198
1210
1217
1256
0
0.30
0.30
0
0
0
0.30
0
-8192
0
150
300.00
300.00
1
200
1000
950.00
65535
+8192
1
100
83.88
83.88
100
83.88
83.88
100
0
83.88
0
100
0
83.88
0
Disabled (0)
Disabled (0)
Jog TW speed [%]
1255
100
Down (1) / Up (0)
ON (1) / OFF (0)
No.
min
max
Factory
Standard
Disabled (0)
*
**
This parameter can be set on a programmable digital output.
*** This parameter can be set on a programmable analog output.
328
TPD32-EV
Standard
Configuration
Speed demand En
Speed reference calculation enabled.
Winder side
Selection of the winding/unwinding side: 0 = up, 1 = down
W gain
Setting of the speed reference gain used to saturate the loop. Parameter as a percentage
of the increasing/decreasing value of the angular speed reference.
Speed match
Command of the coil launching phase for an automatic switching.
Spd match gain
Setting of the speed reference gain during the launching phase, 100% corresponds to a
peripheral speed equal to the line speed.
Spd match acc
Motor acceleration time during the launching phase, in [s].
Spd match dec
Motor deceleration time in [s] if during the launching phase a stop command is given.
Spd match compl
Indication of a completed launching ramp, if it is programmed on a digital output it can

be used to state that the coil can be changed.
Spd match torque
Setting of the torque current during the launching and change phase. The parameter is
given as a percentage of the drive rated current.
W offset
Offset setting on the speed reference for the initial phase of the winder/unwinder when
the line is stopped. The parameter is given in [rpm].
Offset acc time
Setting of the ramp for the initial phase when the machine is stopped. The parameter is
given in [s]. It refers to Speed base value.
W target
Parameter number where the speed reference has to be addressed to. In order to obtain
the real number to be set, it is necessary to add +2000H (8192 decimal) to the parameter
number.
1.
Addressing example on the speed reference 2:

OPTION Menu

> Torque winder

> Speed demand

> W target = 8235
Paragraph 10.2. List of the high priority parameters shows that Speed ref 2 has the
decimal number 43. In order to obtain the value to be entered, it is necessary to add
8192 decimal (fixed offset): 8192 + 427 = 8235
W reference
Monitor for the speed reference.
Jog TW enable
Jog function enabled.
Jog TW speed
Reference setting for Jog function. The parameter is given as a % of Line speed.
Instruction manual
329
Control of the speed reference

In order to calculate the speed reference during the different functioning phases of the machine, a status logic
has been developed. The status sequence and the operativeness is described in the figure 6.17.3.
Status 1
(default)
Int acc time = 0

Int dec time = 0
Int offset acc time = Offset acc time
Int w offset = W offset
0
Sp
ee
d
=
e)
Start (drive) = 1
riv
(d
th
r=
t
ar
St
Int acc time = 0

Int dec time = Spd match dec
Int offset acc time = 0
Int w offset = 0
Status 2
Status 5
Start (drive) = 0
Start (drive) = 0
Speed match = 1
Sta
rt (
dri
ve
)=
Status 4
Status 3
Speed match = 0
Int acc time = 0
Int dec time = 0
Int w offset = W offset
Int acc time = Spd match acc

Int dec time = 0
Int w offset = 0
Figure 6.17.3: Operative sequence of the functioning status
Status 1:

Default status, this system condition is given when the drive is in a Stop condition. The speed reference is zero.
Status 2:

The system reaches this status when the Start command is given.
When the line is stopped, the initial phase reference W offset is assigned with the ramp time Offset acc time.
When the line is started, the motor speed reference follows its profile with a value corresponding to:
W reference = Line speed x (Minimum diameter Roll diameter) (W gain % + W offset)
the sign of:
Line speed x (Minumum diameter Roll diameter)
is positive if Wind/unwind = winder
is negative if Wind/unwind = unwinder
the sign of:
(W gain % + W offset)
is usually positive, it could be changed only if during the acceleration or deceleration phases a torque inversion is required.
The polarity of W reference will be further inverted if Winder side = 1
(winding/unwinding down).
If during a Status 1functioning period the system receives a Stop command (Start drive = 0), the Status 5 is
forced.
330
TPD32-EV
Status 3:

The system reaches this status if the command Speed match = 1 and the Start command are given.
Starting from a Stop condition, if these commands are given, the motor speed reference is set with:W reference = [ Line speed x (Min dia Roll dia) (W gain % * W offset)] x Spd match gain
where W offset is forced to 0 with a ramp time set to Spd match acc.
If during a Status 3 functioning period the command Speed match is set at zero, the Status 4 is forced.
If during a Status 3 functioning period the system receives a Stop command (Start drive = 0), the Status 5
is forced.
Status 4:

The system reaches this status if starting from the Status 3 the command Speed match is set at zero.
It usually happens simultaneously with the cutting and coil change command.
In this status the motor speed reference is set to:
W reference = Line speed x (Minimum diameter Roll diameter) ( W gain % + W offset)
all the internal ramp times for the reference calculation are set at zero.
If during a Status 4 functioning period the system receives a Stop command (Start drive = 0), the Status 5
is set at zero.
Status 5:

The system reaches this status through the Status 2, 3, and 4 if it receives a Stop command (Start drive = 0).
It usually happens:
a) after an automatic switching in order to stop the rotating coil.
The speed reference is set at zero with a ramp time set to Spd match dec.
The parameter W offset is immediately set at zero in order to slow down the coil starting from
the present speed
b) After the line stop if the tension has to be removed (in this case the drive has to be disabled).
Anyway, when the speed = 0 has been reached, the system switches automatically to the Status 1.
Instruction manual
331
Status 6:

The system reaches this status when the parameter Jog TW enable is enabled and the Start command has
been given. The Jog command is used on unwinders in order to bring the coil material till the first nip roll.
See figure 6.17.4.

W reference = f (Jog T W speed, )
Jog T W enable = 1
Start (drive) = 1
Status 1
(default)
Status 6
Jog T W enable = 1
Start (drive) = 0

W reference = 0
Figure 6.17.4: Functioning with Jog TW enable
Jog TW enable prepares the system for a particular functioning condition; in order to enable the coil rotation
it is necessary to give the Start command, a following Stop will force the speed reference to 0 (see paragraph
Control logic).
In the Status 6 the motor speed reference is set to:
W reference = Jog TW speed x Minimum diameter Roll diameter
It is possible to change the Jog speed sign by using the command Winder side.
If starting from the Status 6, Jog TW enable is disabled by keeping the Start command, the system switches
to the Status 2.
332
TPD32-EV
Instruction manual
M1
G1
F3
C1
U1
F4
D1
U2
L1
U
V
PE
PE
82
81
PE
Thermistor
78
SMPS
U2 V2
2 4 6
79
U3 V3
2 4 6
Q1 1 3 5 Q2 1 3 5
A+
STOP
AL
START
M+
M-
EN
I lim
8
1
2
7
0V
OK
+
1
Analog input 1
RS 485
B- +24V 0V
XE2
Keypad
A- B+
CANC
ENT
n=0
35
76
K1M
+
3
Analog input 2
Relay 2
36 75
Fan with external supply only above

560/770 A included (American/European).
13
14
+
5
Analog input 3
12
K2
Enable
drive
Tension feedback
Start
Tension ref
Fast
Stop
15
External
Fault
F2
16
COM ID
0 V 10
+ 10 V
18
19
11
10 20
PE
XE1
From XS2 connector

on DEII card
(page 2)
K0
0V24
- 10 V
K1M
Tension red
24V
Internal 0 V
F1
XBB
XBA
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
6.17.4 Typical connection diagrams
Figure 6.17.5: Winder with an automatic switch and a closed loop tension regulation
333
XE1
TPD32 (Winder motor)
XS2
1,5m
0Venc
+Venc
+Supp
C-
C+
B-
B+
A-
A+
-Supp
DEII
B-
B+
A-
A+
From encoder of the Nip roll
(Interface card of the second encoder)
334
TPD32-EV
I/O expansion card on TPD32-EV winder motor (connector XBA)
DRIVE REGULATION BOARD
Supply
Digital inputs
TBO
1
19
10
15
11
12
13
0 V 24
Digital outputs
+ 24 V
Analog outputs
18
14
0V
Diam preset sel 2
Diam preset sel 1
Torque winder En
Diam reset
0V
Diameter reached + 24V
Motor current -10...0...+10V
Roll diameter 0...10V
+ 24 V
(I/O expansion card)
Instruction manual
335
I/O expansion card on TPD32-EV winder motor (connector XBB)
DRIVE REGULATION BOARD
Supply
Digital inputs
TBO
1
19
10
15
11
12
13
14
0V
+ 24 V
(I/O expansion card)
336
TPD32-EV
Diam calc Dis
Speed match
Enable PI-PD PID
Winder side
Spd match compl + 24V
0V
0 V 24
Digital outputs
+ 24 V
Analog outputs
18
6.17.5 Control logic

This chapter describes the most common logic sequences:
1.
Diameter initialization
2.
Initial phase
3.
Automatic switch
4.
Coil stop
5.
Jog function
Diameter initialization
This sequence is carried out before the starting of a winder/unwinder both with a coil initial phase when the line
is stopped and during an automatic switching.
The diameter value set in Roll diameter depends on the parameters Diam preset 0, 1, 2, 3 and on Diam preset sel.
If 2-4 different values of the starting diameter have been set, the selection has to be carried out via some
programmed digital inputs such as Diam preset sel 0 and Diam preset sel 1, or via the parameter Diam
preset sel.
If the value of the starting diameter is set via an analog input, set Diam preset sel = 3.
Enable the parameter Diam reset for a time longer than 20ms.
Reset the digital input status before the start.
Initial phase
This sequence is carried out in order to start the initial phase with a stopped line.
Diam reset
Start (drive)
Torque winder En
Figure 6.17.9: Initial phase with a stopped line
Initialize the diameter value as stated above.

Enable the tension control and give the start command to the drive.
If the speed reference calculation is carried out inside the drive (Speed demand en = Enable) the initial
phase is started with the reference set to W offset and with a ramp time Offset acc time.
Now the line can be started.
Instruction manual
337
Automatic switching
This sequence carries out an automatic switching between two coils during a winding/unwinding period.
Diam reset
Torque winder En
Speed match
Start (drive)
Spd match compl

(digital output)
Diam calc Dis
Figure 6.17.10: Automatic switching between two coils during a winding/unwinding period
a) Commands referring to the old coil:

During the star rotation phase it is advisable to disable the diameter calculation of the coil functioning as
Diam calc dis = 1 in order to avoid errors in the diameter calculation.
b) Commands referring to the new coil:
Enable the command Speed match, Torque winder en and give the start command to the drive. The motor
will increase the coil speed till a peripheral speed has been reached which corresponds to the line speed for
Spd match gain with the ramp set to Spd match acc. After reaching such speed, the drive indicates the end
of the launching phase with the parameter Spd match compl.
Disable the command Spd match simultaneously to the switching between the two coils.
Enable the diameter calculation: Diam calc dis = 0.
Reel stop
This sequence is used to stop the ended reel after carrying out the automatic switching.

Disabled the diameter calculation Diam calc Dis = 1 and Start command. The reel will decrease up to zero
speed with the time set on Spd match dec .
At speed = 0 disabled Torque winder en.
338
TPD32-EV
Diam calc Dis
Start (drive)
Speed = 0
Torque winder en
Figure 6.17.11: Coil stop after the automatic switching
Jog function
This sequence is used in particular on unwinders in order to bring the coil material till the first nip roll.
Diam reset
Diam calc Dis
Jog T W enable
Start (drive)
Winder side
+
W reference
Figure 6.17.12: Jog function to prepare the machine

Disable the diameter calculation. Enable Jog TW enable.
Use the Start/stop command to carry out the Jog function.
With the Start the motor increases the coil speed till reaching the peripheral speed set in Jog TW speed with
the ramp time Spd match acc.
With the Stop the motor decreases its speed till reaching the 0 speed with the ramp time Spd match dec.
In order to change the rotation direction use the command Winder side.
Instruction manual
339
6.17.6 Application example

Open loop winder/unwinder control
Nipp roll
Forward
Winder/unwinder
Reverse
Up
Down
R
M
R
M
Line speed
(nip roll motor)
Drive
+10V
Drive
Tension setting
(Internal ramp of
the master drive)
Line speed reference
Wind/unwind
Winder side (up/down)
Diam reset
+24V
+10V Forward
-10V Reverse
Machine data:
Maximum line speed=400m/min
Rated speed of the winder motor Vn=3000rpm
Winder maximum diameter=0.7m
Winder minimum diameter=100mm
Motor - winder reduction ratio=0.5
Line speed reference 0-10V from nip roll motor.
Line acceleration/deceleration time =30sec.
Fast deceleration time fast/stop=15 sec.
Winder/unwinder selection via a digital input.
Winding side selection (up/down) via a digital input.
Tension setting via the analog input.
The winder/unwinder drive receives the analog signals referring to the line speed, to the tension setting, to the
digital commands for the winder/unwinder selection, winding side (up/down), and to the diameter reset.
Drive settings:(only the settings referring to the function Torque Winder are described)
340
TPD32-EV
PROGRAMMING OF ANALOG INPUTS

ANALOG INPUT 1
Tension ref
Tension reference in %;10V (20mA)=100%
I/O CONFIG Menu

> Analog input

> Analog input 1

> Select input 1 Tension ref:
ANALOG INPUT 2

If the parameter Line spd source has to be set on an analog input, as this parameter is
not listed among the high priority parameters, it is necessary to pass through a support
parameter PAD0PAD15.
Line spd source: 10V (20mA)=100%
Programming of the analog input 2 on PAD 0:
I/O CONFIG Menu

> Analog input

> Analog input 2

ANALOG INPUT 3

If the parameter Ref spd source has to be set on an analog input, as this parameter is
not listed among the high priority parameters, it is necessary to pass through a support
parameter PAD0PAD15.
Ref spd source: 10V (20mA)=100%
Programming of the analog input 2 on PAD 1:
I/O CONFIG Menu

> Analog input

> Analog input 3

PROGRAMMING OF DIGITAL INPUTS

DIGITAL INPUT 1
Diam calc Dis:

DIGITAL INPUT 2
Wind/unwind
Disabling of the diameter calculation (see also par. Line speed thr). In case during the
functioning period it is temporarily disabled, the system stores the last calculated value.
This function has to be enabled only if the application requires it.

I/O CONFIG Menu

> digital input

> digital input 1: Diam calc Dis:
Winder/unwinder selection. In case the selection is carried out via the digital input: 0V
=Winder, +24V = Unwinder.
Instruction manual
341
DIGITAL INPUT 3
Winder side
DIGITAL INPUT 4
Diam reset

Selection of the winding/unwinding side: in case the selection is carried out via a digital
input: 0 =UP, 1 = Down
Diameter reset. When this parameter is enabled, the diameter gets the starting value
selected with Diam preset sel.
If 2-4 different values of the starting diameter have been set, the selection has to be carried
out via some programmed digital inputs such as: Diam preset sel 0- Diam preset sel 0
If the value of the starting diameter is set via an analog input, set Diam preset sel = 3.
In case of a winder control, it is necessary to give a reset command every time a coil
change is performed by setting the minimum diameter value (winder empty diam.)
In case of an unwinder control, it is necessary to give a reset command every time a coil
change is performed by setting the maximum diameter value(winder maximum diam.).
Enable the parameter Diam reset for a time longer than 20ms.
Reset the digital input status before the start
DIGITAL INPUT 5
Diam preset sel 0
DIGITAL INPUT 6
Diam preset sel 1
In case of a system with a winder or unwinder control, it is possible to set in Diam preset
0 the value of the starting diameter; for the winder control a minimum diameter, for the
unwinder control a maximum diameter. Set Diam preset sel =0 (do not set any digital
input as diam preset sel 0-diam preset 1). By starting the command of Diam reset the
value of diam preset 0 is entered in Roll diameter.
OPTION Menu

> Torque winder
Torque winder En ; set Enable to enable the center wind function.
If the system requires it, it is possible to set this function (enable/disable)also via a
digital input.
Setting of the parameters in the DIAMETER CALCULATION menu

PARAMETERS

OPTION Menu

> Torque winder

> Diam calculation
Wind/unwind
Minimum diameter
Maximum diameter
Line spd source
342
Winder/unwinder selection. Selection to be carried out only if the digital inputs are not set.
Minimum diameter value in [mm]. Set 100mm
Maximum diameter value in [m]. Set 0.7m
Number of the sampling parameter of the line speed. In order to get the real number to
be set it is necessary to add +2000H (8192 decimal) to the parameter number.
TPD32-EV
Setting of PAD 0 as a line speed input:

OPTION Menu

> Torque winder

> Diam calculation

Line speed gain

Ref spd source
Calibration value of the line speed.

Its programming depends on the sampling parameter of the line speed; it is used to get
Line speed = 100% of its maximum value.
The calculation of Line speed gain must be carried out with the formula:
When this analog input is set on a PAD parameter, its maximum value is + / - 2048,
therefore to have Line speed = 100%:
Line speed gain =
[32768 x 16384 / (2048 x 8) 1] = 32767
(A fine tuning can be obtained by carrying out the self tuning procedure of the analog
input).
Sampling parameter number relating to the line speed reference. In order to get the real
number to be set it is necessary to add +2000H (8192 decimal) to the parameter number.
Setting of PAD 0 as a line speed input:

OPTION Menu

> Torque winder

> Diam calculation

> Ref speed source = 8695
Ref speed gain

Gauging value of the line speed reference.

The relative setting depends on the sampling parameter of the line speed reference and
is used to obtain Line speed = 100% at its peak.
The calculation of Ref speed gain must be carried out with the formula:
When this analog input is set on a PAD parameter, its maximum value is + / - 2048,
therefore to have Ref line spd = 100%:
Ref speed gain =
[32768 x 16384 / (2048 x 8) 1] = 32767
(A fine tuning can be obtained by carrying out the self tuning procedure of the analog
input).
Line speed
Monitor of the line speed in [%]. After programming line speed source and line speed
gain it is possible to control the tuning by checking that with a line speed at its maximum
value the parameter line speed =100%.
Ref line speed
Line reference Monitor.
Instruction manual
343
Base omega

Ref speed thr

Value in [rpm] corresponding to the maximum angular speed of the winder/unwinder

(motor shaft side).
Vp=p x Fmin x w x R
where :
Vp= peripheral speed
Fmin=winder minimum diameter (mm)
w = motor angular speed
R =reduction ratio
w=Vp/ p x Fmin x R=400/(3.14 x 0.1 x 0.5)=2547rpm
Base omega =set 2547rpm.
Line speed detecting threshold in %.
When Line speed is lower than Line speed thr the diameter calculation is disabled.
When Line speed is higher than the threshold, the diameter calculation is enabled with
an initial filter corresponding to Diam init filter for the time set in Diam stdy delay.
At the end of this time the filter is set to Diam filter.
Maximum line speed =400m/min . Line speed thr=5% (the diameter calculation is
automatically enabled at 20m/min).
Setting of the parameters in the SPEED DEMAND menu

PARAMETERS

OPTION Menu

> Torque winder

> Speed demand
Speed demand En
Enabling of the speed reference calculation; set Enable
Winder side
Selection of the winding/unwinding side. Selection to be carried out only if the digital
inputs are not set.
0 =up,
1 =down
W gain
Setting of the speed reference gain used for the loop saturation. Parameter given as a
percentage of the increase/decrease of the angular speed reference.
W gain=30% (set this starting value)

W offset

Offset setting on the speed reference for the winder/unwinder initial phase with a stopped
line. Parameter in [rpm].
W offset=50rpm (check with the material)
Offset acc time
Setting of the initial phase ramp with a stopped machine. Parameter in [s]. The acc time
refers to the parameter speed base value
W target
Parameter number which the speed reference has to be addressed to. In order to obtain the
real number to be set it is necessary to add +2000H (8192 decimal) to the parameter number.
W target : set 2 as a speed reference:

OPTION Menu

> Torque winder

> Speed demand

> W target = 8235
Paragraph 10.2. List of the high priority parameters shows that Speed ref 2 has the
decimal number 43. In order to obtain the value to be entered add 8192 decimal (fixed
offset): 8192 + 427 = 8235
344
TPD32-EV
W reference:
It is possible to use it as a monitor for the speed reference.
Setting of the parameters in the COMP CALCULATION menu

OPTION Menu

> Torque winder

> torque calculation

> comp calculation
Static f:

Dynamic f:

Compensation of the static frictions as a percentage of the drive rated current

Check that the parameters Static f and Dinamic f=0
Set the tension (tension ref)=0
The diameter calculation function is blocked (enable the programmed digital input
as Dis diam calc)
Operations to be carried out without line reference, jog function and materials on
the machine (the compensation of the static frictions is completely entered only
when the line speed is higher than 1.5%).
Stopped winder/unwinder motor within the current limit (In use t curr lim+/-=0)
Gradually increase the value of Static f. The motor will start rotating. Set a suitable value so that the winder/unwinder can rotate with a speed near to the zero (it
must always be within the current limit. The led Ilim on the keypad is lighted)
Compensation of the dynamic frictions as a percentage of the drive rated current
Set the maximum line speed reference, check that the minimum diameter has been
set in roll diameter (if not carry out a Diam reset on the minimum diameter)
Set temporarily the parameter Static f: with a value of 10-20%. The motor speed
will increase reaching the speed Base omega (the converter in this phase has to
overcome the current limit ) .
When the motor reaches its rated speed, set the parameter Static f with its previously tuned value. The speed will start decreasing.
Increase gradually the parameter Dynamic f till the speed ends its decreasing phase
and the motor rotates at a constant speed.
Increase the speed by increasing temporarily the parameter Static f. Reset the
parameter Static f with its right value. The motor must keep the reached speed.
In a negative case, reset the parameter Dynamic f and repeat the tests till the required conditions have been reached.
Static f Zero
By setting the parameter on Enabled, the friction compensation is completely inserted

for all speed values. When it set as Disabled, the static friction compensation is completely inserted with Ref line speed = 1.5%.
Int acc calc En

Enabling of the calculation for the coil acceleration.

If enabled, this function calculates the angular acceleration inside the drive. In this case
it is necessary to set just the value of Time acc/dec min. If disabled, the parameters
Line acc % - dec % - fast stop % and Time acc/dec min have to be set and the digital
inputs have to be supplied with the suitable indications.
Time acc/dec min
Set the time in [s] corresponding to the lowest acceleration, deceleration and fast deceleration time.
Set time acc/dec min =15sec (time required for a fast deceleration)
Instruction manual
345
Acc/dec filter

Filter in [ms] on the acceleration calculation inside the drive

Set =30 msec
Mat width
Width of the wound material as a percentage of the maximum width. Set =100%
Constant J comp
Compensation of the fixed section (motor, reducer,core) as a percentage of the drive

rated current. Increase the value till the motor can increase the speed following the line
reference. During this phase the converter has always to be within the current limit.
Diameter calculation function disabled (enable the programmed digital input as
Dis diam calc)
Operations to be carried out without material on the machine,
Install the empty winder (check that the parameter Roll diameter= min. diam).
Check that the parameters Constant J comp- Variable J comp=0
Set the tension (tension ref)=0
Minimum jog function and line reference
Carry out some changes on the line reference.
Increase gradually the value of the parameter Constant J comp till the winder/
unwinder is able to follow the line speed reference.
Variable J comp

Torque compensation due to the wound material as a percentage of the drive rated current.
Operation to be carried out without material on the machine
Install a full coil on the winder (check that the parameter Roll diameter= max.
diam ).
Follow the same procedure as the one carried out for the tuning of Constant J
comp
Act var J comp
Monitor for the compensation of the variable section as a percentage of the drive rated
current.
Act const J comp
Monitor for the compensation of the fixed section as a percentage of the drive rated
current.
Act comp
Monitor for the compensations (it sums up static, dynamic and inertial frictions) as a
percentage of the drive rated current.
346
TPD32-EV
Closed loop winder/unwinder control with loading cell

Nipp roll
Forward
Winder/unwinder
Up
Reverse
Down
Load cell
0...+10V
R
M
R
E
Feed-back
Drive
Line speed
(nip roll motor)
Drive
+10V
Wind/unwind
Winder side (up/down)
Diam reset
Enable PI-PD PID
(Internal ramp of
the master drive)
Line speed reference
+24V
Tension setting
+10V Forward
-10V Reverse
Machine data
Maximum line speed=400m/min
Rated speed of the winder motorVn=3000rpm
Winder maximum diameter=0.7m
Winder minimum diameter=100mm
Motor-winder reduction ratio=0.5
Line speed reference 0-10V from nip roll motor.
Line acceleration/deceleration time =30sec.
Fast deceleration time fast/stop=15 sec.
Winder/unwinder selection via a digital input.
Winding side selection (up/down) via a digital input.
Tension setting via the analog input.
Set all the parameters as stated in the previous example. After testing the machine with an open loop material,
carry out such settings for the tuning with a loading cell.
Instruction manual
347
ANALOG INPUT 3
Pid feed back

Input of the loading cell;10V (20mA)=100%

I/O CONFIG Menu

> Analog input

> Analog input 3 Pid feed back
Closed loop En

Closing of the tension loop enabled (to be used with a loading cell).
Set the parameter Closed loop En=enable
Closed loop comp
Monitor for the present compensation on the output of the PID regulator used for the
loop closing.
DIGITAL INPUT
Programming of a digital input to enable the PID function

I/O CONFIG Menu

> digital input

> digital input 7:enable PI-PD PID
Setting of Pid parameters
Set Pid Source as PAD 1.
Pid source=(8192+504)=8696

PARAMETERS

OPTION Menu

> PID

> Pid source

> Pid source=8695
Set PAD 1 =10000
(Pad 1 is in the Special function menu)
Set Pid source gain =1
Set PID target as the parameter Closed loop comp
The parameter Closed loop comp has the decimal number 1208
In order to obtain the value to be entered add 8192 decimal (fixed offset )
PID target=8192+1208=9400
Set Pid out scale
Pid out scale=(max .value of closed loop comp)/max oPID output
Pid out scale=10000/10000=1
Set PI top lim and Pi bottom lim in order to have a 100% correction of its maximum value.
PI top lim=1
Pi bottom lim=-1
With this configuration the regulator output is positive and negative.
The gains of the several components have to be set experimentally with a loaded machine.
348
TPD32-EV
It is possible to start the tests with the values below :

set PI P gain PID=10%
set PI I gain PID=4%
set PD P gain PID=5%
set PD D gain PID=0%
PD D filter PID=20msec
Set PI central vsel=1
Set PI central v 1=0
With this configuration, when the switching ON/OFF of the parameters enabling the PID function is carried out,
the regulator output starts from 0.
Before enabling the PID regulator and the loop closing it is necessary to check the matching between the set
tension and the tension measured by the loading cell.
The loading cell has to be tuned in order to have an analog output =10V connected to the maximum tension on
the required material.
With a loaded machine start the winder/unwinder by setting a tension of 50%.
Check the values of the parameters Act tension ref (0 100%, tension set in the Torque winder menu) and Pid
feedback (0 10000, loading cell feedback in the PID menu). The two values must be the same.
If not, act on the parameter Tension scale till the two parameters reach the same values.
After this parameterization has been carried out, it is possible to start the tests with the material.
Improve the system stability via the different components of the blocks PI and PD PID.
Instruction manual
349
Provisions
In order to make the commissioning procedure easier and uniform, the system contains a clause referring to the
speed and torque directions to be respected:
As a general rule the winder speed and the torque direction are considered positive with a upper winding side.
All the possible system configurations stated in the examples below refer to this clause.
Note!
The polarity of the line speed reference is not important, because the system states the output
reference polarity only according to the parameters Wind/unwind and Winder side.
1. Drive used as a winder winding side = up
Nip roll
Winder
T[+]
W[+]
M
R
Wind/unwind = Winder
Winder side = Up
DRIVE
Line speed
Figure 6.17.13: Drive used as a winder winding side = up
If the speed demand function is used, the system creates a positive speed reference; it is therefore necessary to
connect the motor so that, with this polarity, the coil winds the material starting from the upper side. The winding torque is positive.
350
TPD32-EV
2. Drive used as a winder winding side = down

Nip roll
Winder
T[-]
W[-]
M
R
Wind/unwind = Winder
Winder side = Down
DRIVE
Line speed
Figure 6.17.14: Drive used as a winder winding side = down
If the speed demand function is used, the system creates a negative speed reference; it is therefore necessary to
connect the motor so that, with this polarity, the coil winds the material starting from the lower side. The winding torque is negative.
3. Drive used as an unwinder unwinding side = up

Nip roll
Unwinder
W[-]
T[+]
M
R
Wind/unwind = Unwinder
Winder side = Up
DRIVE
Line speed
Figure 6.17.15: Drive used as an unwinder unwinding side = up
If the speed demand function is used, the system creates a negative speed reference; it is therefore necessary
to connect the motor so that, with this polarity, the coil unwinds the material starting from the upper side. The
unwinding torque is positive.
Instruction manual
351
4. Drive used as an unwinder unwinding side = down

Nip roll
Unwinder
T[-]
W[+]
M
R
Wind/unwind = Unwinder
Winder side = Down

DRIVE
Line speed
Figure 6.17.16: Drive used as an unwinder unwinding side = down
If the speed demand function is used, the system creates a positive speed reference; it is therefore necessary
to connect the motor so that, with this polarity, the coil unwinds the material starting from the lower side. The
unwinding torque is negative.
352
TPD32-EV
Ref spd source
Instruction manual
I/O parameter
Parameter
X
Y
W%
Ref line spd
Diam inc EN
Diam dec EN
Diam stdy
delay
Diam init
filter
Diam calc Dis
Calc En
DIAMETER CALCULATION
Minimum Maximum
diameter diameter
Ref speed thr
Ref line spd
Line speed
Base omega
Internal variable
Gain
Ref speed gain
Gain
Line speed gain
Line speed
source
Actual
speed
Diam filter
Wind/unwind
Diameter
reset
Diam inc/dec En
Preset sel 1
Diameter thr
Diameter
reached
Radius
Roll
diameter
Diam preset 0
Diam preset 1
Diam preset 2
Diam preset 3
Preset sel 0
6.17.7 Block diagram
353
354
TPD32-EV
Radius
I/O parameter
Parameter
Internal variable
+
+
Closed loop
comp
Act comp
f(x,y,z)
Radius
Closed loop En
Tension scale
Init diameter
Tension red
Tension ref
Flux ref
Final diameter
Spd match
torque
Torque current
T current lim +/-
T current lim
Torque winder
En
To PID function
Closed loop En
Jog TW enable
Act tension ref
Speed match
Taper Enable
Instruction manual
I/O parameter
Parameter
Internal variable
Line fstp status
Line dec status
Line fast
stop %
Line
dec %
Line
acc %
Line acc status
Constant J
comp
Maximum
diameter
Minimum
diameter
Acc calc
filter
Variable J
comp
Time acc/dec
min
Time acc/dec
min
f(x,y,z)
Int acc calc En
Line speed
acc %
Radius
f(x,y)
Radius
f(x,y)
W%
Line speed
acc %
Line speed
acc %
Static f
Dinamic f
Wind/unwind
Act cost J
comp
Act var J
comp
f(t)
Math width
Wind/unwind
Ref line spd
+
+
355
Act comp
356
TPD32-EV
Jog TW enable
Ref line
spd
Jog TW speed
Radius
Torque
request sign
Winder side
W reference
+
-
W offset
management
Speed match
comp
Speed
demand En
W target
Torque
Offset W offset
request sign
acc time
Spd demand
status
W gain
W gain
management
Jog TW
enable
Spd match
dec
Acc/dec
time
management
Spd match
acc
Spd demand
status
Minimum
radius
Wind/unwind
Speed match
Start/stop
Start/stop
I/O parameter
Parameter
Internal variable
Spd match
gain
Speed match
Actual speed
6.18 DRIVECOM
The DRIVECOM profile #21 Power transmission, defines the behavior of the drive if this is operated via the INTERBUS-S field bus. The DRIVECOM menu of the TPD32-EV converter provides functions that were defined in the
above standards and which are required to operate a motor with the converter.
The TPD32-EV converters, however, have a considerably greater range of functions than is defined here. Apart
from a few exceptions the parameters provided in this menu are described somewhere else in detail. We will
therefore restrict this description to the Parameters function. See section 10, Parameter list and the above
standard for further information on the parameters. When operating from a Bus, the parameters in the Drivecom
group can also be accessed using the format and index specified in the above standard.
6.18.1 Control word, status word, malfunction code

DRIVECOM
[57]
[55]
[56]
Malfunction code
Control word
Status word
Malfunction code

Malfunction code
Control word
Status word
No.
min
max
0
0
65535
65535
Value
Factory
American
Factory
Standard
Standard
Configuration
57
55
56
Malfunction code according to DRIVECOM specification (Mandatory functions)

The code displayed indicates a particular failure. The meaning of the individual failures
concerned is described in the section Programmable Alarms.
1001h Unknown alarm
2300h Overcurrent
4210h Heatsink overtemperature
5000h Hardware
5100h Failure supply
5211h Ud measurement
6110h DSP error
6120h Interrupt error
7301h Speed feedback loss
9000h External fault
4310h Motor overtemperature
3330h Field loss
8110h Bus loss
7510h Hw opt 1 failure

7400h Hw opt 2 failure
3120h Undervoltage
3310h Overvoltage
9009h Enable seq err
9090h Brake error
7120h I2t motor overload error
3320h Over Speed error
3140h Mains frequency error
2310h I2t drive overload error
8100h SSC Error
8101h Shorted SCR
8102h Open SCR
The code and the alarm are displayed in plain text in the event of a failure. The code
is given in hexadecimal format.
Control word
Control word according to DRIVECOM specification (Mandatory functions)
Status word

Status word according to DRIVECOM specification (Mandatory functions).

New function, starting from: Firmware Standard=10.08A (TPD32-EV), Firmware FC200V =10.25A and Firmware FC-500V=10.26A (TPD32-EV-FC).
Instruction manual
357
Status no.1
Status no.2
Status no.3
Status no.4
Status no.5
Status no.6
Status no.7
Drive disabled
Drive enabled & start; No Alarms active
Drive enabled & start; Warning active
Drive disabled; Warning active; start not possible
Drive disabled; Warning active; start possible
Drive disabled; Fault active (alarm set as activity > Warning)
Drive enabled & start; Fault active (alarm set as activity >
Warning that cause drive stop) with no previous Warning
condition
Status no.8 Drive enabled & start; Fault active (alarm set as activity >
Warning that cause drive stop) with previous Warning condition
7
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
6
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
5
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
BIT
4 3
0 0
1 0
1 1
0 1
0 0
0 1
1 1
2
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
Bit 0, 1, 2 of Status no.7 and Status no.8: when the motor is running (drive enabled) the
value of bits 1,2,3 is 1 (one). Whenever a fault occours (that disables the drive), the motor
will stop. When the motor speed is 0 (zero) the 3 bits change from 1 to 0.
Nota!
BITs Description
BIT
0,1,2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
Motor regulation Active (Drive enabled and start, No fault)
Malfunctioning Active (Fault or/and warning)
Except when the drive is disabled and/or Alarm activity set to warning which does not prevent activation of
motor
Drive enabled and start (is set to 0 (zero) if enable=0 and start=0.
If a drive fault is shown it remains to 1 (one) until Enable command and Start is not removed (set to = 0 (zero))
Drive enabled and NO Malfunctioning situation
Drive disabled and no fault
Warning active
Note : this bit is set to 1 (one) also when command RL Search is selected. Both when drive is disabled and during autotuning procedure)
6.18.2 Speed
DRIVECOM
[44]
Speed input var [FF]
[115]
Speed ref var [FF]
[119]
Act speed value [FF]
[45]
[46]
Speed input perc [%]
[116]
Percent ref var [%]
[120]
Act percentage [%]
No.

Speed ref var [FF]
Percent ref var [%]
Act percentage [%]
min
max
44
-2 P45
+2 P45
115
119
45
46
116
120
-32768
-32768
1
-32768
-32768
-32768
+32767
+32767
16383
+32767
+32767
+32767
Value
Factory
American
0
Factory
Standard
0
1500
0
1500
0
* Factory set as Ramp ref and connected to analog input 1 (terminal 1 and 2). See reference values.
**
Factory set as Speed ref and connected to the ramp output. See reference values.
*** Factory set as Motor speed and connected to analog output 1. See BASIC MENU.
358
TPD32-EV
Standard
Configuration
*
**
***
*
**
***
Speed input var
1st ramp reference value. The value to be entered is based on the factor function
Speed ref var
1st speed reference value. The value to be entered is based on the factor function
Act speed value
Speed actual value in the unit specified in the factor function.
Speed base value
The Speed base value is given in the unit specified in the factor function. It is the
base value for all speed values given as a percentage (reference values, adaptive speed
regulation ...). A change in this parameter is only possible when the drive is disabled.
(Enable drive = Disabled).
Speed input perc
1st ramp reference value. Defined as a percentage of the Speed base value
Percent ref var
1st speed reference value. Defined as a percentage of the Speed base value
Act percentage
Speed actual value as a percentage of the Speed base value
6.18.3 Speed limitation

DRIVECOM
Speed amount
[1]
[2]
[5]
Speed min pos [FF]
[3]
Speed max pos [FF]
[6]
Speed min neg [FF]
[4]
Speed max neg [FF]
Speed min/max
min
max
232-1
Value
Factory
American
0
2
5
3
6
4
0
0
0
0
0
2 -1
232-1
232-1
232-1
232-1
5000
0
5000
0
5000
No.

Speed min pos [FF]
Speed max pos [FF]
Speed min neg [FF]
Speed max neg [FF]
32
Factory
Standard
0
5000
0
5000
0
5000
Standard
Configuration
-
Speed min amount

Defines the minimum speed for both rotation directions (with TPD32-EV...4B...).
A lower value than the defined value is not possible, regardless of the reference value
set. It has an effect on the input of the ramp. If the Speed min amount parameter is
changed, the Speed min pos and Speed min neg parameters are set to the same value.
If one of these two parameters is changed later, the last change is valid. The current
value for positive rotation (clockwise) is shown in the display of the keypad. The value
to be entered is based on the factor function.
Speed max amount

Defines the maximum speed for both rotation directions (with TPD32-EV...4B...).
The function has an effect on the input of the speed regulator and therefore takes into
account the reference value that comes from the ramp as well as the directly defined
Instruction manual
359
values (see Figure 6.4.2.1). If the Speed max amount is changed, the Speed max pos
and Speed max neg parameters are set to the same value. If one of these two parameters is changed later, the last change is valid. The current value for positive rotation
(clockwise) is shown in the display of the keypad. The value to be entered is based on
the factor function.
Speed min pos
Defines the minimum speed for the clockwise rotation of the motor. A lower value than
the defined value is not possible, regardless of the reference value. The function has an
effect on the input of the ramp (see Figure 6.4.1.1). The value to be entered is based on
Speed max pos
Defines the maximum speed for the clockwise rotation of the motor. The function has
an effect on the input of the speed regulator, and therefore takes into consideration the
reference value that comes from the ramp as well as those that are entered directly (see
Figure 6.4.2.1). The value to be entered is based on the factor function.
Speed min neg
Defines the minimum speed for the anti-clockwise rotation of the motor (with TPD32EV...4B...). A lower value than the defined value is not possible, regardless of the reference value. The function has an effect on the input of the ramp (see Figure 6.4.1.1). The
value to be entered is based on the factor function.
Speed max neg
Defines the maximum speed for the anti-clockwise rotation of the motor (with TPD32EV...4B...). The function has an effect on the input of the speed regulator, and therefore
takes into consideration the reference value that comes from the ramp as well as the
those that are entered directly (see Figure 6.4.2.1). The value to be entered is based on
360
TPD32-EV
6.18.4 Acceleration / Deceleration

DRIVECOM
Acceleration
[21]
[22]
Acc delta time [s]
[29]
[30]
Dec delta time [s]
[37]
[38]
QStp delta time [s]
Deceleration
Quick stop
min
max
21
232-1
Value
Factory
American
100
22
29
30
37
38
343
0
0
0
0
0
0
65535
232-1
65535
232-1
65535
1
1
100
1
1000
1
No Quick stop
No.

Acc delta time [s]
Dec delta time [s]
QStp delta time [s]
Quick stop
Quick stop (0)

No Quick stop (1)
Standard
Configuration
Factory
Standard
100
1
100
1
1000
1
No Quick stop
Acc delta speed
Has the same unit as the ramp reference value and is based on the factor function.
Acc delta time
Is defined in seconds. The ramp output follows the reference value directly if 0 s is
entered.
Dec delta speed
Dec delta time
Is defined in seconds. If 0 s is entered, the ramp output follows the reference value
directly.
Qstp delta speed
Speed
Speed
3
1
1
4

Acc delta time [22]
Dec delta time [30]
2
Time [s]
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4

Acc delta time [22]
Dec delta time [30]
TPD32 ... 2B
Time [s]
4
1
3
TPD32 ... 4B
Figure 6.17.4.1: Acceleration and deceleration
Instruction manual
361
Qstp delta time
Is defined in seconds. If 0 s is entered, the ramp output follows the reference value
directly.
Quick stop
Activates the Quick stop ramp to stop the Drive.
The acceleration of the drive is defined as a quotient of the Acc delta speed and Acc delta time parameters. It
is the same for both rotation directions of the motor.
The deceleration of the drive is defined as a quotient of the Dec delta speed and Dec delta time parameters. It
is the same for both rotation directions of the motor.
The Quick stop function provides a second deceleration ramp for braking the drive to halt in the event of an
emergency. The deceleration of the drive using the Quick stop function is defined as a quotient of the Qstp delta
speed and Qstp delta time. It is the same for both rotation directions of the motor. This function is only available
via the serial interface or BUS.
362
TPD32-EV
6.18.5 Factor function

DRIVECOM
Face value fact
[54]
Face value num
[53]
Face value den
[50]
Dim factor num
[51]
Dim factor den
[52]
Dim factor text
Dimension fact
The factor function contains two factors, the Dimension factor and Face value factor. They are both expressed
as fraction numbers.
The dimension factor enables the drive speed to be defined in a machine-related dimension, e.g. kg/h or m/min.
Further information and examples are given in the section on the Configuration menu.
Face value num

Face value den
Dim factor num
Dim factor den
Dim factor text
No.
min
max
54
32767
53
50
51
52
1
1
1
32767
65535
231-1
Value
Factory
American
1
Factory
Standard
1
1
1
1
rpm
1
1
1
rpm
Standard
Configuration
Dim factor num
Numerator of the dimension factor
Dim factor den
Denomiator of the dimension factor
Dim factor text

Unit of the dimension factor. This text is shown in the display of the keypad when the
reference value is shown.
Possible characters: / % & + , - . 0..9 : < = > ? A...Z [ ] a...z
Face value num
Numerator of the reference value factor.
Face value den
Denominator of the reference value factor.
See example in section 6.11.7, Dimension factor, Face value factor, on how to make the calculation.
6.19 SERVICE
The SERVICE menu is only accessible for the service personnel of the manufacturer.
Instruction manual
363
7- MAINTENANCE
7.1 CARE
The TPD32-EV converters must be installed according to the relevant installation regulations. They do not
require any particular care. They should not be cleaned with a wet or moist cloth. The power supply must be
switched off before cleaning.
7.2 SERVICE
The screws of all terminals on the device should be tightened two weeks after initial commissioning. This should
be repeated once a year.
7.3 REPAIRS
Repairs on the device should be made by your suppliers trained personnel.
If you carry out a repair of your own, observe the following points:
- When ordering spare parts, do not only state the device type but also the device number (nameplate). It is
also useful to state the type of regulator card and the software version of the operating system (data plate
attached to the EEPROM of the R-TPD32 regulation card).
- When exchanging cards, ensure that the positions of switches and jumpers are observed. This particularly
applies to switch SW15 on the regulator card. This sets the rated current of the converter.
Note!
The manufacturer does not accept any liability for any device parts that are destroyed due to
the incorrect position of switch SW15.
7.4 CUSTOMER SERVICE

For customer service, please contact your Gefran office.
364
TPD32-EV
8 - TROUBLESHOOTING
The following describes possible faults and their causes.
Failure alarms in the keypad display

FAILURE ALARM
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Bus loss
Failure in the Bus connection (only with interface Bus option card)
Check the Bus connection
EMC compatibility problems
Try a RESET. If you are still unsuccessful: probable internal fault. Contact your sales office.
Brake fault
Error in the brake opening or closing sequence after the Brake control has been enabled.
Refer to chapter 6.14.8 and check that wiring, parameters and sequences of signals are correct.
Delta frequency
Excessive difference between the frequency of the three-phase power supply input and the value measured the
instant this is guaranteed.
Delta freq thres parameter set too low.
Check that the frequency of the three-phase power supply remains constant or in any case within the
threshold limit throughout drive operation.
Drive I2t ovrld
Excessive drive overload.

Wait until the accumulator (Drive I2t accum) is zeroed before resetting the alarm and then enable the
drive. No data can be configured for this alarm; however, reference should be made to chapter 6.14.6 for
further information about calculating thresholds.
Enable seq err
Drive is powered up or Reset with Enable input connected to 24 V (picked up) and the Drive is configured to run
from the terminals. Refer to CONFIGURATION/Main commands.
External fault
External failure, reported on terminal 15.

External failure, reported on terminal 15
If the External fault message is not used: connection missing between terminals 16 and 18 (reference
point) and/or 15 and 19.
The signal on terminal 15 is missing (15...30V to terminal 16). With external voltage supply: reference
points must be connected with each other!
Failure supply
Fault in voltage supply = the voltages are below the permitted value
CAUTION: switch off voltage before removing terminal strips.

In most cases the cause is in the external wiring. Pull out the plug-in terminal strips of the regulator card
and enter the Reset command. If no other failures are reported, check your wiring for a short-circuit, in
some cases with the cable shielding.
If this has not rectified the fault: remove the terminal strips of the I/O option card (if present) and try
RESET once more.
If you are still unsuccessful: probably an internal fault. Contact your sales office
Field loss
Too low field current

The field regulation is blocked
The conductors in the field circuit are interrupted
Field fuses are active
Heatsink
Heatsink temperature too high

Ambient temperature too high
Failure of device fan [with devices > 88 A (American), 110 A (Standard)]
Dirty heatsink.
Hw opt1 failure
Failure on the option card 1

Motor I2t ovrld
Excessive motor overload.

Refer to chapters 6.14.6 and 6.11.7 (Motor I2t ovrld alarm) and check the exactness of the data that
have been entered. If these are correct, wait until the accumulator (Motor I2t accum) is zeroed before
resetting the alarm and then enable the drive.
Opt2 failure
Failure on the option card 2

Instruction manual
365
FAILURE ALARM
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Overcurrent
Overcurrent in the motor circuit

Short-circuit or ground fault at the output of the converter
Current regulator optimized incorrectly
Overcurrent thr parameter too low
Overspeed
Excessive motor speed in the feedback circuit.

Overspeed thr parameter set too low.
Check that the Speed fbk sel parameter has been selected consistently with the feedback used (Encoder
1, Encoder 2, Tacho, Armature).
If an encoder or tacho generator feedback circuit is used, check the relative wiring.
Overtemp Motor
Motor overtemperature (signaled by the thermistor to the terminals 78/79)

the motor is not provided with a thermistor: no jumper between the terminals 78 and 79
Cable between thermistor connection on motor and terminals 78 and 79 interrupted.
Overheating of motor:
Load cycle too extreme
Ambient temperature at site of motor too high
Motor has an external fan: fan failed
Motor does not have an external fan: too large a load at low speeds. The cooling effect of the fan on
the motor shaft is too low for this load cycle. Change cycle or fit external fan.
Overvoltage
Overvoltage of the armature circuit

Max out voltage parameter set too low.
The drive does not operate with a field weakening, even though the set speed can be reached only with a
field weakening. Check the Flux reg mode parameter
Speed fbk loss
No speed feedback signal

The conductors of the feedback signal are interrupted
One or several encoder channels are missing (conductor interruption, no encoder power supply)
SSC Error
Non-configurable alarm that disables the drive if:

no serial communication is received from the slave, because:
Slave disconnected
Slave not configured correctly (En ext digit FC parameter disabled)
no signals on optical fibre cables (cable HW problems or optical fibres not connected properly)
data are exchanged but regarded as incorrect (checksum not valid)
The alarm can be programmed on a digital output (see "6.12.3 Digital Outputs" on page 213, selezione 79).
Undervoltage
Undervoltage on the power circuit

Undervolt thr parameter set incorrectly (possibly 400 V set, although the device is run on 230 V). Remedy:
set parameter correctly and then acknowledge the failure via RESET.
The incoming voltage to the terminals U/V/W of the device is too low due to:
too low an AC input voltage
poor cable connections (e.g. terminals on contactor, choke, filter ... not properly fixed). Remedy:
check connections.
Intervention of the line fuses
AC input voltage dips, or high distortion of the supply voltage
The converter has been enabled when the supply voltage is not present.
Short <SCR>
Open F <SCR>
366
SCR in Short or Open.

For details, see chapter "6.11.8 Programmable alarms" on page 193.
TPD32-EV
Other faults
FAILURE
POSSIBLE CAUSES
The motor is not turning
The motor is turning in a wrong

way
Failure alarm is displayed: see table above

Once the error has been rectified give the RESET command
Keypad display is dark: voltage supply to terminals U2/V2 missing or internal fuse blown or
missing
Enable and/or start command missing
Converter not accepting commands: incorrect or wrongly selected operating mode
Protective device of the power supply has tripped: protective device incorrectly sized or fault on
the thyristor bridge
The analog input used for the reference value was not assigned or assigned differently
Negative reference with TPD32-EV...2B. The reference for the biquadrant converters must always
be positive!
Wrong polarity of the reference sign (with TPD32-EV...4B)
The motor is connected in a wrong way.
ATTENTION:
when the motor turns in a wrong way but the rotation direction can be changed, remember to change
both the armature or field conductors and the two encoder connections (A+ with A- or B+ with B-).
Using a tachometer change the conductor polarity.
The motor does not reach the
rated speed
Drive is within speed limitation. Remedy: check Speed max amount, Speed max pos and Speed
max neg parameters

Drive working at current limit (LED ILimit lit) Possible causes:
Motor overloaded
Converter sized too small
Flux reduction selected via Torque reduct.
The entered value for the number of encoder pulses is too high. Remedy: check the parameters
concerned (Encoder 1 pulses when using plug connector XE1 or Encoder 2 pulses with plug
connector XE2) and set correct value.
Wrong adaptation of the tachometer voltage. Check the voltage field choice (jumpers to the terminals A/B/C). Check the Tacho scale parameter.
A correction value reduces the main reference value. Remedy: check the configuration
The factor function is set incorrectly.
The motor reaches the maximum speed immediately
Reference value set via terminals: Check whether the value varies from min. to max. value. Potentiometer used for reference value setting: is there a 0V connection present?
Encoder/tachometer not connected, or incorrectly connected or not supplied:
Preset the Actual spd parameter in the DRIVE STATUS menu.
With the regulator disabled turn the motor clockwise (viewed from the front of the shaft). The
value indicated must be positive.
If the indicated value does not change or if inexplicable values are shown, check the power
supply and the cabling of the encoder/tachometer.
If the indicated value is negative, reverse the encoder connections. Exchange channel A+
and A- or B+ and B-. Using a tachometer change the conductor polarity.
The motor accelerates too

slowly
Ramp set incorrectly

Motor running at max. current
Motor overloaded
Converter too small
The motor decelerates too

slowly
Ramp values and times incorrectly set

Braking current too low
With two quadrant drives: moment of inertia too high.
The motor turns slowly even

though the reference value =
zero
Minimum speed selected

Interference due to unused analog input. Remedy: set unused analog inputs to OFF
Disconnect reference value on used analog input.
If drive now stands still, the effect is due to the cable resistance of the 0V cable.
If the drive is still turning: check if the speed reference is zero. If it is not zero set Offset input
xx parameter so that the drive stands still. If it is zero set Spd offset parameter.
The motor thermic is active
Overloaded motor
Motor thermic protection relay incorrectly scaled
The motor is not supplying the

max torque and the max power
Drive working at current limit

Check whether the value for Full load curr in the CONFIGURATION menu is set correctly
Check the value for the current limitation
Instruction manual
367
FAILURE
POSSIBLE CAUSES
The speed during acceleration

with max. current is not linear
Reduce the Speed I and Speed P proportionally. If this does not lead to an improvement, optimize
the regulator (see chapter 5.3.6).
Speed oscillating
Check Speed P and Speed I parameter

If the operating point is in the field weak range, check the Fld reg P gain and Fld reg I gain
parameters and eventually Voltage P and Voltage I parameters.
Remedy: Optimize the regulator as previously described
Drive not reacting to adaptive

speed regulation
Adaptive speed regulation not enabled. Enable spd adap = Enabled
Motor potentiometer function

not executed
Function not enabled. Enable motor pot = Enabled

With operation via the terminal strip: Motor pot up and/or Motor pot down were not assigned to
a digital input
Jog operation not possible
A start command is still present

Function not enabled. Enable jog = Enabled
With operation via terminal strip: Jog + and/or Jog - were not assigned to a digital input.
Internal speed reference values

not carried out
Function not enabled. Enab multi spd = Enabled

With operation via terminal strip: Speed sel 0, Speed sel 1 and Speed sel 2 were not assigned
to a digital input.
Multi-Ramp function not

reacting
Function not enabled. Enab multi rmp = Enabled

With operation via terminal strip: Ramp sel 0 and Ramp sel 1 were not assigned to a digital input
Overload not possible
Function not enabled. Enable overload = Enabled
The Current regulator selftune

procedure never finishes and
continues over and over again.
Because of the motor inductance value, the routine is executing an endless loop. The inductance
value is cycling between two values without an evolution of the
algorithm.
Solution procedure:
1) verify the two displayed inductance values
2) insert the average value as motor inductance during the autotuning.
If the procedure does not end, repeat step 1) and 2).
368
TPD32-EV
9 - BLOCK DIAGRAM
9.1 CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAMS
Instruction manual
369
370
TPD32-EV
Instruction manual
371
372
TPD32-EV
Instruction manual
373
374
TPD32-EV
Instruction manual
375
376
TPD32-EV
Instruction manual
377
378
TPD32-EV
Instruction manual
379
380
TPD32-EV
Instruction manual
381
382
TPD32-EV
Instruction manual
383
384
TPD32-EV
Instruction manual
385
386
TPD32-EV
Instruction manual
387
388
TPD32-EV
Instruction manual
389
390
TPD32-EV
Instruction manual
391
392
TPD32-EV
Instruction manual
393
394
TPD32-EV
Instruction manual
395
396
TPD32-EV
Instruction manual
397
398
TPD32-EV
Instruction manual
399
MOD.
79
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
DATE
SW1-31
ESE 2192
From / to
Control Board
R-PFX32
FIR1-51,
FIR1-52
ESE 2135
Low voltage
signals only
XR-19
XR-18
XR-17
XR-16
MODIFICATION DESCRIPTION
Motor
overtemperature
K2
K1
SMPS
XUV
XUV
+24V
15V +5V
This document is our intellectual property. Without our written consent, it shall neither be copied
in any manner, nor used for manufacturing, nor communicated to third parties.
E
D
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
Ready
Motor
PTC
KG2
KG02
IA = 0
KG1
KG01
KG3
KG03
K3
K2
G3
K3
RT3
T3
G2
K2
RT2
T2
G1
K1
RT1
T1
Speed feedback
C (D)
T3
CT3
G3
T2
CT2
G2
T1
CT1
G1
K1
F21
F31
F11
K1
from C (D)
FA
L1
K2
l1
k1
TH1
L2
l2
k2
U V
FL
V(K)
U(K)
PE
T4
T5
RT6
T6
K6
G6
RT5
K5
G5
RT4
K4
G4
APPR.
FA
SW3, SW4
X4-2
X4-1
OT
Sync
FIR1-51,
FIR1-52
ESE 2135
5
3
7
XR-13
SW1-31
ESE 2192
XV-1
XV-2
XV-3
XV-4
XR-14
XR-11
XR-12
EC
SCH.
APPR.
FILE NAME: ESE5911 TPD32-EV-500 -20 ...185-2B_4B Block Diagram.vsd

DES.
1U1
1V1
U1 V1
PFC1A-32
ESE 2213
D3F
D1F
D2F
1
2
3
4
T1F
CT1F
CT2F
T2F
RT1F
RT2F
Jan 23, 2012

DATE
-15V
0V
+15V
G1F
ESE 5911
CODE
K2F
G2F
DOC
ID
D1
Cooling fan only for

70A to 185A drives
Block diagram of
TPD32-EV-500/520-20 ...185-4B DC Drives.
D (C)
K6
G6
K5
G5
K4
G4
NAME
CT6
T6
CT5
T5
CT4
T4
REMARK: Snubber circuits (RT1-CT1 to RT6-CT6)

are part of FIR1-51 or FIR1-52 (ESE2135) board.
230 ...500VAC 50/60Hz
FL
TA-U
FL
TA-V
1
XTA
2
3
XTA
4
to RPFX32
XR-15
KG5
KG05
(16A / 500V)
XCD_IO
KG4
KG04
KG6
KG06
XP
UF
FU1
UF1
X3
460VAC max
50/60Hz
VF
FV1
VF1
to R-PFX32
X3
6
TPD32-EV
XFCD
400
7
---OVER
MOD.
INDEX
PAGE
C1
CT
9.2 POWER CIRCUIT BLOCK DIAGRAMS

Figure 9.2.1: ESE5911 TPD32-EV-500 ...-20 ...185-4B
from D (C)
MOD.
79
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
DATE
SMPS
E
D
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
Ready
Motor
PTC
+24V
15V +5V
SW1-31
ESE 2192
From / to
Control Board
R-PFX32
K2
G1
K1
T1
FIR1-51-2B,
FIR1-52-2B
ESE 2135
Low voltage
signals only
K3
CT3
G3
CT2
G2
CT1
Speed feedback
RT3
T3
RT2
T2
RT1
F31
F21
F11
XR-19
KG1
KG2
XR-18
XR-17
XR-16
XR-15
Motor
overtemperature
K2
K1
XUV
XUV
K1
FL
L1
TA-U
K2
l1
k1
FL
TH1
V(K)
U(K)
PE
RT6
K6
G6
RT5
K5
G5
RT4
K4
G4
APPR.
SW3, SW4
1
5
3
7
XR-13
XR-11
XR-12
DES.
2
1
XR-14
1U1
EC
SCH.
APPR.
1V1
U1 V1
PFC1A-32
ESE 2213
D3F
D1F
D2F
1
2
3
4
T1F
CT1F
CT2F
T2F
K2F
OVER
PAGE
Jan 23, 2012

CODE
ESE 5911
---DATE
C1
CT
MOD.
INDEX
-15V
0V
+15V
G1F
RT1F
RT2F
G2F
DOC
ID
D1
Cooling fan only for

70A to 185A drives
Block diagram of
TPD32-EV-500/600-20 ...185-2B DC Drives.
X4-2
X4-1
XV-1
XV-2
XV-3
XV-4
SW1-31
ESE 2192
FIR1-51-2B,
FIR1-52-2B
ESE 2135
Sync
NAME
CT6
T6
CT5
T5
CT4
T4
REMARK: Snubber circuits (RT1-CT1 to RT6-CT6) are

part of FIR1-51-2B or FIR1-52-2B (ESE2135) board.
l2
k2
FL
M
L2
TA-V
1
XTA
2
3
XTA
4
KG5
230 ...500VAC 50/60Hz
KG3
KG4
KG6
OT
XCD_IO
UF
FU1
UF1
to RPFX32
X3
460VAC max
50/60 Hz
VF
FV1
VF1
to R-PFX32
XP
(16A / 500V)
XFCD
X3
6
Instruction manual
401
from C (D)
from D (C)
MOD.
79
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
DATE
Motor
overtemperature
K2
FIR2-51
ESE 2238
Low voltage
signals only
XR-19
XR-17
XR-16
XR-18
SW2-32
ESE 2239
From / to
Control Board
R-PFX32
K1
SMPS
XUV
SA
SB
(Jumpered in
case of 115VAC
Control Supply)
XUV
+24V
15V +5V
E
D
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
Ready
Motor
PTC
KG2
KG02
IA = 0
KG1
KG01
KG3
KG03
K3
K2
G3
K3
RT3
T3
G2
K2
RT2
T2
G1
K1
RT1
T1
Speed feedback
C (D)
T3
CT3
G3
T2
CT2
G2
T1
CT1
G1
K1
F21
F31
F11
K1
from C (D)
FA
L1
K2
l1
k1
TH3
TH1
L2
l2
k2
U V
FL
V(K)
U(K)
PE
RT6
T5
T6
K6
G6
RT5
T4
K5
G5
RT4
K4
G4
Ext R
APPR.
FA
SW3, SW4
X4-2
X4-1
OT
Sync
FIR2-51
ESE 2238
5
3
7
XR-13
SW2-32
ESE 2239
XV-1
XV-2
XV-3
XV-4
XR-11
XR-12
G2F
K2F
EC
SCH.
APPR.

DES.
XR-14
-15V
0V
+15V
1
2
3
4
CT1F
D1F
RT1F
T1F
G1F
K1F
ESE 5912
Jan 17, 2012
DATE
CODE
RT2F
D2F
---OVER
PAGE
C1
MOD.
INDEX
K2F
G2F
PFC2A-31
ESE 2271
CT2F
T2F
U1 V1
DOC
ID
D1
CT
1U1
1V1
Cooling fans
Block diagram of
TPD32-EV-500/520-280 ...650-4B DC Drives.
D (C)
K6
G6
K5
G5
K4
G4
NAME
CT6
T6
CT5
T5
CT4
T4
REMARK: Snubber capacitors CT1 to CT6

are mounted on SN5-31 (ESE2246) board
230 ...500VAC 50/60Hz
FL
TA-U
FL
TA-V
1
XTA
2
3
XTA
4
XCT
XR-15
KG5
KG05
XCD_IO
TPD32-EV
6
UF
FU1
UF1
VF
FV1
VF1
to RPFX32
X3
KG4
KG04
KG6
KG06
XP2
XFCD
X3
460VAC max
50/60Hz
to R-PFX32
402
XP1
from D (C)
E
D
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
Ready
MOD.
Motor
PTC
79
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
DATE
SMPS
FIR2-51-2B
ESE 2238
Low voltage
signals only
Motor
overtemperature
K2
K1
From / to
Control Board
R-PFX32
K2
G1
K1
T1
K3
CT3
G3
CT2
G2
CT1
Speed feedback
RT3
T3
RT2
T2
RT1
F31
F11
XR-17
KG1
F21
KG2
XR-16
XR-15
XR-19
SW2-32
ESE 2239
XR-18
XUV
SA
SB
(Jumpered in
case of 115VAC
Control Supply)
XUV
K1
FL
L1
TA-U
FL
K2
l1
k1
TH3
TH1
L2
l2
k2
U V
FL
TA-V
V(K)
U(K)
PE
RT6
K6
G6
RT5
K5
G5
RT4
K4
G4
Ext R
APPR.
SW3, SW4
1
5
3
7
XV-1
XV-2
XV-3
XV-4
XR-13
SW2-32
ESE 2239
FIR2-51-2B
ESE 2238
Sync
XR-11
XR-12
G2F
K2F
DES.
2
1
XR-14
EC
SCH.
APPR.
-15V
0V
+15V
1
2
3
4
CT1F
D1F
RT1F
T1F
G1F
K1F
RT2F
D2F
K2F
G2F
OVER
PAGE
Jan 17, 2012

CODE
ESE 5912
---DATE
C1
MOD.
INDEX
PFC2A-31
ESE 2271
CT2F
T2F
U1 V1
DOC
ID
D1
CT
1U1
1V1
Cooling fans
Block diagram of
TPD32-EV-500/600-280 ...650-2B DC Drives.
X4-2
X4-1
OT
NAME
CT6
T6
CT5
T5
CT4
T4

1
XTA
2
3
XTA
4
XCT
230 ...500VAC 50/60Hz
KG5
+24V
15V +5V
FU1
KG3
KG4
KG6
XCD_IO
X3
460VAC max
50/60 Hz
VF
FV1
VF1
UF
UF1
to R-PFX32
to RPFX32
X3
6
Instruction manual
4
XP2
XFCD
XP1
403
from C (D)
from D (C)
MOD.
79
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
DATE
XUV
SW3-32
ESE 2239
SA
SB
+24V
15V +5V
XTM
X5
X5
X5
Low voltage
signals only
XR-19
XR-18
XR-17
XR-16
FIR3-32
ESE 2260
Motor
overtemperature
CN3
ESE 2264
K2
From / to
Control Board
R-TPD32
K1
XUVW
XUVW
XCD
G1
K1
K3
K2
1D
G3
K3
RT3
T3
G2
K2
RT2
T2
RT1
G1
K1
T1
Speed feedback
C (D)
T3
CT3
G3
T2
CT2
G2
T1
CT1
1W
FL-31
ESE 2253
F31
1V
F21
1C
F11
1U
from C (D)
from D (C)
F3
F2
F1
L1
K1
TA-U
SMPS
TH3
TH2
TH1
l1
k1
K2
U V
L2
TA-W
(Jumpered in
case of 115VAC
Control Supply)
XUV
F6
F5
F4
W(K)
U(K)
PE
RT6
T6
T4
APPR.
X4-2
X4-1
V3
U3
Sync
FIR3-32
ESE 2260
5
3
7
XR-13
CN3
ESE 2264
XR-11
XR-12
G2F
K2F
EC
SCH.
APPR.
ESE5913 TPD32-EV-500 -770 ...1050-2B_4B Block Diagram.vsd
-15V
0V
+15V
1
2
3
4
U1 V1
460VAC max
50/60Hz
CT1F
D1F
RT1F
T1F
G1F
K1F
Jan 19, 2012

DATE
CN3
ESE 2264
ESE 5913
CODE
RT2F
D2F
SN-FC
ESE 2265
CT2F
---OVER
PAGE
C1
MOD.
INDEX
K2F
G2F
CN3
ESE 2264
T2F
DOC
ID
D1
CT
1U1
1V1
Cooling fans
XR-14
1V3
1U3
Block diagram of
TPD32-EV-500/520-770...1050-4B DC drives.
FILE NAME:
DES.
SW3, SW4
Fan Supply
230VAC
D (C)
K6
G6
K5
G5
K4
G4
NAME
CT6
T6
CT5
T5
CT4
T5
K6
G6
RT5
T4
K5
G5
RT4
K4
G4
Ext R

l2
k2
XCT
XTA
2
4
XTA
3
OT
FU1
230 ...500VAC 50/60Hz
FV1
XR-15
KG1
E
D
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
Ready
Motor
PTC
KG2
KG02
IA = 0
81
Fuse
82
fault
KG01
KG3
KG03
to R-TPD32
KG5
KG05
X3
6
TPD32-EV
5
XCD_IO
to RTPD32
X3
KG4
KG04
KG6
KG06
XP2
XFCD
(25A / 600V)
404
XP1
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
MOD.
XTM
X5
X5
X5
Low voltage
signals only
Motor
overtemperature
FIR3-32-2B
ESE 2260
XR-18
XR-17
XR-19
KG2
XR-16
CN3
ESE 2264
K2
K1
From / to
Control Board
R-TPD32
79
DATE
SW3-32
ESE 2239
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
SMPS
XUVW
XUVW
XCD
+24V
15V +5V
K3
K2
1D
G1
K1
CT3
G3
CT2
G2
CT1
Speed feedback
RT3
T3
RT2
T2
RT1
T1
FL-31
ESE 2253
F31
1W
F21
1V
1C
F11
1U
L1
F1
K1
TA-U
XUV
SA
SB
(Jumpered in
case of 115VAC
Control Supply)
XUV
K2
L2
TH3
TH2
TH1
F2 F3
l1
k1
U V
TA-W
W(K)
U(K)
PE
RT6
K6
G6
RT5
K5
G5
RT4
K4
G4
Ext R
T4
APPR.
SW3, SW4
Fan Supply
230VAC
FIR3-32-2B
ESE 2260
5
3
7
XR-13
CN3
ESE 2264
XR-11
XR-12
G2F
K2F
DES.
EC
SCH.
APPR.
-15V
0V
+15V
1
2
3
4
U1 V1
460VAC max
50/60Hz
CT1F
D1F
RT1F
T1F
G1F
K1F
RT2F
D2F
OVER
PAGE
Jan 19, 2012

CODE
ESE 5913
---DATE
C1
MOD.
INDEX
CN3
ESE 2264
SN-FC
ESE 2265
CT2F
K2F
G2F
CN3
ESE 2264
T2F
DOC
ID
D1
CT
1U1
1V1
Cooling fans
XR-14
1V3
1U3
Block diagram of
TPD32-EV-500/600-770...1000-2B DC drives.
X4-2
X4-1
V3
U3
Sync
NAME
CT6
T6
CT5
T5
CT4

l2
k2
1
XTA
2
4
XTA
3
XCT
KG5
KG4
KG6
E
D
FU1
FV1
230 ...500VAC 50/60Hz
to R-TPD32
XR-15
81
Fuse
82
fault
Ready
Motor
PTC
KG1
KG3
(25A / 600V)
OT
X3
XCD_IO
to RTPD32
X3
6
Instruction manual
4
XP2
XFCD
XP1
405
from C (D)
from D (C)
MOD.
DATE
From / to Control
Board R-TPD32
79
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
SMPS
+24V
15V +5V
E
D
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
Ready
Motor
PTC
J2
J1
J3
10
15
13
11
14
12
10
15
13
11
14
12
MP
MP
MN
MN
IT6
IT5
IT4
IT3
IT2
IT1
1V
1W
1U
62
61
C1+
C4-
13
12
11
10
15
14
C4
C3
C2
C1
R6+
IT6
IT3
MN
MP
IT5
IT2
MN
MP
IT4
IT1
MN
MP
C4-
FIR4P-53
ESE 2334
XF-1
XF-5
C (D)
RT3
K3
T3
G2
K2
RT2
T2
G1
K1
RT1
T1
G3
T3
G3
K3
T2
G2
K2
T1
G1
K1
Fuse fault
F3
F3
F2
F2
F1
F1
F31
F21
Speed feedback
F11
CT3
CT2
CT1
CT-W
M
Heatsink
overtemperature
TH3
TH2
TH1
U/6
PE
T6
RT6
K6
G6
T5
RT5
K5
G5
T4
RT4
K4
G4
KW/8
W/7
APPR.
KU/5
G6
K6
CT6
T6
K5
G5
CT5
T5
K4
G4
CT4
T4
XPT1-4
230VAC to 500VAC 50/60Hz
Remark: F1 ...F6 only for TPD32-EV- ...2700 and ...3300-4B
PTD1
CFS-35X
ESE 5301
R6
C4+
C4+
C3+
C3+
C2+
C2+
Low voltage
signals only
FIR4P-53
ESE 2334
Motor
overtemperature
K8
K7
XUV
XUV
SW1-31
ESE 2192
XPT2
XPT1
R1
R2
R3
R4
5
1
XUVW
U3
F6
F6
F5
F5
F4
F4
External
burden R
C1+
81
XF-5
KPT11
Line voltage and

synchronisation
82
C
IA = 0
U
W V
CT-U
62
61
KPT31
5
6
7
8
V3
RCT
MN
MP
IT3
IT6
MN
MP
IT2
IT5
MN
MP
IT1
N8
FIR4P-53
ESE 2334
Armature current
feedback
S1=ON
C.U. Cooling fans
KP
1 2 3
D
14
13
M
M
K1
G1
G2
K2
X4-2
X4-1
K1
G1
EC
SCH.
APPR.
ESE5858 TPD32-EV-500_520-1500 ...3300-4B Block Diagram.vsd
-15V
0V
+15V
RD1F
1
2
3
4
CD1F
CT1F
D1F
RT1F
T1F
K1F
G1F
PE
CD2F
CT2F
K2
G2
K2F
G2F
RD2F
D2F
RT2F
T2F
V1
OVER
1
CODE
PAGE
ESE 5858
Dec 22, 2011
DATE
----
C1
MOD.
INDEX
PFC40 (up to 2000A arm.)

PFC70 (above 2000A arm.)
ESE 2374
U1
to FIR4P-53
DOC
ID
D1
CT
1U1
1V1
Block diagram of
TPD32- EV-500/520-1500 ...3300-4B Drives.
(Control Unit with external 4Q SCR Power Bridge).
FILE NAME:
DES.
J4
IT4
J5
D (C)
NAME
0VI
Fan supply
230VAC 50/60Hz
Power Bridge
Cooling fans
32
31
XPT1-2
XPT1-6
Fan
fault
5
TH-CT
6
7
PE
XCT
KP
TH-CT 1
KPT31
2R5
2R5
SW3,
SW4
TH-CT 2
1
to R-TPD32
X3
FV1
XV 1 2 3 4
Sync
S2
XCD-1
OT
XCD-IO7
X3
XP1
230VAC to 480VAC
50/60Hz
to R-TPD32
SW1-31
ESE 2192
Armature
voltage
TH-CT 3
2
C
XCD-3
XR
S11
XCD-IO3
XP1
XCD-IO5
FU1
XFCD
XP2
S10
XCD-IO1
6
TPD32-EV
406
XP2
Figure 9.2.7: ESE5858 TPD32-EV-500_520-1500 ...3300-4B
MOD.
DATE
From / to Control
Board R-TPD32
79
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
SMPS
E
D
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
Ready
Motor
PTC
J2
J1
J3
10
15
13
11
14
12
10
15
13
11
14
12
MP
MP
MN
MN
IT6
IT5
IT4
IT3
IT2
IT1
1V
1W
1U
62
61
C4-
13
12
11
10
15
14
C4
C3
C2
C1
C1+
R6+
PTD1
C4-
FIR4P-53
ESE 2334
XF-1
XF-5
G3
K3
G2
K2
G1
K1
Fuse fault
F3
F3
F2
F2
F1
F1
F31
F21
F11
RT3
T3
RT2
T2
RT1
T1
Speed feedback
Remark: F1 ...F6 only for TPD32-EV- ...2700 to ...3300-2B
IT3
MP
IT2
MP
IT1
MP
CFS-35X
ESE 5301
R6
C4+
C4+
C3+
C3+
C2+
C2+
C1+
Low voltage
signals only
FIR4P-53
ESE 2334
Motor
overtemperature
K8
K7
XUV
XUV
SW1-31
ESE 2192
XPT2
XPT1
CT3
CT2
CT1
CT-W
M
Heatsink
overtemperature
TH3
TH2
TH1
U/6
PE
RT6
K6
G6
RT5
K5
G5
RT4
K4
G4
KW/8
W/7
APPR.
KU/5
CT6
T6
CT5
T5
CT4
T4
XPT1-4
U3
F6
F6
F5
F5
F4
F4
External
burden R
R1
R2
R3
R4
5
1
XUVW
3
+24V
15V +5V
81
XF-5
KPT11
Line voltage and

synchronisation
82
C
IA = 0
U
W V
KP
CT-U
62
61
KPT31
5
6
7
8
V3
RCT
DES.
J4
MP
IT6
MP
IT5
MP
IT4
J5
N8
FIR4P-53
ESE 2334
Armature current
feedback
S1=OFF
C.U. Cooling fans
KP
1 2 3
D
14
13
M
M
K1
G1
G2
K2
X4-2
X4-1
K1
G1
1V1
EC
SCH.
APPR.
-15V
0V
+15V
RD1F
1
2
3
4
CD1F
CT1F
D1F
RT1F
T1F
K1F
G1F
PE
CD2F
CT2F
K2
G2
K2F
G2F
RD2F
D2F
RT2F
T2F
V1
OVER
Dec 22, 2011

CODE
---PAGE
ESE 5856
DATE
C1
MOD.
INDEX

ESE 2374
U1
DOC
ID
D1
CT
1U1
Block diagram of
TPD32- EV-500/620-1200 ...3300-2B Drives.
FILE NAME:
NAME
0VI
5
Fan supply
230VAC 50/60Hz
Power Bridge
Cooling fans
32
31
XPT1-2
XPT1-6
Fan
fault
5
TH-CT
6
PE
XCT
TH-CT 1
KPT31
SW3,
SW4
TH-CT 2
1
FV1
XV 1 2 3 4
Sync
S2
XCD-1
230VAC to 480VAC
50/60Hz
to R-TPD32
SW1-31
ESE 2192
Armature
voltage
TH-CT 3
2
C
XCD-3
OT
XCD-IO7
to R-TPD32
X3
XP1
XCD-IO5
XR
S11
XCD-IO3
XP2
S10
XCD-IO1
X3
XP1
2R5
2R5
Instruction manual
6
FU1
XFCD
to FIR4P-53
XP2
407
MOD.
DATE
From / to Control
Board R-TPD32
79
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
XUV
XUV
FIR-D-XX
ESE 5313
XSPF
KG03
KG3
KG02
KG2
KG01
KG1
XCD
C5-
C4-
C4-
C4+
C4+
C3+
C3+
C2+
C2+
C1+
XT3
XT2
XT1
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
C7
C6
K3
K2
3
F11
F21
F31
K1
L2
APPR.
F4
l2
W(K)
k2
U(K)
PE
F4
F6
F6
F3
F3
T4
RT4
T5
CT6
T6
RT6
K6
G6
CT5
RT5
K5
G5
CT4
K4
G4
F5
K2
F2
TH2
TH1
l1
F5
L1
k1
F2
F1
F1
Remark: Fuses F1 to F6
not on all drive sizes.
CT3
CT2
CT1
to FIRD-XX
Speed feedback
G3
K3
RT3
T3
G2
K2
RT2
T2
G1
K1
RT1
T1
X1UVW1
CFSF-XXX
ESE 5320
C (D )
T3
G3
T2
G2
T1
G1
K1
XCD
C6+
1
3
XUVW
R1
Low voltage
signals only
Motor
overtemperature
RL2
RL1
X1UVW1
G6
T6
G5
T5
G4
T4
XT6
XT5
XT4
XR-13
XR-14
G1
K1
K2
G2
Heatsink
overtemp.
5
3
7
FNLS
ESE 5341
K1
G1
CT
1U1
1V1
Cooling fan
DES.
G1F
D1
-15V
0V
+15V
RD1F
EC
SCH.
APPR.
1
2
3
4
CD1F
U1
RT2F
RD2F
D2F
Jan 17, 2012

DATE
CODE
ESE 5770
DOC
ID
G2
K2
to FIR-D-XX
---OVER
PAGE
C1
MOD.
INDEX
G2F
K2F
PFC40, PFC70
ESE 2374
CD2F
CT2F
T2F
V1
460VAC max
CT1F
D1F
RT1F
T1F
K1F
CS
TPD32-EV-500/520-1400...2400-4B-D,
TPD32-EV-575/600-1300...2300-4B-D,
TPD32-EV-690/720-1300...2100-4B-D DC drives.
X4
1
2
KG06
KG6
KG05
KG5
KG04
KG4
SW3, SW4
Fan supply
230VAC 50/60Hz
FILE NAME: ESE5770 TPD32-EV-500 ...690 -1300 ...2400-2B_4B Block Diagram.vsd
NAME
D (C)
K6
K5
K4
Z2F
C1+
R2
R3
R4
R5
TA1
E
D
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
Ready
Motor
PTC
from D
SW1-31
ESE 2192
+24V
15V +5V
from C
from
CFSF-XX
81
2
4
SMPS
82
Fuse
fault
TA2
1
XTA
Ext R
XTA
XCT
U3
U3F
XP2
to RTPD32
32
Z2C
Fan
fault
31
U3C
black
PE
PE
V3
V3F
X3
XP1
X3
XP1
FIR-D-XX
ESE 5313
XCD_IO
FU1
XFCD
FV1
to R-TPD32
ye-gn
blue /
grey
brown
6
TPD32-EV
408
XP2
Figure 9.2.9: ESE5770 TPD32-EV-500 ...690 ...-1300 ...2400-4B
R6
MOD.
DATE
FIR-D-XX-2B
ESE 5313
C5-
C4-
C4-
C4+
C4+
C3+
C3+
C2+
C2+
RT3
T3
RT2
T2
RT1
F11
F21
F31
F3
F3
F2
F2
F1
F1
Speed feedback
Remark: Fuses F1 to F6
not on all drive sizes.
CT3
CT2
CT1
K1
L1
TH2
TH1
l1
k1
K2
L2
APPR.
F4
l2
W(K)
k2
U(K)
PE
F6
F6
F5
F5
F4
RT4
CT6
RT6
K6
G6
CT5
RT5
K5
G5
CT4
K4
G4
T6
T5
T4
XT6
XT5
XT4
KG6
KG5
KG4
SW3, SW4
XR-13
FNLS
ESE 5341
G1
K1
G1
K1
K2
G2
DES.
G1F
D1
-15V
0V
+15V
RD1F
EC
SCH.
APPR.
1
2
3
4
CD1F
U1
RT2F
RD2F
D2F
K2
G2
OVER
PAGE
Jan 17, 2012

CODE
ESE 5770
DATE
---MOD.
INDEX
C1
DOC
ID
G2F
K2F
PFC40, PFC70
ESE 2374
CD2F
CT2F
T2F
V1
460VAC max
CT1F
D1F
RT1F
T1F
K1F
CS
TPD32-EV-500/600-1400...2400-2B-D,
TPD32-EV-575/680-1300...2300-2B-D,
TPD32-EV-690/810-1300...2100-2B-D DC drives.
Heatsink
overtemp.
5
3
7
CT
1U1
1V1
Cooling fan
XR-14
Fan supply
230VAC 50/60Hz
32
Z2C
Fan
fault
31
U3C
FILE NAME: ESE5770 TPD32-EV-500 ...690 -1300 ...2400-2B_4B Block Diagram.vsd
NAME
X4
G3
G2
T1
XSPF
K3
K2
G1
K1
XCD
CFSF-XXX
ESE 5320
X1UVW1
1
2
XT3
KG3
C7
C6
C6+
to FIRD-XX
XT2
KG2
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
XT1
R6
KG1
XCD
Low voltage
signals only
Motor
overtemperature
RL2
RL1
XUV
XUV
+24V
15V +5V
From / to Control
Board R-TPD32
79
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
X1UVW1
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
C1+
1
3
XUVW
C1+
from D
TA1
E
D
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
Ready
Motor
PTC
from C
SW1-31
ESE 2192
3
XTA
from
CFSF-XX
81
2
4
SMPS
82
TA2
1
XTA
Ext R
Fuse
fault
XP2
X3
XP1
FIR-D-XX-2B
ESE 5313
XCT
V3
Z2F
V3F
ye-gn
blue /
grey
brown
X3
to RTPD32
PE
PE
U3
U3F
black
XP1
XCD_IO
FV1
to R-TPD32
Instruction manual
6
FU1
XFCD
to FIR-D-XX
XP2
Figure 9.2.10: ESE5770 TPD32-EV-500 ...690 ...-1300 ...2400-2B
409
MOD.
79
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
DATE
Motor
overtemperature
K2
FIR2-61
ESE 2238
Low voltage
signals only
XR-19
XR-17
XR-16
XR-18
SW2-32
ESE 2239
From / to
Control Board
R-PFX32
K1
SMPS
XUV
SA
SB
(Jumpered in
case of 115VAC
Control Supply)
XUV
+24V
15V +5V
E
D
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
Ready
Motor
PTC
KG2
KG02
IA = 0
KG1
KG01
KG3
KG03
K3
K2
G3
K3
RT3
T3
G2
K2
RT2
T2
G1
K1
RT1
T1
Speed feedback
C (D)
T3
CT3
G3
T2
CT2
G2
T1
CT1
G1
K1
F21
F31
F11
K1
from C (D)
FA
L1
K2
l1
k1
TH3
TH1
L2
l2
k2
U V
FL
V(K)
U(K)
PE
RT6
T5
T6
K6
G6
RT5
T4
K5
G5
RT4
K4
G4
Ext R
APPR.
FA
SW3, SW4
X4-2
X4-1
OT
Sync
FIR2-61
ESE 2238
5
3
7
XR-13
SW2-32
ESE 2239
XV-1
XV-2
XV-3
XV-4
XR-11
XR-12
G2F
K2F
EC
SCH.
APPR.

DES.
2
1
XR-14
-15V
0V
+15V
1
2
3
4
CT1F
D1F
RT1F
T1F
G1F
K1F
ESE 5804
Jan 17, 2012
DATE
CODE
RT2F
D2F
---OVER
PAGE
C1
MOD.
INDEX
K2F
G2F
PFC2A-31
ESE 2271
CT2F
T2F
U1 V1
DOC
ID
D1
CT
1U1
1V1
Cooling fans
Block diagram of
TPD32-EV-575/600-280 ...650-4B DC Drives.
D (C)
K6
G6
K5
G5
K4
G4
NAME
CT6
T6
CT5
T5
CT4
T4

are mounted on SN7-XX (ESE5549) board
575VAC 50/60Hz
FL
TA-U
FL
TA-V
1
XTA
2
3
XTA
4
XCT
XR-15
KG5
KG05
XCD_IO
TPD32-EV
6
UF
FU1
UF1
VF
FV1
VF1
to RPFX32
X3
KG4
KG04
KG6
KG06
XP2
XFCD
X3
460VAC max
50/60Hz
to R-PFX32
410
XP1
from D (C)
E
D
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
Ready
MOD.
Motor
PTC
79
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
DATE
SMPS
FIR2-61-2B
ESE 2238
Low voltage
signals only
Motor
overtemperature
K2
K1
From / to
Control Board
R-PFX32
K2
G1
K1
T1
K3
CT3
G3
CT2
G2
CT1
Speed feedback
RT3
T3
RT2
T2
RT1
F31
F11
XR-17
KG1
F21
KG2
XR-16
XR-15
XR-19
SW2-32
ESE 2239
XR-18
XUV
SA
SB
(Jumpered in
case of 115VAC
Control Supply)
XUV
K1
FL
L1
TA-U
FL
K2
l1
k1
TH3
TH1
L2
l2
k2
U V
FL
TA-V
V(K)
U(K)
PE
RT6
K6
G6
RT5
K5
G5
RT4
K4
G4
Ext R
APPR.
SW3, SW4
1
5
3
7
XV-1
XV-2
XV-3
XV-4
XR-13
SW2-32
ESE 2239
FIR2-61-2B
ESE 2238
Sync
XR-11
XR-12
G2F
K2F
DES.
2
1
XR-14
EC
SCH.
APPR.
-15V
0V
+15V
1
2
3
4
CT1F
D1F
RT1F
T1F
G1F
K1F
RT2F
D2F
K2F
G2F
OVER
PAGE
Jan 17, 2012

CODE
ESE 5804
---DATE
C1
MOD.
INDEX
PFC2A-31
ESE 2271
CT2F
T2F
U1 V1
DOC
ID
D1
CT
1U1
1V1
Cooling fans
Block diagram of
TPD32-EV-575/680-280 ...650-2B DC Drives.
X4-2
X4-1
OT
NAME
CT6
T6
CT5
T5
CT4
T4

1
XTA
2
3
XTA
4
XCT
575VAC 50/60Hz
KG5
+24V
15V +5V
FU1
KG3
KG4
KG6
XCD_IO
X3
460VAC max
50/60 Hz
VF
FV1
VF1
UF
UF1
to R-PFX32
to RPFX32
X3
6
Instruction manual
4
XP2
XFCD
XP1
411
from C (D)
from D (C)
MOD.
79
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
+24V
15V +5V
DATE
SW3-32
ESE 2239
XTM
X5
X5
X5
Low voltage
signals only
XR-19
XR-18
XR-17
XR-16
FIR3-327
ESE 2260
Motor
overtemperature
CN3C
ESE 5702
K2
From / to
Control Board
R-TPD32
K1
P2
XUVW
K3
K2
XUVW
XCD
XUVW
XUVW
XCD
SMPS
F31
F21
F11
G3
K3
RT3
T3
G2
K2
RT2
T2
RT1
G1
K1
T1
FL-57 / FL-69
ESE 5694
Speed feedback
C (D)
T3
CT3
G3
T2
CT2
G2
T1
CT1
G1
K1
from C (D)
F3
F2
F1
L1
K1
TA-U
XUV
SA
SB
(Jumpered in
case of 115VAC
Control Supply)
XUV
XUVW_IN XUVW_IN
XCD_IN
from D (C)
TH3
TH2
TH1
l1
k1
K2
U V
L2
F6
F5
F4
W(K)
U(K)
PE
RT6
T6
T4
APPR.
SW3, SW4
Fan Supply
230VAC
X4-2
X4-1
V3
U3
Sync
FIR3-327
ESE 2260
5
3
7
XR-13
CN3C
ESE 5702
P5-4
P5-2
P5-3
P5-1
XR-11
XR-12
G2F
K2F
2
1
XR-14
DES.
EC
SCH.
APPR.
FILE NAME: ESE5803 TPD32-EV-575_690 -560 ...1000-2B_4B Block Diagram.vsd
-15V
0V
+15V
FU1
1
2
3
4
CT1F
D1F
RT1F
T1F
G1F
K1F
ESE 5803
Jan 17, 2012
DATE
CODE
RT2F
D2F
---OVER
PAGE
C1
MOD.
INDEX
K2F
G2F
SN-FCC
ESE 5697
CT2F
T2F
U1 V1
DOC
ID
D1
CT
1U1
1V1
Cooling fans
Block diagram of
TPD32-EV-575/600-700...1000-4B and
TPD32-EV-690/720-560...900-4B DC drives.
D (C)
K6
G6
K5
G5
K4
G4
NAME
CT6
T6
CT5
T5
CT4
T5
K6
G6
RT5
T4
K5
G5
RT4
K4
G4
Ext R

l2
k2
575/690VAC - 50/60Hz
TA-W
1
XTA
2
4
XTA
3
XCT
E
D
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
Ready
Motor
PTC
KG1
KG2
KG02
IA = 0
81
Fuse
82
fault
KG01
KG3
KG03
KG5
KG05
XR-15
OT
XCD_IO
X3
TPD32-EV
6
FV1
to RTPD32
P1
KG4
KG04
KG6
KG06
XP2
J1
460VAC max
50/60Hz
to R-TPD32
412
XP1
Figure 9.2.13:ESE5803 TPD32-EV-575_690 ...-560 ...1000-4B
MOD.
SW3-32
ESE 2239
XTM
X5
X5
X5
Low voltage
signals only
Motor
overtemperature
FIR3-327-2B
ESE 2260
P2
XR-18
XR-17
XR-19
KG2
XR-16
CN3C
ESE 5702
K2
K1
From / to
Control Board
R-TPD32
79
DATE
XUV
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
SMPS
1
XUVW
K3
K2
XUVW
XCD
XUVW
XUVW
XCD
E
D
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
CT3
G3
CT2
G2
CT1
G1
K1
Speed feedback
RT3
T3
RT2
T2
RT1
T1
FL-57 / FL-69
ESE 5694
F31
F21
F11
L1
F1
K1
TA-U
+24V
15V +5V
XUVW_IN XUVW_IN
XCD_IN
from D (C)
SA
SB
(Jumpered in
case of 115VAC
Control Supply)
XUV
K2
L2
TH3
TH2
TH1
F2 F3
l1
k1
U V
TA-W
W(K)
U(K)
PE
RT6
K6
G6
RT5
K5
G5
RT4
K4
G4
Ext R
T4
APPR.
SW3, SW4
Fan Supply
230VAC
FIR3-327-2B
ESE 2260
5
3
7
XR-13
CN3C
ESE 5702
P5-4
P5-2
P5-3
P5-1
XR-11
XR-12
G2F
K2F
2
1
XR-14
DES.
EC
SCH.
APPR.
-15V
0V
+15V
FU1
1
2
3
4
CT1F
D1F
RT1F
T1F
G1F
K1F
RT2F
D2F
K2F
G2F
OVER
PAGE
Jan 17, 2012

CODE
ESE 5803
---DATE
C1
MOD.
INDEX
SN-FCC
ESE 5697
CT2F
T2F
U1 V1
DOC
ID
D1
CT
1U1
1V1
Cooling fans
Block diagram of
TPD32-575/690-700...1000-2B and
TPD32-690/810-560...900-2B DC drives.
X4-2
X4-1
V3
U3
Sync
FILE NAME: ESE5803 TPD32-EV-575_690 -560 ...1000-2B_4B Block Diagram.vsd
NAME
CT6
T6
CT5
T5
CT4

l2
k2
1
XTA
2
4
XTA
3
XCT
KG5
XR-15
81
Fuse
82
fault
Ready
Motor
PTC
KG1
KG3
KG4
KG6
575/690VAC - 50/60Hz
FV1
OT
XCD_IO
X3
460VAC max
50/60Hz
to R-TPD32
to RTPD32
P1
6
Instruction manual
4
XP2
J1
XP1
Figure 9.2.14: ESE5803 TPD32-EV-575_690 ...-560 ...1000-2B
413
from C (D)
MOD.
DATE
From / to Control
Board R-TPD32
79
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
SMPS
+24V
15V +5V
E
D
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
Ready
Motor
PTC
J2
J1
J3
10
15
13
11
14
12
10
15
13
11
14
12
MP
MP
MN
MN
IT6
IT5
IT4
IT3
IT2
IT1
1V
1W
1U
62
61
13
12
11
10
15
14
C4
C3
C2
C1
R6+
PTD1-1
C4-
FIR5P-63
ESE 2334
XF-1
XF-5
C ( D)
RT3
K3
T3
G2
K2
RT2
T2
G1
K1
RT1
T1
G3
T3
G3
K3
T2
G2
K2
T1
G1
K1
Fuse fault
F3
F3
F2
F2
F1
F1
F31
F21
Speed feedback
F11
CT3
CT2
CT1
CT-W
M
Heatsink
overtemperature
TH3
TH2
TH1
U/6
PE
T6
RT6
K6
G6
T5
RT5
K5
G5
T4
RT4
K4
G4
KW/8
W/7
APPR.
KU/5
G6
K6
CT6
T6
K5
G5
CT5
T5
K4
G4
CT4
T4
XPT1-4
IT6
IT3
MN
MP
IT5
IT2
MN
MP
IT4
IT1
MN
MP
CFS-47X
ESE 5301
R6
C4-
C4+
C4+
C3+
C3+
C2+
C2+
C1+
Low voltage
signals only
FIR5P-63
ESE 2334
Motor
overtemperature
K8
K7
XUV
XUV
SW1-31
ESE 2192
XPT2
XPT1
R1
R2
R3
R4
5
1
XUVW
U3
F6
F6
F5
F5
F4
F4
External
burden R
C1+
81
XF-5
KPT11
Line voltage and

synchronisation
82
C
IA = 0
U
W V
CT-U
62
61
KPT31
5
6
7
8
V3
RCT
MN
MP
IT3
IT6
MN
MP
IT2
IT5
MN
MP
IT1
N8
KP
1 2 3
D
FIR5P-63
ESE 2334
Armature current
feedback
S1=ON
C.U. Cooling fans
14
13
M
M
K1
G1
G2
K2
X4-2
X4-1
K1
G1
EC
SCH.
APPR.
-15V
0V
+15V
RD1F
1
2
3
4
CD1F
CT1F
D1F
RT1F
T1F
K1F
G1F
PE
CD2F
CT2F
K2
G2
K2F
G2F
RD2F
D2F
RT2F
T2F
V1
OVER
1
CODE
PAGE
ESE 5859
Dec 22, 2011
DATE
----
C1
MOD.
INDEX

ESE 2374
U1
to FIR5P-63
DOC
ID
D1
CT
1V1
1U1
Block diagram of
TPD32- EV-690/720-1010 ...3300-4B Drives.
FILE NAME:
DES.
J4
IT4
J5
D (C)
NAME
0VI
5
Fan supply
230VAC 50/60Hz
Power Bridge
Cooling fans
32
31
XPT1-2
XPT1-6
Fan
fault
5
TH-CT
6
7
PE
XCT
KP
TH-CT 1
KPT31
2R5
2R5
SW3,
SW4
TH-CT 2
1
to R-TPD32
X3
FV1
XV 1 2 3 4
Sync
S2
XCD-1
OT
XCD-IO7
X3
XP1
230VAC to 480VAC
50/60Hz
to R-TPD32
SW1-31
ESE 2192
Armature
voltage
TH-CT 3
2
C
XCD-3
XR
S11
XCD-IO3
XP1
XCD-IO5
FU1
XFCD
XP2
S10
XCD-IO1
6
TPD32-EV
414
XP2
MOD.
DATE
From / to Control
Board R-TPD32
79
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
SMPS
E
D
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
Ready
Motor
PTC
J2
J1
J3
10
15
13
11
14
12
10
15
13
11
14
12
MP
MP
MN
MN
IT6
IT5
IT4
IT3
IT2
IT1
1V
1W
1U
62
61
13
12
11
10
15
14
C4
C3
C2
C1
R6+
IT3
MP
IT2
MP
IT1
MP
C4-
FIR5P-63
ESE 2334
XF-1
XF-5
G3
K3
G2
K2
G1
K1
Fuse fault
F3
F3
F2
F2
F1
F1
F31
F21
F11
RT3
T3
RT2
T2
RT1
T1
Speed feedback
PTD1-1
CFS-47X
ESE 5301
R6
C4-
C4+
C4+
C3+
C3+
C2+
C2+
C1+
CT3
CT2
CT1
CT-W
M
Heatsink
overtemperature
TH3
TH2
TH1
U/6
PE
RT6
K6
G6
RT5
K5
G5
RT4
K4
G4
KW/8
W/7
APPR.
KU/5
CT6
T6
CT5
T5
CT4
T4
XPT1-4
U3
F6
F6
F5
F5
F4
F4
External
burden R
C1+
Low voltage
signals only
FIR5P-63
ESE 2334
Motor
overtemperature
K8
K7
XUV
XUV
SW1-31
ESE 2192
XPT2
XPT1
R1
R2
R3
R4
5
1
XUVW
3
+24V
15V +5V
81
XF-5
KPT11
Line voltage and

synchronisation
82
C
IA = 0
U
W V
KP
CT-U
62
61
KPT31
5
6
7
8
V3
RCT
DES.
MP
IT6
MP
IT5
MP
IT4
J5
J4
N8
KP
1 2 3
D
FIR5P-63
ESE 2334
Armature current
feedback
S1=OFF
C.U. Cooling fans
14
13
M
M
K1
G1
G2
K2
X4-2
X4-1
K1
G1
1V1
EC
SCH.
APPR.
-15V
0V
+15V
RD1F
1
2
3
4
CD1F
CT1F
D1F
RT1F
T1F
K1F
G1F
PE
CD2F
CT2F
K2
G2
K2F
G2F
RD2F
D2F
RT2F
T2F
V1
OVER
Dec 22, 2011

CODE
---PAGE
ESE 5857
DATE
C1
MOD.
INDEX

ESE 2374
U1
DOC
ID
D1
CT
1U1
Block diagram of
TPD32- EV-690/810-1010 ...3300-2B Drives.
FILE NAME:
NAME
0VI
5
Fan supply
230VAC 50/60Hz
Power Bridge
Cooling fans
32
31
XPT1-2
XPT1-6
Fan
fault
5
TH-CT
6
PE
XCT
TH-CT 1
KPT31
SW3,
SW4
TH-CT 2
1
FV1
XV 1 2 3 4
Sync
S2
XCD-1
OT
XCD-IO7
to R-TPD32
X3
XP1
XCD-IO5
230VAC to 480VAC
50/60Hz
to R-TPD32
SW1-31
ESE 2192
Armature
voltage
TH-CT 3
2
C
XCD-3
XR
S11
XCD-IO3
XP2
S10
XCD-IO1
X3
XP1
2R5
2R5
Instruction manual
6
FU1
XFCD
to FIR5P-63
XP2
415
XA
RS 485
MOD.
XA-15
XA-16
XA-13-14
XA-11-12
XA-9-10
XA-2-4-6
XA-1-3-5
XA-8
XA-7
STOP
S12
+5VS
S18
+5V
S13
DATE
ENT
CANC
RXD
TXD
DDR
+5V
0V24
+24V
-15V
20
11
REFERENCES
10
+15V
GNDA
GNDD
17
XY9
XY8
XY11
XY10
XY12
XY6
XY5
Vmin
XY7
A/D BUS
CONTROL BUS
XT
EXT. / INT.
S19 SUPPLY
RS 485
GNDS
R - TPD32 (ESE 4155)
XO
START
INT. EXP BUS

FOR OPT. CARDS
S15-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8
0V
+10V
-10V
LCD DISPLAY
ANL. OUT. 1
18
COM ANL. OUT 1
0V24
ANL. OUT.2
19
+24V
COM. ANL. 2
CONTROLLOR
C167
COM. DGT.OUT
ANL(1)
S9
S10
ECS Nr.
DGT. OUT.4
ANL(2)
ANALOG INPUTS
DAC
XY20
DGT. OUT. 1
4
SUPPLY DGT.OUT
10
DGT. INP. 3
DGT. INP. 1
DGT. INP. 2
12
Des. / Sch.
S11
ANL(3)
DIGITAL INPUTS
11 12 13 14 15
ENABLE
DGT. OUT.3
DSP
dSMC101
DGT. INP.4
13
STR_STP
14
16
COM. ANL. 4
A1N
TACHO
AIP
SUPPLY DGT.OUT
10
LB
LA
DGT. INP. 6
VREF
+
TACHO
ANALOG
FRONT END
VecAna
COM DGT. INP
Layout ECS Nr.
Sch. ROS
-5VA
+5VA
S4-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8
XBB
11 12 13 14 15
7
DGT. INP. 8
Apprv.
BLOCK DIAGRAM R - TPD32

Des. BRI
Name:
B S6
-5VD
DGT. OUT.8
DGT. INP. 5
TBO (Optional)
B S5
A
C
DGT. OUT. 6
+5VD
S14-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8
SRAM
NTACHO
E PROM
FLASH
COM ANL. OUT 3
Approved
15
EXT_FLT
DGT. OUT. 2
XFCD-2
COM DGT. INP
FST_STP
XFCD-3 -15V
ANL. OUT. 3
COM_ID
COM. DGT.OUT
ANL. OUT.4
XFCD-1 +15V
DGT. OUT. 5
XFCD-4
DGT. OUT.7
R
DGT. INP. 7
TPD32-EV
+5VP
GNDP
XR-11
XR-33
XR-34
MN
MN
XY18
XY17
XY19
XY21
CENC 1
NP_1
B1N
B1P
A1N
A1P
CENC 2
NP_2
B2
A2
Iact
EMF
VB
VA
XY22
PTZ
Date: 01 / 12 / 05
Nr. ESE 4155
ENCODER A
ENCODER B
+
I - ARM.
+
V - ARM.
MAINS
RELAYS
S7
ITF2
MOD2
OK
ITF1
MOD1
FIELD
XR-31
BC+
CGNDED
+24VED
A+
AB+
XE2-1
XE2-3
XE2-4
XE2-2
XE1-5
XE1-6
XE1-8
CENC 1
+5VEA
GNDEA
XE1-4
XE1-2
XE1-9
XE1-7
Page Over
C-
XE1-3
Mod.
Index
BC+
XE1-1
XE1
XE2-7
AB+
XE2-8
A+
XE2-6
XE2-5
XE2
XR-14
XR-13
XR-19
XR-18
XR-17
XR-16
XR-15
XR-5
XR-4
XR-2
XR-1
XR-29
MP
MP
XR-27
IT6
IT4
HS3
IT5
XR-25
IT3
HS2
HS5
XR-23
IT2
HS1
HS4
XR-21
IT1
RST
HS0
THYRISTORS
XR-32
SYNC
XR-8
OTS
OTM
XR-6
XR-10
I=0
2B-4B
416
XS
9.3 REGULATION CARD
CT-U
Instruction manual
black
Rev.
Date
61
brown
brown
blue
brown
red
orange 62
Remark:
twist wires
1-2/5-6/7-8 (3 pairs)
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
-KPT31-
7-8 MN-white
1 IT1-red
2 IT2-blue
3 IT3-black
4 IT4-red
5 IT5-blue
6 IT6-black
13-12 MP-brown
-Connector solder side view

( Cover removed )
7-8 MN-bianco
1 IT1-rosso
2 IT2-blu
3 IT3-nero
4 IT4-rosso
5 IT5-blu
6 IT6-nero
13-12 MP-marrone
-Connett.vista lato saldatura.

-Custodia aperta
7
8
5
6
brown
red
brown
blue
-KPT11-
15
14
.
.
.
blue
red
black
black
black
Custodia
Cover
6S8V99
Modification Description
wires cross section 1mm /AWG18

free length 1,3 m,sheated
8
.
.
.
.
.
TAS2(...3)
Guaina diam.8-Lungh.libera m 1,2

Sheath diam.8 mm-Free length 1,2 m
Disposiz.PONTE
BRIGDE layout
Des/Sch
Fissare i cavi inguainati

sulla cappa di ventilaz.
Tighten sheathed cables
onto the Fan hood
PE
F2
12
blue
D (C)
T4
KG
CT-U
5
6
T4
KG
T5
KG
F5
T5
KG
Appvd
F6
Des.
Loc.
10
EC
BFE
Sch.
11
Appr.
Funct.
12
EC
Name:TPD32-EV-...-1010...3300-4B-E
13
Nr: ESE5855
CT-W
T6
KG
15
14
Date: 28/05/12
15
01
A
00
1
Pageover
Rev.
Schema topografico collegamento ponte

Topographical scheme bridge wiring
T6
KG
PP T T
F4
F3
T3
PP T T
T3
KG
PP T T
KG
PP T T
PP T T
T2
KG
PE
PP T T
T2
KG
V3
14
PP T T
T1
KG
U3
Morsett.Ventilat.
Fan terminals
13
PP T T
C (D)
T1
KG
PP T T
32
11
PP T T
F1
31
10
PP T T
MP
PP T T
IT1
Attenzione:Ponte di potenza predisposto per l'estrazione frontale di ogni singola

fase (U-V-W)-Collegare in modo tale da facilit.al max.l'estrazione.
Warning:Power bridge is designed for front extraction of individual phase
modules (U-V-W).Arrange wiring,cable or bar connections to keep extraction area clear
red
MP
Posiz.TARGA
Position of rating plate
CT-W
wires cross section 2,5 mm /AWG14

Viti fissaggio
Fastening screws
8S8L69
MONTAGGIO E COLLEGAM.TA
Vista dal basso -Attenzione alla posiz.morsetto K
CT Mounting and wiring (Notice position of terminal K)
-Bottom view
Posiz.TARGA
TAS2(...3)
(to KPT31)
MN
MN
T4
Copyng of this document, and giving it to others and the use or communication of the contents thereof,
Non permesso consegnare a terzi o riprodurre questo documento n, utilizzare il contenuto o renderlo
IT4
T4
61
T5
is forbidden without express authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of damages.
comunque noto a terzi senza la nostra autorizzazione esplicita. Ogni infrazione comporta il risarcimento dei danni subiti.
81
T5
All rights are reserved in the event of the grant of a patent or the registration of a utility model or design.
E' fatta riserva di tutti i diritti derivati da brevetti o modelli.
MP
T6
Sez.min. AWG 22
Min.cross section AWG 22
82
IT3
-KP-
MP
T1
IT2
T1
MN
T2
IT5
T2
62
{
Termostati
Thermostats
Fus.
Fuses
MN
T3
IT6
T3
T6
A
B
C
D
E
9.4 CONNECTION OF EXTERNAL POWER BRIDGES

Figure 9.4.1: ESE5855 TPD32-EV-....-1010....3300-4B-E
417
Copyng of this document, and giving it to others and the use or communication of the contents thereof,
Non permesso consegnare a terzi o riprodurre questo documento n, utilizzare il contenuto o renderlo
is forbidden without express authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of damages.
comunque noto a terzi senza la nostra autorizzazione esplicita. Ogni infrazione comporta il risarcimento dei danni subiti.
All rights are reserved in the event of the grant of a patent or the registration of a utility model or design.
E' fatta riserva di tutti i diritti derivati da brevetti o modelli.
CT-U
TPD32-EV
Rev.
Date
61
brown
brown
blue
brown
red
orange 62
black
Remark:
twist wires
1-2/5-6/7-8 (3 pairs)
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
-KPT31-
1 IT1-red
2 IT2-blue
3 IT3-black
4 IT4-red
5 IT5-blue
6 IT6-black
12 MP-brown
13 MP-brown
-Connector solder side view

(Cover removed)
1 IT1-rosso
2 IT2-blu
3 IT3-nero
4 IT4-rosso
5 IT5-blu
6 IT6-nero
12 MP-marrone
13 MP-marrone
-Connett.vista lato saldatura.

-Custodia aperta
brown
red
brown
-KPT11-
15
14
.
.
.
blue
red
black
black
black
Custodia
Cover
6S8V99
Modification Description
wires cross section 1mm /AWG18

8
.
.
.
.
.
W
TAS2(...3)
Guaina diam.8-Lungh.libera m 1,2

Sheath diam.8 mm-Free length 1,2 m
Disposiz.PONTE
BRIGDE layout
Des/Sch
T1
KG
F4
F1
CT-U
PE
5
6
T4
KG
PP T T
32
11
IT2
T2
KG
PP T T
F5
F2
12
T5
KG
PP T T
IT5
8
Appvd
Des.
Loc.
10
EC
BFE
Sch.
11
Appr.
Funct.
12
EC
Name:TPD32-EV-...-1010...3300-2B-E
U3
13
V3
Morsett.Ventilat.
Fan terminals
13
Nr: ESE5854
Attenzione:Ponte di potenza predisposto per l'estrazione frontale di ogni singola

fase (U-V-W)-Collegare in modo tale da facilit.al max.l'estrazione.
Warning:Power bridge is designed for front extraction of individual phase
modules (U-V-W).Arrange wiring,cable or bar connections to keep extraction area clear
blue
red
IT1
PP T T
31
10
IT4
61
Fissare i cavi inguainati

sulla cappa di ventilaz.
Tighten sheathed cables
onto the Fan hood
CT-W
F6
F3
IT6
T6
KG
PP T T
Fus.
15
14
Date: 28/05/'12
15
01
A
00
1
Pageover
Rev.
Schema topografico collegamento ponte

Topographical scheme bridge wiring
T3
KG
PP T T
PE
14
Fuses
Posiz.TARGA
CT-W
wires cross section 2,5 mm /AWG14

Viti fissaggio
Fastening screws
8S8L69
MONTAGGIO E COLLEGAM.TA
Vista dal basso -Attenzione alla posiz.morsetto K
CT Mounting and wiring (Notice position of terminal K)
-Bottom view
Posiz.TARGA
TAS2(...3)
7
8
5
6
blue
81
Sez.min.AWG 22
Min.cross section AWG 22
MP
(to KPT31)
-KP-
MP
T1
T4
MP
T2
MP
T5
62
{
T3
Termostati
Thermostats
82
Fus.
Fuses
IT3
T6
A
B
C
D
418
E
Figure 9.4.2: ESE5854 TPD32-EV-....-1010....3300-2B-E
MOD.
DATE
PT
T1 ...T6
C (D)
TH1
PT
D (C)
F1 ...F6, (F1 ...F6)
CT-U
IT6
IT3
MN
MP
IT5
IT2
MN
MP
IT4
IT1
MN
MP
T1 ...T6
81
E
D
MN
MP
IT3
IT6
MN
MP
IT2
IT5
MN
MP
IT1
IT4
62
61
Can be bundled into

one sheat only
APPR.
Recommended max cable length = 2m
Wire 0,25mm2 / AWG 22, isol. > 300V
Sheated 10 wires bundle
Wire 2,5mm2 / AWG 12 - 14, isol. > 600V
Sheated 5 wires bundle
Wire 1mm2 / AWG 18, isol. > 600V
Sheated twisted pair
6
7
4
5
Sheathed two twisted pairs
Fuse
fault 82
CT-W
KPT31
KP
MP
MP
MN
MN
IT6
IT5
IT4
IT3
IT2
IT1
DES.
R
0V
KPT11
Connections to power stack of TPD32-EV

Control Units.
Control Unit
EC
SCH.
APPR.
FILE NAME: ESE5799 TPD32-EV-CU-...Connections to power stack.vsd
NAME
13
12
KPT11
PE
3:1
IG
OVER
PAGE
April 06, 2011

CODE
ESE 5799
---DATE
VG
MOD.
INDEX
SCR
DOC
ID
- Pulse transformer detail -
IT...
MP / MN
Instruction manual
6
Figure 9.4.3-A: ESE5799 (1/3) - TPD32-EV-CU-
419
MOD.
DATE
KP
13
12
11
10
RED-WHITE
RED
BLACK
BLUE
WHITE
BROWN
13
12
WHITE
BLACK
RED
BLUE
RED-WHITE
RED-WHITE
BLACK-WHITE
Y-shaped sheated wires bundle, length 30cm

BROWN
BLACK-WHITE
APPR.
Sheated 5 wires bundle, length 30cm

BLUE
RED
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
EAM2760 / code S72760
EAM2761 / code S72761
KP Connector Adapter Cable

for TPD32-EV-CU-..
KPT11 Connector Adapter Cable

for TPD32-EV-CU-..
11
10
15
14
15
14
code
6S8V92 +
6S8V99
Existing cables, connected to power stack
KP
KPT11
E
D
code
6S8V14 +
6S8V16 +
6S8V10
KPT11
11
10
15
14
code
S86UM
MP
MP
MN
MN
IT6
IT5
IT4
IT3
IT2
DES.
Control Unit
EC
SCH.
APPR.
ESE5799 TPD32-EV-CU-...Connections to power stack.vsd
Adaptation cables for connection of new

Control Units as spare part for older version
of control units already wired to power stack.
FILE NAME:
NAME
13
13
12
12
2
3
1
2
IT1
code
6S8V18 +
6S8V99
code
6S8Z26
KP
KPT31
KPT11
KP
KPT31
KPT11
TPD32-EV
OVER
PAGE
2
CODE
ESE 5799
Nov. 23, 2011
DATE
---MOD.
INDEX
DOC
ID
420
6
Figure 9.4.3-B: ESE5799 (2/3) - TPD32-EV-CU-
E
D
MOD.
DATE
BROWN
RED
BROWN
BLUE
Labelled, free
wire ends
1 (IT1)
2 (IT2)
3 (IT3)
4 (IT4)
5 (IT5)
6 (IT6)
7 (MN)
8 (MN)
12 (MP)
13 (MP)
EAM2763 / code S72763
KPT31 Connector Interface Cable

for TPD32-EV-CU-..
Wire
0,25mm2
APPR.
/ AWG 22, isol. > 300V
Sheated 10 wires bundle, overall length 250cm, sheat length 150cm.
RED
BLUE
BLACK
RED
BLUE
BLACK
WHITE
WHITE
BROWN
BROWN
EAM2764 / code S72764
KPT11 Connector Interface Cable

for TPD32-EV-CU-..
Sheathed three twisted pairs bundle, overall length 250cm, sheat length 150cm.
BLACK
Labelled, free
wire ends
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLUE
RED
EAM2762 / code S72762
KP Connector Interface Cable

for TPD32-EV-CU-..
Sheated 5 wires bundle, overall length 250cm, sheat length 150cm.

ORANGE
Labelled, free
wire ends
code
S86UM
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12
13
3
4
5
6
7
8
12
13
MP
MP
MN
MN
IT6
IT5
IT4
IT3
IT2
DES.
Control Unit
EC
SCH.
APPR.
ESE5799 TPD32-EV-CU-...Connections to power stack.vsd
Interface cables for connection of new Control

Units with generic power stacks.
FILE NAME:
NAME
1
2
IT1
code
6S8V18 +
6S8V99
code
6S8Z26
KP
KPT31
KPT11
KP
KPT31
KPT11
OVER
PAGE
Nov. 23, 2011

CODE
ESE 5799
DATE
---MOD.
INDEX
DOC
ID
Instruction manual
6
Figure 9.4.3-C: ESE5799 (3/3) - TPD32-EV-CU-
421
BROWN
MOD.
DATE
From / to Control
Board R-TPD32
79
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
SMPS
+24V
15V +5V
J2
J1
10
15
13
11
14
12
10
15
13
11
14
12
MP
MP
MN
MN
IT6
IT5
IT4
IT3
IT2
IT1
1V
1W
1U
62
61
MP
MP
MN
MN
IT6
IT5
IT4
IT3
IT2
IT1
1V
1W
1U
62
61
C1+
13
12
11
10
15
14
C4-
C4+
C4+
C3+
C3+
C2+
C2+
13
12
11
10
15
14
Low voltage
signals only
FIR4P-53
ESE 2334
Motor
overtemperature
K8
K7
J3
R1
R2
R3
R4
E
D
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
Ready
Motor
PTC
XUV
XUV
SW1-31
ESE 2192
XPT2
XPT1
C4
C3
C2
C1
R6+
C4-
IT6
IT3
MN
MP
IT5
IT2
MN
MP
IT4
IT1
MN
MP
CFS-35X
ESE 5301
R6
KPT21
KPT11
XF-5
T3
RT3
T3
T2
RT2
T2
T1
RT1
T1
Line voltage and

synchronisation
C (D)
G3
K3
G3
K3
G2
K2
G2
K2
G1
K1
G1
K1
FIR4P-53
ESE 2334
XF-1
XF-5
F31
F21
Fuse
fault
Speed feedback
CT3
CT2
CT1
F3
F3
F2
F2
F1
F1
F11
U/6
F4
KW/8
W/7
APPR.
KU/5
Heatsink overtemperature
TH3
TH2
TH1
CT-W
C
IA = 0
5
1
XUVW
3
81
U
W V
KP
CT-U
62
61
PE
KPT31
5
6
7
F6
F6
F5
F5
F4
XPT1-2
XPT1-4
CT6
CT5
CT4
XPT1-6
C1+
External
burden R
T6
RT6
T6
T5
RT5
T5
T4
RT4
T4
MN
MP
IT3
IT6
MN
MP
IT2
IT5
MN
MP
IT1
N8
Cooling fans
FIR4P-53
ESE 2334
Armature current
feedback
KP
1 2 3
14
13
K1
G1
G2
K2
X4-2
X4-1
SCH.
APPR.
ESE5771 TPD32-EV-CU-230...690-THY1-XX Block Diagram.vsd
Block diagram of TPD32 Control Units

TPD32-EV-CU-230/500-THY1-XX with
external 4Q SCR power bridge.
EC
FILE NAME:
DES.
J4
IT4
J5
D (C)
G6
K6
G6
G5
K5
G5
G4
K4
G4
0VI
NAME
K6
K5
K4
RCT
XCT
5
TH-CT
6
7
2R5
2R5
TH-CT 1
K1
G1
-15V
0V
+15V
RD1F
CODE
DATE
DOC
ID
1
2
3
4
CD2F
CT2F
K2
G2
K2F
G2F
RD2F
D2F
RT2F
T2F
V1
---OVER
PAGE
Feb 27, 2012
C1
ESE 5771
PFC40 (case ..-40),

PFC70 (case ..-70),
ESE 2374
U1
to FIR4P-53
MOD.
INDEX
CD1F
CT1F
D1F
RT1F
T1F
K1F
G1F
D1
CT
1U1
1V1
PE
FV1
SW1-31
ESE 2192
TH-CT 2
to R-TPD32
X3
SW3,
SW4
KPT31
Sync
S2
XCD-1
OT
XCD-IO7
X3
XP1
230VAC to 480VAC
50/60Hz
to R-TPD32
XV 1 2 3 4
Armature
voltage
TH-CT 3
2
C
XCD-3
XR
S11
XCD-IO3
XP1
XCD-IO5
FU1
XFCD
XP2
S10
XCD-IO1
6
TPD32-EV
82
422
XP2
Figure 9.4.4: ESE5771 TPD32-EV-CU-230...690-THY1-XX_1
MOD.
DATE
From / to Control
Board R-TPD32
79
78
76
75
36
35
V2
U2
SMPS
+24V
15V +5V
J2
J1
10
15
13
11
14
12
10
15
13
11
14
12
MP
MP
MN
MN
IT6
IT5
IT4
IT3
IT2
IT1
1V
1W
1U
62
61
MP
MP
MN
MN
IT6
IT5
IT4
IT3
IT2
IT1
1V
1W
1U
62
61
13
12
11
10
15
14
C4-
C4+
C4+
C3+
C3+
C2+
C2+
C1+
13
12
11
10
15
14
Low voltage
signals only
FIR5P-63
ESE 2334
Motor
overtemperature
K8
K7
J3
R1
R2
R3
R4
E
D
Control Supply
115/230VAC
Contactor
Ready
Motor
PTC
XUV
XUV
SW1-31
ESE 2192
XPT2
XPT1
C4
C3
C2
C1
C1+
R6+
C4-
IT6
IT3
MN
MP
IT5
IT2
MN
MP
IT4
IT1
MN
MP
CFS-47X
ESE 5301
R6
KPT21
KPT11
XF-5
T3
RT3
T3
T2
RT2
T2
T1
RT1
T1
Line voltage and

synchronisation
C ( D)
G3
K3
G3
K3
G2
K2
G2
K2
G1
K1
G1
K1
FIR5P-63
ESE 2334
XF-1
XF-5
F31
F21
Fuse
fault
Speed feedback
CT3
CT2
CT1
F3
F3
F2
F2
F1
F1
U/6
F4
KW/8
W/7
APPR.
KU/5
TH3
TH2
TH1
CT-W
5
1
XUVW
F11
C
IA = 0
U
W V
CT-U
62
61
PE
F6
F6
F5
F5
F4
XPT1-2
XPT1-4
CT6
CT5
CT4
XPT1-6
KPT31
5
6
7
8
5
TH-CT
6
7
External
burden R
T6
RT6
T6
T5
RT5
T5
T4
RT4
T4
MN
MP
IT3
IT6
MN
MP
IT2
IT5
MN
MP
IT1
N8
Cooling fans
KP
1 2 3
D
FIR5P-63
ESE 2334
Armature current
feedback
14
13
K1
G1
G2
K2
X4-2
X4-1
SCH.
APPR.
ESE5771 TPD32-EV-CU-230...690-THY1-XX Block Diagram.vsd
Block diagram of TPD32 Control Units

TPD32-EV-CU-575/690-THY1-XX with
external 4Q SCR power bridge.
EC
FILE NAME:
DES.
J4
IT4
J5
D (C)
G6
K6
G6
G5
K5
G5
G4
K4
G4
0VI
NAME
K6
K5
K4
RCT
XCT
KP
81
TH-CT 1
TH-CT 2
K1
G1
1V1
-15V
0V
+15V
RD1F
1
2
3
4
CD1F
CT1F
D1F
RT1F
T1F
K1F
G1F
CD2F
CT2F
K2
G2
K2F
G2F
RD2F
D2F
RT2F
T2F
V1
OVER
Feb 27, 2012

CODE
---PAGE
ESE 5771
DATE
C1
MOD.
INDEX
PFC40 (case ..-40),

PFC70 (case ..-70),
ESE 2374
U1
DOC
ID
D1
CT
1U1
PE
FV1
SW1-31
ESE 2192
SW3,
SW4
KPT31
Sync
S2
XCD-1
OT
XCD-IO7
to R-TPD32
X3
XP1
XCD-IO5
230VAC to 480VAC
50/60Hz
to R-TPD32
XV 1 2 3 4
Armature
voltage
TH-CT 3
2
C
XCD-3
XR
S11
XCD-IO3
XP2
S10
XCD-IO1
X3
XP1
2R5
2R5
Instruction manual
6
FU1
XFCD
to FIR5P-63
XP2
82
Figure 9.4.5: ESE5771 TPD32-EV-CU-230...690-THY1-XX_2
423
10 - PARAMETER LISTS
10.1 COMPLETE MAIN MENU LIST
Explanation of tables:
White text on black background
Menu/submenu
White text on black background in brackets
Function not accessible via keypad. The status of the corresponding parameter is only displayed.
[FF] in the Parameter column
Dimension based on the factor function
No. column
Parameter number (decimal). The value 2000H (= decimal

8192) must be added to the number given in the No. column in order to obtain the index to access the parameter
via Bus , RS485 or Opt2. The parameters in the Drivecom
group can be accessed using the format and index specified
in the DRIVECOM power transmission profile (#21).
Format column
Internal parameter format:

I= Integer (Example: I16 = Integer 16 bit)
U = Unsigned (Example: U32 = unsigned 32 bit)
Float = Floating point
Value column
Minimum, maximum and factory parameter values.

If S the value is depending on the size of the device.
Keypad column
= Parameter available via keypad
RS485/BUS/Opt2-M column
(low priority)
Parameter available via RS485, field Bus or via the APC300

manual communication (see the APC300 user manual)
The numbers indicate what has to be sent via interface line in
order to set the single parameters.
Term. column
424
Parameter addressable to one of the analog or digital input/

output terminals.
TPD32-EV
Opt2-A/(Low priority)
PDC (High priority)
Parameter available via APC300 asynchronous communication

(see the APC300 user manual) and/or the Process Data Channel
(PDC).
When using a field bus interface, parameters whose range is
[min=0; max=1] can be assigned to either Virtual digital inputs
(if W access code exists) and/or Virtual digital outputs (if R
access code exists).
The numbers indicate what has to be sent via interface line in
order to set the single parameters.
Letter in brackets in the Term. columnAnalog level to be applied to the terminal in order to start the single function.
IA, QA, ID, QD in the Term. column
The function can be accessed via a freely programmable analog

or digital input or output.
IA = analog input
QA = analog output
ID = digital input
QD = digital output.
The eventually present number is the one by which the terminal
is called.
H, L in the Term. column
Level of the terminal signals (H=high, L=low) which enables

the single function.
R/W/Z/C
Access possibilities via the serial interface, Bus or Opt2 manual

or asynchronous communication :
R = Read,
W = Write,
Z = Write only when drive disabled,
C=Command parameter (the writing of any value causes the
execution of a command).
X Pyy
The value of this parameter can correspond to min/max X times

the value of the yy parameter.
Note!
The parameter number here indicated has to be intended as an offset value, that the user has
always to add to the base value 2000H (= decimal 8192), in order to address parameters when
a serial line/bus or the APC300 card are used. It also possible to accede to the DRIVECOM
parameter with the DRIVECOM standard indexes.
* When the parameter is accessed by Opt2-A/PDC the format is U16.
** When the parameter is accessed by Opt2-A/PDC the format is I16.
*** When the parameter is accessed by Opt2-A/PDC the lower word of the parameter is
considered.
Instruction manual
425
Value
Parameter
Drive ready
Quick stop
Start/Stop
Drive ready
Drive not ready
Quick stop
No Quick stop
Start
Stop
Fast stop
No.
Format
380
343
315
316
min
max
U16
U16
U16
U16
Fast Stop
No Fast Stop
Ramp ref 1 [FF]

Enable drive
Start/Stop
Enabled
Disabled
Output voltage [V]

Motor current [%]
Actual spd (rpm)
Speed ref (rpm)
Output power [kW]
Flux current (A)
Mains voltage [V]
Digital I/Q
426
Start
Stop
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
-
No Quick No Quick
stop
stop
Stop
(0)
Stop
(0)
No Fast
Stop
No Fast
Stop
DRIVE STATUS
R
1
0
R/W
QD
H
L
-
R
1
0
-
0
1
R/W
13
R/W
1
0
R/W
H
L
14
1
0
R/W
0
1
L
H
0
1
IA, QA
12
H
L
13
R/W
R/W
1
0
R/W
H
L
QA
QA
QA
QA
-
1
0
R
R
R
R
-
44
314
I16
U16
-2 P45
0
+2 P45
1
0
Disabled
0
Disabled
315
U16
Stop
(0)
Stop
(0)
R/W
R/W
1
0
R/W
S
-
S
-
1
0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
-
233
199
122
118
1052
351
466
Float **
I16
I16
I16
Float
Float
U16
0
-250
-8192
-32768
0.01
0.1
0
999
250
+8192
+32767
9999.99
99.9
999
TPD32-EV
Value
Parameter
No.
Format

Nom flux curr [A]
(Field curr scale [A])
Speed-0 f weak
45
374
U32***
Float
1
0.5
499
U16

Acc delta time [s]
Dec delta time [s]
21
22
29
30
U32
U16
U32
U16
Motor nom flux

(Motor field curr [A])
Flux reg mode
280
Float
469
U16
ON (Enabled)
OFF (Disabled)
Constant current
Voltage control
External control (OFF)
Ext digital FC
Ext wired FC
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
START UP
16383
70.0
1500
S
1500
S
R/Z
R/Z
R
-
0
0
0
0
232-1
65535
232-1
65535
100
1
100
1
100
1
100
1
R/W
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
START UP \ Motor data

0.0
P374
P374
P374
R/Z
Const.
current
0
Const.
current
0
R/Z
IdAN
1500
400
100
IdAN
1500
400
100
0
1
2
3
4
R/Z
R/Z
R/Z
R/Z
R
R
Full load curr [A]

Max out voltage [V]
Flux weak speed [%]
179
162
175
456
Float
Float *
Float
U16
0.1
0
20
0
T current lim [%]

7
468
467
U16
U16
U16
0
0
P468
200
P467
100
150
5
100
150
5
100
R/W
R/W
R/W
IA
-
R/W
---R/W
1
2
U32
U32
0
0
232-1
232-1
0
5000
0
5000
R/Z
R/Z
Speed fbk sel
414
U16
562
563
169
457
Float
Float
Float *
U16
R/Z
0
1
2
3
R/W
R/W
R/Z
R/Z
R
-
R/W
0
1
4
R/W
R/W
R/Z
1
0
Encoder 1
Encoder 2
Tacho
Armature
Tacho scale
Speed offset
Encoder 2 pulses
Enable fbk contr
Refresh enc 2
Enabled
Disabled
652
U16
Warning Cfg
9287
U16
Undervolt thr [V]

Overcurrent thr [%]
481
584
U16
U16
Enable overload
309
I16
Enabled
Disabled
No Stop/No start
Stop/No start
No Stop/Start
Enabled
Disabled
IdAN
6553
999
100
START UP \ Limits
START UP \ Speed feedback

0
0.90
-20.00
600
0
3.00
+20.00
9999
1
1.00
0.00
1024
Enabled
(1)
1.00
0.00
1024
Enabled
(1)
START UP \ Alarms
0
Stop/No
start
(1)
Stop/No
start
(1)
0
0
1000
200
230
160
230
160
Disabled
START UP \ Overload contr

0
Enabled
Instruction manual
1
0
R/W
1
0
427
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
Overload mode
318

Base current [%]
Overload time [s]
Ventil. Type
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
min
max
U16
I2t Motor
Curr
limited
312
313
U16
U16
P313
0
150
100
100
80
SERVO
AUTO
Derating factor [%]
Motor ovrld preal.
Motor I2t accum
Drive ovrld preal.
Drive I2t accum
Pause time [s]
Overld available
310
914
U16
U16
0
0
200
P312
< 100
65535
1
60
Servo
915
1289
655
1438
1439
311
406
U16
U16
Float
U16
FLOAT
U16
U16
0
0
0,00
0
0,00
0
0
100
1
100,00
1
100,00
65535
1
Overload state
407
U16
Select input 1
70
Curr limited
Curr not limited
I2t Motor
I2t Drive
I2t Motor & Drv

Overload possible
Current limit value
Current > limit value
OFF
Jog reference
Speed ref 1
Speed ref 2
Ramp ref 1
Ramp ref 2
T current ref 1
T current ref 2
Adap reference
T current limit
T current lim +
T current lim Pad 0
Pad 1
Pad 2
Pad 3
Load comp
PID offset 0
PI central v3
PID feed-back
Flux current max
Out vlt level
Speed ratio
Tension red
Tension ref
Preset 3
Brake Ref
Scale input 1
Auto tune inp 1
Auto tune
72
259
Offset input 1
74
Select input 2
(Select like Input 1)
Scale input 2
75
428
77
R/W
0
1
2
3
4
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/Z
50
540
-
30
Servo
0
1
50
300
-
R/Z
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
0
1
R
0
1
QD
L
H
QD
L
H
R
0
1
R
0
1
R/Z
START UP \ Analog inputs \ Analog input 1

U16
32
Ramp ref
1 (4)
Ramp ref
1 (4)
Float
U16
-10000
10.000
1.000
1.000
I16
-32768
+32767
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
19
21
22
23
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
R/W
C/W
1
R/W

U16
32
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
R/Z
Float
-10.000
10.000
1.000
1.000
R/W
TPD32-EV
Value
Parameter
Auto tune inp 2

Offset input 2
Auto tune
Offset input 3
260
U16
80
Auto tune
R&L Search
OFF
ON
Enabled
Disabled
Start/Stop
Format
79
Select input 3
Scale input 3
Auto tune inp 3
Enable drive
No.
I16
max
-32768
+32767
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
R/Z
82
261
Float
U16
-10.000
10.000
1.000
1.000
84
I16
-32768
+32767
R/W
C/W
1
R/W
452
U16
OFF
OFF
314
U16
Disabled
Disabled
315
U16
Stop
(0)
Stop
(0)
R/Z
0
1
R/W
1
0
R/W
12
H
L
13
R/W
1
0
R/W
1
0
H
L
1
0
Fwd
Direction
(1)
Fwd
Direction
(1)
R/Z
20
S
S
S
S
-
20
S
S
S
S
-
1
2
R/Z
C
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
Z/C
Term (0)
Term (0)
Local (0)
Local (0)
U16
START UP
START UP \ Speed self tune

1
1048
1027
1014
1030
1015
1031
87
1032
88
1033
1028
U16
U16
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
U16
0
0
0.001
0.001
0.000
0.000
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0
Main commands
252
U16
253
U16
256
U16
Save parameters
32
Test T curr lim [%]

Start
Inertia [kg*m*m*]
Friction [N*m]
Friction Nw [N*m]
Speed P [%]
Speed P Nw [%]
Speed I [%]
Speed I Nw [%]
Take val
Local
Bus
Fwd direction
Rev direction
Control mode
U16
1029
Terminals
Digitals
C/W
1
R/W
Start
Stop
Fwd-Rev spd tune
min
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
S
65535
999.999
999.999
99.999
99.99
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
65535
START UP
Instruction manual
R/Z
0
1
R/Z
0
1
C/W
(1)
429
Value
Parameter
R&L Search
OFF
ON
Enable drive
Enabled
Disabled
Start/Stop
No.
Format
452
U16
314
U16
315
U16
Start
Stop
Fwd-Rev spd tune
1029
U16
min
max
TUNING
1
OFF
OFF
Disabled
Disabled
Stop
(0)
Stop
(0)
Fwd
Direction
-1
Fwd
Direction
-1
20
S
S
S
S
S
S
0
2.00
1.00
30.00
40.00
TUNING \ Speed self tune

1
Fwd direction
Rev direction
Test T curr lim [%]

Start
Inertia [kg*m*m*]
Friction [N*m]
Friction Nw [N*m]
Speed P [%]
Speed P Nw [%]
Speed I [%]
Speed I Nw [%]
Take val
1048
1027
1014
1030
1015
1031
87
1032
88
1033
1028
U16
U16
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
U16
0
0
0.001
0.001
0.000
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0
Speed P [%]
Speed I [%]
Prop filter [ms]
Flux P [%]
Flux I [%]
Voltage P [%]
Voltage I [%]
Save parameters
87
88
444
91
92
493
494
256
Float
Float
U16
Float
Float
Float
Float
U16
0.00
0.00
0
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
430
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
S
65535
999.999
999.999
99.999
99.99
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
65535
TUNING
100.00
100.00
1000
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
R/Z
0
1
R/W
1
0
R/W
12
H
L
13
R/W
1
0
R/W
1
0
H
L
1
0
R/Z
20
S
S
S
S
-
1
2
R/Z
C
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
Z/C
S
S
0
2.00
1.00
30.00
40.00
TPD32-EV
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
C/W
(1)
Value
Parameter
Enable drive
Start/Stop
Enabled
Disabled
Start
Stop
No.
Format
314
U16
315
U16
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
MONITOR
1
Disabled
Disabled
R/W
1
0
R/W
12
H
L
13
R/W
1
0
R/W
Stop
(0)
Stop
(0)
1
0
H
L
1
0
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
-
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
QA
QA
QA
QA
QA
-
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
-
R
R
R
R
0.100
S
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
QA
QA
QA
QA
QA
QA
-
R
R
R
R
-
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MONITOR \ Measurements \ Speed \ Speed in DRC [ ]
Ramp ref (d) [FF]

Speed ref (d) [FF]
Actual spd (d) [FF]
F act spd (d) [FF]
Act spd filter [s]
109
112
115
119
925
923
Ramp ref (rpm)

Ramp outp (rpm)
Speed ref (rpm)
Actual spd (rpm)
Enc 1 speed (rpm)
Enc 2 speed (rpm)
F act spd (rpm)
Act spd filter [s]
110
113
118
122
427
420
924
923
Ramp ref (%)

Ramp output (%)
Speed ref (%)
Actual spd (%)
111
114
117
121
Mains voltage [V]

Output power [Kw]
Output voltage [V]
Motor current [%]
F T curr (%)
T curr filter [s]
T current ref [%]
Flux reference [%]
Flux current [%]
Flux current (A)
466
588
1052
233
199
928
926
41
500
234
351
Digital I/Q
Dig input term
Dig input term 1
Dig input term 2
Dig input term 3
Dig input term 4
Dig input term 5
Dig input term 6
Dig input term 7
Dig input term 8
Dig input term 9
Dig input term 10
Dig input term 11
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
Float
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
0.001
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
1.000
0.100
0.100
MONITOR \ Measurements \ Speed \ Speed in rpm

I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
Float
-32768
-32768
-32768
-8192
-8192
-8192
-32768
0.001
+32767
+32767
+32767
+8192
+8192
+8192
+32767
1.000
0.100
0.100
MONITOR \ Measurements \ Speed \ Speed in %

Float
Float
Float
Float
U16
Float
Float
Float **
I16
I16
Float
I16
Float*
Float *
Float
-200.0
-200.0
-200.0
-200.0
+200.0
+200.0
+200.0
+200.0
MONITOR \ Measurements
0
0.0
0.01
0
-250
-500
0.001
-200
0.0
0.0
0.1
999
70.0
9999.99
999
250
+500
0.250
+200
100.0
100.0
99.9
0.100
S
MONITOR \ I/O
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65535
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Instruction manual
431
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
Dig input term 12

Dig input term 15
Dig input term 16
Dig output term
Virtual dig inp
Virtual dig out
576
579
580
581
582
583
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
432
min
max
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
65535
65535
65535
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
-
TPD32-EV
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
-
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
INPUT VARIABLES \ Ramp ref \ Ramp ref 1
Ramp ref 1 [FF]

Ramp ref 1 (%)
44
47
Ramp ref 2 [FF]

Ramp ref 2 (%)
48
49
Speed ref 1 [FF]

Speed ref 1 (%)
42
378
Speed ref 2 [FF]

Speed Ref 2 (%)
43
379
T current ref 1 [%]
39
I16
-200
T current ref 2 [%]
40
I16
-200
I16
Float
-2 P45
-200.0
+2 P45
+200.0
0
0.0
0
0.0
R/W
R/W
IA, QA
-
R/W
-
R/W
R/W
IA, QA
-
R/W
-
R/W
R/W
IA, QA
-
R/W
-
0
0
R/W
R/W
IA, QA
-
R/W
-
R/W
IA, QA
R/W
0.00
0.00
R/W
IA, QA
INPUT VARIABLES \ Ramp ref \ Ramp ref 2

I16
Float
-2 P45
-200.0
+2 P45
+200.0
0
0.0
0
0.0
INPUT VARIABLES \ Speed ref \ Speed ref 1

I16
Float
-2 P45
-200.0
+2 P45
+200.0
0
0
0
0
INPUT VARIABLES \ Speed ref \ Speed ref 2

I16
Float
-2 P45
-200.0
+2 P45
+200.0
0
0
INPUT VARIABLES \ T current ref

+200
see 6.4.3
+200
Instruction manual
433
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
1
2
U32
U32
Speed min pos [FF]

Speed max pos [FF]
Speed min neg [FF]
Speed max neg [FF]
Speed limited
5
3
6
4
372
U32
U32
U32
U32
U16
T current lim type
715
U16
T current lim [%]

T current lim + [%]
T current lim - [%]
Curr limit state
7
8
9
349

Current lim red [%]
Torque reduct
10
11
13
342

Speed not limited

Speed limited
T lim +/T lim mot gen
Curr. limit not reached

Curr. limit reached
Not active
Active

(Max field curr [%])
434
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
LIMITS \ Speed limits \ Speed amount

0
0
232-1
232-1
0
5000
0
5000
R/Z
R/Z
0
5000
0
5000
R/Z
R/Z
R/Z
R/Z
R
0
1
QD
L
H
R
0
1
R/Z
0
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
0
1
R
R
R/W
R/W
IA
IA
IA
QD
L
H
ID
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
0
1
R
R
R/W
R/W
0
1
L
H
0
1
LIMITS \ Speed limits \ Speed min/max

0
0
0
0
0
232-1
232-1
232-1
232-1
1
0
5000
0
5000
LIMITS \ Current limits

0
U16
U16
U16
U16
0
0
0
0
200
200
200
1
150
150
150
150
150
150
U16
U16
U16
U16
0
0
0
0
200
200
200
1
100
Not active
(0)
100
Not active
(0)
LIMITS \ Flux limits (Fld curr limits)
467
U16
P468
100
100
100
R/W
R/W
468
U16
P467
R/W
----
TPD32-EV
Value
Parameter
No.
Format

Acc delta time [s]
21
22
U32
U16

Dec delta time [s]
29
30
U32
U16

QStp delta time [s]
37
38
U32
U16
0
0
Ramp shape
18
U16
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
RAMP \ Acceleration
0
0
232-1
65535
100
1
100
1
R/W
R/W
100
1
R/W
R/W
1000
1
1000
1
R/W
R/W
Linear
(0)
Linear
(0)
R/Z
ID
ID
ID
-
R/W
0
1
2
3
R/W
R/W
-
RAMP \ Deceleration
0
0
232-1
65535
100
1
RAMP \ Quick stop

232-1
65535
RAMP
1

S acc t const [ms]
S dec t const [ms]
Ramp +/- delay [ms]
Fwd-Rev
19
663
664
20
673
Float
Float
Float
U16
U16
100
100
100
0
0
3000
3000
3000
65535
3
300
300
300
100
1
300
300
300
100
1
Forward sign
Reverse sign
Enable ramp
293
294
245
U16
U16
I16
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
Enabled
(1)
0
0
Enabled
(1)
0
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
1
2
3
R/W
R/W
R/Z
Not active Not active

(1)
(1)
1
0
R/W
ID
R/W
Not active
(1)
Not active
(1)
0
1
R/W
L
H
ID
0
1
R/W
Not active
(1)
Not active
(1)
0
1
R/W
L
H
ID
R/W
0
1
R
1
0
R
1
0
H
L
QD
H
L
QD
H
L
1
0
R
1
0
R
1
0
Linear
S-Shaped
No direction
Fwd direction
Rev direction
No direction
Ramp out = 0
Ramp in = 0
Freeze ramp
Ramp +
Enabled
Disabled
344
Active
Not active
345
U16
Active
Not active
373
U16
Active
Not active
Acc.CW + Dec. anti-CW

Other states
Ramp -
U16
Acc.anti-CW + Dec. CW
Other states
346
U16
347
U16
Instruction manual
435
Value
Parameter
Speed ref [rpm]

Lock speed reg
ON
OFF
Enable spd reg

Lock speed I
Aux spd fun sel
Enable
Disable
Active
Not active
No.
Format
118
236
I16
I16
-32768
-200
322
U16
242
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
SPEED REGULAT
R
R
QA
QA
R
R
+32767
+200
see 6.7.1
1
OFF
OFF
I16
Enabled
Enabled
ID
L
H
-
R/W
1
0
-
348
U16
Not active
(1)
Not active
(1)
1016
U16
Speed up
(0)
Speed up
(0)
R/W
1
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
0
1
R/Z
ID
L
H
-
R/W
0
1
-
0
1
R/W
Speed up
Inertia-loss cp
Prop filter [ms]
444
Fwd-Rev spd tune
1029
U16
U16
1000
SPEED REGULAT. \ Self tuning

1
Fwd direction
Rev direction
Fwd
Direction
(1)
Fwd
Direction
(1)
R/Z
20
S
S
S
S
-
20
S
S
S
S
-
1
2
R/Z
C
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
Z/C
Test T curr lim [%]

Start
Inertia [kg*m*m*]
Friction [N*m]
Friction Nw [N*m]
Speed P [%]
Speed P Nw [%]
Speed I [%]
Speed I Nw [%]
Take val
1048
1027
1014
1030
1015
1031
87
1032
88
1033
1028
U16
U16
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
U16
Enable spd=0 I
123
U16
Disabled
Disabled
124
U16
Disabled
Disabled
125
U16
Disabled
Disabled
126
106
Float
U16
0.00
1
100.00
32767
10.00
10
10.00
10
R/Z
1
0
R/Z
1
0
R/Z
1
0
R/W
R/W
Speed up gain [%]

Speed up base [ms]
445
446
447
Float
Float
U16
0.00
1000
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Droop gain [%]

Droop filter [ms]
Load comp [%]
Droop limit [FF]
Enable droop
696
697
698
700
699
Float
U16
I16
U16
U16
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
IA
ID
R/W
R/W
Enable spd=0 R
Enable spd=0 P
Spd=0 P gain [%]
Ref 0 level [FF]
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
436
0
0
0.001
0.001
0.000
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0
S
65535
999.999
999.999
99.999
99.99
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
65535
SPEED REGULAT \ Spd zero logic
SPEED REGULAT \ Speed up

0.00
0
0
100.00
16000
1000
0.00
1000
0
SPEED REGULAT \ Droop function

0.00
0
-200
0
0
100.00
1000
+200
2*P45
1
0.00
0
0
1500
Disabled
(0)
0.00
0
0
1500
Disabled
(0)
SPEED REGULAT \ Inertia/loss cp
TPD32-EV
1
0
1
0
Value
Parameter
Inertia [kg*m*m]
Friction [N*m]
No.
Format
1014
1015
1013
1012
Float
Float
Float
U16
min
max
0.001
0.000
0.01
0
999.999
99.999
99.99
1000
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
S
S
S
0
S
S
S
0
Instruction manual
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
437
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
T current ref [%]

Motor current [%]
dI/dt delta time
Arm inductance [mH]
E int [V]
R&L Search
41
199
1430
1431
1520
453
454
587
452
I16
I16
U16
U16
U16
Float
Float
I16
U16
Zero torque
353
U16
OFF
ON
Active
Not active
438
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
CURRENT REGULAT
-200
-250
0
0
0
S
S
-80
0
+200
250
200
65535
100
S
S
+80
1
100
1000
0
0.500
4.00
OFF
100
1000
0
0.500
4.00
OFF
Not active
(1)
Not active
(1)
TPD32-EV
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/Z
0
1
R/W
QA
QA
QA
-
R
R
-
ID
R/W
0
1
L
H
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
FLUX REGULATION (FIELD CURRENT REGULATION)

Enable flux reg
497
U16
Enabled
Enabled
Flux reg mode
469
U16
Const.
current
0
Const.
current
0
ON (Enabled)
OFF (Disabled)
Constant current
Voltage control
External control (OFF)
Ext digital FC
Ext wired FC
Enable flux weak
498
U16
Speed-0 f weak
499
U16
ON (Enabled)
OFF (Disabled)
ON (Enabled)
OFF (Disabled)
R/W
1
0
R/Z
0
1
2
3
4
R/W
1
0
R/W
1
0
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
500
Float*
0.0
100.0
0.0
0.0
Flux reference [%]
234
Float*
0.0
100.0
Flux current [%]
921
Float*
0.00
100.0
100.0
100.0
Out vlt level
1522
U16
1
100
5
5
FC cur ref hyst
411
U16
Disabled Disabled
FC limit ramp
Disabled (0)

Enabled (1)
888
U16
200
10000
800
800
R/W
FLUX REGULATION (FIELD CURRENT REGULATION) \ Flux \ if curve

916
Float
0.0
100.0
40.0
40.0
R/Z
I field cnst 40
917
Float
0.0
100.0
70.0
70.0
R/Z
I field cnst 70
918
Float
0.0
100.0
90.0
90.0
R/Z
I field cnst 90
919
U16
0
1
0
0
Z/C
Set flux / if
920
U16
0
1
0
0
Z/C
Reset flux / if
374
Float
0.5
70.0
S
S
R/Z
Nom flux curr [A]
280
Float
0.00
P374
P374
P374
R/Z
Motor nom flux
Instruction manual
ID
H
L
-
ID
H
L
-
QA
QA
IA, QA
-
R/W
-
439
Value
Parameter
Speed P [%]
Speed I [%]
Speed P bypass [%]
Speed I bypass [%]
Flux P [%]
Flux I [%]
No.
Format
min
max
REG PARAMETERS \ Percent values \ Speed regulator
87
88
459
460
Float
Float
Float
Float
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
91
92
Float
Float
0.00
0.00
100.00
100.00
10.00
1.00
10.00
1.00
2.00
1.00
2.00
1.00
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
93
Float
000.1
94
Float
0.001
Float
Float
0.00
0.00
100.00
100.00
30.00
40.00
30.00
40.00
R/W
R/W
0.3 x
P93max
P93max
0.3
P94max
0.3 x
P93max
P93max
0.3
P94max
R/Z
R/Z
3277
3277
3277
3277
R/Z
R/Z
S
S
R/Z
R/Z
S
S
R
R
REG PARAMETERS \ Base values \ Flux regulator (Field regulator)

495
496
Speed P in use [%]

Speed I in use [%]
99
100
Float
Float
1
1
32767
32767
REG PARAMETERS \ Base values \ Voltage reg

Float
Float
0.0100
0.01
S
S
S
S
REG PARAMETERS \ In use values
Float
Float
0.00
0.00
100.00
100.00
R/W
R/W
REG PARAMETERS \ Base values \ Speed regulator
97
98
REG PARAMETERS \ Percent values \ Voltage reg
493
494
440
10.00
1.00
10.00
1.00
REG PARAMETERS \ Percent values \ Flux regulator ( Field regulator)
Voltage P [%]
Voltage I [%]
Flux P base
Flux I base
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
S
S
TPD32-EV
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
252
U16
253

Full load curr [A]
Max out voltage [V]
Ok relay funct
Main commands
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
CONFIGURATION
0
Term.(0)
Term.(0)
U16
Local (0)
Local (0)
45
179
175
412
U32***
Float
Float
I16
1
0.1
20
0
16383
P465
999
1
1500
P465
400
0
1500
P465
400
0
En Tcurr HiRes
1521
I16

Speed fbk sel
162
414
Float *
U16
0
0
6553
3
1500
1
Encoder 1 state
648
U16
457
U16
Terminals
Digital
Control mode
Local
Bus
Drive healthy
Ready to Start
Encoder 1
Encoder 2
Tacho
Armature
Encoder Fault
Encoder ok
Enable fbk contr
Enable fbk bypas
CONFIGURATION \ Speed fbk
Enabled
Disabled
1500
1
Enabled
(1)
Enabled
(1)
458
U16
Flux weak speed [%]

Speed fbk error [%]
Tacho scale
Speed offset
Encoder 1 pulses
Encoder 2 pulses
Refresh enc 1
456
455
562
563
416
169
649
U16
U16
Float
Float
Float *
Float *
U16
0
0
0.90
-20.00
600
150
0
100
100
3.00
+20.00
9999
9999
1
100
22
1.00
0.00
1024
1000
Disabled
(0)
100
22
1.00
0.00
1024
1000
Disabled
(0)
Encoder 2 state
651
U16
652
U16
Disabled
(0)
Disabled
(0)
911
U16
Disabled
(0)
Disabled
(0)
912
913
U16
U32
0
0
65535
+232-1
0
0
0
0
465
201
U16
U16
464
U16
331
300
Text
U16
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Encoder Fault
Encoder ok
Refresh enc 2
Enable ind store

Ind store ctrl
Index storing
Drive size [A]
2B + E
Size selection
Software version
Drive type
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
ON (Off)
OFF (On)
Standard
American
TPD32-EV-...-2B
TPD32-EV-...-4B
CONFIGURATION \ Drive type

0
0
S
1
S
0
S
0
10
11
Instruction manual
R/Z
0
1
R/Z
0
1
R/Z
R/Z
R/Z
R/Z
0
1
R/Z
R
-
R/Z
R/Z
0
1
2
3
R
0
1
R/Z
R
R
QD
-
R
0
1
-
R
R
R
-
QD
-
R
0
1
-
R/W
R/W
R
R
-
R
10
11
1
0
R/Z
1
0
R/Z
R/Z
R/W
R/W
R/Z
R/Z
R/W
1
0
R
0
1
R/W
1
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
R
R
R/Z
0
1
R/Z
0
1
R
R
10
11
441
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
Dim factor num

Dim factor den
Dim factor text
50
51
52
I32***
I32***
Text
Face value num

Face value den
54
53
I16
I16
FS Latch
194
FS Ok relay open
Undervolt thr [V]

UV Latch
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
CONFIGURATION \ Dimension fact

1
1
65535
+231 -1
1
1
rpm
1
1
rpm
CONFIGURATION \ Face value fact

1
1
+32767
+32767
1
1
1
1
R/Z
R/Z
R/Z
R
R
-
R/Z
R/Z
R
R
R/Z
1
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
R/Z
1
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/Z
0
1
2
R/Z
1
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
R/W
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Failure supply
195
ON
ON
I16
ON
ON
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Undervoltage

U16
U16
0
0
1000
1
230
ON
230
ON
358
I16
ON
ON
UV Hold off time [ms]

UV Restart time [ms]
470
359
U16
U16
0
0
100
65535
0
1000
0
1000
OV Activity
203
UV Ok relay open
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
481
357
U16
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Overvoltage

U16
Ignore
Ignore
361
U16
ON
ON
362
I16
ON
ON
OV Hold off time [ms]

OV Restart time [ms]
482
483
U16
U16
0
0
10000
10000
0
0
0
0
Overspeed thr [rpm]

OS Activity
1426
1422
U16
U16
0
0
32767
2
4000
Ignore
4000
Ignore
1421
U16
ON
ON
1423
I16
ON
ON
OS Hold off time [ms]

OS Restart time [ms]
1424
1425
U16
U16
0
0
10000
10000
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/Z
0
1
2
3
4
5
R/Z
1
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
R/W
HS Activity
368
U16
Disable
drive
Disable
drive
R/Z
ON
ON
OV Latch
Ignore
Warning
Disable drive
OVk relay open
OS Latch
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Ignore
Warning
Disable drive
Quick stop
Normal stop
Curr lim stop
OS Ok relay open
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Warning
Disable drive
Quick stop
Normal stop
Curr lim stop
HS Ok relay open
442
ON
OFF
370
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Overspeed
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Heatsink
I16
TPD32-EV
1
2
3
4
5
R/W
1
0
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Overtemp motor
OM Activity
365
U16
Ignore
Warning
Disable drive
Quick stop
Normal stop
Curr lim stop
OM Ok relay open
ON
OFF
EF Activity
367
354
I16
Disable
dive
Disable
dive
ON
ON
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ External fault

U16
Disable
drive
Disable
drive
R/Z
0
1
2
3
4
5
R/W
1
0
R/Z
355
U16
ON
ON
356
I16
ON
ON
EF Hold off time [ms]

EF Restart time [ms]
502
501
U16
U16
0
0
10000
10000
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
R/Z
1
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
R/W
BF Activity
1296
R/Z
EF Latch
Warning
Disable drive
Quick stop
Normal stop
Curr lim stop
EF Ok relay open
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Brake fault

U16
Ignore
Warning
Disable drive
Quick stop
Normal stop
Curr lim stop
BF Ok relay open
ON
OFF
Motor I2t Activity
1297
I16
Disable
drive
ON
ON
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Motor I2t ovrld
1419
U16
Ignore
Warning
Disable drive
Motor I2t Latch
Disable
drive
Disable
drive
Disable
drive
1442
U16
ON
ON
Motor I2t Ok relay open
1420
I16
ON
ON
Drive I2t Ok relay open
1441
Overcurrent thr [%]

OC Activity
584
212
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OC Latch
Ignore
Warning
Disable drive
ON
OFF
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Drive I2t ovrld
363
I16
ON
ON
R/Z
0
1
2
R/Z
0
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
R/Z
0
1
2
R/Z
1
0
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Overcurrent

U16
U16
0
0
200
2
160
Ignore
160
Ignore
U16
ON
ON
Instruction manual
0
1
2
3
4
5
R/W
0
1
443
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
364
OC Hold off time [ms]

OC Restart time [ms]
586
585
FL Activity
473
OC Ok relay open
FL Latch
ON
OFF
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
min
max
I16
ON
ON
U16
U16
0
0
10000
10000
0
0
0
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/Z
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Field loss

U16
Ignore
Warning
Disable drive
Disable
drive
Disable
drive
0
1
2
R/Z
1
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
R/W
471
U16
ON
ON
472
I16
ON
ON
FL Hold off time [ms]

FL Restart time [ms]
475
474
U16
U16
0
0
10000
10000
0
0
0
0
Delta freq thres [%]

DF Activity
1437
1432
Float
U16
1
0
15
2
5
Ignore
5
Ignore
1433
U16
ON
ON
1434
I16
ON
ON
DF Hold off time [ms]

DF Restart time [ms]
1435
1436
U16
U16
0
0
10000
10000
0
0
0
0
R/Z
R/Z
0
1
2
R/Z
0
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
R/W
Threshold
8601
R/W
SL Activity
478
FL Ok relay open
DF Latch
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Ignore
Warning
Disable drive
DF Ok relay open
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Delta frequency
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ SSC Error

U16
250
ON
OFF
477
SL Hold off time [ms]
480
O2 Activity
639
U16
ON
OFF
BL Activity
634
Ignore
Warning
Disable drive
Quick stop
Normal stop
Curr lim stop
444
640
Disable
drive
Disable
drive
R/Z
I16
ON
ON
U16
10000
1
2
R/W
1
0
R/W
R/Z
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Opt2 failure

U16
Disable drive
Quick stop
Normal stop
Curr lim stop
O2 Ok relay open
50
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Speed fbk loss
Warning
Disable drive
SL Ok relay open
50
I16
Disable
drive
Disable
drive
ON
ON
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Bus loss

U16
Disable
drive
Disable
drive
TPD32-EV
2
3
4
5
R/W
1
0
R/Z
0
1
2
3
4
5
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
633
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
min
max
U16
ON
ON
635
I16
ON
ON
BL Hold off time [ms]

BL Restart time [ms]
636
637
U16
U16
0
0
10000
10000
0
0
0
0
Open test act
1527
BL Latch
BL Ok relay open
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
R/Z
1
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/Z
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ SCR test

U16
Disable
drive
Disable
drive
SCR test enable
1524
I16
OFF
OFF
SCR diag status

Open SCR thr [%]
1525
1528
U16
U16
100
50
50
0
1
2
R/Z
0
1
2
3
R
R/W
HO Activity
386
R/Z
Ignore
Warning
Disable Drive
OFF
OPEN SCR TEST
SHORT SCR TEST
OPEN/SHORT TEST
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Hw opt1 failure

U16
Warning
Disable drive
Quick stop
Normal stop
Curr lim stop
HO Ok relay open
ON
OFF
ES Activity
ES Latch
387
728
I16
ES Ok relay open
ON
OFF
Device address
Ser answer delay
Ser protocol sel
U16
ON
ON
Disable
drive
Disable
drive
U16
ON
ON
730
U16
ON
ON
319
408
323
U16
U16
U16
CONFIGURATION \ Set serial comm
326
U16
19200
9600
4800
2400
1200
Pword 1
729
0
0
0
127
900
2
SLINK3
MODBUS RTU
JBUS
Ser baudrate sel
Disable
drive
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ Enable seq err
Ignore
Disable drive
ON
OFF
Disable
drive
85
I32
99999
R/Z
0
2
R/Z
1
0
R/W
1
0
0
0
SLINK3
(0)
0
0
SLINK3
(0)
R/Z
R/W
R/W
---
-----
9600
(1)
9600
(1)
0
1
2
R/W
--
---
CONFIGURATION
0
1
2
3
4
5
R/W
1
0
Instruction manual
0
1
2
3
4
W
445
Value
Parameter
Select output 1
No.
66
Format
min
max
I/O CONFIG \ Analog outputs \ Analog output 1

U16
96
OFF
Speed ref 1
Speed ref 2
Ramp ref 1
Ramp ref 2
Ramp ref
Speed ref
Ramp out
Actual speed
T current ref 1
T current ref 2
T current ref
Speed reg out
Motor current
Output voltage
Analog input 1
Analog input 2
Analog input 3
Flux current
Pad 0
Pad 1
Pad 4
Pad 5
Flux reference
Pad 6
PID output
Out vlt level
Flux current max
F act spd
F T curr
Speed draw out
Output power
Roll diameter
Act tension ref
Torque current
W reference
Actual comp
Brake current
Field cur ref
Motor Pot Out
Scale output 1
62
Select output 2
(Select like output 1)
67
Scale output 2
63
Select output 3
Scale output 3
68
Select output 4
69
Scale output 4
65
446
64
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
Float
-10.000
+10.000
Actual
speed (8)
Actual
speed (8)
R/Z
0.000
0.000
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
15
16
20
24
25
26
27
31
32
33
34
35
38
39
79
80
81
82
84
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
R/W
R/Z
R/W
R/Z
R/W
R/Z
R/W

U16
94
Float
-10.000
+10000
Motor
current
(16)
0.000
Motor
current
(16)
0.000

U16
94
Float
-10.000
+10000
Flux
-27
0.000
Flux
-27
0.000

U16
94
Float
-10.000
+10000
Output
voltage
(20)
0.000
Output
voltage
(20)
0.000
TPD32-EV
Value
Parameter
Select input 1
No.
70
Format
min
max
I/O CONFIG \ Analog inputs \ Analog input 1

U16
32
OFF
Jog reference
Speed ref 1
Speed ref 2
Ramp ref 1
Ramp ref 2
T current ref 1
T current ref 2
Adap reference
T current limit
T current lim +
T current lim Pad 0
Pad 1
Pad 2
Pad 3
Load comp
PID offset 0
PI central v3
PID feed-back
Flux current max
Out vlt level
Speed ratio
Tension red
Tension ref
Preset 3
Brake Ref
An in 1 target
Input 1 type
Assigned
Not assigned
-10V ... + 10 V
0...20 mA, 0...10 V
4...20 mA
Input 1 sign
Scale input 1
Tune value inp 1
Auto tune inp 1
Positive
Negative
Auto tune
Input 1 filter [ms]

Input 1 compare
Input 1 cp error
Input 1 cp delay
Input 1 cp match
Input 1 not thr.val.

Input 1=thr.val
71
U16
10 V
10 V
389
U16
72
73
259
Float
Float
U16
-10000
0.100
+10000
10.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
792
1042
1043
1044
1045
U16
I16
U16
U16
U16
0
-10000
0
0
0
1000
+10000
10000
65000
1
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
0
0
-
I16
-32768
+32767
Input 2 type
Scale input 2
Tune value inp 2
R/Z
75
Positive
Negative
U16
Select input 2
An in 2 target
Input 2 sign
Ramp ref
1 (4)
295
74
-10V ... + 10 V
0...20 mA, 0...10 V
4...20 mA
Ramp ref
1 (4)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
19
21
22
23
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
R/W
0
1
R/Z
0
1
2
R/W
1
0
R/W
R/W
C/W
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
0
1
R/W
Offset input 1
Assigned
Not assigned
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
ID
L
H
-
R/W
0
1
-
R/W
1
0
-
QD
L
H
-
R/W
R
-
U16
32
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
R/Z
296
U16
76
U16
10 V
10 V
ID
L
H
-
R/W
0
1
-
390
U16
77
78
Float
Float
-10.000
0.100
+10000
10.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
R/W
0
1
R/Z
0
1
2
R/W
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
1
0
-
Instruction manual
447
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
260
U16
Input 2 filter [ms]

Offset input 2
801
79
U16
I16
Select input 3
An in 3 target
80
Input 3 type
Auto tune inp 2
Auto tune
Assigned
Not assigned
-10V ... + 10 V
0...20 mA, 0...10 V
4...20 mA
Input 3 sign
Scale input 3
Tune value inp 3
Auto tune inp 3
Positive
Negative
Auto tune
Input 3 filter [ms]

Offset input 3
448
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
-
C/W
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
-
0
-32768
1000
+32767
0
0
0
0

U16
32
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
R/Z
297
U16
81
U16
10 V
10 V
ID
L
H
-
R/W
0
1
-
391
U16
82
83
261
Float
Float
U16
-10.000
0.100
+10000
10.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
R/W
1
0
-
802
84
U16
I16
0
-32768
1000
+32767
0
0
0
0
R/W
0
1
R/Z
0
1
2
R/W
1
0
R/W
R/W
C/W
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
-
TPD32-EV
Value
Parameter
Digital output 1
No.
Format
145
U16
min
max
I/O CONFIG \ Digital outputs

0
79
OFF
Speed zero thr
Spd threshold
Set speed
Curr limit state
Drive ready
Mot ovrld avail
Overload state
Ramp +
Ramp Speed limited
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Heatsink
Overcurrent
Overtemp motor
External fault
Failure supply
Pad A bit
Pad B bit
Virt dig input
Torque sign
Stop control
Field loss
Speed fbk loss
Bus loss
Hw opt1 failure
Opt2 failure
Encoder 1 state
Encoder 2 state
Enable seq err
Diameter calc st
Drive healthy
Input 1 cp match
Diam reached
Spd match compl
Acc state
Dec state
Brake comand
Brake failure
Mot ovrld preal
Dvr ovrld preal
Dvr ovrld avail
I2t mot ovrld fail
I2t drv ovrld fail
Mot cur threshld
Overspeed
Delta frequency
Drv rdy to start
BUS control mode
SSC Error
Inversion out 1
1267
U16
Enabled
Disabled
Digital output 2
Inversion out 2
146
U16
77
1268
U16
Enabled
Disabled
Digital output 3
Inversion out 3
147
U16
77
1269
U16
Enabled
Disabled
Digital output 4
148
U16
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
77
Ramp +
(8)
Ramp +
(8)
R/Z
Disabled
(0)
Disabled
(0)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
35
38
42
49
58
59
60
61
62
63
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
76
77
79
R/W
Ramp (9)
Disabled
(0)
Ramp (9)
Disabled
(0)
1
0
R/Z
R/W
Spd thr.
(2)
Disabled
(0)
Spd thr.
(2)
Disabled
(0)
1
0
R/Z
R/W
Overld
avail. (6)
Overld
avail. (6)
1
0
R/Z
Instruction manual
449
Value
Parameter
Inversion out 4
No.
Format
1270
U16
min
max
Enabled
Disabled
Digital output 5
Inversion out 5
149
U16
77
1271
U16
Enabled
Disabled
Digital output 6
150
U16
77
Inversion out 6
1272
U16
Enabled
Disabled
Digital output 7
151
U16
77
Inversion out 7
1273
U16
Enabled
Disabled
Digital output 8
152
U16
77
Inversion out 8
1274
U16
Enabled
Disabled
Relay 2
Inversion relay 2
Enabled
Disabled
450
629
U16
77
1275
U16
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
Disabled
(0)
Disabled
(0)
R/W
Curr lim.
state (4)
Disabled
(0)
Curr lim.
state (4)
Disabled
(0)
1
0
R/Z
R/W
Overvoltage
(12)
Disabled
(0)
Overvoltage
(12)
Disabled
(0)
1
0
R/Z
R/W
Undervoltage
(11)
Disabled
(0)
Undervoltage
(11)
Disabled
(0)
1
0
R/Z
R/W
Overcurrent
(14)
Disabled
(0)
Overcurrent
(14)
Disabled
(0)
1
0
R/Z
R/W
Stop ctrl
(23)
Disabled
(0)
Stop ctrl
(23)
Disabled
(0)
1
0
R/Z
R/W
TPD32-EV
1
0
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
Digital input 1
137
U16
Inversion in 1
1276
U16
OFF
Motor pot reset
Motor pot up
Motor pot down
Motor pot sign +
Motor pot sign Jog +
Jog Failure reset
Torque reduct
Ramp out = 0
Ramp in = 0
Freeze ramp
Lock speed reg
Lock speed I
Auto capture
Input 1 sign +
Input 1 sign Input 2 sign +
Input 2 sign Input 3 sign +
Input 3 sign Zero torque
Speed sel 0
Speed sel 1
Speed sel 2
Ramp sel 0
Ramp sel 1
Field loss
Enable flux reg
Enable flux weak
Pad A bit 0
Pad A bit 1
Pad A bit 2
Pad A bit 3
Pad A bit 4
Pad A bit 5
Pad A bit 6
Pad A bit 7
Forward sign
Reverse sign
An in 1 target
An in 2 target
An in 3 target
Enable droop
Enable PI PID
Enable PD PID
PI integral freeze
PID offs. Sel
PI central vs0
PI central vs1
Diameter calc
Diam reset
Diam calc Dis
Torque winder EN
Line acc status
Line dec status
Line fstp status
Speed match
Diam inc/dec En
Wind/unwind
Diam preset sel0
Diam preset sel1
Taper enable
Speed demand En
Winder side
Enable PI-PD PID
Jog TW enable
Brake fbk
Adapt Sel 1
Adapt Sel 2
Wired FC EN
Wired FC Inv Seq
Wired FC Act Brg
min
max
I/O CONFIG \ Digital inputs

0
90
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
Disabled
(0)
Disabled
(0)
R/Z
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
44
45
46
47
48
49
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
86
87
88
89
90
R/W
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
1
0
R/Z
Enabled
Disabled
Digital input 2
(Select like input 1)
138
U16
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
87
Instruction manual
451
Value
Parameter
Inversion in 2
No.
Format
1277
U16
min
max
Select enc 2
1278
U16
Disabled
(0)
Disabled
(0)
R/W
140
U16
87
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
1
0
R/Z
1279
U16
Disabled
(0)
Disabled
(0)
R/W
141
U16
87
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
1
0
R/Z
1280
U16
Disabled
(0)
Disabled
(0)
R/W
142
U16
87
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
1
0
R/Z
1281
U16
Disabled
(0)
Disabled
(0)
R/W
143
U16
87
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
1
0
R/Z
1282
U16
Disabled
(0)
Disabled
(0)
R/W
144
U16
87
OFF (0)
OFF (0)
1
0
R/Z
1283
U16
Disabled
(0)
Disabled
(0)
R/W
OFF
(0)
see 6.12.05
OFF
(0)
see 6.12.05
R/Z
OFF
(0)
see 6.12.05
OFF
(0)
see 6.12.05
0
2
3
4
5
R/Z
R
R
-
U16
I/O CONFIG \ Encoder inputs

0
OFF
Speed ref 1
Speed ref 2
Ramp ref 1
Ramp ref 2
1021
U16
OFF
Speed ref 1
Speed ref 2
Ramp ref 1
Ramp ref 2
Refresh enc 2
452
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
1020
Encoder 1 pulses
Encoder 2 pulses
Refresh enc 1
OFF (0)
Enabled
Disabled
Select enc 1
OFF (0)
Enabled
Disabled
Digital input 8
Inversion in 8
87
Enabled
Disabled
Digital input 7
Inversion in 7
R/W
Enabled
Disabled
Digital input 6
Inversion in 6
U16
Enabled
Disabled
Digital input 5
Inversion in 5
Disabled
(0)
139
Enabled
Disabled
Digital input 4
Inversion in 4
Disabled
(0)
1
0
R/Z
Enabled
Disabled
Digital input 3
Inversion in 3
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
1
0
416
169
649
Float*
Float*
U16
600
150
0
9999
9999
1
1024
1024
Disabled
(0)
1024
1024
Disabled
(0)
652
U16
Disabled
(0)
Disabled
(0)
TPD32-EV
0
2
3
4
5
R/Z
R/Z
R/W
1
0
R/W
1
0
Value
Parameter
Auto capture
No.
Format
388
U16
ON
OFF
Enable spd adap
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
ADD SPEED FUNCT
OFF
(0)
OFF
(0)
ADD SPEED FUNCT \ Adaptive spd reg
181
U16
Disabled
Disabled
182
U16
Speed
Speed
Adap reference [FF]

Adap selector
Adap speed 1 [%]
Adap speed 2 [%]
Adap joint 1 [%]
Adap joint 2 [%]
Adap P gain 1 [%]
Adap I gain 1 [%]
Adap P gain 2 [%]
Adap I gain 2 [%]
Adap P gain 3 [%]
Adap I gain 3 [%]
Adap P gain 4 [%]
Adap I gain 4 [%]
183
1464
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
1462
1463
I16
U16
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
-32768
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
+32767
3
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
1000
0
20.3
40.7
6.1
6.1
10.00
1.00
10.00
1.00
10.00
1.00
10.00
1.00
1000
0
20.3
40.7
6.1
6.1
10.00
1.00
10.00
1.00
10.00
1.00
10.00
1.00

Spd threshold
101
102
103
393
U16
U16
U16
U16
1
1
0
0
32767
32767
65535
1
1000
1000
100
1000
1000
100
Set error [FF]

Set delay [ms]
Set speed
104
105
394
U16
U16
U16
1
1
0
32767
65535
1
100
100
100
100

Speed zero thr
107
108
395
U16
U16
U16
10
100
Select adap type
Enabled
Disabled
Speed
Adap reference
Parameter
Speed exceeded
Speed not exceeded
Speed not ref. val.

Speed = ref. val.
Drive not rotating

Drive rotating
ADD SPEED FUNCT \ Speed control
ADD SPEED FUNCT \ Speed zero

1
0
0
32767
65535
1
10
100
Instruction manual
R/W
ID
1
0
H
L
R/Z
1
0
R/Z
0
1
2
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
IA
-
R/W
-
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
0
1
R/W
R/W
R
0
1
QD
L
H
QD
L
H
R
0
1
R
0
1
R/W
R/W
R
0
1
QD
L
H
R
0
1
453
Value
Parameter
Enable motor pot
Disabled
Config1
Config2
No.
Format
246
I16
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
FUNCTIONS \ Motor pot

0
Disabled
Disabled
Motor pot oper

MPot Lower Limit [rpm]
MPot Upper Limit [rpm]
MPot Acc Time [s]
MPot Dec Time [s]
MPot Mode
Ramp & LastVal
Ramp & Follow
Fine & LastVal
Fine & Follow
PowerOn Cfg

Last Power Off
Zero

Lower Limit
Upper Limit
Reset Cfg
None
Inp Zero
Inp Low Limit
Inp Ref Zero
Inp Ref Low Lim
Out Zero
Out Low Limit
Out Ref Zero
Out Ref Low Lim
Inp Up Limit
Inp Ref Up Lim
Inp Freeze
Motor pot out [rpm]
Motor pot sign
247
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
0
0
0
0
-
8000
8000
65535
65535
-
0
1000
10
10
-
0
1000
10
10
-
1535
U16
1536
U16
1537
248
I16
I16
Positive
Positive
Motor pot reset

Motor pot up
249
396
U16
U16
Motor pot down
397
U16
Enable jog
244
I16
265
375
Jog reference [FF]

Jog +
Jog -
Positive
Negative
No acceleration
Acceleration
No deceleration
Deceleration
Jog operation
Jog selection
Enabled
Disabled
Speed input
Ramp input
No jog forwards
Forwards jog
No backwards jog
Backwards jog
Enab multi spd
Enabled
Disabled
Multi speed 1 [FF]

Multi speed 2 [FF]
Multi speed 3 [FF]
454
FUNCTIONS \ Jog function

0
Disabled
Disabled
U16
266
398
I16
U16
0
0
32767
1
399
U16
153
I16
154
155
156
I16
I16
I16
FUNCTIONS \ Multi speed fct

0
Disabled
Disabled
-32768
-32768
-32768
+32767
+32767
+32767
0
0
0
0
0
0
TPD32-EV
R/Z
0
1
2
R/W
0
1
2
3
R/W
0
1
2
3
R/W
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
R
R/W
1
0
Z/C(1)
R/W
0
1
R/W
0
1
R/Z
1
0
R/Z
0
1
R/W
R/W
0
1
R/W
0
1
R/Z
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
ID
ID (H)
ID
L
H
ID
L
H
R/W
0
1
R/W
0
1
IA
ID
L
H
ID
L
H
R/W
0
1
R/W
0
1
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
Multi speed 4 [FF]

Multi speed 5 [FF]
Multi speed 6 [FF]
Multi speed 7 [FF]
Speed sel 0
157
158
159
160
400
Speed sel 1
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
min
max
I16
I16
I16
I16
U16
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
0
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
401
U16
Speed sel 2
402
U16
Multispeed sel
208
U16
Enab multi rmp
243
I16
202
U16
Value 20 not selected

Value 20 selected
Value 21 selected
Value 22 selected
Ramp selector
Enabled
Disabled
FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct

0
Disabled
Disabled
FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 0 \ Acceleration 0

659
660
665

661
662
666

23
24
667

31
32
668

25
26
669

33
34
670

27
28
671

Ramp sel 0
35
36
672
403
U32
U16
Float
U16
0
0
100
0
232-1
65535
3000
1
100
1
300
0
100
1
300
0
Ramp sel 1
404
U16

Value 20 selected
Value 21 selected
U32
U16
Float
0
0
100
232-1
65535
3000
100
1
300
100
1
300
FUNCTIONS \ Multi ramp fct \ Ramp 0 \ Deceleration 0

U32
U16
Float
0
0
100
232-1
65535
3000
100
1
300
100
1
300

U32
U16
Float
0
0
100
232-1
65535
3000
100
1
300
100
1
300

U32
U16
Float
0
0
100
232-1
65535
3000
100
1
300
100
1
300

U32
U16
Float
0
0
100
232-1
65535
3000
100
1
300
100
1
300

U32
U16
Float
0
0
100
232-1
65535
3000
100
1
300
100
1
300

U32
U16
Float
0
0
100
232-1
65535
3000
100
1
300
100
1
300
Instruction manual
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
ID
L
H
ID
L
H
ID
L
H
ID
R/W
0
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
R/Z
1
0
R/W
ID
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
1
R/W
0
1
ID
L
H
ID
L
H
R/W
0
1
R/W
0
1
455
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
Speed ratio
Speed draw out (d)
Speed draw out (%)
1017
1018
1019
I16
I16
Float
Enable overload
309
I16
318

Base current [%]
Overload time [s]
Ventil. Type
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
FUNCTIONS \ Speed draw

0
-32768
-200.0
+32767
+32767
+200.0
+10000
-
FUNCTIONS \ Overload contr
+10000
-
R/W
R
R
IA
QA
-
R/W
R/W
-
Enabled
Disabled
U16
I2t Motor
Curr
limited
312
313
U16
U16
P313
0
150
100
100
80
SERVO
AUTO
Derating factor [%]
Motor ovrld preal.
Motor I2t accum
Drive ovrld preal.
Drive I2t accum
Pause time [s]
Overld available
310
914
U16
U16
0
0
200
P312
< 100
65535
1
R/Z
1
0
R/W
0
1
2
3
4
R/W
R/W
60
Servo
R/W
R/Z
915
1289
655
1438
1439
311
406
U16
U16
Float
U16
FLOAT
U16
U16
0
0
0,00
0
0,00
0
0
100
1
100,00
1
100,00
65535
1
50
540
-
30
Servo
0
1
50
300
-
Overload state
407
U16
R/Z
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
0
1
R
0
1
QD
L
H
QD
L
H
R
0
1
R
0
1
Stop mode
626
U16
Stop &
Speed 0
Stop &
Speed 0
R/Z
0
0
OFF
0
0
OFF
Disabled
30
3000
75
1000
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Overload mode
Enabled
Disabled
Curr limited
Curr not limited
I2t Motor
I2t Drive
I2t Motor & Drv

Overload possible
Current limit value
Current > limit value
OFF
Stop & speed 0
Fast stp & spd 0
Fst / stp & spd 0

Jog stop control
627
628
630
U16
U16
U16
Enable Torque pr
Closing speed [rpm]
Torque delay [ms]
Torque proving [%]
Actuator delay [ms]
1295
1262
1293
1294
1266
I16
U16
I16
I16
U16
I/n curve
750
I/n lim 0 [%]

I/n lim 1 [%]
I/n lim 2 [%]
I/n lim 3 [%]
I/n lim 4 [%]
I/n speed [rpm]
456
OFF
ON
Enabled
Disabled
FUNCTIONS \ Stop control

0
0
0
0
40000
40000
1
FUNCTIONS \Brake control

0
0
0
0
0
1
200
30000
200
30000
Disabled
30
3000
75
1000
FUNCTIONS \ I/n curve (Taper curr lim)
0
1
2
3
R/W
R/W
R/Z
0
1
U16
751
752
753
754
U16
U16
U16
U16
0
0
0
0
200
200
200
200
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/Z
1
0
R/Z
R/Z
R/Z
R/Z
755
756
U16
U16
0
0
200
P162
0
0
0
0
R/Z
R/Z
TPD32-EV
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
Generator access
58
U16
Gen frequency [Hz]

Gen amplitude [%]
59
60
61
Float
Float
Float
0.1
0
-200.00
62.5
200.00
+200.00
Save parameters
Load default
Life time [h.min]
Failure register
Failure text
Failure hour
Failure minute
Failure code
256
258
235
330
327
328
329
417
U16
U16
Float
U16
Text
U16
U16
U16
Failure reset
Failure reg del
262
263
U16
U16
Source
Destination
Mul gain
Div gain
Input max
Input min
Input offset
Output offset
Inp absolute
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
U16
U16
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
U16
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
U16
U16
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Not connected
T current ref
Flux ref
Ramp ref
Speed ref
Failure supply
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Overcurrent
Heatsink
Hardware
DSP error
Interrupt error
Speed fbk
External fault
Overtemp motor
Field loss
Bus loss
Hw opt 1 failure
Opt2
Unknown
Enable seq err
Source
Destination
Mul gain
Div gain
Input max
Input min
Input offset
Output offset
OFF
ON
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
SPEC FUNCTIONS \ Test generator
Not conn. Not conn.
0.1
0
0
0.1
0
0
SPEC FUNCTIONS
0.00
1
65535.00
10
0
0
0
65535
59
65535
10
10
SPEC FUNCTIONS \ Links \ Link 1

0
0
-10000
-10000
-231
-231
-231
-231
0
65535
65535
+10000
+10000
231-1
231-1
231-1
231-1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
OFF
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
OFF

0
0
-10000
-10000
-231
-231
-231
-231
65535
65535
+10000
+10000
231-1
231-1
231-1
231-1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
Instruction manual
R/Z
0
2
3
4
5
R/W
R/W
R/W
C/W(1)
Z/C(1)
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
5100h
3120h
3310h
2300h
4210h
5000h
6110h
6120h
7301h
9000h
4310h
3330h
8110h
7510h
7400h
1001h
9009h
Z/C (1)
C
ID (H)
-
W
-
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
457
Value
Parameter
Inp absolute
OFF
ON
Source
Destination
Mul gain
Div gain
Input max
Input min
Input offset
Output offset
Inp absolute
No.
Format
561
U16
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
U16
U16
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
U16
ON
OFF
Source
Destination
Mul gain
Div gain
Input max
Input min
Input offset
Output offset
Inp absolute
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
ON
OFF
Source
Destination
Mul gain
Div gain
Input max
Input min
Input offset
Output offset
Inp absolute
1236
1237
1238
1239
1240
1241
1242
1243
1244
ON
OFF
Source
Destination
Mul gain
Div gain
Input max
Input min
Input offset
Output offset
Inp absolute
1245
1246
1247
1248
1249
1250
1251
1252
1253
ON
OFF
Pad 0
458
503
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
OFF
OFF
R/W
0
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
IA, QA
R/W

0
0
-10000
-10000
-231
-231
-231
-231
0
65535
65535
+10000
+10000
231-1
231-1
231-1
231-1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
OFF
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
OFF
0
1
0
U16
U16
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
U16
0
0
-10000
-10000
-231
-231
-231
-231
0
65535
65535
+10000
+10000
231-1
231-1
231-1
231-1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
OFF
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
OFF
0
1
0
U16
U16
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
U16
0
0
-10000
-10000
-231
-231
-231
-231
0
65535
65535
+10000
+10000
231-1
231-1
231-1
231-1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
OFF
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
OFF
0
0
0
-10000
-10000
-231
-231
-231
-231
0
65535
65535
+10000
+10000
231-1
231-1
231-1
231-1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
OFF
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
OFF
0
-32768
+32767
TPD32-EV
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
1
0
SPEC FUNCTIONS \ Pad Parameters
I16
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
1
0
U16
U16
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
U16
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Value
Parameter
Pad 1
Pad 2
Pad 3
Pad 4
Pad 5
Pad 6
Pad 7
Pad 8
Pad 9
Pad 10
Pad 11
Pad 12
Pad 13
Pad 14
Pad 15
Bitword pad A
Pad A Bit 0
Pad A Bit 1
Pad A Bit 2
Pad A Bit 3
Pad A Bit 4
Pad A Bit 5
Pad A Bit 6
Pad A Bit 7
Pad A Bit 8
Pad A Bit 9
Pad A Bit 10
Pad A Bit 11
Pad A Bit 12
Pad A Bit 13
Pad A Bit 14
Pad A Bit 15
Bitword pad B
Pad B Bit 0
Pad B Bit 1
Pad B Bit 2
Pad B Bit 3
Pad B Bit 4
Pad B Bit 5
Pad B Bit 6
Pad B Bit 7
Pad B Bit 8
Pad B Bit 9
Pad B Bit 10
Pad B Bit 11
Pad B Bit 12
Pad B Bit 13
Pad B Bit 14
Pad B Bit 15
No.
Format
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
min
max
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
+32767
65535
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
65535
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Instruction manual
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
IA, QA
IA
IA
QA
QA
QA
ID*, QD*
ID, QD
ID, QD
ID, QD
ID, QD
ID, QD
ID, QD
ID, QD
ID, QD
QD*
QD*
QD*
QD*
QD*
QD*
QD*
QD*
QD*
QD
QD
QD
QD
QD
QD
QD
QD
QD*
QD*
QD*
QD*
QD*
QD*
QD*
QD*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
-
459
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
OPTIONS \ Option 1
Accessible only with optional Field Bus card (see Bus card user manual)
OPTIONS \ Option 2
Accessible only with optional APC300 card (see APC300 card user manual)
Menu
425
U16
0
1
Disable
Disable
R/Z
Enable OPT2
1
0
Enabled
Disabled
Enable PI PID
OPTIONS \ PID
769
U16
770
U16
Enable PI-PD PID
1258
U16
PID source
PID source gain
Feed-fwd PID
786
787
758
U16
Float
I16
PID error
PID feed-back
PID offs. Sel
759
763
762
I16
I16
U16
760
761
1046
1047
757
I16
I16
Float
Float
I16
PI P gain PID
PI I gain PID
PI steady thr
PI steady delay
P init gain PID
I init gain PID
PI central v sel
PI central v1
765
764
695
731
793
734
779
776
Float
Float
I16
U16
Float
Float
U16
Float
PI central v2
777
Float
PI central v3
778
Float
PI top lim
784
Float
PI bottom lim
PI integr freeze
785
783
Float
U16
0.00
0.00
0
0
0.00
0.00
0
PI bottom lim
PI bottom lim
PI bottom lim
PI bottom lim
-10.00
0
771
I16
Real FF PID
418
I16
PD P gain 1 PID [%]

PD D gain 1 PID [%]
768
766
Enable PD PID
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PID offset 0
PID offset 1
PID acc time
PID dec time
PID clamp
Offset 0
Offset 1
PI output PID
460
OFF
ON
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disabled
0
Disabled
0
0
1.000
0
OPTIONS \ PID \ PID source

0
65535
-100.000 +100.00
-10000 +10000
0
1.000
0
OPTIONS \ PID \ PID references
Float
Float
R/W
1
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
1
0
ID
R/W
ID
R/W
ID
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
IA
IA
ID
R
R/W
R/W
IA
-
R/W
-
-10000
-10000
0
+10000
+10000
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
-10000
-10000
0.0
0.0
-10000
+10000
+10000
900.0
900.0
+10000
0
0
0.0
0.0
10000
0
0
0.0
0.0
10000
R
R/W
R/W
0
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
OPTIONS \ PID \ PI controls
-10000
100.00
100.00
10000
60000
100.00
100.00
3
PI top
lim
PI top
Lim
PI top
Lim
10.00
10.00
10.00
0
0
10.00
10.00
1
1.00
10.00
10.00
0
0
10.00
10.00
1
1.00
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
ID
-
R/W
-
1.00
1.00
R/W
1.00
1.00
R/W
IA
10.00
10.00
R/W
PI top lim
1
0.0
0
0.0
0
ID
R/W
1000 x
PI top
limit
+10000
1000
1000
R/W
R/W
0
1
R
R/W
10.00
1.00
R/W
R/W
OPTIONS \ PID \ PD control

0.00
0.00
100.00
100.00
10.00
1.00
TPD32-EV
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
PD P gain 2 PID [%]

PD D gain 2 PID [%]
PD P gain 3 PID [%]
PD D gain 3 PID[%]
PD output PID
PID out sign PID
788
789
790
791
767
421
772
PID output
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
min
max
Float
Float
Float
Float
U16
I16
U16
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0
-10000
0
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
1000
+10000
1
10.00
1.00
10.00
1.00
0
0
1
10.00
1.00
10.00
1.00
0
0
1
774
I16
-10000
+10000
PID target
PID out scale
782
773
U16
Float
Diameter calc
794
U16

Max deviation
Gear box ratio
795
796
797
798
799
Positive
Bipolar
OPTIONS \ PID \ PID target

0
-100.000
65535
-100.000
0
1.000
OPTIONS \ PID \ Diameter calc
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
0
1
R
QA
0
1.000
R/W
R/W
ID
R/W
I16
I16
Float
U16
U16
-100
0
0.001
1
1
+100
+10000
1.000
10000
2000
0
8000
1.000
1
1
0
8000
1.000
1
1
Z/R
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PI central vs0
PI central vs1
Diameter calc st
780
781
800
U16
U16
U16
0
0
0
1
0
0
R/W
R/W
R
ID
ID
QD
R/W
R/W
R
Torque winder En
1209
U16
Disabled
0
R/W
ID
R/W
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Roll diameter [m]

Line speed [%]
Ref line speed [%]
Diam calc Dis
Diam inc/dec En
Wind/unwind
OPTIONS \ PID
1
1
1
OPTIONS \ TORQUE WINDER

0
Disabled
0
1
0
OPTIONS \ TORQUE WINDER \ Diam Calculatio
1154
1160
1286
1161
Float
Float
Float
U16
0.000
0.00
0.00
0
32.000
200.00
200.00
1
ON
OFF
1205
U16
Enabled
Disabled
1187
U16
Unwinder
Winder

Line spd source
Ref spd source
Line speed gain
Ref speed gain
Base omega [rpm]
Ref speed thr [%]
Diam filter [ms]
1
0
0
799
1153
1204
1284
1156
1285
1163
1155
1162
1206
1207
U16
Float
U16
U16
I16
I16
U16
Float
U16
U16
U16
1
0.000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2000
32.000
65535
65535
32767
32767
8191
150.00
5000
5000
60000
R
R
R
R/W
QA
ID
R/W
ID
R/W
ON
(1)
ON
(1)
Enabled
(0)
Enabled
(0)
1
0
R/W
Winder
(0)
Winder
(0)
1
0
R/W
ID
R/W
100
1.000
0
0
0
0
1500
5
100
100
0
100
1.000
0
0
0
0
1500
5
100
100
0
1
0
R/Z
R/Z
R/Z
R/Z
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Instruction manual
461
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
Diam reset
Diam thr [%]
Diam reached
Diam preset sel
Diam preset 0 [m]
Diam preset 1 [m]
Diam preset 2 [m]
Diam preset 3 [m]
1157
1158
1159
1168
1164
1165
1166
1167
U16
Float
U16
U16
Float
Float
Float
Float
Tension ref [%]

Tension scale [%]
Act tension ref [%]
Torque current [%]
1180
1181
1194
1193
Int acc calc En
min
max
0
0
0
0
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
1
150.00
1
3
32.000
32.000
32.000
32.000
0
10
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
ID
QD
ID
IA
R/W
R
-
Float
I16
Float
Float
0.00
0
0.00
0.00
199.99
200
199.99
200.00
0
100
0
100
R/W
R/W
R
R
IA
QA
OPTIONS \ TORQUE WINDER \ Torque calculat \ Comp calculat

1183

Acc/dec filter [ms]
Line acc [%]
Line dec [%]
Line fast stop [%]
Line acc status
Line dec status
Line fstp status
Variable J comp [%]
Constant J comp [%]
Act var J comp [%]
Mat width [%]
Static f [%]
Dinamic f [%]
Static f Zero
U16
1182
1212
1184
1185
1186
1188
1189
1190
1171
1172
1192
1191
1173
1174
1175
1287
Float
U16
Float
Float
Float
U16
U16
U16
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
U16
0.15
0
0.00
0.00
0.00
0
0
0
0.00
-100.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0
300.00
5000
100.00
100.00
100.00
1
1
1
199.99
+100.00
200.00
200.00
100.00
199.99
199.99
1
Enabled
Disabled
Actual comp [%]

Closed loop En
1213
1214
I16
U16
-200
0
+200
1
Enabled
Disabled
1208
I16
-32767
Enabled
(1)
Enabled
(1)
R/Z
9.01
30
100
100
100
OFF
OFF
OFF
0
0
0
0
100
0
0
Disabled
(0)
9.01
30
100
100
100
OFF
OFF
OFF
0
0
0
0
100
0
0
Disabled
(0)
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
ID
ID
ID
-
R/W
R/W
R/W
-
Disabled
(0)
Disabled
(0)
1
0
R
R/Z
QD
-
R/Z
1
0
R
+32767
OPTIONS \ TORQUE WINDER \ Torque calculat \ Taper function
Taper enable
1176
U16
Enabled
Disabled
Init diameter [m]

Final diameter [m]
Tension ref [%]
Tension red [%]
Act tension ref [%]
1177
1178
1180
1179
1194
Speed demand En
1215
Enabled
Disabled
462
0
10
OPTIONS \ TORQUE WINDER \ Torque calculat
Enabled
Disabled
Close loop comp
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
Float
Float
Float
Float
Float
0.000
0.000
0.00
0.00
0.00
32.000
32.000
199.99
199.99
200.00
Disabled
(0)
Disabled
(0)
R/W
ID
R/W
0.1
1
0
0
0
0.1
1
0
0
0
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
IA
IA
QA
R/W
R/W
OPTIONS \ TORQUE WINDER \ Speed demand

U16
Disabled
(0)
Disabled
(0)
TPD32-EV
1
0
Value
Parameter
Winder side
W gain [%]
Speed match
No.
Format
1201
U16
min
max
Down
Up
1202
1195
U16
U16
0
0
100
1
ON
OFF
Spd match gain [%]

Spd match acc [s]
Spd match dec [s]
Spd match compl
W offset [rpm]
Offset acc time [s]
W target
W reference [rpm]
Jog TW enable
1200
1196
1197
1203
1216
1199
1198
1210
1217
1256
U16
Float
Float
U16
U16
I16
Float
U16
I16
U16
0
0.30
0.30
0
0
0
0.30
0
-8192
0
150
300.00
300.00
1
200
1000
950.00
65535
+8192
1
Enabled
Disabled
Jog TW speed [%]
1255
I16
100
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
Up
(0)
Up
(0)
R/W
ID
R/W
0
OFF
(0)
0
OFF
(0)
1
0
R/W
R/W
ID
R/W
100
83.88
83.88
100
83.88
83.88
100
0
83.88
0
100
0
83.88
0
Disabled
(0)
Disabled
(0)
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/Z
R
R/W
QD
QA
ID
R
R/W
1
0
R/W
Instruction manual
463
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
Malfunction code
57
I16
Control word
Status word
Speed ref var [FF]
55
56
44
115
119
U16
U16
I16
I16
I16

1
2
U32
U32
Speed min pos [FF]

Speed max pos [FF]
Speed min neg [FF]
Speed max neg [FF]
5
3
6
4
U32
U32
U32
U32

Acc delta time [s]
21
22
U32
U16

Dec delta time [s]
29
30
U32
U16

QStp delta time [s]
Quick stop
37
38
343
U32
U16
U16
Failure supply
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Overcurrent
Heatsink
Hardware
DSP error
Interrupt error
Speed fbk loss
External fault
Overtemp motor
Field loss
Bus loss
Hw opt 1 failure
Opt2
Unknown
Enable seq err
SSC Error
Quick stop
No Quick stop
Face value num

Face value den
54
53
I16
I16
Dim factor num

Dim factor den
Dim factor text
50
51
52
I32***
I32***
Text

Percent ref var [%]
Act percentage [%]
45
46
116
120
U32***
I16
I16
I16
464
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
DRIVECOM
0
0
-2 P45
-32768
-32768
65535
65535
+2 P45
+32767
+32767
0
-
DRIVECOM \ Speed amount

0
0
232-1
232-1
0
5000
DRIVECOM \ Speed min/max

0
0
0
0
232-1
232-1
232-1
232-1
0
5000
0
5000
DRIVECOM \ Acceleration
0
0
232-1
65535
100
1
DRIVECOM \ Deceleration
0
0
232-1
65535
100
1
R
5100h
3120h
3310h
2300h
4210h
5000h
6110h
6120h
7301h
9000h
4310h
3330h
8110h
7510h
7400h
1001h
9009h
8100h
R/W
R
R/W
R
R
0
-
5100h
3120h
3310h
2300h
4210h
5000h
6110h
6120h
7301h
9000h
4310h
3330h
8110h
7510h
7400h
1001h
9009h
8100h
IA, QA
-
R/W
R
R/W
R
R
0
5000
R/Z
R/Z
0
5000
0
5000
R/Z
R/Z
R/Z
R/Z
100
1
R/W
R/W
100
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
DRIVECOM \ Quick stop

0
0
0
232-1
65535
1
1000
1000
1
1
No Quick No Quick
stop
stop
DRIVECOM \ Face value fact

1
1
32767
32767
1
1
1
1
R/Z
R/Z
R
R
1
1
rpm
1
1
rpm
R/Z
R/Z
R/Z
R
R
-
1500
0
1500
0
R/Z
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
DRIVECOM \ Dimension fact

1
1
65535
231-1
DRIVECOM
1
-32768
-32768
-32768
16383
+32767
+32767
+32767
0
1
TPD32-EV
Value
Parameter
Password 2
No.
Format
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
SERVICE
* When the parameter is accessed by Opt2-A/PDC the format is U16

** When the parameter is accessed by Opt2-A/PDC the format is I16
*** When the parameter is accessed by Opt2-A/PDC the lower word of the parameter is considered
Instruction manual
465
10.2 LIST OF HIGH PRIORITY PARAMETERS

When a APC300 cards is used a subset of the TPD32-EV parameters can be exchanged with the optional card
through the automatic synchronous communication. For more details see the APC300 technical documentation.
Parameter
T current lim + [CURR]
T current lim - [CURR]
In use Tcur lim+ [CURR]
In use Tcur lim- [CURR]
Current lim red [CURR]
T current ref 1 [CURR]
T current ref 2 [CURR]
T current ref [CURR]
Speed ref 1 [SPD]
Speed ref 2 [SPD]
Ramp ref 1 [SPD]
Ramp ref 2 [SPD]
Control word
Status word
Ramp ref [SPD]
Ramp outp [SPD]
Speed ref [SPD]
Actual spd [SPD]
Adap reference [SPD]
Enc 1 position [ENC_PLS] *
Enc 2 position [ENC_PLS] *
Enc 1 last time [ENC_TIM] *
Enc 1 last time high [ENC_TIM] *
Enc 2 last time {ENC_TIM] *
Enc 2 last time high {ENC_TIM] *
Speed reg output [CURR]
Lock speed reg
Enc 2 speed [SPD] *
Enc 1 speed [SPD] *
Flux current max
Flux reference
Pad 0
Pad 1
Pad 2
Pad 3
Pad 4
Pad 5
Pad 6
Pad 7
Pad 8
Pad 9
Pad 10
Pad 11
Pad 12
Pad 13
Pad 14
Pad 15
Bitword pad A
Bitword pad B
Dig input term
Dig output term
466
No.
Format
8
9
10
11
13
39
40
41
42
43
44
48
55
56
110
113
118
122
183
197
198
204
205
206
207
236
322
420
427
467
500
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
536
564
581
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
U16
U16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
U32
U16
U32
U16
I16
U16
I16
I16
U16
U16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
U16
U16
U16
U16
Value
min
0
0
0
0
0
-2 * TOP_CURR
-2 * TOP_CURR
-2 * TOP_CURR
-32767
-32767
-32767
-32767
max
2 * TOP_CURR
2 * TOP_CURR
2 * TOP_CURR
2 * TOP_CURR
2 * TOP_CURR
+2 * TOP_CURR
+2 * TOP_CURR
+2 * TOP_CURR
32767
32767
32767
32767
factory
TOP_CURR
TOP_CURR
TOP_CURR
0
0
0
0
0
0
-32767
-32767
-32767
-32767
-32767
-32767
-32767
0
0
0
0
-2 * TOP_CURR
0
-37767
-37767
819
0
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
0
0
0
0
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
232-1
65535
232-1
65535
+2 * TOP_CURR
1
32767
32767
16384
16384
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
65535
65535
65535
65535
4000
0
16384
16384
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TPD32-EV
Read/
Write
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
Load comp [CURR]

Ind store ctrl
Index storing
Out vlt level
F act speed (rpm) [spd]
F act speed (d) [spd]
F T curr % [curr]
Speed ratio
Spd draw out (d) [SPD]
698
912
913
921
924
925
928
1017
1018
I16
U16
U16
U16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
-2 * TOP_CURR
0
0
0
-32768
-32768
-2 * TOP_CURR
0
-32768
+2 * TOP_CURR
65535
+232-1
16384
32767
32767
+2 * TOP_CURR
32767
32767
0
16384
+10000
-
R
R/W
R
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R
Note !
1) [SPD] = Speed settings are xpressed in RPM * 4
2) [CURR] = Current settings are expressed in European Drive rated current / 2000 = Motor
Amps (2000 is TOP_CURR)
3) [ENC_PLS] = Encoders positions are expressed in pulses * 4
4) [ENC_TIM] = Encoders last time (s) are expressed in 50ns units (1=50nS)
5) Encoder 2 parameters (marked with * in the table) can be read by the APC300 only if
the parameter Speed fbk sel = encoder 2
6) Encoder 1 parameters (marked with * in the table) can be read by the APC300 only if
- the parameter Speed fbk sel = encoder 2 and
- a digital encoder is used as encoder 1 (interfacing with the converter by means of
the DEII card)
7) Speed reg output [%] contains valid information even if the speed regulator is disabled
(Enable speed reg = Disabled). If Speed reg output is enabled, it contains the sum of actual
speed regulator output and T current ref 2.
Instruction manual
467
11 - REPLACEMENT PARTS
11.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
The functionality and use of the TPD32-EV converter are the same for the whole device range. Different power
and control cards are mounted depending on the output rated current. The following table indicates the card
range for each converter type.
Function
Regulation
Power /
Control
Supply
Field
Filter
Snubber
Fan control
Type
Drawing
Converter construction type

CU
A1
A2
A3
R-TPD32-EV
ESE 4155
FIR1-.. (-2B/4B)
ESE 2135
FIR1-..-FC (-2B/4B) ESE 4188
FIR2-.. (-2B/4B)
ESE 2238
FIR2-..-FC (-2B)
FIR2-..-FC (-4B)
ESE 4823
ESE 4351
FIR3-32 (-2B/4B)
ESE 2260
FIR-D-.. (-2B/4B)
ESE 5313
FIR-.P-..
ESE 5534
PBB (-2B/-4B)
ESE 2275
SW1-31
ESE 2192
SW2-32
ESE 2239
SW3-32
ESE 2239
PFC1A-32
ESE 2213
PFC2-31
ESE 2271
SN-FCC
ESE 5697
X (*)
PFC40/70
ESE 2374
SN-FC
ESE 2265
X (**)
FL-31
ESE 2253
X (**)
FL-57
FL-69
ESE 5694
X (*)
CFS-..
ESE 5301
CFSF-..
ESE 5320
SN.-31
ESE 2246
X (**)
X (**)
SN7-3.
ESE 5549
X (*)
X (*)
FNLS3
ESE 5998
(*): TPD32-EV-575/...-... , TPD32-EV-690/...-...

(**): TPD32-EV-500/...-...
Important note:
468
When the FIR card is replaced, switches S3 and S4 must be set according to the size of
the converter, see the following pages.
TPD32-EV
Figure 11.3.1: FIR1-... power/driver cards
4B only
Table 11.3.1-A: Selection of dip-switches S3-XX and S4-XX for FIR1-cards

Dip-switch
TPD32-EVStandard
20
40
70
110
140
185
American
17
35
56
88
112
148
S3-1
S3-2
ON
ON
S3-3
S3-4
S3-6
S3-7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Dip-switch
S3-5
S3-8
S4-1
S4-2
S4-3
S4-4
S4-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S4-6
S4-7
S4-8
ON
ON
Table 11.3.1-B: Selection of dip-switches S3-XX and S4-XX for FIR1--FC cards
TPD32-EV-FC-A
20
40
70
110
140
185
S3-1
ON
ON
S3-2
S3-3
Dip-switch
S3-4
S3-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
S3-6
S3-7
S3-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S4-1
Dip-switch
S4-2
S4-3
TA
S4-4
200/0.1
(ETI1188)
ON
ON
Figure 11.3.2: FIR2-... power/driver card
4B only
Table 11.3.2-A: Selection of dip-switches S3-XX and S4-XX for FIR2-X-cards

TPD32-EVStandard
American
280
224
350
280
420
336
500
400
650
450
S3-1
S3-2
S3-3
Dip-switch
S3-4
S3-5
ON
S3-6
S3-7
S3-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
S4-1
ON
S4-2
ON
ON
ON
S4-3
Dip-switch
S4-4
S4-5
ON
ON
S4-6
ON
ON
S4-7
S4-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Table 11.3.2-B: Selection of TPD32-EV-FC for FIR2-X--FC cards

TPD32-EV-FC-B
280
350
420
500
650
R1
Not mounted
R2
CUT
CUT
CUT
CUT
5R36
Resistors
R3
5R36
5R36
5R36
5R36
CUT
R4
5R36
5R36
5R36
5R36
5R36
Instruction manual
R5
5R36
5R36
5R36
5R36
5R36
T/A
1:3000
469
Figure 11.3.3: FIR3-32 power/driver card
4B only
Table 11.3.3: Selection of dip-switches S3-XX and S4-XX for FIR3-32- cards.
TPD32-EVStandard
American
560
360
700
490
770
560
900
650
1000
750
1050
850
S3-1
S3-2
Dip-switch
S3-4
S3-5
ON
ON
S3-3
ON
ON
ON
S3-6
S3-7
S3-8
S4-1
S4-2
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S4-3
ON
Dip-switch
S4-4
S4-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
S4-6
ON
ON
S4-7
ON
S4-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S4-7
S4-8
Figure 11.3.4: FIR3-D power/driver card.
Table 11.3.4: Selection of dip-switches S3-XX and S4-XX for FIR3-D- cards.
TPD32-EVStandard
American
1300
920/980
1400
1000
1600
1200
1900
1450
2000
1500
2100
1650
2300
1800
2400
1850
S3-1
S3-2
Dip-switch
S3-4
S3-5
S3-3
ON
ON
ON
ON
S3-6
ON
ON
ON
S3-7
ON
ON
ON
S3-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
S4-1
S4-2
ON
ON
S4-3
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Dip-switch
S4-4
S4-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S4-6
ON
ON
ON
Figure 11.3.5: FIR4/5P-XX power/driver card
S1
SW4
S1
From FIR4/5P-XX
revision D
S2
S9
From FIR4/5P-XX
revision D
S9
Table 11.3.5: Selection of Dip-switch S2 (FIR4/5P-XX)
State of S2
470
One CU controlling one external bridge
One CU controlling two external bridges
Closed (default)
Cut
TPD32-EV
Table 11.3.6: Selection of dip-switches S3-XX and S4-XX for FIR4/5P-XX cards.
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S15-6
S15-5
S15-4
S15-7
IPA
464
S15-8
S15-7
S15-6
S15-5
S15-4
S15-3
S15-2
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
Instruction manual
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S15-7
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
S15-6
ON
ON
S15-5
S14-6
S14-5
S14-1
S14-4
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
set to
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S15-8
ON ON ON
ON ON ON
SW4-8
SW4-6
SW4-7
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON
IPA
464
Dip-switch
S15-4
ON
ON
set to
S15-8
S15-7
S15-6
S15-5
S15-4
S15-1
S15-2
S15-2
S15-1
S15-1
ON
ON
S15-3
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW4-5
SW4-4
SW4-3
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
S15-2
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW4-2
SW4-1
SW3-4
SW3-3
SW3-2
SW3-1
J5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S14-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Dip-switch
S14-3
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
On board R-TPD32-EV
Dip-switch
S14-2
TPD32-EV-690/720-1010-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-900-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1400-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-1150-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-1700-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-1350-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-2000-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-1500-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-2400-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-1800-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-2700-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-2000-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/720-3300-4B-E
TPD32-EV-690/720-2350-4B-E-NA
J4
S1
Drive 690Vac
4 quadrants
Dip-switch
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Dip-switch
S14-7
S14-6
S14-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S14-4
S14-1
SW4-8
SW4-7
SW4-6
SW4-5
SW4-4
SW4-3
ON ON ON
ON ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON ON
On board FIR5P-63
Jumper
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
S15-1
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
S14-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW4-2
SW4-1
SW3-4
SW3-3
SW3-2
SW3-1
J5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Dip-switch
S14-3
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
On board R-TPD32-EV
Dip-switch
S14-2
TPD32-EV-500/520-1500-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-1300-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-1700-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-1350-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-1500-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-2400-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-1800-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-2700-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-2000-4B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/520-3300-4B-E
TPD32-EV-500/520-2350-4B-E-NA
J4
S1
Drive 500Vac
4 quadrants
Dip-switch
S14-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
On board FIR4P-53
Jumper
S14-7
S14-6
S14-5
S14-4
S14-1
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
set to
ON ON ON
ON ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON
set to
ON
ON
SW4-8
SW4-7
SW4-6
ON
ON
IPA
464
S15-8
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW4-5
SW4-4
SW4-3
SW4-2
ON
ON
ON
ON
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
Dip-switch
S14-7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
Dip-switch
S14-3
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
On board R-TPD32-EV
Dip-switch
SW4-1
SW3-4
SW3-3
SW3-2
SW3-1
Dip-switch
S14-2
TPD32-EV-690/810-1010-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-900-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1400-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-1150-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-1700-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-1350-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-2000-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-1500-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-2400-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-1800-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-2700-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-2000-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-690/810-3300-2B-E
TPD32-EV-690/810-2350-2B-E-NA
J5
J4
S1
Jumper
ON
ON ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON ON ON
ON
ON ON ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
S15-3
On board FIR5P-63
Drive 690Vac
2 quadrants
S14-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
IPA
464
Dip-switch
S14-7
S14-6
S14-5
S14-3
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S14-4
S14-2
ON
ON ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON ON
ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
S14-1
SW4-6
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW4-8
SW4-5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON ON
ON ON ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW4-7
SW4-4
SW4-3
Dip-switch
SW4-2
SW3-4
SW3-3
SW3-2
J5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
On board R-TPD32-EV
Dip-switch
SW4-1
TPD32-EV-500/600-1200-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-1000-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1500-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-1300-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-1800-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-1400-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-1500-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2400-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-1800-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2700-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2000-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-2900-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2200-2B-E-NA
TPD32-EV-500/600-3300-2B-E
TPD32-EV-500/600-2350-2B-E-NA
SW3-1
J4
S1
Drive 500Vac
2 quadrants
Dip-switch
S15-3
On board FIR4P-53
Jumper
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
EU
AM
471
APPENDIX 1 - TPD32-EV-CU: CONTROL UNIT

General description
The TPD32-EV-CU- is an electronic control unit designed for use with one or more six-pulse two or fourquadrant power bridge SCR AC/DC converters. It is supplied as a stand-alone unit for systems that already have
a power bridge.
The control unit regulates the armature voltage and current, generates SCR gate command signals and also contains a 40 A or 70 A field power supply circuit. It is suitable for power bridges connected to a 230 VAC to 690
VAC 50/60 Hz three-phase voltage supply. It interfaces directly with the three-phase power line, the armature
voltage and armature current, measured by two current transducers that must be included on the power bridge.
It covers armature currents ranging from 4 Adc to 20,000 Adc.
Figure A1.1: Typical single-wire connection diagram
AC Mains
Pulse
transformers
REV
FWD
Current feedback
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TPD32-EV-CU-...
Gate signals
Gate signals
Field supply
Motor
Field
Speed feedback
472
40A or 70A
Field
Supply
C1 D1
DC feedback
DC Motor
KPT11
CT-U
and
CT-W
D
C
W
V
U
KP
AC feedback
KPT31
U1 V1
TPD32-EV
A1.1 Models available and main technical data

Type of
drive
Model name
[quadrants]
TPD32-EV-CU-230/500-THY1-40
TPD32-EV-CU-230/500-THY2-40
TPD32-EV-CU-230/500-THY1-70
TPD32-EV-CU-230/500-THY2-70
TPD32-EV-CU-575/690-THY1-40
TPD32-EV-CU-575/690-THY2-40
TPD32-EV-CU-575/690-THY1-70
TPD32-EV-CU-575/690-THY2-70
Rated Uln
Mains input
voltage
[Vac]
Armature
Rated Udn
Motor output
voltage
[Vdc]
3 x 230 / 400
/ 500
Rated Ifn
Motor field
output current
[Adc]
Field
Rated Ulfn
Mains input
voltage
[Vac]
Rated Udfn
Motor field
output voltage
[Vdc]
40
up to 600
70
Can be set to
between 4 and
20,000 A
2Q / 4Q
3 x 575 / 690
Rated Idn
Motor output
current
[Adc]
40
1 x 230 / 400
/ 460
200 / 310 / 360
up to 810
70
-THY1- models are suitable for controlling pulse transformers with one secondary winding; -THY2- models for controlling pulse transformers with two secondary windings.
Note !
A1.2 Connection cables supplied

All the models listed above are supplied with three cables for connection to the power bridge in standard situations. However, additional cables may be necessary in certain conditions. These are described below. The flow
chart and tables below will help you decide which control unit is the best for your particular application and
whether you need any additional cables.
Table A.1.2.1: Connection cables for TPD32-EV-CU-.
Name
Description
KP Connector Interface Cable

for TPD32-EV-CU
KPT31 Connector Interface
Cable for TPD32-EV-CU
KPT11 Connector Interface
KP Connector Adapter Cable
for TPD32-EV-CU
KPT11 Connector Adapter

Note !
Cable, 5-pin, AWG14, tot. length 2.5 m, sheathing for 1.5

m. Link between mains voltage and armature voltage. KP
connector
Cable, 3 twisted pairs, 6-pin, AWG18, tot. length 2.5 m,
sheathing for 1.5 m. Link between current sensors (CT) and
thermal contact on power bridge(s). KPT31 connector
Cable, 10-pin, AWG22, tot. length 2.5 m, sheathing for
1.5 m. Link between pulse transformers. KPT11 15-pin D
connector
Cable, 5-pin, AWG14, tot. length 0.3 m with sheathing. The
cable is an adapter to allow a new TPD32-EV-CU-.. control
unit to be connected to replace an earlier version of the
TPD32 control unit. For KP connector
Y-cable, 15-pin, AWG22, tot. length 0.3 m with sheathing.
The cable is an adapter to allow a new TPD32-EV-CU-..
control unit to be connected to replace an earlier version of
the TPD32 control unit. Connector KPT11 and KPT31 on the
TPD32-EV-CU-.. side, KPT11 on the TPD32 side
Supplied as
standard
Electrical diagram
yes
yes
S72762
"Figure 9.4.3-C:
ESE5799 (3/3) TPD32-EV-CU-" on
page 421
yes
S72763
S72764
upon request
upon request
Code
S72760
"Figure 9.4.3-B:
ESE5799 (2/3) TPD32-EV-CU-" on
page 420
S72761
Refer to diagram ESE5799 on page 1/3 for wiring between the power bridge and control unit
using the three cables supplied ("Figure 9.4.3-A: ESE5799 (1/3) - TPD32-EV-CU-" on page
419).
Instruction manual
473
A1.3 Choosing the right model for your application

START
230VAC to 500V AC
40A
SCR in parallel on each

leg of power bridge
Max motor
field current
7 0A
TPD32-CU-230/500-THY1-FC40
TPD32-CU-230/500-THY1-FC70
40A
Power bridge
mains voltage value
a b o v e 5 0 0V A C t o 6 9 0V A C
Max motor
field current
70A
TPD32-CU-230/500-THY2-FC40
TPD32-CU-230/500-THY2-FC70
40A
SCR in parallel on each

leg of power bridge
Max motor
field current
70A
TPD32-CU-575/690-THY1-FC40
TPD32-CU-575/690-THY1-FC70
40A
Max motor
field current
70A
TPD32-CU-575/690-THY2-FC40
TPD32-CU-575/690-THY2-FC70
The flow chart illustrates the choice of unit, based on the rated supply voltage, the need to control pulse transformers with one or two secondary windings and the maximum field current requested.
There is no need to make a distinction between two or four-quadrant drives; this is done by configuring jumper
S1 on the FIRXP-XX power card. ON=4Q (default), OFF=2Q (see Figure 11.3.5).
The control unit is capable of controlling SCR power bridges with four possible configurations, which must also
be taken into account when choosing the appropriate CU with the relative connection cables and pulse transformers. These four possible configurations, referring to two-quadrant bridges, are illustrated below (the same
choices apply to four-quadrant bridges). Likewise, the mains voltage and max. field current are not considered..
Configuration 1: Single bridge with 1 SCR per branch
PTD1-...
PTD2-...
This is regarded as a standard configuration that can be achieved with a

TPD32-EV-CU-XXX/XXX-THY1-XX control unit and the cables supplied with it.
474
Configuration 2: 1 single bridge with 1 SCR per branch in parallel
This is achieved with the TPD32-EV-CU-XXX/XXX-THY2-XX control unit and

the cables supplied with it
TPD32-EV
Configuration 3: 2 single bridges with 1 SCR per branch in parallel
PTD1-...
PTD1-...
This is achieved with a TPD32-EV-CU-XXX/XXX-THY1-XX control unit, the cables supplied with it, plus a second KPT11 connector interface cable for TPD32-EVCU (EAM2764) that is connected to connector KPY21.
Configuration 4: 2 single bridges with 2 SCRs per branch in parallel
PTD2-...
PTD2-...
This is achieved with a TPD32-EV-CU-XXX/XXX-THY2-XX control unit, the cables supplied with it, plus a second KPT11 connector interface cable for TPD32-EVCU (EAM2764) that is connected to connector KPT21.
To sum up:
Type
3 Standard
cables
Additional
cables
Pulse transformers (upon
request)
State of S2 (*)
Power bridge(s)
Single bridge with 1 SCR per
Single bridge with 2 SCRs per 2 single bridges with 1 SCR per 2 single bridges with 2 SCRs
branch
branch in parallel
branch in parallel
per branch in parallel
TPD32-EV-CU-XXX/XXX-THY1-XX TPD32-EV-CU-XXX/XXX-THY2-XX TPD32-EV-CU-XXX/XXX-THY1-XX TPD32-EV-CU-XXX/XXX-THY2-XX
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
1 x cod. S72764 (EAM2764)
1 x cod. S72764 (EAM2764)
Single bridge with 1 SCR per

branch
Single bridge with 2 SCRs per

branch in parallel
2 single bridges with 1 SCR per

branch in parallel
2 single bridges with 2 SCRs per

branch in parallel
Closed (default)
Closed (default)
Cut
Cut
(*) If the Control Unit drives 2 single bridges, open jumper S2 on the FIR4/5P-XX card to correctly read the thermal protector on the second
bridge to be connected to terminals 2 and 3 of connector KPT31.
Note !
If the NC thermal contact (bimetal thermostat) connected between terminals 1 and 2 is not
used, these must be jumpered. Terminal 3 is already jumpered internally with terminal 2 via
jumper S2 on the FIRXP-XX power card, as standard. Terminal 4 is not used.
Instruction manual
475
A1.4 Pulse transformers

Pulse transformers with the following characteristics are available upon request:
PULSE TRANSFORMERS
Electrical diagram and code
PTD1
PTD2
PTD1-1
PTD2-1
PTD1-1K
PTD2-1K
ESE5948-1
ESE5948-2
ESE5948-3
ESE5948-4
ESE5948-5
ESE5948-6
Imax secondary winding
Rated working voltage [Vrms]
[A]
[Arms]
Transformation ratio
(P:S:S)
500
500
750
750
1000
1000
1,2 Peak
1,2 Peak
1,2 Peak
1,2 Peak
1,2 Peak
1,2 Peak
0,75
0,5
0,75
0,5
0,75
0,5
3:1
3:1:1
3:1
3:1:1
3:1
3:1:1
S5C370
S5C371
S5C372
S5C373
S5C374
S5C375
Start-up pulses are pulse trains with a total duration of 1 ms and frequency of approx. 12 kHz. RFIR resistors
are dimensioned to have peak gate current values of between 600 mA and 900 mA..
+22V typ.
+22V typ.
SCR11
SCR
Figure A1.4.1: Typical connection for PTDX-X transformers
Pulse transformer PTD1-X

T
0,1 F
47R
3R9
RFIR
SCR12
0,1 F
47R
3:1
KPT11
0,1 F
47R
KPT11
3R9
K
G0
RFIR
3:1:1
Pulse transformer PTD2-X
0V
0V
A1.5 Current transducers (CT or TA)

The armature current of the motor is measured by two AC current transducers inserted on the line side of the
power bridge; see, for example, ("Figure 9.4.4: ESE5771 TPD32-EV-CU-230...690-THY1-XX_1" on page 422).
Transducers with different primary/secondary current ratios are available on the market and can be used with
the CU. The TPD32-.. series uses a CT with standard current values of 0.4 A or 0.5 A on the secondary winding.
We recommend the use of current transducers with a secondary current of not more than 1 A.
Some of the current transducers available upon request are listed below with the relative technical data:
TAS2-1600A/0,4A
used for 1000A IdN 1800A
(code S7H22)
TAS2-2400A/0,5A
(code S7H23)
TAS3-4000A/0,5A
(code S7H30)
Electrical data
Type
Rated voltage and

frequency
TAS2-1600A/0,4A
TAS2-2400A/0,5A
TAS3-4000A/0,5A
476
700Vrms
40 ... 60Hz
Winding
ratio
Rated primary
current
Rated secondary
current
Rated power
1:4000
1600A
0,4A
20VA
1:4800
2400A
0,5A
20VA
1:8000
4000A
0,5A
20VA
TPD32-EV
Maximum bar opening

60mm x 15mm
[2.36 x 0.59]
60mm x 15mm
[2.36 x 0.59]
103mm x 60mm
[4.05 x 2.36"]
Measurement
accuracy
class
1
1
1
Mechanical dimensions:
TAS2
TAS3
A1.6 Installation, connection and configuration

A1.6.1 Assembly
See chapter "3.3 Mounting the device" on page 61.
A1.6.2 Electrical connections
PE
XPT2
7
9
U2
11
V2
13
15
8
35
10
IT1
IT2
IT3
IT4
IT5
IT6
MN
MN
MP
MP
11
XPT1-2
XR
IT4
1V1
1U1
IT1
MN
RT1
CT4
G1
G1
K1
K1
K1F
T1F
MN
K4
TH1
6
7
G1
K1
T1
G2
K2
T2
MP
IT1
RT4
F4
F1
CT1
IT4
4
G4
T4
K5
G5
8
12
13
T5
F5
F2
G1F
RT2
CT1F
3
5
XPT1
FIR5P-63
ESE 2334
7
9
11
13
15
8
10
IT1
IT2
IT3
IT4
IT5
IT6
MN
MN
MP
MP
MN
CT6
TH3
G3
K3
K6
T3
T6
Fuse
fault
CD2F
G6
S10
0V
-15V
M
RD2F
1
2
3
4
XFCD
MP
IT3
RT6
F6
F3
CT3
XCD-IO3
RT3
S11
S2
C
IT6
11
CT
IT6
XCD-IO5
9
10
IT3
MN
XCD-IO1
1V
+15V
MP
XCD-1
1U
1W
T6
F6
F3
X4-2
XCD-3
T3
CD1F
K6
G6
TH-CT 1
4
Motor
overtemperature
15
G3
K3
RT2F
D2F
RD1F
X4-1
TH-CT 2
79
62
14
G5
D1
PFC40 (case ..-40),

PFC70 (case ..-70),
ESE 2374
C1
1 2 3
5
6
61
62
14
61
XP2
MN
K5
T5
82
12
J2
78
From / to Control
Board R-TPD32
CT5
XCD-IO7
KPT11
J1
T2
81
Ready
76
G2
K2
K2
G2
CT2F
RT1F
D1F
OT
F5
F2
TH2
K8
MP
IT2
RT5
CT2
IT5
Armature
voltage
IT5
TH-CT 3
KPT21
36
MP
IT2
MN
K2F
G2F
T2F
K2
G2
K7
FV1
SW3,
SW4
2R5
2R5
XCT
External
burden R
XPT1-4
XPT1-6
TH-CT
7
CT-W
MP
75
Motor
PTC
T4
F4
F1
10
KPT31
Control Supply
115/230V AC
T1
V1
to FIR5P-63
1V
G1
K1
U1
XP2
15
PE
FIR5P-63
ESE 2334
K4
G4
to R-TPD32
62
1U
1W
14
X3
13
Armature current
feedback
J5
XP1
KW
14
J4
N8
0VI
X3
14
XP1
J3
61
FIR5P-63
ESE 2334
RCT
Sync
12
XUV
CFS-47X
ESE 5301
XF-1
IA = 0
C4-
Line voltage and

synchronisation
C4
C3
C4+
KU
CT-U
R3
C4+
M
Cooling fans
XUVW
R2
SW1-31
ESE 2192
C2
C3+
R4
XUV
C3+
C4-
Contactor
F31
KP
R1
+24V
15V +5V
C1
C2+
SMPS
F21
C2+
FU1
C1+
to R-TPD32
F11
XF-5
W V
XF-5
R6+
230VAC to 480VAC
50/60Hz
SW1-31
ESE 2192
R6

C1+
XV 1 2 3 4
The block diagram below shows the typical connection of a CU with a 4Q SCR bridge. Parts shown inside the
grey area are NOT part of the TPD32-EV-CU-.
KP
7
8
12
13
C (D) (C)
D
M
Low voltage
signals only
For further details, see "Figure 9.4.4: ESE5771 TPD32-EV-CU-230...690-THY1-XX_1" on page 422 , "Figure 9.4.5: ESE5771 TPD32-EV-CU-230...690-THY1-XX_2" on page 423) , "Figure 9.4.3-A: ESE5799 (1/3)
- TPD32-EV-CU-" on page 419.
Instruction manual
477
Field circuit and ground connection

The unit contains a semi-controlled single-phase motor field power supply circuit. As shown, the input and output
connections are in the lower part.
We recommend the use of an adapter transformer for the input power supply to terminals U1-V1. The fuses
listed in the table are mandatory.
Use dip-switches S14 on the regulation card to set the field current full scale value, see "Table 2.3.3.4-F: Field
current resistors Sizes TPD32-EV-CU-..." on page 32
Figure A1.6.1: Position of terminals
KPT21
D,C,W,V,U
KPT11
V1, U1, C1, D1
1,2,3,5,6,7,8
PE
Cable cross-sections and tightening torque

Terminal
U1, V1
C1, D1
PE
Function
AC power input
Motor field DC power output
Protective earth
Min. cable cross-section
Max. cable cross section
Tightening torque
10 mm2 (10AWG)
25 mm2 (2AWG)
4 4.5 Nm
10 mm2 (8AWG)
16 mm2 (6AWG)
6 8 Nm
The protective earth PE connector must be connected to the systems ground circuit according to the laws in force.
Recommended field fuses (FU1, FV1) and fuse holders
Rated field
current
40A
70A
Fuse holders
Type of fuse (cylindrical, 22x58 mm)

Bussmann
FWP-50A22Fa
FWP-100A22Fa
Ferraz-Shawmut (Mersen)
A70QS50-22F
A70QS100-22F
Bussmann CH222D or Ferraz-Shawmut US222 (Ref. L227940)
Siba
Code
5014006.50
5014006.100
F4M15
F4M21
S85B9
Interface with three-phase power supply (mains) and motor armature voltage
The CU requires a mains voltage and armature voltage feedback from the controlled power bridge. It is connected
to terminals U V W and C D, respectively, of the KP connector. As mentioned previously, the CU is supplied
with a specific cable already fitted with the relative KP connector at the CU end and free conductors at the other
end (KP connector interface cable for TPD32-EV-CU, EAM2762).
Terminal
U, V, W
C, D
478
Function
Mains voltage feedback
Armature voltage feedback

0.2 mm2 (24AWG)
6 mm2 (10AWG)
Recommended : 2.5 mm2 (14 12AWG)
TPD32-EV
Tightening torque
0.7 0,8Nm
Connection of current transducers and thermal switch(es)

The secondary windings of the two AC current transducers and any thermal circuit breakers (bimetal thermostats)
on the power bridges are connected to the KPT31 connector. A specific cable already fitted with the relative
KPT31 connector at the CU end and free conductors at the other end is supplied (KPT31 connector interface
cable for TPD32-EV-CU, EAM2763).
Terminal
1, 2, 3 *
5, 6, 7, 8
Note !
Function
Connection of bimetal thermostats
CT connection

0.25 mm2 (24AWG)
2.5 mm2 (12AWG)
2
Recommended : 1 mm (18AWG)
Tightening torque
0.5 0,6Nm
If the NC thermal contact (bimetal thermostat) connected between terminals 1 and 2 is not
used, these must be jumpered. Terminal 3 is already jumpered internally with terminal 2 via
jumper S2 on the FIRXP-XX power card, as standard. Terminal 4 is not used.
KPT31
Detail of connection of current transducers:
CT-U
red
Twisted
wires
brown
brown
CT-W
blue
Twisted
wires
brown
Connection of pulse transformers

The primary circuits of the pulse transformers are connected to connector KPT11 (and KPT21, where applicable)
for switching the SCRs on. A specific cable already fitted with the relative KPT11 connector at the CU end and
free conductors at the other end is supplied (KP11 connector interface cable for TPD32-EV-CU, EAM2764).
For details of wiring, see ESE5771 showing the connection of a 4Q bridge (reversible). With a 2Q bridge, the two
conductors labelled MN are not used. Their free end must therefore not be connected but electrically isolated.
Regulation power supply
As for the entire TPD32-EV- series, the regulation power supply is connected to terminals U2-V2 on the
FIRXP-XX power card. To access this, remove the plastic cover at the bottom.
This card also contains terminals 35-36, 75-76 and 78-79 which have the same function on all units in the TPD32EV-.. series and have already been described in chapter "4.4 Regulation Section" on page 69.
Cable cross-sections and tightening torque
Terminal
U2, V2
35, 36
75, 76
78, 79
Function
Contact OK Relay
Relay 2 contact
Motor thermistor
Tightening torque
0.25 mm2
(24AWG)
2.5 mm2
(12AWG)
0.5 0.6 Nm
Instruction manual
479
Electrical data for all of the terminals and connectors listed

Connector
-
KP
KPT31
Terminal
Function
IN/OUT
Voltage
Current
U1, V1
Motor field circuit AC power

input
IN
1 x 230 460Aac, 50/60Hz
40 / 70Aac
OUT
IN
IN
0 360Vdc
3 x 230 690Aac, 50/60Hz
0 810Vdc
40 / 70Adc
200mA
10mA
IN
-----
4mA
IN
-----
0 5Aac
OUT
-----
1A peak
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
1 x 115/230Aac, 50/60Hz
250Aac max
250Aac max
-----
1/0,5Aac
1A AC11
1A AC11
-----
OUT
-----
5A max
C1, D1
U, V, W
C, D
1, 2, 3
5, 6, 7, 8
KPT11,
KPT21
15 poli Sub-D
XM
U2, V2
35, 36
75, 76
78, 79
XCT
0VI, 0VI, RCT, RCT
Motor field DC power output

Mains voltage feedback
Armature voltage feedback
Connection of bimetal
thermostats
CT connection
Pulse transformer primary
winding side circuits
Contact OK Relay
Relay 2 contact
Motor thermistor
Connection of external CT
burden resistor with secondary current of >1 Aac
(see "A1.6.3 Configuration of
the armature current feedback circuit" on page 480)
Dissipated power
See "Table 2.5.2: Dissipated power TPD32-EV-CU series" on page 57.
Regulation and control section
General information is provided in chapter "4.4 Regulation Section" on page 69.
R-TPD32 regulation card:
Dip-switch S15, see "Table 4.4.2-B: Dip-switch S15 Adjustment of the TPD32-EV-CU-... series mains voltage regulation card" on page 71.
Dip-switch S14, see "Table 2.3.3.4-F: Field current resistors Sizes TPD32-EV-CU-..." on page 32.
A1.6.3 Configuration of the armature current feedback circuit

Overview
The current feedback signal is sent to the control unit by two current transducers (CT) inserted on phases U and
W of the controlled power bridge. It is rectified on the FIRXP-XX card by a three-phase diode bridge and applied to a burden resistor that converts it into a voltage signal proportional to the DC motor current value. This
is then applied to the armature current regulator which compares it with the reference value.
The standard FIRXP-XX card offers a choice of two burden resistor (RB) values, 2.5 Ohm or 5 Ohm, which
are suitable in the majority of cases. Otherwise an external burden resistor can be used, connected between
terminals RCT and 0VI.
In order to enable precise adjustment to the many possible rated current values (size of the controlled power
bridge), a programmable gain amplifier (N8) is inserted between the burden resistor and the current regulator.
The gain is set by means of a 12-bit binary number selected with dip-switches S3 and S4.
480
TPD32-EV
KPT31
Figure A1.6.3.1: Detail of circuit
14
XR
Armature current
feedback
J5A
J5
to R-TPD32
N8
0VI
13
SW3,
SW4
XCT
J4A
J4
2R5
External
burden R
from CTs
TH-CT
RCT
2R5
FIRXP-XX board
If the secondary current of the CTs installed is < 1 A, the 2.5 Ohm or 5 Ohm burden resistors already provided
on the card can be used; for secondary currents of >1 A and < 5 A the burden resistor must be connected between
terminals RCT and 0VI, excluding the internal resistors. In table form:
CT secondary current
> 0.5A, < 1A
J4 (ON)
J5 (ON)
Not connected
2,5 Ohm
< 0.5A
J4A (OFF)
J5 (ON)
Not connected
5 Ohm
Jumper J4
Jumper J5
Ext. resistor RCT
R resulting load (Rb)
> 1A, < 5A

irrelevant
J5A (OFF)
See example of calculation
Note:
Sometimes, especially in revamping projects, current transducers with a 5 A secondary current may already be installed on the power bridges. It is still possible to use just the internal
resistors: simply insert two more 5 A/1 A or 5 A/0.5 A current transducers, although this could
affect the ultimate accuracy of current measurement.
At 100% of the drives rated current (IdN), the average reaction voltage, applied between pins XR-13/
XR-14 (0 V) is 0.612 V.
Dip-switch S3-1 represents the most significant bit (MSB) and dip-switch S4-8 the least significant bit
(LSB). A closed switch (ON) means binary value 1, an open switch (OFF) means 0. In graph form
-
SW3-1
SW3-2
SW3-3
SW3-4
SW4-1
SW4-2
SW4-3
SW4-4
SW4-5
SW4-6
SW4-7
SW4-8
bit 11
MSB
bit 10
bit 9
bit 8
bit 7
bit 6
bit 5
bit 4
bit 3
bit 2
bit 1
bit 0
LSB
-
-
-
The maximum gain of the amplifier is 51.2 (in actual fact 51.2) and the minimum gain is 0.0125005
with possible values of 212 1.
The binary configuration 00....000 (all S3 and S4 switches open), is not allowed!
The relation between amplifier gain (Gain_required) and binary number (Binary_switch_setting)
is given by:
Binary_switch_setting =
1
--------------------Gain_required
x 51,2 =
51,2
--------------------Gain_required
Clearly, only the whole number of the result of the above equation is converted into a binary number.
The variables used in the following examples of calculation are:
-
-
-
-
-
Idn = drive armature rated current in A;

CT = current transducer with a transformation ratio of: Iprim/Isec;
Rb = burden resistor in Ohm;
Vf@Idn = reaction voltage at armature rated current: 0.612 V;
Vb@Idn = reaction voltage on the burden resistor at the rated armature current in V.
Instruction manual
481
Valid formulas
Vb@Idn = (Idn / (Iprim / Isec)) x Rb
and
Gain_required = Vf@Idn / Vb@Idn.
Calculation example A
IdN = 2000A, CT = 2400A / 0.5A; Rb = 5 Ohm.
Vb@IdN = (IdN / (2400 / 0.5)) x Rb = (2000 / 4800) x 5 = 2.08333V;
Gain_required = Vf@IdN / Vb@IdN = 0.612 / 2.08333 = 0.29376; therefore
Binary_switch_setting = 51.2 / 0.29376 = 174.29 which is rounded off to 174 and converted into binary format
as 000010101110. i.e.:
SW3-1
SW3-2
SW3-3
SW3-4
SW4-1
SW4-2
SW4-3
SW4-4
SW4-5
SW4-6
SW4-7
SW4-8
OFF
MSB
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
LSB
Calculation example B (extreme case)

Idn = 85A, CT = 2000A / 1A; Rb = 2.5Ohm.
Vb@Idn = (Idn / (2000 / 1)) x Rb = (85 / 2000) x 2.5 = 0.10625V;
Gain_required = Vf@Idn / Vb@Idn = 0.612 / 0.10625 = 5.76; therefore
Binary_switch_setting = 51.2 / 5.76 = 8.88888 rounded off to 9 and converted into binary format as 000000001001.
Calculation example C
IdN = 16000A, CT = 20000A / 5A;
Using an internal 2.50-Ohm RB, inserting a second CT2 with a ratio of 5 A/1 A.
The new Iprim/Isec is the total of 20000 A / 1 A;
Vb@Idn = (Idn / (20000 / 1)) x Rb = (16000 / 20000) x 2.5 = 2V;
Gain_required = Vf@Idn / Vb@Idn = 0.612 / 2 = 0.306; therefore
Binary_switch_setting = 51.2 / 0.306 = 167.32 rounded off to 167 and converted into binary format as 000010100111.
Calculation example D
Burden resistor connected to terminals XCT and CT with a 5 A secondary current. Applying the same criteria
for the burden resistor, the ideal burden resistor value is 2.5 Ohm / 5 = 0.5 Ohm. The nearest value for the EIA
E96 series is 0.499 Ohm 1% but the more commonly used 47 Ohm 1% can of course also be used.
Idn = 8000A, CT = 10000A / 5A, Rb = 0,47Ohm.
Vb@Idn = (Idn / (10000 / 5)) x Rb = (8000 / 2000) X 0.47 = 1,88V;
Gain_required = Vf@Idn / Vb@Idn = 0.612 / 1.88 = 0.3255319149; therefore
Binary_switch_setting = 51.2 / 0.3255319149 = 157.281; rounded off to 157 and converted into binary format as 000010011101.

Note:
When choosing the external burden resistor, bear in mind the possibility of substantial power
dissipation. In this example, the power at the rated current is already approx. (1.88)2 / 0.47
= 7.5 W without taking into account any overload conditions or the advisability of not using
resistors at more than half of their rated power.
Table A.1.6.3.1: Calculation of the configuration of dip-switches SW3-1 to SW4-8 for standard TPD32-EV-.. drives with external bridge
Rated armature current
CT
transformer
[Adc]
1000
1010
1200
1600/0,4
1600/0,4
1600/0,4
482
Jumper J4 (on Jumper J5 (on

the FIRXP-XX the FIRXP-XX
card)
card)
(Rb=5)
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Vb@IdN
[Vdc]
1,250000
1,262500
1,500000
Gain
required
Binary
switch
setting
Binary
number
0,489600
0,484752
0,408000
105
106
125
1101000
1101001
1111101
TPD32-EV
SW3-1, ..SW3-4,
SW4-1, ..SW4-8
(on the FIRXP-XX card)
[MSB LSB]
000001101000
000001101001
000001111101
1400
1500
1700
1800
2000
2400
2700
2900
3300
1600/0,4
1600/0,4
1600/0,4
1600/0,4
2400/0,5
2400/0,5
2400/0,5
4000/0,5
4000/0,5
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1,750000
1,875000
2,125000
2,250000
2,083333
2,500000
2,812500
1,812500
2,062500
0,349714
0,326400
0,288000
0,272000
0,293760
0,244800
0,217600
0,337655
0,296727
146
157
178
188
174
209
235
152
173
10010010
10011100
10110001
10111100
10101110
11010001
11101011
10010111
10101100
000010010010
000010011100
000010110001
000010111100
000010101110
000011010001
000011101011
000010010111
000010101100
Position on the FIRXP-XX card: see "Figure 11.3.5: FIR4/5P-XX power/driver card" on page 470.
A1.6.4 Using the control unit as a replacement part

The TPD32-EV-CU- can also be used as :
a replacement part for TPD32- external bridge control units previous series,
a replacement part for TPD32-EV-...-E series.
Having identified the appropriate TPD32-EV-CU- according to the mains voltage, field rated current, type of
pulse transformer (for all standard drives up to 3300 A the correct type is THY1), configure the dip-switches
as shown in tables "Table 11.3.6: Selection of dip-switches S3-XX and S4-XX for FIR4/5P-XX cards." on
page 471 and "Table A.1.6.3.1: Calculation of the configuration of dip-switches SW3-1 to SW4-8 for standard
TPD32-EV-.. drives with external bridge" on page 482 above.
Insert two EAM2760 and EAM2761 adapter cables between the two KP and KPT11 cables connected to the
existing power bridge and the new TPD32-EV-CU-. Connect these adapter cables to connectors KP, KPT31
and KPT11 on the new control unit as shown "Figure 9.4.3-B: ESE5799 (2/3) - TPD32-EV-CU-" on page 420.
A1.7 DC Converter size management

This function makes the CU universal and unrelated to the size of the external power bridge to be controlled.
Use this procedure to use a control unit with an external bridge not included in the Gefran catalogue.
1)
Configure dip-switch S15 on the CU regulation card:

Standard
TPD32-EV-CU-230/500-....-....
TPD32-EV-CU-575/690-....-....
2)

3)
American
TPD32-EV-CU-230/500-....-....
TPD32-EV-CU-575/690-....-....
S15-8
OFF
ON
S15-7
ON
OFF
S15-6
ON
ON
S15-5
ON
ON
S15-4
ON
ON
S15-3
ON
ON
S15-2
ON
ON
S15-1
ON
ON
The default values of the following parameters are set automatically:

Drive Size (IPA 465) = Full load curr (IPA 179) = 4
Nom flux curr (IPA 374) = 1
Inertia (IPA 1015) = 10
Friction (IPA 1014) = 0.001
Modify the Drive Size parameter (IPA 465) to set the desired size directl.
Important:
In this configuration the max. I2t overload areas are always calculated as 150% of Full load
curr x 60 seconds for motor overload and 150% of Drive size x 60 seconds for drive overload.
Important:
The Size selection parameter (IPA 464) cannot be set in this configuration.
Instruction manual
483
Modifications to parameters with respect to chapters "6.11.6 Standard / American selection, Software Version"
on page 190 and "10 - Parameter Lists" on page 424 :
Value
Parameter
Drive size [A]
No.
Format
465
U16
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
CONFIGURATION \ Drive type

4
20000
Disable
Disable
R/Z
A1.8 External Three-phase Field Exciter Control by TPD32-EV-FC

If a higher than standard nominal value of motor field current is required, you can use the TPD32-EV-FC external
field exciter.
With the TPD32-EV-FC field exciter, dynamic control of four-quadrant systems is also possible with a twoquadrant power and control circuit (in the 2B+e configuration) connected to the armature: this is done by inverting
the polarity of the excitation circuit current connected to a four-quadrant bridge.
For details, see Appendix 2.
Figura A1.8.1: Block diagram of Field exciter control
TPD32-EV-...-E
External Bridge
TPD32-EV-CU
Control Unit
SBI-OFM-32
(Optional)
R-TPD32
TPD32-EV-FC
External Field
Optical fiber link
SBI-OFS-32
(Optional)
Cable :
cod. S7QAE3 (3m)
cod. S7QAQ8 (5m)
2Q / 4Q
2Q / 4Q
484
R-TPD32
TPD32-EV
APPENDIX 2 - TPD32-EV-FC: FIELD CONTROL UNIT

Compatibility of TPD32-EV firmware version combined with TPD32-EV -FC:
TPD32-FC FW 10.26 and lower
TPD32-FC FW 11.20 and higher
TPD32EV FW 10.08 and lower
YES
YES
TPD32EV FW 11.00 and higher
NO
YES
Functions/parameters that differ from those of the standard version V. 11.0X (TPD32-EV):
A2.1 Current regulation (CURRENT REGULAT)

In the TPD32-EV-FC version there is a PI regulator instead of a predictive current regulator.
This section replaces that in chapter "6.8 Current regulation (Current regulat)" on page 173.
CURRENT REGULAT
[1520]
[453]
[454]
[838]
[839]
[840]
[915]
[1526]
[353]
dI/dt delta time

Arm resistance [ ]
Arm inductance [mH]
CD curr thr [%]
CD factor P
CD factor I
Autotune
Autotune Status
Zero torque
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
min
1520
453
454
838
839
U16
Float
Float
Int16
Float
0
0
S
0
0.001
CD factor I
840
Float
Autotune
Autotune Status
Not executed (0)

In progress (1)

Success (2)

Aborted (3)

No current (4)

Gain calc err (5)

Drive Failure (6)

Timeout (7)
915
1526
U16
U16
353
U16
Active
Not active
Note:
CD curr thr
CD factor P
CD factor I
Factory
CURRENT REGULAT
dI/dt delta time

Arm inductance [mH]
CD curr thr [%]
CD factor P
Zero torque
max
Access via
Keyp.
RS485/BUS/
Opt2-M
Term.
Opt2-A/
PDC
0
0.0
0.41
100
0.3
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
QA
-
R
-
0.3
R/W
100
S
S
200
100 / DC Curr P
(P847)
100 / DC Curr I
(P848)
65535
C
R
Not active
(1)
R/W
ID
R/W
0
1
L
H
In the "FC" version the Arm resistance (IPA 453) and Arm inductance (IPA 454) parameters
must not be modified.
Reference value of current used as limit point on gain ramps, as indicated in the figures
below.
Proportional gain multiplication factor for T current ref > CD curr thr (see figures
below).
Integral gain multiplication factor for T current ref > CD curr thr (see figures below).
Instruction manual
485
Autotune
Autotune Status

Commands autotuning of the PI current regulator (see description of autotuning below)

Indicates the autotuning status of the PI current regulator.
The value Not executed indicates that autotuning has never been run (value parameter
assumes at power on), the value In progress indicates that autotuning is running, the
value Success indicates that the last time autotuning was run it ended successfully.
The other values indicate that the last time autotuning was run it ended with an error
(for the type of error corresponding to the various values, see the description of the
autotuning procedure below).
I Gain
P Gain
DC Curr P
DC Curr I * CD Factor I
DC Curr P * CD Factor P
DC Curr I
CD Curr Thr
CD Curr Thr
T Current Ref
T Current Ref
A2.2 Regulator parameters (REG PARAMETERS)

This section modifies chapter "6.10 Reg Parameters" on page 179:
addition of DC Curr PI reg menu (after the Speed regulator menu),
addition of parameters to the In use values menu.
REG PARAMETERS
Percent values
Speed regulator
[...]
....
[847]
[848]
[849]
[850]
DC Curr P
DC Curr I
DC Curr P base
DC Curr I base
[...]
...
[...]
...
DC Curr PI reg
Flux regulator
Voltage reg
Base values
....
In use values
[...]
[845]
[846]
...
Curr P in use [%]
Curr I in use [%]
Value
Parameter
486
No.
Format
min
max
Factory
TPD32-EV
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
PDC
Opt2-M
DC Curr P
REG PARAMETERS \ Percent values \ DC Curr PI reg

847
Float
DC Curr I
848
Float
0.0
DC Curr P base
849
Float
0.001
100 / CD factor P
(P839)
100 / CD factor I
(P840)
Pmax
DC Curr I base
850
Float
0.01
Imax
0.5
R/W
30
R/W
0.98 *
Pmax (*)
0.45 *
Imax (*)
R/Z
R/Z
(*) For calculations performed internally by the configurator: Pmax = 360 * (2000 / IPA465) * (24 / 215); Imax = 360 * (2000 / IPA465) / 22 * f_vecon / 215).
f_vecon = 24009,6.
DC curr P
Proportional gain (as percentage of DC Curr P base) for T current ref = 0.
DC Curr I
Integral gain (as percentage of DC Curr I base) for T current ref = 0.
DC curr P base
Default proportional gain in physical units.
DC Curr I base
Default integral gain in physical units.

Value
Parameter
Curr P in use [%]

Curr I in use [%]
Curr P in use
Curr I in use
No.
Format
845
846
Float
Float
min
max
Factory
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
PDC
Opt2-M
REG PARAMETERS \ In use values

0.0
0.0
100.0
100.0
S
S
R
R
Display of proportional gain of current regulator in use as a percentage of DC Curr P

base.
Display of integral gain of current regulator in use as a percentage of DC Curr I base.
A2.3 Autotune function of PI current regulator

The autotune procedure for the current regulator calculates the best gain values for the PI regulator. The procedure
can be used only when the drive is connected to a highly inductive load.
The autotune procedure can be launched from GF_eXpress (Parameter P915 Autotune on the CURRENT
REGULATOR menu) or from the keypad via Autotune on the CURRENT REGULATOR menu. In order to run
autotune, the control method must be set to Digital Local and the Enable and Start contacts must be closed.
When the procedure is launched from the keypad, the message "Start?" is displayed first. Press Enter to start
the procedure; press CANC to abort.
Whether the procedure is launched from the keypad or from GF_eXpress, when running its status is displayed
on the keypad and via the P1526 Autotune Status parameter
During normal running of autotuning, the keypad displays the message "Curr reg tuning" and the value of P1526
is set to 1 (In progress). If everything goes well, when the procedure ends the keypad displays the messages
"Ready" and "End curr tune" and parameter P1526 is set to 2 (Success).
The autotune procedure can be interrupted before it ends by pressing the CANC button on the keypad or from
GF_eXpress by clicking the Disable button on the Control Panel.
If the autotune procedure does not end correctly (due either to error events during the procedure or to interruption commanded by the user) the PI parameters are reset to the values present before the procedure was started,
otherwise they are overwritten with the new values calculated.
In addition to the messages shown above regarding cases in which the procedure begins and ends correctly, the
keypad may also display the following messages:
"No current"
This message is displayed if, during the autotune procedure, the regulation cannot be
activated or if current is not calculated (not even with a proportional gain value of 100%).
Instruction manual
487
This event may be caused by the following:

- Field is physically disconnected from drive
- DC Curr P base value too low

- Enable and/or Start contacts open

- Autotune procedure interrupted from GF_eXpress via Disable button on Control Panel

- Failure causing disabling of drive

Following these events, parameter P1526 is set to 4 (No current).
"Tuning aborted"
This message is displayed if the autotune procedure is interrupted by pressing the CANC
key on the keypad. The message remains displayed for a few seconds, after which the
message "End curr tune" is displayed. In addition, following this event, parameter P1526
is set to 3 (Aborted).
"Gains calc error"
This message is displayed if the autotune procedure encounters problems in reading
the best gains, especially integral gain. This is typically due to an excessively high DC
Curr I base value, so that in this case it is advisable to lower such value and repeat the
autotune procedure. In addition, following this event, parameter P1526 is set to 5 (Gain
calc err).
"Drive Failure"
This message is displayed if an alarm trips during the autotune procedure or is present
before it is run. Following this event, parameter P1526 is set to 6 (Drive Failure).
"Time out"
This message is displayed if the autotune procedure does not end by the maximum allowed time (50 minutes). Following this event, parameter P1526 is set to 7 (Timeout).
"Set Main cmd=Dig" This message is displayed if the autotune procedure is launched with parameter 252
Main Commands set to Terminals.
"Set Ctrl=Local"
This message is displayed if the autotune procedure is launched with parameter 253
Control mode set to Bus.
The autotune procedure tries to calculate the best values of parameters CD factor P, CD factor I, DC Curr P and
DC Curr I, which allow a good compromise between fast current dynamics and limited overshoots. Parameter
CD curr thr is set to 100. Parameter DC Curr P base and DC Curr I base are not changed.
Notes:
- If the nominal current of the connected field is significantly below the size of the drive, the values of CD
factor P and CD factor I are set to 1.
- If the values of DC Curr I or DC Curr I * CD factor I are equal to or near 100 at the end of the procedure,
you should raise the value of DC Curr I base (if not already at maximum) and repeat the procedure. On the
other hand, if DC Curr I is low (below 10), you should lower the value of DC Curr I base and repeat the
procedure.
- In some cases, especially if the nominal current of the field is less than half the size of the drive, there may
be lengthy (or improvable) rise times starting from zero current for reference values below 100% with gains
settings calculated by the autotune procedure. In this case, these times may be improved as follows:
a. Increase the value of DC Curr I by changing CD factor I in order to keep the value of DC Curr I *
CD factor I constant.
b. Decrease the value of DC Curr P by changing CD factor P in order to keep the value of DC Curr P
* CD factor P constant.
488
TPD32-EV
A2.4 Digital Outputs

This section modifies chapter "6.12.3 Digital Outputs" on page 213.
Added selections needed for Ext wired FC:
Digital output XX
Selection of the parameter that is assigned to the digital output concerned. The following
OFF
Speed zero thr
Spd threshold
Set speed
Curr limit state
Drive ready
Mot ovrld avail 6)
Overload state
Ramp +
Ramp Speed limited
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Heatsink
Overcurrent
Overtemp motor
External fault
Failure supply
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Pad A bit
Pad B bit
Virt dig input
Torque sign
Stop control
Field loss
Speed fbk loss
Bus loss
Hw opt1 failure
Opt2 failure
Encoder 1 state
Encoder 2 state
Enable seq err
Diameter calc st 1)
Drive healthy 13)
Input 1 cp match
Diam reached
Spd match compl
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
35
38
42
49
58
59
Acc state
Dec state
Brake comand 2)
Brake failure 3)
Mot ovrld preal 4)
Dvr ovrld preal 5)
Dvr ovrld avail 7)
I2t mot ovrld fail 8)
I2t drv ovrld fail 9)
Mot cur threshld 10)
Overspeed 11)
Delta frequency 12)
Drv rdy to start 14)
BUS control mode 15)
SSC Error 16)
Wired FC Enabled 17)
Wired FC Inv Seq 18)
Wired FC Act Brg 19)
60
61
62
63
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
76
77
79
80
81
82

Enables field control by TPD32-EV-FC via standard I/O.
Indication if field control is during inversion sequence
19)
Indication of the actual active bridge (positive or negative) of the FC unit.
17)
18)
Note:
For the operation of the FC unit by using external I/O signals, the three digital outputs of the
FC unit, configured as indicated in section "A2.5.2 Connection between TPD32-EV-CU and
TPD32-EV-FC units via external I/O" on page 492, must be connected to the digital inputs
of the CU configured in the same way. In addition, the analog output of the CU configured
as "Field cur ref" must be connected to an analog input unit configured as FC "T current
ref 1."
Instruction manual
489
A2.5 External Three-phase Field Exciter Control

CONFIGURATION
[...]
....
[1522]
En ext digit FC
[914]
CU EN Flux fact
Value
Parameter
En ext digit FC
CU EN Flux fact [%]
No.
Format
1522
914
I16
U16
min
max
CONFIGURATION
0
10
1
100
Factory
0
50
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
PDC
Opt2-M
R/Z
R/Z
En ext digit FC
With this function, enabling En ext digit FC and the Flux reg mode (IPA 469) parameter
can be set to Ext digital FC to use the drive in the "FC" configuration (via fiber optics)
to control the excitation circuit of large DC motors.
CU EN Flux fact
In order to avoid possible armature spikes current during bridge reversing, this value (in
percentage of field current) defines a threshold for activating armature current during
the reverse.
Communication between the TPD32-EV armature control drive (master) and the TPD32-EV-FC drive (slave)
should be via optical fibre serial interface (PAR 469 Flux reg mode = [3] Ext digital FC) or (from TPD32-EV
FW11.XX, version) by standard external I/O terninal connection (PAR 469 Flux reg mode = [4] Ext wired FC).
In this operating mode, the -FC slave drive acts as an actuator of a current reference from the master control unit.
The master control unit provides the flux reference (voltage regulator output) which, appropriately scaled and
sent to the current reference of the -FC slave drive, enables this to control the current of the three-phase bridge
of the drive connected to the motor excitation circuit (in both the constant torque and constant power areas)
Dynamic control of four-quadrant systems is also possible with a two-quadrant power and control circuit (in
the 2B+e configuration) connected to the armature: this is done by inverting the polarity of the excitation circuit
current connected to a four-quadrant bridge.
In this configuration the slave drive works in torque regulation mode with the reference controlled by the master:
the drive size and, above all, the value of Full load current (IPA 179) must therefore be selected according to
the current required by the excitation circuit.
The sign of the master speed regulator output manages the polarity of the current reference sent to the slave:
this is inverted when the value of the speed regulator output is higher than the symmetric hysteresis value set
in [1522] FC cur ref hyst.
This parameter can be used to avoid continuous reversals of field current polarity when the motor is running
with no load applied and thus with a Speed reg output value that is almost null.
If this configuration is enabled, the Field loss control indicating the absence of excitation is activated when:
the master drive is enabled,
the -FC slave drive is not powered or not enabled or in an alarm condition.
In this operating mode, there is no need to set the field circuit parameters, apart from those to configure any
voltage regulator gains (Voltage P IPA 493 and Voltage I IPA 494).
Important:
490
if this function is enabled with the 2B+e option, the drive cannot be used with the Speed fbk
sel parameter (IPA 414) set to Armature.
TPD32-EV
Accessories for connecting the TPD32-EV / TPD32-EV-CU control unit via fiber optics to the TPD32-EV-FC
external exciter:
Code
Description
Remarks
S7QAE3
or
S7QAQ8
M/S cable
Master/slave connection cable:

3 mt. = S7QAE3
5 mt. = S7QAQ8
S5H78
SBI-OFM-32
Master card
S5H83
SBI-OFS-32
Slave card
The boards and the 3-meter cable are already included in the TPD32-EV 12 Pulse configuration. If requested, the TPD32-EV-FC must be used via a standard external I/O connection.
Note:
A2.5.1 Fiber optics connection of master board (in TPD32-EV-CU unit) to Slave board (in
TPD32-EV-FC unit)
Figure A2.5.1: Block diagram of Field exciter control, fiber optics connection
TPD32-EV-...-E
External Bridge
TPD32-EV-CU
Control Unit
SBI-OFM-32
(Optional)
TPD32-EV-FC
External Field
Optical fiber link
SBI-OFS-32
(Optional)
Cable :
cod. S7QAE3 (3m)
cod. S7QAQ8 (5m)
R-TPD32
2Q / 4Q
R-TPD32
2Q / 4Q
M
External connections are made with connectors with different names if the board is a master (SBI-OFM-32) or
a slave (SBI-OFS-32).
For the serial communication connection via fiber optics interface, you have to use the optional cable specified
above (3m or 5m).
SBI-OFM-32
SBI-OFS-32
RX7
RX6
TX5
RX4
RX3
TX2
TX1 RX2 TX3 TX4 RX5 TX6 TX7

RX1
TX1
TX4
TX3
RX2
TX7
TX6
RX5
SBI-OFM-32
Cable cod. S7QAE3 (3 m)

Cable cod. S7QAQ8 (5 m)
Instruction manual
RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 RX5 RX6 RX7
SBI-OFS-32
491
A2.5.2 Connection between TPD32-EV-CU and TPD32-EV-FC units via external I/O
In FW version 11.00 and higher for the TPD32-EV / TPD32-EV-CU, you can control a TPD32-EV-FC unit via
external inputs and outputs (I/O) (without needing a fiber optics connection).
Figure A2.5.2: Block diagram of Field exciter control, connection via external I/Os
TPD32-EV-...-E
External Bridge
TPD32-EV-CU
Control Unit
TPD32-EV-FC
External Field
External I/O
(1)
R-TPD32
R-TPD32
2Q / 4Q
2Q / 4Q
Value
Parameter
Flux reg mode
No.
Format
min
max
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Factory
Factory
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
American European
PDC
Opt2-M
FLUX REGULATION (FIELD CURRENT REGULATION)

469
U16
Const.
current
0
Constant current
Voltage control
External control
Ext digital FC
Ext wired FC
Const.
current
0
0
1
2
3
4
Set Flux reg mode = Ext wired FC

field control by TPD32-FC using external digital and analog I/Os.
(1) Recommended configuration for terminals
TPD32-EV / TPD32-EV-CU
IPA 66
Select output 1
[95] Field cur ref
21
1
[6] T current ref 1
IPA 70
Select input 1
IPA 139
Digital Input 3
IPA 138
Digital Input 2

33
32
28
27

IPA 147
Digital Output 3
IPA 146
Digital Output 2
IPA 137
Digital Input 1
[88] Wired FC EN
31
26
[80] Wired FC EN
IPA 145
Digital Output 1
TPD32-EV-FC
492
TPD32-EV
R/Z
A2.5.3 12-pulse configuration of TPD32-EV with connection via external I/Os between
TPD32-EV-CU and TPD32-EV-FC units
Figure A2.5.3: Block diagram of Field exciter control, connection via external I/Os
TPD32-EV-...-E
External Bridge
TPD32-EV-CU
Control Unit
SBI-OFS-32
R-TPD32
Optical fiber
2Q / 4Q
TPD32-EV-...-E
External Bridge
Cable :
cod. S7QAE3 (3m)
cod. S7QAQ8 (5m)
TPD32-EV-CU
Control Unit
SBI-OFM-32
TPD32-EV-FC
External Field
External I/O
R-TPD32
2Q / 4Q
R-TPD32
2Q / 4Q
Instruction manual
493
A2.6 Programmable alarms

CONFIGURATION
Prog alarms
SSC error
[9080]
Hold off time [ms]
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
Hold off time [ms]
9080
U16
min
max
Factory
500
80
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
PDC
Opt2-M
R/W
Factory
Alarm
SSC error
Alarm
SSC error
SSC error

494
N.
Activity
Disable drive
Ignore
-
Latch
Open
Hold off
Restart
OK relay
-
time [ms]
80
time [ms]
-
Disable drive
X
Quick stop
-
Warning
-
Normal stop
-
Standard
Curr lim stop

-
Functionality available starting from Firmware TPD32-EV-FC 10.25A (FC-200V) and

10.26A (FC-500V) .
Hold off time parameter.: It is needed to generate a SSC alarm if the drive does not receive
in the timeframe set a valid data thru the optical fiber.
The alarm does not cause reaction of the drive. A warning message can be output via
a digital output. When the drive is disabled, it will not restart until the failure has been
cancelled.
If the failure is no more active, the drive can be reset without stopping the motor.
TPD32-EV
A2.7 Parameter changes

This section specifies only the differences between the version TPD32-EV-FC parameters list and the standard
TPD32-EV version described in chapter 10.
Eliminated Menu:
Flux Regulation
Reg Parameters/Percent Values/Flux Regulation
Reg Parameters/Percent Values/Voltage Reg
Reg Parameters/Base Values/Flux Regulation
Reg Parameters/Base Values/Voltage Reg
Configuration/Prog Alarms/Field Loss
Configuration/Prog Alarms/Speed Fbk loss
Eliminated parameters:
Par 91 - Flux P
Par 92 - Flux I
Par 97 - Flux P base
Par 98 - Flux I base
Par 280 - Motor nom flux
Par 374 - Nom flux curr
Par 456 - Flux weak speed
Par 467 - Flux current max
Par 468 - Flux current min
Par 474 - FL restart time

Par 475 - FL Hold off time
Par 480 - SL Hold off time
Par 493 - Voltage P
Par 494 - Voltage I
Par 495 - Voltage P base
Par 496 - Voltage I base
Par 916 - Ifield cnst40
Par 917- Ifield cnst70
Par 918 - Ifield cnst90

Par 919 - Set flux/if
Par 921 - Out vlt level
Par 201 - 2B+E
Par 469 - Flux reg mode
Par 471 - FL Latch
Par 472 - FL Ok relay open
Par 473 - FL Activity
Par 477 - SL Ok relay open
Par 478 - SL Activity

Par 497 - Enable flux reg
Par 498 - Enable flux weak
Par 499 - Speed-0 f weak
Par 234 - Flux current
Par 351 - Flux current (A)
Par 500 - Flux reference
Par 452 - RL Search
Par 587 - E int
Renamed parameters / selections:

START UP \ MOTOR DATA
CONFIGURATION
Value
Parameter
No.
Format
Full field curr [A]
179
Float
min
max
Factory
0.1
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
PDC
Opt2-M
R/W
DRIVE STATUS
MONITOR \ MEASUREMENTS
CURRENT REGULAT
Value
Parameter
Field current [%]
No.
Format
199
I16
min
max
Factory
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
PDC
Opt2-M
I/O CONFIG \ ANALOG OUTPUTS \ ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ... 4

Value
Parameter
Select output 1...4
No.
Format
66...69
U16
min
max
Factory
96
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
PDC
Opt2-M
Field current
R/Z
16
Instruction manual
495
OPTIONS \ OPTION 1 \ PDC CONFIG \ PDC INPUTS

Value
Parameter
Pdc in 0...5
Field current
No.
Format
1472
...
1475
U16
min
max
Factory
65535
Unused
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
PDC
Opt2-M
R/Z
8391
Different factory default:

Value
Parameter
Enable spd reg
Speed fbk sel
Enable
Disable
Encoder 1
Encoder 2
Tacho
Armature
CD curr thr
CD factor P
No.
Format
242
I16
414
U16
838
839
Int16
Float
min
max
SPEED REGULAT
0
Factory
Disabled
Access via
RS485/
Opt2-A/
Keyp. BUS/
Term.
PDC
Opt2-M
R/W
1
0
R/Z
0
1
2
3
R/W
R/W
START UP \ Speed feedback

0
Armature
CURRENT REGULAT
0
0.001
200
100 /
DC Curr
P (P847)
100
0.3
In SSC Error menu, the parameter 888 replaces parameter 409 of standard version TPD32-EV:
CONFIGURATION \ Prog alarms \ SSC Error
Threshold
Hold off time [ms]
409
888
U16
U16
0
0
250
500
50
80
R/W
R/W
Eliminated selections from Select output 1...4 parameters:

I/O CONFIG \ ANALOG OUTPUTS \ ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ... 4
[27] Flux current

[35] Flux reference
[79] Out vlt level
[80] Flux current max
Eliminated selections from Select input 1...3 parameters:
I/O CONFIG \ ANALOG INPUTS \ ANALOG INPUT 1 ... 3

[26] Out vlt level
496
TPD32-EV
Eliminated selections from Digital Output 1...8 parameters:

I/O CONFIG \ DIGITAL OUTPUTS
[24] Field loss

[25] Speed fbk loss
Eliminated selections from Digital Inputs parameters:
I/O CONFIG \ DIGITAL INPUTS
[29] Field loss

[30] Enable flux reg
[31] Enable flux weak
Eliminated selections from Pdc in 0 ... 5 parameters:
OPTIONS \ OPTION 1 \ PDC CONFIG \ PDC INPUTS
[8648] Flux weak speed

[8692] Flux reference
[9113] Out vlt level
Eliminated selections from Pdc out 0 ... 5 parameters:
OPTIONS \ OPTION 1 \ PDC CONFIG \ PDC OUTPUTS

[9113] Out vlt level
Eliminated selections from Virt dig in 0 ... 15 parameters:
OPTIONS \ OPTION 1 \ PDC CONFIG \ VIRT DIG IN
[8689] Enable flux reg

[8691] Speed-0 f weak
Instruction manual
497
APPENDIX 3 - ACCESSORIES
A3.1 EAM Adapter Kit
EAM1579
EAM1580
498
TPD32-EV
EAM1581
EAM2617_1 (cod. S726171)
EAM2617_2 (cod. S726174)
45
)
4x
45
44.
44.
13(
13(
4x
45
45
44.
44.
30
13
M12 4x 50
5(
2
.4
100
(16
(16
0)
0)
44
100
x)
LE
25
HO
.4
M12 4x 50
44
6x
x)
13(
5(
2
LE
25
HO
30
62
R10
R2
62
30
13(4x
45
44.
EAM2617_3 (cod. S726173)
5(2x
)
13(
4
6x M12 x 50
)
(160
)
LE
44.4
100
25
45
44.
HO
15
R2
51
52
Instruction manual
499
Gefran worldwide
GEFRAN DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Philipp-Reis-Strae 9a
D-63500 Seligenstadt
Ph. +49 (0) 61828090
Fax +49 (0) 6182809222
[email protected]
GEFRAN BENELUX NV
ENA 23 Zone 3, nr. 3910
Lammerdries-Zuid 14A
B-2250 OLEN
Ph. +32 (0) 14248181
Fax +32 (0) 14248180
[email protected]
GEFRAN SIEI - ASIA

31 Ubi Road 1
#02-07, Aztech Building,
Singapore 408694
Ph. +65 6 8418300
Fax +65 6 7428300
[email protected]
SIEI AREG - GERMANY

Gottlieb-Daimler Strasse 17/3
D-74385 - Pleidelsheim
Ph. +49 (0) 7144 897360
Fax +49 (0) 7144 8973697
[email protected]
GEFRAN UK Ltd
Unit 7, Brook Business Centre
54a Cowley Mill Road, Uxbridge,
UB8 2FX
Ph. +44 (0) 8452 604555
Fax +44 (0) 8452 604556
[email protected]
GEFRAN INDIA
Survey No. 191/A/1,
Chinchwad Station Road,
Chinchwad,
Pune-411033, Maharashtra
Ph. +91 20 6614 6500
Fax +91 20 6614 6501
[email protected]
SENSORMATE AG
Steigweg 8,
CH-8355 Aadorf, Switzerland
Ph. +41(0)52-2421818
Fax +41(0)52-3661884
http://www.sensormate.ch
GEFRAN MIDDLE EAST ELEKTRIK VE

ELEKTRONIK San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti
Yesilkoy Mah. Ataturk
Cad. No: 12/1 B1 Blok K:12
D: 389 Bakirkoy /Istanbul
TURKIYE
Ph. +90212 465 91 21
Fax +90212 465 91 22
GEFRAN Inc.
8 Lowell Avenue
WINCHESTER - MA 01890
Toll Free 1-888-888-4474
Fax +1 (781) 7291468
[email protected]
GEFRAN FRANCE sa
4, rue Jean Desparmet - BP 8237
69355 LYON Cedex 08
Ph. +33 (0) 478770300
Fax +33 (0) 478770320
[email protected]
GEFRAN SIEI
Drives Technology Co., Ltd
No. 1285, Beihe Road, Jiading
District, Shanghai, China 201807
Ph. +86 21 69169898
Fax +86 21 69169333
[email protected]
GEFRAN BRASIL
ELETROELETRNICA
Avenida Dr. Altino Arantes,
377 Vila Clementino
04042-032 SO PAULO - SP
Ph. +55 (0) 1155851133
Fax +55 (0) 1132974012
[email protected]
GEFRAN S.p.A.
Via Sebina 74
25050 Provaglio dIseo (BS) ITALY
Ph. +39 030 98881
Fax +39 030 9839063
[email protected]
www.gefran.com
Drive & Motion Control Unit

Via Carducci 24
21040 Gerenzano [VA] ITALY
Ph. +39 02 967601
Fax +39 02 9682653
[email protected]
Technical Assistance :
[email protected]
Customer Service :
[email protected]
Ph. +39 02 96760500
Fax +39 02 96760278
Manuale TPD32-EV -EN

Rev. 0.5 - 30-9-16
1S4T2EN

1s4t2en - 30 9 16 - TPD32 Ev

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1s4t2en - 30 9 16 - TPD32 Ev

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1s4t2en - 30 9 16 - TPD32 Ev

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Industrial Application

Thank you for choosing this Gefran product.

1 - SAFETY PRECAUTIONS - PRECAUTIONS DE SECURIT........................................... 15

2 - DESCRIPTION, COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION ANDSPECIFICATIONS.................. 20

Functions and features (Overview) ...................................................................................................................................................... 23

2.2 UPON DELIVERY INSPECTION PROCEDURES.................................................................................. 24

2.2.1 Device setting..................................................................................................................................................................24

2.3.3 Output . ...........................................................................................................................................................29

Table 2.3.3.1: TPD32-EV Output currents............................................................................................................................................................. 29

Table 2.3.3.5: Armature circuit output voltages................................................................................................................................................... 33

Table 2.3.3.6: Field circuit output voltages.......................................................................................................................................................... 33

Field circuit TPD32-EV-FC version........................................................................................................................................................ 33

Table 2.3.3.7: Field circuit output voltages TPD32-EV-FC.................................................................................................................................... 33

2.3.4 Control section................................................................................................................................................................34

2.4 DIMENSION AND WEIGHTS.................................................................................................................. 36

Figure 2.4.17: TPD32-EV-500/520-2700-4B-E dimensions.................................................................................................................................. 53

2.5 WATT LOSS............................................................................................................................................ 56

2.6 MOTORS, ENCODER, TACHOMETER.................................................................................................. 58

Terminal Assignments/Cable Sections.................................................................................................................................................. 63

4.2 WIRING THE DRIVE............................................................................................................................... 64

4.4 REGULATION SECTION ....................................................................................................................... 69

4.5 RS485 SERIAL INTERFACE.................................................................................................................. 76

4.5.2 RS485 serial interface connector description.................................................................................................................77

4.6 INPUT/OUTPUT EXPANSION CARD TBO............................................................................................. 77

4.6.2 Fitting the option card......................................................................................................................................................79

4.7 DIGITAL ENCODER INTERFACE DEII................................................................................................... 80

4.7.2 DEII Terminal Assignment...............................................................................................................................................81

4.8 STANDARD CONNECTION DIAGRAMS............................................................................................... 82

4.9 CIRCUIT PROTECTION......................................................................................................................... 86

4.9.2 Fuses selection when the Overload function is activated................................................................................................92

4.9.3 AC input contactors.........................................................................................................................................................93

4.10 REACTORS / FILTERS......................................................................................................................... 94

4.10.2 Interference suppression filters.....................................................................................................................................99

4.10.3 Mains harmonic currents generated by converters.....................................................................................................104

4.11 ENGINEERING NOTES...................................................................................................................... 104

Potentials of the regulator section....................................................................................................................................................... 104

5 - CONVERTER OPERATION......................................................................................... 106

5.1.2 Moving inside a menu...................................................................................................................................................107

5.1.3 Displaying parameters...................................................................................................................................................108

5.1.5 Operating the drive via the Keypad............................................................................................................................... 111

5.2 MENU STRUCTURE............................................................................................................................ 116

5.3.5 Drive tuning...................................................................................................................................................................122

5.3.5.1 Self tuning of the current regulator ......................................................................................................................................... 122

5.3.6 Manual tuning of the regulators.....................................................................................................................................126

Using the Test generator..................................................................................................................................................................... 126

Manual tuning of field current regulator............................................................................................................................................... 128

Voltage regulator in the field converter................................................................................................................................................ 130

5.3.7 Others tuning ................................................................................................................................................................132

Figure 5.3.7.1: Curve convertion flux/current................................................................................................................................................... 132

Speed-up function............................................................................................................................................................................... 134

Setting of the speed zero logic............................................................................................................................................................ 134

6 - FUNCTION DESCRIPTION........................................................................................ 136

6.1 ENABLES.............................................................................................................................................. 138

6.1.1 Enable drive..................................................................................................................................................................139

6.2 BASIC START UP MENUS................................................................................................................... 143

6.3 MONITOR............................................................................................................................................. 147

6.4.2 Speed ref.......................................................................................................................................................................153

6.4.3 Torque current reference (T current ref)........................................................................................................................154

6.5 LIMITS................................................................................................................................................... 156